Test and Measurement

Division

Operating Manual

SIGNAL ANALYZER
FSIQ3
1119.5005.13

FSIQ7
1119.5005.17

FSIQ26
1119.6001.27

FSIQ40
1119.6001.40

Printed in the Federal

Republic of Germany

1119.5063.12-02- 1 1/00
FSIQ Tabbed Divider Overview

Tabbed Divider Overview

Contents

Data Sheet

Safety Instructions
Certificate of Quality
EU Certificate of Conformity
List of R&S Representatives

Manuals for Signal Analyzer FSIQ

Tabbed Divider

1 Chapter 1: Putting into Operation

2 Chapter 2: Getting Started

3 Chapter 3: Operation

4 Chapter 4: Functional Description

5 Chapter 5: Remote Control – Basics

6 Chapter 6: Remote Control – Commands

7 Chapter 7: Remote Control – Program Examples

8 Chapter 8: Maintenance and Hardware Interfaces

9 Chapter 9: Error Messages

10 Index

1119.5065.12 RE E-2
 Before putting the product into operation for
the first time, make sure to read the following

Safety Instructions

Rohde & Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer
its customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment required
for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards. Compliance with
these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system. This product has been
designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s
plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe
operation, observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions
regarding these safety instructions, Rohde & Schwarz will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is
designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in
any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used
for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's instructions. The
manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its operating manual and
within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the products requires technical skills and knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that the
products be used exclusively by skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the
required skills. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be
indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation.

Symbols and safety labels

Attention!
Observe Weight Danger of Warning!
Ground Electrostatic
operating indication for electric Hot PE terminal Ground
terminal sensitive
instructions units >18 kg shock surface
devices

Device fully
Supply Direct
Standby Alternating Direct/alternating protected by
voltage current
indication current (AC) current (DC/AC) double/reinforced
ON/OFF (DC)
insulation

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 1
 Safety Instructions

Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation. In these safety
instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by Rohde & Schwarz,
including instruments, systems and all accessories.

Tags and their meaning

DANGER This tag indicates a safety hazard with a high potential of risk for the
user that can result in death or serious injuries.
WARNING This tag indicates a safety hazard with a medium potential of risk for the
user that can result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION This tag indicates a safety hazard with a low potential of risk for the user
that can result in slight or minor injuries.
ATTENTION This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage
to the product.
NOTE This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention
to operating the product but which does not lead to damage.
These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist. It is therefore
essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the
associated documentation and the associated product. The use of tags in connection with unassociated
products or unassociated documentation can result in misinterpretations and thus contribute to personal
injury or material damage.

Basic safety instructions

1. The product may be operated only under product must be disconnected from the
the operating conditions and in the supply network. Any adjustments,
positions specified by the manufacturer. Its replacements of parts, maintenance or
ventilation must not be obstructed during repair must be carried out only by technical
operation. Unless otherwise specified, the personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz.
following requirements apply to Only original parts may be used for
Rohde & Schwarz products: replacing parts relevant to safety (e.g.
prescribed operating position is always with power switches, power transformers,
the housing floor facing down, IP protection fuses). A safety test must always be
2X, pollution severity 2, overvoltage performed after parts relevant to safety
category 2, use only in enclosed spaces, have been replaced (visual inspection, PE
max. operation altitude max. 2000 m. conductor test, insulation resistance
Unless specified otherwise in the data measurement, leakage current
sheet, a tolerance of ±10% shall apply to measurement, functional test).
the nominal voltage and of ±5% to the
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods,
nominal frequency.
the use of substances that induce an
2. Applicable local or national safety allergic reaction (allergens, e.g. nickel)
regulations and rules for the prevention of such as aluminum cannot be generally
accidents must be observed in all work excluded. If you develop an allergic
performed. The product may be opened reaction (such as a skin rash, frequent
only by authorized, specially trained sneezing, red eyes or respiratory
personnel. Prior to performing any work on difficulties), consult a physician immediately
the product or opening the product, the to determine the cause.

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 2
 Safety Instructions

4. If products/components are mechanically 10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth

and/or thermically processed in a manner connection either in the feed line or in the
that goes beyond their intended use, product itself is not permitted. Doing so can
hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust result in the danger of an electric shock
such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be from the product. If extension cords or
released. For this reason, the product may connector strips are implemented, they
only be disassembled, e.g. for disposal must be checked on a regular basis to
purposes, by specially trained personnel. ensure that they are safe to use.
Improper disassembly may be hazardous to
11. If the product has no power switch for
your health. National waste disposal
disconnection from the AC supply, the plug
regulations must be observed.
of the connecting cable is regarded as the
5. If handling the product yields hazardous disconnecting device. In such cases, it
substances or fuels that must be disposed must be ensured that the power plug is
of in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine easily reachable and accessible at all times
oils that must be replenished regularly, the (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m).
safety instructions of the manufacturer of Functional or electronic switches are not
the hazardous substances or fuels and the suitable for providing disconnection from
applicable regional waste disposal the AC supply. If products without power
regulations must be observed. Also switches are integrated in racks or systems,
observe the relevant safety instructions in a disconnecting device must be provided at
the system level.
the product documentation.
12. Never use the product if the power cable is
6. Depending on the function, certain products
damaged. By taking appropriate safety
such as RF radio equipment can produce
an elevated level of electromagnetic measures and carefully laying the power
cable, ensure that the cable cannot be
radiation. Considering that unborn life
damaged and that no one can be hurt by
requires increased protection, pregnant
women should be protected by appropriate e.g. tripping over the cable or suffering an
electric shock.
measures. Persons with pacemakers may
also be endangered by electromagnetic 13. The product may be operated only from
radiation. The employer is required to TN/TT supply networks fused with max.
assess workplaces where there is a special 16 A.
risk of exposure to radiation and, if
necessary, take measures to avert the 14. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are
danger. dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all
the way into the socket. Otherwise this can
7. Operating the products requires special result in sparks, fire and/or injuries.
training and intense concentration. Make
certain that persons who use the products 15. Do not overload any sockets, extension
are physically, mentally and emotionally fit cords or connector strips; doing so can
enough to handle operating the products; cause fire or electric shocks.
otherwise injuries or material damage may 16. For measurements in circuits with voltages
occur. It is the responsibility of the Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g.
employer to select suitable personnel for appropriate measuring equipment, fusing,
operating the products. current limiting, electrical separation,
8. Prior to switching on the product, it must be insulation) should be taken to avoid any
ensured that the nominal voltage setting on hazards.
the product matches the nominal voltage of 17. Ensure that the connections with
the AC supply network. If a different voltage information technology equipment comply
is to be set, the power fuse of the product with IEC 950/EN 60950.
may have to be changed accordingly.
18. Never remove the cover or part of the
9. In the case of products of safety class I with housing while you are operating the
movable power cord and connector, product. This will expose circuits and
operation is permitted only on sockets with components and can lead to injuries, fire or
earthing contact and protective earth damage to the product.
connection.

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 3
 Safety Instructions

19. If a product is to be permanently installed, matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
the connection between the PE terminal on spare parts list). Batteries and storage
site and the product's PE conductor must batteries are hazardous waste. Dispose of
be made first before any other connection them only in specially marked containers.
is made. The product may be installed and Observe local regulations regarding waste
connected only by a skilled electrician. disposal. Do not short-circuit batteries or
storage batteries.
20. For permanently installed equipment
without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or 28. Please be aware that in the event of a fire,
similar protective devices, the supply circuit toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that
must be fused in such a way that suitable may be hazardous to your health may
protection is provided for users and escape from the product.
products.
29. Please be aware of the weight of the
21. Do not insert any objects into the openings product. Be careful when moving it;
in the housing that are not designed for this otherwise you may injure your back or other
purpose. Never pour any liquids onto or into parts of your body.
the housing. This can cause short circuits
30. Do not place the product on surfaces,
inside the product and/or electric shocks,
vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons
fire or injuries.
of weight or stability are unsuitable for this
22. Use suitable overvoltage protection to purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's
ensure that no overvoltage (such as that installation instructions when installing the
caused by a thunderstorm) can reach the product and fastening it to objects or
product. Otherwise the operating personnel structures (e.g. walls and shelves).
will be endangered by electric shocks.
31. Handles on the products are designed
23. Rohde & Schwarz products are not exclusively for personnel to hold or carry
protected against penetration of water, the product. It is therefore not permissible
unless otherwise specified (see also safety to use handles for fastening the product to
instruction 1.). If this is not taken into or on means of transport such as cranes,
account, there exists the danger of electric fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is
shock or damage to the product, which can responsible for securely fastening the
also lead to personal injury. products to or on the means of transport
24. Never use the product under conditions in and for observing the safety regulations of
which condensation has formed or can form the manufacturer of the means of transport.
in or on the product, e.g. if the product was Noncompliance can result in personal injury
moved from a cold to a warm environment. or material damage.
25. Do not close any slots or openings on the 32. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the
product, since they are necessary for sole responsibility of the driver to drive the
ventilation and prevent the product from vehicle safely. Adequately secure the
overheating. Do not place the product on product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or
soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or other damage in the event of an accident.
inside a closed housing, unless this is well Never use the product in a moving vehicle if
ventilated. doing so could distract the driver of the
vehicle. The driver is always responsible for
26. Do not place the product on heat-
the safety of the vehicle; the manufacturer
generating devices such as radiators or fan
assumes no responsibility for accidents or
heaters. The temperature of the
collisions.
environment must not exceed the maximum
temperature specified in the data sheet. 33. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is
integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product,
27. Batteries and storage batteries must not be
do not use any other settings or functions
exposed to high temperatures or fire. Keep
than those described in the documentation.
batteries and storage batteries away from
Otherwise this may be hazardous to your
children. If batteries or storage batteries are
health, since the laser beam can cause
improperly replaced, this can cause an
irreversible damage to your eyes. Never try
explosion (warning: lithium cells). Replace
to take such products apart, and never look
the battery or storage battery only with the
into the laser beam.

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 4
 Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de
la primera puesta en funcionamiento las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad

Informaciones de seguridad

Es el principio de Rohde & Schwarz de tener a sus productos siempre al día con los estandards de
seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los
equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de seguridad vigentes.
Nuestra sección de gestión de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. Este producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el comprobante de conformidad
adjunto según las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los
estandards técnicos de seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento
libre de peligros, deberá el usuario atenerse a todas las informaciones, informaciones de seguridad y
notas de alerta. Rohde&Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas
referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la indústria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de
ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona/cosa pueda ser dañada. El uso del
producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante
queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de
consecuencias a causa del maluso del producto.
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las
instrucciones del correspondiente manual del uso y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido (ver
hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso de los productos hace
necesarios conocimientos profundos y el conocimiento del idioma inglés. Por eso se deberá tener en
cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso de los productos a personas péritas o debidamente
minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de
seguridad para el uso de productos de R&S, encontrará la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente.

Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad

¡Cuidado!
Informaciones
Ver manual Elementos de
para Peligro de ¡Advertencia! Conexión a Conexión
de Conexión construción
maquinaria golpe de Superficie conductor a masa
instrucciones a tierra con peligro de
con uns peso corriente caliente protector conductora
del uso carga
de > 18kg
electroestática

El aparato está
Corriente Corriente protegido en su
potencia EN Indicación Corriente
continua continua/alterna totalidad por un
MARCHA/PARADA Stand-by alterna AC
DC DC/AC aislamiento de
doble refuerzo

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 1
 Informaciones de seguridad

Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda
clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se
tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán
ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en otro
capítulo de esta documentación y que también son obligatorias de seguir. En las informaciones de
seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por Rohde&Schwarz bajo la
denominación de „producto“, entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así como toda clase de
accesorios.

Palabras de señal y su significado

PELIGRO Indica un punto de peligro con gran potencial de riesgo para el
ususario.Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves
heridas.
ADVERTENCIA Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo mediano para el
usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves
heridas .
ATENCIÓN Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo pequeño para el
usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta heridas leves o
pequeñas
CUIDADO Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia
dañarlo.
INFORMACIÓN Indica una situación en la que deberían seguirse las instrucciones en el
uso del producto, pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un
daño del mismo.

Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el ámbito de la
comunidad económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición. Por eso se
debera tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en
combinación con la correspondiente documentación y solamente en combinación con el producto
correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en combinación con productos o
documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a malinterpretaciones y tener por
consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.

Informaciones de seguridad elementales

1. El producto solamente debe ser utilizado 2. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en
según lo indicado por el fabricante referente cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de
a la situación y posición de funcionamiento trabajo y de prevención de accidentes. El
sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se producto solamente debe de ser abierto por
convino de otra manera, es para los personal périto autorizado. Antes de efectuar
productos R&S válido lo que sigue: trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deberá este
como posición de funcionamiento se define ser desconectado de la corriente. El ajuste,
principialmente la posición con el suelo de la el cambio de partes, la manutención y la
caja para abajo , modo de protección IP 2X, reparación deberán ser solamente
grado de suciedad 2, categoría de efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por
sobrecarga eléctrica 2, utilizar solamente en R&S. Si se reponen partes con importancia
estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m para los aspectos de seguridad (por ejemplo
sobre el nivel del mar. el enchufe, los transformadores o los
A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la fusibles), solamente podrán ser sustituidos
hoja de datos, se aplicará una tolerancia de por partes originales. Despues de cada
±10% sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5% recambio de partes elementales para la
sobre la frecuencia nominal. seguridad deberá ser efectuado un control de

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 2
 Informaciones de seguridad

seguridad (control a primera vista, control de peligro a causa de la radiación

conductor protector, medición de resistencia electromagnética. El empresario está
de aislamiento, medición de medición de la comprometido a valorar y señalar areas de
corriente conductora, control de trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de
funcionamiento). exposición a radiaciones aumentadas de
3. Como en todo producto de fabricación riesgo aumentado para evitar riesgos.
industrial no puede ser excluido en general 7. La utilización de los productos requiere
de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos instrucciones especiales y una alta
que puedan generar alergias, los llamados concentración en el manejo. Debe de
elementos alergénicos (por ejemplo el ponerse por seguro de que las personas que
níquel). Si se producieran en el trato con manejen los productos estén a la altura de
productos R&S reacciones alérgicas, como los requerimientos necesarios referente a
por ejemplo urticaria, estornudos frecuentes, sus aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y
irritación de la conjuntiva o dificultades al emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
respirar, se deberá consultar inmediatamente pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos.
a un médico para averigurar los motivos de El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de
estas reacciones. seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el
4. Si productos / elementos de construcción son manejo de los productos.
tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de 8. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto
forma mecánica o térmica, pueden generarse se deberá tener por seguro de que la tensión
elementos peligrosos (polvos de sustancia preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a
de metales pesados como por ejemplo la del la red de distribución. Si es necesario
plomo, berilio, níquel). La partición elemental cambiar la preselección de la tensión
del producto, como por ejemplo sucede en el también se deberán en caso dabo cambiar
tratamiento de materias residuales, debe de los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto.
ser efectuada solamente por personal
especializado para estos tratamientos. La 9. Productos de la clase de seguridad I con
partición elemental efectuada alimentación móvil y enchufe individual de
inadecuadamente puede generar daños para producto solamente deberán ser conectados
la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente
directivas nacionales referentes al de contacto de seguridad y con conductor
tratamiento de materias residuales. protector conectado.

5. En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de 10. Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupción
peligro o combustibles en la aplicación del intencionada del conductor protector, tanto
producto que debieran de ser transferidos a en la toma de corriente como en el mismo
un tratamiento de materias residuales, como producto ya que puede tener como
por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben consecuencia el peligro de golpe de corriente
ser repuestos en periodos definidos, o por el producto. Si se utilizaran cables o
aceites para motores, deberan ser tenidas en enchufes de extensión se deberá poner al
cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del seguro, que es controlado su estado técnico
fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o de seguridad.
combustibles y las regulaciones regionales 11. Si el producto no está equipado con un
para el tratamiento de materias residuales. interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se
Cuiden también de tener en cuenta en caso deberá considerar el enchufe del cable de
dado las prescripciones de seguridad distribución como interruptor. En estos casos
especiales en la descripción del producto. deberá asegurar de que el enchufe sea de
6. Ciertos productos, como por ejemplo las fácil acceso y nabejo (medida del cable de
instalaciones de radiación HF, pueden a distribución aproximadamente 2 m). Los
causa de su función natural, emitir una interruptores de función o electrónicos no
radiación electromagnética aumentada. En son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si
vista a la protección de la vida en desarrollo los productos sin interruptor están integrados
deberían ser protegidas personas en construciones o instalaciones, se deberá
embarazadas debidamente. También las instalar el interruptor al nivel de la
personas con un bypass pueden correr instalación.

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 3
 Informaciones de seguridad

12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el 20. En caso de que los productos que son
cable eléctrico. Asegure a través de las instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin
medidas de protección y de instalación protector implementado, autointerruptor o
adecuadas de que el cable de eléctrico no similares objetos de protección, deberá la
pueda ser dañado o de que nadie pueda ser toma de corriente estar protegida de manera
dañado por él, por ejemplo al tropezar o por que los productos o los usuarios estén
un golpe de corriente. suficientemente protegidos.
13. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento 21. Por favor, no introduzca ningún objeto que
en redes de distribución TN/TT aseguradas no esté destinado a ello en los orificios de la
con fusibles de como máximo 16 A. caja del aparato. No vierta nunca ninguna
clase de líquidos sobre o en la caja. Esto
14. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de
puede producir corto circuitos en el producto
corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca
y/o puede causar golpes de corriente, fuego
el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la
o heridas.
toma de corriente. Si no tiene en
consideración estas indicaciones se arriesga 22. Asegúrese con la protección adecuada de
a que se originen chispas, fuego y/o heridas. que no pueda originarse en el producto una
sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una
15. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los
tormenta. Si no se verá el personal que lo
cables de extensión o los enchufes de
utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de
extensión ya que esto pudiera causar fuego
corriente.
o golpes de corriente.
23. Los productos R&S no están protegidos
16. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente
contra el agua si no es que exista otra
con una tensión de entrada de Ueff > 30 V se
indicación, ver también punto 1. Si no se
deberá tomar las precauciones debidas para
tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de
impedir cualquier peligro (por ejemplo
golpe de corriente o de daños en el producto
medios de medición adecuados, seguros,
lo cual también puede llevar al peligro de
limitación de tensión, corte protector,
personas.
aislamiento etc.).
24. No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las
17. En caso de conexión con aparatos de la
que pueda producirse y se hayan producido
técnica informática se deberá tener en
líquidos de condensación en o dentro del
cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de
producto como por ejemplo cuando se
la EC950/EN60950.
desplaza el producto de un lugar frío a un
18. Nunca abra la tapa o parte de ella si el lugar caliente.
producto está en funcionamiento. Esto pone
25. Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio
a descubierto los cables y componentes
del producto, ya que estas son necesarias
eléctricos y puede causar heridas, fuego o
para la ventilación e impiden que el producto
daños en el producto.
se caliente demasiado. No pongan el
19. Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un producto encima de materiales blandos como
lugar, se deberá primero conectar el por ejemplo sofás o alfombras o dentro de
conductor protector fijo con el conductor una caja cerrada, si esta no está
protector del aparato antes de hacer suficientemente ventilada.
cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y la
26. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que
conexión deberán ser efecutadas por un
produzcan calor, como por ejemplo
electricista especializado.
radiadores o calentadores. La temperatura
ambiental no debe superar la temperatura
máxima especificada en la hoja de datos.

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 4
 Informaciones de seguridad

27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser 31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven
expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego. solamente de ayuda para el manejo que
Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del solamente está previsto para personas. Por
alcance de los niños. Si las baterías o los eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la
acumuladores no son cambiados con la sujecion en o sobre medios de transporte
debida atención existirá peligro de explosión como por ejemplo grúas, carretillas
(atención celulas de Litio). Cambiar las elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. El
baterías o los acumuladores solamente por usuario es responsable de que los productos
los del tipo R&S correspondiente (ver lista de sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios
piezas de recambio). Baterías y de transporte y de que las prescripciones de
acumuladores son deshechos problemáticos. seguridad del fabricante de los medios de
Por favor tirenlos en los recipientes transporte sean tenidas en cuenta. En caso
especiales para este fín. Por favor tengan en de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden
cuenta las prescripciones nacionales de cada causarse daños en personas y objetos.
país referente al tratamiento de deshechos.
32. Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un
Nunca sometan las baterías o acumuladores
vehículo, queda en la responsabilidad
a un corto circuito.
absoluta del conductor que conducir el
28. Tengan en consideración de que en caso de vehículo de manera segura. Asegure el
un incendio pueden escaparse gases tóxicos producto dentro del vehículo debidamente
del producto, que pueden causar daños a la para evitar en caso de un accidente las
salud. lesiones u otra clase de daños. No utilice
nunca el producto dentro de un vehículo en
29. Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de
movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al
un incendio pueden desprenderse del
conductor. Siempre queda en la
producto agentes venenosos (gases, líquidos
responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la
etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud.
seguridad del vehículo y el fabricante no
30. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, asumirá ninguna clase de responsabilidad
vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus por accidentes o colisiones.
características de peso o de estabilidad no
33. Dado el caso de que esté integrado un
sean aptas para él. Siga siempre las
producto de laser en un producto R&S (por
instrucciones de instalación del fabricante
ejemplo CD/DVD-ROM) no utilice otras
cuando instale y asegure el producto en
instalaciones o funciones que las descritas
objetos o estructuras (por ejemplo paredes y
en la documentación. De otra manera pondrá
estantes).
en peligro su salud, ya que el rayo laser
puede dañar irreversiblemente sus ojos.
Nunca trate de descomponer estos
productos. Nunca mire dentro del rayo laser.

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 5
 Certified Quality System

DIN EN ISO 9001 : 2000

DIN EN 9100 : 2003
DIN EN ISO 14001 : 1996
DQS REG. NO 001954 QM/ST UM

QUALITÄTSZERTIFIKAT CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY CERTIFICAT DE QUALITÉ

Sehr geehrter Kunde, Dear Customer, Cher Client,

Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines you have decided to buy a Rohde & vous avez choisi d‘acheter un produit
Rohde & Schwarz-Produktes entschie- Schwarz product. You are thus as- Rohde & Schwarz. Vous disposez
den. Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach sured of receiving a product that is donc d‘un produit fabriqué d‘après
modernsten Fertigungsmethoden manufactured using the most modern les méthodes les plus avancées. Le
hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach methods available. This product was développement, la fabrication et les
den Regeln unseres Management- developed, manufactured and tested tests respectent nos normes de ges-
systems entwickelt, gefertigt und in compliance with our quality manage- tion qualité.
geprüft. ment system standards. Le système de gestion qualité de
Das Rohde & Schwarz Management- The Rohde & Schwarz quality manage- Rohde & Schwarz a été homologué
system ist zertifiziert nach: ment system is certified according to: conformément aux normes:

DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN ISO 9001:2000

DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN 9100:2003
DIN EN ISO 14001:1996 DIN EN ISO 14001:1996 DIN EN ISO 14001:1996
 EC Certificate of Conformity

Certificate No.: 98091

This is to certify that:

Equipment type Stock No. Designation

FSIQ3 1119.5005.03/.13 Signal Analyzer

FSIQ7 1119.5005.07/.17
FSIQ26 1119.6001.26/.27
FSIQ40 1119.6001.40

FSE-B13 1119.6499.02 Option: 1 dB Input Attenuator

FSIQB70 1119.6747.02 Option: DSP and IQ Memory Extension

complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States
- relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits
(73/23/EEC revised by 93/68/EEC)
- relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC)
Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:
EN61010-1 : 1993 + A2 : 1995
EN50081-1 : 1992
EN50082-2 : 1995
Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1998

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG

Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München

Munich, 2000-02-11 Central Quality Management FS-QZ / Becker

1119.5005.13 CE E-1
 Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our
Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone
support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the
operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment.

Up-to-date information and upgrades

To keep your Rohde & Schwarz equipment always up-to-date,
please subscribe to our electronic newsletter at
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/www/response.nsf/newsletterpreselection
or request the desired information and upgrades via email from your Customer Support
Center (addresses see below).

Feedback
We want to know if we are meeting your support needs. If you have any comments
please email us and let us know [email protected].

USA & Canada Monday to Friday (except US public holidays)

8:00 AM – 8:00 PM Eastern Standard Time (EST)
Tel. from USA 888-test-rsa (888-837-8772) (opt 2)
From outside USA +1 410 910 7800 (opt 2)
Fax +1 410 910 7801
E-mail [email protected]

East Asia Monday to Friday (except Singaporean public holidays)

8:30 AM – 6:00 PM Singapore Time (SGT)
Tel. +65 6 513 0488
Fax +65 6 846 1090
E-mail [email protected]

Rest of the World Monday to Friday (except German public holidays)

08:00 – 17:00 Central European Time (CET)
Tel. from Europe +49 (0) 180 512 42 42
From outside Europe +49 89 4129 13776
Fax +49 (0) 89 41 29 637 78
E-mail [email protected]

1007.8684.14-04.00
 Adressen/Addresses

FIRMENSITZ/HEADQUARTERS (Tel) Phone Austria Rohde & Schwarz-Österreich Ges.m.b.H. (Tel) +43 (1) 602 61 41-0
(Fax) Fax Am Europlatz 3 (Fax) +43 (1) 602 61 41-14
E-mail Gebäude B [email protected]
1120 Wien
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG (Tel) +49 (89) 41 29-0
Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München (Fax) +49 89 4129-121 64 Azerbaijan Rohde & Schwarz Azerbaijan (Tel) +994 (12) 93 31 38
Postfach 80 14 69 · D-81614 München [email protected] Liaison Office Baku (Fax) +994 (12) 93 03 14
ISR Plaza, 5th floor [email protected]
WERKE/PLANTS 340 Nizami Str. schwarz.com
370000 Baku
Rohde & Schwarz Messgerätebau GmbH (Tel) +49 (8331) 108-0
Riedbachstraße 58 · D-87700 Memmingen (Fax) +49 (8331) 108-11 24 Bangladesh BIL Consortium Ltd. (Tel) +880 (2) 881 06 53
Postfach 1652 · D-87686 Memmingen [email protected] Corporate Office (Fax) +880 (2) 882 82 91
House-33, Road-4, Block-F
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG (Tel) +49 (9923) 857-0 Banani, Dhaka-1213
Werk Teisnach (Fax) +49 (9923) 857-11 74
Kaikenrieder Straße 27 · D-94244 Teisnach [email protected] Barbados siehe / see Mexico
Postfach 1149 · D-94240 Teisnach
Belarus siehe/see Ukraine
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG (Tel) +49 (2203) 49-0
Dienstleistungszentrum Köln (Fax) +49 (2203) 49 51-229 Belgium Rohde & Schwarz Belgium N.V. (Tel) +32 (2) 721 50 02
Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18 · D-51147 Köln info.rsdc@rohde- Excelsiorlaan 31 Bus 1 (Fax) +32 (2) 725 09 36
Postfach 98 02 60 · D-51130 Köln schwarz.com·service.rsdc@rohde- 1930 Zaventem [email protected]
schwarz.com
Belize siehe / see Mexico
TOCHTERUNTERNEHMEN/SUBSIDIARIES
Bermuda siehe/see Mexico
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH (Tel) +49 (89) 41 29-137 74
Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München (Fax) +49 (89) 41 29-137 77 Bosnia- siehe/see Slovenia
Postfach 80 14 69 · D-81614 München customersupport@rohde- Herzegovina
schwarz.com
Brazil Rohde & Schwarz Do Brasil Ltda. (Tel) +55 (11) 56 44 86 11
Rohde & Schwarz International GmbH (Tel) +49 (89) 41 29-129 84 Av. Alfredo Egidio de Souza Aranha n°
(general)·+55
177, (11) 56 44 86 25 (sales)
Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München (Fax) +49 (89) 41 29-120 50 1° andar - Santo Amaro (Fax) +55 (11) 56 44 86 36
Postfach 80 14 60 · D-81614 München [email protected] 04726-170 Sao Paulo - SP [email protected]
schwarz.com
Rohde & Schwarz Engineering and Sales (Tel) +49 (89) 41 29-137 11
GmbH (Fax) +49 (89) 41 29-137 23 Brunei George Keen Lee Equipment Pte Ltd. (Tel) +656 276 06 26
Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München [email protected] #11-01 BP Tower (Fax) +656 276 06 29
Postfach 80 14 29 · D-81614 München 396 Alexandra Road [email protected]
Singapore 119954
R&S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH (Tel) +49 (5042) 998-0
Fritz-Hahne-Str. 7 · D-31848 Bad Münder (Fax) +49 (5042) 998-105 Bulgaria Rohde & Schwarz (Tel) +359 (2) 96 343 34
Postfach 2062 · D-31844 Bad Münder [email protected] Representation Office Bulgaria (Fax) +359 (2) 963 21 97
39, Fridtjof Nansen Blvd. [email protected]
Rohde & Schwarz FTK GmbH (Tel) +49 (30) 658 91-122 1000 Sofia
Wendenschlossstraße 168, Haus 28 (Fax) +49 (30) 655 50-221
D-12557 Berlin [email protected] Canada Rohde & Schwarz Canada Inc. (Tel) +1 (613) 592 80 00
555 March Rd. (Fax) +1 (613) 592 80 09
Rohde & Schwarz SIT GmbH (Tel) +49 (30) 658 84-0 Kanata, Ontario K2K 2M5 [email protected]
Agastraße 3 (Fax) +49 (30) 658 84-183
D-12489 Berlin [email protected] Chile Dymeq Ltda. (Tel) +56 (2) 339 20 00
Av. Larrain 6666 (Fax) +56 (2) 339 20 10
R&S Systems GmbH (Tel) +49 (2203) 49-5 23 25 Santiago [email protected]
Graf-Zeppelin-Straße 18 D-51147 Köln (Fax) +49 (2203) 49-5 23 36
Postfach 98 02 60 D-51130 Köln [email protected] China Rohde & Schwarz China Ltd. (Tel) +86 (10) 64 31 28 28
Representative Office Beijing (Fax) +86 (10) 64 37 98 88
ADRESSEN WELTWEIT/ADDRESSES WORLDWIDE 6F, Parkview Center [email protected]
2 Jiangtai Road schwarz.com
Albania siehe/see Austria Chao Yang District
Beijing 100016
Algeria Rohde & Schwarz (Tel) +213 (21) 48 20 18
Bureau d'Alger (Fax) +213 (21) 69 46 08 Rohde & Schwarz China Ltd. (Tel) +86 (21) 63 75 00 18
5B Place de Laperrine Representative Office Shanghai (Fax) +86 (21) 63 75 91 70
16035 Hydra-Alger Room 807-809, Central Plaza [email protected]
227 Huangpi North Road
Antilles (Neth.) siehe / see Mexico Shanghai 200003

Argentina Precision Electronica S.R.L. (Tel) +541 (14) 331 10 67 Rohde & Schwarz China Ltd. (Tel) +86 (20) 87 55 47 58
Av. Pde Julio A. Roca 710 - 6° Piso (Fax) +541 (14) 334 51 11 Representative Office Guangzhou (Fax) +86 (20) 87 55 47 59
1067 Buenos Aires [email protected] Room 2903, Metro Plaza [email protected]
183 Tian He North Road schwarz.com
Australia Rohde & Schwarz (Australia) Pty. Ltd. (Tel) +61 (2) 88 45 41 00 Guangzhou 510075
Sales Support (Fax) +61 (2) 96 38 39 88
Unit 6 [email protected]
2-8 South Street
Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116
 Adressen/Addresses

China Rohde & Schwarz China Ltd. (Tel) +86 (28) 86 52 76 06 Germany Zweigniederlassung Büro Bonn (Tel) +49 (228) 918 90-0
Representative Office Chengdu (Fax) +86 (28) 86 52 76 10 Josef-Wirmer-Straße 1-3 · D-53123 Bonn (Fax) +49 (228) 25 50 87
Unit G, 28/F, First City Plaza [email protected] Postfach 140264 · D-53057 Bonn [email protected]
308 Shuncheng Avenue schwarz.com
Chengdu 610017 Zweigniederlassung Nord, Geschäftsstelle (Tel) +49 (40) 38 61 83 - 00
Hamburg (Fax) +49 (40) 38 61 83 - 20
Rohde & Schwarz China Ltd. (Tel) +86 (29) 87 41 53 77 Vierenkamp 6 D-22423 Hamburg [email protected]
Representative Office Xian (Fax) +86 (29) 87 20 65 00
Room 603, Jin Xin International [email protected] Zweigniederlassung Mitte, Geschäftsstelle (Tel) +49 (2203) 807-0
No. 99 Heping Road Köln (Fax) +49 (2203) 807-650
Xian 710001 Niederkasseler Straße 33 · D-51147 Köln [email protected]
Postfach 900 149 · D-51111 Köln
Rohde & Schwarz China Ltd. (Tel) +86 (755) 82 03 11 98
Representative Office Shenzhen (Fax) +86 (755) 82 03 30 70 Zweigniederlassung Süd, Geschäftsstelle (Tel) +49 (89) 41 86 95-0
Room 1901, Central Business [email protected] München (Fax) +49 (89) 40 47 64
No. 88 Fuhua Yilu Mühldorfstraße 15 · D-81671 München [email protected]
Futian District Postfach 80 14 69 · D-81614 München
Shenzhen 518026
Zweigniederlassung Süd, Geschäftsstelle (Tel) +49 (911) 642 03-0
Costa Rica siehe / see Mexico Nürnberg (Fax) +49 (911) 642 03-33
Donaustraße 36 [email protected]
Croatia siehe/see Slovenia D-90451 Nürnberg

Cuba siehe / see Mexico Zweigniederlassung Mitte, Geschäftsstelle (Tel) +49 (6102) 20 07-0
Neu-Isenburg (Fax) +49 (6102) 20 07 12
Cyprus Hinis Telecast Ltd. (Tel) +357 (24) 42 51 78 Siemensstraße 20 D-63263 Neu-Isenburg [email protected]
Agiou Thoma 18 (Fax) +357 (24) 42 46 21 Postfach 16 51 D-63236 Neu-Isenburg
Kiti [email protected]
Larnaca 7550 Ghana Kop Engineering Ltd. (Tel) +233 (21) 77 89 13
P.O. Box 11012 (Fax) +233 (21) 701 06 20
Czech Republic Rohde & Schwarz Praha, s.r.o. (Tel) +420 (2) 24 31 12 32 3rd Floor Akai House, Osu [email protected]
Hadovka Office Park (Fax) +420 (2) 24 31 70 43 Accra North
Evropská 2590/33c [email protected]
16000 Praha 6 Greece Mercury S.A. (Tel) +302 (10) 722 92 13
6, Loukianou Str. (Fax) +302 (10) 721 51 98
Denmark Rohde & Schwarz Danmark A/S (Tel) +45 (43) 43 66 99 10675 Athens [email protected]
Ejby Industrivej 40 (Fax) +45 (43) 43 77 44
2600 Glostrup [email protected] Guatemala siehe/see Mexico

Egypt U.A.S. Universal Advanced Systems (Tel) +20 (2) 455 67 44 Guiana siehe / see Mexico
31 Manshiet El-Bakry Street (Fax) +20 (2) 256 17 40
Heliopolis [email protected] Haiti siehe / see Mexico
11341 Cairo
Honduras siehe/see Mexico
El Salvador siehe/see Mexico
Hong Kong Electronic Scientific Engineering (Tel) +852 (25) 07 03 33
9/F North Somerset House (Fax) +852 (25) 07 09 25
Estonia Rohde & Schwarz Danmark A/S (Tel) +372 (6) 14 31 23 Taikoo Place [email protected]
Estonian Branch Office (Fax) +372 (6) 14 31 21 979 King's Road, Quarry Bay
Narva mnt. 13 [email protected] Hong Kong
10151 Tallinn
Hungary Rohde & Schwarz (Tel) +36 (1) 412 44 60
Finland Rohde & Schwarz Finland Oy (Tel) +358 (207) 60 04 00 Budapesti Iroda (Fax) +36 (1) 412 44 61
Taivaltie 5 (Fax) +358 (207) 60 04 17 Váci út 169 [email protected]
01610 Vantaa [email protected] 1138 Budapest schwarz.com

France Rohde & Schwarz France (Tel) +33 (0) 141 36 10 00 Iceland siehe/see Denmark
Immeuble "Le Newton" (Fax) +33 (0) 141 36 11 11
9-11, rue Jeanne Braconnier [email protected] India Rohde & Schwarz India Pvt. Ltd. (Tel) +91 (11) 26 32 63 81
92366 Meudon La Forêt Cédex 244, Okhla Industrial Estate (Fax) +91 (11) 26 32 63 73
Phase - III [email protected]
Niederlassung/Subsidiary Rennes (Tel) +33 (2) 99 51 97 00 New Delhi 110 020
37 Rue du Bignon (Fax) +33 (2) 99 51 98 77
Bâtiment A Rohde & Schwarz India Pvt. Ltd. (Tel) +91 (80) 535 23 62
35510 Cesson Sévigné Bangalore Office (Fax) +91 (80) 535 03 61
No. 24, Service Road, Domlur [email protected]
Germany Zweigniederlassungen der Rohde & 2nd Stage Extension
Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH/Branch offices of Bangalore - 560 071
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH
Rohde & Schwarz India Pvt. Ltd. (Tel) +91 (40) 23 32 24 16
Zweigniederlassung Nord, Geschäftsstelle (Tel) +49 (30) 34 79 48-0 Hyderabad Office (Fax) +91 (40) 23 32 27 32
Berlin (Fax) +49 (30) 34 79 48 48 302 & 303, Millennium Centre [email protected]
Ernst-Reuter-Platz 10 · D-10587 Berlin [email protected] 6-3-1099/1100, Somajiguda
Postfach 100620 · D-10566 Berlin Hyderabad - 500 016
 Adressen/Addresses

India Rohde & Schwarz India Pvt. Ltd. (Tel) +91 (22) 26 30 18 10 Kazakhstan Rohde & Schwarz Kazakhstan (Tel) +7 (32) 72 67 23 54
Mumbai Office (Fax) +91 (22) 26 73 20 81 Representative Office Almaty (Fax) +7 (32) 72 67 23 46
B-603, Remi Bizcourt, Shah Industrial [email protected] Pl. Respubliki 15 rs-kazakhstan@rsd-rohde-
Estate, Off Veera Desai Road 480013 Almaty schwarz.com
Andheri West
Mumbai - 400 058 Kenya Excel Enterprises Ltd (Tel) +254 (2) 55 80 88
Dunga Road (Fax) +254 (2) 54 46 79
Indonesia PT Rohde & Schwarz Indonesia (Tel) +62 (21) 252 36 08 P.O.Box 42 788
Graha Paramita 5th Floor (Fax) +62 (21) 252 36 07 Nairobi
Jln. Denpasar Raya Blok D-2 [email protected]
Jakarta 12940 schwarz.com·[email protected] Korea Rohde & Schwarz Korea Ltd. (Tel) +82 (2) 34 85 19 00
schwarz.com 83-29 Nonhyun-Dong, Kangnam-Ku (Fax) +82 (2) 547 43 00
[email protected]
Iran Rohde & Schwarz Iran (Tel) +98 (21) 872 42 96 schwarz.com·[email protected]
Liaison Office Tehran (Fax) +98 (21) 871 90 12 Seoul 135-010 schwarz.com
Groundfloor No. 1, 14th Street [email protected]
Khaled Eslamboli (Vozara) Ave. Kuwait Group Five Trading & Contracting Co. (Tel) +965 (244) 91 72/73/74
15117 Tehran Mezzanine Floor (Fax) +965 (244) 95 28
Al-Bana Towers [email protected]
Ireland siehe/see United Kingdom Ahmad Al Jaber Street
Sharq
Israel Eastronics Ltd. (Tel) +972 (3) 645 87 77
Measurement Products (Fax) +972 (3) 645 86 66 Latvia Rohde & Schwarz Danmark A/S (Tel) +371 (7) 50 23 55
11 Rozanis St. [email protected] Latvian Branch Office (Fax) +371 (7) 50 23 60
P.O.Box 39300 Merkela iela 21-301 [email protected]
Tel Aviv 61392 1050 Riga

J.M. Moss (Engineering) Ltd. (Tel) +972 (3) 631 20 57 Lebanon Rohde & Schwarz (Tel) +966 (1) 465 64 28 Ext. 303
Communications Products (Fax) +972 (3) 631 40 58 Liaison Office Riyadh (Fax) +966 (1) 465 64 28 Ext. 229
9 Oded Street [email protected] P.O.Box 361 [email protected]
P.O.Box 967 Riyadh 11411
52109 Ramat Gan
Netcom (Tel) +961 (1) 48 69 99
Italy Rohde & Schwarz Italia S.p.a. (Tel) +39 (02) 95 70 41 P.O.Box 55199 (Fax) +961 (1) 49 05 11
Centro Direzionale Lombardo (Fax) +39 (02) 95 30 27 72 Op. Ex-Presidential Palace [email protected]
Via Roma 108 [email protected] Horch Tabet
20060 Cassina de Pecchi (MI) Beirut

Rohde & Schwarz Italia S.p.a. (Tel) +39 (06) 41 59 81 Liechtenstein siehe/see Switzerland
Via Tiburtina 1182 (Fax) +39 (06) 41 59 82 70
00156 Roma [email protected] Lithuania Rohde & Schwarz Danmark A/S (Tel) +370 (5) 239 50 10
Lithuanian Branch Office (Fax) +370 (5) 239 50 11
Jamaica siehe / see Mexico Lukiskiu 5-228 [email protected]
2600 Vilnius
Japan Rohde & Schwarz Japan K.K. (Tel) +81 (3) 59 25 12 88
Tokyo Office (Fax) +81 (3) 59 25 12 90 Luxembourg siehe/see Belgium
711 Bldg., Room 501 (5th floor) [email protected]
7-11-18 Nishi-Shinjuku Macedonia NETRA (Tel) +389 (2) 329 82 30
Shinjuku-ku Sarski odred 7 (Fax) +389 (2) 317 74 88
Tokyo 160-00023 1000 Skopje [email protected]

Rohde & Schwarz Japan K.K. (Tel) +81 (4) 54 77 35 70 Malaysia Rohde & Schwarz Malaysia Sdn Bhd (Tel) +60 (3) 20 94 00 33
Shin-Yokohama Office Suite 10.04, Level 10, Wisma E&C (Fax) +60 (3) 20 94 24 33
KM Daiichi Bldg., 8F No. 2 Lorong Dungun Kiri [email protected]
2-13-13 Kouhoku-ku Damansara Heights
Yokohama-shi 50490 Kuala-Lumpur
Kanagawa 222-0033
Malta Tektraco International Technology Ltd.(Tel) +356 (21) 37 43 00 or 37 80 88
Rohde & Schwarz Japan K.K. (Tel) +81 (6) 63 10 96 51 121, B'Kara Road (Fax) +356 (21) 37 66 67
Osaka Office San Gwann SGN 08 [email protected]
TEK Dai 2 Bldg., 8F
1-13-20 Esaka-shi Mexico Rohde & Schwarz de Mexico (Tel) +52 (55) 85 03 99 13
Suita-shi S. de R.L. de C.V. (Fax) +52 (55) 85 03 99 16
Osaka-fu 564-0063 German Centre Oficina 4-2-2 [email protected]
Av. Santa Fé 170 schwarz.com
Jordan Jordan Crown Engineering & Trading Co. (Tel) +962 (6) 462 17 29 Col. Lomas de Santa Fé
Jabal Amman, Second Circle (Fax) +962 (6) 465 96 72 01210 Mexico D.F.
Youssef Ezzideen Street [email protected]
P.O.Box 830414 Moldava siehe/see Austria
Amman, 11183
Nepal ICTC Pvt. Ltd. (Tel) +977 (1) 443 48 95
Hattisar, Post Box No. 660 (Fax) +977 (1) 443 49 37
Kathmandu [email protected]
 Adressen/Addresses

Netherlands Rohde & Schwarz Nederland B.V. (Tel) +31 (30) 600 17 00 Saudi Arabia Gentec (Tel) +966 (1) 293 20 35
Perkinsbaan 1 (Fax) +31 (30) 600 17 99 Haji Abdullah Alireza & Co. Ltd. (Fax) +966 (1) 466 16 57
3439 ND Nieuwegein [email protected] P.O.Box 43054 [email protected]
Riyadh
New Zealand Nichecom (Tel) +64 (4) 232 32 33
1 Lincoln Ave. (Fax) +64 (4) 232 32 30 Serbia- Rohde & Schwarz (Tel) +381 (11) 305 50 25
Tawa, Wellington [email protected] Montenegro Representative Office Belgrade (Fax) +381 (11) 305 50 24
Tose Jovanovica 7 [email protected]
Nicaragua siehe/see Mexico 11030 Beograd

Nigeria Ferrostaal Abuja (Tel) +234 (9) 413 52 51 Singapore Rohde & Schwarz Regional Headquarters (Tel) +65 68 46 18 72
Plot 3323, Barada Close (Fax) +234 (9) 413 52 50 Singapore Pte. Ltd. (Fax) +65 68 46 12 52
P.O.Box 8513, Wuse [email protected] 1 Kaki Bukit View
Off Amazon Street #05-01/02 Techview
Maitama, Abuja Singapore 415 941

Norway Rohde & Schwarz Norge AS (Tel) +47 (23) 38 66 00 Rohde & Schwarz Systems & (Tel) +65 68 46 37 10
Enebakkveien 302 B (Fax) +47 (23) 38 66 01 Communications Asia Pte Ltd (Fax) +65 68 46 00 29
1188 Oslo [email protected] Service [email protected]
1 Kaki Bukit View
Oman Mustafa Sultan Science & Industry Co.LLC. (Tel) +968 63 60 00 #04-01/07 Techview
Test & Measurement Products (Fax) +968 60 70 66 Singapore 415 941
Way No. 3503 [email protected]
Building No. 241 Slovak Specialne systemy a software, a.s. (Tel) +421 (2) 65 42 24 88
Postal Code 112 Republic Svrcia ul. 3 (Fax) +421 (2) 65 42 07 68
Al Khuwair, Muscat 841 04 Bratislava 4 [email protected]

Pakistan Siemens Pakistan (Tel) +92 (51) 227 22 00 Slovenia Rohde & Schwarz (Tel) +386 (1) 423 46 51
23, West Jinnah Avenue (Fax) +92 (51) 227 54 98 Representative Office Ljubljana (Fax) +386 (1) 423 46 11
Islamabad [email protected] Tbilisijska 89 [email protected]
1000 Ljubljana
Panama siehe/see Mexico
South Africa Protea Data Systems (Pty.) Ltd. (Tel) +27 (11) 719 57 00
Papua New siehe/see Australia Communications and Measurement Division (Fax) +27 (11) 786 58 91
Guinea Private Bag X19 [email protected]
Bramley 2018
Paraguay siehe/see Argentina
Protea Data Systems (Pty.) Ltd. (Tel) +27 (21) 555 36 32
Philippines Rohde & Schwarz (Philippines) Inc. (Tel) +63 (2) 753 14 44 Cape Town Branch (Fax) +27 (21) 555 42 67
Unit 2301, PBCom Tower (Fax) +63 (2) 753 14 56 Unit G9, Centurion Business Park [email protected]
6795, Ayala Ave. cor. Herrera St. Bosmandam Road
Makati City Milnerton
Cape Town, 7441
Poland Rohde & Schwarz SP.z o.o. (Tel) +48 (22) 860 64 94
Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce (Fax) +48 (22) 860 64 99 Spain Rohde & Schwarz Espana S.A. (Tel) +34 (91) 334 10 70
ul. Stawki 2, Pietro 28 [email protected] Salcedo, 11 (Fax) +34 (91) 729 05 06
00-193 Warszawa 28034 Madrid [email protected]

Portugal Rohde & Schwarz Portugal, Lda. (Tel) +351 (21) 415 57 00 Rohde & Schwarz Espana S.A. (Tel) +34 (93) 415 15 68
Alameda Antonio Sergio (Fax) +351 (21) 415 57 10 Av. Princep d'Astúries, 66 (Fax) +34 (93) 237 49 95
7-R/C - Sala A [email protected] 08012 Barcelona [email protected]
2795-023 Linda-a-Velha
Sri Lanka Dynatel Communications (PTE) Ltd. (Tel) +94 (112) 90 80 01
Republic siehe/see Mexico 451/A Kandy Road (Fax) +94 (112) 91 04 69 69
Dominican Kelaniya [email protected]

Romania Rohde & Schwarz (Tel) +40 (21) 411 20 13 Sudan SolarMan Co. Ltd. (Tel) +249 (183) 47 31 08
Representation Office Bucharest (Fax) +40 (21) 410 68 46 P.O.Box 11 545 (Fax) +249 (183) 47 31 38
89 Eroii Sanitari Bldv., sector 5 [email protected] North of Fraouq Cementry 6/7/9 Bldg. 16 [email protected]
050472 Bucuresti Karthoum

Russian Rohde & Schwarz International GmbH (Tel) +7 (095) 745 88 50 to 53 Sweden Rohde & Schwarz Sverige AB (Tel) +46 (8) 605 19 00
Federation 119180, Yakimanskaya nab., 2 (Fax) +7 (095) 745 88 54 Flygfältsgatan 15 (Fax) +46 (8) 605 19 80
Moscow [email protected] 128 30 Skarpnäck [email protected]

Saudi Arabia Rohde & Schwarz International GmbH - (Tel) +966 (1) 293 2035 Switzerland Roschi Rohde & Schwarz AG (Tel) +41 (31) 922 15 22
Liaison Office Riyadh (Fax) +966 (1) 466 1657 Mühlestr. 7 (Fax) +41 (31) 921 81 01
c/o Haji Abdullah Alireza Co. Ltd. [email protected] 3063 Ittigen [email protected]
P.O.Box 361
Riyadh 11411 Syria Electro Scientific Office (Tel) +963 (11) 231 59 74
Baghdad Street (Fax) +963 (11) 231 88 75
Dawara Clinical Lab. Bldg [email protected]
P.O.Box 8162
Damascus
 Adressen/Addresses

Taiwan Rohde & Schwarz Taiwan (Pvt.) Ltd. (Tel) +886 (2) 28 93 10 88 United Rohde & Schwarz UK Ltd. (Tel) +44 (870) 735 16 42
Floor 14, No. 13, Sec. 2, Pei-Tou Road (Fax) +886 (2) 28 91 72 60 Kingdom 3000 Manchester Business Park (Fax) +44 (1252) 81 14 77
Taipei 112 [email protected] Aviator Way [email protected]
Manchester M22 5TG
Tanzania SSTL Group (Tel) +255 (22) 276 00 37
Uruguay Aeromarine S.A. (Tel) +598 (2) 400 39 62
P.O. Box 7512 (Fax) +255 (22) 276 02 93
Cerro Largo 1497 (Fax) +598 (2) 401 85 97
Dunga Street Plot 343/345 [email protected]
11200 Montevideo [email protected]
Dar Es Salaam
USA Rohde & Schwarz, Inc. (Tel) +1 (410) 910 78 00
Thailand Rohde & Schwarz International Thailand (Tel) +66 (2) 200 07 29
Eastern Regional Office (US Headquarters) (Fax) +1 (410) 910 78 01
2nd floor Gems Tower (Fax) +66 (2) 267 00 79
8661A Robert Fulton Drive [email protected]
Bangrak, Suriyawong
Columbia, MD 21046-2265
Bangkok 10600
Rohde & Schwarz, Inc. (Tel) +1 (469) 713 53 00
Schmidt Electronics (Thailand) Ltd. (Tel) +66 (2) 69 41 47 05 Central Regional Office / Systems & EMI (Fax) +1 (469) 713 53 01
Messtechnik (Fax) +66 (2) 69 41 476 Products [email protected]
202 Le Concorede Tower, 23rd Fl. [email protected] 8080 Tristar Drive
Ratchadaphisek Rd. Suite 120
Huay kwang Irving, TX 75063
Bangkok 10320
Rohde & Schwarz, Inc. (Tel) +1 (503) 403 47 00
TPP Operation Co. Ltd. (Tel) +66 (2) 880 93 47 R&D and Application Support (Fax) +1 (503) 403 47 01
Kommunikationstechnik (Fax) +66 (2) 880 93 47 8905 SW Nimbus Ave [email protected]
41/5 Mooban Tarinee Suite 240
Boromrajchonnee Road Beaverton, OR 97008
Talingchan
Bangkok 10170 Rohde & Schwarz, Inc. (Tel) +1 (949) 885 70 00
Western Regional Office (Fax) +1 (949) 885 70 01
Trinidad siehe/see Mexico (Tel) 7700 Irvine Center Drive [email protected]
&Tobago (Fax) Suite 100
Irvine, CA 92618
Tunisia Teletek (Tel) +216 (71) 77 33 88 Rohde & Schwarz, Inc. (Tel) +1 (410) 910 50 02
71, Rue Alain Savary (Fax) +216 (71) 77 05 53 Service & Calibration Center (Fax) +1 (410) 910 79 31
Residence Alain Savary (C64) [email protected] 8661A Robert Fulton Drive [email protected]
Cité el Khadra Columbia, MD 21046-2265
1003 Tunis
Vietnam Rohde & Schwarz Representative Office (Tel) +84 (4) 834 20 46
Turkey Rohde & Schwarz International GmbH (Tel) +90 (216) 385 19 17 Vietnam
Liaison Office Istanbul (Fax) +90 (216) 385 19 18 Unit 807, 8/F, Schmidt Tower
Bagdat Cad. 191/3, Arda Apt. B-Blok [email protected] 239 Xuan Thuy Road
81030 Selamicesme-Istanbul schwarz.com Cau Giay District
Hanoi
Ukraine Rohde & Schwarz (Tel) +38 (044) 268 60 55
Representative Office Kiev (Fax) +38 (044) 268 83 64 West Indies siehe/see Mexico
4, Patris Loumoumba ul. [email protected]
01042 Kiev

United Arab Rohde & Schwarz International GmbH (Tel) +971 (2) 6335 670
Emirates Liaison Office Middle East (Fax) +971 (2) 6335 671
Vertrieb Dario [email protected]
P.O. Box 31156 schwarz.com
Abu Dhabi

Rohde & Schwarz Bick Mobile (Tel) +971 (4) 883 71 35

Communication (Fax) +971 (4) 883 71 36
P.O.Box 17466
JAFZ, PPU ZG-07
Dubai

Rohde & Schwarz Emirates L.L.C. (Tel) +971 (2) 55 49 411

ESNAAD Premisses at Mussafah, P.O.Box (Fax) +971 (2) 55 49 433
31156 [email protected]
Abu Dhabi

United Rohde & Schwarz UK Ltd. (Tel) +44 (1252) 81 88 88 (sales)·+44

Kingdom Ancells Business Park (1252) 81 88 18 (service)
Fleet (Fax) +44 (1252) 81 14 47
Hampshire GU51 2UZ [email protected]
FSIQ Manuals

Contents of Manuals for Signal Analyzer FSIQ

Operating Manual FSIQ
The operating manual describes the foll,owing models and options:
• FSIQ3 20 Hz to 3,5 GHz
• FSIQ7 20 Hz to 7 GHz
• FSIQ3 20 Hz to 26,5 GHz
• FSIQ40 20 Hz to 40 GHz

• Option FSE-B8/9/10/11 Tracking Generator

• Option FSE-B13 1-dB Attenuator
• Option FSE-B15 Ethernet Adapter
• Option FSE-B17 Second IEC/IEEE Bus Interface
• Option FSIQ-B70 DSP and IQ Memory Extension

Option FSE-B21, External Mixer Output, is described in a separate manual.

The present operating manual contains comprehensive information about the technical data of the
instrument, the setup and putting into operation of the instrument, the operating concept and controls
as well as the operation of the FSIQ via the menus and via remote control. Typical measurement
tasks for the FSIQ are explained using the functions offered by the menus and a selection of pro-
gram examples.
In addition the operating manual gives information about maintenance of the instrument and about
error detection listing the error messages which may be output by the instrument. It is subdivided in-
tothe data sheet plus 9 chapters:

The data sheet informs about guaranteed specifications and characteristics of the instrument.
Chapter 1 describes the control elements and connectors on the front and rear panel as well
as all procedures required for putting the FSIQ into operation and integration into
a test system.
Chapter 2 gives an introduction to typical measurement tasks of the FSIQ which are ex-
plained step by step.
Chapter 3 describes the operating principles, the structure of the graphical interface and of-
fers a menu overview.
Chapter 4 forms a reference for manual control of the FSIQ and contains a detailed de-
scription of all instrument functions and their application.
Chapter 5 describes the basics for programming the FSIQ, command processing and the
status reporting system.
Chapter 6 lists all the remote-control commands defined for the instrument. At the end of the
chapter a alphabetical list of commands and a table of softkeys with command
assignment is given.
Chapter 7 contains program examples for a number of typical applications of the FSIQ.
Chapter 8 describes preventive maintenance and the characteristics of the instrument’s in-
terfaces.
Chapter 8 gives a list of error messages that the FSIQ may generate.
Chapter 9 contains a list of error messages.
Chapter 10 contains an index for the operating manual.

1119.5063.12 0.1 E-1

Manuals FSIQ

Service Manual - Instrument

The service manual - instrument informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications (per-
formance test) and on the self tests.

Service Manual
The service manual is not delivered with the instrument but may be obtained from your R&S service
department using the order number 1065.6016.24.
The service manualinforms on instrument function, repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It
contains all information required for the maintenance of FSIQ by exchanging modules.It contains in-
formation about the individual modules of FSIQ. This comprises the test and adjustment of the mod-
ules, fault detection within the modules and the interface description.

1119.5063.12 0.2 E-1

FSIQ Contents - Preparing for Operation

Contents - Chapter 1 " Preparing for Operation "

1 Preparing for Operation

Description of Front and Rear Panel Views .................................................................................. 1.1
Front View................................................................................................................................ 1.1
Rear View .............................................................................................................................. 1.13
Start-Up........................................................................................................................................... 1.20
Unpacking the Instrument...................................................................................................... 1.20
Instrument Setup ................................................................................................................... 1.20
Stand-alone Operation ................................................................................................ 1.20
19" Rack Installation.................................................................................................... 1.21
EMI Protection Measures ...................................................................................................... 1.21
Connecting to AC Power ....................................................................................................... 1.21
AC Power Line Fuses ............................................................................................................ 1.21
Instrument On/Off .................................................................................................................. 1.21
Battery-Powered Memory ...................................................................................................... 1.22
Functional Test .............................................................................................................................. 1.22
Controller Function........................................................................................................................ 1.23
Connecting a Mouse...................................................................................................................... 1.24
Connecting an External Keyboard ............................................................................................... 1.25
Connecting an External Monitor .................................................................................................. 1.26
Connecting an Output Device ...................................................................................................... 1.28
Connecting a CD-ROM Drive ........................................................................................................ 1.34
Firmware Update............................................................................................................................ 1.36
Installing Windows NT Software .................................................................................................. 1.37
Options ........................................................................................................................................... 1.38
Option FSE-B17 – Second IEC/IEEE Interface ..................................................................... 1.38
Installing the software.................................................................................................. 1.38
Operation..................................................................................................................... 1.40
Option FSE-B5 - FFT Filter.................................................................................................... 1.41
Prerequisites ............................................................................................................... 1.41
Enabling the option...................................................................................................... 1.41
Option FSE-B16 – Ethernet Adapter ..................................................................................... 1.42
Hardware Installation................................................................................................... 1.42
Software Installation .................................................................................................... 1.43
Operation..................................................................................................................... 1.47
NOVELL ...................................................................................................... 1.47
MICROSOFT .................................................................................................. 1.47
Option FSIQB70 - DSP and IQ Memory Extension (2 X 512 K)............................................ 1.54

1119.5063.12 I-1.1 E-1

Contents - Preparing for Operation FSIQ

1119.5063.12 I-1.2 E-1

FSIQ Front View

1 Preparing for Operation

Chapter 1 describes the controls and connectors of the Spectrum Analyzer FSIQ by means of the front
and rear view. Then follows all the information that is necessary to put the instrument into operation and
connect it to the AC supply and to external devices.
A more detailed description of the hardware connectors and interfaces can be found in chapter 8.
Chapter 2 provides an introduction into the operation of the FSIQ by means of typical examples of
configuration and measurement; for the description of the concept for manual operation and an
overview of menus refer to chapter 3.
For a systematic explanation of all menus, functions and parameters and background information refer
to the reference part in chapter 4.
For remote control of the FSIQ refer to the general description of the SCPI commands, the instrument
model, the status reporting system, and command description in chapter 5 and 6.

Description of Front and Rear Panel Views

Front View
1

Display Screen see Chap. 3 and 4

Softkeys see Chap. 3 and 4

3 USER
USER Generate macros see Chap. 4

4 MARKER

MARKER Select and set marker see Chap. 4

NORMAL SEARCH NORMAL Select and set the marker
SEARCH Set and start the peak/min search
DELTA MKR
DELTA Select and set the delta markers
MKR ⇒ Set the active marker

5 FREQUENCY

FREQUENCY Define frequency axis in the active window see Chap. 4

CENTER SPAN CENTER Set center frequency.
SPAN Set sweep width
START STOP START Set start frequency
STOP Set stop frequency

1119.5063.12 1.1 E-12

 1 2 4 6 8 9
3 5 7

Fig. 1-1
SIGNAL ANALYZER . 20 Hz . . .3.5 GHz . FSIQ 1119.5005 13

1119.5063.12
Front View

SYSTEM USER FREQUENCY LEVEL DATA ENTRY

-dBm
PRESET CAL CENTER SPAN REF 7 V
8 9 GHz
s

28 dBm
DISPLAY INFO START STOP RANGE 4 mV
5 6 MHz

Front View
ms

dB
1 2 3 µV kHz
CONFIGURATION MARKER LINES µs

MODE NORMAL SEARCH D LINES dB..

0 . - nV Hz
27 ns

SETUP DELTA MKR LIMITS

CLR BACK EXP

HARDCOPY TRACE SWEEP DATA VARIATION

TRIGGER
START 1 2

HOLD STEP
26 10
SETTING 3 4 SWEEP
MEMORY
SAVE

RBW RECALL
11
STATUS MENU

1.2
SRQ VBW
25 CONFIG
SWT
REMOTE

LOCAL COUPLING INPUT

12
AF OUTPUT PROBE POWER GEN OUTPUT 50 PROBE / CODE RF INPUT 1
W

+30 dBm DC 0V
MAX MAX

50
W

MADE IN GERMANY

19 17 15
24 23 22 21 20 18 16 14 13

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Front View

6 LINES

LINES Setup evaluation lines and tolerance limits see Chap. 4

D LINE S

D LINES Setup evaluation lines (display lines)

LIMI TS
LIMITS Definition and recall of tolerance limits

7 LEVEL

LEVEL Define reference levels and display range in the

see Chap. 4
REF
active measurement window.
RANGE REF Set reference level (= max. display
level)
RANGE Set range

8 DATA ENTRY

DATA ENTRY Keypad for data input see Chap. 3

-dBm
7 8 9 V GHz
s
0...9 input numbers
4 5 6
dBm
mV
ms
MHz
. input decimal point
dB
1 2 3 µV
µs
kHz – change sign
dB..
0 . - nV Hz
ns
CLR – close input field (for uncompleted or
CLR BACK EXP already closed inputs, the original
entry is kept)
– erase the current entry in input field
(beginning of an input)
– close message window (status, error
and warning messages)
BACK erase last character input

GHz The units keys close the data

-dBm V s input and define the multipli-cation
factor for each basic unit.
MHz dBm For dimension-less or
mV ms alphanumeric inputs, the units keys
have weight 1.
kHz dB They behave, in this case, like
µV µs the ENTER key.
Hz dB
nV ns
EXP Append an exponent

1119.5063.12 1.3 E-12

 1 2 4 6 8 9
3 5 7

Fig. 1-1
SIGNAL ANALYZER . 20 Hz . . .3.5 GHz . FSIQ 1119.5005 13

1119.5063.12
Front View

SYSTEM USER FREQUENCY LEVEL DATA ENTRY

-dBm
PRESET CAL CENTER SPAN REF 7 V
8 9 GHz
s

28 dBm
DISPLAY INFO START STOP RANGE 4 mV
5 6 MHz

Front View
ms

dB
1 2 3 µV kHz
CONFIGURATION MARKER LINES µs

MODE NORMAL SEARCH D LINES dB..

0 . - nV Hz
27 ns

SETUP DELTA MKR LIMITS

CLR BACK EXP

HARDCOPY TRACE SWEEP DATA VARIATION

TRIGGER
START 1 2

HOLD STEP
26 10
SETTING 3 4 SWEEP
MEMORY
SAVE

RBW RECALL
11
STATUS MENU

1.4
SRQ VBW
25 CONFIG
SWT
REMOTE

LOCAL COUPLING INPUT

12
AF OUTPUT PROBE POWER GEN OUTPUT 50 PROBE / CODE RF INPUT 1
W

+30 dBm DC 0V
MAX MAX

50
W

MADE IN GERMANY

19 17 15
24 23 22 21 20 18 16 14 13

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Front View

3 1/2" diskette drive; 1.44 MByte

10 DATA VARIATION

DATA VARIATION Key group for entering data and for cursor see Chap. 3
movement
HOLD STEP

HOLD Disable control elements / overall

control. The LED indicates the hold
condition.
STEP Set step size for cursor keys and roll-
key.
Cursor keys – Move the cursor within the input
fields and tables.
– Vary the input value.
– Define the direction of movement for
the roll-key.
Roll-key – Vary input values.
– Move markers and limits.
– Select letters in the help line editor.
– Move cursor in the tables

11 MEMORY

MEMORY
Memory media and file management see Chap. 4
SAVE
SAVE Save instrument data

RECALL
RECALL Recall instrument data
CONFIG Configuration of memory media and data
CONFIG

12 INPUT

INPUT Set impedance and attenuation at the RF input. see Chap. 4

13 RF INPUT 1

RF INPUT 1 RF-Input 1
+ 30 dBm DC 0V
MAX MAX
Caution:
50 W
The maximum DC voltage is 0 V, the
MADE IN GERMANY ^ 30 dBm at ≥
maximum power is 1 W (=
10 dB attenuation)

1119.5063.12 1.5 E-12

 1 2 4 6 8 9
3 5 7

Fig. 1-1
SIGNAL ANALYZER . 20 Hz . . .3.5 GHz . FSIQ 1119.5005 13

1119.5063.12
Front View

SYSTEM USER FREQUENCY LEVEL DATA ENTRY

-dBm
PRESET CAL CENTER SPAN REF 7 V
8 9 GHz
s

28 dBm
DISPLAY INFO START STOP RANGE 4 mV
5 6 MHz

Front View
ms

dB
1 2 3 µV kHz
CONFIGURATION MARKER LINES µs

MODE NORMAL SEARCH D LINES dB..

0 . - nV Hz
27 ns

SETUP DELTA MKR LIMITS

CLR BACK EXP

HARDCOPY TRACE SWEEP DATA VARIATION

TRIGGER
START 1 2

HOLD STEP
26 10
SETTING 3 4 SWEEP
MEMORY
SAVE

RBW RECALL
11
STATUS MENU

1.6
SRQ VBW
25 CONFIG
SWT
REMOTE

LOCAL COUPLING INPUT

12
AF OUTPUT PROBE POWER GEN OUTPUT 50 PROBE / CODE RF INPUT 1
W

+30 dBm DC 0V
MAX MAX

50
W

MADE IN GERMANY

19 17 15
24 23 22 21 20 18 16 14 13

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Front View

14 PROBE/CODE

PROBE / CODE Power supply and coded socket for R&S

accessories.(12-pin Tuchel)

15 SWEEP

SWEEP
TRIGGER
Input sweep parameters see Chap. 4
TRIGGER Set trigger source. The LED illuminates on
valid trigger.
SWEEP
SWEEP Define the sweep mode parameters.
RBW COUPLING Set coupled parameters. Resolution
VBW
BandWidth (RBW), Video BandWidth
(VBW) and SWeep Time (SWT).
SWT
The LEDs light indicating coupled
COUPLING parameters which are manually cancelled.

16 GEN OUTPUT 50W

GEN OUTPUT 50 W Generator oputput; N-connector

17 MENU

MENU Menu-change keys see Chap. 3

Call main menu

Change to left menu

Change to right menu

18 TRACE

TRACE Select and activate measurement traces (Trace 1...4). see Chap. 4
1 2

The LEDs indicate traces turned on.

3 4

1119.5063.12 1.7 E-12

 1 2 4 6 8 9
3 5 7

Fig. 1-1
SIGNAL ANALYZER . 20 Hz . . .3.5 GHz . FSIQ 1119.5005 13

1119.5063.12
Front View

SYSTEM USER FREQUENCY LEVEL DATA ENTRY

-dBm
PRESET CAL CENTER SPAN REF 7 V
8 9 GHz
s

28 dBm
DISPLAY INFO START STOP RANGE 4 mV
5 6 MHz

Front View
ms

dB
1 2 3 µV kHz
CONFIGURATION MARKER LINES µs

MODE NORMAL SEARCH D LINES dB..

0 . - nV Hz
27 ns

SETUP DELTA MKR LIMITS

CLR BACK EXP

HARDCOPY TRACE SWEEP DATA VARIATION

TRIGGER
START 1 2

HOLD STEP
26 10
SETTING 3 4 SWEEP
MEMORY
SAVE

RBW RECALL
11
STATUS MENU

1.8
SRQ VBW
25 CONFIG
SWT
REMOTE

LOCAL COUPLING INPUT

12
AF OUTPUT PROBE POWER GEN OUTPUT 50 PROBE / CODE RF INPUT 1
W

+30 dBm DC 0V
MAX MAX

50
W

MADE IN GERMANY

19 17 15
24 23 22 21 20 18 16 14 13

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Front View

19 PROBE POWER

PROBE POWER Power supply connector (+15V / - 12.6V) for see Chap. 8
measurement accessories (probes)

20

Reserved for options

21

Reserved for options

22 AF OUTPUT

AF OUTPUT AF output connector (head phones) (miniature see Chap. 8

phone jack)

23

Internal loudspeaker see Chap. 8

The loudspeaker is disabled when the phone jack
is inserted in the AF output.

24

ON/STANDBY-switch see Chap. 1

Caution:
In standby mode, the AC line
voltage is still present within the
instrument.

1119.5063.12 1.9 E-12

 1 2 4 6 8 9
3 5 7

Fig. 1-1
SIGNAL ANALYZER . 20 Hz . . .3.5 GHz . FSIQ 1119.5005 13

1119.5063.12
Front View

SYSTEM USER FREQUENCY LEVEL DATA ENTRY

-dBm
PRESET CAL CENTER SPAN REF 7 V
8 9 GHz
s

28 dBm
DISPLAY INFO START STOP RANGE 4 mV
5 6 MHz

Front View
ms

dB
1 2 3 µV kHz
CONFIGURATION MARKER LINES µs

MODE NORMAL SEARCH D LINES dB..

0 . - nV Hz
27 ns

SETUP DELTA MKR LIMITS

CLR BACK EXP

HARDCOPY TRACE SWEEP DATA VARIATION

TRIGGER
START 1 2

HOLD STEP
26 10
SETTING 3 4 SWEEP
MEMORY
SAVE

RBW RECALL
11
STATUS MENU
SRQ VBW

1.10
25 CONFIG
SWT
REMOTE

LOCAL COUPLING INPUT

12
AF OUTPUT PROBE POWER GEN OUTPUT 50 PROBE / CODE RF INPUT 1
W

+30 dBm DC 0V
MAX MAX

50
W

MADE IN GERMANY

19 17 15
24 23 22 21 20 18 16 14 13

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Front View

25 STATUS

STATUS Indicators for remote control and switch for manual see Chap. 4
SRQ
control. and
REMOTE
Chap. 5
LOCAL
LOCAL Switch from remote to manual control.
The LED SRQ indicates that a service
request from the instrument is active on the
IEC Bus.
The LED REMOTE indicates that the
instrument is under remote control.

26 HARDCOPY

HARDCOPY Printer control see Chap. 4

START

START Start a print job with the setup defined in

SETTING the SETTING menu.
SETTING Configure the diagram, parameter list and
measurement protocol outputs on the
various output media.

27 CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURATION Select operational modes and define default settings see Chap. 1
MODE
and
MODE Select mode
Chap. 4
SETUP
SETUP Define configurationss

28 SYSTEM

SYSTEM General instrument default settings see Chap. 4

PRESET CAL
PRESET Recall instrument default settings
DISPLAY INFO
DISPLAY Configure the display screen format
CAL Calibrate the analyzer
INFO – Information concerning instrument state
and measurement parameters
– Call help functions

1119.5063.12 1.11 E-12

 Fig. 1-2
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Rear View

1119.5063.12
Rear View
51 TG IN TG
21.4 MHz LOG
EXT TRIG CCVS/FBAS Q FM
GATE OUT I/AM/ALC OUT VIDEO OUT
ETHERNET PC MONITOR

1.12
IEC FOR COMPUTERFUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI
EXT REF NOICE
IN/OUT SWEEP KEYBOARD
SOURCE

IEC 625 SCPI

MOUSE LPT COM1 COM2 ANALYZER MONITOR USER PORT

50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Rear View

Rear View

29

Power switch see Chap. 1

Fuse holder

AC power connector

30

Power supply fans

31 EXT TRIG/GATE

EXT TRIG Input connector for an external trigger or an external see Chap. 2
GATE
IN/OUT
gate signal and
Chap. 8

32 CCVS/FBAS OUT

CCVS/FBAS Connector for external CCVS/FBAS monitor see Chap. 8

IN/OUT
OUT

33 TG IN I/AM/ALC

TG IN Signal input connector for external modulation of see Chap. 8

IN/OUT
I/AM/ALC
Tracking Generator (options FSE-B9 and FSE-B11)

34 TG IN Q/FM

TG IN Signal input connector for external modulation of see Chap. 8

IN/OUT
Q/FM
Tracking Generator (options FSE-B9 and FSE-B11)

1119.5063.12 1.13 E-12

 Fig. 1-2
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Rear View

1119.5063.12
Rear View
51 TG IN TG
21.4 MHz LOG
EXT TRIG CCVS/FBAS Q FM
GATE OUT I/AM/ALC OUT VIDEO OUT
ETHERNET PC MONITOR

1.14
IEC FOR COMPUTERFUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI
EXT REF NOICE
IN/OUT SWEEP KEYBOARD
SOURCE

IEC 625 SCPI

MOUSE LPT COM1 COM2 ANALYZER MONITOR USER PORT

50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Rear View

35 21.4 MHZ OUT

21.4 MHz Output connector for 21.4 MHz IF see Chap. 8

IN/OUT
OUT

36 LOG VIDEO OUT

LOG Output connector for a switchable noise source see Chap. 8

VIDEO OUT
IN/OUT

37 KEYBOARD

KEYBOARD Connector for an external keyboard see Chap. 1

(5-pin DIN socket) and
Chap. 8

38 SWEEP

SWEEP
Output connector see Chap. 8
IN/OUT
During a sweep, a sawtooth voltage is output which is
proportional to frequency.

39 <SCPI> IEC625

IEC 625 SCPI IEC Bus-connector see Chap. 8

40 NOISE SOURCE

NOICE Output connector for a switchable noise source see Chap. 8

SOURCE
IN/OUT

1119.5063.12 1.15 E-12

 Fig. 1-2
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Rear View

1119.5063.12
Rear View
51 TG IN TG
21.4 MHz LOG
EXT TRIG CCVS/FBAS Q FM
GATE OUT I/AM/ALC OUT VIDEO OUT
ETHERNET PC MONITOR

1.16
IEC FOR COMPUTERFUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI
EXT REF NOICE
IN/OUT SWEEP KEYBOARD
SOURCE

IEC 625 SCPI

MOUSE LPT COM1 COM2 ANALYZER MONITOR USER PORT

50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Rear View

41 USER

USER PORT User interface connector with configurable inputs and see Chap. 8
outputs (USER-PORT A and USER-PORT B)

42 ANALYZER MONITOR

Connector for an external VGA monitor

ANALYZER MONITOR see Chap. 8

43 EXT REF IN/OUT

EXT REF
IN/OUT
Input for external reference frequency (1 MHz to 16 see Chap. 4
IN/OUT
MHz), can be switched to output 10 MHz. and
Chap. 8

44 COM2

COM2 Connector for serial interface 2 see Chap. 1

(9-pin socket; COM2) and
Chap. 8

45

Inputs / Outputs for options

(cover plates for digital interface expansion)

46 COM1

COM1 Connector for serial interface 1 see Chap. 1

(9-pin socket; COM1) and
Chap. 8

1119.5063.12 1.17 E-12

 Fig. 1-2
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Rear View

1119.5063.12
Rear View
51 TG IN TG
21.4 MHz LOG
EXT TRIG CCVS/FBAS Q FM
GATE OUT I/AM/ALC OUT VIDEO OUT
ETHERNET PC MONITOR

1.18
IEC FOR COMPUTERFUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI
EXT REF NOICE
IN/OUT SWEEP KEYBOARD
SOURCE

IEC 625 SCPI

MOUSE LPT COM1 COM2 ANALYZER MONITOR USER PORT

50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

E-12
FSIQ
FSIQ Rear View

47 IEC FOR COMPUTER FUNCTION <SCPI> IEC625

IEC FOR COMPUTERFUNCTION IEC 625 SCPI

IEC Bus-connector for computer function see Chap. 1
(option FSE-B16) and
Chap. 8

48 LPT

LPT Parallel interface connector see Chap. 1

(printer connector, Centronics compatible) and
Chap. 8

49 ETHERNET

Connector for ethernet (option FSE-B16)

50 MOUSE

MOUSE Connector for PS/2-Mouse see Chap. 1

and
Chap. 8

51 PC MONITOR

Connector for an external PC-Monitor

PC MONITOR see Chap. 1
and
Chap. 8

1119.5063.12 1.19 E-12

Start-Up FSIQ

Start-Up
Important Note:
Before turning the instrument on, it must be observed that the following conditions
are fulfilled:
• instrument covers are in place and all fasteners are tightened,
• fan openings are free from obstructions,
• signal levels at the input connectors are all within specified maximums,
• signal outputs are correctly connected.and not overloaded.
Non-observance may cause damage to the instrument .

Unpacking the Instrument

After the instrument has been removed from its packaging, insure that all deliverable items are present
as follows:
• signal analyzer FSIQ
• AC power cable
• keyboard and mouse
• Windows NT operating manual
• this operating manual
Now check the instrument for visible mechanical damage. If damage is present, promptly inform the
delivery firm that delivered the instrument. In case damage is found, retain the carton and the packing
materials.

Instrument Setup
Stand-alone Operation
The instrument is designed for use under general laboratory conditions. The ambient conditions required
at the operational site are as follows:
• The ambient temperature must be in the range
recommended in the data sheet.
Wrist strap with cord
• All fan openings must be unobstructed and the air flow at
the rear panel and at the side-panel perforations must not
be obstructed. The distance to the wall should be at least
10 cm.
Building ground
• The mounting surface should be flat.
• To avoid damage of electronic components of the DUT
Ground connection
of operational site
and the instrument, the operational site must be protected
Heel strap
Floor mat
against electrostatic discharge.

For applications in the laboratory or on a work bench, it is recommended that the support feet on the
bottom of the instrument be extended. For the LCD display, this provides the optimum viewing angle
which typically ranges from perpendicular to the display front to approximately 30° below.

1119.5063.12 1.20 E-12

FSIQ Start-Up

19" Rack Installation

Important Note:
For rack installation, insure that the air flow at the side-panel
perforations and the air exhaust at the rear panel are not obstructed.

The instrument may be mounted in a 19" rack by using the rack adapter kit ZZA-95 (order number:
396.4911.00). The installation instructions are included in the adapter kit.

EMI Protection Measures

In order to prevent electromagnetic interference (EMI), the instrument may be operated only when all
covers are correctly in place. Only adequately shielded signal and control cables may be used (see
recommended accessories).

Connecting to AC Power
The FSIQ is equipped with an AC voltage selection feature and will automatically set itself according to
the applied AC voltage (range: 90 to 132 VAC and 180 to 265 VAC, 47 to 440 Hz). The AC power
connector is located on the rear panel (see below).
À Connect the instrument to the AC power source using the AC power cable delivered with the
instrument.

AC Power Line Fuses

The FSIQ is protected by two fuses as specified on the power supply name-plate. The fuses are located
in a removable fuse holder which is located between the AC power switch and the AC power connector
(see below).

Instrument On/Off

AC power switch on the rear panel Power On/Off

À Depress the AC Power Switch to the desired position
OFF
ON

ON/OFF.
After turn-on (position ON), the instrument is in the ready
Ac power switch
0
I

state (STANDBY) or in operation dependent upon the

position of the ON/STANDBY switch located on the
Fuse holder instrument front panel (see below).

Note: The AC power switch may remain ON continuously.

AC power connector Switching to OFF is only required when the instrument
must be completely removed from the AC power source.
Switching to OFF (position OFF) removes all instrument
circuitry from the AC power source.

1119.5063.12 1.21 E-12

Functional Test FSIQ

.
ON/STANDBY switch on the front panel Standby
ON STANDBY À ON/STANDBY switch is not depressed.
The yellow LED (STANDBY) is illuminated. The DC
power supply is supplied with power and the quartz oven
is maintained at normal operating temperature.

Operation
Caution: À ON/STANDBY is depressed.
In standby mode, the AC The green LED (ON) is illuminated. The instrument is
power voltage is present ready for operation. All modules within the instrument are
within the instrument. supplied with power.

Battery-Powered Memory
The FSIQ is equipped with a battery-powered read/write memory (CMOS-RAM) where instrument
settings are saved at power-off. After each power-on, the FSIQ is reloaded with the operational
parameters which were active just prior to the last power-off (STANDBY or AC power OFF).
A lithium battery is used to supply power to the CMOS-RAM. When the battery is depleted (expected life
is approx. 5 years), any data stored in CMOS-RAM will be lost. In this case, the factory standard setup is
loaded at turn-on. For changing batteries please contact the representative of our company responsible
for you.

Functional Test
After turning on the AC power, the FSIQ returns the following message to the display screen:
Analyzer BIOS
Rev.x.y
Copyright
Rohde & Schwarz
Munich
Booting
After appearance of the above message, a self-test of the digital hardware is performed. Subsequently,
the Windows NT controller boots and the instrument then starts measuring.
Any errors which occur in self-test are transferred as ASCII text to the printer interface (LPT). Thus, an
error diagnosis can be carried out, even for serious failures.
A check of the data contents of the instrument is performed in self calibration (CAL, CAL TOTAL key)
The individual results of the calibration (PASSED / FAILED) can be displayed in the calibration menu.
With the aid of the built-in self-test functions ( INFO key, SELFTEST soft key), the functional integrity of
the instrument can be verified and/or defective modules can be localized.

1119.5063.12 1.22 E-12

FSIQ Controller Function

Controller Function
Caution:
The drivers used in the integrated controller function are adapted to the measuring
instrument. Only the settings described below should be resorted to. The existing driver
software should be modified only with the update software released by
Rohde&Schwarz.

The instrument possesses an integrated Windows-NT controller. The user can switch between the
measurement screen and the controller screen. When an external monitor is connected, the
measurement function and the controller function can be displayed simultaneously (see section
"Connecting an External Monitor"). The controller function is automatically booted on instrument power-
up.
Windows NT operation is described in the supplied manual or in the online help of Windows NT.

Login
Windows NT requires a login window in which the user is asked to identify himself by entering his name
and password. An autologin comes as standard in the instrument, ie the login is performed automatically
in the background. The user name used for this is "instrument" and the password is also "instrument" (in
small letters).

To login under another name, call up the logout window in the task bar with START - SHUT DOWN.
Mark the item "Close all programs and log on as a different user?" in the window and click YES while
holding the SHIFT key down until the login window is displayed to enter the user identification. The
password should be entered in the correct syntax including low-case and upper-case characters.

Administrator identification
Some of the installations (eg CD-ROM drive) described below are possible only under the administrator
login. This is indicated in the relevant window.
The administrator is an identification prescribed by Windows NT which in particular allows system
settings which are disabled for the standard user.
The password for the administrator is 894129 for the instrument.
After an installation under the administrator identification, the "Service Pack X" of Windows NT is to be
re-installed, see section "Installation of Windows NT Software".
On the power-up following an installation under the administrator identification, the NT login window is
displayed (no autologin). The user name "Administrator" is indicated in the window. This entry is to be
replaced by "instrument" and then "instrument" as password entered. An autologin is then possible.

Changeover between measurement screen and controller screen

To call up the controller screen use key combination <ALT><SYSREQ> (US keyboard).
To return to the measurement screen, activate the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" on the controller.

Logout
The instrument can be switched off (standby mode). Logging out of Windows NT is not necessary.

1119.5063.12 1.23 E-12

Connecting a Mouse FSIQ

Connecting a Mouse
Caution:
The mouse may only be connected when the instrument is switched off
(STANDBY). Otherwise, correct operation of the mouse and instrument cannot be
guaranteed.

The instrument has the facility to simplify operation by connecting a mouse to the rear-panel PS/2-
mouse connector (MOUSE) for .
MOUSE

During measurement operation, soft keys, tables and data input fields may also be controlled via the
mouse. For computer function, the mouse has the usual functions.
The control functions for the mouse during measurement operation are described in Chapter 3 in the
section "Mouse Control of Further Display Elements". This section contains a list in which the screen
display elements for mouse control of the corresponding soft keys and push buttons of the instrument
are described. Chapter 8 contains the interface description.
After connection the mouse is automatically recognized. Special settings such as mouse cursor speed
etc., can be performed in the Windows NT menu START - SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - MOUSE.

1119.5063.12 1.24 E-12

FSIQ Connecting an External Keyboard

Connecting an External Keyboard

Caution:
The keyboard may only be connected when the instrument is switched off
(STANDBY). Otherwise, correct operation of the keyboard cannot be guaranteed.

The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel 5-contact DIN connector (KEYBOARD) for the connection of
an external PC keyboard.

KEYBOARD x

During measurement operations, the keyboard simplifies the input of commentary text, filenames, etc.
For computer function, the keyboard has the usual functions.

Chapter 3, in section "External Keyboard Control", contains a list which describes the assignment of the
instrument front-panel key functions to the key codes of the external keyboard as well as special key
combinations used for quick operations. Chapter 8 contains the interface description.
After connection the keyboard is automatically recognized. The default setting is for the US keyboard.
Special settings such as repetitional rate etc. can be performed in Windows NT menu START -
SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - KEYBOARD.

1119.5063.12 1.25 E-12

Connecting an External Monitor FSIQ

Connecting an External Monitor

Caution:
The monitor may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY).
Otherwise, the monitor may be damaged.
Do not modify the screen driver (display type) since this would disturb instrument
operation.

Notes: - When connecting the monitor to the PC MONITOR connector, the display of controller
function can be adapted to the external screen (eg higher resolution) in the NT menu
START-SETTING - CONTROL PANEL - DISPLAY PROPERTIES.
- CHIPS (setting = both) should not be modified since otherwise switching between the
external monitor and the instrument screen is not possible.

The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel connector PC MONITOR or ANALYZER MONITOR for the
connection of an external monitor.
PC MONITOR ANALYZ ER MONITOR

With an external monitor it is possible to have an enlarged display of the measurement screen
(ANALYZER MONITOR connector) or of the controller screen (PC MONITOR connector). The
measuring instrument and the Windows NT controller can be operated in parallel. The mouse and the
keyboard are allocated to only one mode.

Display of the measurement screen - Connection to ANALYZER MONITOR connector

Connection
After connecting the external monitor the measurement screen is displayed on both the external monitor
and the instrument. Further settings are not necessary.
Operation
The instrument is operated as usual via its softkeys, the mouse and keyboard, etc..
Toggle between measurement screen and controller screen
Key combination <ALT><SYSREQ> is used to call up the controller. After call up, the mouse and
keyboard are allocated to the controller function.
By activating the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" the user returns to the measurement screen and the
mouse and keyboard are allocated to this screen.

Display of the controller screen - Connection to PC MONITOR connector

Connection
After connecting the monitor external monitor operation should be selected.
Setting is performed in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu (key group: CONFIGURATION, see in
Chapter 4, the section "Presettings and Interface Configuration"):

1119.5063.12 1.26 E-12

FSIQ Connecting an External Monitor

Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu

CONFIGURATION
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
À Press the SETUP key in the CONFIGURATION
MODE
field.

SETUP The SETUP menu is opened.

GENERAL
SETUP

À Press the GENERAL SETUP softkey.

The GENERAL SETUP submenu is opened and the
current settings of the instrument parameters are
displayed on the screen in the form of tables.

MONITOR
Selecting the external monitor mode
CONNECTED À Press the MONITOR CONNECTED softkey.
The softkey is in color to indicate that the external
monitor mode is activated. The external monitor
displays the controller screen.

Operation
The controller function is operated as usual with the mouse and keyboard. The measuring instrument
(displayed on the instrument screen) can be operated with both the softkeys and keys of the instrument.

Toggle between screens

By activating (clicking) the window "R&S Analyzer Interface" at the controller the mouse and keyboard
are allocated to the measurement screen. The mouse and keyboard are allocated to the controller when
the window is deactivated.

1119.5063.12 1.27 E-12

Connecting an Output Device FSIQ

Connecting an Output Device

Caution:
The output device may be connected only when the instrument is switched off
(STANDBY)

Notes: - The installation of some printer drivers is possible only under the administrator identification
(see section "Controller Function").
- After the installation, the "Service Pack X" of Windows NT is to be re-installed, see "New
Installation of Windows NT Software".
- To ensure that the instrument performs an autologin, the user identification is to be reset to
"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function".

The instrument provides an option for connecting up to three different output devices to allow printing a
hard copy of the display screen.
The interfaces can also be used for printing in the controller mode. The output formats "WMF"
(Windows Metafile) and "Clipboard" are preset. A large number of output devices can be connected
under Windows NT after installing suitable printer drivers.
The output devices supported by the instrument can be found in the selection box DEVICE/LANGUAGE
in the HARDCOPY –SETTINGS DEVICE1/2 menu (see in Chapter 4, the section "Documentation of
Measurement Results"). To print out via the COM interface, the latter must be assigned the controller
function in the SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu (owner = OS)..
Chapter 8 contains the interface description of the connectors.

The interface connectors are located on the rear panel:

LPT COM1 COM2

After connection of the output device to the appropriate interface connector, the configuration of the
interface as well as the output device must be entered and the output device must be assigned to the
interface.

1. Configuration of the interface

LPT1 Interface LPT1 cannot be configured.
Note: An external CM-ROM drive can be connected to this interface. If this
interface is allocated, one of the serial interfaces can be used for the
printout.

COM1/COM2 The configuration of serial interfaces COM1 and COM2 can be performed in the
Windows NT menu START - SETTINGS - CONTROL PANEL - PORTS. The
parameters COM PORTS BAUDRATE, BITS, PARITY, STOPBITS, HW/SW-
HANDSHAKE determine the transmission parameters of the interface They must
agree with the specifications of the output device (see the operating manual for the
output device).

2. Selection and installation of the printer driver

The selection and installation of the printer driver, the assignment to the interface and the setting of
most of the printer-specific parameters (eg paper size) is performed under Windows NT in the
START - SETTINGS - PRINTER menu.

1119.5063.12 1.28 E-12

FSIQ Connecting an Output Device

3. Configuration of the connected output device

The configuration of the connected output device and the assignment to the interface takes place in
the HARDCOPY DEVICE–SETTINGS DEVICE1/2 menu (key group: HARDCOPY, see in Chapter 4,
the section "Selection and Configuration of the Output Device "). The configuration of up to two
output devices (DEVICE1 and DEVICE2) may be entered, of which, at least one must be activated
for printing.
• The parameter DEVICE/LANGUAGE determines which output device is to be used.

• The parameter PRINT TO FILE determines if the output is in the form of a file.

• The parameter ORIENTATION sets the page format to horizontal or vertical (portrait).
Selecting the type of printer automatically sets the parameters PRINT TO FILE and ORIENTATION
to values which correspond to a standard mode with this output device. Other printer-dependent
parameters such as FORMFEED, PAPERFEED etc., can be modified under Windows NT in the
printer properties window (START/SETTINGS/PRINTER/SETTINGS/....).

Table 1-1 shows the standard factory settings for the two output devices.

The factory settings of DEVICE 1 correspond to output format "WMF" (Windows Metafile), printing is
performed in a file. WMF is a common format which is used for the import of hardcopies (eg
measurement windows) to other Windows applications that support this format (eg WinWord).

The factory setting of DEVICE 2 is "Clipboard". In this setting the printout is copied to the Windows
NT clipboard. Most of Windows applications support the clipboard. The clipboard content can be
directly inserted in a document via EDIT - PASTE.

Table 1-1 Factory settings for DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 in the HARDCOPY-DEVICE SETTINGS menu.

Parameter Parameter Name DEVICE 1 Settings DEVICE 2 Settings

Output Device DEVICE/LANGUAGE WINDOWS METAFILE CLIPBOARD

Output PRINT TO FILE YES ---

Paper Format ORIENTATION --- ---

In the following example, a HP DeskJet 660C printer is connected to interface LPT1 and configured as
DEVICE2 of the instrument to output hardcopies of the measurement screen.

Switch off device.

Connect printer to interface LPT1.

Switch on device.

1119.5063.12 1.29 E-12

Connecting an Output Device FSIQ

Select printer driver under Windows NT

À Press key combination <ALT> <SYSREQ>
The Windows NT screen is displayed.

À In the Start menu press first "Setting" and

then "Printers".
The printer window is opened.

À Double-click symbol "Add Printer".

The "Add Printer Wizard" window is
opened. This window leads through the
following printer driver installation.

À Click first "My computer" and then "Next".

The available ports are displayed.

À Select LPT1 port.

The selection is marked by a tick.

À Click "Next".
The available printer drivers are displayed.
The left-hand selection table indicates the
manufacturers and the right-hand one the
available printer drivers.

1119.5063.12 1.30 E-12

FSIQ Connecting an Output Device

À Mark "HP" in selection table

"Manufacturers" and "HP DeskJet 660C"
in selection table "Printers".
Note: If the desired type of output device
is not shown in this list, it means
that it is not supported by
Windows NT.

À Click "Next".
The entry field for the printer name is
displayed.

À The printer name can be modified in the

entry field "Printer name" (max. 60
characters).

If one or more printers are already

installed, a query is displayed in this
window to ask if the printer last installed as
default printer should be selected for the
Windows NT applications (Do you want
your Windows-based programs to use this
printer as default printer?) "No" is preset.

À Click "Next".
A query is displayed for providing the
printer in the network. This query is
irrelevant when installing a local printer.
The answer "Not shared" is preset.

À Click "Next".
The window for starting a test page is
displayed. The test page is for checking if
the installation was successful.

1119.5063.12 1.31 E-12

Connecting an Output Device FSIQ

À Switch on printer.
À Click Yes (recommended)".
À Click "Finish".
A test page is printed out if the installation
was successful.
If the test page is not printed out or not
completely, the Windows NT online help
offers troubleshooting instructions under
the entry "Printer Trouble Shooting".

Note:
If after clicking "Finish" the user is asked to
specify the path for the printer driver, this
printer installation should be performed under
the administrator identification (see section
"Controller Function".

The instrument has to be configured with this

printer for the printout of the measurement
screen.

Configuring HP DeskJet 660C.

À Click button "R&S Analyzer Interface".
The measurement screen is displayed.

À Press the SETTINGS key in the

H AR D CO P Y
HARDCOPY
HARDCOPY field.
DEVICE
START
The SETTING menu is opened.
COLOR
ON OFF
SETTING
TRC COLOR
AUTO INC

HARDCOPY
DEVICE À Press the HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey.
The HARDCOPY DEVICE submenu is
opened and the current settings of the two
possible output devices are displayed on
the screen in the form of tables .

SETTINGS HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS À Press SETTING DEVICE2.

DEVICE2
Device1 WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File YES Line DEVICE2 is marked with the
Orientation --- selection bar.

Device2 CLIPBOARD
Print to File ---
Orientation ---

1119.5063.12 1.32 E-12

FSIQ Connecting an Output Device

DATA ENTRY HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS À Press one of the unit keys.
-dBm Device1 WINDOWS METAFILE
s GHz
V
Print to File YES
DEVICE
The selection box DEVICE is displayed on
Orientation --- the screen. The current selection is
CLIPBOARD
marked by a tick and highlighted by the
Device2 CLIPBOARD WINDOWS METAFILE
ENHANCED METAFILE
selection bar.
Print to File ---
Orientation --- BITMAP FILE
HP DeskJet 660C

DATA VARIATION À Press cursor key Æ until the entry HP

DeskJet 600C is highlighted by the
selection bar.

DATA ENTRY
HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS À Press one of the unit keys.
-dBm
Device1 WINDOWS METAFILE
s
V GHz
Print to File YES The selection box DEVICE is closed and
Orientation --- HP DeskJet 660C is entered in line
DEVICE2.
Device2 HP Deskjet 660C
Print to File NO
Orientation PORTRAIT Note:
Selecting the type of printer automatically
sets the parameters PRINT TO FILE and
ORIENTATION to values which correspond
to a standard mode with this output device.
Other printer-dependent parameters such as
PAPERSIZE, can be modified under
Windows NT in the printer properties window
(START/SETTINGS/PRINTER/SETTINGS)..

ENABLE
Switch on printer.
DEV1 DEV2
À Press ENABLE softkey until DEV2 is
marked on the second softkey line.
Printing can then be started with the
START key in the HARDCOPY menu.

MENU Return to main menu

À Press the menu key several times.
Note: After the installation, the "Service
Pack X" of Windows NT is to be re-
installed, see "New Installation of
Windows NT Software".

1119.5063.12 1.33 E-12

Connecting a CD ROM Drive FSIQ

Connecting a CD-ROM Drive

Caution:
The CD-ROM may only be connected when the instrument is switched off (STANDBY).
If this is not observed correct operation of the CD-ROM and the instrument cannot be
guaranteed.

Notes: - The installation of a CD-ROM is possible only under the administrator identification (see
section "Controller Function").
- After the installation, the "Service Pack X" of Windows NT is to be re-installed, see "New
Installation of Windows NT Software".
- To ensure that the instrument performs an autologin, the user identification is to be reset to
"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function",

The instrument is fitted with a rear-panel interface LPT1 for the connection of a CD-ROM drive.
LPT

The following CD-ROM drives are supported:

− MICROSOLUTIONS BACKPACK External CD-ROM.

− FREECOM IQ DRIVE
− ADAPTEC Parallel SCSI Adapter + SCSI CD-ROM

After connection, the CD-ROM drive is to be installed under Windows NT.

Switch off device.

Connect CD-ROM drive to interface LPT1 of the

instrument and to AC power source.

Switch on device.

Administrator identification
À Press key combination <ALT> <SYSREQ>
The Windows NT screen is displayed.

À Call the logout window with "Shut Down" in

the "Start" menu.

1119.5063.12 1.34 E-12

FSIQ Connecting a CD ROM Drive

À Mark entry "Shut down and log on as a

different user".

À Press Shift key and click button "Yes" at the

same time.
The login window is displayed.

À Enter "administrator" under "name" and

"894129" under "password", confirm entry
with "OK".

Select driver under Windows NT

À In the Start menu press first "Setting" and

then "Control Panel".
The system control window is opened.

À Double-click symbol "SCSI Adapters".

The "SCSI Adapters" window is opened.

À Click "Driver" index card and then button

"Add".
The list of installed drivers is displayed.

À Click "Have Disk".

This window leads through the following
installation.

Note: After the installation, the "Service Pack

X" of Windows NT is to be re-installed,
see "New Installation of Windows NT
Software".

1119.5063.12 1.35 E-12

Windows NT Software FSIQ

Firmware Update
The installation of a new firmware version can be performed using the built-in diskette drive and does
not require opening the spectrum analyzer. The firmware update kit contains several diskettes.
The installation program is called up in the CONFIGURATION - SETUP menu.

Insert diskette 1 into the drive.

CONFIGURATION Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu

MODE
À Press the SETUP key in the CONFIGURATION
field.
SETUP

The SETUP menu is opened.

MENU À Change to the right-hand menu using the menu key.

FIRMWARE À Press the FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey.

UPDATE
The submenu is opened.

UPDATE À Press the UPDATE softkey.

The installation program starts and leads the user
through the remaining steps of the update.

The installation can be cancelled.

À Press the RESTORE softkey.

RESTORE
The previous firmware version is restored.

1119.5063.12 1.36 E-12

FSIQ Firmware Update

Installing Windows NT Software

The driver software and the system settings of Windows NT are exactly adapted to the measurement
functions of the instrument. Correct operation of the instrument can therefore be guaranteed only if the
software and hardware used is released or offered by Rohde & Schwarz.
The use of other software or hardware may cause malfunctioning or failures in the functions of the
instrument.
A current list of released software can be obtained from your nearest Rohde&Schwarz agency (see list
of addresses).

After each software installation requiring the administrator identification, it is necessary to re-install the
"Service Pack X" of Windows NT (also with administrator identification; see section "Controller
Function"):

Re-installing Service Pack X

À In the Start menu press first "Setting" and then

"Run".
The entry window is opened.

À Enter "C:\SPX\I386\UPDATE" into the command

line and start installation with "OK".
The following window leads through the installation.

1119.5063.12 1.37 E-12

Options FSIQ

Options
Notes: - Option FSE-B13, 1 dB Attenuator, is described in Chapter 4, Section "Level Display/RF
Input"
- Options FSE-B8 to B12, Tracking Generator, are described in Chapter 4, Section "Tracking
Generator"

Option FSE-B17 – Second IEC/IEEE Interface

Notes: - The installation of option FSE-B17 is possible only under the administrator identification
(see section "Controller Function").
- After the installation, the "Service Pack X" of Windows NT is to be re-installed, see "New
Installation of Windows NT Software".
- To ensure that the instrument performs an autologin, the user identification is to be reset to
"instrument" after the next power-up, see section "Controller Function".
Besides the instrument external devices can also be controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus using the optional
2nd bus interface FSE-B17 and the computer function for instrument. The interface software permits
IEC/IEEE-bus commands to be included in user programs. The installation instructions are enclosed
with the option.

Installing the software

The operating software is already installed and need not be loaded from the driver diskettes which serve
as backup diskettes.
The driver must be loaded on the start-up of Windows NT. To do this, enter the type of board, configure
the board and enter the parameters for the connected equipment. If the option is factory fitted, all this
has been done in the factory.
The following parameters may not be changed after selection on configuration of the board:
Board Type ...................AT-GPIB/TNT
Base I/O Address .............02C0h
Interrupt Level ..............3
DMA Channel ..................5
Enable Auto Serial Polling ...No
For further parameters, refer to manual for the board.

Selecting the board type

À Click "Start" in the task bar.
À Click consecutively "Settings", "Control
Panel" and "GPIB" in this sequence.
The "GPIB Configuration" menu for
selecting the board type and configuring
the board is opened.

À Click button "Board Type".

The "Board Type" menu for selecting the
board type is opened.

1119.5063.12 1.38 E-12

FSIQ Options

À Mark "GPIB0" in the "GPIB Board" list.

À Mark "AT-GPIB/TNT" in the "Board Type"
list.
À Confirm the selection with "OK".
The "GPIB Configuration" menu is
displayed again.

À Click button "Configure".

The "GPIB0 (AT-GPIB/TNT)" menu for
configuring the board is opened.

Configuring the board

À Set "3" in the "Interrupt Level" list.
À Click button "Software".
The menu is extended.

À Deactivate (= no tick) "Enable Auto Serial

Polling" in the "Advanced Items" field.
À Quit the menu with "OK".

The "GPIB Configuration" menu is displayed

again.

Note:
The settings of the following parameters
should not be no longer modified.
Board Type ......... AT-GPIB/TNT
Base I/O Address ......... 02C0h
Interrupt Level .............. 3
DMA Channel .................. 5
Enable Auto Serial Polling .. No

1119.5063.12 1.39 E-12

Options FSIQ

Setting the parameters for the connected

equipment
À Mark the instrument in the "Device
Template" list and confirm selection with
"OK".
The "DEV.. Settings" menu is opened.

À Perform the settings for the selected unit

in the "DEV.. Settings" menu.
The logic name for the instrument is preset
with DEV1 and address 20. See board
manual for further units.

Note: When assigning logic names to

connected equipment note that
these names do not correspond to
the directory names under DOS.

À Terminate setting with "OK".

The query asking if the GPIB software
should be re-started is displayed.

À Select "No".

À Re-start controller with Start-Restart in the

task bar.
After the controller has been re-started,
the settings for the GPIB interface are
effective.

Note: After the installation, the "Service

Pack X" of Windows NT is to be re-
installed, see "New Installation of
Windows NT Software".

Use of DOS Programs

When using DOS programs, driver GPIB-NT.COM should be loaded. For this to take place, the line
device=C:\PROGRA~1\NATION~1\GPIB\NI488\DosWin16\Gpib-nt.com has to be activated in
the file C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\CONFIG.NT. If the option is factory fitted, this line will have been
entered in the factory.

Operation
The second IEC/IEEE-bus interface corresponds physically to that of the instrument (see Chapter 8).
If the instrument is to be controlled via the IEC/IEEE bus, a bus cable must be plugged to both bus
connectors. The interface can be driven under DOS/WINDOWS3.1/95/NT by R&S software (FS-K3,
Order No. 1057.3028.02, etc.) or by user-written software. The handling of IEC/IEEE-bus commands in
user programs is described in the manual for the card.
The files are in directory C:\Program Files\National Instrument\GPIB\NI488.

1119.5063.12 1.40 E-12

FSIQ Options

Option FSE-B5 - FFT Filter

Option FFT Filter FSE-B5 is a firmware option. It has to be enabled by a keyword.

Prerequisites
1. Keywords
The keyword is printed on a label which is part of the equipment supplied and has to be stuck to the
rear of FSIQ.
2. Hardware
The modification state of module DIGITAL IF has to be either MODIF INDEX > 5 or
MODIF INDEX = 5 and HW CODE ≥ 6. The modification state can be checked in the module list
INSTALLED COMPONENTS in menu INFO HARDWARE+OPTIONS.
3. Firmware
The modification state of the firmware has to ≥ 1.62. The modification state can be checked in table
FIRMWARE VERSION in menu INFO FIRMWARE VERSIONS.

Enabling the option

CONFIGURATION
À Call up menu SETUP by pressing the SETUP key.
MODE

SETUP

OPTIONS
À Call up submenu OPTIONS by pressing the OPTIONS softkey.

Table FIRMWARE OPTIONS is displayed, listing the installed

options.

ENABLE NEW
OPTION À Activate the entry field by pressing the ENABLE NEW OPTION
soft key.

DATA ENTRY À Enter the 10-digit keyword via the numeric keypad and terminate
1
the entry by pressing one of the unit keys.
. Now option FFT filter is listed in table FIRMWARE OPTIONS.
.
.
dBm Note: Message ’option key invalid’ indicates an invalid entry.
mV MHz
ms

1119.5063.12 1.41 E-12

Options FSIQ

Option FSE-B16 – Ethernet Adapter

With the option Ethernet Adapter FSE-B16, the device can be connected to an Ethernet-LAN (local area
network). It is possible to transmit data via the network and to use the network printer. The adapter
operates with a 10 MHz Ethernet in line with standards IEEE 802.3 10Base2 (Thin Ethernet,
CheaperNet, BNC-Net) (B16 model 03) or 10Base5 (Thick Ethernet) (B16 model 02).

Hardware Installation

Caution:
Prior to installation contact the network administrator, especially in case of complex
LAN installations since mistakes in cabling might have influence the whole network.

If the adapter is installed at the factory, it is preconfigured. In case of retrofitting, refer to the installation
instructions. The hardware settings must not be modified since the functions of the device could
otherwise be impaired.
The following parameters are factory-set:
I/O Addr. 300, IRQ 5, MEM D0000
The connection with the network depends on the connectors used in the network.

BNC (Thin Ethernet, CheaperNet; FSE-B16 Var. 03)

Connection The device is looped into the LAN segment via rear-panel 2 BNC
connectors.
If a cable is not connected to one of the BNC connectors, this BNC
connector has to be terminated with 50 Ohm. BNC T connectors
must not be used.

Network traffic
Note that the network traffic is disturbed if a segment is interrupted.

Requirements Thin Ethernet segment requirements have to be complied with:

- maximum segment length of 185 m
- minimum distance between the connectors of 0.5 m
- maximum of 30 connectors per segment.

If components that comply with enhanced requirements are

exclusively used (Ethernet Adapter FSE-B16 complies with the
enhanced requirements):
- maximum length of segment of 300 m
- maximum number of connectors of 100

With repeaters used:

- maximum total length of the network of 900 m containing a
- maximum of 3 segments
- maximum of two repeaters between two connectors

1119.5063.12 1.42 E-12

FSIQ Options

AUI (Thick Ethernet; FSE B16 Var. 02)

Connection The device is connected to the LAN segment using a transceiver

cable (DB-15 AUI connector, not part of the equipment supplied)
which is connected to the rear panel and to the transceiver.

Network traffic The connection does not conflict with the network traffic. The device
can also be disconnected from the network without any problems
but make sure that data are not being transmitted.

Requirements The Thick Ethernet segment requirements have to be taken into

account.
- The maximum segment length should be 500 m and the
- distance between the connectors should at least be 2.5 m.
- A maximum of 100 connectors may be used in a segment.

With repeaters used,

- the total length of the network must not be more than 2500 m
containing
- a maximum of 3 segments.
- There should be no more than two repeaters between two
connectors.

If other network components are used, these conditions may vary.

RJ45 (UTP, 10BaseT, Western Connector)

Connection The device is connected to the LAN segment using a RJ45 cable
(not part of the equipment supplied) which is connected to the rear
panel and to the network hub of the LAN segment.

Network traffic This connection does not conflict with the network traffic. The
device can also be disconnected from the network without any
problems but make sure that data are not being transmitted.

Requirements Since RJ45 is not a bus but a star topology no special requirements
have to be taken into account for the connection.
The LAN requirements should be considered in the installation.

Software Installation
Data transmission within the network is by means of data blocks, the so-called packets. Besides user
data other information, the so-called protocol data (transmitter, receiver, type of data, order) are
transmitted. The drivers corresponding to the protocol have to be installed to process protocol
information. A network operating system is required for network services (data transmission, directory
services, printing in the network) and thus has to be installed.

1119.5063.12 1.43 E-12

Options FSIQ

Calling up Configuration Menu for Network Settings

À Click "Start" in the task bar.

À Click consecutively "Settings", "Control
Panel" and "Network".
The "Network" configuration menu for
network settings is opened.

Registering the Identification

Note: It is important for the computer name to be unique in the network..

À Select "Identification".
À Confirm computer and workgroup names
with "OK" or enter new names in submenu
"Change".

1119.5063.12 1.44 E-12

FSIQ Options

Installation and Configuration of the Driver for the Network Adapter

À Select "Adapter".
À Click "Add" and mark network driver "SMC
8416 EtherEZ" and select with "OK".
The query "Files.." is displayed.

À Answer it by clicking "Continue".

The "SMCEthernet Card Setup" window is
displayed.

À Close the window with "OK".

Some files are copied and the network
adapter is displayed under "Network
Adapters".
The entry "MS Loopback Adapter" refers
to a driver which ensures instrument
control and should not be modified.
Note: The network adapter settings must
not be modified since this may cause
problems to the instrument.

Installation of Network Protocols

Note: The network administrator knows which protocols are to be used..

À Select "Protocol".
À Click "Add", mark the desired protocol and
select with "OK".
This operation has to be performed
several times when several protocols are
selected.

À Execute the installation by clicking

"Continue".
Note: If a protocol requires further settings,
they can be performed with "Proper-
ties" after marking the corresponding
entry. If further settings are not
possible, this field is gray.

1119.5063.12 1.45 E-12

Options FSIQ

Installation of Network Services

To utilize the resources of the network it is necessary to install the corresponding services.

Note: The network administrator knows which services are to be used.

À Select "Services".
À Click "Add", mark the desired service and
select with "OK".
This operation has to be performed
several times when several services are
selected.
Some services are pre-installed and can
be cleared with "Remove" if they are not
needed.

À Execute the installation by clicking

"Continue".
Note: If a service requires further settings,
they can be performed with
"Properties" after marking the corres-
ponding entry. If further settings are
not possible, this field is gray.

Terminating the Installation

À Quit the "Network" configuration menu for

network settings with "OK".
The settings are checked and processed.
Missing information is queried.

À Answer the query "You must shutdown..."

with "Yes".
The settings are valid after computer re-
start.

Note: After the installation, the "Service

Pack X" of Windows NT is to be re-
installed, see "New Installation of
Windows NT Software".

1119.5063.12 1.46 E-12

FSIQ Options

Examples of Configurations

Network Protocols Services Notes

NOVELL Netware NWLink IPX/SPX Client Service for The "Frame Type" used under "Protocols -
Compatible NetWare Properties" should be set.
Transport

IP networks TCP/IP Protocol Simple TCP/IP An "IP Address" unambiguous in the network
(FTP, TELNET, WWW, Services should be set under "Protocols - Properties".
GOPHER, etc.)

MICROSOFT network NetBEUI Protocol Workstation A name unambiguous in the network should be
or Server registered under "Identification - Computer
TCP/IP Protocol Name".

Operation
After installing the network operating system it is possible to transfer data between the device and other
computers and to use printers in the network. A precondition for network operation is the authorization to
use network resources. Resources may be access to the file directories of other computers or the use of
a central printer. The network or server administrator will grant the authorizations. The network name of
the resource and the corresponding authorization are required. Passwords protect the resources
against improper use. A user name is normally assigned to every authorized user. The user also has a
password. Resources may then be assigned to the user. The type of access, i.e. whether data are only
read or also written as well as a shared access to data has to be defined. Other types are possible
depending on the network operating system.

NOVELL
Operating system NETWARE from NOVELL is as server-supported system. Data transfer between the
individual workstations is not possible. Data transfer is between workstation computers and a central
computer, the server. This server provides storage capacity and the connection to the network printers.
Like under DOS, the data on a server are organized in directories and are offered to the workstation as
virtual drives. A virtual drive on a workstation is like a hard disk and data can be processed accordingly.
This is called drive mapping. Also network printers can be addressed as normal printers.
Network operating system NOVELL is available in two forms: NETWARE 3 and NETWARE 4 NDS. In
the previous version NETWARE 3, each server manages its own resources itself and is independent. A
user has to be managed separately on each server. For NOVELL 4 NDS, all resources are managed in
the NDS (NOVELL DIRECTORY SERVICE). The user only has to log in once and gains access to the
resources released for him. The individual resources and the user are managed as objects in a
hierarchical tree (NDS TREE). The position of the object in the tree is called CONTEXT for NETWARE
and must be known in order to access the resources.

MICROSOFT
For MICROSOFT, data can be transferred between workstations (peer-to-peer) but also between
workstations and servers. The servers can provide access to individual files as well as the connection to
network printers. Like under DOS, the data on a server are organized in directories and are offered to
the workstation as virtual drives. A virtual drive on a workstation is like a hard disk and data can be
processed accordingly. This is called drive mapping. Also network printers can be addressed as normal
printers. A connection to DOS, WINDOWS FOR WORKGROUPS, WINDOWS95, WINDOWS NT is
possible.

1119.5063.12 1.47 E-12

Options FSIQ

Installing a user
After the network software has been installed, the instrument logs with an error message during the next
start-up since there is no user "Instrument" (= user identification for NT autologin) in the network. It is
therefore necessary to install a user which should be the same for Windows NT and for the network.
The network administrator is responsible for the installation of new users in the network.

Note: The installation of new users is possible only under the administrator identification (see
section "Controller Function").

À Click "Start" in the task bar.

À Click consecutively "Programs"
"Administrative Tools (Common)" and
"User Manager" .
The "User Manager" menu is opened.

À Click "User" and select "New User".

The menu "New User" for entering user
data is opened.

À Fill in the lines "Username", "Password"

and "Confirm Password" and confirm
the entry with OK.
The user data should correspond to the
network settings.

1119.5063.12 1.48 E-12

FSIQ Options

Only NOVELL network:

À Click "Start" in the task bar.
Configure NOVELL Client
À Click consecutively "Settings",
"Control Panel", "CSNW".

NOVELL 3.x
À Click "Preferred Server".
À Under "Select Preferred Server"
select the NOVELL server for which
the user has been installed.

NOVELL 4.x
À Click "Default Tree and Context" .
À Enter the NDS Tree under "Tree" and,
under "Context", the hierarchical path
for which the user has been installed.

Note: These specifications can be

obtained from the network
administrator.

Login in the Network

Network login is automatically performed with the operating system login. A prerequisite is that the user
name and the password are the same under Windows NT and in the network.

Use of Network Drives

À Click "Start" in the task bar.

À Click consecutively "Programs" and
"Windows NT Explorer".
À Click "Network" line in the "All
Directories" list.
A list of available network drives is
displayed.

À Click "Tools" and "Map Network Drive".

In the list "Shared Directories:" the
network paths available in the network
are displayed.
À Mark the desired network path.

1119.5063.12 1.49 E-12

Options FSIQ

À Select the drive under "Drive:"

À Activate "Reconnect at Logon:" if the
link is to be automatically established at
each unit start.
À Connect the network path to the
selected drive with "OK".
The user name and the password are
queried. The drive is then displayed in
the "All Directories" list of Explorer.
Note: Only drives for which an
authorization is available may
be connected.

Disconnect link:
À Click "Tools" and "Disconnect Network
Drive" in Explorer.
À Select under "Drive:" the drive whose
connection is to be removed.
À Disconnect link with "OK". The query
should be answered with "Yes".

Printing on a Network Printer

Select printer driver under Windows NT

À Press key combination <ALT> <SYSREQ>
The Windows NT screen is displayed.

À In the Start menu press first "Setting" and

then "Printers".
The printer window is opened.

1119.5063.12 1.50 E-12

FSIQ Options

À Double-click line "Add Printer".

The "Add Printer Wizard" window is
opened. This window leads through the
following printer driver installation.

À Click first "Network Printer Source" and

then "Next".
The list of available network printers is
displayed.

À Mark the printer and select with "OK".

The available printer drivers are displayed.
The left-hand selection table indicates the
manufacturers and the right-hand one the
available printer drivers.

À Mark the manufacturer in selection table

"Manufacturers" and then the printer driver
in selection table "Printers".

1119.5063.12 1.51 E-12

Options FSIQ

À Click "Next".
The window for starting a test page is
displayed. The test print is for checking if
the installation was successful.

À Switch on printer.
À Click Yes (recommended)".
À Click "Finish".
A test page is printed out if the installation
was successful.
If the test page is not printed out or not
completely, the Windows NT online help
offers troubleshooting instructions under
the entry "Printer Trouble Shooting".

The instrument has to be configured with

this printer for the printout of the
measurement screen. This configuration is
described in this chapter in the section
"Connecting an Output Device".

Server Function
With the server function data can be provided on the instrument for use in other computers. This is
possible only in the MICROSOFT network. The server function is released after network installation as
standard. If this is not required, it should be deactivated, see "Installation of Network Services".
The availability of instrument data in the network is controlled by releases. The release is a property of
a file or of a directory. To grant a release, the object is to be marked in "Windows NT Explorer" and
pressed by the right-hand mouse key. The release is performed under Properties -> Sharing by
selecting "Shared As". Other computers can then access these objects with the names allocated under
"Share Name". The online help gives further information on the network operation.

TCP/IP

The TCP/IP protocol allows files to be transmitted between different computer systems. A program
running on both computers is required to control the data transfer. The same operating or file system
need not be used by the two partners. A file transfer is possible between DOS/WINDOWS and UNIX,
for example. One partner has to be configured as host the other as client or vice versa. The system
performing several processes at the same time (UNIX) will normally be the host. The usual file transfer
program used for TCP/IP is FTP (File Transfer Protocol). An FTP host is installed as standard on most
of the UNIX systems.

After installing the TCP/IP services, a terminal link can be established with "Start" - "Programs" -
"Accessories" - "Telnet" or a data transmission with FTP using "Start" - "Run" "ftp" - "OK". Thus, all
controller systems can be accessed which support these universal protocols (UNIX, VMS, ...).

Further information is given in the NT online help which can be called up with "Help".

1119.5063.12 1.52 E-12

FSIQ Options

FTP
For a complete description of the functions and commands see the FTP documentation.

Establishing a connection À Click "Start" and then "Run" in the task bar.

The program is started with the DOS command

FTP
The following command sets up the connection:
OPEN <xx.xx.xx.xx>
xx.xx.xx.xx = IP address, e.g. 89.0.0.13

File transmission To transmit a file to the target system, the following command is
used:
PUT <file name>
file name = name of file e.g. DATA.TXT.

To call a file from the target system, the following command is

used:
GET<file name>
file name = name of file e.g. SETTING.DAT.
TYPE B
allows the transmission of files in the BINARY format, no
conversion is performed.
TYPE A
allows the transmission of files in the ASCII format. Thus, control
characters are converted so that the text files can be read on the
target system, too.

Examples:
PUT C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT
sends the AUTOEXEC.BAT file to the target system.
LCD DATA
changes to subdirectory DATA in the computer function.
CD SETTING
changes to the subdirectory SETTING on the target system.

Changing directories The command

LCD <path>
changes the directory as the corresponding DOS command.

LDIR
lists the directory.
These commands refer to the computer function of the
instrument. If the ’L’ preceding the commands is omitted, they
apply to the target system.

1119.5063.12 1.53 E-12

Options FSIQ

Option FSIQB70 - DSP and IQ Memory Extension (2 X 512 K)

FSIQB70 is a hardware option. FSIQ has to be equipped with this option to enable the installation of
future firmware options such as option FSIQK71, Code Domain Power Measurement for IS95.

Moreover, option FSIQB70 is the prerequisite for a R&S demo software used for the CDP measurement
on W-CDMA signals (NTT DoCoMo and 3GPP downlink).

Apart from this, FSIQB70 has no effect on the operation of the unit.

1119.5063.12 1.54 E-12

FSIQ Contents - Getting Started

Contents - Chapter 2 "Getting Started"

2 Getting Started
Level and Frequency Measurements............................................................................................. 2.1
Measurement Task.................................................................................................................. 2.2
Important Spectrum Analyzer Functions ................................................................................. 2.2
Sweep, Level and Frequency Measurements – Example 1 .................................................. 2.2
Sweep, Level and Frequency Measurements – Example 2 .................................................. 2.7
Level Measurement Accuracy ................................................................................................. 2.9
Measurement of Harmonic Separation ........................................................................................ 2.10
Measurement Task................................................................................................................ 2.10
Important Spectrum Analyzer Functions ............................................................................... 2.11
Measurement Procedure - Harmonic Separation – Example 1........................................... 2.12
Measurement Procedure - Harmonic Separation – Example 2........................................... 2.16
Measurement Procedure - Harmonic Separation – Example 3........................................... 2.20
Measurement of Intermodulation Distortions............................................................................. 2.24
Measuring Task ..................................................................................................................... 2.24
Important Spectrum-Analyzer Functions ............................................................................... 2.25
Measurement......................................................................................................................... 2.26
Time-domain Measurements with Pulsed Signals ..................................................................... 2.31
Measuring Task ..................................................................................................................... 2.31
Important Spectrum Analyzer Functions ............................................................................... 2.31
Measurement......................................................................................................................... 2.32

1119.5063.12 I-2.1 E-1

Contents - Getting Started FSIQ

1119.5063.12 I-2.2 E-1

FSIQ Level and Frequency Measurements

2 Getting Started

Chapter 2 presents basic measurements performed by a signal analyzer to provide fast and easy
access to the operation of the instrument.
Before starting any measurement with the FSIQ, please note the instructions given in chapter 1 for
putting the instrument into operation. In chapters 3 you will find detailed information on customizing the
instrument and the display.
For a systematic explanation of all menus, functions and parameters and background information refer
to the reference part in chapter 4.

In the following description, each step is explained in detail using the FSIQ so that the instrument can be
immediately used without the need for learning all of the available functions. The described
measurement applications are:
• Measurement of the level and frequency of a sine wave signal.
• Measurement of harmonics.
• Measurement of third order intermodulation and determination of the intercept point.
• Zero span measurement of a pulsed signal.

All of the following examples assume the standard settings for the analyzer. These are set with the
PRESET key in the SYSTEM key field. The most important standard settings are shown in Table 2-1. A
complete listing of standard settings can be found in chapter 4.

Table 2-1 Important PRESET settings

Parameter Parameter name Setting

FSIQ3 FSIQ7 FSIQ26 FSIQ40

Mode Mode Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer
Center frequency Center Frequency 1.75 GHz 3.5 GHz 13.25 GHz 20 GHz
Active Freq. Meas. Range Span 3.5 GHz 7 GHz 26.5 GHz 40 GHz
Reference Level Ref Level – 20 dBm – 20 dBm – 20 dBm – 20 dBm
RF Attenuation RF ATT 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB
Level Display Range Level Range 100 dB 100 dB 100 dB 100 dB
Resolution Bandwidth Res Bw 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz
Video Bandwidth Video Bw 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz
Sweep Time Sweep Time 5 ms 5 ms 150 ms 225 ms
Trigger Trigger free run free run free run free run

Level and Frequency Measurements

Measurement Task
The determination of the level and frequency of a signal is one of the most frequently encountered
measurement tasks typically performed by a spectrum analyzer. Usually, for the measurement of an
unknown signal, the PRESET settings are initially selected. If levels above +30 dBm are expected or
possible, then a power attenuator must be inserted ahead of the analyzer input. Without attenuation,
these signal levels might damage or destroy the input attenuator or the input mixer.

1119.5063.12 2.1 E-10

Level and Frequency Measurements FSIQ

Important Spectrum Analyzer Functions

Important parameters for level and frequency measurements are the settings for the CENTER
FREQUENCY, the selection of the active measurement frequency range (SPAN) and the MARKER
functions.

Sweep, Level and Frequency Measurements – Example 1

In this example, a signal with a frequency of 200 MHz and a level of -10 dBm are applied to the RF
INPUT of the analyzer. The selection of the center frequency and the active frequency range takes place
manually.
The necessary setup functions are performed almost without exception by the fixed-function keys. The
menus which appear with a key can, for the most part, be ignored. In this manner, fast, key-oriented
operation is possible.
The following setup steps are performed:
1. Reset the instrument.
2. Apply the test signal.
3. Set the center frequency to 200 MHz.
4. Reduce the active measurement frequency range (SPAN) to 1 MHz.
5. Measure the level and frequency using the marker.
6. Optimize the measurement dynamic range and reduce the level measurement error.
7. Measure the frequency with the internal frequency counter

SYSTEM
1. Reset the instrument.

PRESET
À Press the PRESET key.

2. Connect the test signal to the RF INPUT located

on the instrument front panel.

FREQUENCY
3. Set the center frequency to 200 MHz.

CENTER
À Press the CENTER key in the FREQUENCY key
field.
CENTER FREQUENCY
1.75 GHz The input field for center frequency appears on the
display screen.

DATA ENTRY À Enter 200 via the numeric keypad and terminate
with the MHz key.
2

0
CENTER FREQUENCY
mV
dBm MHz 200 MHz
ms

1119.5063.12 2.2 E-10

FSIQ Level and Frequency Measurements

FREQUENCY 4. Reduce the measurement frequency range

(SPAN) to 1 MHz.
SPAN
À Press the SPAN key in the FREQUENCY key field.
SPAN
SPAN
400 MHz

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 1 via the numeric keypad and terminate with
the MHz key.
1
Note: In conjunction with the change in measure-
mV SPAN SPAN
FREQUENCY ment frequency range (SPAN), the resolution
dBm MHz
ms 1 MHz bandwidth (RES BW), video bandwidth
(VIDEO BW) and sweep time (SWEEP TIME)
are set to new values since they are defined
as coupled functions in the standard PRESET
settings.

MARKER
5. Measure level and frequency using the marker
NORMAL
and read the resulting values on the display
MARKER 1 [T1]
-10.5 dBm screen.
200.00000000 MHz
À Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER key field.
The marker jumps to the largest signal peak shown
on the display screen.

Note: When the marker is switched on for the

first time, it automatically performs the
PEAK SEARCH function as demonstrated
in this example.
If a marker was already active, the
SEARCH key in the MARKER key field
must be pressed in order to set the
currently active marker to the displayed
signal maximum.

The level and frequency measured by the marker

can be read in the marker field at the upper edge of
the display screen. (see Fig. 2-1).

DATA VARIATION À Using the roll-key, the marker can be moved along
the measured curve.

The corresponding level and frequency values

appear in the marker field.

1119.5063.12 2.3 E-10

Level and Frequency Measurements FSIQ

Fig. 2-1 shows the measured curve on the display screen over a 1 MHz range as well as the marker
level and frequency values.

Markerfield
|
USER
Marker 1[T1] RBW 20 kHz RF ATT 10 dB
Ref Lvl -10.8 dBm VBW 20 kHz MARKER
-20 dBm 200.0052 MHz SWT 7.5 ms Unit dBm NORMAL
-20 1
MARKER 1

-30
MARKER 2

-40
MARKER 3

-50
MARKER 4

-60 SIGNAL
COUNT

-70
MARKER
DEMOD
-80
MARKER
ZOOM
-90
SIGNAL ID
-100
MARKER
INFO
-110
ALL MARKER
OFF
-120
Center 200 MHz 100 kHz/ Span 1 MHz

Fig. 2-1 200-MHz signal. The measured values are displayed in the marker field.

At low signal-to-noise ratios, the level measurement accuracy can be improved by an optimum selection
of the FSIQ parameters. The accuracy of the frequency display can also be enhanced by applying the
internal frequency counter.

6. Optimize the dynamic range and reduce the

MARKER USER level measurement error.
MKR
MARKER -> À Press the MKR→ key in the MARKER key field.
The MARKER-MKR→ menu is opened.
PEAK

MKR->
CENTER

MKR->
REF LEVEL

MKR
À Press MKR → REF LEVEL softkey.
REF LEVEL
The reference level (REF LEVEL) is reduced to the
signal level.

1119.5063.12 2.4 E-10

FSIQ Level and Frequency Measurements

7: Determine the exact frequency with the internal

frequency counter.
Note: The frequency counter measures the frequency
MARKER USER
of the marked signal with the selected counter
NORMAL MARKER resolution and at the accuracy of the internal
NORMAL
MARKER1
frequency reference. A frequency measurement
made using the marker is, however, limited by
MARKER2
N
O the number of horizontal display points and the
MARKER3 applicable resolution bandwidth.
MARKER4 À Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER key field.
N

SIGNAL The MARKER NORMAL menu is opened.

COUNT

SIGNAL
À Press the SIGNAL COUNT softkey.
COUNT
The internal frequency counter is now active and
measures the signal frequency with the PRESET re-
solution. The resolution is to be increased to
10 Hz.

MENU À Press the menu change key .

The supplementary menu is opened.
N

COUNTER
RESOL

USER À Press the COUNTER RESOL softkey.

COUNTER
RESOL COUNTER
The COUNTER RESOLUTION sub-menu is
RESOLUTION
10 kHz opened.
1 kHz
N

100 Hz

10 Hz

À Press the 10 Hz softkey.

MARKER 1 [T1 CNT]
10 Hz -10.5 dBm The desired frequency resolution (10 Hz) is now
200.00001 MHz
selected.
In the marker field, the item [CNT] indicates that the
counter is active (see Fig. 2-2).

1119.5063.12 2.5 E-10

Level and Frequency Measurements FSIQ

USER
Marker 1 [T1 CNT] RBW 20 kHz RF ATT 10 dB
Ref Lvl -10.8 dB m VBW 20 kHz COUNTER
-20 dBm 200.00513 MHz SWT 7.5 ms Unit dBm RESOLUTION
-20 1
10 kHz

-30
1 kHz

-40
100 Hz

-50
10 Hz

-60
1 Hz

-70
0.1 Hz
-80

-90
SIGNAL ID
-100

-110

-120
Center 200 MHz 100 kHz/ Span 1 MHz

Fig. 2-2 Frequency measurement using the internal frequency counter.

Sweep, Level and Frequency Measurements – Example 2

The zoom function (MARKER ZOOM) operates much faster than the manual input of center frequency
and measurement frequency range, and permits the measurement frequency range displayed on the
screen to be as narrow as desired.
As in Example 1, a signal with a frequency of 200 MHz and a level of -10 dBm is applied to the analyzer
RF INPUT.
The following setup steps are performed:
1. Reset the instrument.
2. Apply the signal.
3. Zoom in on the signal.
4. Measure the level and frequency with the marker.
5. Optimize the dynamic range and reduce the level measurement error.
6. Measure the frequency with the internal frequency counter.

Steps 1 to 2 and 4 to 6 correspond to steps 1 to 2 and 5 to 7, respectively, of Example 1. Step 3

replaces the manual input of center frequency and measurement frequency range. (steps 3 and 4).

1119.5063.12 2.6 E-10

FSIQ Level and Frequency Measurements

See steps 1 and 2 of example 1

1. Reset the instrument to standard settings.
2. Connect the test signal to the analyzer RF
INPUT.

MARKER 3. Zoom in on the signal.

NORMAL À Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER key field .

The marker moves to the largest signal displayed on

the screen. In this example, it is the signal at 200
MHz. (PEAK SEARCH function, see step 5 in
Example 1).

À Press the MARKER ZOOM softkey.

MARKER MARKER ZOOM
ZOOM 3.5 GHz The input field for the measurement frequency
range appears on the display screen.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 1 via the numeric keypad and terminate with
the MHz key.
1
After entry of the measurement frequency range,
mV
MHz
MARKER ZOOM the marked signal is counted and then used as the
dBm
ms 1 MHz new center frequency. At the same time, the
entered measurement frequency range is set.
Note: In conjunction with the active measurement
frequency range (SPAN) change, the
resolution bandwidth (RES BW), video
bandwidth (VIDEO BW) and sweep time
(SWEEP TIME) are also set to new values
since they are defined as coupled functions
in the standard PRESET settings.

See steps 5 to 7 of example 1:

4. Read the values for level and frequency as
measured by the marker.
5. Optimize the dynamic range and reduce the
level measurement error.
6. Determine the frequency with the internal
frequency counter.

1119.5063.12 2.7 E-10

Level and Frequency Measurements FSIQ

USER
Marker 1 [T1] RBW 20 kHz RF ATT 10 dB
Ref Lvl -10.8 dB m VBW 20 kHz
-20 dBm 200.0052 MHz SWT 7.5 ms Unit dBm MARKER
NORMAL
-20 1
MARKER 1
MARKER ZOOM
-30 1 MHz
MARKER 2
-40
MARKER 3
-50
MARKER 4
-60
SIGNAL
COUNT
-70
MARKER
-80 DEMOD

MARKER
-90 ZOOM

SIGNAL ID
-100
MARKER
INFO
-110
ALL MARKER
OFF
-120
Center 200 MHz 100 kHz/ Span 1 MHz

Fig. 2-3 The MARKER ZOOM function requires the entry of the measurement frequency range (span)

Level Measurement Accuracy

The level measurement accuracy of an analyzer is influenced by the following parameters:
• RF attenuator (RF-ATT)
• IF amplification
• Resolution bandwidth (RES BW)
• Display range (LEVEL RANGE)
• Display linearity (SCALE FIDELITY)

The error in a level measurement for the FSIQ is < 1 dB for frequencies up to 1 GHz and < 1.5 dB for
frequencies from 1 GHz to 3.5 GHz. This specification includes all of the above mentioned influential
factors. The frequency characteristics of the pertinent modules (RF divider, front end) are stored
individually in memory on each module. The FSIQ initializing routines read out the corresponding values
during execution immediately after the analyzer is turned on and corrects the frequency characteristics
during the sweep. Any errors in the attenuation settings, the filter bandwidth or the video rectifier are
corrected after calling the built-in calibration routines. For calibration purposes, the FSIQ has an internal
120 MHz calibration source which is switched internally to the RF INPUT.
The measurement accuracy is guaranteed only after running the calibration routines. It should be noted,
however, that the individual parameters are so stable that a calibration need only be performed, after
approximately 15 minutes warm-up time, for larger temperature variations. Normally, a weekly
calibration is more than adequate.

1119.5063.12 2.8 E-10

FSIQ Measurement of Harmonic Separation

Measurement of Harmonic Separation

Measurement Task
The measurement of signal harmonics is a frequently occurring task which can be optimally performed
by a spectrum analyzer. In general, all signals will contain harmonics to some degree. Harmonics are
especially critical in high-power transmitters, e.g., in radio transmitters, where a significant radiated
harmonic component may interfere with the reception of other radio services. Generally, non-linear
device characteristics create harmonics which are often selectively reduced through the use of low-pass
filters. Since the spectrum analyzer also has non-linear characteristics, e.g., at the first mixer, it is
necessary to exercise caution during a measurement to insure that the spurious harmonics generated
by the analyzer do not influence the measurement results. If necessary, the fundamental frequency
must be selectively attenuated with respect to the harmonics by insertion of an appropriate high-pass
filter.
For harmonic-content measurements, the achievable measurement dynamic range is dependent upon
the k2 intercept of the spectrum analyzer. The k2 intercept point is defined as the fictitious first-mixer
input level where the levels of the first harmonic and of the fundamental frequency are equal. In practice,
this level cannot be applied to the mixer since, to do so, would cause its destruction. However, using the
k2 intercept point concept, the achievable measurement dynamic range for the harmonics of a Unit
Under Test (UUT) can be calculated with relative simplicity.
As can be seen in Fig.2-4, the harmonic level is reduced by 20 dB when the level at the fundamental
frequency is reduced by 10 dB.

Display k2 Intercept
Level [dBm]
50 [dBm]

40

30

20
Funda-
10 mental First
Harmonic
0

-10

-20
2
1
-30
1 1
-40
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 RF Level
-50 [dBm]

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

Fig.2-4 Theoretical display curve of fundamental and first harmonic with a k2 intercept of 50 dBm.

1119.5063.12 2.9 E-10

Measurement of Harmonic Separation FSIQ

From the linear equations and the given intercept point, the following formula can be derived for the
achievable harmonic separation ak2 in dB:
ak 2 = IP2 − Pe’ (1) ak2 = harmonic separation
Pe = mixer level/dBm
IP2 = k2 intercept point

The formula for the internally produced level P1 at the first harmonic in dBm is:
P1 = 2 • Pe − IP2 (2)
The lower harmonic measurement limit is dictated by the noise figure of the spectrum analyzer. Through
adequate averaging with the video filter, the UUT harmonic level which is to be measured should be at
least 4 dB over the noise figure so that the measurement error caused by the input noise is less than 1
dB.
From the above, the following rules for the measurement of large harmonic separations can be derived:
• Select an IF bandwidth as narrow as possible in order to reduce the noise figure.
• Select the RF attenuation as high as required so that the necessary harmonic separation can still be
measured.

Note: The mixer amplitude is the applied RF level reduced by the selected RF attenuation. The low
distortion (LOW DISTORTION function) mode of the analyzer automatically sets the optimum
RF attenuation for the best harmonic separation.

The maximum harmonic separation is achieved when the harmonics level is equal to the inherent noise
level of the receiver. The corresponding level at the mixer according to (2) is:
Pnoise / dBm + IP 2
Pe [dBm ] =
2
For a 30 Hz resolution bandwidth, (noise level < -140 dB, IP2 = 50 dBm), this level is -45 dBm.
Therefore, according to (1) , the maximum measurable harmonic separation is 95 dB less 4 dB
minimum signal-to-noise ratio.

Important Spectrum Analyzer Functions

In addition to frequency and level settings, the harmonic separation measurement requires, above all,
the delta markers. Also, the MRK→ CF STEP SIZE function (marker frequency = center frequency step-
width) is used in order to quickly measure the individual harmonics with the cursor keys.
There are several methods to measure harmonic content:

ì The measurement of fundamental and harmonic signals in one measurement frequency range.
ì The individual measurement of the harmonic separation in a narrow measurement frequency range.
This method is preferred when high harmonic separation is to be measured (requires large dynamic
range and, thus, narrow resolution bandwidth) or the frequency of the fundamental is very high, i.e., a
very wide measurement frequency range is necessary.

ì The measurement of fundamental and harmonics in two independent windows on the display screen
(SPLIT SCREEN mode).
Example 1 describes the measurement of fundamental and harmonics in one measurement frequency range.
Example 2 describes the measurement of harmonic separation in separate measurement frequency ranges.
Example 3 shows the measurement of fundamental and harmonics in two independent windows on the
display screen.

1119.5063.12 2.10 E-10

FSIQ Measurement of Harmonic Separation

Measurement Procedure - Harmonic Separation – Example 1

The analyzer 10 MHz reference signal is used at the input signal. The connector EXT REF IN/OUT on
the rear panel is connected to the analyzer front-panel RF INPUT. Since the output level is 7 dBm, the
reference level must be set to 10 dBm.

The following setup steps are performed:

1. Reset the instrument.
2. Set the reference level to 10 dBm.
3. Connect the rear-panel 10 MHz reference signal to the analyzer input RF INPUT.
4. Set the start frequency to 5 MHz.
5. Set the stop frequency to 55 MHz.
6. Smooth the displayed noise with the video bandwidth.
7. Measure the fundamental signal with the marker.
8. Measure the harmonic separation with the delta marker.
9. Measure the separation of remaining harmonics.

SYSTEM
1. Reset the analyzer.

PRESET
À Press the PRESET key.

LEVEL
2. Set the reference level to 10 dBm.
À Press REF key in the LEVEL key field.
REF REFERENCE LEVEL
-20 dBm The entry field for the reference level appears on the
display screen.

DATA ENTRY À Enter 10 via the numeric keypad and terminate with
1
the dBm key.

0
REFERENCE LEVEL
mV
dBm MHz 10 dBm
ms

3. Connect the 10 MHz-reference signal (output

EXT REF IN/OUT) to the analyzer RF INPUT.

1119.5063.12 2.11 E-10

Measurement of Harmonic Separation FSIQ

FREQUENCY 4. Set the start frequency to 5 MHz

À Press the START key in the FREQUENCY key field.
START START FREQUENCY
0 Hz The entry window for the start frequency appears on
the display screen.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 5 via the numeric keypad and terminate with
the MHz key.
5
START FREQUENCY
mV
dBm MHz 5 MHz
ms

FREQUENCY
5. Set the stop frequency to 55 MHz
À Press the STOP key in the FREQUENCY key field.
STOP STOP FREQUENCY
3.5 GHz The entry window for the stop frequency appears on
the display screen.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 55 via the numeric keypad and terminate with
the MHz key.
5

5
STOP FREQUENCY
mV
dBm MHz 55 MHz
ms

SWEEP
6. Smooth the displayed noise with the video
VIDEO BW
MANUAL bandwidth
COUPLING
VIDEO BW
AUTO
À Press the COUPLING key in the SWEEP key field.
The SWEEP-COUPLING menu is opened.
COUPLING
DEFAULT
The video bandwidth can now be either
COUPLING
RATIO automatically coupled to the resolution bandwidth or
manually entered.

1119.5063.12 2.12 E-10

FSIQ Measurement of Harmonic Separation

USER either:

COUPLING COUPLING Automatic coupling of the video bandwidth to the

RATIO
RATIO
RBW / VBW
measurement frequency range
SINE [1]
À Press the COUPLING RATIO softkey.
RBW / VBW
PULSE [.1]
The sub-menu for setting the automatic coupling of
RBW / VBW
NOISE [10]
bandwidths to the measurement frequency range is
opened.

RBW / VBW À Press the RBW / VBW NOISE softkey [10].

NOISE[10]
The video bandwidth is set to a factor of 10 less
than the resolution bandwidth. This smoothes the
displayed noise.

MENU À Press the menu change key .

The COUPLING RATIO submenu is closed.

VIDEO BW or:
MANUAL Manual input of the video bandwidth
VIDEO BANDWIDTH
3 MHz À Press the VIDEO BW MANUAL softkey.
The entry field for the video bandwidth appears on
the display screen.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 10 via the numeric keypad and terminate with
1 the kHz key.

0
VIDEO BANDWIDTH The analyzer displays the fundamental as well as
µs
µV kHz 10 kHz the first to third harmonics (see Fig.2-5).
dB

1119.5063.12 2.13 E-10

Measurement of Harmonic Separation FSIQ

USER
RBW 500 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl VBW 10 kHz Mixer -30 dBm COUPLED
10 dBm SWT 100 ms Unit dBm FUNCTIONS
0
RES BW
MANUAL
-10
RES BW
AUTO
-20

-30
VIDEO BW
MANUAL
-40 VIDEO BW
AUTO

-50
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
-60
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
-70

-80
COUPLING
DEFAULT
-90
COUPLING
RATIO
-100
Start 5 MHz 5 MHz/ Stop 55 MHz

Fig.2-5 The fundamental and harmonics to 55 MHz

MARKER
7. Measure the fundamental with the marker.
NORMAL À Press the NORMAL key in MARKER key field.
The marker appears at the fundamental peak (see
also level and frequency measurement step 5 of the
PEAK SEARCH function).
The measured values can be read at the upper left
of the display screen.

MARKER
8: Activate the delta marker and measure the
harmonic separation
DELTA
À Press the DELTA key in the MARKER key field
The delta marker is active and appears on the
fundamental.

MARKER USER
À Press the SEARCH key in the MARKER key group .
SEARCH MARKER
SEARCH
The SEARCH-MARKER menu is opened.
PEAK

NEXT PEAK O
N

NEXT PEAK
RIGHT

1119.5063.12 2.14 E-10

FSIQ Measurement of Harmonic Separation

NEXT PEAK À Press the NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey.

RIGHT
The delta marker jumps to the first harmonic and
measures the difference between the harmonic and
the fundamental. The measured values can be read
at the upper left of the display screen. In this
example, the harmonic separation is approx. 40 dB
(see Fig.2-6).

NEXT PEAK 9. Measure the separation of additional harmonics

RIGHT
À Press the NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey.
The delta marker jumps to the next highest
harmonic. The measured value can be read as
before.

USER
Delta [T1] RBW 500 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl -44.8 dB VBW 10 kHz Mixer -30 dBm
MARKER
10 dBm 10.0000 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm NORMAL
0
1 MARKER 1
-10
MARKER 2
-20
MARKER 3

-30
MARKER 4

-40 SIGNAL
COUNT
1
-50
MARKER
DEMOD
-60
MARKER
ZOOM
-70
SIGNAL ID
-80
MARKER
INFO
-90
ALL MARKER
OFF
-100
Start 5 MHz 5 MHz/ Stop 55 MHz

Fig.2-6 First harmonic separation: approx. 40 dB referred to the fundamental

1119.5063.12 2.15 E-10

Measurement of Harmonic Separation FSIQ

Measurement Procedure - Harmonic Separation – Example 2

In example 2, the fundamental frequency of the test signal and the separation of the individual
harmonics are measured. The reference to the fundamental is established with the REFERENCE
FIXED marker, and the movement from harmonic to harmonic is performed with the MKR→ CF STEP
SIZE and step keys. This method is recommended when the highest dynamic range is to be achieved.

The following measurement steps are carried out:

1. Reset the instrument.
2. Set the reference level to 10 dBm.
3. Connect the rear-panel 10 MHz reference signal (connector EXT REF IN/OUT) to the analyzer
input RF INPUT.
4. Set the start frequency to 5 MHz.
5. Set the stop frequency to 55 MHz.
6. Smooth the displayed noise with the video bandwidth.
7. Measure the fundamental signal with the marker.
8. Reduce the measurement frequency range (ZOOM function):
9. Set the frequency step size to the fundamental frequency.
10. Save the reference value (REFERENCE FIXED)
11. Measure the separation to the first harmonic.
12. Measure the separations to the remaining harmonics.

Set the analyzer according to Example 1 up to and

including "Measure the fundamental with the
marker" (steps 1 to 7).

8. Reduce the measurement frequency range.

MARKER
MARKER À Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER key field .
ZOOM
NORMAL The MARKER-NORMAL menu is opened.

MARKER
INFO

ALL MARKERS
OFF

M A R K ER
À Press the MARKER ZOOM softkey.
ZOOM The entry field for the measurement frequency
SPANZOOM
MARKER
range appears on the display screen.
3.5 GHz

1119.5063.12 2.16 E-10

FSIQ Measurement of Harmonic Separation

DATA ENTRY
ÀEnter 100 via the numeric keypad and terminate with
the kHz key.
1

µs SP AN ZOOM
MARKER
µV kHz
dBm 100 kHz

9. Set the frequency step size to the fundamental

MARKER USER frequency
MKR
MARKER-> À Press the MKR → key in the MARKER key field
PEAK
The MARKER-MKR → menu is opened.
MKR->
CENTER
MKR->
REF LEVEL

À Press the PEAK softkey.

PEAK
The marker appears at peak of the fundamental
signal.

MKR CF À Press the MKR → CF STEP SIZE softkey.

STEPSIZE
The step size used when setting the center
frequency with the cursor keys is set equal to the
marker frequency.

MARKER
10. Fix reference value
REFERENCE
FIXED
À Press the DELTA key in the MARKER key field.
DELTA
DELTA MRK
ABS REL The DELTA-MARKER menu is opened.
ALL DELTA
OFF

REFERENCE À Press the REFERENCE FIXED softkey.

FIXED
The position of the marker is now a curve-
independent reference for the delta measurement,
even when the actual reference point is not visible
on the display screen.

1119.5063.12 2.17 E-10

Measurement of Harmonic Separation FSIQ

USER
DELTA1 [T1 FXD] RBW 2 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl -80.8 dB VBW 2 kHz Mixer -30 dBm DELTA
10 dBm 48.0 kHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm MARKER
10.0 FXD
1
DELTA 1

0
DELTA 2
-10
DELTA 3
-20
DELTA 4
-30

-40
PHASE
NOISE
-50
REFERENCE
POINT
-60
REFERENCE
FIXED
-70
DELTA MKR
ABS REL
-80
FXD ALL DELTA
-90 OFF
Center 10.000002 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz

Fig. 2-7 Fundamental with REFERENCE FIXED marker

FREQUENCY
11. Measure the harmonic
CENTER CENTERSPAN
FREQUENCY À Press the CENTER key in the FREQUENCY key
10 MHz field.
The entry field for the center frequency appears on
the display screen.

DATA VARIATION
À Press the cursor key in the DATA VARIATION
key field.
CENTERSPFREQUENCY
AN
20 MHz The center frequency is increased by one step
(= fundamental frequency).

MARKER USER
À Press the SEARCH key in the MARKER key field.
SEARCH MARKER
SEARCH
The SEARCH-MARKER menu is opened.
PEAK

NEXT PEAK O
N

NEXT PEAK
RIGHT

1119.5063.12 2.18 E-10

FSIQ Measurement of Harmonic Separation

À Press the PEAK softkey.

PEAK
The delta marker appears at the first harmonic and
measures the separation from harmonic to
fundamental. The measured value is displayed in
the marker field at the upper left of the display
screen (see Fig. 2-8).

12. Measure the separation of additional

harmonics

À Repeat all of step 11.

The center frequency is once again increased by the
frequency of the fundamental. The delta marker
thus appears at the next harmonic.

USER
DELTA1 [T1 FXD] RBW 2 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl -42.3 dB VBW 2 kHz Mixer -30 dBm MARKER
10 dBm 10.001 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm SEARCH
10.0
PEAK

0
NEXT PEAK

-10 NEXT PEAK

RIGHT
-20 NEXT PEAK
LEFT
-30
1
-40

-50

-60
SEARCH LIM
ON OFF
-70
SELECT
MARKER
-80
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
-90
Center 20.002118 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz

Fig. 2-8 Measurement of the first harmonic

Note: The spurious harmonics generated internal to the analyzer can be easily recognised by switching
in additional RF attenuation. When an additional 10 dB attenuation is inserted, the displayed level
of harmonics generated by the analyzer will be reduced by 10 dB, however, harmonics from the
UUT will remain unchanged. This assumes that the receiver noise is substantially below the
displayed level.

1119.5063.12 2.19 E-10

Measurement of Harmonic Separation FSIQ

Measurement Procedure - Harmonic Separation – Example 3

The measurement of fundamental and harmonics can also be performed in two independent windows
on the display screen (SPLIT-SCREEN mode). This mode permits the simultaneous presentation of the
fundamental and harmonics with higher resolution and dynamic range.

The following measurement steps are carried out:

1. Reset the instrument.
2. Set the reference level to 10 dBm.
3. Connect the rear-panel 10 MHz reference signal (connector EXT REF IN/OUT) to the analyzer
input RF INPUT.
4. Set the start frequency to 5 MHz.
5. Set the stop frequency to 55 MHz.
6. Smooth the displayed noise with the video bandwidth.
7. Measure the fundamental signal with the marker.
8. Reduce the measurement frequency range (ZOOM function):
9. Set the frequency step size to the fundamental frequency.
10. Set the display to two measurement windows.
11. Uncouple the window settings.
12. Measure the harmonic separation.

Set the analyzer according to Example 2 up to and

including " Set the frequency step size to the
fundamental frequency" (steps 1 to 9).

SYSTEM USER
10. Set the display to two uncoupled
measurement windows.
DISPLAY DISPLAY
À Press the DISPLAY key in the SYSTEM key field.
FULL
SCREEN
The SYSTEM DISPLAY menu is opened.
SPLIT
SCREEN

SPLIT À Press the SPLIT SCREEN softkey.

SCREEN Two windows are displayed simultaneously on the
display screen (see Fig.2-9). The upper measure-
ment window is called Screen A and the lower is
called Screen B. At the initial turn-on, both
measurement windows are coupled, i.e., changes in
settings such as frequency or levels take place in
both windows.

1119.5063.12 2.20 E-10

FSIQ Measurement of Harmonic Separation

SCREEN 11. Uncouple the window settings

COUPLING
À Press the SCREEN COUPLING softkey.
SCREEN The SCREEN COUPLING sub-menu is opened.
UNCOUPLED

SCREEN
UNCOUPLED À Press the SCREEN UNCOUPLED softkey .
The settings for each measurement window can
now be selected independently. The entry is
assigned to either ACTIVE SCREEN A or ACTIVE
SCREEN B as selected by the softkey in the main
menu window.

USER
MKR1 [T1] RBW 1 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl +9.8 dBm VBW 1 kHz Mixer -30 dBm SCREEN
10 dBm 10.010000 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm COUPLING
10.0
1
-0 A MODE
COUPLED
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50 HORIZONTAL
SCALING
-60
-70 VERTICAL
-80 SCALING
-90
Center 10.000002 MHz 10 kHz/ COUPLING
Span 100 kHz
CONTROL
MKR1 [T2] RBW 1 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl +9.8 dBm VBW 1 kHz Mixer -30 dBm
10 dBm 10.010000 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm
10.0
1 B
-0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80 SCREENS
UNCOUPLED
-90
Center 10.000002 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz

Fig.2-9 SPLIT-SCREEN Mode

12. Measure the harmonic in the lower

MENU measurement window SCREEN B.
À Press the menu change key .
ACTIVE
SCREEN A The main menu is opened.
ACTIVE
SCREEN B

1119.5063.12 2.21 E-10

Measurement of Harmonic Separation FSIQ

ACTIVE
SCREEN B À Press the ACTIVE SCREEN B softkey.
The following entries are now valid for the lower
window which is used to measure the harmonic
separation.

FREQUENCY
À Press the CENTER key in the FREQUENCY key
field.
CENTER CENTERSPAN
FREQUENCY
10 MHz The entry field for the center frequency appears on
the display screen.

DATA VARIATION
À Press the cursor key in the DATA VARIATION
key field.
CENTERSPFREQUENCY
AN
20 MHz The center frequency is increased by one step.
(= fundamental frequency).

MARKER USER
À Press the SEARCH key in the MARKER key field.
SEARCH MARKER
SEARCH
The SEARCH-MARKER menu is opened.
PEAK

NEXT PEAK O
N

NEXT PEAK
RIGHT

À Press the PEAK softkey.

PEAK
A marker appears at the first harmonic and meas-
ures the level of the harmonic. The measured value
is displayed in the marker field at the upper left of
the second measurement window (see Fig.2-10).

1119.5063.12 2.22 E-10

FSIQ Measurement of Harmonic Separation

USER
MKR1 [T1] RBW 1 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl +9.8 dBm VBW 1 kHz Mixer -30 dBm MARKER
10 dBm 10.010000 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm
10.0
1
SEARCH
-0 A PEAK
-10
-20
-30
NEXT PEAK
-40
-50 NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
-60
-70 NEXT PEAK
-80 LEFT
-90
Center 10.000002 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz
DELTA [T2] RBW 1 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl -36.8 dBm VBW 1 kHz Mixer -30 dBm
10 dBm 10.000010 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm
10.0
-0 B
-10
-20
-30 1 SEARCH LIM
-40 ON OFF
-50 SELECT
-60 MARKER
-70
ACTIVE
-80 MKR DELTA
-90
Center 20.000004 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz

Fig.2-10 Alternate representation of fundamental and first harmonic

1119.5063.12 2.23 E-10

Intermodulation Distortions FSIQ

Measurement of Intermodulation Distortions

Measuring Task
If several signals are applied to a transmission quadripole with a non-linear characteristic,
intermodulation products occur at its output due to addition and subtraction of the signals. The non-
linear characteristic causes harmonics of the information signals to occur, which are mixed up at the
characteristic. The low-order mixture products are particularly significant since they have the highest
levels and are close to the information signals. The third-order intermodulation product causes the most
significant distortions. In case of two-tone modulation it is the mixture product of the first information
signal and the first harmonic of the second information signal.
The frequencies of the spurious signals occur with an offset of the information signals above and below
the information signals. Fig. 2-11 shows the intermodulation products PS1 and PS2, which are obtained
from the two information signals PN1 and PN2.

P P
Level N1 N2

a d3

PS1 PS2

∆f ∆f ∆f

f f f f Frequency
S1 N1 N2 S2

Fig. 2-11 Intermodulation products PS1 and PS2

The intermodulation product at fS2 is obtained by mixture of the first harmonic of the information signal
PN2 with the signal PN1, the intermodulation product at fS1 by mixture of the first harmonic of the
information signal PN1 with the signal PN2 .
fs1 = 2 x fn1 - fn2 (1)

fs2 = 2 x fn2 - fn1 (2)

The level of the spurious products depends on the level of the information signals. If both information
signals are increased by 1 dB, the level of the spurious responses increases by 3 dB. I.e., the offset ad3
of the spurious responses decreases by 2 dB. This is illustrated by Fig.2-12.

1119.5063.12 2.24 E-10

FSIQ Intermodulation Distortions

Intercept point
Output
level
Compression

Intermodulation
Information
product
signal
3
1
1 1

Input level

Fig.2-12 Dependance of the spurious product level from the level of the information signals

The information signals at the output of a four-terminal network increase as the input level increases as
long as the input level is in the linear range. If the level changes by 1 dB at the input, it also changes by
1 dB at the output. At a specified input level the quadripole compresses and the output level does not
increase any more. The third-order intermodulation products increase three times as fast as the
information signals. The intercept point is the fictitious level where both lines intersect. It cannot be
measured directly since the wanted level is limited by the maximum output power of the quadripole.
It can however be calculated from the known gradients of the lines and the measured intermodulation
offset aD3 with a given level using the following formula:

aD 3
IP 3 = + PN (3)
2

If, e.g., the intermodulation offset is 60 dB and the input level PN is -20 dBm, the third-order intercept IP3
is calculated as follows:

60
IP 3 = + ( −20dBm ) = 10dBm . (4)
2

Important Spectrum-Analyzer Functions

Correct setting of the RF attenuation is particularly important for intermodulation measurements. In the
FSIQ, the attenuation can be set automatically according to the reference level. There are three
coupling methods:
– RF ATTEN AUTO
– ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST
– ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE
The coupling mode ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST is recommended to be used for measurement of
intermodulation distortions since the intrinsic spurious products are minimized.

1119.5063.12 2.25 E-10

Intermodulation Distortions FSIQ

Measurement
In the following, measurement of the third-order intercept of an amplifier is described, by way of
example.

Two signal generators with the frequencies f1 and f2 supply signals to the amplifier via a power divider.
The output of the device under test is connected to the RF input of the FSIQ. The level of the two signal
generators is the same and is selected such that the DUT is not overloaded.

f1 = 99.5 MHz
f2 = 100.5 MHz
Level at amplifier input = -20 dBm with f1 and f21

Test setup: f1

Power- DUT Analyzer

splitter

f2 10-dB
amplifier

The following measurement steps are carried out:

1. Reset the FSIQ.
2. Set the center frequency to 100 MHz.
3. Set the frequency-display range to 5 MHz (SPAN function).
4. Set the reference level to -10 dBm.
5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz.
6. Set the RF attenuation for low-distortion mode.
7. Measure the intercept point using the markers.
8. Calculate IP3 from the measured offset and the signal level according to (4)

1119.5063.12 2.26 E-10

FSIQ Intermodulation Distortions

Cf. measurement example Level and Frequency

Measurements (steps 1 to 3)
1. Reset the instrument.
2. Set the center frequency to 100 MHz.
3. Set the frequency-display range to 5 MHz.

LEVEL
4. Set the reference level to -10 dBm
À Press the REF key in the LEVEL key field.
REF REFERENCE LEVEL
-20 dBm The entry window for the reference level is
displayed.

DATA ENTRY À Enter -10 via the numeric keypad in the entry field
and terminate the entry by pressing the dBm key.
1

-
0
REFERENCE LEVEL
dBm
mV MHz -10 dBm
ms

SWEEP US ER 5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz

COUPLING COUPLED
À Press the COUPLING key in the SWEEP key field.
FUNCTIONS
RES BW
MANUAL
The SWEEP-COUPLING menu is opened.
RES BW
AUTO

RES BW
À Press the RES BW MANUAL softkey.
MANUAL The entry field for the resolution bandwidth is
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH
3 MHz displayed.

1119.5063.12 2.27 E-10

Intermodulation Distortions FSIQ

À Enter 10 in the entry field via the numeric keypad

DATA ENTRY and terminate the entry by pressing the kHz key.
1

0
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH
dB
µV kHz 10 kHz
µs

USER

INPUT 6. Set low-distortion mode

À Press the INPUT key
INPUT

RF ATTEN
MANUAL
The INPUT menu is opened.
ATTEN AUTO
NORMAL

ATTEN AUTO
LOW NOISE

ATTEN AUTO
LOW DIST

ATTEN AUTO either

LOW DIST
À Press the ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST softkey.
The low-distortion mode is selected. Thus, the
combination of input attenuation and IF gain is
selected such that the internal intermodulation
products are the smallest possible and the
intermodulation-free range is as large as possible.
The FSIQ shows the measuring diagram in Fig.2-13

RF ATTEN or
INPUT ATTENUATION
MANUAL
1 0 dB À Press the RF ATTEN MANUAL softkey.
The entry window for the RF attenuation is
displayed.

DATA VARIATION À Vary the RF attenuation using the roll-key.

If the amplitude of the IM products doesn’t change,
the existing setting is sufficient
(see Fig.2-13)

1119.5063.12 2.28 E-10

FSIQ Intermodulation Distortions

USER
Delta 1 [T1] RWB 10 kHz RF Att 20 dB
Ref Lvl -59.78 dB VBW 10 kHz MARKER
-10 dBm 2.00000000 MHz SWT 150 ms Unit dBm SEARCH
-10 1
PEAK
-20
NEXT PEAK
-30
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
-40
NEXT PEAK
LEFT
-50

-60

1
-70

-80
SEARCH LIMIT
S D
ON OFF
-90
SELECT
-100
ACTIVE
MKR DELTA
-110
CENTER 100 MHz 500 kHz/ Span 5MHz

Fig.2-13 Measuring diagram in low distortion mode

MARKER
7. Measure the intercept point using the markers
NORMAL À Press the NORMAL key in the MARKER key field.
The marker appears on the fundamental (see also
level and frequency measurement step 5, PEAK
SEARCH function).
The measured values can be read off at the upper
left of screen.

MARKER
À Press the DELTA key in the MARKER key field.
DELTA The delta marker is active. It appears on the
fundamental.

DATA VARIATION either

À Move the marker to an intermodulation product
using the roll-key (see Fig.2-13).

1119.5063.12 2.29 E-10

Intermodulation Distortions FSIQ

MARKER USER
or
SEARCH MARKER
SEARCH
À Press the SEARCH key of the MARKER keys.
PEAK
The SEARCH-MARKER menu is opened.
NEXT PEAK O
N

NEXT PEAK
RIGHT

À Press the NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey until the delta

NEXT PEAK marker appears on one of the IM products (see
Fig.2-13).

8. Calculate IP3 from the measured offset and the

signal level according to (4)

In the example, an intermodulation ratio of approx.

60 dB at a level of -10 dBm was measured. IP3 is
thus:

IP3 = 60 dB/2 + (-10dBm) = 20 dBm

1119.5063.12 2.30 E-10

FSIQ Time-domain Measurements with Pulsed Signals

Time-domain Measurements with Pulsed Signals

Measuring Task
A lot of systems which handle pulsed signals do not only require measurement of the pulse width and
the pulse repetition rate which can be derived from the spectrum but also assess the rise and fall time
as well as the power ramping during the pulse. In particular, modern digital mobile radio systems which,
like GSM e.g., employ the TDMA method, require the power to be measured versus time over a wide
dynamic range.
Time-domain measurements are performed using the spectrum analyzer with ZERO SPAN selected.
The analyzer operates as fix-tuned receiver on the set center frequency such that the signal power
versus time is displayed.

Important Spectrum Analyzer Functions

Trigger functions such as video trigger and sweep settings such as blanking of the measured value
(GAP SWEEP) are of particular importance for time-domain measurements. The pretrigger function of
the GAP SWEEP just enables measurement of rise times since it allows for representation of
measurements prior to the trigger point. The GAP function, which enables cutout of a part of the pulse
allows for simultanous representation of both edges of a pulse signal on the screen at high time
resolution. During the GAP time, the sweep and thus data acquisition at the time marked by the "GAP"
line is interrupted and thus the pulse is not completely displayed (the part which is not important for this
measurement is blanked) (see Fig. 2-14).

displayed displayed
(not displayed)

trigger

pre-trigger trigger to gap time gap

time time time

Fig. 2-14 Parameters of Gap Sweep

Note: If the pretrigger time and the trg-to-gap time is 0 s, the gap time function has the same effect as
a delayed trigger.

1119.5063.12 2.31 E-10

Timedomain Measurements with Pulsed Signals FSIQ

Measurement
This example shows the measurement of the rise and fall times as well as the power ramping during the
pulse.

The signal generator SME with built-in pulse modulation source SME-B4 is used as signal source. A
signal generator providing for pulse modulation in conjunction with an external pulse generator may be
used, instead.
Settings on the signal generator:

Frequency 900 MHz

Level –5 dBm
Modulation Pulse
Pulse width ca. 600 µs
Pulse frequency ca. 500 Hz

The following measuring steps are made:

1. Reset the instrument.
The video bandwidth is thus set to 3 MHz.
2. Set the center frequency to 900 MHz.
3. Set the frequency display range to zero span.
4. Set the reference level to 0 dBm.
5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 2 MHz.
6. Set the sweep time to 1 ms.
7. Connect the RF output of the SME to the RF input of the FSIQ.
8. Set the video trigger.
9. Set the sweep time to 100 µs.
10. Set the trigger points.
11. Activate the gap sweep.

comp. measuring example - level and frequency

measurement (steps 1 to 3)
1. Set the instrument to the default state. I.e., the
video bandwidth is set to 3 MHz.
2. Set the center frequency to 900 MHz.
3. Set the frequency-display range to zero span.
Note: With first calling of the zero span following
preset, a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz is
automatically set. Apart from that, switching on
the zero span always causes that resolution
bandwidth to be set that was last set in zero
span.

1119.5063.12 2.32 E-10

FSIQ Time-domain Measurements with Pulsed Signals

LEVEL
4. Set the reference level to 0 dBm.
À Press the REF key in the LEVEL key field.
REF REFERENCE LEVEL
-20 dBm The entry field for the reference level appears on the
display screen.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 0 in the entry field via the numeric keypad and
terminate the entry by pressing the MHz/ms key.
0

dBm REFERENCE LEVEL

mV MHz
ms 0 dBm

SWEEP USER
5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 2 MHz
COUPLED
FUNCTION
À Press the COUPLING key in the SWEEP key field.
COUPLING
RES BW
MANUAL The SWEEP-COUPLING menu is opened.
RES BW
AUTO

SWEEP TIME
MANUAL

SWEEP TIME
AUTO

RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH
À Press the RES BW MANUAL soft key.
RES BW
MANUAL 1 MHz The entry field for the resolution bandwidth appears
on the display screen.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 2 via the numeric key pad and terminate the
entry by pressing the MHz key.
2

dBm RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH

mV MHz
ms
2 MHz

SWEEP TIME
6. Set the sweep time to 1 ms
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL 5 ms À Press the SWEEP TIME MANUAL softkey.
The entry field for the sweep time is opened.

1119.5063.12 2.33 E-10

Timedomain Measurements with Pulsed Signals FSIQ

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 1 in the entry field via the numeric keypad and
terminate the entry by pressing the MHz key.
1

dBm SWEEP TIME

mV MHz
ms
1 ms

7. Connect the RF output of the SME to the RF

input of the FSIQ.

SWEEP USER
8. Initiate triggering by means of the display
voltage (video trigger)
TRIGGER TRIGGER

FREE RUN
À Press the TRIGGER key in the SWEEP key field

VIDEO O
The TRIGGER menu is opened.
N

LINE

À Press the VIDEO softkey.

VIDEO
A dashed horizontal line is displayed which marks
the trigger level.

DATA VARIATION À Set the trigger level using the roll key such that a
triggered display is obtained.
(see Fig. 2-15)

SWEEP TIME
9. Set the sweep time to 100 µs
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL 5 ms À Press the SWEEP TIME MANUAL softkey.
The window for entering the sweep time is opened.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 100 via the numeric keypad and terminate the
entry by pressing the kHz/µs key.
1

dB SWEEP TIME
µV kHz
µs
100 µ s

1119.5063.12 2.34 E-10

FSIQ Time-domain Measurements with Pulsed Signals

USER
RWB 1 MHz RF Att 10 dB
Ref Lvl VBW 1 MHz Mixer -20 dBm
0 dBm SWT 1 ms Unit dBm TRIGGER
0
FREE RUN
-10
VIDEO
-20
LINE
-30
EXTERN
-40
RF POWER

-50

-60

-70
SIGNAL ID
-80
TRIGGER
-90 DELAY
SLOPE
-100 POS NEG
START 0 s 100 µs/ Stop 1 ms

Fig. 2-15 Representation of pulse sequence with video trigger

10. Set the trigger points.

SWEEP SWEEP
COUNT
À Press the SWEEP key in the SWEEP keyfield.
SW EEP
GAP SWEEP
ON OFF The SWEEP menu is opened.
GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS

USER À Press the GAP SWEEP SETTINGS softkey.

GAP SWEEP GAP SWEEP The GAP SWEEP SETTINGS submenu for setting
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
TRIGGER
the trigger points is opened.
LEVEL

PRE
TRIGGER

TRG TO GAP
TIME

GAP
LENGTH

PRE GAP PRETRIGGER

TRIGGER
À Press the PRE TRIGGER softkey.
0 ms
The entry field for the pretrigger is opened.

1119.5063.12 2.35 E-10

Timedomain Measurements with Pulsed Signals FSIQ

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 10 via the numeric keypad in the entry field
and terminate the entry by pressing the kHz/µs key.
1

dB
µV kHz GAP PRETRIGGER
µs
10 µ s

À Press the TRG TO GAP softkey.

TRG TO GAP TRG TO GAP
TIME 0 ms The entry field for the trigger-to-gap-time is opened.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 40 via the numeric keypad in the entry field
and terminate the entry by pressing the kHz/µs key.
4

dB
µV kHz TRG TO GAP
µs
40 µ s

À Press the GAP LENGTH softkey.

GAP GAP LENGTH
LENGTH 0 ms The entry field for the length of the time gap is
opened.

DATA ENTRY
À Enter 540 in the entry field via the numeric keypad
and terminate the entry by pressing the kHz/µs key.
5

dB GAP LENGTH
µV kHz
µs
540 µ s

1119.5063.12 2.36 E-10

FSIQ Time-domain Measurements with Pulsed Signals

MENU 11. Activate the measurement with mask-out of

measured value
GAP SWEEP À Press the menu change key.
ON OFF

GAP SWEEP
The right supplementary menu is opened.
SETTINGS

GAP SWEEP
ON OFF À Press the GAP SWEEP ON/OFF key.
The measurement with blanking of measured value
is activated. The measurement results are shown in
Fig. 2-16

USER
RWB 1 MHz RF Att 10 dB
Ref Lvl VBW 1 MHz Mixer -20 dBm
0 dBm SWT 100 µs Unit dBm SWEEP
0 CONTINOUS
SWEEP
-10
SINGLE
SWEEP
-20
SWEEP TIME
AUTO
-30
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL
-40 SWEEP
COUNT
-50
GAP SWEEP
-60 ON OFF
GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS
-70
EXT GATE
ON OFF
-80
EXT GATE
-90 SETTINGS
SGL SWEEP
-100 DISP OFF
0 s 10 µ s/ 50 µs 590 µs 10 µs 640 µs

Fig. 2-16 Measured-value blanking for simultaneous display of rising and falling edge of a pulse
signal. The position of the gap is indicated by the thick vertical line. The gap time is
indicated via the double label 50 µs and 590 µs in the time axis.

1119.5063.12 2.37 E-10

FSIQ Contents - Manual Operation

Contents - Chapter 3 "Manual Operation"

3 Manual Operation
The Screen........................................................................................................................................ 3.2
Diagram Area .......................................................................................................................... 3.3
Full Screen............................................................................................................................... 3.9
Split Screen ............................................................................................................................. 3.9
Softkey Area .......................................................................................................................... 3.10
Changing the Menu ............................................................................................................... 3.11
Setting the Parameters.................................................................................................................. 3.13
Data Entry.............................................................................................................................. 3.13
Numeric Keypad on the Front Panel ........................................................................... 3.13
Roll-key and Cursor Keys............................................................................................ 3.14
Entry Windows....................................................................................................................... 3.15
Setting Up the Entry Window ...................................................................................... 3.15
Editing of Numeric Parameters ................................................................................... 3.16
Editing of Alphanumeric Parameters........................................................................... 3.17
Help Line Editor ........................................................................................................... 3.17
Table Entry ............................................................................................................................ 3.18
Shifting Mode............................................................................................................... 3.18
Editing Mode................................................................................................................ 3.19
Disabling the Control Elements - HOLD Key .............................................................................. 3.20
Setting the Stepsize - STEP Key................................................................................................... 3.21
Mouse and External Keyboard Control ....................................................................................... 3.22
External Keyboard Control..................................................................................................... 3.22
Data Entry Windows with Mouse Control .............................................................................. 3.23
Mouse Control of Further Display Elements .......................................................................... 3.24
Menu Overview .............................................................................................................................. 3.25
System Key Group................................................................................................................. 3.25
Configuration Key Group ....................................................................................................... 3.27
Hardcopy Key Group ............................................................................................................. 3.33
Frequency Key Group............................................................................................................ 3.34
Level Key Group, Input Key .................................................................................................. 3.36
Marker Key Group ................................................................................................................. 3.38
Lines Key Group .................................................................................................................... 3.42
Trace Key Group ................................................................................................................... 3.43
Sweep Key Group.................................................................................................................. 3.44
Memory Key Group................................................................................................................ 3.47
User Key Group ..................................................................................................................... 3.49

1119.5063.12 I-3.1 E-1

Contents - Manual Operation FSIQ

1119.5063.12 I-3.2 E-1

FSIQ Manual Operation

3 Manual Operation

Chapter 3 provides an overview of the operating concept and the basic steps of manual operation of the
FSIQ. This includes a description of the screen, of the control of menus and of the setting of
parameters. An overview of the menus will be listed at the end of this chapter.
The functions of the menus are described in dtail in Chapter 4. Chapter 2 contains a short introduction
on step-by-step simple measurements. The remote control of the instrument is described in Chapters 5,
6 and 7
The operation of the signal analyzer is menu-controlled via keys and softkeys. The setting of the
instrument and test parameters in the menus is made either directly via softkeys or by entry of values in
entry fields and by selection in tables. The operating mode and the screen mode is selected via the
softkeys.
If required, data entry windows and tables are superimposed on the screen.

After switching on the instrument a message about the BIOS version installed is displayed for a few
seconds (e.g. "Analyzer BIOS Rev. 1.2").
The results of the self test is displayed next.
MAINPROCESSOR
SELFTEST STARTING ...
TESTING CMOS ...
DMA CHANNEL ...
INTERRUPTS ...
NMI ...
BASE MEMORY ...
EXTENDED MEMORY ...
HD CAPACITY ...
INIT FLOPPY DRIVE ...
INIT HD ...

SELFTEST DONE,
SYSTEM IS BOOTING ...

Subsequently, the Windows NT controller boots and the instrument then starts measuring. The type of
measurement which was activated prior to last switch-off is performed, as long as no other instrument
configuration was selected via AUTO RECALL in the MEMORY RECALL menu. While the
measurement is being performed other menus and measuring modes can be entered simultaneously.
The measurement results and the settings of the parameters are displayed on the screen.

1119.5063.12 3.1 E-12

Screen FSIQ

The Screen
The screen informs continuously on the results and parameters of the selected measuring functions. It
shows the assignment of the softkeys and menus, which are required for setting the measuring
parameters. The display of test results, the softkey labeling and the type of menu depend on the
selected measuring function.

The screen is subdivided into two areas:

Diagram area Softkey area

USER

Marker 1 [T1 CNT] RBW 1 MHz RF Att 20 dB DELTA

Ref Lvl -36.42 dBm VBW 1 MHz Mixer -40 dBm MARKER
-20 dBm 100.002 MHz SWT 5 ms Unit dBm
-20
DELTA 1
A
-30
DELTA 2

-40
D1 DELTA 3

-50
DELTA 4

-60
D2 PHASE
NOISE

-70
NOISE MEAS
SAMPLES
-80
REFERENCE
POINT
-90
REFERENCE
FIXED
-100
DELTA MKR
ABS REL
-110

ALL DELTA
F1 F2 OFF
-120
Center 100.0 MHz 5 MHz/ Span 50.0 MHz

Fig. 3-1 Subdivision of screen

Diagram area This area contains the measuring diagrams and other measured-value
information as well as the parameters and status information which are
important for analysis of the results.
In addition, message fields, entry windows and tables may be shown in this
area.

Softkey area This area contains the instrument functions which can be selected via the
softkeys. The softkey area is not superimposed by other graphics.

1119.5063.12 3.2 E-12

FSIQ Screen

Diagram Area
Status Marker /deltamarker Hardware settings

ER

R
Logo UNCAL OVLD Marker 1 [T1 CNT] RBW 1 MHz RF Att 20 dB
S Ref Lvl -36.42 dBm VBW 1 MHz Mixer -40 dBm
Reference-/ -20 dBm 100.002 MHz SWT 5 ms Unit dBm

max level 0
*
START FREQUENCY A
-10.0 1.000000 MHz
Entry window
-20.0 LVL
FRQ Instrument settings
-30.0
WARNING 1-R (enhancement
Message field 2-R labels)
Hardcopy not completed.
-40.0 Stop printer?
3-R
4-R
YES NO GAT
-50.0 TRG

-60.0 MOUSE
Table 75Ω
MAC
Interface PS/2
-70.0 Owner Instrument
Level scale
labelling -80.0
Grid
-90.0
Frequency scale
-100.0
0
or time scale
Center 100.0 MHz Span 50.0 MHz
labelling

Fig. 3-2 Subdivision of the FSIQ screen in analyzer mode (without measuring diagram)

Display line
(frequency line) Display line
(frequency line)

D1

Limit lines

Display lines L1 L2 L3
(level lines)

D2
2
Marker

Deltamarker
3

Trace
F1 F2

Fig. 3-3 Measuring diagram

1119.5063.12 3.3 E-12

Screen FSIQ

The following graphic elements are displayed in the diagram area:

Status information Hint at irregularity (e.g. UNCAL)
In addition the status display displays MAX / REF LVL, if the maximum
level and the reference level have different values .
UNCAL "UNCAL" is indicated under the following circumstances:
• no valid calibration data (Status CALIBRATION FAILED in
table CAL RESULTS), may occur after a cold start
following a firmware update
⇒ Total calibration
• correction data are switched off (menu CAL, CAL CORR
OFF).
⇒ switch on CAL CORR ON or PRESET
• Sweep time too short for current instrument settings
(span, resolution bandwidth, video band width).
⇒ increase sweep time
• resolution bandwidth too small for set symbol rate (Vector
Anaylsis: digital demodulation) .
⇒ increase resolution bandwidth

OVLD „Overload“ is indicated when the input mixer is overloaded

⇒ Increase input attenuation
IFOVLD „IF Overload“ is indicated when overload occurs after the
input mixer.
⇒ Increase reference level
DIFOVL „Digital IF Overload“ is indicated when the digital resolution
filter is overloaded.
⇒ Increase reference level
ExtRef „External Reference“ is indicated when the instrument is set
to REFERENCE EXT (menu SETUP), but the reference
signal is missing at the rear panel connector.
⇒ Ceck input signal of external reference
LO unl „LO unlock“ is indicated when the 1st LO is unlocked
(moduleerror).
LO Lvl „LO Level“ is indicated when the output level of the 1st LO is
too small (module error).
LO LvD „LO Level Digital IF“ is indicated when the output level of the
oscillator of module Digital IF is too small (module error).
OCXO „OCXO cold“ is indicated when the crystal oscillator has not
yet reached ist operating temperature. This indication
vanishes after a few minutes after switch on.
UNLD 'Underload' is indicated when the analyzer is not in its
optimal dynamic range. In this case the measuring accuracy
is not optimal. This indication is only output in vector
analyzer operating mode.
⇒ Decrease reference level

1119.5063.12 3.4 E-12

FSIQ Screen

Marker/Deltamarker This label displays the position of the last selected marker or
deltamarker in the x and y-directions and the marker/deltamarker index.
As additional information, 2 fields in square brackets are provided which
contain the curve which the marker is assigned to and the active
measuring function of the marker indicated. The measuring function of
the markers in the second field is indicated by the following
abbreviations:
CNT frequency counter active
TRK signal track active
NOI noise measurement active
The marker text has the same color as the trace which the marker is
assigned to. If, for example, the active marker is assigned to trace 1,
and trace 1 is yellow, the marker text will be yellow, too.

Hardware settings
Analyzer mode
RBW Indication of the set resolution bandwidth.
VBW Indication of the set video bandwidth.
SWT Indication of the set sweep time.
RF Att Indication of the set RF attenuation.
Mixer Indication of the user set level at the input mixer (only when level differs
from standard settings) ( = level of the reference level REF LVL).
Unit Indication of the level unit of the measuring results and the associated
setting and test parameters in full length. This label is particularly
important for selection of units with more than 4 digits, since they can
only be indicated as dB* in the other labels (except for marker).
Tracking generator mode Only available with one of the options FSE-B8/9/10/11
TG Lvl Indication of the set output level of the tracking generator

Vector Analyzer mode

CF Indication of the set center frequency
SR Indication of the symbol rate
Demod Indication of the switched on demodulator.
Standard Indication of the set standard (e.g. GSM)

Grid X-axis: frequency or time,

Y-axis: level

1119.5063.12 3.5 E-12

Screen FSIQ

Instrument settings Indication of user instrument settings which influence the measuring
(Enhancement Labels) result and which are not immediately obvious when viewing the
measured values.

The current instrument setting does not correspond to the one which
* applied when one of the displayed curves had been stored. This
occurs under the following circumstances:
• The instrument setting is modified while a sweep is being performed.
• The instrument setting is modified in SINGLE SWEEP mode
subsequent to the end of the sweep and no new sweep is started.
• The instrument setting is modified after setting the trace to VIEW.
The display is retained until the cause is eliminated by the user. I.e.,
either a new sweep is started (SINGLE SWEEP mode), or the trace of
interest is switched to BLANK (all cases).

A Identification for screen A. Screen A is activated for the entry of test

parameters.
B Identification for screen B. Screen B is activated for the entry of test
parameters.
C If, in the Vector Analyzer mode, the inphase and quadrature signal is
displayed in the measurement window A, the window is subdivided into
two diagrams. The upper diagram is marked with an A and the bottom
one with C.
D If, in the Vector Analyzer mode, the inphase and quadrature signal is
displayed in the measurement window B, the window is subdivided into
two diagrams. The upper diagram is marked with an B and the bottom
one with D.
LN The automatic setting of the input attenuation is set to ATTEN LOW
NOISE .
LD The automatic setting of the input attenuation is set to ATTEN LOW
DISTORTION.
NOR Normalization is activated; high accuracy (only with one of the
options FSE-B8/9/10/11).

APP Normalization is activated; medium accuracy (only with one of the options
FSE-B8/9/10/11).

TDF A antenna correction factor (TRANSDUCER FACTOR) is switched on.

TDS A set of antenna correction factors (TRANSDUCER SETS) is switched
on.
LVL A level offset ≠ 0 dB has been set. A level offset of the installed tracking
generator (option) leads to the same display.

FRQ A frequency offset ≠ 0 Hz has been set.

SGL The sweep is set to SINGLE SWEEP.

1119.5063.12 3.6 E-12

FSIQ Screen

1-<n> Subtraction Trace 1 - Trace <n> active (<n>: numeric value) or

subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (<n>: R)

2-<n> Subtraction Trace 2 - Trace <n> active (<n>: numeric value) or

subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (<n>: R)

3-<n> Subtraction Trace 3 - Trace <n> active (<n>: numeric value) or

subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (<n>: R)

4-<n> Subtraction Trace 4 - Trace <n> active (<n>: numeric value) or

subtraction Trace 1 - Reference Line active (<n>: R)

<n>AP For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to AUTOPEAK.

<n>MA For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to MAX PEAK.

<n>MI For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to MIN PEAK.

<n>SA For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to SAMPLE.

<n>AV For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to AVERAGE.

<n>RM For trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) the detector is set to RMS.

GAT The frequency sweep is controlled via the EXT TRIG/GATE input of
the instrument.

TRG The instrument is not triggered in FREE RUN mode.

EXT The unit is configured for operation with external reference

75 Ω The input impedance of the unit is set to 75 Ω.

MAC Macro recording active.

PRN A printer output is active. PRN overwrites the enhancement label

MAC.

<n>VIEW Trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) is set to VIEW

<n>AVG Trace <n> (n = 1 to 4) is set AVERAGE

MIX The external mixer output is switched on (option FSE-B21).

SID External mixer output: SIGNAL ID is switched on (option FSE-B21).
AID External mixer output: AUTO ID is switched on (option FSE-B21).

1119.5063.12 3.7 E-12

Screen FSIQ

Frequency axis labeling Display of the x-scaling.

123.4 ms/Div The distance between two grid lines is displayed in this label.

The set center frequency or start frequency is displayed in this label

Center 1.2345678901234 GHz depending on whether the keys CENTER/SPAN or START/STOP were
last pressed.
Start 1.2345678901234 GHz If span = 0 Hz, the center frequency is always displayed.

Span 1.2345678901234 GHz The set frequency range (SPAN) or the stop frequency is displayed,
depending on whether the keys CENTER/SPAN or START/STOP
Stop 1.2345678901234 GHz were last pressed.
If span = 0 Hz, the trigger moment (PRETRIGGER) is displayed.
Trigger 1.234 ms

Optional labeling Optional indication of date, time and comment.

14.Jun 97 12:13

Level axis labeling Display of the y-scaling.

Entry window The data entry window is superimposed in the diagram area, if
required.

Reference level/ Max. Display of the set reference level or combined display of maximum
level level and reference level .

Limit lines Limit lines are used to mark level curves or spectral distributions which
must not be exceeded or dropped below.

Traces 1 to 4 Up to 4 traces can be displayed simultaneously.

Display lines Utilities for trace analysis.

The FSIQ provides two display modes:

• Full Screen: 1 window, all traces are displayed in one window.
• Split Screen: 2 windows, traces, grid and labels are distributed on the two windows.

1119.5063.12 3.8 E-12

FSIQ Screen

Full Screen
In the full-screen mode, the settings and measurements are performed in the active visible window. All
indications on the screen refer to this window. The designation (SCREEN A or SCREEN B) is inserted
as enhancement label A or B on the right diagram margin.
Switching between the windows is by means of DISPLAY key. The current measurement is terminated
when its window is blanked out.
Switching from split-screen to full-screen mode is performed in menu SYSTEM DISPLAY.

Split Screen
In Split Screen mode, the screen is divided into two halves.
USER

Marker 1 [T1 CNT] RBW 1 MHz RF Att 20 dB

Ref Lvl -36.42 dBm VBW 1 MHz Mixer -40 dBm
-20 dBm 100.002 MHz SWT 5 ms Unit dBm
-20.0
A SOFTKEY 1
-40.0

-60.0 SOFTKEY 2

-80.0 SOFTKEY 3
-100.0
SOFTKEY 4
-120.0
Center 100.0 MHz 5 MHz/ Span 50.0 MHz SOFTKEY 5
Marker 1 [T1 CNT] RBW 1 MHz RF Att 20 dB
Ref Lvl -36.42 dBm VBW 1 MHz Mixer -40 dBm
-20 dBm 100.002 MHz SWT 5 ms Unit dBm
SOFTKEY 6
-20.0

-40.0 SOFTKEY 7
-60.0
SOFTKEY 8
-80.0

-100.0 SOFTKEY 9

-120.0
SOFTKEY 10
Center 100.0 MHz 5 MHz/ Span 50.0 MHz

Fig. 3-4 Subdivision of the screen in Split Screen mode

The upper half is assigned Screen A, the lower one Screen B. The settings for measurement can be
selected independently for both screens. E.g., a spectrum may be displayed in Screen A and a time
amplitude in the time range is displayed in Screen B. The window for entry of the measuring parameters
or the marker operation is selected using the DISPLAY key.
The indications which are valid only for one window appear in the margin of the associated diagram.
Indications which are valid for the two windows are displayed between the diagrams.
The assignment of traces to the windows is fixed and cannot be modified.

Table 3-1 Assignment of traces to windows with split screen in the signal or vector analyzer mode
Trace 1: upper (screen A) Trace 3: upper (screen A)
Trace 2: lower (screen B) Trace 4: lower (screen B)

The two windows can be subdivided into two measurement diagrams. This applies to separate display
of measurement values, eg to the display of the inphase and quadrature signal in vector analysis.
Screen A is divided into diagrams A and C, screen B is divided in diagrams B and D.

1119.5063.12 3.9 E-12

Screen FSIQ

Softkey Area
The setup of the softkey area is independent of the operating mode. It consists of the following graphic
elements:

SOFTKEY Menu title

MENU TITLE (used as reference name, too,
e.g., in the index of the context-
SOFTKEY sensitive help function)
LABEL 1

SOFTKEY
LABEL 2 Indication of submenu (arrow)
SOFTKEY Softkey active (green)
LABEL 3

SOFTKEY Softkey function not available

LABEL 4
(without 3D frame)
SOFTKEY
LABEL 5
Softkey menu
SOFTKEY
LABEL 6

SOFTKEY Softkey active, opens a data

LABEL 7
entry field (red)
SOFTKEY
LABEL 8

SOFTKEY
LABEL 9

SOFTKEY
LABEL 10

Menu display

Fig. 3-5 Setup of the softkey area

The softkeys have different functions depending on the instrument state. Therefore, their labeling can be
varied. The function and current state of the softkeys is indicated in the label by different texts and
colors. The color assignment is factory-set as follows:

Table 3-2 Factory-set color assignment of soft keys

Softkey color Meaning

gray Softkey switched off

green Softkey switched on
red Softkey switched on and data entry active

These colors can be changed by the user as desired in the SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY
menu.
A softkey is switched on or off by pressing the respective hardkey. If a mouse is connected to the
instrument, the softkey label on the display can be selected using the mouse, alternatively.

If instrument functions depend on options, the associated softkeys may be completely masked out, if
the options are not fitted. If instrument functions are not available temporarily due to different operating
modes, the corresponding softkeys are disabled. Actuating the softkey has no function then. In this
case, the softkey is represented "plane", i.e., without 3D effect.

1119.5063.12 3.10 E-12

FSIQ Screen

Changing the Menu

With manual control, the FSIQ can be operated via the front-panel keys, the external keyboard or with a
mouse.

Operation is menu-controlled. Various softkey menus are displayed depending on the instrument
status. The individual menus constitute the so-called menu tree. The top menu (the root of the menu
tree) is always called by means of a keystroke. The individual softkeys are then used to branch into
further menus (submenus).
USER

Root menu

SCREEN

Submenu

Supplementary
menus

Fig. 3-6 Theory of menu selection

Each softkey menu consists of max. 30 softkeys, 10 softkeys being arranged in a main menu, 10 in a
left-hand supplementary menu and 10 in a right-hand supplementary menu. In contrast to empty main
menus, empty supplementary menus are not displayed. Arrows at the lower edge of the softkey area
indicate whether a supplementary menu exists or not.

1119.5063.12 3.11 E-12

Screen FSIQ

Left-hand supplementary menu Main menu Right-hand supplementary menu

Softkey Softkey Softkey

21 1 11
Softkey Softkey Softkey
22 2 12

Softkey Softkey Softkey

23 3 13
Softkey Softkey Softkey
24 4 14
Softkey Softkey Softkey
25 5 15

Softkey Softkey Softkey

26 6 16
Softkey Softkey Softkey
27 7 17
Softkey Softkey Softkey
28 8 18
Softkey Softkey Softkey
29 9 19
Softkey Softkey Softkey
30 10 20

Fig. 3-7 Switching between main menu and supplementary menu

The menu arrows help to orient inside the menu tree.

Examples: This menu has a right-hand and a lefthand supplementary menu. It is the
root menu since there is no ⇑ arrow.

Only a right-hand supplementary menu or the upper menu can be accessed

from this menu.
ME N U
The MENU keys allow for selecting the main menu and the supplementary
menus. If a mouse is connected to the instrument, the menu arrows can be
selected to enter the respective menus. The MENU keys have the following
functions:

When this key is pressed, the FSIQ enters the left-hand supplementary
menu.

This key is pressed to call the upper menu which is located in the next higher
hierarchical level in the menu tree. Several menus provide for automatic
change, i.e., return to the next higher menu is caused automatically after
pressing a softkey.

The right-hand supplementary menu is selected by pressing this key.

A supplementary menu cannot be selected from another supplementary
menu but only via the main menu.

SOFTKEY The labelling of all softkeys which call a submenu includes an arrow.
Selection of a submenu is always effected via a softkey.

The softkeys are masked out in remote mode and during macro processing.

1119.5063.12 3.12 E-12

FSIQ Setting the Parameters

Setting the Parameters

Data Entry
Instrument parameters can be entered in an entry window or in a table via the numeric keypad on the
front panel (DATA ENTRY), an external keyboard and the roll-key.
The numeric keypad DATA ENTRY is provided for entry of numeric parameters (e.g., the start
frequency). The roll-key is used for fast incrementing or decrementing of numeric parameters with a
defined step size.

It is advisable to use the external keyboard for definition of alphanumeric parameters (e.g., file names)
since the front panel does not allow for entry of letters.

Numeric Keypad on the Front Panel

The keys are assigned the following functions:

D AT A E N T R Y

0 ... 9 Number keys

D AT A E N T R Y

Changes the sign of the mantissa or exponent of a numeric parameter. A

-
"-" is inserted at the cursor position in case of an alphanumeric parameter.

D AT A E N T R Y

. Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position in the numeric string.

D AT A E N T R Y
-dBm
V GHz Provide the numeric value entered with the selected unit and terminate the
s
entry.
dBm
mV MHz
ms
The unit keys are all assigned the value "1" if quantities are indicated
dB
µV
without dimensions in order to prevent faulty operations The unit keys thus
kHz
µs adopt the function of an ENTER key. The same applies for an
alphanumeric entry field.
dB..
nV Hz
ns

1119.5063.12 3.13 E-12

Setting the Parameters FSIQ

D AT A E N T R Y

EXP
Adds an exponent (E-xx) to the end of the numeric string.

D AT A E N T R Y Deletes the character left to the cursor with numeric entry.

After entry has been terminated it allows for toggling between the current
BACK parameter and the previous value (UNDO function).

D AT A E N T R Y Exit from the entry window and removal from screen prior or subsequent to
entry.
CLR
Complete deletion of the entry string just being entered during numeric
entry.
Deletion of the system messages or warnings which are displayed in an
individual field.

Roll-key and Cursor Keys

DAT A VAR IATION
The roll-key has various functions.

• With numeric entry, the instrument parameter is incremented (turning

clockwise) or decremented (turning counterclockwise) at a defined step
size.
The step size may be equal to or smaller (e.g., 1/10) than the step size
being defined for the cursor keys (see description of the STEP key).
• In tables, the roll-key can be used to shift the cursor horizontally or
vertically when no entry window is open. The direction (horizontal/
vertical) is switched over using the cursor keys.
• The roll-key is used with the help-line editor to select the individual
letters.
• It can be used to shift markers, display lines, limit lines etc.
The roll-key provides an acceleration algorithm, i.e., the variation step size
increases with increasing rotational speed.

Cursor keys:
D A T A V AR I A T I O N
With numeric entry, the keys or are used to increase or decrease the
instrument parameter by the selected step size. The keys are disabled With
alphanumeric entry, the keys are used to toggle between the editing line
and the help line editor.

The keys and are used to shift the cursor inside the entry window to
reach a particular position in the number string.

In tables, the cursor keys are used to shift the cursor between the lines and
columns of the table.

1119.5063.12 3.14 E-12

FSIQ Setting the Parameters

Entry Windows
Setting Up the Entry Window
The instrument parameters are not entered at the location where the parameter is displayed but in an
individual entry window.

The entry window is called by a softkey or a hardkey and is used for definition of numeric or
alphanumeric instrument parameters (START FREQUENCY by way of example):

Headline with
parameter designation
START FREQUENCY
10.2457535 GHZ Editing line with
parameter value and unit
START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE

Status and error messages

Fig. 3-8 Setup of an entry window

Subsequent to calling the entry window the current parameter value including the unit is displayed in the
editing line. Status and error messges which refer to the current entry are displayed in the third and
(optionally) fourth line.

The entry window is displayed in the left upper edge of the active measuring window with the default
setting. When a mouse is connected to the instrument, open entry windows can be shifted to any
position on the screen provided that they do not cover the softkey line. The new position is valid until
measuring window is selected. The data entry window is represented transparent or non-transparent, as
required.

Alphanumeric parameters are displayed as a simple character string in the editing line. Numeric
parameters which consist of mantissa, exponent and unit are set up as follows:

Mantissa Exponent Unit

-123.456789 E-12 MHz

Sign Space

Fig. 3-9 Setup of numeric parameters

Mantissa: The first character is the sign of the mantissa, the positive sign is not displayed. The
actual numeric value follows. The number of digits depends on the instrument
parameter. The cursor may be shifted to the first digit of the mantissa at maximum,
however, it may not precede the sign. The decimal point can be set as required.
Exponent: The exponent is separated from mantissa by a space character. The sign field of the
exponent follows the "E", the positive sign "+" being not displayed similar to the
representation of the mantissa. The cursor skips the "E" and the sign field. Two
characters are fixed for the exponent value.
Unit: The unit (not represented in editing mode) is separated from the exponent by a space
character.

The number of digits which can be entered for each instrument parameter is limited by the width of the
input field only, but not by the amount which is physically enabled. (Example: Levels should be indicated
with two decimals. The user may, however, enter as many decimals as desired - the entered value is
rounded accordingly).

1119.5063.12 3.15 E-12

Setting the Parameters FSIQ

There are two types of entry windows:

START FREQUENCY The editing line of the entry window for numeric
10.2457535 GHZ
parameters allows for display of up to 24
START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE
characters. Horizontal scrolling is not possible in
the editing line.

HARDCOPY TITLE
The editing line of the entry window for
BANDPASS-FILTER TEST 23A
alphanumeric parameters allows for display of up
to 60 characters (cf. display section). Maximum
256 characters may be entered. Horizontal
scrolling is possible.

Editing of Numeric Parameters

Calling the entry window:

• Subsequent to calling the entry window, the current value of the numeric parameter including the unit
is displayed in inverted color. The cursor is not displayed in this state. The transparent data entry
window has no background color.
• The entry window is closed upon pressing the key CLR.

Editing mode:
• Pressing a number, sign or decimal point key causes the value and unit to be deleted. The new value
is output left-justified. The individual characters are entered in insert mode. If the maximum amount of
characters for the mantissa or the exponent has been entered, no further entry is possible (no
horizontal scrolling). If characters are positioned to the right of the cursor, they are shifted right when
reaching the maximum length and get lost.
• Pressing the keys DATA VARIATION or causes normal representation of the current value.
The unit is no longer displayed and the cursor precedes the first digit of the mantissa ( ) or follows
the last digit entered ( ). The DATA VARIATION keys and change the numeric value of the
cursor.
• Pressing the DATA VARIATION keys or or the roll-key causes the original parameter value to
be restored and modified according to the defined step size for this parameter.
• The data management of the instrument stores the previous value of a parameter in addition to the
current value. The BACK key allows for toggling between these two values.

Termination and abortion of entry:

• The editing mode is terminated by pressing a unit key. The validity of the new parameter value is
checked and accepted for the instrument setting. If an error occurs, a corresponding error message is
displayed in the status line of the editing field, e.g., "Out of range", "Value adjusted", etc.
• Editing of a parameter can be aborted by pressing the key CLR. The original parameter is then
displayed again. The entry window is closed by pressing the CLR key again.
• Pressing a key or softkey subsequent to starting the entry causes the entry to be aborted and the
entry window to be closed. If the same softkey which has opened the entry window is activated during
entry, the original value is restored and displayed.

1119.5063.12 3.16 E-12

FSIQ Setting the Parameters

Editing of Alphanumeric Parameters

Generally, the regulations for numeric parameters analogously apply for alphanumeric parameters. Note
the exceptions given below:
• Alphanumeric parameters are not displayed with a unit.
• The four unit keys adopt the function of the ENTER key.
• Horizontal scrolling is possible in the editing line.
• Incrementing or decrementing cannot be effected via the keys , or the roll-key.
• Pressing the sign key causes a "-" character to be inserted at the cursor position, the decimal point
key causes insertion of a point ".".
• The exponent key has no function.

Help Line Editor

The help line editor allows for labelling or text entries to be made without an external keyboard being
required. In this case, a field containing letters and special characters is added to the standard entry
window. The help line editor is displayed automatically if no external keyboard is provided and an entry
window for alphanumeric entry is opened.
CALIBRATION FILE
C:\MEASDATA\STANDARD.CAL Three-line entry window

Uppercase and
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÄÖÜ!?"$%/(){[]}\+*#~'-_=.: lowercase letters,
special characters
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzäöüß,;<>|@µ²³^°123456789 0 and digits

Fig. 3-10 Help line editor

• The keys and are used to toggle between the editing line and the help line editor.
• The cursor can be positioned to the required character in the help line editor using the cursor keys
and the roll-key.
• A character is entered in the editing line by pressing any of the unit keys.
• If the cursor is already located in the editing line, pressing a unit key terminates data entry.

1119.5063.12 3.17 E-12

Setting the Parameters FSIQ

Table Entry
The FSIQ uses numerous tables for indication and configuration of instrument parameters. The tables
differ very much in the number of lines, columns and inscriptions and have a different functionality.

Tables are represented in a non-transparent form. The size is predefined and cannot be modified. If a
mouse is connected, the tables may be shifted on the display without covering the softkeys. Tables can
be superimposed by entry windows or suchlike.

Tables are mostly coupled to a softkey menu which provides further functions for editing table entries,
e.g., deletion of tables, copying lines or columns, marking of table elements, restoring of default states
etc. Another kind of tables is exclusively used for indication of instrument parameters and cannot be
edited.

The definition of individual tables and the operation of particular editing functions can be looked up in the
reference section with the description of the corresponding softkey menu.

The basic concept of operation is, however, the same for all tables. A differentiation is made between
shifting mode and editing mode.

Shifting Mode

This mode is active subsequent to opening a table. The cursor is shifted between the table elements by
means of the cursor keys. The table element which is below the cursor is represented in inverted color.

TRANSDUCER SET
Name Unit
Antenna dBµV/m
Ant_Cab2 dBµV/m
Ant_Pre dBµV/m
Ant_Cab1 dBµV/m
Probeset dBµA

Cursor

Fig. 3-11 Shifting mode

1119.5063.12 3.18 E-12

FSIQ Setting the Parameters

Editing Mode
A table element which is marked by a cursor can be editied as follows:

• by pressing one of the unit keys on the front panel or the ENTER key on the external keyboard.
• by a double-click of the mouse on the table element. If the clicked element is not yet marked by the
cursor, the letter is positioned on the element, additionally.
• For numeric or alphanumeric instrument parameters, the editing operation may be started by entry of
any number or letter on the front panel or on the external keyboard.
The data entry window, the selection list or the toggle editor are provided for this purpose.

After the editing operation has been terminated, the table enters the shifting mode again. The cursor is
positioned automatically on the next table element.

1119.5063.12 3.19 E-12

Disabling the Control Elements FSIQ

Disabling the Control Elements - HOLD Key

The individual softkeys have the following functions:

D A T A V AR I A T I O N The functions of the HOLD menu allow for disabling individual control
elements or the complete instrument control. The LED above the HOLD
key indicates that either the function LOCK DATA or LOCK ALL has been
HOLD
activated. The control can be enabled again by successively pressing the
two UNLOCK softkeys in any order.

Switching off the instrument resets control such that the instrument can be
normally operated again after subsequent switch-on.

UNLOCK After selecting the two UNLOCK softkeys, the instrument keyboard is enabled
again. The LED above the HOLD key goes out.

LOCK DATA Selection of softkey LOCK DATA causes the roll-key to be disabled in order
to prevent a parameter from being varied by mistake.

LOCK ALL Selection of LOCK ALL softkey disables the complete front panel (including
the PRESET key and roll-key, not including the UNLOCK softkeys), the
mouse and all keys of the external keyboard. Exit from the HOLD menu is no
longer possible. Control is enabled again by actuating the two UNLOCK
softkeys.

1119.5063.12 3.20 E-12

FSIQ Setting the Step Size

Setting the Stepsize - STEP Key

A number of numeric instrument parameters allow for step-by-step incrementing or decrementing the
value in the editing line of the entry window using the keys or or the roll-key. The stepsize used
with the cursor keys can be specified for the selected parameters in the STEP menu.

Notes: – It is not possible to set the stepsize by all of the numeric parameters.
– An extended STEP menu is available by some parameters. The extra functions are
described by the respective parameter.
– Setting the step size has no effect on the roll-key (the resolution of the roll-key is higher than
that of the step size functuion)

D A T A V AR I A T I O N The STEP key opens the STEP menu for entry of the stepsize.

The stepsize of an instrument parameter can only be varied when this

STEP parameter is edited in an entry window.
The softkeys in the STEP menu are disabled if no instrumentnparameter is
being varied or if the parameter being edited does not support stepsize
variation (as is the case by all of the alphanumeric parameters.

The key leads to exit from the STEP menu and automatic return to the
previously active menu.

STEPSIZE The softkey STEPSIZE AUTO causes the stepsize for the corresponding
AUTO instrument parameter to be set automatically and be continuously varied with
varying instrument settings (in accordance with other parameters).

Example:
The stepsize of the CENTER frequency depends on the selected span.

STEPSIZE The softkey STEPSIZE NORMAL calls an entry window for definition of a
MANUAL stepsize by the user. The parameter whose stepsize is varied, is displayed in
the headline of the entry window:

START FREQUENCY STEPSIZE

100 kHz

The stepsize remains constant until a new value is entered or until the
STEPSIZE AUTO softkey is activated. It is no longer coupled to other
instrument parameters.

1119.5063.12 3.21 E-12

Mouse and External Keyboard Control FSIQ

Mouse and External Keyboard Control

External Keyboard Control

The connection of an external keyboard provides additional characters for the entry (letters and special
characters). It is permitted to use both, front panel keys and the external keyboard, for control. The
number, cursor and sign keys have the same effect as the corresponding front panel keys. A few keys
of the external keyboard provide an extended functionality with entries or tables which is described in the
following table. The table shows the external keyboard key combinations through which the functions of
the front panel keys can be emulated.
Note: The key combination <ALT> <SYSREQ> switches between the instrument display screen
and the controller display screen
Table 3-3 Front Panel Keyboard Emulation
FSIQ front panel keys Key assignments FSIQ front panel keys Key assignments
for the external for the external
keyboard keyboard

Soft keys: SK1 F1 Hardcopy key group: Start SHIFT-F6

SK2 F2 Settings SHIFT-F9
SK3 F3 Status key group : Local SHIFT-F3
SK4 F4
SK5 F5 Frequency key group: Start CTRL-F7
SK6 F6 Stop CTRL-F8
SK7 F7 CenterCenter CTRL-F9
SK8 F8 Span CTRL-F10
SK9 F9
Level key group: Ref CTRL-F11
SK10 F10
Range CTRL-F12
Menu select: Menu left CTRL ← Input ALT-F11
Menu right CTRL → Cal ALT-F12
Menu up CTRL ↑ Marker key group : Normal CTRL-F1
Search CTRL-F2
Cursor control: Cursor left ←
Delta CTRL-F3
Cursor right → → Mkr CTRL-F4
Cursor up ↑
Cursor down Lines key group : Display CTRL-F5
↓
Limit CTRL-F6
Roll-key: Turn left SHIFT ↑
Traces key group : 1 ALT-1
Turn right SHIFT ↓ 2 ALT-2
Numeric keys: 0 to 9 0 to 9 3 ALT-3
4 ALT-4
Units keys: GHz... ALT-G
MHz... ALT-M Sweep key group : -- ALT-F3
kHz... ALT-K -- ALT-F4
Hz... <ENTER> -- ALT-F5
Coupl. ALT-F6
Edit keys: Clear <ESC> Sweep ALT-F7
Backspace BACK Trigger ALT-F8
Misc. data entry keys: Memory key group: Save SHIFT-F10
Exponent "Exp" ALT-E Recall SHIFT-F11
Sign "+/-" - Config SHIFT-F12
Decimal point"." .
Data entry key group : Step SHIFT-F7
Hold key: Hold SHIFT-F1
Letters and special characters A to Z (ext.)
User menu: User SHIFT-F2 a to z (ext.)
System keys: Preset SHIFT-F4 Special
Cal ALT-F12 characters (ext.)
Display ALT-F10 Edit key Delete
Info SHIFT-F5
Cursor control Home
Configuration key group: Mode ALT-F2 End
Setup SHIFT-F8 Page up
Page down

1119.5063.12 3.22 E-12

FSIQ Mouse and External Keyboard Control

Data Entry Windows with Mouse Control

With a mouse being connected, additional functions are provided in the entry windows. Therefore,
buttons are displayed in the entry window.

Essentially, the definitions which have been made for all types of entry window also apply for mouse
control. However, note the following deviations:

• The so-called close-button is displayed on the left margin of the headline. Selecting this button via the
mouse aborts the entry and closes the entry window. This corresponds to the function of the CLR key
with manual control.
• In the numeric entry window, two buttons ( ) are displayed on the left margin of the editing line.
Simply clicking the buttons causes the parameter in the editing line to be incremented or
decremented (similar to the keys / or the roll-key with manual control).
• The cursor can be positioned in the entry line by clicking a character using the mouse.
• A character in the letter window of the help line editor can be selected by a single click. A double click
copies the character from the letter window into the editing line.
• Open entry windows can be shifted across the complete screen using the mouse; they must not,
however, be superimposed on the softkey line. Shifting is performed by clicking the headline and
pushing the mouse while he mouse-key is being pressed.
Example: Numeric entry window with mouse control

START FREQUENCY
10.2457535 GHZ
START FREQUENCY OUT OF RANGE

1119.5063.12 3.23 E-12

Mouse and External Keyboard Control FSIQ

Mouse Control of Further Display Elements

All display and control elements (enhancement labels, soft keys, function fields, display and limit lines)
which can be displayed on the display screen can also be controlled by the mouse. Each soft key or key
is assigned to a display element.
Double-klicking an display or control element opens the corresponding softkey menu. The assignment
of softkeys/keys to display elements is shown in the following table.
Klicking the right mouse key call all softkey menus one after the other.

Table 3-4 Mouse Control of Display Elements

Display element for mouse control. Assigned soft key or key

Display field for Soft Key 1 to Soft Key 10 Soft Key 1 to Soft Key 10

Display field for menu arrow: right/center/left Key right/center/left supplementary menu

Enhancement labels * --
PA SETUP key
PS SETUP key
UNS COUPLING key
LVL REF key
FRQ CENTER key
1-x TRACE 1 key
2-x TRACE 2 key
3-x TRACE 3 key
4-x TRACE 4 key

TRG TRIGGER key

DC INPUT key
75Ω INPUT key
MAC USER key

Status display UNCAL CAL key

OVLD REF key
ERR INFO key

Display fields above the diagram

Ref. Level / Max REF key
Level NORMAL key
Marker COUPLING key
RBW COUPLING key
VBW COUPLING key
SWT INPUT key
RF Att INPUT key
Mixer REF key
Unit

Display fields below the diagram

Start START key
Stop STOP key
Center CENTER key
Span SPAN key
Trigger TRIGGER key
/Div --

1119.5063.12 3.24 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

Menu Overview

System Key Group

SCREEN
COUPLING
MODE
SYSTEM DISPLAY COUPLED
FULL
PRESET CAL SCREEN

SPLIT
HORIZONTAL
SCREEN
SCALING
DISPLAY INFO
VERTICAL
SCALING
ACTIVE
COUPLING
SCREEN A
CONTROL
ACTIVE
SCREEN B

ACTIVE
SCREEN C

ACTIVE
SCREEN D

SCREEN
SCREENS
COUPLING
UNCOUPLED
CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG
DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY
SELECT TIME
OBJECT ON OFF

DATAENTRY DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS COMMENT
FIELD
DATAENTRY
X TINT

DATAENTRY
SCR SAVER
Y SATURATION ON OFF

SCR SAVER
TIME
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
POSITION
COLORS

PREDEFINED
COLORS

LOGO
ON OFF

FREQUENCY
ON OFF

DATAENTRY
FIELD
DATAENTRY
OPAQUE

1119.5063.12 3.25 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

SYSTEM CALIBRATE CALIBRATE

PRESET CAL CAL SHORT CAL
RESULTS

CAL TOTAL
DISPLAY INFO
CAL
RES BW

CAL LOG

CAL
LO SUPP

CAL
CAL I/Q
I/Q

FSIQ26 PRESEL
PEAK PAGE UP
and FSIQ40
CAL CORR
ON OFF PAGE DOWN

INFO
SYSTEM
FIRMWARE
PRESET CAL VERSIONS

HARDWARE+
DISPLAY INFO OPTIONS SELFTEST
EXECUTE
SELFTEST TESTS

SYSTEM SYSTEM
MESSAGES MESSAGES

OPTIONS
CLEAR
STATISTIC STATISTIC MESSAGE
ATTEN CLEAR ALL
SWITCHES MESSAGES

UPDATE
MESSAGES
.
.
.

1119.5063.12 3.26 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

Configuration Key Group

CONFIGURATION
MODE
MODE
ANALYZER

SETUP
Option Tracking VECTOR ANALYZER
TRACKING Generator;
GENE RATOR DIGITAL DEMOD
see below

VECTOR DIGITAL
ANALYZER STANDARDS

DIGITAL
DEMOD

ANALOG see below

DEMOD

Option FSE-K10; GSM MS MODULATION

ANALYZER see below
see manual of option PARAMETER

Option FSE-K10; GSM BTS MEAS

see below
see manual of option ANALYZER RESULT

TRIGGE R see Section

"SWEEP Key Group"

RANG E see Section

"LEVEL Key Group"

D IGI TA L SWEEP
D E M OD UL A TIO N TIME

BPSK DEMOD
QPSK
BANDWIDTH
DQPSK
Π/4DQPSK IF
0QPSK see Section
BAND WIDTH "SWEEP Key Group"
8PSK
D8PSK
3Π/8-8PSK
MSK
DMSK DIGITA L DIGITAL DIGITAL
2FSK STANDAR DS STANDARDS STANDARDS
4FSK IS95-CDMA
16QAM PDC UP CT2
FWD CH

IS95-CDMA
PDC DOWN ERMES
REV CH

NADC W-CDMA
MOD ACOM
FWD CH 4.096 FWD

NADC W-CDMA FL EX16 _2

REV CH 4.096 REV

W-CDMA
FLE X32_2
3GPP FWD

W-CDMA
DECT FLE X32_4
3GPP REV

CDMA 2000
PHS FLE X64_4
SR3/DS FWD

APCO25
PWT C4FM

APCO25
TETRA EDGE CQ PSK

TFTS GSM CDPD

1119.5063.12 3.27 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

CONFIGURATION VECTOR ANALYZER

MODE DIGITAL DEMOD M EAS
MODE SI GNAL
ANALY ZER Modulation FSK M AGNI TUDE

ER ROR
SETUP SI GNAL
Option Tracking
TRACKING M AGNI TUD E
Generator;
GENERA TOR see below F REQU ENCY

VECTOR V ECTOR
ANALYZER AN ALYZE R
DIGITAL see above F REQU ENC Y
STANDARDS EY E DI AG
[FREQ]
DIGITAL see above
DEMOD EY E
LE NGTH
Option FSE-K10; GSM MS ANALOG
ANALYZER DEMOD
see manual of option

Option FSE-K10; GSM BTS

see manual of option ANALYZER
MODU LATION
PARAMETER

MEAS
R ESULT SY MBOL
D ISPL AY
T RIGGER
MEAS
RESULT
RANGE MAGNITUDE
CA P BU FFER

MEAS
SIGNAL
M EAS MEA S
IF SI GNAL S IGN AL
BAN DWI DTH REFERENCE
SIGNAL Modulation Not FSK
M AGNI TUDE

ERROR ER R OR
M ODULATION SIGNAL S IGNA L PHASE WRAP
PHA SE OFF
PARAMETER ON
SYMB TABLE M AGNI TU DE
SYMBOL
RATE / ERRORS F REQU ENCY
PHA SE
R EAL/ IMAG
PART
MEMORY F REQU EN CY
SI DE BAN D EYE DI AG EY E
NORM IN V SIZE
M E MO R Y S IZ E [I ] LENGTH
REAL / IMAG
1 6384 POIN TS FRAME PART
8192 POIN TS LENGTH EY E DI AG
4096 POIN TS [Q ]
MEAS 2048 POIN TS RESULT
FILTER 1024 POIN TS LENGTH EYE DI AG
TREL LIS
RE FERENCE POINTS PER
FILTER F RA M E L E NG TH SYMBOL POLAR [ IQ]
VECTO R
1 600 SYMBOLS ER ROR VE CT
ALPHA/B T 1 500 SYMBOLS MAG NITU DE
POLAR [ IQ]
1 400 SYMBOLS POLA R [ IQ] CONSTE LL
F SK REF 1 300 SYMBOLS VE CTO R
SYMBOL
DE VIATION 1 200 SYMBOLS PO I NT S/ SY MB O L D ISPL AY
POL AR [ IQ]
1 100 SYMBOLS 16 CO NSTE LL
1 000 SYMBOLS 8
4 SY MBO L
900 SYMBOLS
NORMALIZE 2 DISP LAY
800 SY MBOLS 1
ON OFF
700 SY MBOLS
600 SY MBOLS
REF FILTER MEAS FILTER 500 SY MBOLS
None 400 SY MBOLS
Raised Cos
Root raised cos Raised Cos 300 SY MBOLS
Gaussian Root raised cos
Gaussian 200 SY MBOLS

apco25fm 100 SY MBOLS

edge_mes apco25fm
edge_ref edge_mes
bess1_22 edge_ref
bess1_25 bess1_22
bess1_25
bess2_44
bess2_44
IS95_fm
IS95_fr IS95_fm
IS95_rm IS95_fr
IS95_rr IS95_rm
IS95_rr

1119.5063.12 3.28 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

VECTOR ANALYZER
CONFIGURATION ANALOG DEMOD / REAL TIME ON

MODE VECTOR
HIGH PAS S
ANALYZER
MODE AF FILTER
DIGITA L
A NALYZER STANDAR DS
SETUP NON E
30 Hz
DIGITAL
DEMOD 300 Hz
R ECEIVER DEMOD
S ETT I NGS
ANALOG HIGH PASS
Option AF FILTER
TRACKING DEMOD LOW PAS S
Tracking Generator;
see below GENERATOR AF F ILTE R
MODULATION L OW P ASS
V EC TOR PARAMETER AF FILTER NONE
AN AL YZER 3 kH z
M EAS WEIG HTI N G 15 k Hz
RE SULT AF F ILT E R

TRIGGER WEI GHTING

AF DEMOD AF F ILTE R

AF CO UPL’ G NONE
GSM MS RANGE CCITT
Option FSE-K10; AC DC
see manual of option ANALYZER C-Message
SWEEP SQUELCH
Option FSE-K11; GSM BTS TIME ON OFF
see manual of option ANALYZER
DEM OD S Q UEL CH
AM/FM
B ANDW IDTH LE VEL
DEEM PHAS IS
IF SI D E B AND
BAN DWID TH NON IN V

AM/ FM
DEE MPH 50 us

MEA S RESULT DEEMPHASIS

75 us
ON
O OFF
AM S IGN A L SUM MARY
S ET TI NG S
750 us
AVE RAGE/
FM S IGN A L
HOL D ON

SWE EP
PM S IGN A L COU NT

REL UNIT
MODU LATI ON
% dB
SUM MARY
PRE DISPL
I N DICA TION ON OFF
SUMM ARY
SETT ING S ABS REL

SET
SUM MARY
REFERENCE
MEAS TIM E

MEA S->R EF

REA L TI ME
ON OFF
SINAD 1kHz
SE NSI TIV ON OFF
AF OU TPUT

VOLUME

1119.5063.12 3.29 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

VECTOR ANALYZER
CONFIGURATION ANALOG DEMOD / REAL TIME OFF

MODE VECTOR
ANALYZER
MODE DIGITA L
A NALYZER STANDAR DS
SETUP
DIGITAL
DEMOD
DEMOD
S ETT I NGS

Option ANALOG
Tracking Generator;
TRACKING DEMOD LOW PAS S
see below GENERATOR AF FILTER
MODULATION L OW P ASS
V EC TOR PARAMETER AF FILTER NONE
AN AL YZER 5% [DEMOD BW]
M EAS 10% [DEMOD BW]
20% [DEMOD BW]
RE SULT

TRIGGER

AF COUPL’G
Option FSE-K10; GSM MS RANGE AC DC
see manual of option ANALYZER
S WEE P SQUELCH
Option FSE-K11; GSM BTS TIM E ON OFF
see manual of option ANALYZER
DEM OD S Q UELCH
B ANDW IDTH L E VEL

IF SIDE BAND
BAN DWID TH NORM INV

MEA S RESULT

AM S IGN A L SUM MARY

S ET TI NG S
AVE RAGE/
FM S IGN A L
HOL D ON

SWE EP
PM S IGN A L COU NT

MODU LATI ON REL UNIT

SUM MARY % dB

SUMM ARY INDICATION

SETT ING S ABS REL

SET
SUM MARY
REFERENCE
MEAS TIM E

MEA S->R EF

REAL TIME
ON OFF

1119.5063.12 3.30 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

CONFIGURATION TRACKING GENERATOR

MODE
MODE
ANA LYZER

SETUP
Option TRACKIN G TRACKING
Tracking Generator GENE RATOR GENERATOR
SOURCE
VECTOR ON OFF
see above ANALYZE R
SOURCE
POWER

POWER
OFFSET

SOURCE SOURCE
Option FSE-K10; GSM MS CAL CAL
see manual of option ANALYZER
CAL
FREQUENCY TRANS
Option FSE-K11; GSM BTS OFFSET
see manual of option ANALYZER
CAL REFL
MODULATION SHORT
MODULATION
EXT AM CAL REFL
OPEN

EXT FM
NORMALIZE

EXT ALC REF VALUE

POSITION

EXT I/Q REF VALUE

RECALL

1119.5063.12 3.31 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

SETUP
OP TI O NS
CONFIGURATION TRANSDUCER
EN ABLE NEW
OPTION
MODE
PREAMP
ON OFF

SETUP .
GENERAL .
SETUP
PRESELECT
GPIB
.
ON OFF
ADDRESS
SE RV IC E
USE R
PORT A INPUT
RF
OPTIONS USER INPUT
PORT B CAL
REFERENCE FIRMWARE COM N OIS E
INT EXT UPDATE PORT1 SOU RCE
REF ERENCE R E FER E NC E
EXT REF COM ADJUST A DJ US T
FREQUENCY PORT2
REFERENCE
SERVICE MODE FSE
ON OFF TIME REFERENCE
PRO G
GENERAL
SETUP DATE

.
UPDATE MONITOR SERVICE
CONNECTED FUNCTION .
RESTORE ENTER .
TRANS DUCER KEY CLICK PA SSWO RD
ON OFF
T RANS DUCER .
FAC TOR
.
T RANS DUCER .
SET

ED IT T RD
EDIT TRD
FA CTOR
FACTOR
EDIT TRD EDIT TRD FACTO R
SET TRANSD SET NAM E
TR ANSD SET
NEW NAME TRD FACTO R
FACTOR/SET UNI T
T RANS D SET
DELETE UN IT TRD FACTOR
F ACTOR/SET VA LUES
T RANS D SET
RA NGES INSERT
LINE
INS ERT
LI NE DELETE
LINE
DELET E
PAGE UP LINE

PAGE DOWN SA VE TRD

F ACTOR
SAVE TRD
SET DRAW TRD
FACTOR
DRAW
TR D SE T

PAGE UP

PAGE D OWN

1119.5063.12 3.32 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

Hardcopy Key Group

HARDCOPY
SETTINGS
HARDCOPY COPY
SCREEN
START
COPY TRACE

SETTINGS COPY TABLE

SELECT SELECT
QUADRANT QUADRANT
ENTER UPPER
ENTER LEFT
TEXT TEXT
COMMENT LOWER
HARDCOPY LEFT
DEVICE SCREEN A

COMMENT UPPER
HARDCOPY SCREEN B RIGHT
DEVICE
COLOR SETTINGS LOWER
ON OFF DEVICE 1 RIGHT

TRC COLOR SETTINGS

AUTO INC DEVICE 2

ENABLE FULL
TITLE
DEV1 DEV2 PAGE

HARDCOPY
START

SETTINGS

without softkey menu

1119.5063.12 3.33 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

Frequency Key Group

FREQUENCY ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER

CENTER SPAN CENTER CENTER

CENTER CENTER
MANUAL FREQUENCY

START STOP START

FIXED

SPAN
FIXED

STOP
FIXED
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
OFFSET OFFSET

MIXER
FREQ AXIS MIXER
FREQ AXIS
LIN LOG
INTERNAL LIN LOG
INTERNAL

MIXER MIXER
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL

FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY SPAN ZOOM
SPAN MOVE ZOOM
CENTER SPAN MANUAL WINDOW

START MOVE ZOOM

FIXED START
START STOP
CENTER MOVE ZOOM
FIXED STOP

STOP ZOOM
The SPAN key has no FIXED OFF
function in the vector
analysis mode. ZERO SPAN

FULL SPAN

LAST SPAN

ZOOM

FREQ AXIS
LIN LOG

1119.5063.12 3.34 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

FREQUENCY START FREQ

START
CENTER SPAN MANUAL

CENTER
FIXED
START STOP
SPAN
FIXED

STOP
The START key has no FIXED
function in vector analysis
mode.

FREQ AXIS
LIN LOG

FREQUENCY STOP FREQ

STOP
CENTER SPAN MANUAL

START
FIXED
START STOP
CENTER
FIXED

SPAN
The STOP key has no FIXED
function in vector analysis
mode.

FREQ AXIS
LIN LOG

1119.5063.12 3.35 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

Level Key Group, Input Key

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER
LEVEL RE F LEVEL REF LEVEL REF LEVEL
MAX LEVEL
REF LEVEL REF LEVEL
AUTO
REF
REF LEVEL MAX LEVEL REF LEVEL
OFFSET MANUAL OFFSET

RANGE GRID
ABS REL

UNIT

Option FSE-B13, ATTEN STEP Option FSE-B13, ATTEN STEP

1 dB Attenuator 1dB 10dB 1 dB Attenuator 1dB 10dB

RF AT TEN RF ATTEN
MANU AL MANUAL

ATTEN AUTO ATTEN AUTO

NORMAL NORMAL

ATTENLEVEL
REF AUTO ATTEN AUTO
A UTO
LOW NOISE LOW NOISE

A TTE N A UTO ATTEN AUTO

LOW DI ST LOW DIST

MIXER MIXER
LEVEL LEVEL

UNIT

dBm

dBmV

dBµV

dB µA

dBp W

d B* / MH

VOLT

AMP ER E

WAT T

PR OBE COD E
ON OFF

1119.5063.12 3.36 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER

LEVEL LEV EL RANGE LEVEL RANGE

LOG 120 dB
REF

SC ALE
LOG 1 00 dB Y PER DIV U NIT
RANGE
Y UN IT
LOG 5 0 dB REF VA LUE L OG[dB ]
Y A XIS
Y U NIT
DIGITAL DEMOD REF VALUE LIN EAR
LOG 2 0 dB
X A XIS
Y U NIT
LOG 1 0 dB REF VAL UE DE G
POS ITION
Y U NIT
LOG ANALOG DEMOD,
SENSITIV RA D
MANUA L REAL TIME ON
AF OUTPUT
Y UNIT
ANALOG DEMOD, dBm
LINEAR/dB VOLUME
REAL TIME ON
Y UNIT
VOLT
LINEAR/ %
Y UNIT
GRID WATT
AB S REL

SCA LE
UN IT
X UNI T
TI ME

X UNIT
SYMBOL

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT RF ATTEN
MANUAL SELECT

ATT EN A UTO RF I NPUT

NORMAL 50 OHM

ATT EN AUTO RF I NPUT

LOW NOISE 75 OH M/RAM

ATTEN AUTO RF I NPUT

LOW D IST 75 OH M/RAZ

M IXER
L EVEL

Option FSE-B13, ATTEN STEP

1 dB Attenuator 1dB 10dB

INPUT
SEL ECT

1119.5063.12 3.37 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

Marker Key Group

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER

MARKER MARKER MARKER

NORMAL NORMAL
NORMAL SEARCH
MARKER 1 MARKER MARKER 1
DEMOD
MKR DEMOD
DELTA MKR MARKER 2 ON OFF MARKER 2

MARKER 3 AM

MARKER 4 FM DIGITAL POLAR MKR

DEMOD R/I MA/PH

SIGNAL DIGITAL POLAR MKR

COUNT DEMOD DEG RAD

MARKER COUPLED
DEMOD MARKER
MKR DEMOD
MARKER
STOP TIME
MARKER ZOOM
MARKER
NORMAL NORMAL
VOLUME
POWER MEAS
POWER MEAS SETTING
SETTING MARKER MARKER
SET NO. OF INFO INFO
ADJ CHAN’S ALL MARKER
CHANNEL ALL MARKER
POWER OFF OFF
ACP
STANDARD
CP / ACP
ABS REL
CH FILTER COUNTER
ON OFF RESOLUTION
SET CP
REFERENCE COUNTER
RESOL 10 kHz

C / N SIGNAL
CHANNEL TRACK 1 kHz
BANDWIDTH
C / No NOISE
CHANNEL
100 Hz
SPACING
ADJACENT
EDIT CHAN POWER 10 Hz
ACP LIMITS
ADJUST CP
LIMIT SETTINGS
1 Hz
CHECK
OCC U PI ED
PWR B AN DW
0. 1 H z

% POWER
BANDWIDTH

1119.5063.12 3.38 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER

DELTA DELTA
MARKER MARKER
MARKER
DELTA 1
DELTA 1
NORMAL SEARCH

DELTA 2
DELTA 2
DELTA MKR
DELTA 3

DELTA 4

PHASE
NOISE

REFERENCE REFERENCE
POINT POINT
REF POINT
REFERENCE LEVEL
FIXED
REF POINT
DELTA MKR LVL OFFSET DELTA MKR
ABS REL ABS REL
REF POINT
ALL DELTA FREQUENCY ALL DELTA
OFF OFF
REF POINT
TIME

1119.5063.12 3.39 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER

MARKER MARKER SUMMARY
MARKER SEARCH SEARCH MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH PEAK MAX |PEAK|
PEAK

NEXT PEAK MIN + PEAK

DELTA MKR
NEXT PEAK
RIGHT MAX |PEAK| - PEAK

NEXT PEAK SUM MKR

LEFT ± PEAK/2
ON OFF
SUM MKR
SUMMARY
ON OFF RMS
MARKER
SUMMARY SUMMARY
MARKER MEAN
MARKER

SEARCH LIM
AUTO PEAK PEAK HOLD
ON
ON OFF
OFF ON OFF

SEARCH LIM AVERAGE

ON OFF ON OFF

SELECT SELECT SWEEP

MARKER MARKER COUNT
ACTIVE ACTIVE ALL SUM
MKR DELTA MKR DELTA MKR OFF
MARKER MARKER
SEARCH SEARCH RMS

MIN N DB DOWN
MEAN
NEXT MIN SHAPE FACT
60 /3 DB PEAK HOLD
ON OFF
NEXT MIN SHAPE FACT
RIGHT 60 /6 DB AVERAGE
ON OFF
NEXT MIN
LEFT SWEEP
COUNT
ALL MARKER
TO MIN ALL SUM
MKR OFF

EXCLUDE LO
ON OFF

PEAK
EXCURSION
SELECT SELECT
MARKER MARKER
ACTIVE ACTIVE
MKR DELTA MKR DELTA

1119.5063.12 3.40 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER

MARKER MARKER
MARKER
PEAK PEAK
NORMAL SEARCH
MKR
CENTER
DELTA MKR
MKR
REF LEVEL

AUTOSCALE

MKR->CF
STEPSIZE

MKR
START

MKR
STOP

MKR MKR
TRACE TRACE

SELECT SELECT
MARKER MARKER

ACTIVE ACTIVE
MKR DELTA MKR DELTA

1119.5063.12 3.41 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

Lines Key Group

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER
SPAN = 0 SPAN = 0
DISPLAY DISPLAY
LINES LINES LINES D LINES
DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY
D LINES LINE 1 LINE 1 LINE 1

DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY

LINE 2 LINE 2 LINE 2
LIMITS
THRESHOLD THRESHOLD THRESHOLD
LINE LINE LINE

REFERENCE REFERENCE REFERENCE

LINE LINE LINE

or
FREQUENCY TIME TIME/SYMB
LINE 1 LINE 1 LINE 1

FREQUENCY TIME TIME/SYMB

LINE 2 LINE 2 LINE 2

SHOW
BASELINE BASELINE
SHOW SHOW
LINE INFO
CLIPPING CLIPPING
LINE INFO LINE INFO

LINES
LIMIT LINES
SELECT
D LINES LIMIT LINE EDIT
LIMIT LINE
NEW LIMIT NAME
LIMITS LINE

EDIT LIMIT
LINE VALUES

NEWCOPY
LIMIT INSERT
LINE VALUE
LIMIT LINE
DELETE
VALUE

SHIFT X
DELETE LIMIT LINE
LIMIT LINE
SHIFT
EDIT Y
X OFFSET LIMIT GRAPH
TABLE LINE

ACCEPT
Y OFFSET POSITION
SAVE
PAGE UP LIMIT LINE

PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN

PAGE DOWN

1119.5063.12 3.42 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

Trace Key Group

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER
DIGITAL MOD
TRACE TRACE 1 TRACE 1 TRACE 1
CLEAR/ ANALOG TR CLEAR/
1 2 WRITE ON OFF WRITE

VIEW VIEW
3 4

BLANK BLANK

TRACE TRACE MATH CONTINOUS

AVERAGE MATH WRITE
T1-T2+REF
-> T1
AVERAGE
MAX HOLD
T1-T3+REF
-> T1
ASCII MAX HOLD
MIN HOLD EXPORT
T1-T4+REF
ASCII CONFIG -> T1
HOLD CONT ASCII MIN HOLD
ON OFF CONFIG EDIT PATH T1-REF
SWEEP
->T1 SWEEP
COUNT DECIM SEP COUNT
TRACE 1 . ,
DETECTOR DETECTOR
NEW
AUTO
APPEND
SELECT
COPY..
DETECTOR HEADER
AUTOPEAK ON OFF

DETECTOR
MAX PEAK

DETECTOR ADJUST TO
MIN PEAK TRACE
DETECTOR TRACE MATH
SAMPLE OFF
DETECTOR
RMS

DETECTOR
AVERAGE

1119.5063.12 3.43 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

Sweep Key Group

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER
DIGITAL DEMOD ANALOG DEMOD
SWEEP
TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER
TRIGGER
FREE RUN FREE RUN FREE RUN

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO

SWEEP

RBW LINE EXTERN EXTERN

VBW
TRIGGER AF
EXTERN SIGNAL
SW T OFFSET

SLOPE TRIGGER
COUPLING RF POWER OFFSET
POS NEG

MEAS ONLY SLOPE

IF SYNC’D POS NEG

FIND BURST
ON OFF

FIND SYNC
ON OFF

TRIGGER SYNC
DELAY OFFSET

SLOPE SYNC SYNC

POS NEG PATTERN PATTERN
SELECT
PATTERN

NEW SYNC
EDIT SYNC
PATTERN
PATTERN
EDIT SYNC NAME
PATTERN

COMMENT

VALUE

DELETE
PATTERN

PAGE UP

SAVE
PAGE DOWN PATTERN

1119.5063.12 3.44 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER

SWEEP SWEEP SWEEP

TRIGGER CONTINOUS CONTINOUS

SWEEP SWEEP

SINGLE GAP SWEEP SINGLE

SWEEP SWEEP SETTINGS SWEEP
TRIGGER
SWEEP TIME LEVEL
R AUTO
PRE
V SWEEP TIME TRIGGER SWEEP
MANUAL COUNT
SWT TRG TO GAP
SWEEP TIME ANALOG SWEEP
COUPLING COUNT TIME
DEMOD
GAP
GAP SWEEP LENGTH RESULT
ON OFF LENGTH

GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS

GATE
ON OFF

GATE GATE GATE

SETTINGS SETTINGS ADJUST
SGL SWEEP GATE GATE
DISP OFF LEVEL LEVEL

GATE MODE GATE MODE

LEVEL EDGE LEVEL EDGE

GATE POL GATE POL

POS NEG POS NEG

GATE GATE
DELAY DELAY
GATE GATE
LENGTH LENGTH

SWEEPTIME
MANUAL

GATE RES BW
EXTERN MANUAL

GATE VIDEO BW
RF POWER MANUAL

VIDEO BW
AUTO
GATE
ADJUST

1119.5063.12 3.45 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

ANALYZER VECTOR ANALYZER

COUPLED COUPLED COUPLED

SWEEP FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS
RES BW RBW 1 kHz IF BW
TRIGGER MANUAL ANA DIG AUTO
RES BW RBW<=1kHz
IF BW
AUTO NORM FFT
SWEEP MANUAL

RBW
VIDEO BW
VBW
MANUAL
SWT
VIDEO BW
COUPLING AUTO

SWEEP TIME
MANUAL

SWEEP TIME
AUTO

COUPLING
DEFAULT

COUPLING COUPLING MAIN PLL

RATIO RATIO BANDWIDTH
RBW / VBW
SINE [1]

RBW / VBW
PULSE [.1]

RBW / VBW
NOISE [10]

RBW / VBW
MANUAL

SPAN / RBW
AUTO [50]

SPAN / RBW
MANUAL

1119.5063.12 3.46 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

Memory Key Group

MEMORY
MEMORY SAVE
EDIT
NAME
SAVE
EDIT
PATH
RECALL
EDIT
COMMENT SEL ITEMS
TO SAVE
CONFIG SEL ITEMS SELECT
TO SAVE ITEMS

DATA SET ENABLE

LIST ALL ITEMS

DATA SET DISABLE

CLEAR ALL ITEMS

DATA SET
CLEAR ALL

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN

DEFAULT
CONFIG

1119.5063.12 3.47 E-12

Menu Overview FSIQ

MEMORY
MEMORY RECALL
EDIT
SAVE NAME

EDIT
PATH
RECALL
AUTO
RECALL SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL
CONFIG SELECT
SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL ITEMS

DATA SET ENABLE

LIST ALL ITEMS

DATA SET DISABLE

CLEAR ALL ITEMS

DATA SET
CLEAR ALL

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN

DEFAULT
CONFIG

MEMORY MEMORY
CONFIG CONFIG
MEMORY

SAVE
EDIT
PATH
RECALL FORMAT
COPY
DISK

CONFIG DELETE

RENAME

MAKE
DIRECTORY

SORT MODE

PA GE U P PAGE UP

PA GE D OWN PAGE DOWN

1119.5063.12 3.48 E-12

FSIQ Menu Overview

User Key Group

USER

USER (MACRO 1)

DEFINE
(MACRO 2) MACRO
RECORD
(MACRO 3) ON OFF
DEFINE
(MACRO 4) PAUSE

(MACRO 5)

(MACRO 6)

(MACRO 7)
DELETE
MACRO
MACRO
DEFINE TITLE
MACRO
SELECT
MACRO

1119.5063.12 3.49 E-12

FSIQ Contents - "Instrument Functions"

Contents - Chapter 4 "Instrument Functions"

4 Instrument Functions
General Configuration – SYSTEM and CONFIGURATION Key Groups...................................... 4.2
FSIQ Initial Configuration – PRESET Key ............................................................................... 4.2
Display Configuration – DISPLAY Key .................................................................................... 4.3
Display Screen Mode Selection..................................................................................... 4.4
Measurement Window Coupling ................................................................................... 4.5
Display Screen Configuration ........................................................................................ 4.6
FSIQ Calibration – CAL Key .................................................................................................... 4.9
Calibration Function Calls............................................................................................ 4.10
Calibration Results ...................................................................................................... 4.12
Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters – INFO Key............................................. 4.13
Firmware Versions ...................................................................................................... 4.13
Hardware Configuration and Options .......................................................................... 4.14
Self Test ...................................................................................................................... 4.15
System Messages ....................................................................................................... 4.16
Statistics Function for Input Attenuator Switching ....................................................... 4.17
Mode Selection – MODE Key ................................................................................................ 4.18
Preliminary Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key............................................... 4.20
Using Transducers ...................................................................................................... 4.20
Activating Transducer Factors and Transducer Sets ..................................... 4.21
New Entry and Editing of Transducer Factors................................................ 4.23
New Entry and Editing of Transducer Sets..................................................... 4.27
Enabling Firmware Options ......................................................................................... 4.31
External Reference Oscillator...................................................................................... 4.31
Service Functions ........................................................................................................ 4.32
Programming the Interface Configuration and Time ................................................... 4.34
IEC Bus Address Selection ............................................................................ 4.34
User Port Configuration .................................................................................. 4.35
Serial Interface Configuration ......................................................................... 4.36
Setting Date and Time.................................................................................... 4.38
Connecting the External Monitor .................................................................... 4.39
Switching the Beeper ON/OFF ....................................................................... 4.39
Firmware Update......................................................................................................... 4.40
Compatibility to FSE Instrument Family ...................................................................... 4.40
Status Display-Remote/Manual Control – STATUS Key Group ................................................ 4.41
Measurement Documentation – HARDCOPY Key Group.............................................................. 4.42
Printing Data – START Key ................................................................................................... 4.42
Printing Configuration – SETTINGS Key ............................................................................... 4.44
Selection of Displayed Elements and Colour Settings ................................................ 4.45
Selection of Hardcopy Format..................................................................................... 4.46
Entry of Comment Text ............................................................................................... 4.47
Selection and Configuration of the Output Device ...................................................... 4.48
Saving and Recalling Data Sets – MEMORY Key Group............................................................ 4.50
Configuration of Memory – CONFIG Key ............................................................................. 4.52
Saving Data Sets – SAVE Key ............................................................................................. 4.54
Selecting the Data Set for Storage.............................................................................. 4.55
Selecting the Data subset for Storage......................................................................... 4.57
Recalling of Data Sets – RECALL Key ................................................................................. 4.58
Selecting the Data Set for Recalling............................................................................ 4.59
Building a Data Set ......................................................................................... 4.61

1119.5063.12 I-4.1 E-1

Contents - "Instrument Functions" FSIQ

Macros – USER Key ....................................................................................................................... 4.62

Fundamentals ........................................................................................................................ 4.62
Starting Macros...................................................................................................................... 4.63
Defining Macros..................................................................................................................... 4.64

Analyzer Mode................................................................................................................................ 4.66

Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group ................................................. 4.67
Start Frequency – START Key .................................................................................... 4.67
Stop Frequency – STOP Key ...................................................................................... 4.69
Center Frequency – CENTER Key.............................................................................. 4.70
Center Frequency Step Size ....................................................................................... 4.72
Frequency Span – SPAN Key ..................................................................................... 4.74
Display Zoom............................................................................................................... 4.76
Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group ............................................ 4.77
Reference Level – REF key ........................................................................................ 4.77
Display Units................................................................................................................ 4.79
Level Range – RANGE Key ........................................................................................ 4.82
RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key .......................................................................... 4.83
Option 1 dB Attenuator - FSE-B13 .............................................................................. 4.86
Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group ............................................................................. 4.88
Main Markers– NORMAL Key ..................................................................................... 4.88
LF Demodulation ............................................................................................ 4.92
Frequency Measurement................................................................................ 4.94
Noise Power Density Measurement ............................................................... 4.95
Channel Power Measurements ...................................................................... 4.96
Marker Step Size .......................................................................................... 4.109
Delta Markers – DELTA Key ..................................................................................... 4.110
Phase Noise Measurement .......................................................................... 4.113
Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key ............................................................. 4.114
Search Functions – SEARCH Key ............................................................................ 4.115
Summary Marker .......................................................................................... 4.120
Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Ð Key .................................... 4.123
Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field ........................................................... 4.125
Display Lines – D LINES Key .................................................................................... 4.125
Limit Lines – LIMITS Key .......................................................................................... 4.129
Limit Line Selection ...................................................................................... 4.130
Entry and Editing of Limit Lines .................................................................... 4.133
Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group ................................................................. 4.138
Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key.............................................. 4.138
Detector Selection ..................................................................................................... 4.143
Quasi Analog Display ................................................................................................ 4.146
Mathematical Functions for Traces ........................................................................... 4.147
Trace Export.............................................................................................................. 4.148
Sweep Control – SWEEP Key Group .................................................................................. 4.152
Coupled Settings – COUPLING Key ......................................................................... 4.152
Setting and Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep
Time............................................................................................ 4.153
Sweep Coupling Ratio .................................................................................. 4.158
Sweep Trigger – TRIGGER Key ............................................................................... 4.160
Sweep Setup – SWEEP Key..................................................................................... 4.162
Gated Sweep ................................................................................................ 4.164
Sweep Blanking – Gap Sweep ..................................................................... 4.170

1119.5063.12 I-4.2 E-1

FSIQ Contents - "Instrument Functions"

Vector Analyzer Mode ................................................................................................................. 4.174

Selecting the Operating Mode ............................................................................................. 4.175
Analog Demodulation Methods............................................................................................ 4.177
Selecting the Modulation Parameters ....................................................................... 4.181
Selecting the Audio Signal......................................................................................... 4.186
Triggering with Analog Demodulation - Softkey TRIGGER or Hardkey TRIGGER... 4.194
Setting the Display Range and the Scaling - Softkey RANGE or Hardkey RANGE.. 4.196
Sweep Menu with Analog Demodulation - Softkey SWEEP TIME or Hardkey SWEEP4.199
Digital Demodulation Methods............................................................................................. 4.202
Diagram for signal processing................................................................................... 4.202
Symbol Mapping........................................................................................................ 4.203
Phase Shift Keying (PSK)............................................................................. 4.203
Differential PSK ............................................................................................ 4.205
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) ...................................................................... 4.206
Minimum Shift Keying (MSK), CDPD ........................................................... 4.207
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) .................................................... 4.207
Selecting the Digital Demodulators ........................................................................... 4.208
Standard Settings ...................................................................................................... 4.209
Selecting Modulation Parameters for Digital Demodulation ...................................... 4.211
Selecting Measurement Results for Digital Demodulation ........................................ 4.216
Magnitude of Capture Buffer ........................................................................ 4.216
Measurement of Reference Signal............................................................... 4.217
Measurement of Modulation Errors .............................................................. 4.224
Symbol Table and Table of Modulation Errors ............................................. 4.227
Selecting Memory Size, Demodulation Length and Display Range .......................... 4.231
Frequency Settings- FREQUENCY Key Group.................................................................. 4.234
Setting the Frequency - CENTER Key ...................................................................... 4.234
Setting the Frequency Span - START, STOP, and SPAN Key ................................. 4.234
Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input ...................................................... 4.235
Setting the Reference Level ...................................................................................... 4.235
Setting the Display Range and Scaling - RANGE Key .............................................. 4.237
Configuration of RF Input in Vector Signal Analysis.................................................. 4.240
MARKER Key Group ........................................................................................................... 4.241
Main Marker - NORMAL Key..................................................................................... 4.241
Delta Marker - DELTA Key........................................................................................ 4.244
Search Functions (Marker Search menu) - SEARCH Key........................................ 4.245
The Summary Marker................................................................................... 4.247
Varying Instrument Settings by means of Markers - MKRÐKey .............................. 4.250
Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field ........................................................... 4.251
Display Lines – D LINES Key .................................................................................... 4.251
Limit Lines – LIMITS Key .......................................................................................... 4.253
Limit Line Selection ...................................................................................... 4.254
Entry and Editing of Limit Lines .................................................................... 4.257
Selection and Setting of Traces - TRACE Key Group ......................................................... 4.261
SWEEP Key Group.............................................................................................................. 4.264
Setting the Analog Bandwidth - COUPLING Key ...................................................... 4.264
Sweep Setup - SWEEP Key...................................................................................... 4.265
Triggering Data Storage - TRIGGER Key ................................................................. 4.266

1119.5063.12 I-4.3 E-1

Contents - "Instrument Functions" FSIQ

Tracking Generator Option ......................................................................................................... 4.277

Tracking Generator Settings................................................................................................ 4.278
Transmission Measurement ................................................................................................ 4.279
Calibration of Transmission Measurement................................................................ 4.279
Normalization............................................................................................................. 4.281
Reflection Measurement...................................................................................................... 4.285
Calibration of Reflection Measurement ..................................................................... 4.285
Functioning of Calibration .................................................................................................... 4.286
Frequency-Converting Measurements ................................................................................ 4.287
External Modulation of Tracking Generator......................................................................... 4.288

1119.5063.12 I-4.4 E-1

FSIQ Instrument Functions

4 Instrument Functions

All functions of the spectrum analyzer are explained in detail in this chapter.

The instrument functions for general settings, printout and data management are described at the
beginning of this chapter – key groups SYSTEM, CONFIGURATION, HARDCOPY, MEMORY and the
USER key.

The sequence of the following key groups depends on their appearance on the front panel: key groups
FREQUENCY, LEVEL, MARKER, LINES, TRACE, SWEEP and the INPUT key.

All options that provide an additional operating mode and are not supplied with a separate manual are
described at the end of the chapter.

The different softkeys of a menu are described from top to bottom and from the left to the right side
menu. The submenus are marked by an indentation or displayed in a separate section. The whole path
(key - softkey - ...) is indicated in the line above the menu display.

An overview of the menus is given in chapter 3 which also contains the description of the operating
concept.
For fast lookup a list of softkeys with the associated IEC/IEEE-bus commands is given at the end of
Chapter 6.
An index at the end of the handbook serves as further help for the user.

1119.5063.12 4.1 E-13

Initial Configuration FSIQ

General Configuration – SYSTEM and CONFIGURATION Key

Groups

FSIQ Initial Configuration – PRESET Key

SYSTEM Using the PRESET key, the FSIQ can be brought to a predefined initial state
equivalent to the state after power on. All previous setting are deleted if they
PRESET CAL were not previously saved in memory. Returning to the PRESET state is not
critical with regard to an arbitrary signal which may still be present at the input
as long as the signal is within the specified voltage range.
DI AY INFO
Note: The initial state set by the PRESET key can be adapted to
arbitrary applications using the AUTO RECALL function. This
function implies that the AUTO RECALL dataset is loaded upon
pressing the PRESET key. For further information refer to
section "Saving and Recalling Data Sets".

Pressing the PRESET key, causes the FSIQ to enter its initial state according to the following table:

Table 4-1 Initial State of FSIQ

Parameter Setting

FSIQ3 FSIQ7 FSIQ26 FSIQ40

Mode analyzer Analyzer analyzer analyzer
Center Frequency 1.75 GHz 3.5 GHz 13.25 GHz 20 GHz
Center Frequency Step 350 MHz 700 MHz 2,65 GHz 4 GHz auto, 0.1×Span
Span 3.5 GHz 7 GHz 26.5 GHz 40 GHz
RF Attenuation 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB auto
Ref Level -20 dBm -20 dBm -20 dBm - 20 dBm
Level Range 100 dB log 100 dB log 100 dB log 100 dB log
Detector auto peak auto peak auto peak auto peak
Sweep Time 5 ms 5 ms 150 ms 225 ms auto
Resolution Bandwidth 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz auto
Video Bandwidth 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz 3 MHz auto
Sweep cont cont cont cont
Trigger free run free run free run free run
Trace 1 1 1 1 clr write
Trace 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 blnk

1119.5063.12 4.2 E-13

FSIQ Display Configuration

Display Configuration – DISPLAY Key

The display of the measurement results on the FSIQ display screen takes place in either one or two
measurement windows. In some cases, the two windows can be subdivided into two diagrams each, e.
g. for the representation of the inphase and quadrature signal in the vector analyzer mode.
If only one window is used, this window fills the complete display screen. Two measurement windows
are always placed over each other. The axes labelling and measurement settings are defined
independently in each measurement window.
When two measurement windows are used, the settings can be chosen to be either coupled or fully
independent from each other. The measurement procedure is always sequential.
New instrument settings can only be entered in the active measurement window. This window is marked
on the upper right corner of the grid. Coupled settings are changed simultaneously in both windows at
the time of entry.
The entry of the measurement parameters for each of the two windows can be either independent from
one another using numerical inputs, or by graphical definition of the span through the use of level and
frequency lines. The former case, e.g., may be used for harmonic or frequency converter
measurements, and the latter case, for a zoom display of a frequency or level segment.

USER
MKR1 [T1] RBW 1 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl +9.8 dBm VBW 1 kHz Mixer -30 dBm MARKER
10 dBm 10.010000 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm
10.0
1
SEARCH
-0 A PEAK
-10
-20
-30
NEXT PEAK
-40
-50 NEXT PEAK
RIGHT
-60
-70 NEXT PEAK
-80 LEFT
-90
Center 10.000002 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz
DELTA [T2] RBW 1 kHz RF ATT 40 dB
Ref Lvl -36.8 dBm VBW 1 kHz Mixer -30 dBm
10 dBm 10.000010 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm
10.0
-0 B
-10
-20
-30 1 SEARCH LIM
-40 ON OFF
-50
SELECT
-60
-70
ACTIVE
-80 MKR DELTA
-90
Center 20.000004 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz

Fig. 4-1 Split screen mode, screens uncoupled

1119.5063.12 4.3 E-13

Display Configuration FSIQ

SYSTEM DISPLAY menu:

DISPLAY The DISPLAY key calls a menu which is used to configure

SYSTEM
FULL the display screen and to select the active measurement
PRESET CAL SCREEN
window in SPLIT-SCREEN mode.
SPLIT
SCREEN
DISPLAY INFO

ACTIVE
SCREEN A

ACTIVE
SCREEN B

ACTIVE
SCREEN C

ACTIVE
SCREEN D

SCREEN
COUPLING

CONFIG
DISPLAY

Display Screen Mode Selection

SYSTEM DISPLAY menu:

FULL The FULL SCREEN softkey configures the display screen to one
SCREEN measurement window. This is the default setting of the FSIQ.
In this mode, the ACTIVE SCREEN A / ACTIVE SCREEN B and SCREEN
COUPLING softkeys are not used.

SPLIT The SPLIT SCREEN softkey sets the display screen to show two
SCREEN measurement windows. The upper window is called SCREEN A, the lower is
called SCREEN B.

ACTIVE If SPLIT SCREEN display is activated, the ACTIVE SCREEN A and ACTIVE
SCREEN A SCREEN B softkeys are used to activate either window A or window B.
The entry of new settings is only possible for the active window.
. When switching back to FULL SCREEN mode, the active measurement
. window is displayed.
.
If, in addition, the two windows are both subdivided into two diagrams, the
ACTIVE SCREEN A/B softkeys activate the upper diagram, ACTIVE
SCREEN C/D the lower diagram in each window.

1119.5063.12 4.4 E-13

FSIQ Display Configuration

Measurement Window Coupling

For the most part, the settings for the two windows can be either independently performed or coupled to
one another. In many cases, when changes are made in one window (e.g., the reference level) it is
desirable to also make the corresponding changes in the second window. The measurement window
parameters which are to be coupled may be selected in the SCREEN COUPLING menu.

SYSTEM DISPLAY-SCREEN COUPLING submenu:

SCREEN The SCREEN COUPLING softkey calls a sub-menu in
COUPLING
which the coupling between the two measurement
SCREEN MODE
COUPLING
windows SCREEN A and SCREEN B can be defined. This
COUPLED
coupling is only effective when both windows are
displayed (SPLIT SCREEN).

In the default setting, all of the items which are selectable

HORIZONTAL
SCALING are also coupled.

VERTICAL
SCALING

COUPLING
CONTROL
...
SCREENS
UNCOUPLED

MODE The MODE COUPLED softkey switches the coupling of the operating mode
COUPLED (Analyzer, Vector Analyzer) on/off.

HORIZONTAL The HORIZONTAL SCALING softkey switches the coupled scaling of the
SCALING horizontal axes on and off. In the frequency domain, the center frequency and
the frequency span are identical. In the time domain, the sweep time for both
windows is the same.

VERTICAL The VERTICAL SCALING softkey switches the coupled scaling of the vertical
SCALING axes on and off. For a level measurement, this means that the reference level
and the vertical resolution (LEVEL RANGE) are set to the same values in
both windows.

COUPLING The COUPLING CONTROL softkey switches the coupling of the trigger and
CONTROL gate parameters and of SWEEP COUNT and SWEEP SINGLE/
CONTINOUS on/off.

SCREENS The SCREENS UNCOUPLED softkey switches all of the possible couplings
UNCOUPLED between the measurement windows to off.

1119.5063.12 4.5 E-13

Display Configuration FSIQ

Display Screen Configuration

SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY submenu:

CONFIG CONFIG The CONFIG DISPLAY softkey calls a

DISPLAY DISPLAY
TIME
submenu and its supplementary menu, in
CONFIG SELECT
DISPLAY OBJECT ON OFF which the selection of color and brightness
for the individual elements on the display
DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS
COMMENT
screen takes place. The actual selection of
the elements takes place in the
TINT corresponding menu table.
The color assignment of the softkeys is
SCR SAVER
SATURATION ON OFF coupled with the color assignment of other
display elements.
SCR SAVER
TIME Changing for example the color of
DEFAULT SOFTKEY STATE OFF causes the color of
COLORS the table background to be changed at the
same time. The same applies to SOFTKEY
PREDEFINED
COLORS
STATE DATA ENTRY and display lines, and
to SOFTKEY STATE ON and enhancement
LOGO labels.
ON OFF
In the supplementary menu, date, time and
FREQUENCY
ON OFF a diagram label can be displayed on the
screen.
DATAENTRY
FIELD

SELECT The SELECT OBJECT softkey activates the SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT
OBJECT table, with which a graphics element can be selected. After selection, the
brightness, tint and saturation of the selected element can be changed using
the softkeys of the same name. The color changes can be seen immediately
on the display screen.

SELECT DISPLAY OBJECT

TRACE 1
TRACE 2
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
MARKER
GRID
SOFTKEY STATE ON
SOFTKEY STATE DATA ENTRY
SOFTKEY STATE OFF
SOFTKEY SHADE
TEXT
TITLE
BACKGROUND

BRIGHTNESS The BRIGHTNESS softkey activates the entry of the brightness of the color
for the selected element. The range of input values is 0 to 100%.

1119.5063.12 4.6 E-13

FSIQ Display Configuration

TINT The TINT softkey activates the entry of the color tint of the selected element.
The entered value is related to a continuous color spectrum ranging from red
(0%) to blue (100%).
The TINT function is not available for monochrome (black/white) displays.

SATURATION The SATURATION softkey activates the entry of the color saturation for the
selected element.
The range of inputs is from 0 to 100%.

DEFAULT The DEFAULT COLORS softkey restores the default settings for brightness,
COLORS color tint and color saturation for all display screen elements.

PREDEFINED The PREDEFINED COLORS softkey activates a table, with which the
COLORS predefined colors for the diplay screen elements can be selected.

LOGO The LOGO softkey switches the Rohde & Schwarz company logo displayed in
ON OFF the upper left corner of the display screen on or off.

FREQUENCY The FREQUENCY softkey switches the displaying of frequency information

ON OFF on the screen on and off.
ON Frequency information is displayed.
OFF Frequency information is not outputted to the display. This can be used
for example to protect confidential data.

TIME The TIME softkey switches on or off the display of date and time at the lower
ON OFF edge of the diagram.

DISPLAY The DISPLAY COMMENT softkey activates the entry of a label comprising a
COMMENT maximum of 50 characters. This label is displayed at the lower edge of the
diagram.
Pressing the softkey again causes the label to be switched off. The stored
text, however, is not deleted.

SCR.SAVER The SCR. SAVER softkey is used to switch on/off the screen saver for the
ON OFF display.
After the elapse of the response time (SCR. SAVER TIME) the display is
completely switched off, ie including backlighting.
The screen saver is deactivated by pressing any key or by sending the
corresponding IEEE/IEC bus command.

SCR.SAVER The SCR. SAVER TIME softkey activates the entry of the time for the screen
TIME saver to respond. The response time is entered in minutes between 1 to 100
minutes.

1119.5063.12 4.7 E-13

Display Configuration FSIQ

SYSTEM DISPLAY-CONFIG DISPLAY DATAENTRY FIELD Untermenü:

DATAENTRY The DATAENTRY FIELD softkey displays a submenu used to specify
FIELD
DATAENTRY DATAENTRY
the position and characteristics of the data entry field.
FIELD X

DATAENTRY
Y

DEFAULT
POSITION

DATAENTRY
OPAQUE

DATAENTRY The DATAENTRY X softkey shifts the position of the data entry field
X horizontally.

DATAENTRY The DATAENTRY Y softkey shifts the position of the data entry field
Y vertically.

DEFAULT The DEFAULT POSITION softkey positions the data entry field
POSITION automatically. In general, its position is the upper left edge of the grid on the
active screen.

DATAENTRY The DATAENTRY OPAQUE softkey sets the data entry windows to opaque.
OPAQUE This means that entry windows are underlayed with the background color for
tables and that diagrams and traces behind an entry window can no longer be
seen.

1119.5063.12 4.8 E-13

FSIQ Calibration

FSIQ Calibration – CAL Key

The FSIQ maintains its high measurement accuracy through the application of numerous self-calibration
techniques. The CAL hard key provides a series of calibration functions which allow not only the
calibration of the complete instrument, but also calibration functions which are specifically applicable to
the measurement requirements of relevant instrument sections.

The measurement settings of the FSIQ are saved and, after calibration, completely restored. The
calibration data valid before calibration are saved and, in case of a calibration abort, restored.

A window shows the progress of the calibration while it is running. ABORT can be used to abort the
calibration at any time.

SYSTEM MESSAGE
Cal BW and CentFreq of 5MHz filt
ABORT

SYSTEM CAL menu:

CALIBRATE CALIBRATE The CAL key displays a menu with

SYSTEM
CAL the available calibration functions.
CAL SHORT RESULTS
PRESET CAL

CAL TOTAL

DISPLAY I O CAL
RES BW

CAL LOG

CAL
LO SUPP

CAL I/Q

PRESEL PAGE UP
PEAK

CAL CORR
PAGE DOWN
ON OFF

1119.5063.12 4.9 E-13

Calibration FSIQ

Calibration Function Calls

SYSTEM CAL menu:

CAL The CAL SHORT softkey starts a short calibration, in which the absolute gain
SHORT of the analyzer as well as the gain errors of the selected bandwidth are
corrected.

CAL The CAL TOTAL softkey starts a complete calibration of the analyzer
TOTAL including additional partial calibrations shown in the menu.
UNCAL is displayed in the status line if calibration cannot be successfully
completed or if the correction data are disabled ( CAL CORR softkey= OFF).

CAL The CAL RES BW softkey starts the correction of the center frequency, the
RES BW bandwidth and the gain of the resolution filter.

CAL LOG The CAL LOG softkey starts the calibration of the linearity of the logarithmic
amplifier.

CAL The CAL LO SUPP softkey calibrates the compensation of the first oscillator
LO SUPP at low frequencies. After calibration, the display of the internal oscillator at the
frequency 0 Hz is very small.
It is recommended that the calibration be performed whenever sensitive
measurements are to be made at low frequencies.

CAL I/Q The CAL I/Q softkey calibrates the gain and phase error of the I/Q
demodulator.

1119.5063.12 4.10 E-13

FSIQ Calibration

PRESEL The PRESEL PEAK softkey optimizes the tuning of the preselector for input
PEAK signals in the frequency range above 7 GHz.
This calibration should be used whenever signal levels in the frequency range
above 7 GHz are to be measured and high accuracy is desired.
If a marker is not active when the PRESEL PEAK softkey is pressed, marker
1 is activated as the reference marker and placed on the signal maximum in
the active trace. Otherwise the active marker is used.
The following window is displayed on the screen while the peaking function is
running. The function can be aborted at any time using the ABORT line. In
this case, the correction value determined at the factory is restored.

SYSTEM MESSAGE
PEAKING
ABORT

The input signal’s signal-to-noise ratio must be at least 10dB in order that the
peaking function runs properly. Otherwise, the preselector may be set
incorrectly, which would cause level errors by subsequent measurements.
If the instrument setting (start/stop frequency, sweep time) is changed after
PRESEL PEAK has been called, the correction value for the preselector
determined by the function is no longer used. Instead, the correction value
determined at the factory is restored.
The softkey is only available by those FSIQ models which have an input
frequency range above 7 GHz.

CAL CORR The CAL CORR ON/OFF softkey switches the calibration data on/off.
ON OFF
ON The status message depends upon the results of the total calibration
OFF The message UNCAL appears in the FSIQ status line.

1119.5063.12 4.11 E-13

Calibration FSIQ

Calibration Results
SYSTEM CAL menu:

CAL The CAL RESULTS softkey in the right-hand supplementary menu calls the
RESULTS CALIBRATION RESULTS table, which shows the correction data found
during calibration.
The CALIBRATION RESULTS table contains the following information:
page 1:
• date and time of the last total calibration
• overall results of the total calibration
• list of the calibration procedures according to function/module, including
the correction values, the measured results and the individual
results for each of the calibration procedures
The results for the individual calibration procedures are categorised and
displayed as follows:
PASSED calibration successful without restrictions
CHECK deviations larger than expected, however, corrections could
be performed
FAILED deviations too large, no corrections were possible
ABORTED calibration aborted

CALIBRATION RESULTS
CALIBRATION: PASSED
Last cal total: 05.Jun 1997 16:24:54

Calibration of IF Filters PASSED

IF GAIN Adjust PASSED
Bandwidth:
Filter Cal Val [Hz] DAC Val State
1kHz 2.806e+01 1679 PASSED
2kHz 1.603e+01 2887 PASSED
3kHz -6.012e+00 3238 PASSED
5kHz -1.002e+01 3514 PASSED
10kHz 1.804e+02 3703 PASSED
20kHz 3.607e+02 3801 PASSED
30kHz 8.417e+02 3831 PASSED
50kHz 1.403e+03 3743 PASSED
100kHz 1.804e+03 3698 PASSED
200kHz 3.607e+03 3606 PASSED
300kHz 8.417e+03 3516 PASSED
500kHz 1.403e+04 3329 PASSED
1MHz 2.806e+04 2881 PASSED

PAGE UP The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys can be used to page through the
table of calibration results.

PAGE DOWN

1119.5063.12 4.12 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters

Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters – INFO Key

SYSTEM INFO menu:

INFO The INFO key is used to request general information

SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT concerning the instrument. These include:
PRESET CAL SETTINGS
• firmware version
FIRMWARE
VERSIONS • installed hardware and hardware options
DISPLAY INFO • modification level of the individual modules
HARDWARE+
OPTIONS • self-test results with the option of calling self-test
functions
SELFTEST • list of generated system messages
• installed firmware and hardware options.
SYSTEM
MESSAGES • Statistical evaluations

OPTIONS

STATISTIC

HELP

Firmware Versions

SYSTEM INFO menu:

FIRMWARE The FIRMWARE VERSIONS softkey opens two tables, which provide the
VERSION following informations:

• Table MODEL displays the exact instrument model.

MODEL
FSIQ 26

• In the FIRMWARE VERSION table, the version of each software

component installed in the instrument is listed. The versions of
programmable logic devices are also included if the firmware version of
the device can be determined.
FIRMWARE VERSION
BIOS 1.2
ANALYZER 1.80
SERIAL NUMBER 101379/005

1119.5063.12 4.13 E-13

Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters FSIQ

Hardware Configuration and Options

SYSTEM INFO menu:

HARDWARE+ The HARDWARE+OPTIONS softkey opens two tables in which the modules
OPTION (INSTALLED COMPONENTS) installed in the instrument are listed.

• Table MODEL lists the instrument name and model:

MODEL
FSIQ 26

• Table INSTALLED COMPONENTS consists of four columns:

COMPONENT name of module
MODEL INDEX model number of the module
MODIF INDEX main modification index of the module
HW CODE secondary modification index of the module

These lists contain only the modules which are actually present in the
instrument, i.e., the modules which were identified by the module
recognition software.

INSTALLED COMPONENTS
COMPONENT MODEL INDEX MODIF INDEX HW CODE

Main Processor 4 n/a 0

Graphic Board 4 n/a 0
I/O Board 4 n/a 0
FRAC SYN 4 0 4
RF Module 4 0 4
2nd IF Converter 3 2 2
LOPhase 3 4 17
Detector 4 0 2
IF Filter 3 2 3
Digital IF 2 0 2
I/Q Demod (B7) 2 3 2

OPTIONS The OPTIONS softkey opens two tables listing the options installed. The
standard FSIQ is equipped with options FSE-B4, FSE-B5 and FSE-B7

FIRMWARE OPTIONS
DESIGNATION TYPE CODE

FFT B5 1938496289

Note: New firmware options can be enabled in the SETUP menu.

HARDWARE OPTIONS
DESIGNATION CODE

Low Phase Noise & OCXO B4

1119.5063.12 4.14 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters

Self Test
SYSTEM INFO-SELFTEST submenu:

SELFTEST The SELFTEST softkey opens a submenu with which the self test
EXECUTE can be started.
SELFTEST
TESTS
The instrument has extensive self test functions which
. comprehensively test instrument functionality. In case of a fault,
. the instrument can locate a defective module on its own. The self
. test sequence is described in more detail in the service manual
instrument (supplied with the FSIQ).

EXECUTE The EXECUTE TESTS softkey starts the test of the complete instrument.
TESTS During the self test a window is displayed:
SELFTEST
in progress
ABORT

The functions are tested in the following order:

1. Modules main CPU, digital motherboard, graphics and the interfaces
2. Reference frequency conditioning, the synthesizer modules and all LO
signals
3. All RF, IF and signal-weighting modules

If no failure occurs during the execution of the self test, the following message
is displayed when the complete self test is finished:
SELFTEST
successfully completed
OK

If a failure occurs during the execution of the self test, the self test is
immediately aborted and a message indicating the defective module and the
defective function is displayed:
SELFTEST FAILED
IF Filter Stepgain
ABORT

Further testing should be performed by an R&S service department.

1119.5063.12 4.15 E-13

Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters FSIQ

System Messages
The SYSTEM MESSAGES softkey opens a submenu including a table in which the generated system
messages are displayed. The most recent messages are at the top of the list.
The following information is presented:
NO Device specific three digit error code (shown as XXX in the figure)
MESSAGE Brief description of the reason for the message
DATE/TIME Date and time of occurrence of the message

The messages that have occurred since the last call to the SYSTEM MESSAGES menu are marked by
an asterix "*".

SYSTEM INFO-SYSTEM MESSAGES submenu:

SYSTEM USER
MESSAGES SYSTEM
SY STEM MESSAGES MESSAGES
NO MESSAGE DATE/TIME

102 * CH1 LO unl: frac syn synth. 17.Oct.99; 12:05:33

CLEAR
MESSAGE

CLEAR ALL
MESSAGES

UPDATE
MESSAGES

CLEAR The CLEAR MESSAGE softkey deletes the message just selected.
MESSAGE All subsequent messages are shifted automatically one line upwards so that
no empty lines exist. When the last message has been deleted, the selection
bar also disappears.

CLEAR ALL The CLEAR ALL MESSAGES softkey deletes all messages.
MESSAGES

UPDATE The UPDATE MESSAGES softkey causes all newly arrived messages to be
MESSAGES entered at the top of the table.
At this time, all messages previously indicated as "new" are displayed as "old"
messages

1119.5063.12 4.16 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Status and Measurement Parameters

Statistics Function for Input Attenuator Switching

SYSTEM INFO menu:

STATISTICS The STATISTICS softkey calls a submenu for indication of

ATT
STATISTIC device statistics.
SWITCHES

ATTEN The ATT SWITCHES softkey displays various tables listing the mechanical
SWITCHES switches and attenuators fitted in the instrument, plus the number of
switching operations for the respective switch or attenuator.

INPUT ATTENUATOR
Date 5 Aug 1999
Calibration Input 6
10 dB 121
20 dB 217
30 dB 137

1119.5063.12 4.17 E-13

Mode Selection FSIQ

Mode Selection – MODE Key

The FSIQ can be operated in one of several modes, each of which is different with respect to
functionality and control. The differences in control, however, consist not only in the enabling/disabling of
additional softkeys within existing softkey menus, but rather in the fact that existing menus are
completely replaced by new menus and menu trees which are tailored to the functional requirements. In
the simultaneous application of two measurement diagrams, two modes may also simultaneously
enabled. Each mode can be assigned to a measurement window.

CONFIGURATION MODE menu

MODE The MODE key opens the menu for selection

CONFIGURATION
ANALYZER
of the mode.
MODE Herein, the modes can be selected according
to the available FSIQ options.

SE P • Analyzer
TRACKING
GENERATOR • Tracking Generator and
VECTOR
ANALYZER
• Vector Signal Analysis

ANALYZER The ANALYZER softkey selects the ANALYZER mode.

This mode is the default setting of the FSIQ.
The functions provided correspond to those of a conventional spectrum
analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the test signal
over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep
time, or, for a fixed frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal.

TRACKING The TRACKING GENERATOR softkey selects the operating mode Scalar
GENERATOR Network Analysis.
The softkey is only available if FSIQ is equipped with one of the following
options: FSE-B8/B9/B10 and B11. For a detailed description of operation see
Section ’Option Tracking Generator’.

1119.5063.12 4.18 E-13

FSIQ Mode Selection

VECTOR Softkey VECTOR ANALYZER selects the vector analysis mode.

ANALYZER
In the vector analyzer mode the FSIQ is automatically set to a fixed
frequency (center frequency) since vector analysis can only be carried out on
one frequency.
The IF signal is digitized by the selected resolution bandwidth after filtering
and mixed into the baseband by a digital mixer. Further processing is via
digital signal processors which display the time characteristic of the amplitude
or phase. As an option, the baseband can also be demodulated and the
demodulated signal can be displayed. Principally any type of modulation
(digital and analog) can be processed.
The functions of the analyzer mode are supplemented by the vector analysis
functions which are described in detail in Section ’Vector Analyzer Mode’.

1119.5063.12 4.19 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

Preliminary Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key

CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:

CONFIGURATION SETUP SETUP The SETUP key opens the menu for
TRANSDUCER FIRMWARE configuration of the FSIQ.
MODE UPDATE
The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a
submenu to consider the characteristics of
transducers in the test result.
SETUP
FSE MODE The OPTIONS softkey allows the enabling of
ON OFF firmware options (Application Firmware
Modules).
The REFERENCE INT/EXT and EXTERNAL
REF FREQUENCY softkey determine the
reference to be used.
The SERVICE softkey provides special setup
OPTIONS
functions which, although not necessary in
normal use, are useful in instrument service.
REFERENCE
INT EXT The GENERAL SETUP softkey opens a
submenu for all the general settings such as
EXT REF
date and time as well as the configuration of
FREQUENCY
the device interfaces.
SERVICE
The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey opens a
GENERAL submenu for the installation of a firmeware
SETUP update.
The FSE MODE softkey determines whether
the FSIQ is FSE-compatible after preset.

Using Transducers
A transducer is often connected ahead of FSIQ both during the measurement of useful signals and EMI
and converts the useful or interference variable such as field strength, current or RFI voltage into a
voltage across 50 Ohm. Transducers with a frequency-independent transducer factor can be coded in
10-dB steps together with the unit at connector PROBE CODE. They are supplied at the same time by
this connector. Transducers such as antennas, probes or current probes mostly have a frequency-
dependent transducer factor which can be stored in FSIQ and automatically has the correct unit during
level measurement.
If a transducer is switched on it is considered as part of the unit during the measurement, ie the
measured values are displayed in the correct unit and magnitude. When working with two measurement
windows, the transducer is always assigned to two windows.
FSIQ distinguishes between transducer factor and transducer set. A transducer factor takes the
frequency response of a single transfer element, eg an antenna into consideration. A transducer set can
summarize different transducer factors in several subranges (several transducer factors at the same
time), eg an antenna, a cable and a diplexer.
A transducer factor consists of max. 50 reference values defined with frequency, transducer factor and
the unit. For the measurement between frequency values linear or logarithmic interpolation of the
transducer factor can be chosen.

1119.5063.12 4.20 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

Several factors can be compiled in a transducer set provided that all factors have the same unit or unit
"dB". The frequency range covered by a set can be subdivided into max. 10 subranges (each with up to
4 transducer factors) which follow each other without a gap, ie the stop frequency of a subrange is the
start frequency of the next subrange.
The transducer factors used in a subrange have to fully cover the subrange.

The definition of a transducer set is recommended if different transducers are used in the frequency
range to be measured or if a cable attenuation or an amplifier has to be taken into consideration.

If a transducer set is defined during a frequency sweep, the latter can be stopped at the interface
between two transducer ranges and the user is asked to exchange the transducer.
The following message informs the user that the limit has been reached:

TDS Range # reached, CONTINUE / BREAK

He can continue the sweep by confirming the message (CONTINUE) or he can switch off the transducer
(BREAK).

With the automatic switchover of the transducer used, the frequency sweep is not interrupted.

Note: Transducers cannot be used in vector analyzer mode.

Activating Transducer Factors and Transducer Sets

The TRANSDUCER softkey opens a submenu in which already defined transducer factors or sets can
be activated or deactivated, new transducer factors or sets can be generated or existing transducer
factors or sets can be edited. Tables with the defined transducer factors and sets are displayed. The
table (factor or set) in which a transducer is active is set.

By switching on the transducers all the level settings and outputs are automatically made in the unit of
the transducer. A change of the unit in menu LEVEL REF is no longer possible as FSIQ together with
the transducer used is regarded as a measuring instrument. Only if the transducer has the unit dB, can
the original unit at FSIQ be maintained and changed.

Note: If one of the units dBµV, dBµV/m, dBµA, or dBµA/m is selected, the LEVEL REF key (see
UNIT-submenu) can be used to switch to the corresponding units referred to the bandwidth,
i.e. dBµV/MHz, dBµV/mMHz, dBµA/MHz, dBµA/mMH.

If a transducer factor is active, TDF is displayed in the column of the enhancement labels and TDS if the
transducer set is active.
After switching off all the transducers, FSIQ continues to use the unit which was selected before a
transducer was switched on.

In the analyzer mode, an active transducer for a sweep is uniquely calculated for each point displayed
after its setting and added to the result of the level measurement during the sweep. If the sweep range
is changed, the correction values are recalculated. If several measured values are combined, only a
single value is taken into consideration.

If an active transducer factor/set is not defined over the whole sweep or scan range during the
measurement, the missing values are replaced by zero.

1119.5063.12 4.21 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

CONFIGURATION SETUP Menu

USER
TRANSDUCER
ACTIVE TRANSDUCER FACTOR TRANSDUCER
Name: Cable_1 Freq range: 0 Hz TRANSDUCER
Unit: dB to: 2.000 GHz FACTOR

Comment: Cable length 1.50 m, No.112234 TRANSDUCER

SET
TRANSDUCER FACTOR TRANSDUCER SET
EDIT TRD
Name Unit Name Unit FACTOR
Antenna1 dBµV/m Antenna dBµV/m
EDIT
Probe_A dBµA Ant_Cab2 dBµV/m
TRD SET
Probe_B dBµA Ant_Pre dBµV/m
Probe_C dBµA Ant_Cab1 dBµV/m
My_Probe dBµV Probeset dBµA NEW
Cable_1 dB _ FACTOR/SET
Cable_2 dB
dB DELETE
Preamp FACTOR/SET
_

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN

Press ENTER to (de)activate

The upper table ACTIVE TRANSDUCER FACTOR / SET indicates the active transducer factor or the
set with the associated name, frequency range and unit. If no factor or set is active, none is displayed in
the table. Additional information can be entered in a comment line. If a transducer factor is active, the
selected interpolation is displayed in addition, if a set is active, the break setting is displayed.
The left table TRANSDUCER FACTOR comprises all the defined factors with name and unit. If the
number of defined transducer factors exceeds the number of possible lines in the table, the table will be
scrolled.
The right table TRANSDUCER SET comprises all the defined transducer sets with the corresponding
information.
Only one set or transducer can be activated. An already active transducer factor or set is switched off
automatically if another one is switched on. An activated transducer factor or set is marked with a check
sign.

TRANSDUCER The TRANSDUCER FACTOR softkey sets the selection bar to the position of
FACTOR the active transducer factor.
If no transducer factor is switched on, the bar is positioned to the first line of
the table.

TRANSDUCER The TRANSDUCER SET softkey sets the selection bar to the position of the
SET active transducer set.
If no transducer set is switched on, the bar is set to the first line of the table.

1119.5063.12 4.22 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

DELETE The DELETE FACTOR/SET softkey deletes the marked factor or set. To
FACTOR/SET avoid deletion by mistake, deletion has to be confirmed.

MESSAGE
Do you really want to
delete factor or set?
YES NO

PAGE UP
The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys are used to scroll in large tables
which cannot fully be displayed on the screen.

PAGE DOWN

New Entry and Editing of Transducer Factors

A transducer factor is characterized by
• reference values with frequency and transducer factor (Values)
• the unit of the transducer factor (Unit) and
• the name (Name) to distinguish between the different factors.

During the entry, FSIQ checks the transducer factor according to specific rules that have to be met to
ensure trouble-free operation.

• The frequencies for the reference values always have to be entered in ascending order. Otherwise,
the entry is not accepted and the following message is displayed:
Frequency Sequence!

• The entered frequencies do not necessarily have to be set at FSIQ, as only the values for the
frequency display range are considered for a set sweep or scan. The minimum frequency for a
reference value is 0 Hz, the maximum frequency 200 GHz.

• The minimum or maximum value for a transducer factor is -200 dB or 200 dB. The unit "dB" means
that the transducer factor is always logarithmic and has nothing to do with the physical transducer
factor, which, for example, establishes the relationship between field strength and voltage into 50
Ohm. If the minimum or maximum value is exceeded, FSIQ signals:
Min Level -200 dB or
Max Level 200 dB.

• Amplifiers have a negative transducer factor, attenuation values have to be entered as a positive
transducer factor.

Note: A unit activated by switching on the transducer has priority over a coded unit of the
connected probe.
With the exception of dB*/MHz, the softkeys for the unit in the menu under key LEVEL REF
are inoperative with the transducer switched on.

1119.5063.12 4.23 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

EDIT TRD NEW TRD The EDIT TRD FACTOR and NEW FACT/SET softkeys
FACTOR FACTOR/SET both open the submenu for editing and entering new
transducer factors. A precondition for the NEW
FACTOR/SET softkey is that the selection bar is located
in the table when the table TRANSDUCER FACTOR is
called up.

USER
EDIT TRD
EDIT TRANSDUCER FACTOR FACTOR
Name: Antenna1 TRD FACTOR
Unit: dBuV/m NAME
Interpolation: LIN
Comment: Ant1 and cable 1 TRD FACTOR
NO. UNIT
FREQUENCY TDF/dB.. FREQUENCY TDF/dB..
20.0000 MHz 25.5 TRD FACTOR
25.0000 MHz 23.8 VALUES
30.0000 MHz 20.5
40.0000 MHz 19.8 INSERT
50.0000 MHz 20.0 LINE
60.0000 MHz 19.5
70.0000 MHz 19.1 DELETE
80.0000 MHz 18.2 LINE

SAVE TRD
FACTOR

DRAW TRD
FACTOR

48
24 49
25 50

The table with the data of the marked factor (the EDIT TRD FACTOR softkey) or an empty table is
displayed in which the following entries are preset (the NEW FACTOR/SET softkey):
Unit: dB
Interpolation: LIN for linear frequency scaling
LOG for logarithmic frequency scaling
The characteristics of the factor can be entered in the header field of the table, the frequency and the
transducer factor in the columns of the table.
Name Entry of the name
Unit Selection of unit
Interpolation Selection of interpolation
Comment Entry of a comment
FREQUENCY Entry of the frequency of the reference points
TDF/dB Entry of the transducer factor.

An overwritten transducer factor remains stored in the background as long as the edited factor is stored
with the SAVE TRD FACTOR softkey or until the table is closed. A factor overwritten by mistake can be
restored by leaving the entry.

1119.5063.12 4.24 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

TRD FACTOR The TRD FACTOR NAME softkey activates the entry of the transducer factor
NAME characteristics in the header field of the table.
Name - Entry of name
A maximum of 8 characters is permissible for the name. The characters have
to comply with the convention of DOS file names. The unit automatically
stores all transducer factors with the extension .TDS.
If an existing name is changed, the factor stored under the previous name is
retained and will not be overwritten automatically with the new name. The
previous factor can be deleted at a later time, using DELETE FACTOR/SET.
Thus, factors can be copied.

TRD FACTOR Unit - Selection of unit

UNIT
The unit of the transducer factor is selected from a selection box activated by
the TRD FACTOR UNIT softkey.

FACTOR UNIT
dB
dBm
dBµV
dBµV/m
dBµA
dBµA/m
dBpW
dBpT

The default setting is dB.

Interpolation - Selection of interpolation

Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the frequency
reference points of the table. Selection is via the ENTER key which is toggled
between LIN and LOG (toggle function).
The following diagrams indicate the effect of the interpolation on the
calculated characteristic:

Fig. 4-2 inear frequency axis and linear interpolation

1119.5063.12 4.25 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

Fig. 4-3 Logarithmic frequency axis and logarithmic interpolation

Fig. 4-4 Logarithmic frequency axis and linear interpolation

Comment - Entry of a comment

The comment can be freely selected. It can have a maximum number of 50
characters.

TRD FACTOR The TRD FACTOR VALUES softkey activates the entry for the reference
VALUES values of the transducer factor.
The selection bar marks the first reference value. The desired reference
values have to be entered in ascending frequency sequence.
After entering the frequency the selection bar automatically jumps to the
corresponding level value.
After entering the first reference value the table can be edited. The two
INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE softkeys are displayed. Individual values
are changed at a later time by marking the field and by entering the new
value.

INSERT The INSERT LINE softkey inserts a free line above the marked reference
LINE value. When entering a new reference value into this line watch out for the
ascending frequency sequence.

DELETE
The DELETE LINE softkey deletes the marked reference value (the whole
LINE line). The following reference values move up.

SAVE TRD The SAVE TRD FACTOR softkey saves the changed table in a file on the
FACTOR internal hard disk.
If a transducer factor with the same name already exists, a corresponding
query is performed beforehand.
If the factor to be newly saved is currently switched on, the new values will
immediately be valid. If a transducer set is switched on comprising the factor,
the values will only be used when the set is switched on next time.

1119.5063.12 4.26 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

New Entry and Editing of Transducer Sets

A transducer set is characterized by:
− maximum 10 ranges (Ranges) in which different transducer factors can be active
− the combination of several transducer factors per range (Factor)
− a transducer-set name (Name)

EDIT NEW TRD The EDIT TRD SET and NEW FACTOR/SET softkeys
TRD SET FACTOR/SET both open the submenu for editing and entering new
transducer factors. A precondition for the NEW
FACTOR/SET softkey is that the selection bar is located
in the table TRANSDUCER SET.

USER
EDIT
EDIT TRANSDUCER SET TRANSD SET
TRANSD SET
Name: Ant_Cab1
Unit: dBµV/m NAME
Break: ON TRANSD SET
Comment: Ant. 1 and cable 1
UNIT
TRANSDUCER SET RANGES
TRANSD SET
Start Stop Sel RANGES
fac
20.00000 MHz 80.00000 MHz INSERT
LINE
80.00000 MHz 400.00000 MHz
400.0000 MHz 1.00000 GHz
DELETE
LINE

SAVE TRD
SET

DRAW
TRD SET

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN

The table with the data of the marked set (the EDIT TRD SET softkey) or an empty table in which the
following entries are preset (the NEW FACTOR/SET softkey) is displayed:
Unit: dB
Break: NO

The characteristics of the set can be entered in the header field of the table, the subranges in the
columns of the set.
Name Entry of the name
Unit Selection of unit
Break Activating the query when changing the subrange
Comment Entry of a comment
Start Entry of the start frequency of the subrange
Stop Entry of the stop frequency of the subrange
Sel Fac Selection of the transducer factors for the subrange

1119.5063.12 4.27 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

An overwritten transducer set remains stored in the background as long as the edited factor is stored
with the SAVE TRD SET softkey or until the table is closed. A set overwritten by mistake can be
restored by leaving the entry.

TRANSD SET The TRD SET NAME softkey activates the entry of the transducer set
NAME characteristics in the header field of the table.

Name - Entry of name

A maximum of 8 characters is permissible for the name. The characters have
to comply with the convention of DOS file names. The unit automatically
stores all transducer sets with the extension .TDS.
If an existing name is changed, the set stored under the previous name is
retained and will not be overwritten automatically with the new name. The
previous set can be deleted at a later time using DELETE FACTOR/SET.
Thus, sets can be copied.

TRANSD SET Unit - Selection of unit

UNIT
The unit of the transducer set is selected from a selection box activated by
the TRANSD SET UNIT softkey.
The unit should be selected prior to the entry as it determines the settable
transducer factors. The preset unit for new sets is "dB". The unit can no
longer be changed when editing a set as the set of selected transducer
factors will otherwise become inconsistent.

SET UNIT
dB
dBm
dBµV
dBµV/m
dBµA
dBµA/m
dBpW
dBpT

Break - Activation of query when changing a subrange

The sweep can be stopped if the user changes the subrange and selects a
new subrange of the transducer. A message informs the user that the limit
has been attained. He can continue the sweep or switch off the transducer.
The interruption is activated by setting Break to ON. Selection is by the
ENTER key which toggles between ON and OFF (toggle function).

Comment - Entry of a comment

The comment can be freely selected. It can have a maximum number of 50
characters.

1119.5063.12 4.28 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

TRANSD SET Softkey TRANSD SET RANGES activates the entry of subranges and the
RANGES associated transducer factors. The selection bar marks the frequency values
last active.

Start - Entry of start frequency of subrange

Stop - Entry of stop frequency of subrange
The individual subranges have to be linked without a gap. That is why the
start frequency is already defined from the second subrange (= stop
frequency of previous range).
After entering the first frequency value the table can be edited. The two
INSERT LINE and DELETE LINE softkeys are displayed. Some values are
changed at a later time by marking the field and by entering the new value. It
should be noted that both the stop frequency of a particular subrange and the
start frequency of the subsequent subrange are changed to the same extent.

Sel fac- Selection of factors for the subrange

A check sign in column Sel Fac (select factor) indicates whether one or
several transducer factors were selected for the subrange.
The permissible transducer factors for the marked subrange can be selected
in a selection box. Only factors matching with the unit of the set and fully
covering the selected subrange are permissible.
After each change of range limits, FSIQ thus checks the factor list and, if
required, rebuilds it.
After reducing the start frequency or increasing the stop frequency of a range
it may happen that the factors defined for this range no longer fully cover the
range. These factors are deleted for this range when the transducer factor
table is opened next time.
A maximum of 4 transducer factors can be switched on at the same time in
each subrange. If none of them is switched on, 0 dB is assumed as a factor
for the whole subrange.

SELECT TRANSDUCER FACTOR

Name Unit
Antenna1 dBµV/m
Probe_A dBµV/m
Probe_B dBµV/m
Probe_C dBµV/m
My_Probe dB
Cable_1 dB
Cable_2 dB
Preamp dB

Press ENTER to (de)select

1119.5063.12 4.29 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

INSERT The INSERT LINE softkey inserts a free line above the marked subrange.
LINE
The DELETE LINE softkey deletes the marked subrange (whole line). The
DELETE following subranges move up.
LINE
In both cases FSIQ checks that the ranges follow each other without a gap.

SAVE TRD The SAVE TRD SET softkey saves the changed table in a file on the internal
SET hard disk. If a transducer name with the same name already exists, a
corresponding query is performed beforehand:

MESSAGE
File exists! Do you
want to overwrite?
YES NO

After pressing ENTER, the data set is overwritten on the hard disk.
If the saved set is switched on, the new values will be used immediately.

PAGE UP The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN softkeys set the table to the next or
previous page.
PAGE UP The softkeys are locked during selection of factors in the right table.

1119.5063.12 4.30 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

Enabling Firmware Options

CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:

OPTIONS
The OPTIONS softkey opens a submenu for entering keywords for new
firmware options (Application Firmware Modules). Options which are already
available are indicated in a table that is opened when the menu is called.

ENABLE NEW The ENABLE OPTION softkey activates the entry of a

OPTION
keyword for a firmware option.
One or several keywords may be specified in the entry
field. When a valid keyword is entered, the message
OPTION KEY OK appears in the info line and the option
is written into the FIRMWARE OPTIONS table.
The FIRMWARE OPTIONS table can also be displayed
using the FIRMWARE OPTIONS softkey in the INFO
menu.
If a keyword is invalid the message OPTION KEY
INVALID is displayed in the info line.

External Reference Oscillator

In general, the FSIQ can generate all internal oscillators from either the internal or an external reference
oscillator. A 10 MHz quartz-controlled oscillator is used as the internal reference. A reference oscillator
output is also available at the rear panel via the EXT REF IN/OUT connector.
This output can be used, e.g., to synchronize other instruments to the FSIQ. This connector can also be
converted to an input connector for application of an external frequency standard. The FSIQ requires
that the frequency of the external standard be entered so that the internal oscillators can be
synchronized to it.

CONFIGURATION SETUP Menu:

REFERENCE The REFERENCE INT EXT softkey switches between the internal and
INT EXT external references.

EXT REF The EXT REF FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry of the frequency of
FREQUENCY
the external source.
Range of input values is 1 MHz to 16 MHz in 1 MHz steps.

1119.5063.12 4.31 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

Service Functions
The service menu offers a variety of additional function which are used in maintenance and/or trouble
shooting. The service functions are not necessary for normal measurements, however, incorrect use
can impair the functionality and/or data integrity of the FSIQ. Therefore, many of the functions can only
be used after entering a password.

CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:

SERVICE The SERVICE softkey calls the service submenu.

SERVICE INPUT
RF
INPUT
CAL
NOISE
SOURCE
REFERENCE
ADJUST

ENTER
PASSWORD

INPUT The INPUT RF and INPUT CAL softkeys are mutually exclusive selection
RF switches. Only one switch can be active at any one time. They switch the
input to the FSIQ between the INPUT RF connector (normal position) and the
internal calibration source (120 MHz, -40 dBm).

After PRESET, RECALL or FSIQ power on, the INPUT RF is always

INPUT selected.
CAL

NOISE The NOISE SOURCE softkey switches on a noise source which is connected
SOURCE to the NOISE SOURCE connector on the instrument’s rear panel.
The dc voltages on the connector are described in Chapter 8.

1119.5063.12 4.32 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

CONFIGURATION SETUP SERVICE menu:

REFERENCE The REFERENCE ADJUST softkey opens a submenu used to

ADJUST
adjust the frequency precision of the reference oscillator.
REFERENCE
ADJUST
REFERENCE The value should be modified only after the frequency
precision was checked and found to be erroneous (setting
REFERENCE
PROG
range 0 to 4095).

For more information about how to perform the adjustment of

the frequency precision refer to service manual instrument
(delivered with the FSIQ).
The modified reference value is preserved when the menu is
closed.
The current adjustment value can be permanently stored in an
EEPROM in the instrument.

Caution: As the specifications of the whole instrument

depend directly on the setting of the reference
oscillator (frequency precision), storing incorrect
adjustment values should be avoided.

Note: If no adjustment value has been stored

(REFERENCE PROG softkey) before the analyzer
is switched off and on again, the factory-set value
of the reference frequency or the value that has
been programmed last will be used.

REFERENCE The REFERENCE softkey adjusts the

frequency precision of the reference
oscillator.

REFERENCE The REFERENCE PROG softkey

PROG stores the current adjustment value in
an EEPROM in the instrument.

ENTER The ENTER PASSWORD softkey allows the entry of a password.

PASSWORD
The FSIQ contains a variety of service functions which, if incorrectly used,
can impair the functionality of the analyzer. These functions are normally not
accessible and are only usable after the entry of a password (ENTER
PASSWORD).

1119.5063.12 4.33 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

Programming the Interface Configuration and Time

The GENERAL SETUP softkey branches to a sub-menu in which the basic setup of general instrument
parameters may be performed. The current settings are displayed in tabular form on the display screen
where they may then be edited.

CONFIGURATION SETUP menu:

US E R

GENERAL GENERAL
SETUP SETUP
GPIB
ADDRESS

USER
GPIB ADRESS TIME AND DATE PORT A
19 Time 21:59
Date 01 Oct 1994 USER
PORT B
USER PORTS
PORT A PORT B COM 1
Direction Input Output
Value 10101010 00010001 COM 2

TIME
CO M P O R T S
COM 1 COM 2
DATE
Baud 9600 1200
Bits 8 8
Parity None None
Stopbits 1 1
HW-Handshake None None
SW-Handshake XON/XOFF None MONITOR
Owner Instrument Instrument CONNECTED

KEY CLICK
ON OFF

IEC Bus Address Selection

CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:

GPIB The GPIB ADDRESS softkey activates the entry of the IEC Bus address.
ADDRESS
Permitted addresses are 0 through 31. The default setting is address 20.

1119.5063.12 4.34 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

User Port Configuration

The instrument provides two parallel interfaces, each of which is 8 bits wide. Over these ports, arbitrary
bit patterns can be output or input. The interfaces are designated USER PORT A and USER PORT B.

CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:

USER The USER PORT A and USER PORT B softkeys activate the columns PORT
PORT A A and PORT B, respectively, in the USERPORTS table for entry of the
parameters for both of the parallel interfaces in the instrument. Because the
two interfaces are configured in the same manner, how to configure an
interface is described in the following using USER PORT A.

The following parameters need to be configured in the table:

Direction Direction of data transmission
Value Indication/entry of current value

USERPORTS

PORT A PORT B

Direction INPUT OUTPUT

Value 10101010

Direction – Direction of data transmission

The DIRECTION parameter determines in which direction the interface
transmits data.
INPUT read operation
OUTPUT write operation

DIRECTION
INPUT
OUTPUT

Value – Indication/Entry of current value

The VALUE parameter shows the current value of the data at the port for
data input as well as for data output. The displayed data is in binary format
with the least significant bit (LSB) on the right.
If the port is configured as an OUTPUT then, the displayed value can be
edited. Data entry must also be in binary format (i.e., only the digits 0 and 1
are accepted).

VALUE
00010001

1119.5063.12 4.35 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

Serial Interface Configuration

CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:

COM The COM PORT 1 and COM PORT 2 softkeys activate the columns COM1
PORT 1 and COM2, respectively, for entry of the serial interface parameters Since the
two interfaces are configured in the same manner, how to configure an
interface is described in the following using COM PORT 1.
COM The following parameters need to be configured in the table:
PORT 2
Baud rate data transmission rate
Bits number of data bits
Parity bit parity check
Stop bits number of stop bits
HW-Handshake hardware handshake protocol
SW-Handshake software handshake protocol
Owner assignment to the measuring instrument or computer

CO M POR TS
COM 1 COM 2
Baud 9600 1200
Bits 8 8
Parity None None
Stopbits 1 1
HW-Handshake None None
SW-Handshake XON/XOFF None
Owner Instrument Instrument

Note: A serial interface (COM1 or COM2) cannot be used for another

purpose if a mouse is connected to it.

Baud – Data transmission rate

Allowed are the indicated values between 110 and 19200 baud. The default
setting is 9600 baud.
BAUD RATE
19200
9600
4800
1200
600
300
110

Bits – Number of data bits per word

For the transmission of text without German umlauts (Ä, ä, Ü, ü, Ö, ö) and
special characters, 7 bits are adequate. For binary data as well as text with
special characters or umlauts, 8 bits must be selected (default setting).
BITS
7
8

1119.5063.12 4.36 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

Parity – Bit parity check

NONE no parity check (default setting)
EVEN even parity check
ODD odd parity check
PARITY
NONE
EVEN
ODD

Stop bits – Number of stop bits

Available are 1 and 2. The default setting is 1 stop bit.
STOPBITS
1
2

HW-Handshake – Hardware handshake protocol

The integrity of data transmission can be improved through the use of a
hardware handshake protocol which effectively prevents uncontrolled
transmission of data and the resulting possible loss of data bytes. In the
hardware handshaking procedure, additional interface lines are used to
transmit acknowledge signals with which the data transmission can be
controlled and, if necessary, stopped until the receiver is ready to receive
data again.
A prerequisite for handshaking is, however, that the interface lines (DTR and
RTS) are provided between sender and receiver. For a simple, 3-wire
connection, this is not the case and hardware handshake cannot be realized
here.
Default setting is NONE.
HW-HANDSHAKE
None
DTR/RTS

SW-Handshake – Software handshake protocol

Besides the hardware handshake procedure using interface lines, it is also
possible to achieve the same effect by using a software handshake protocol.
Here, control bytes are transmitted in addition to the normal data bytes.
These control bytes can be used, as necessary, to stop data transmission
until the receiver is ready to receive data again.
In contrast to hardware handshaking, software handshaking can be realized
even for a simple, 3-wire connection.
One limitation is, however, present in software handshaking. Software
handshaking cannot be used for the transmission of binary data since, the
control characters XON and XOFF require bit combinations that are also
used for binary data transmission.
Default setting is NONE.
SW-HANDSHAKE
None
XON/XOFF

1119.5063.12 4.37 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

Owner – Assignment of the interface

The serial interface can be assigned alternatively to the instrument
measurement section or the computer section.

INSTRUMENT The interface is assigned to the instrument measurement

section. Outputs to the interface from the computer are
not possible and, so to say, land nowhere.
OS The interface is assigned to the computer section. It
cannot be used by the instrument measurement section.
This means that hardcopy or remote control of the
instrument via the interface is not possible. An attempt to
start a print job via the interface results in an error
message.

OWNER
INSTRUMENT
OS

Setting Date and Time

CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:

TIME The TIME softkey activates the entry of time for the internal real time clock .
In the corresponding dialog box, the time is partitioned into two input fields so
that hours and minutes can be entered independently.

TIME
TIME 10 : 33

DATE The DATE softkey activates the entry of the date of the internal real-time
clock. In the corresponding dialog box, the date is partitioned into 3 input
fields so that day, month and year can be input separately.

DATE
DATE 10 MAY 1995

For the selection of the month, pressing a units key opens a list of
abbreviations wherein the desired month can be selected.

MONTH
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC

1119.5063.12 4.38 E-13

FSIQ Configuration/Setup

Connecting the External Monitor

Submenu CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP:
MONITOR The MONITOR CONNECTED softkey informs the unit that an external
CONNECTED
monitor is available at PC MONITOR connector
The external monitor displays the Windows NT mask.

Switching the Beeper ON/OFF

CONFIGURATION SETUP-GENERAL SETUP submenu:
KEY CLICK The KEY CLICK ON/OFF softkey switches the beeper on or off. The beeper
ON OFF
acknowledges each key stroke with a beep.

1119.5063.12 4.39 E-13

Configuration/Setup FSIQ

Firmware Update
The installation of a new firmware version can be performed using the built-in diskette drive. The
firmware update kit contains several diskettes.
The installation program is called up in the SETUP menu.

CONFIGURATION SETUP sidemenu:

FIRMWARE The FIRMWARE UPDATE softkey opens the submenu for
FIRMWARE UPDATE
UPDATE the installion of a new firmware version.
UPDATE

RESTORE

UPDATE The UPDATE softkey starts the installation program and leads the user
through the remaining steps of the update.

RESTORE The RESTORE softkey restores the previous firmware version

Compatibility to FSE Instrument Family

CONFIGURATION SETUP sidemenu:
FSE MODE The FSE MODE ON/OFF softkey determines whether theFSIQ is FSE-
ON OFF compatible after a preset. Following a preset, the FSIQ has not the same
settings as an FSE. With compatibility, the FSIQ has the same default
settings as FSE after a preset.

1119.5063.12 4.40 E-13

FSIQ Manual Control

Status Display-Remote/Manual Control – STATUS Key

Group
STATUS The SRQ LED, the REMOTE LED and the LOCAL. key are contained in the
STATUS key group.
SRQ

REMOTE ì been
The SRQ LED indicates that a service request from the instrument has
asserted on the IEC Bus.
LOCAL

ì The REMOTE LED indicates that the instrument is under remote control.
ì The LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote to manual control,
with the assumption that the remote controller has not previously set the
LOCAL LOCKOUT function.

A change in the control mode consists of:

- Enabling the Front Panel Keys
Under remote control, the soft-key menu is turned off and all keys, with
the exception of PRESET and LOCAL, are disabled. Returning to
manual mode enables all inactive keys. The soft key menu which is
displayed is the main menu of the current mode.

- Turning off the REMOTE LED

- Generating the message OPERATION COMPLETE

If, at the time of pressing the LOCAL key, the synchronisation
mechanism via *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI is active, the currently running
measurement procedure is aborted and synchronisation is achieved by
setting the corresponding bits in the registers of the status reporting
system.

- Setting Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event Status Register

With a corresponding configuration of the status reporting system, this
bit immediately causes the generation of a service request (SRQ) which
is used to inform the software that the user wishes to return to front-
panel control. This information can be used, e.g., to interrupt the control
program so that the user can make necessary manual corrections to
instrument settings. This bit is set each time the LOCAL key is pressed
and is independent of whether or not the instrument is under remote or
manual control.

ì The LOCAL key aborts a running macro. The continuation of the macro is
not possible.

1119.5063.12 4.41 E-13

Documentation of Measurement Results FSIQ

Measurement Documentation – HARDCOPY Key Group

Printing Data – START Key

The instrument uses the printer function of Windows NT to output hardcopies. Any printer supported by
Windows NT can be used. In addition, the instrument permits data output in the usual data formats
WMF, EWMF and BMP which enable hardcopies to be directly inserted into other documents. Network
printers can be used if the instrument is connected to a network.

HARDCOPY The START key initiates the printing of measurement/ instrument status data.
The instrument can distinguish between two different output devices, each of
START which may be individually configured, e.g., a laser printer and a ink jet printer.
All documents are printed on the output device which is currently active.

SE NG

Pressing the HARDCOPY START key initiates the print job. The printer parameters defined under
Windows NT and in the HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu are used for setting up the printer configuration.
After pressing the START key, all of the display items to be printed are written to the printer buffer of
Windows NT. Since the printer runs in the background, the instrument may be operated immediately
after pressing the START key.
With COPY SCREEN selected in menu HARDCOPY SETTINGS, all the diagrams with traces and
status displays are printed as they occur on the screen. Softkeys, open tables and data entry fields are
not printed out. Function COPY TRACE allows to print out individual traces. With COPY TABLE tables
can be printed out.
If output device CLIPBOARD is active in menu HARDCOPY SETTINGS, submenu HARDCOPY
DEVICE, the clipboard can be used to directly transfer hardcopies to Windows applications. The copy is
written in the clipboard by pressing HARDCOPY START. The user can then change to another Word
document and insert the clipboard content into the document via the menu EDIT - PASTE by using the
key combination CTRL+V.
If the PRINT TO FILE option in the HARDCOPY DEVICE submenu of the HARDCOPY SETTINGS
menu is selected then, upon pressing HARDCOPY START, the file name to which the output data are to
be written is requested. For this an entry field is opened for entering the file name. If no external
keyboard is connected, the help line editor is activated.
If the START key is pressed again during an active print job, a second output can be released which can
also be joined to the printer queue. Any number of print jobs can be released consecutively.

Current print jobs can be aborted only by canceling the entries in the Windows NT printer queue. After
starting the print a printer symbol is displayed in the task bar near the time indication.

A double-click on this symbol opens a window containing the entries of the printer queue. The relevant
print order can be cancelled by marking it with the mouse and pressing the DEL key.

1119.5063.12 4.42 E-13

FSIQ Documentation of Measurement Results

While a print job is in progress, problems may occur in the output device. If, while printing, the output
device issues a PAPER OUT message, i.e., no more paper is available, the user will be prompted by the
following message

ERROR
Paper out on device LPT
(manual feed)?
ABORT CONTINUE

to load paper into the output device. The print job will then be either continued (CONTINUE selected) or
aborted (ABORT selected).
Switchover between b/w and colored printouts is possible with softkey COLOR ON/OFF provided that
the printer connected is able to output such prints. The colors of the printout correspond exactly to those
of the screen, ie a red trace will be output in red.
To change the colors of the objects on the printout, the screen colors have to be changed
correspondingly in menu DISPLAY, submenu CONFIG DISPLAY. One exception is the color of the
background and the color of the diagrams. The output background is always white irrespective of the
screen color and the diagrams are always black.
If several traces are to be output one after the other on the same sheet different colors can be chosen
for each trace with the aid of softkey TRC COLOR AUTO INC (Trace Color Auto Increment).
On most b/w printers, a better printout of the color screen is obtained on hardcopies if the color
information is converted into gray shades. For this, the color output in menu HARDCOPY SETTINGS is
to be activated (COLOR ON).

1119.5063.12 4.43 E-13

Documentation of Measurement Results FSIQ

Printing Configuration – SETTINGS Key

HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu:

HARDCOPY The SETTINGS key opens the menu to define the output
SETTINGS
configuration for diagrams and measurement curves to the
HARDCOPY COPY various output channels, e.g., printer, plotter or files.
SCREEN
START
COPY The recommended procedure for configuring the output data is
TRACE as follows:
SETTINGS COPY
TABLE • Configure the desired output device and select the interface
over which the output is to take place by using Windows NT
and the HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey.

COPY • Select the display items to be printed via the COPY SCREEN,
SELECT
SEL ITEMS QUADRANT COPY TRACE softkeys.
SELECT
ENTER
• Select between coloured and b/w printouts via softkeys
ITEMS
TEXT COLOR ON/ OFF and TRC COLOR AUTO INC

HARDCOPY • Enter commentary applicable to the diagram or add a title for

DEVICE the overall print-out by using the ENTER TEXT softkey.
• Select the page format (QUADRANT, FULL PAGE) through
use of the SELECT QUADRANT softkey.
COLOR
ON OFF
The COPY SCREEN, COPY TRACE and COPY TABLE
softkeys are selection switches, i.e., only one function can be
TRC COLOR enabled at any one time. The push buttons are used for
AUTO INC selection only and do not initiate a print job. The actual printing
of data is initiated by the HARDCOPY START key.

1119.5063.12 4.44 E-13

FSIQ Documentation of Measurement Results

Selection of Displayed Elements and Colour Settings

HARDCOPY SETTINGS menu:

COPY With softkey COPY SCREEN the output of test results is selected.
SCREEN
All the diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, display lines, limit lines etc.
are printed out as long as they are displayed on the screen. All the softkeys,
tables and open data entry fields are not printed out. Moreover, comments,
title, date, and time entered at the bottom margin of the printout are output.
The logo appears at the top left of the printout.

COPY Using the COPY TRACE softkey, all curves visible on the display screen are
TRACE printed out without auxiliary information. Specifically, no markers or display
lines are printed.

COPY Using the COPY TABLE softkey, all tables visible on the display screen are
TABLE printed out.

COLOR The COLOR ON/ OFF softkey selects a coloured or b/w printout.
ON OFF
After having changed the printer driver or the hardcopy device (in submenu,
HARDCOPY SETTINGS) the softkey is automatically switched to ON.
One exception is printer driver HP PCL4 which only supports b/w printouts. In
this case, the softkey cannot be operated.

TRC COLOR The TRC COLOR AUTO INC softkey automatically switches the colours of
AUTO INC the traces on to the next printout. On the second printout, trace 1 has the
colour of trace 2, trace 2 the colour of trace 3 etc. The fourth printout starts
with the first colour. With the softkey switched off, the colours of the traces
are reset to their original state.
When changing the printer driver or the hardcopy device (both in submenu
HARDCOPY SETTINGS) as well as the selection b/w printout (softkey
COLOR ON/ OFF in position OFF), softkey TRC COLOR AUTO INC is
switched off.

1119.5063.12 4.45 E-13

Documentation of Measurement Results FSIQ

Selection of Hardcopy Format

HARDCOPY SETTINGS-SELECT QUADRANT submenu:

SELECT The SELECT QUADRANT softkey calls the the submenu for
QUADRANT
selection of QUADRANTthe location of the display screen
SELECT UPPER
QUADRANT LEFT
graphics on the printed page.

LOWER
LEFT

UPPER
RIGHT
LOWER
RIGHT

FULL
PAGE

FULL The FULL PAGE softkey switches quadrant printing off, i.e., printing now
PAGE takes place at full size. The information as to which quadrant was last
selected is also lost. FULL PAGE is the default setting.

UPPER The UPPER LEFT, LOWER LEFT as well as UPPER RIGHT, LOWER
LEFT RIGHT softkeys select the page quadrants where the printed data will be
positioned. In this case, the actual size of the data printed on the page is
reduced to 25% of normal size. This reduction is independent of how the
LOWER graphics are distributed on the display screen. Thus, for two measurement
LEFT windows (SPLIT SCREEN), both measurement diagrams shown on the
display are placed in the chosen quadrant. Thus, up to a maximum of 8
measurement windows can be printed on one page. (4 print commands for a
SPLIT SCREEN display, each to a different quadrant)
UPPER
RIGHT

LOWER
RIGHT

1119.5063.12 4.46 E-13

FSIQ Documentation of Measurement Results

Entry of Comment Text

HARDCOPY SETTINGS-ENTER TEXT submenu:

ENTER The ENTER TEXT softkey calls the submenu for editing the
TEXT
commentary for the individual windows. The comment text
ENTER COMMENT
SCREEN A
appears in the print-out, but does not appear on the display
TEXT
screen.
COMMENT
SCREEN B If a comment is not to appear on the printout, it has to be deleted.
By pressing PRESET, all comments will be deleted.

TITLE

COMMENT The COMMENT SCREEN A softkey opens an entry field in which

SCREEN A a comment of two lines (60 characters per line) can be entered
pertinent to the applicable window. If the user enters more than
60 characters, the excess characters appear on the second line
on the print-out. Note: at any point, a manual line-feed can be
COMMENT
SCREEN B forced by entering the @ character. The commentary is printed
below the corresponding diagram. The COMMENT SCREEN B
key has the same effect in measurement window 2.

TITLE The TITLE softkey activates a single line entry box for entering a
title for the complete print-out with a maximum of 60 characters.

1119.5063.12 4.47 E-13

Documentation of Measurement Results FSIQ

Selection and Configuration of the Output Device

The instrument permits two different output devices to be configured. One of the devices is defined as
the active device and can be used for hardcopies.
The installation and configuration of these output devices is mainly done under Windows NT and is valid
for all Windows applications (see Chapter 1, section "Connecting an Output Device"). The active device
and the settings which concern only the output of hardcopies are selected in menu HARDCOPY
DEVICE..

HARDCOPY SETTINGS submenu:

HARDCOPY The HARDCOPY DEVICE softkey switches to the sub-menu

DEVICE
which is used for the selection/configuration of the two output
HARDCOPY SETTINGS
DEVICE DEVICE 1
devices.

SETTINGS When the sub-menu is called, the corresponding table is

DEVICE 2 simultaneously displayed. The SETTINGS DEVICE 1 softkey is
ENABLE active and the selection bar is located at the DEVICE1 line in the
DEV1 DEV2 corresponding column of the table.

HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS

Device1 WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File YES
Orientation ---

Device2 CLIPBOARD
Print to File ---
Orientation ---

SETTINGS After calling the menu, the SETTINGS DEVICE 1 softkey is active and permits the
DEVICE 1 selection and configuration of the output device DEVICE 1. The SETTINGS
DEVICE 2 softkey is used to configure DEVICE 2.

The actual selection of the active output device takes place with the ENABLE DEV1
SETTINGS DEV2 softkey in the HARDCOPY DEVICE sub-menu.
DEVICE 2

1119.5063.12 4.48 E-13

FSIQ Documentation of Measurement Results

Device
The selection of the output device/language for DEVICE 1 and DEVICE 2 is made in
this line.

HARDCOPY DEVICE SETTINGS

Device1 WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File YES
DEVICE
Orientation ---
CLIPBOARD
Device2 CLIPBOARD WINDOWS METAFILE
Print to File --- ENHANCED METAFILE
Orientation --- BITMAP FILE
HP DeskJet 660C

Three file formats and the Windows NT clipboard are always available, even if a
printer has not yet been installed under Windows NT. All installed printers are listed
below in alphabetic order.
The printer installation is described in Chapter 1, section 1.6.

CLIPBOARD When "Clipboard" is selected the hardcopies are copied to the

Windows NT clipboard. This permits to obtain a printout of high
quality which can be directly inserted into other Windows
applications (menu EDIT | PASTE or key combination CTRL+V).
The lines ’Print to File’, ’Orientation’ and ’GPIB Address’ are
deactivated.

WINDOWS METAFILE and ENHANCED METAFILE

WMF and EWMF are vector graphics formats which can be
imported by most graphics and editing programs. EMF is
recommended for recent Windows32 applications.

BITMAP FILE BMP is a bitmap format which can also be imported by most
programs.

When WMF, EWMF and BMP are selected, the line "Print to File" is automatically
set to ON and line "Orientation" deactivated.

Print to File
With "Print to File" ON, the printout is directed to a file. In this case the user is
prompted to enter a file name on calling up HARDCOPY START.

Note: This setting is coupled to the corresponding setting under Windows NT.

Orientation
In this line, the print format of the output page is set to either vertical (= PORTRAIT)
or horizontal (= LANDSCAPE).

ENABLE The ENABLE DEV1 / DEV2 softkey determines the active output device. The
DEV1 DEV2 default output device is DEVICE 1, i.e., all output takes place on DEVICE 1.

1119.5063.12 4.49 E-13

Memory Configuration FSIQ

Saving and Recalling Data Sets – MEMORY Key Group

The keys in the MEMORY group call the following functions:
• Functions for management of storage media (CONFIG). Included are among others functions for
listing files, formatting storage media, copying, and deleting/renaming files.
• Storage/loading functions for storing (SAVE) instrument settings such as instrument configurations
(measurement/display settings, etc.) and measurement results from working memory to permanent
storage media, or to load (RECALL) stored data into working memory.

The FSIQ is capable of internally storing complete instrument settings with instrument configurations
and measurement data in the form of data sets. The respective data are stored on the internal hard
disk or, if selected, on a floppy. The hard-disk and floppy-disk drives are assigned logical names as
usual in PC applications:
floppy disk A:
hard disk C:

In addition to the saving and recalling of complete instrument settings, it is also possible to save/recall
subsets of settings. Configuration data and measurement values are stored in separate files. These files
have the same name as the data set but however have a different extension. A data set thus consists of
several files which have the same name but different extensions (see Table 4-2).

When saving or loading a data set, the subsets which are to be saved or loaded can be selected in the
corresponding menus. This makes it easy to reconstruct specific instrument settings.

When saving and loading data via the SAVE and RECALL menus, data subsets are selected in a table
in the sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO SAVE/RECALL. The relationship between the designations in the table
and the contents of the data subsets is shown in Table 4-2.

The saved files of the data sets can be copied from one storage medium (e.g. drive C:) to another
storage medium (e.g. drive A:) or to another directory using the functions found in the MEMORY
CONFIG menu. File names and extensions must however not be changed. The relationship between
the data subsets and the extensions is shown in Table 4-2 .

1119.5063.12 4.50 E-13

FSIQ Memory Configuration

Table 4-2 Relationship between extensions, contents and designations of data subsets

Extension Contents Designation in the table

SEL ITEMS TO
SAVE/RECALL

Configuration data: .SET current settings of the measurement HARDWARE SETTINGS

hardware and the related title, if present

.LIN data-point tables for the active limit lines LINES

.LIA all limit lines ALL LINES

.CFG current configuration of general instrument GENERAL SETUP

parameters

.HCS configuration for hardcopy output HARDCOPY

.TCI Tracking generator settings SOURCE CAL

(only with option FSE-B8/9/10/11)

.TS1 Settings for source calibration SOURCE CAL

.TS2 (only with option FSE-B8/9/10/11)

.TC1 Correction data for source calibration SOURCE CAL

.TC2 (only with option FSE-B8/9/10/11)

.TS active transducer set TRANSDUCER

.TSA all transducer sets ALL TRANSDUCER

.TF transducer factor TRANSDUCER

.TFA all transducer factors ALL TRANSDUCER

.COL user-defined color settings COLOR SETUP

Measurement results: .TR1....4 measurement data trace 1 to trace 4 TRACE1...4

1119.5063.12 4.51 E-13

Memory Configuration FSIQ

Configuration of Memory – CONFIG Key

MEMORY CONFIG menu:

MEMORY The CONFIG key opens a menu for managing storage media and files.

SAVE Table Drive Management displays the name and label of the storage
medium as well as the available storage area.

RECALL Table File Management displays the files of the current directory and
indicates if any subdirectories are present.

CONFIG If a directory name is selected, the FSIQ automatically changes to this

directory. Selection of the entry ’..’ moves the FSIQ to the next higher
directory level.
Note: It is not possible to change menus as long as a file operation is
running.

USER
MEMORY
DRIVE MANAGEMENT CONFIG
LA BEL: FREE MEM: 394:510.336 DISK
DRIVE: HARDDISK C:
COPY

FILE MANAGEMENT EDIT DISK

PATH LABEL
PATH: C:\USER\CONFIG
FILE NAME DATE TIME SIZE FORMAT
COP Y
.. DISK
SE TTING1.DRW 10.MAY.93 10:25:18 68.175 kB
SE TTING2.DRW 15.MAY.93 13:08:27 73.283 kB DELETE
SE TTING3.DRW 17.MAY.93 08:15:21 174.315 kB
SE TTING4.DRW 28.MAY.93 17:05:42 1.236812 M B
UNDELETE

RENAME

MAKE
DIRECTORY

SORT MODE

PA GE UP PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN

EDIT The EDIT PATH softkey activates the input of the directory which will be used
PATH in subsequent file operations.
The new path is included in the FILE MANAGEMENT table.

1119.5063.12 4.52 E-13

FSIQ Memory Configuration

COPY The COPY softkey activates the input of the destination of the copy operation.
By entering a predefined disk drive (e.g. C:), a file can also be copied to
another storage medium. The files/directories selected by the cursor are
copied after the input is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key.

DELETE The DELETE softkey deletes the selected files.

To prevent accidental deletion of data, confirmation by the user is requested.

RENAME The RENAME softkey activates the entry of a new name for the selected file
or directory.

MAKE The MAKE DIRECTORY softkey creates directories/sub-directories. Sub-

DIRECTORY directories are recommended for sorting files on the storage medium so that
the structure is easier to comprehend.
The entry of an absolute path name (e.g.; "\USER\MEAS") as well as the path
relative to the current directory (e.g., "..\MEAS") is possible.

SORT MODE The SORT MODE softkey activates the selection of the criteria according to
which the files listed in the FILE MANAGEMENT table may be sorted.
SORT MODE
by NAME
by DATE/TIME
by EXTENSION

Directory names are located at the top of the list after the entry for the next
higher directory level ("..").

PAGE UP The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the FILE MANAGEMENT table
to the next or the previous page.

PAGE DOWN

FORMAT The FORMAT DISK softkey formats diskettes located in drive A:.
DISK To prevent accidental destruction of diskette data, confirmation by the user is
requested.

1119.5063.12 4.53 E-13

Saving Data Sets FSIQ

Saving Data Sets – SAVE Key

The SAVE key activates a menu which contains all functions necessary for saving instrument data.
– Entry of the name of the data set which should be saved. Confirmation of the entry initiates a
save operation to store the data set.
Data set names may contain both alphabetical and numeric characters, in the simplest case
only numbers. The simplest example for the input of a data set name is illustrated by the
following key strokes:
<SAVE> <1> <units key>
– Entry of the directory in which the data set should be saved
– Input of data set description
– Selection of the data subsets to be saved (sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO SAVE)
– Indication of all available data sets
– Deletion of all available data sets

MEMORY SAVE menu

MEMORY USER
MEMORY
SAVE SAVE
EDIT
NAME
RE LL
SAVE DATA SET EDIT
PATH
NAME: DATASET1 PATH:C:\USER\CONFIG ITEMS: DEFAULT
CONFIG
COMMENT: Radio Monitoring EDIT
EDIT NAME COMMENT
DATASET1_
SEL ITEMS
TO SAVE

DATA SET
LIST

DATA SET
CLEAR

DATA SET
CLEAR ALL

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN

The SAVE DATA SET table shows the current settings regarding the data set:
Name name of data set
Path directory in which the data set will be saved
Items indicates whether the default selection of the data subset
(DEFAULT) or a user-defined selection (SELECTED) will be
saved
Comment Commentary regarding the data set

The EDIT NAME softkey for entering the name of the data set to be saved is activated
automatically.

1119.5063.12 4.54 E-13

FSIQ Saving Data Sets

Selecting the Data Set for Storage

MEMORY SAVE menu:

EDIT The EDIT NAME softkey activates the entry of the name of the data set to be
NAME saved.
Data entry is concluded by pressing one of the units keys which initiates a
save operation to store the data set.

EDIT The EDIT PATH softkey activates the input of a directory name where the
PATH data sets are to be stored.

EDIT The EDIT COMMENT softkey activates the entry of commentary concerning
COMMENT the current data set. A total of 60 characters are available for this purpose.

DATA SET The DATA SET LIST softkey opens the DATA SET LIST/CONTENTS table.
LIST In addition, the DATA SET CLEAR and DATA SET CLEAR ALL softkeys are
displayed.

DATA SET LIST DATA SET CONTENTS

DATASET1 CONTENTS
DATASET2
DATASET3 GENERAL SETUP COLOR SETUP
HW-SETTINGS HARDCOPY
TRACE 1
TRACE 2 MACROS
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
ACTIVE LINES ACTIVE TRANSDUCER
ALL LINES ALL TRANSDUCER
COMMENT

GSM_MASK

The DATA SET LIST column lists all of the data sets which are stored in the
selected directory.
The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the DATA SET CONTENTS
column indicate the saved data subsets and the commentary for the currently
selected data set.

1119.5063.12 4.55 E-13

Saving Data Sets FSIQ

Note: The current instrument configuration can be easily stored under the
name of an existing data set:
À Press a units key after selecting a data set
The name and the selection of the data subsets for the currently
selected data set will be placed in the SAVE DATA SET table. The
DATA SET LIST table is closed and, instead, the entry field for the
EDIT NAME function with the name of the selected data set is
opened.
À Press a units key.
The current instrument configuration is saved as a data set under
this name.

DATA SET The DATA SET CLEAR softkey deletes the marked data set.
CLEAR

DATA SET The DATA SET CLEAR ALL softkey deletes all data sets in the current
CLEAR ALL directory.

Since, in this case, all available data sets are lost, confirmation by the user is
required.

PAGE UP The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the DATA SET LIST table to the
next or previous page.

PAGE DOWN

1119.5063.12 4.56 E-13

FSIQ Saving Data Sets

Selecting the Data subset for Storage

The SEL ITEMS TO SAVE softkey opens a sub-menu for selection of the data subsets.
MEMORY SAVE-SELECT ITEMS TO SAVE sub-menu:
SEL ITEMS USER
TO SAVE SEL ITEMS
SAVE DATA SET TO SAVE
NAME : DATASET1 PATH: C: \USER\CONFIG ITEMS: SELECTED SELECT
ITEMS
COMMENT: GSM_MASK
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS
ITEMS TO SAVE
DISABLE
GENERAL SETUP COLOR SETUP ALL ITEMS
HW-SETTINGS HARDCOPY
TRACE 1
TRACE 2 MACROS
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
ACTIVE LINES ACTIVE TRANSDUCER
ALL LINES ALL TRANSDUCER

DEFAULT
CONFIG

The ITEMS TO SAVE table displays the selectable data subsets:

General Setup current configuration of general instrument parameters
HW-Settings current measurement hardware settings
Trace1...4 measurement data trace 1 to trace 4
Active Lines active limit lines
All Lines all limit lines
Color Setup user-defined color settings
Hardcopy Setup configuration for hardcopy output
Macros macros
Active Transducer active transducer
All Transducer all transducer
SELECT The SELECT ITEMS softkey moves the selection bar to the first line, left
ITEMS column of the table.

ENABLE The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all entries in the ITEMS TO SAVE.
ALL ITEMS table.

DISABLE The DISABLE ALL ITEMS softkey unmarks all entries in the ITEMS TO SAVE
ALL ITEMS table.

DEFAULT The DEFAULT CONFIG softkey establishes the default selection of the data
CONFIG subset to be saved and outputs DEFAULT in the ITEMS field of the SAVE
DATA SET table.

1119.5063.12 4.57 E-13

Recalling Data Sets FSIQ

Recalling of Data Sets – RECALL Key

The RECALL key activates a menu which contains all functions necessary for recalling data sets.
– Entry of the name of the data set which should be recalled. Confirmation of the entry initiates
a load operation to recall the data set.
– Entry of the directory in which the data set is stored
– Display of data set description
– Selection of a data set which will be automatically loaded upon power-up
– Indication of all available data sets
– Deletion of all available data sets
– Selection of the data subsets which should be loaded (configurations, measurement and
calibration data, sub-menu SEL ITEMS TO RECALL)

Any settings not restored when data subsets are loaded will remain unchanged in the instrument. During
recall operations, the FSIQ recognises which data subsets are present in the recalled data set and
offers only the corresponding settings for selection in the SELECT ITEM sub-menu.
A new instrument data set can be easily constructed from several existing data sets: the desired data
subsets are selected and recalled out of various data sets in several RECALL operations. When the
desired configuration is completed, the new data set can be saved under a new name.

MEMORY RECALL menu:

MEMORY USER
MEMORY
SAVE RECALL
RECALL DATA SET EDIT
NAME
NAME: DATASET1 PATH: C:\USER\CONFIG ITEMS: DEFAULT
RECALL
COMMENT: R EDIT
EDIT NAME PATH
DATASET1_
CO FIG AUTO
RECALL

SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL

DATA SET
LIST

DATA SET
CLEAR

DATA SET
CLEAR ALL

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN

The RECALL DATA SET table shows the current settings regarding the data set:
Name name of data set
Path directory in which the data set is located
Items indicates whether the default selection of the data subset (DEFAULT)
or a user-defined selection (SELECTED) will be loaded
Comment commentary regarding the data set
The EDIT NAME softkey for entering the name of the data set to be loaded is
activated automatically.

1119.5063.12 4.58 E-13

FSIQ Recalling Data Sets

Selecting the Data Set for Recalling

MEMORY RECALL menu:

EDIT The EDIT NAME softkey activates the entry of a data set name.
NAME The data input is terminated by pressing one of the units keys which
simultaneously initiates the data set recall operation.

EDIT The EDIT PATH softkey activates the entry of a directory name in which the
PATH data set is located.

AUTO The AUTO RECALL softkey activates the selection of a data set which is
RECALL automatically loaded when the instrument is powered on. To this end the
table DATA SET LIST/CONTENT is opened (analog to DATA SET LIST).
DATA SET LIST AUTO RECALL SET CONTENT
DATASET1 CONTENTS
DATASET2
DATASET3 GENERAL SETUP COLOR SETUP
HW-SETTINGS HARDCOPY
TRACE 1
TRACE 2 MACROS
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
LINES TRANSDUCER

COMMENT

GSM_MASK

The DATA SET LIST column displays all data sets present in the selected
directory.
The CONTENTS and COMMENT lines in the AUTO RECALL CONTENTS
column indicate the saved data subsets and the commentary for the currently
selected data set.

In addition to the data sets stored by the user, the data set FACTORY, which
specifies the settings of the instrument before it was last switched off
(Standby), is always present.
If a data set other than FACTORY is chosen then, at the time of instrument
power on, the available data subsets of the selected data set are recalled.
The data subsets which are not present in this data set are taken from the
FACTORY data set.

Note: The specified data set is also loaded upon PRESET if AUTO
RECALL is active. The preset settiongs can thus be arbitrarily
modified.

1119.5063.12 4.59 E-13

Recalling Data Sets FSIQ

DATA SET see Chapter "Saving Data Sets"

LIST

DATA SET see Chapter "Saving Data Sets"

CLEAR

DATA SET see Chapter "Saving Data Sets"

CLEAR ALL

PAGE UP The PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN softkey sets the DATA SET LIST table to the
next or previous page.

PAGE DOWN

1119.5063.12 4.60 E-13

FSIQ Recalling Data Sets

Building a Data Set

The SEL ITEMS TO RECALL softkey opens a sub-menu to select data subsets.
MEMORY RECALL-SELECT ITEMS TO RECALL sub-menu:
USER
SEL ITEMS
TO RECALL SEL ITEMS
RECALL DATA SET TO RECALL
NAME: DATASET1 PATH: C:\USER\CONFIG ITEMS: SELECTED SELECT
ITEMS
COMMENT: GSM_MASK
ENABLE
ALL ITEMS

DISABLE
GENERAL SETUP COLOR SETUP ALL ITEMS
HW-SETTINGS HARDCOPY SETUP
TRACE 1
TRACE 2 MACROS
TRACE 3
TRACE 4
LINES TRANSDUCER

DEFAULT
CONFIG

The ITEMS TO RECALL table displays the selectable data subsets:

General Setup current configuration of general instrument parameters
HW-Settings current measurement hardware settings
Trace1...4 measurement data trace 1 to trace 4
Lines data point tables for the active limit lines
Color Setup user-defined color settings
Hardcopy Setup configuration for hardcopy output
Macros macros
Transducer transducer factor, transducer set

SELECT The SELECT ITEMS softkey activates the ITEMS TO RECALL table and sets
ITEMS the selection bar to the first line, left column of the table.

ENABLE The ENABLE ALL ITEMS softkey marks all entries in the ITEMS TO RECALL
ALL ITEMS table.

DISABLE The DISABLE ALL ITEMS softkey unmarks all entries in the ITEMS TO
ALL ITEMS RECALL table.

DEFAULT The DEFAULT CONFIG softkey establishes the default selection of the data
CONFIG subset to be recalled and outputs DEFAULT in the ITEMS field of the
RECALL DATA SET table.

1119.5063.12 4.61 E-13

Macros FSIQ

Macros – USER Key

The FSIQ menus are so designed that the analyzer can be easily applied to most of the usual
measurement tasks with a minimum number of key operations. However, the USER menu also permits
a tailored adaptation of any necessary setup and measurement functions needed for special
applications. Here, a sequence of key operations, which may occur repeatedly, can be listed in the
USER menu as a key macro, then stored in memory and recalled as required by the application.

Fundamentals
Macros are defined as arbitrary key sequences which need to be defined only once and then can be
recalled as often as desired. Through the use of macros, often-needed measurement functions or
instrument setups, which may require a large number of key operations, can be easily performed. The
writing of macros is possible only under manual control. Macro generation is not possible under remote
control (e.g. via the IEC Bus interface).
A total of 7 different macros can be programmed and assigned to the individual softkeys of the USER
menu. Each macro has a title (arbitrarily defined by the user ) which is also used as a label for the
corresponding softkey. To indicate that a macro has not yet been programmed, the soft-key label
appears in parenthesis (e.g. (MACRO 1)). After a key-sequence macro has been defined, the
parenthesis are removed and the softkey is replaced by the titel specified by the user.
A macro is executed by pressing the corresponding softkey.
During execution of macros, the key actions are repeated in exactly the same sequence as they were
programmed. The sequential execution of a macro may be interrupted by using the PAUSE instruction.
As soon as a macro is interrupted, adjustments on the Unit Under Test (UUT) may be made, etc. The
interrupted macro is allowed to continue by pressing CONTINUE in the message window and is aborted
by pressing ABORT.

MESSAGE
Macro "MACRO 1" stopped !
CONTINUE ABORT

A running macro can be aborted by pressing the LOCAL key. At this time, the following message is
displayed:

WARNING
Execution of macro "MACRO 1" aborted

OK

During the time a macro is executing, manual operations on the instrument are not possible, and the
soft-key panel is disabled. After interruption or conclusion of a macro, the applicable soft-key panel is
enabled (i.e., menu state at the conclusion of the macro).

1119.5063.12 4.62 E-13

FSIQ Macros

Starting Macros
USER menu
USER MENU The USER key opens a menu for selection and starting of
USER (MACRO 1) macros. The macros can be defined in the DEFINE MACRO
submenu.
(MACRO 2)

(MACRO 3)

(MACRO 4)

(MACRO 5)

(MACRO 6)

(MACRO 7)

DEFINE
MACRO

(MACRO 1) The MACRO 1 to 7 softkeys start the execution of the macros.

(MACRO 7)

1119.5063.12 4.63 E-13

Macros FSIQ

Defining Macros
In the DEFINE MACRO menu, all necessary softkeys needed for macro management are available.
Included are functions for starting and ending macro programming, editing of a macro title, etc.

USER DEFINE MACRO menu

DEFINE The DEFINE MACRO softkey calls the sub-menu to define

MACRO
the macros.
DEFINE RECORD
MACRO ON OFF
The SELECT MACRO softkey is active and opens the box to
DEFINE
select the macro to be edited. In case no selection is made,
PAUSE MACRO 1 is automatically selected.

DELETE
MACRO

MACRO
TITLE

SELECT
MACRO

RECORD The RECORD ON/OFF starts or stops the recording of the macro.
ON OFF
ON All key actions are recorded until the softkey is changed to OFF . To
indicate that macro record is enabled, the enhancement label
MAC is displayed.
The number of actions which can be stored in a macro is limited. If
the limit is exceeded, the error message "Macro too long.
Recording aborted" is output and the recording operation is aborted,
however, the actions already recorded do remain stored.

OFF The recording is stopped. The key actions are stored under the
macro chosen by the SELECT MACRO softkey.

DEFINE The DEFINE PAUSE softkey inserts a pause instruction into the macro
PAUSE sequence which is being recorded. A running macro will pause when it
reaches this instruction, at which point settings on the unit under test could for
example be made. CONTINUE in the message window is used to continue
the macro execution.

1119.5063.12 4.64 E-13

FSIQ Macros

DELETE The DELETE MACRO softkey deletes the macro which was previously
MACRO selected by the SELECT MACRO softkey. The softkey of the deleted title now
carries its default label (MACRO X, X = macro number)

MACRO The MACRO TITLE softkey activates the entry of the title for the selected
TITLE macro .

Because the macro title is used for labelling the corresponding softkey, a
maximum of only 20 characters is allowed. All text after the 10 th character is
written to the second line. However, entering the character @ forces a new
line at any point in the softkey title.

SELECT The SELECT MACRO softkey open the selection box with a list of all 7
MACRO macros. All soft-key functions of this menu are related to this macro.

SELECT MACRO

Macro 1
(Macro 2)
(Macro 3)
(Macro 4)
(Macro 5)
(Macro 6)
(Macro 7)

1119.5063.12 4.65 E-13

Frequency and Span - Analyzer FSIQ

Analyzer Mode
The analyzer mode is activated in the CONFIGURATION MODE menu (see also Section ’Mode
Selection - MODE Key’

MODE The ANALYZER softkey selects the ANALYZER mode.

CONFIGURATION
ANALYZER This mode is the default setting of the FSIQ.
MODE
The functions provided correspond to those of a
RECEIVER
conventional spectrum analyzer. The analyzer measures
SETUP the frequency spectrum of the test signal over the
TRACKING
GENERATOR
selected frequency range with the selected resolution and
sweep time, or, for a fixed frequency, displays the
VECTOR waveform of the video signal.
ANALYZER

FFT

Note: If two displays (screen A and screen B) are opened after switch-on of signal analysis, the
analyzer mode is only set for the display activated for entry (marked at the top right corner
of diagram). For the other display, the previous settings remain valid.
Storage and display of measured values is sequential: first in the upper and then in the
lower display.

1119.5063.12 4.66 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Frequency and Span

Frequency and Span Selection – FREQUENCY Key Group

The FREQUENCY key group is used to specify the frequency axis of the active measurement window.
The frequency axis can be defined either by the start and stop frequency or by the center frequency and
span. For the case when two measurement windows (SPLIT-SCREEN) are displayed simultaneously,
data entered are always related to the window selected in the SYSTEM-DISPLAY menu.
After pressing one of the keys CENTER, SPAN, START or STOP, the value of the corresponding
parameter can be defined in the appropriate dialog window. At the same time, a softkey menu appears,
which allows selecting the optional parameters.

Start Frequency – START Key

FREQUENCY – START menu:
FREQUENCY START FREQ The START key opens a menu which displays the various
START options for setting the start frequency of the sweep.
CENTER SPAN MANUAL The START MANUAL softkey is automatically active and
opens the entry window for manual input of the start
CENTER
FIXED frequency. At the same time, the coupling of the parameters is
START STOP set to STOP FIXED
SPAN
FIXED The STOP FIXED, SPAN FIXED and CENTER FIXED
softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one
STOP of these switches may be active at any one time. The
FIXED frequency coupling selected by the softkeys defines which of
the dependent parameters stop frequency, center frequency
and span is to remain constant when a change in the start
frequency is made.
The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear
FREQ AXIS and logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis.
LIN LOG

START The START MANUAL softkey activates manual entry of the start frequency.
M AN UAL
The allowed range of values for the start frequency is:
0 Hz <= fstart <= fmax - minspan/2 fstart start frequency
minspan smallest selectable span)
fmax max. frequency

STO P If the STOP FIXED key is active, the stop frequency remains constant when
FIXED the start frequency is changed. The center frequency is adjusted to the new
frequency range. STOP FIXED coupling is the default setting.

SPAN If the SPAN FIXED softkey is active, the span remains constant when the
FIXED start frequency is changed. The stop frequency is adjusted to the new
frequency range.

1119.5063.12 4.67 E-13

Frequency and Span - Analyzer FSIQ

CENTER If the CENTER FIXED softkey is active, the center frequency remains
FIXED constant when the start frequency is changed. The stop frequency is adjusted
to the new frequency range.

FREQ AXIS The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
LIN LOG scaling of the frequency axis.
When the log scale is used, the following restrictions apply:
• For the start/stop frequency ratio the following holds:
Stopfrequency
≥ 14
.
Startfrequency

At ratios below 1.4, a linear frequency scale is automatically selected.

• Up to five decades can be set.
Stopfrequency
≤ 105
Startfrequency
When the start or stop frequency is changed, the stop or start frequency is
adapted to the settable range, as required.
• A frequency offset is not allowed.
• The CHANNEL POWER, C/N, C/N0, ADJACENT CHAN POWER and
OCCUPIED PWR BANDW measurements are disabled.
Note: The function of a limit line is influenced by the FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG
setting at the time of the definition.
Limit lines are entered as tabulated values (level and frequency).
Most regulations and standards prescribe the linking of values by
straight lines both for the linear and logarithmic display. When the
limit line is defined with the desired frequency scale selected, this is
automatically taken into account (linear interpolation).
To be able to use the correct limit values among the tabulated
values after a scale switchover, the limit line is recalculated after the
switchover.

1119.5063.12 4.68 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Frequency and Span

Stop Frequency – STOP Key

FREQUENCY – STOP menu:

STOP FREQ The STOP key opens a menu which displays the various
FREQUENCY
STOP options for setting the stop frequency of the sweep .
CENTER SPAN MANUAL
The STOP MANUAL softkey is automatically active and opens
START
FIXED the entry window for manual input of the stop frequency. At the
START STOP
same time, parameter coupling is set to START FIXED.
CENTER
FIXED The START FIXED, CENTER FIXED and SPAN FIXED
SPAN softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one
FIXED switch can be active at any one time. The softkeys are used to
select the frequency coupling. The frequency coupling defines
which of the dependent parameters start frequency, center
frequency or span is to remain constant when the stop
frequency is changed.

FREQ AXIS
LIN LOG

STOP The STOP MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry window for the stop
MANUAL frequency.

The allowed range of values for the stop frequency is:

minspan ≤ fstop ≤ fmax fstop stop frequency
minspan smallest selectable span (10Hz)
fmax max. frequency

START If the START FIXED softkey is active, the start frequency remains constant
FIXED when the stop frequency is changed. The center frequency is adjusted to the
new frequency range. The START FIXED coupling is the default setting.

CENTER If the CENTER FIXED softkey is active, the center frequency remains
FIXED constant when the stop frequency is changed. The start frequency is adjusted
to the new frequency range.

SPAN If the SPAN FIXED softkey is active, the span remains constant when the
FIXED stop frequency is changed. The start frequency is adjusted to the new
frequency range.

FREQ AXIS The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
LIN LOG scaling of the frequency axis (see START key).

1119.5063.12 4.69 E-13

Frequency and Span - Analyzer FSIQ

Center Frequency – CENTER Key

FREQUENCY – CENTER menu:

FREQUENCY The CENTER softkey opens a menu which displays the

CENTER
various options for setting the center frequency of the sweep.
CENTER SPAN CENTER
MANUAL
The CENTER MANUAL softkey is automatically active and
START opens the entry window for manual input of the center
START STOP FIXED frequency. At the same time, the coupling of the parameters is
set to SPAN FIXED.
SPAN
FIXED
The START FIXED, STOP FIXED and SPAN FIXED softkeys
STOP are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one switch can
FIXED be active at any one time. The softkeys are used to select the
FREQUENCY frequency coupling. The frequency coupling defines which of
OFFSET the dependent parameters start frequency, stop frequency or
span remains constant when the center frequency is changed.

FREQ AXIS
LIN LOG

CENTER The CENTER MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry window for
MANUAL entering the center frequency.
The allowed range of values for the center frequency is:

for the frequency domain (span > 0):

0 Hz <= fcenter <= fmax – minspan/2

and for the time domain (span = 0)

0 Hz ≤ fcenter ≤ fmax fcenter center frequency
minspan smallest selectable span (10Hz)
fmax max. frequency

1119.5063.12 4.70 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Frequency and Span

SPAN If the SPAN FIXED softkey is active, the span remains constant when the
FIXED center frequency is changed. The start and stop frequency are adjusted to
the new frequency range. SPAN FIXED coupling is the default setting.

START If the START FIXED softkey is active, the start frequency remains constant
FIXED when the center frequency is changed. The span is adjusted to the new
frequency range.

STOP If the STOP FIXED softkey is active, the stop frequency remains constant
FIXED when the center frequency is changed. The span is adjusted to the new
frequency range.

FREQ AXIS The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the entry window for an
LIN LOG arithmetical frequency offset which is added to the frequency axis labelling.
The allowable range of input values is -100 GHz to 100 GHz. The default
setting is 0 Hz.

FREQ AXIS The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
LIN LOG scaling of the frequency axis (see START key).

1119.5063.12 4.71 E-13

Frequency and Span - Analyzer FSIQ

Center Frequency Step Size

The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a menu for setting the step size of the center
frequency. The step size can be coupled to the span (frequency domain) or the resolution bandwidth
(time domain) or it can be manually set to a fixed value.
In order to change the step size, the entry window for the center frequency must already be active. After
pressing the STEP key, the CENTER STEP menu appears. The softkeys are presented according to the
selected domain (frequency or time).
The softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only one switch can be active at any one time.

Control is returned to the FREQUENCY CENTER menu via the menu key .

DATA VARIATION - STEP menu for span ≠ 0 for span = 0

DATA VARIATION CENTER CENTER

STEPSIZE STEPSIZE
HOLD STEP
AUTO AUTO
0.1 * SPAN 0.1 * RBW

AUTO AUTO
0.5 * SPAN 0.5 * RBW

AUTO AUTO
X * SPAN X * RBW

STEPSIZE STEPSIZE
MANUAL MANUAL

STEPSIZE STEPSIZE
= CENTER = CENTER

AUTO Frequency domain: The AUTO 0.1 * SPAN softkey sets the step size of the
0.1 * SPAN center frequency entry to 10% of the span.

Time domain: The AUTO 0.1 * RBW softkey sets the step size of the
center frequency entry to 10% of the resolution
AUTO bandwidth
0.1 * RBW
AUTO 0.1 * RBW is the default setting.

1119.5063.12 4.72 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Frequency and Span

AUTO Frequency domain: The AUTO 0.5 * SPAN softkey sets the step size of the
0.5 * SPAN center frequency entry to 50% of the span.

Time domain: The AUTO 0.5 * RBW softkey sets the step size of the
center frequency entry to 50% of the resolution
AUTO bandwidth
0.5 * RBW

AUTO Frequency domain:The AUTO X * SPAN softkey activates the entry of the
X * SPAN factor defining the center frequency step size as a % of
span.

Time domain: The AUTO X * RBW softkey activates the entry of the
AUTO factor defining the center frequency step size as a % of
X * RBW the resolution bandwidth.

Values between 1 and 100% in steps of 1% are acceptable. The default

setting is 10%.

STEPSIZE The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for the input of a
MANUAL fixed step size.

STEPSIZE The STEPSIZE = CENTER softkey sets the step size coupling to MANUAL
= CENTER and the step size to a value equal to the center frequency. This function is
especially useful during measurements of the signal harmonic content,
because, when entering the center frequency, the center frequency of
another harmonic is selected with each stroke of the STEP key.

1119.5063.12 4.73 E-13

Frequency and Span - Analyzer FSIQ

Frequency Span – SPAN Key

FREQUENCY – SPAN menu:

FREQUENCY SPAN The SPAN key opens a menu which displays various
SPAN options for the selection of sweep span.
CENTER SPAN MANUAL

START
The SPAN MANUAL softkey is automatically active and
FIXED opens the entry window for manual input of the span. At
START STOP the same time, the parameter coupling is set to CENTER
CENTER FIXED.
FIXED

STOP The START FIXED, CENTER FIXED and STOP FIXED

FIXED softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches. Only
one switch can be active at any one time. The frequency
ZERO SPAN coupling is selected with these softkeys. The frequency
coupling defines which of the dependent parameters start
frequency, center frequency or stop frequency is to remain
FULL SPAN
constant when the span is changed

LAST SPAN

ZOOM

FREQ AXIS
LIN LOG

SPAN The SPAN MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry of the span.
MANUAL
The allowed range of input values for span are:
time domain (span = 0):
0 Hz

frequency domain (span > 0):

minspan ≤ fspan ≤ fmax fspan frequency span

minspan smallest selectable span (10Hz)
fmax max. frequency

ZERO SPAN The ZERO SPAN softkey sets the span value to 0 Hz. The x axis becomes
the time axis. The axis labelling corresponds to the sweep time (on the left, 0
ms, on the right, the current sweep time (SWT)).

FULL SPAN The FULL SPAN softkey sets the span value to the maximum span of the
FSIQ.

1119.5063.12 4.74 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Frequency and Span

LAST SPAN The LAST SPAN softkey switches the instrument between a detailed
measurement (given: center frequency and span) mode and an overview
measurement (FULL SPAN) mode.

The FULL SPAN softkey modifies the center frequency as well as the
selected span. The LAST SPAN softkey cancels this change.

START If the START FIXED softkey is activated, the start frequency remains
FIXED constant when the span is changed. The center and stop frequency are
adjusted to the new span.

CENTER If the CENTER FIXED softkey is activated, the center frequency remains
FIXED constant when the span is changed. The center and stop frequency are
adjusted to the new span. The CENTER FIXED coupling is the default
setting.

STOP If the STOP FIXED softkey is activated, the stop frequency remains constant
FIXED when the span is changed. The center and start frequency are adjusted to the
new span.

FREQ AXIS The FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG softkey switches between linear and logarithmic
LIN LOG scaling of the frequency axis (see START key).

1119.5063.12 4.75 E-13

Frequency and Span - Analyzer FSIQ

Display Zoom
FREQUENCY SPAN- ZOOM submenu:
The ZOOM softkey activates the zoom mode and opens a
ZOOM sub-menu to define the zoom span.
ZOOM
MOVE ZOOM
WINDOW Two frequency lines, which show and define the frequency
range to be zoomed, appear in the active measurement
MOVE ZOOM window when the zoom mode is switched on. The default
START
setting is a zoom span of 10% to the left and 10% to the right
of the center frequency. The zoomed display is shown in the
MOVE ZOOM
STOP second measurement window.
The settings for the second measurement window are taken
ZOOM from the original window. The second measurement window
OFF
thus becomes the active measurement window and its
settings can now be changed.
If only one window is active when the zoom function is
selected, SPLIT SCREEN mode is automatically switched on.
The zoom span can be edited by using the softkeys of the
sub-menu to change the position of the frequency lines.
The softkey ZOOM OFF switches off the zoom.

MOVE ZOOM The MOVE ZOOM WINDOW softkey shifts the full zoom window. The
WINDOW window can shifted until the upper frequency line has reached the stop
frequency or the lower frequency line has reached the start frequency of the
original window.

MOVE ZOOM The MOVE ZOOM START softkey shifts the lower frequency line. Thus, the
START start frequency of the zoomed display can be modified. The frequency line
can be shifted down to the start frequency of the original window or up to the
upper frequency line (= zero span).

MOVE ZOOM The MOVE ZOOM STOP softkey shifts the upper frequency line. Thus, the
STOP stop frequency of the zoomed display can be modified. The frequency line
can be shifted up to the stop frequency of the original window or down to the
lower frequency line (= zero span).

ZOOM The ZOOM OFF softkey switches the zoom function off and then returns
OFF control to the main menu.
The frequency lines for indicating the zoom range are deleted, SPLIT
SCREEN mode remains active, the settings of both measurement windows
are retained and the coupling of the two measurement windows is cancelled.

1119.5063.12 4.76 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

Level Display and RF Input Configuration – LEVEL Key Group

The REF and RANGE keys are used to set the reference level (= maximum RF input level, = overload
limit), the maximum level (= upper grid level) , and the display range of the active window. The INPUT
key sets the characteristics of the RF input (input impedance and input attenuation).

Reference Level – REF key

In addition to the reference level (maximum RF input level), the FSIQ provides a function to define a
maximum level (uppermost grid line on the display):
For a spectrum analyzer, the upper boundary of the measurement diagram (maximum level) is also the
limit of its dynamic range (reference level). This means, that a signal which goes beyond the upper grid
line also overdrives the analyzer.
For compensation of frequency or antenna characteristics, transducer factors can be applied to increase
the signal level. In this case, the calculated values can be above the reference level without actually
being physically applied to the instrument. In order to display these signals on the grid, an upper grid
level which is different from the reference level of the analyzer can be entered.

LEVEL REF menu:

REF LEVEL REF LEVEL The REF key opens a menu to set the
LEVEL MAX LEVEL
REF LEVEL reference level and the input attenuation
AUTO
for the active measurement window .
REF
REF LEVEL MAX LEVEL The REF LEVEL soft key is
OFFSET MANUAL
automatically active with the menu
RA E GRID called up and opens the entry window
ABS / REL for manual input of the reference level.
At the same time various settings
UNIT concerning the level and the attenuation
display can be made.
ATTEN STEP
1dB 10dB
The functions for setting the attenuation
are identical to those under the INPUT
RF ATTEN
MANUAL key and are described in Section
"Configuration of the RF Input - INPUT
ATTEN AUTO Key". Softkey ATTEN STEP 10dB/1dB
NORMAL is only available when the FSIQ is
equiped with option FSE-B13, 1dB
ATTEN AUTO
LOW NOISE
attenuator (see ’Option 1 dB Attenuator
- FSE-B13’ at the end of this Section.)
ATTEN AUTO
LOW DIST

MIXER
LEVEL

1119.5063.12 4.77 E-13

Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer FSIQ

REF LEVEL The REF LEVEL soft key activates the entry of the reference level. The input
is made in the currently active units (dBm, dBµV, etc.).
If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL softkey is active, a change of the reference level
causes an equal amount of change in maximum level Thus, the separation
between the overload limit of the analyzer to the upper grid edge remains the
same. Thus, with only one entry, it is possible to make a change to the
display and simultaneously to perform an adjustment to the amplifier.

REF LEVEL The REF LEVEL OFFSET soft key activates the entry of an arithmetic offset (
OFFSET ±200 dB in 0,1 dB steps) to the level. The offset is added to the measured
level dependent upon the selected units. The scaling of the y axis is changed
accordingly.

GRID The GRID ABS/REL soft key switches between absolute and relative scaling
ABS REL of the level axis. GRID ABS is the default setting.
For absolute scaling the labelling of the level lines is referenced to the
absolute value of the reference level.
For relative scaling, the upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB and the scale
units are in dB. In contrast, the reference level is always displayed in the set
units (dBm, dBµV,..).
The soft key is not displayed for setting LIN / % (linear scaling, labelling in %)
in the LEVEL-RANGE menu since the % unit itself implies a relative scale.

The MAX LEVEL MANUAL and MAX LEVEL AUTO soft keys are mutually exclusive selection switches.
Only one switch can be active at one time. The soft keys are used to select whether reference level and
maximum level are identical or not:

MAX LEVEL When MAX LEVEL AUTO soft key is active, the reference level and
AUTO maximum level are identical.
In this case, the reference level is displayed above the upper left corner of the
grid in the corresponding function field.
MAX LEVEL AUTO is the default setting.
If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL soft key was active prior to pressing the MAX
LEVEL AUTO soft key, the upper boundary of the grid is set to the reference
level.

MAX LEVEL The MAX LEVEL MANUAL soft key activates the entry of the maximum level.
MANUAL The range of input values is ± 200dBm with 0.1 dB resolution.
If the MAX LEVEL MANUAL soft key is activated, the maximum level is
displayed in addition to the reference level to the right above the grid.

1119.5063.12 4.78 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

Display Units
In general, a spectrum analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level display is
calibrated in rms values of an unmodulated sine wave signal. In the initial state, the level is displayed at
a power of 1 milliwatt (= dBm). Via the known input resistance of 50Ω, a conversion can be made to
other units. The units dBm, dBµV, dBµA, dBpW, V, A and W are directly convertible and can be
selected in the REF UNIT menu.
Units dB../MHz have a special status. They are applicable for broadband pulse signals. The measured
pulse voltage or the pulse current is referred to 1 MHz bandwidth. This conversion is not useful for
narrowband or sinewave signals.
If the antenna coded connector on the front panel is used, the coded unit there determines the possible
display units. Connecting to the coded connector deactivates the settings of the UNIT menu.
By certain codings it is nevertheless possible to select a conversion of the unit in the menu. The
dependencies between the unit of the antenna coded connector and the unit which is to be selected for
the display are given in the soft key description.

The default coding defined by the connector can be switched off using the PROBE CODE ON/OFF soft
key. In this case, the unit can be set with the corresponding unit soft keys (dBm, dBµV, ... ) even if a
coded connector is plugged in. The coded entries in the connector are then ignored.

Note: The units dBµV/m and dBµA/m can only be set via the unit of a transducer or via the unit of
the coded connector.

LEVEL REF UNIT submenu:

UNIT The UNIT soft key opens a sub-menu in which the desired
UNIT dBm units for the level axis can be selected and the coding of the
antenna coded connector can be switched on and off.
dBmV The selected units are valid for both displays when two
measurement windows are displayed.
dBµV The unit soft keys are mutually exclusive selection switches.
Only one of these switches may be active at any one time.
dBµA

dBpW

dB* / MHz

VOLT

AMPERE

WATT

PROBE CODE
ON / OFF

1119.5063.12 4.79 E-13

Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer FSIQ

dBm The dBm, dBµV, dBmV, dBµA, dBpW soft keys set the display units to the
corresponding logarithmic units. The dBm unit is the default unit in analyzer
mode.

The units dBm, dBµV, dBmV, dBµA cannot be selected when the coded
dBmV antenna connector or the used transducer defines a unit.

Only for coding dB, the conversion to the desired units is permitted.

dB µV

dBµA

dBpW

dB* / MHz The dB*/MHz softkey activates/disactivates the display of results in units
relative to the bandwidth. Those units can be derived from the logarithmic
units dBµV, dBµV/m, dBµA and dBµA/m.

This leads to the following relative units:

dBmV ⇒ dBmV/MHz
dBµV ⇒ dBµV/MHz
dBµV/m ⇒ dBµV/mMHz
dBµA ⇒ dBµA/MHz
dBµA/m ⇒ dBµA/mMHz

Switching over is possible also if a coded antenna connector or a transducer

fixes the unit to be used.

Conversion to 1 MHz is via the pulse bandwidth of the selected resolution

bandwidth Bimp according to the following equation (example for dBµV) :
Bimp / MHz
P / ( dBµV / MHz ) = 20 ⋅ log + P / ( dBµV ) ,
1MHz
where P = display level

The dBµV/MHz unit can be combined with the following coded connector or
transducer units
dB (the unit dBµV/MHz remains )
µV/m (yields the display unit dBµV/mMHz)
analogous for dBµA/MHz:
dB and µA (the unit dBµA/MHz remains)

Other combinations are not allowed.

1119.5063.12 4.80 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

VOLT The VOLT, AMPERE, WATT soft keys set the display units to the
corresponding linear units.
The units VOLT, AMPERE, WATT cannot be selected when the coded
antenna connector or the transducer table defines one of the following as
units:
AMPERE
µV/m
µA

For coding dB, the conversion to the desired units is permitted.

WATT

PROBE CODE The PROBE CODE ON/OFF soft key enables or disables the units defined by
ON OFF the coded connector.

1119.5063.12 4.81 E-13

Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer FSIQ

Level Range – RANGE Key

LEVEL RANGE menu:

LEVEL LEVEL RANGE The RANGE key calls a menu in which the range, linear or
logarithmic the display scale, absolute or relative and the
LOG 120 dB level units for the active window can be selected.
REF
The display range of the analyzer can be set in 10 dB
LOG 100 dB steps from 10 to 200 dB.
RANGE The default setting is 100 dB.
LOG 50 dB
The most often used settings (120 dB, 100 dB, 50 dB,
20 dB and 10 dB) are each directly selectable by a soft
LOG 20 dB key.
All other ranges are chosen with the LOG MANUAL soft
key.
LOG 10 dB
After pressing the RANGE key, the LOG MANUAL entry
LOG window is enabled if the display range is not set to LIN.
MANUAL

LINEAR/dB

LINEAR/ %

GRID
ABS REL

LOG The LOG MANUAL soft key activates the entry of the level display range.
MANUAL Display ranges from 10 to 200 dB are allowed in 10-dB steps. Values which
are not permissible are rounded to the next valid number.

LINEAR/dB The LINEAR/dB soft key switches the display range of the analyzer to linear
scaling. The horizontal lines are labelled according to the selection GRID
ABS/REL in dB* or *.

LINEAR/ % The LINEAR/% soft key switches the display range of the analyzer to linear
scaling. The horizontal lines are labelled in %. The grid is divided into
decades.

GRID The GRID ABS/REL soft key switches between absolute and relative scaling
ABS REL of the level axis. GRID ABS is the default setting.
ABS The labelling of the level lines is referenced to the absolute value of the
reference level.
REL The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB and the scale units are in
dB. In contrast, the reference level is always displayed in the set units
(dBm, dBµV,..).
The soft key is not displayed for setting LIN / % (linear scaling, labelling in %)
since the % unit itself implies a relative scale.

1119.5063.12 4.82 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

RF Input Configuration – INPUT Key

In addition to manual entry of the input attenuation, the FSIQ provides an option which allows the RF
attenuation, dependent on the selected reference level, to be automatically set. Thus, it is guaranteed
that an optimum combination of RF attenuation and IF amplification is always used. For the automatic
selection process, three modes are provided. The AUTO LOW NOISE mode selects the
amplification/attenuation combination so that the display of noise on the FSIQ is at a minimum. The
signal/noise ratio is maximised. The AUTO LOW DISTORTION mode is tuned for minimisation of the
internally generated interference products. This causes, however, a lower signal/noise ratio. The ATTEN
AUTO NORMAL mode is a compromise between low noise and low distortion.

INPUT menu:
INPUT The INPUT key opens the menu for configuring the RF
RF ATTEN input. It contains the input attenuator and mixer level for
INPUT MANUAL
matching the RF input to the input signal.
ATTEN AUTO
NORMAL The RF ATTEN MANUAL, ATTEN AUTO NORMAL,
ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE and ATTEN AUTO LOW
ATTEN AUTO
LOW NOISE
soft keys are mutually exclusive selection switches. only
one can be active at any one time.
ATTEN AUTO Softkey ATTEN STEP 10dB/1dB is only available when
LOW DIST the FSIQ is equiped with option FSE-B13, 1dB attenuator
(see ’Option 1 dB Attenuator - FSE-B13’ at the end of
MIXER
LEVEL
this Section.)

ATTEN STEP
1 dB 10dB The INPUT SELECT soft key calls a submenu for
INPUT
selection of the input impedance.
SELECT

ATTEN AUTO The RF ATTEN MANUAL soft key activates the entry of an attenuation factor
NORMAL independent of the reference level.
The attenuation can be modified in 10 dB steps between 0 and 70 dB.
Other inputs will be rounded to the next higher integer value.
If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation, the
reference level will be adjusted accordingly and the warning "Limit reached"
will be output.

1119.5063.12 4.83 E-13

Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer FSIQ

ATTEN AUTO The ATTEN AUTO NORMAL soft key sets the RF attenuation automatically
NORMAL independent of the selected reference level.

ATTEN AUTO The ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE soft key sets the RF attenuation always
LOW NOISE 10dB lower than in the RF ATTEN AUTO mode. Therefore, for 10 dB RF
attenuation, the maximum reference level is -10 dBm. For reference levels
which are lower, at least 10 dB is always set (see above).
Setting Low Noise means that the indicated inherent noise level is low. This
setting is recommended if signals with a low level have to be measured as
the highest S/N ratio is then obtained.

ATTEN AUTO The ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST soft key sets the RF attenuation 10 dB higher
LOW DIST than in RF ATT AUTO mode. This means that for 10 dB RF attenuation, the
maximum reference level is -30 dBm (-40 dBm at the mixer).

This setting is recommended whenever a small signal is to be measured in

the presence of larger signals. Here, the intermodulation-free range of the
FSIQ is large and the internal distortion products are minimised.

MIXER The MIXER LEVEL soft key activates the entry of the maximum mixer level
LEVEL attainable for a given reference level. At the same time it enables soft keys
ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE and ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST .
Range of input values is -10 to -100 dBm

1119.5063.12 4.84 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

INPUT INPUT SELECT submenu:

INPUT The INPUT SELECT soft key calls a submenu for selection of
SELECT
the input impedance of the RF input.
INPUT RF INPUT
SELECT 50 OHM The basic setting is 50 Ohm. By connecting an impedance
converter RAM or RAZ ahead, the 50-Ohm input can be
RF INPUT
75 OHM/RAM transformed to 75 Ohm. FSIQ automatically takes the
corresponding correction values for the level display into
RF INPUT account.
75 OHM/RAZ
The soft keys used to select the input impedance are selection
switches. Only one of them can be active at any one time

RF INPUT The RF INPUT 50 OHM soft key sets the input impedance to 50
50 OHM Ohm (= default setting). All level indications are referenced to 50
Ohm.

RF INPUT The RF INPUT 75 OHM/RAM soft key sets the input impedance
75 OHM/RAM of the FSIQ to 75 Ohm including the matching element RAM. All
level indications are referenced to 75 Ohm.

RF INPUT
75 OHM/RAZ The RF INPUT 75 OHM/RAZ soft key sets the input impedance
of the FSIQ to 75 Ohm including the matching element RAZ. All
level indications are referenced to 75 Ohm.

1119.5063.12 4.85 E-13

Level Display/RF Input - Analyzer FSIQ

Option 1 dB Attenuator - FSE-B13

The option 1 dB Attenuator FSE-B13 is used to set the attenuator with a step size of 1 dB up to an upper
limit frequency of 7 GHz.
The attenuator with 1 dB stepping is connected in series after the main attenuator.

Instruments with an Upper Limit Frequency of up to 7 GHz

The optional attenuator is in the signal path for all settable frequencies in instruments with a maximum
upper limit frequency of 7 GHz. When it is activated, it is used without any restriction for setting the input
attenuation or the reference level.

to RF converter
dB dB

RF-input Attenuator 0 to 70 dB FSE-B13, 1 dB attenuator,

0 to 9 dB

Instruments with an Upper Limit Frequency of more than 7 GHz

In instruments with an upper limit frequency of more than 7 GHz a diplexer is placed before the optional
attenuator for separating the frequency ranges ≤ 7GHz and > 7 GHz. The optional attenuator is in the
signal path only for frequencies ≤ 7 GHz.

to RF converter
dB dB

RF input Attenuator FSE-B13, 1 dB attenuator

0 to 70 dB 0 to 9 dB

to YIG and
microwave unitt

Diplexer

1119.5063.12 4.86 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

On changing the frequency range for the stop frequency, the attenuator can be set as follows:

Instrument setting: ATTENUATOR AUTO

- After switching from Fstop ≤ 7 GHz to Fstop > 7 GHz the reference level is re-calculated provided
the attenuation previously set contained 1 dB steps. A warning is not displayed.

- After switching from Fstop > 7 GHz to Fstop ≤ 7 GHz the reference level is re-calculated. A
warning is not displayed.

Instrument setting: ATTENUATOR MANUAL

- After switching from Fstop ≤ 7 GHz to Fstop > 7 GHz, the attenuation is rounded off to a value
divisible by 10 provided the attenuation previously set contained 1 dB steps. A warning is
displayed:
WARNING
1dB Stepsize Attenuator only available
for stop frequencies <= 7 GHz
OK

- After switching from Fstop > 7 GHz to Fstop ≤ 7 GHz the current value of the input attenuation is
maintained.

The 1 dB attenuator is inactive as default. In this case the attenuation can be set only in 10 dB steps, ie
the attenuation of the optional attenuator is fixed at 0 dB.

The optional attenuator is activated either in the INPUT menu or in the REF LEVEL menu (the two
settings are equivalent):

ATTEN STEP The ATTEN STEP 1dB/10dB softkey switches between the 10 dB step and 1
1dB 10db dB step settings.

After activating the optional attenuator with the ATTEN STEP 10dB/1dB
softkey, setting in 1 dB steps is possible, the total attenuation is divided into
- a 10 dB contribution from the main attenuator and
- a residual contribution of 0 to 9 dB from the optional attenuator.

The attenuation setting range in the instrument remains to be 0 to 70 dB, it is

not extended by the optional attenuator.

After a reset the attenuator step size is automatically set to 10 dB.

1119.5063.12 4.87 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

Marker Functions – MARKER Key Group

The markers are used for marking points on measurement curves, reading out measurement values
and for quickly selecting a display screen segment. Preselected measurement routines can be called by
pressing a key in the marker menu. The FSIQ provides four markers and four delta markers per
measurement window. The currently activated marker can be shifted with the cursor keys, the roll-key or
the softkeys. The softkeys are defined according to the type of display representation selected
(frequency or time domain).

The marker which can be moved by the user is defined as the active marker.

Examples:

marker active marker temporary marker

1 3 T1

2
delta marker

The measurement values of the active marker (also called marker values) are displayed in the marker
field. In the marker info list, the measurement values from all enabled markers are sorted in ascending
order. The marker info list can be switched off with the MARKER INFO softkey so that only the values
for the active marker are shown.

The summary markers have a special function. They read out the rms or average value of the current
trace or the trace averaged over several sweeps in the marker info list. These markers are not
displayed.

Main Markers– NORMAL Key

The NORMAL key calls a menu which contains all standard functions. The current state of the markers
is indicated by a colored illumination of the softkeys. If no marker is enabled prior to pressing the
NORMAL key, MARKER 1 will be enabled as the reference marker and a peak search on the
measurement curve is carried out (assumption: at least one measurement curve is active). Otherwise,
the peak search is omitted and the entry window for the reference marker is activated.

The marker field at the upper left of the display screen shows the marker location (here, frequency), the
level and the currently selected measurement curve.

MARKER 1 [T1]
-27.5 dBm
123.4567 MHz

1119.5063.12 4.88 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

MARKER NORMAL menu:

MARKER
MARKER MARKER MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL
POWER MEAS
MARKER 1
SETTING

DE A MKR MARKER 2

CHANNEL
POWER MARKER 3

CP / ACP
ABS REL MARKER 4

SET CP SIGNAL COUNTER

REFERENCE COUNT RESOL

MARKER SIGNAL
C / N TRACK
DEMOD

MARKER
C / No NOISE
ZOOM

ADJACENT
CHAN POWER

ADJUST CP MARKER
SETTINGS INFO

OCCUPIED ALL MARKER

PWR BANDW OFF

MARKER The MARKER 1 to MARKER 4 softkeys switch the corresponding marker

NORMAL on/off or activate it as the reference marker. If the marker is activated as a
MARKER 1 reference marker, an entry field for manually setting the position of the
reference marker is opened simultaneously. If the marker is disabled, the
softkey is not illuminated. Enabled markers and the reference marker are
MARKER 2
ON indicated by illuminating the corresponding softkeys in different colors.(In
the instrument default state, the active reference marker is displayed in red
MARKER 3 and enabled markers are displayed in green.)

Operating example:
MARKER 4
MARKER 1 is shown as the reference marker by the colored background
illumination. MARKER 2 through MARKER 4 are turned off.

MARKER MARKER
NORMAL NORMAL
MARKER 1 MARKER 1

MARKER 2 MARKER 2
ON

MARKER 3 MARKER 3

1119.5063.12 4.89 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

Pressing the MARKER 3 softkey switches MARKER 3 on and it becomes

the reference maker. The previous reference marker remains enabled and
the softkey remains illuminated. However, the entry mode for this marker is
not now active. Instead, the entry window for MARKER 3 is opened and the
position of MARKER 3 can be shifted.

MARKER 3
123.4567 MHz

The information in the marker field also changes to describe the new
reference marker.

MARKER 3 [T1]
-27.5 dBm
23.4567891 MHz

MARKER MARKER
NORMAL NORMAL
MARKER 1 MARKER 1

MARKER 2 MARKER 2

MARKER 3 MARKER 3

Pressing the current reference marker (MARKER 3) softkey again switches

MARKER 3 off. If at least one marker is enabled, the marker with the
smallest number will be selected as the new reference marker (in the
example, MARKER 1). Switching off the last active marker also deletes are
delta markers.

When several measurement curves (traces) are being displayed, the marker is set to the maximum
value (peak) of the active curve which has the lowest number (1 to 4). In case a marker is already
located there, it will be set to the frequency of the next highest level (next peak).
When the split screen display mode is active, the marker will be placed in the active window (for
SCREEN A: trace 1 or 3, for SCREEN B: trace 2 or 4). Since markers are attached to a measurement
curve, the marker can only be enabled when at least one curve in the corresponding window is visible .
If a measurement curve is turned off, the corresponding markers and marker functions are also erased.
If the curve is switched on again (VIEW, CLR/WRITE;..), these markers along with coupled functions will
be restored to their original positions. A prerequisite for the restoration of the marker positions is that
individual markers have not been used on another measurement curve or that the sweep data
(start/stop frequency for span > 0 or sweep time for span = 0) have not been changed.

1119.5063.12 4.90 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

If a marker (or, delta marker) necessary for a marker function is not available, it will be automatically
checked whether or not the enabling of the corresponding marker is possible (see above). If this is not
the case, a warning is issued.

WARNING:
No trace active

The activation of the desired marker function is then not possible.

On the other hand, if the marker can be enabled, a peak search is automatically performed. Thereafter,
the desired marker function can be executed.

MARKER NORMAL menu:

ALL MARKER The ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches off all markers (reference and delta
OFF markers). Similarly, it switches off all functions and displays correlated with
the markers/delta markers (signal count, signal track, marker zoom, N dB
down, shape factor, marker list and marker info).

SIGNAL After each sweep, the SIGNAL TRACK softkey starts a search for the
TRACK maximum signal level on the display screen (PEAK SEARCH) and then sets
the center frequency to this signal (MARKER ->CENTER).

If a threshold line is enabled, only signals above the threshold level are
considered. If no signal is over the threshold, the center frequency remains
constant until a signal is available which is over the threshold.
If no marker is switched to the active trace, the next unused marker is
automatically activated and positioned by the peak search routine.
In order to reduce the search range, it is possible to apply the SEARCH LIMIT
ON/OFF function (see section: "Search Functions"). If the center frequency is
changed, the position of the frequency line relative to the center frequency
remains the same, ie its absolute position is correspondingly changed.
The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (spectrum) display
mode (span > 0.)

1119.5063.12 4.91 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

MARKER The MARKER ZOOM softkey expands the area around the active marker.
ZOOM With the zoom function, more details of the spectrum can be seen. The
desired display range can be defined in an entry window.

The following sweep is stopped at the position of the reference marker. The
frequency of the signal is counted and the measured frequency becomes the
new center frequency. The zoomed display is then configured and the new
settings are used by the FSIQ for further measurements.

As long as switching to the new frequency display range has not yet taken
place, pressing the softkey will abort the procedure.
If no marker is activated when the softkey is pressed, then MARKER 1 is
automatically activated and set to the highest peak in the measurement
window.
If an instrument setting is changed after selection of MARKER ZOOM, the
function is aborted.
The MARKER ZOOM softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span
> 0).

MARKER The MARKER INFO softkey opens the display of several markers within the
INFO grid. In the upper right corner of the grid, a maximum of 4 markers/delta
markers with the marker symbols ∆/∇, marker number (1 to 4), position and
measurement value are listed. For the output of the marker position, the
number or displayed characters will be limited as required.
If the number of lines available is not enough for all the enabled markers and
delta markers, first the markers and then the delta markers are entered into
the info list
In the SPLIT SCREEN display, the info list is partitioned into 2 partial lists and
assigned to the corresponding measurement window (SCREEN A and
SCREEN B). The info list for SCREEN A contains the markers which are
assigned to trace 1 or trace 3. The info list for SCREEN B contains the
markers which are assigned to trace 2 and trace 4.

For the two measurement windows, it is not possible to turn the MARKER
INFO function selectively on/off .

LF Demodulation
The FSIQ provides demodulators for AM and FM signals. With these demodulators, a displayed signal
can be identified acoustically through the use of the internal loudspeaker or with external headphones.
The frequency at which the demodulation is enabled is coupled to the markers. The sweep stops at the
frequency determined by the set marker for the selected time and the RF signal is demodulated.
During a measurement in the time domain (span = 0) the demodulation is switched on continuously.

1119.5063.12 4.92 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

MARKER NORMAL-MARKER DEMOD submenu:

MARKER The MARKER DEMOD softkey calls a sub-menu in which the

DEMOD
MKR DEMOD
type of demodulation desired, the duration of the
MARKER
DEMOD ON OFF demodulation and the loudness may be selected

AM

FM

MKR
STOP TIME

VOLUME

MKR DEMOD The MKR DEMOD ON/OFF softkey switches the demodulation on/off. When
ON OFF the demodulation is on, the sweep is stopped at all marker frequencies,
assuming the signal is over the threshold, and the signal is demodulated for
the duration of the defined stop time. A total of four stopping points (four
markers) can be programmed.
If no marker is set when the demodulation is switched on, the FSIQ switches
the first marker on (MARKER 1) and sets it to the largest signal.

MKR The MKR STOP TIME softkey activates the entry window for setting the stop
STOP TIME time.
The FSIQ stops the sweep at the marker or the marker for the duration of the
defined stop time and then switches the demodulation on (see also MKR
DEMOD ON/OFF).

AM The AM and FM are selection switches of which only one can be activated at
any one time. They are used to set the desired demodulation type, FM or
AM. The default setting is AM.
FM

VOLUME The VOLUME soft key opens the entry window for setting the loudness.
The volume can be set between 0 and 100%.

1119.5063.12 4.93 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

Frequency Measurement
In order to perform an exact determination of the frequency of a signal, the FSIQ is equipped with an
internal frequency counter. The frequency counter measures the frequency of the RF signal at the
intermediate frequency. Using the value found at the intermediate frequency, the FSIQ calculates the
frequency of the RF signal by applying the known frequency conversion relationships.
The frequency measurement error depends only upon the accuracy of the frequency standard used
(external or internal reference). Although the FSIQ always operates with a synchronous sweep,
independent from the set span, the frequency counter delivers a more exact frequency measurement
than a measurement performed with a marker. This is explained by the following:
• The marker measures only the position of the pixel on the measurement curve (trace) and infers
therefrom the frequency of the signal. The trace, however, contains only a limited number of pixels.
Each pixel, depending upon the selected span, may contain many measurement values which, as a
consequence, causes a limitation in the frequency resolution.
• The resolution with which the frequency can be measured is proportional to the measurement time.
For measurement time reasons, the bandwidth is normally held as wide as possible and the sweep
time is set a short as possible. This results in a loss of frequency resolution.

For the measurement with the frequency counter, the sweep is stopped at the reference marker, the
frequency is counted with the desired resolution and then the sweep is allowed to continue (see also
Chapter 2, "Measurement Examples").

MARKER NORMAL menu:

SIGNAL The SIGNAL COUNT softkey switches the frequency counter on/off.
COUNT
The frequency is counted at the position of the reference marker. The sweep
stops at the reference marker until the frequency counter has delivered a
result. The time required for a frequency measurement depends on the
selected frequency resolution. The resolution is set in the COUNTER RESOL
sub-menu.

If no marker is enabled when the SIGNAL COUNT softkey is pressed,

MARKER 1 is switched on and set at the largest signal.

In addition, the SIGNAL COUNT function is displayed in the marker field on

the display screen with [T x CNT].

MARKER 2 [T1 CNT]

-27.5 dBm
23.4567891 MHz

Switching the SIGNAL COUNT function off is accomplished by pressing the

softkey once again.

Note: For digital resolution filters (RBW < 1kHz or softkey RBW 1kHz set to
DIG), a analog prefilter of 2 kHz is active.

1119.5063.12 4.94 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

COUNTER The COUNTER RESOL softkey in the right-hand

RESOLUTION
COUNTER
supplementary menu opens a sub-menu in which the
RESOL 10 kHz resolution of the frequency counter can be defined.
The value can be selected between 0.1 Hz and 10 kHz.
1 kHz
The time which the frequency counter requires for a
100 Hz
measurement is proportional to the selected resolution. For
example, a 1 Hz resolution will require approximately one
second measurement time. In order to prevent slowing the
10 Hz sweep time unnecessarily, it is recommended that the
frequency resolution be set as low as possible.
1 Hz

0.1 Hz

Noise Power Density Measurement

MARKER NORMAL menu:

NOISE
The NOISE softkey located in the right-hand supplementary menu switches
the noise measurement on/off.
During a noise measurement, the noise power density is measured at the
position of the reference marker. The display takes place in the marker field
dependent upon the vertical units in dBx/Hz (for logarithmic scale) or in
V/Hz, A/Hz or W/Hz for linear scales. The correction factors for the selected
bandwidth and the conversion of the IF logarithmic converter are
automatically taken into consideration.
The measurement should be performed by the sampling detector which
allows displaying the effective value of the noise power.
In order to produce a smoother noise display, neighboring points
(symmetrical to measurement frequency) on the measurement curve are
averaged.
In the time domain display, an average of the measurement values takes
place in time (after each sweep).

1119.5063.12 4.95 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

Channel Power Measurements

A modulated carrier is almost always used (exception e.g.,.: SSB-AM) for high-frequency transmission
of information. As a result carrier modulation with information, the modulated carrier now occupies a
frequency spectrum which is defined by the modulation, the transmission data rate and the filtering of
the signal. Each carrier is assigned, within a transmission band, to a channel corresponding to these
parameters. In order to make error-free transmission possible, each transmitter must adhere to the
specified transmission parameters. Among others, these are:
• output power,
• occupied bandwidth, i.e., the bandwidth within which a defined percentage of the power must be
contained and
• power output in the neighboring channels.

Using the power measurement function, the FSIQ is capable of measuring all the specified parameters
with high precision and at high speed.

The settings for the power measurements are performed in the left-hand supplementary menu
MARKER NORMAL.

MARKER NORMAL menu:

MARKER The following measurements can be made:

NORMAL
• channel power (CHANNEL POWER)
POWER MEAS
SETTINGS • signal / noise power (C/N)
• signal / noise power density (C/No)
• adjacent channel power (ADJACENT CHAN POWER)
CHANNEL • occupied bandwidth (OCCUPIED PWR BANDWIDTH)
POWER
The channel power and the adjacent channel power can be measured either
CP / ACP
ABS REL relative (CP/ACP REL) to the power in the utilised channel or in absolute terms
(CP/ACP ABS).
SET CP
REFERENCE Channel configuration is via sub menu POWER MEAS SETTINGS.

C / N The above mentioned power measurements can be carried out alternately.

C / No

ADJACENT
CHAN POWER

ADJUST CP
SETTINGS

OCCUPIED
PWR BANDW

1119.5063.12 4.96 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

Channel Configuration
For all power measurements, a specified channel configuration is assumed which is, e.g. oriented on a
specific radio communications system.
The channel configuration is defined by the nominal channel frequency ( = center frequency of the
FSIQ), the channel bandwidth (CHANNEL BANDWIDTH) and the channel spacing (CHANNEL
SPACING).
The channel is indicated on the display screen by vertical lines located at a half-channel bandwidth to
the left and to the right of the channel frequency.
For the adjacent channel power measurement, the adjacent channels are also indicated by vertical
lines. The lines of the utilised channel are labelled with CO for easier recognition.
st nd
Depending on the radio communication service, the power of the 1 alternate channel and/or 2
alternate channel can be measured in addition (softkey SET NO.OF ADJ CHAN’S).
With the ACP STANDARD softkey, the channel configuration can be set automatically according to the
regulations of different digital mobile-radio standards.
For some standards, the channel power has to be evaluated by means of a root-cosine filter
corresponding to the transmit filter. This filter is switched on automatically if the corresponding
standards are selected but can be switched off manually (softkey CH FILTER ON/OFF).

MARKER NORMAL - POWER MEAS SETTINGS submenu:

POWER MEAS The POWER MEAS SETTINGS softkey calls the sub-menu
SETTINGS
SET NO. OF
for the definition of the channel configuration.
POWER MEAS
SETTING ADJ CHAN’S

ACP
STANDARD
CH FILTER
ON OFF

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH

CHANNEL
SPACING

EDIT
ACP LIMITS
LIMIT
CHECK

% POWER
BANDWIDTH

SET NO. OF
ADJ CHAN’S
The SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S softkey activates the input of number ±n
adjacent channels to be considered for adjacent channel power
measurement
The individual powers are indicated separately. Example n=3:
CH0 Pwr -20.00 dBm 1, 2 or 3 adjacent channels are possible. ALT1 and
ACP UP -45.23 dBm
ACP LOW -52.11 dBm
ALT2 (Alternate Channel Power) indicate the channel
ALT1 UP -60.04 dBm power at ± 2 × channel spacing and ± 3 × channel
ALT1 LOW -61.00 dBm spacing from the center of the channel.
ALT2 UP -63.34 dBm
ALT2 LOW -64.00 dBm

1119.5063.12 4.97 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

ACP The ACP STANDARD softkey activates the selection of a digital mobile-radio
STANDARD standard. The parameters for the adjacent channel power measurement are
set according to the regulations of the selected standard.

ACP STANDARD The following standards can be selected:

NONE NADC (IS-54 B)
NADC TETRA
TETRA
PDC (RCR STD-27)
PDC
PHS (RCR STD-28)
PHS
CDPD
CDPD
CDMA800FWD CDMA800FWD
CDMA800REV CDMA800REV
CDMA1900FWD CDMA1900REV
CDMA1900REV CDMA1900FWD
W-CDMA FWD W-CDMA FWD
W-CDMA REV W-CDMA REV
W-CDMA 3GPP FWD W-CDMA 3GPP FWD
W-CDMA 3GPP REV W-CDMA 3GPP REV
CDMA2000 MC CDMA2000 Multi Carrier
CDMA2000 DS CDMA2000 Direct Sequence

If the full dynamic range of the analyzer is to be utilized for the W-CDMA
measurement (for a power measurement in this standard), the RF attenuation
has to be set to 0 dB.
However this is not done automatically to avoid damaging the analyzer input.
Instead, a window displaying the following note is shown if one of the W-
CDMA standards is selected: ’Attention: For higher dynamic range use RF
ATTEN MANUAL=0dB.

The selection of a standard influences the following parameters:

• channel spacing
• channel bandwidth
• modulation filter
• resolution bandwidth
• video bandwidth
• detector
Trace Maths and Trace Averaging are switched off.
The reference level is not influenced by automatic matching. It has to be set
for an optimum dynamic range so that the signal maximum is in the vicinity of
the reference level.
The basic setting ACP STANDARD NONE.

1119.5063.12 4.98 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

CH FILTER The CH FILTER ON/OFF softkey switches a modulation filter for the channel
ON OFF power and adjacent channel power measurement on or off.
When selecting the digital mobile-radio standards NADC and TETRA using
the ADC STANDARD softkey, the softkey is automatically set to ON. When
the other standards are selected, weighting is not selectable and the softkey
is not available.
CH FILTER ON The channel bandwidth is defined by the filter weighting
alone. Therefore, the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey
cannot be operated.
The activated modulation filter influences the channel
and adjacent channel power measurement.
Within the definition range of the filter, the individual
pixels are weighted with the calculated filter attenuation
as a function of the spacing to the channel center. The
weighted display points are then added to the total
channel power.
CH FILTER OFF No modulation filter is switched on.

CHANNEL The CHANNEL BANDWIDTH softkey opens an entry window for setting the
BANDWIDTH channel bandwidth for the transmission channel and the corresponding
adjacent channels.
For all channels, the default setting is 14 kHz.
ACP CHANNEL BW
CHAN BANDWIDTH
CH 14 kHz
ADJ 14 kHz
ALT1 14 kHz
ALT2 14 kHz

Note: If the bandwidth of one channel is changed, the new value is also
assigned to all subsequent channels in the table. The bandwidths
for the individual channels can be set independently, however, by
overwriting the table from the top to the bottom.

CHANNEL The CHANNEL SPACING softkey opens an table for defining the channel
SPACING spacing. The channel spacing is the spacing of the center frequency of a
given channel relative to the center of the transmission channel.
The default setting for channel spacing is 20 kHz.
CHANNEL SPACING
CHAN SPACING
ADJ 20 kHz
ALT1 40 kHz
ALT2 60 kHz

Note: Channel spacings can be selected separately for each channel. If a

spacing value is changed in the table, the following values are
changed automatically.

1119.5063.12 4.99 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

EDIT The EDIT ACP LIMITS opens a table for defining the limits for ACP-
ACP LIMITS measurement.
ACP LIMITS
CHAN CHECK LOWER CHANNEL LIMIT UPPER CHANNEL LIMIT
ADJ -50 dB -50 dB
ALT1 -60 dB -60 dB
ALT2

The limit values are defined either in units of dB (forCP/ACP REL) or in dBm
(for CP/ACP ABS).

Note: Measured values that exceed one of the limits are marked with an
preceding asterisk.

LIMIT The LIMIT CHECK softkey switches on or off the limit check of the ACp
CHECK measurement.

% POWER The % POWER BANDWIDTH softkey opens an entry window for defining the
BANDWIDTH percentage of the power with respect to the total power in the displayed
frequency range. This defines the occupied bandwidth (percent of the total
power).
The permitted range is 10 % - 99,9 %

1119.5063.12 4.100 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

Channel Power Measurement

The CHANNEL POWER measurement is performed by an integration of the measurement points within
the channel bandwidth. The channel is marked by two vertical lines to the left and to the right of the
center frequency as defined by the channel bandwidth (see Fig. 4-5).

Marker [T1] RBW 300 Hz RF ATT 10 dB

Ref Lvl 200.0100 MHz VBW 300 Hz Mixer -30 dBm
-20 dBm -22.4 dBm SWT 100 ms Unit dBm
0
1 1 -24.5 dBm
200.000590 MHz
-10 CH PWR -18.0 dBm
CH BW 30.0 kHz

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100
Center 200 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz

channel width

Fig. 4-5 Determination of the channel width

MARKER NORMAL menu:

CHANNEL The CHANNEL POWER softkey initiates the calculation of the power in the
POWER measurement channel. The display takes place in the units of the y axis, e.g.,
in dBm, dBµV.
The calculation is performed by summing the power at the pixels within the
specified channel.

The measurement is either absolute or relative to a reference power (see the

CP/ACP ABS/ REL softkey).

1119.5063.12 4.101 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

CP/ACP The CP/ACP ABS/REL softkey (Channel Power/Adjacent Channel Power

ABS REL Absolute /Relative) switches between an absolute and relative display of the
power measured in the channel or adjacent channel.
Channel power measurement
CP ABS The absolute value of the power is displayed in the
unit of the Y axis, eg in dBm, dBV.
CP REL The power of a freely selected channel is measured.
This power is set in relation to the power of a
reference channel. The reference channel power is
selected beforehand using the SET CP
REFERENCE softkey, ie:
1. Declare the power in the currently measured
channel as the reference value using the SET CP
REFERENCE softkey.
2. Set the channel of interest by changing the
channel frequency (FSIQ center frequency).
In case of linear scale of the Y axis the relative
power (CP/CPref) of the new channel is displayed
in addition to the reference channel. In case of
dB scale, the logarithmic ratio 20×log (CP/CPref)
is displayed.
Thus, the relative channel power measurement can
also be used for universal adjacent channel power
measurements.
Example:
Measurement of the 1597-QCDMA adjacent channel
power. The useful channel and the adjacent
channels have different bandwidths (1.23 MHz or 30
kHz).

Adjacent channel power measurement

The power of the adjacent channels is measured.
The reference value is the power of the useful
channels (see measurement of the adjacent channel
power). The useful channel is marked by two vertical
lines that are labelled with C0.
ACP ABS The powers of the useful channel and of the
adjacent channels are displayed as absolute values
in the unit of the Y axis.
ACP REL The logarithmic ratio 20×log (CP/CP0) of the powers
of the adjacent channels to the useful channel is
displayed

The softkey is not available for OCCUPIED PWR BANDWIDTH, C/N and
C/N0

.
SET CP For an activated CHANNEL POWER power measurement, the SET CP
REFERENCE REFERENCE softkey sets the reference value to the currently measured
channel power.

1119.5063.12 4.102 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

Signal / Noise Power Measurement

MARKER NORMAL menu:

C / N The C/N (Carrier to Noise) softkey calculates the ratio of carrier power to
noise power and the power of interference signals in the channel defined
under POWER MEAS SETTING. For the measurement, a marker must be
set to the carrier of interest.
The unit of C/N is dB when the display is logarithmic. When the display is
linear, C/N is shown without a unit.

C / N0 The C/N0 softkey starts the C/N0 measurement.

In contrast to the C/N measurement, C/N0 calculates the ratio of carrier
power to noise and interference signals based on a 1 Hz bandwidth in the
channel defined under POWER MEAS SETTING.
The unit of C/No is dB/Hz when the display is logarithmic and 1/Hz when the
display is linear.

Measurement procedure:
1. Activate a marker and position it to the peak of the carrier signal (e.g., with the Marker -> Peak
softkey).
2. Select With the desired frequency range (channel) with the FREQUENCY CENTER and CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH (POWER MEAS SETTING sub-menu) softkeys.
3. Press the C/N or C/N0 softkey. The marker is set to reference fixed and activates each
measurement. It must be observed that the carrier is either located outside of the measurement
channel or turned off at the UUT (Unit Under Test).

4. Press the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey to active the default settings with modified channel
parameters.
The measurement values for C/N or C/No are displayed in the marker info field.

Notes: – If no carrier marker was set, only N or No with the appropriate units is displayed.
– Is the carrier located inside the measurement channel, C/C+N or C/C+N0 will be displayed

1119.5063.12 4.103 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

Example:
The signal-to-noise ratio of the carrier (f = 199.9 MHz) in the channel with +100 kHz separation from 200
MHz (channel center frequency) is to be measured. The channel bandwidth is 150 kHz.
1. Using the CENTER key, set the center frequency to the channel center frequency 200 MHz.
2. Using the SPAN key, set the span, e.g., to 1 MHz (carrier must be visible).
3. Using the MARKER NORMAL key, activate MARKER 1 (If Marker 1 was not yet active, the function
MARKER→ PEAK is automatically executed. In this case, skip step 4.)
4. Using the MARKER→ PEAK key, set MARKER 1 on the carrier (assumption: the 200 MHz carrier has
the highest level in the selected span).
5. Press the MARKER NORMAL key and change to the left-hand supplementary menu.
6. Using the POWER MEAS SETTING softkey, call the sub-menu for defining the measurement channel.
7. Using the CHANNEL BANDWIDTH: softkey, set the bandwidth to 150 kHz (The channel spacing
does not need to be entered for this measurement). Then press ⇑ menu change key.
8. Using the C/N softkey, start the C/N measurement. In the marker info field, the outputs CHANNEL
CENTER, CHANNEL BANDWIDTH as well as the corresponding C/N measurement values appear.
MARKER 1 is also set to reference fixed.
9. Using the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey, activate the default settings with modified channel
parameters (channel bandwidth = 150kHz) for the correct C/N measurement (span = 2 × channel
bandwidth = 300 kHz, RBW = 3 kHz, VBW = 10 kHz, detector: sampling ).
Two vertical lines mark the channel 200 MHz ± 75 kHz in which the noise measurement is performed
(see Fig.4-6). The reference value is the measurement from MARKER 1 (Reference Fixed).

Marker [T1] RBW 3 kHz RF ATT 10 dB

Ref Lvl -24.4 dBm VBW 10 kHz
-20 dBm 199.9020 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm
0
FXD -20.7021 dBm 1 -24.4 dBm
199.90200000 MHz
-10 C/N 65.43 dB
CH BW 150.00000000 kHz

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90
FXD

-100
Center 200 MHz 30 kHz/ Span 300 kHz

CHANNEL
BANDWIDTH
Fig.4-6 Example: measurement of the signal/noise power

1119.5063.12 4.104 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

Adjacent Channel Power

MARKER NORMAL menu:
ADJACENT The ADJACENT CHAN POWER softkey starts the measurement of the
CHAN POWER adjacent channel power.
The ADJACENT CHAN POWER measures the power which the transmitter
delivers to the two adjacent channels (upper channel , lower channel). The
measurement values are displayed according to the setting of the CH/ACD
ABS/REL softkey as absolute values in the scale of the X axis (see Fig.) or as
a logarithmic ratio of adjacent channel to useful channel in dB (20 × log
(CP/CP0).
If the power of the other neighbouring channels is to be measured in addition
to the adjacent channel power, the number of adjacent channels can be
extended (on one side only) using SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S in the submenu
POWER MEAS SETTINGS.
A prerequisite for the correct measurement of the adjacent channel power is the correct setting of the
FSIQ center frequency, the channel bandwidth and the channel spacing.
The CHANNEL SPACING and CHANNEL BANDWIDTH are defined in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS
sub-menu.
For an activated measurement of adjacent channel power, the analyzer itself optimally sets all other
values (span, resolution bandwidth, detector, etc.) after the ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey is pressed.
The carrier power in the utilised channel, the power (absolute or relative to the utilised channel) in the
upper and lower adjacent channels as well as the largest of the two power values and the channel raster
with channel spacing and bandwidth are displayed as the result of the measurement. The C0 lines mark
the bandwidth of the carrier channel. Other unlabelled frequency lines mark the adjacent channels (see
Fig.4-7). With SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S 2 selected, the other two neighbouring channels (1st Alternate
Channels) are displayed as well, with SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S 3 selected, an additional channel each
(2nd Alternate Channels).
The measurement values are updated and displayed until the ADJACENT CHAN POWER softkey is
pressed again and the measurement of the adjacent channel power is stopped.
Marker [T1] RBW 300 Hz RF ATT 10 dB
Ref Lvl -28.4 dBm VBW 300 Hz Mixer -30 dBm
-20 dBm 200.0100 MHz SWT 100 ms Unit dBm
0
C0 C0
1 1 -28.4 dBm
-10 200.0100 MHz
CH0 PWR -18.3 dBm
ACP Max -67.23 dBm
-20 ACP UP -67.23 dBm
ACP LOW -69.45 dBm
CH Space 30 kHz
-30 Ch BW 24 kHz

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100
Center 200 MHz 10 kHz/ Span 100 kHz

Channel BW Channel BW Channel BW

Channel Channel
Spacing Spacing

Lower Transmit Upper

Channel Channel Channel

Fig.4-7 Measurement of the adjacent channel power.

1119.5063.12 4.105 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

If the limit check is activated for ACP measurements, the result of the limit check (PASSED/FAILED) is
displayed as well as an asterisk preceding each measured ACP power that exceeded one of the limits.

Note: The limit check is activated and the limits are defined in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS menu.

Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

An important characteristic of a modulated signal is the bandwidth which it occupies. The occupied
bandwidth must be limited in a radio communications system so that disturbance-free transmission in
adjacent channels is possible. The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which a defined
percentage of the total transmitter power is contained. The percentage of the power can be set between
10 and 99% in the FSIQ.

MARKER NORMAL menu:

OCCUPIED The OCCUPIED PWR BANDW (occupied power bandwidth) softkey starts
PWR BANDW the measurement for determining the occupied bandwidth.
In the spectrum display mode, the bandwidth is determined in which a
predefined percentage of the power in the displayed bandwidth is contained.
(selectable in the POWER MEAS SETTINGS sub-menu with the : % POWER
BANDWIDTH softkey). The occupied bandwidth is output to the marker
display field and marked on the measurement curve with temporary markers.

Measurement principle:
For example, the bandwidth is to be found in which 99% of the signal power is contained. The routine
calculates first the total power of all displayed points (pixels) of the measurement curve. In the next step,
the measurement points from the right edge of the measurement curve are integrated until 0.5% of the
total power is reached. Then the FSIQ integrates, in an analog fashion, from the left edge of the
measurement curve until 0.5% of the power is reached. The delta marker is positioned at this point.
Thus, 99% of the power is located between the two markers. The difference between the two frequency
markers is the occupied bandwidth which is displayed in the marker info field.

A prerequisite for the correct operation of the measurement is that only the signal to be measured is
visible on the display screen of the FSIQ. An additional signal would falsify the measurement.

In order to be able to perform correct power measurements, especially for noisy signals, and thus to
achieve the correct occupied bandwidth, the selection of the following parameters should be observed:

RBW << occupied bandwidth (≤ approx. 1/20 of the occupied bandwidth, for voice
communications, typ. 300 Hz or 1 kHz)
VBW ≥ 3 x RBW
detector sampling
span ≥ 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth

According to the application or other measurement guidelines, it may be necessary or reasonable to

average a definite number of sweeps in order to achieve a usable value for the occupied bandwidth.
This is provided by the TRACE (1....4) key group and the averaging function. With the SWEEP COUNT
softkey, the number of averages is defined.
Some measurement instructions (e.g. PDC, RCR, STD-27B) require the occupied bandwidth to be
measured by means of a peak detector. In this case, the detector of the FSIQ must be corrected
appropriately.

1119.5063.12 4.106 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

Parameters for Channel Power Measurements / Configuration

For the correct measurement of channel power, C/N, C/N0, adjacent channel power and occupied
bandwidth, it is recommended that an automatic optimisation of the analyzer settings be performed after
enabling the corresponding measurement and selecting the channel configuration (channel power
settings).

MARKER NORMAL menu:

ADJUST CP The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey optimises automatically the settings of

SETTINGS the analyzer for the selected power measurement (see below).

Thus, all relevant analyzer settings for a power measurement within a defined
frequency range (channel bandwidth) are optimally set including:
• span
• resolution bandwidth
• video bandwidth
• detector
dependent upon the channel configuration (channel bandwidth and, if
needed, channel spacing).

The trace mathematical functions and trace averaging are switched off.

The reference level is not influenced by the automatic optimisation routine.

The reference level is to be so adjusted that the signal maximum is located
near the reference level.

The optimisation is performed only once, however, if necessary, the

instrument settings may be changed later.

Span The span should cover at least the frequency range that is to be observed. For
measurements of channel power, C/N and C/N0, this is the channel
bandwidth. For adjacent channel power measurements, this is the utilised
channel bandwidth and the adjacent channels located within the channel
spacing.
If the span is large compared to the observed frequency band(s), then only a
few points on the measurement curve are available for the measurement.

The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey sets the span as follows:

2 × channel bandwidth for channel power, C/N, C/No

or
2 × channel spacing + channel width for adjacent channel power
4 × channel bandwidth for adjacent channel power and
NO. OF ADJ CHAN‘ S 2
6 × channel spacing + channel width for adjacent channel power and NO.
OF ADJ CHAN‘ S 3

For measurements of the occupied bandwidth, the span is not influenced.

1119.5063.12 4.107 E-13

Main Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

Resolution bandwidth (RBW)

In order to achieve acceptable speed as well as the necessary selection (to
suppress spectral components outside of the frequency range to be measured
and, especially the adjacent channels), the resolution bandwidth should not be
chosen too broad or too narrow.
If the resolution bandwidth is too narrow, the measurement speed becomes
very slow and it is possible that relative spectral components are not displayed
(due to the sampling detector necessary for power measurements and the
finite number of points).
On the other hand, the resolution bandwidth should not be so broad that, due
to insufficient selection, spectral components outside of the observed
frequency range (from adjacent channel) falsify the measurement results.

The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey sets the resolution bandwidth (RBW)

dependent upon the channel bandwidth as follows:

RBW ≤ 1/40 of the channel bandwidth. The largest possible RBW, with due
regard to the 1, 2, 3, 5 step size and the requirement RBW ≤ 1/40 will be
selected.

The RBW is not influenced by measurements of the occupied bandwidth.

Video bandwidth (VBW) Since a power measurement of the noise components is also necessary
(otherwise, errors occur due to the logarithmic characteristics of the spectrum
analyzer), the video bandwidth should be chosen substantially larger than the
resolution bandwidth.

The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey adjusts the video bandwidth (VBW)

dependent upon the channel bandwidth as follows:

VBW ≥ 3* RBW. The smallest VWB with regard to the available 1, 2, 3, 5 step
size is selected.

Grid scale The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey sets the grid scale to the 100-dB range.
Thereby, a wide dynamic range in channel power measurements is achieved.

Detector The ADJUST CP SETTINGS softkey selects the sampling detector.

The sampling detector is to be selected, above all, for correct power
measurements of noisy signals within the observed frequency range.

1119.5063.12 4.108 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Main Markers

Marker Step Size

DATA VARIATION – STEP menu:

The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a

DATA VARIATION MARKER menu to match the marker step size to each individual
STEP SIZE application. In order to change the step size, the marker entry
HOLD STEP
STEPSIZE mode must already be active.
AUTO
Control is returned to the MARKER NORMAL menu via the
STEPSIZE
MANUAL menu key .

MKR TO
STEPSIZE

DELTA TO
STEPSIZE
.
.
.

STEPSIZE The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the marker step size to AUTO. In this
AUTO case, the step size is exactly 10% of the grid. A one-raster movement of the
roll-key corresponds to one pixel.
STEPSIZE AUTO is the default setting.

STEPSIZE The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey activates the entry window for defining a
MANUAL fixed value for the marker step size.
Pressing the step key shifts the marker position by the selected step size.
The resolution of the roll-key is always one pixel per raster.

MKR TO The MKR TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the current
STEPSIZE marker frequency or marker time.
In the frequency domain, this function is well suited to harmonic
measurements. The marker is set to the largest signal using the peak search
function. After activation of the MKR TO STEPSIZE function, the marker is
set to the corresponding harmonic of the signal each time the cursor key
or is pressed when entering the marker position (see also Chapter 2,
"Measurement Examples").

DELTA TO The DELTA TO STEPSIZE softkey sets the marker step size to the
STEPSIZE difference between the reference marker and the last active delta marker.
The softkey is only available when at least one delta marker is enabled.

1119.5063.12 4.109 E-13

Delta Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

Delta Markers – DELTA Key

The delta markers are used to measure a level or frequency referred to a reference marker. They are
always referenced to the marker whose position was last changed. A delta marker is displayed
as an empty symbol. The reference marker is displayed as a filled symbol.

MARKER DELTA menu:

DELTA The DELTA key switches a delta marker on and calls the
MARKER
menu for its control. If no marker is enabled, MARKER 1 is
MARKER DELTA 1 automatically activated when the delta marker is switched on.
NORMAL SEARCH The delta marker activated to entry mode is shown on the
display screen as a filled symbol.
DELTA 2

DELTA MKR
DELTA 3

DELTA 4

PHASE
NOISE

REFERENCE
POINT

REFERENCE
FIXED

DELTA MKR
ABS REL

ALL DELTA
OFF

DELTA 1
The DELTA 1 to 4 softkeys are used to enable delta markers 1...4. The
control of the delta markers corresponds to that of the markers. After a delta
marker has been enabled, all entries are now applicable to this marker. The
DE A 2 main marker must be activated anew if its position is to be changed.
The delta marker field on the display screen contains the delta marker
DELTA 3 number, the difference frequency from the delta marker to reference marker
and the level difference between the active delta markers and reference
markers.
DELTA 4
The indicated differences are, in general, referred to the reference marker. If
the PHASE NOISE or REFERENCE FIXED functions are enabled, the
reference values under REFERENCE POINT are applicable.

1119.5063.12 4.110 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Delta Markers

DELTA MKR The DELTA ABS REL softkey switches between relative and absolute entry
ABS REL modes for the delta-marker frequency.
In the REL position, the delta marker frequency is entered relative to the
reference marker. In this case, the entry mode for the delta-marker
frequencies is also relative.
In the ABS position, the entry of the delta-marker frequency is in terms of
absolute frequency.
The default setting is REL.

ALL DELTA The ALL DELTA OFF softkey switches off all active delta markers and any
OFF associated functions (e.g. REFERENCE FIXED, PHASE NOISE).

REFERENCE The REFERENCE FIXED softkey enables/disables relative measurements

FIXED with respect to a fixed, measurement-curve-independent reference value.
The information in the delta-marker field on the display screen is referenced
to this fixed reference value. For the generation of the marker lists using
MARKER INFO list, the delta markers are also output relative to a fixed
reference. In the lists, the REFERENCE POINT is tagged by the number of
the reference marker (only one enabled)
When REFERENCE FIXED is enabled, the current settings of the reference
marker become the reference values. If no marker is active, MARKER 1 (with
peak search) is activated. After transferring the reference values, all markers
are deleted, and the active delta marker is set to the position of the reference
value. Additional delta markers can be switched on.
The reference value can be subsequently changed
1. by shifting it in the REFERENCE POINT sub-menu.
2. by starting a search:
In the MARKER NORMAL menu the REF POINT is handled as a reference
marker (even though it is not bound to the measurement curve). This
means, that it will be shown as enabled and can also be changed in
position. The co-ordinates of the REF POINT are overwritten by the marker
values (they lie, by definition, on the measurement curve). Thus, it is
possible, even for an enabled REFERENCE FIXED, to define a new
reference point function with search functions.

The REFERENCE FIXED function is particularly useful for measurements

which are performed relative to a reference signal that is not available during
the whole measurement time (e. g. harmonics measurements, see chapter
"Measurement Example").

1119.5063.12 4.111 E-13

Delta Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

MARKER DELTA- REFERENCE POINT submenu:

REFERENCE The REFERENCE POINT softkey opens a sub-menu in which

POINT
REF POINT
the reference value the REFERENCE FIXED and PHASE
REFERENCE
POINT LEVEL NOISE functions can be modified.
REF POINT The position of the reference value is indicated by two
LVL OFFSET additional display lines (horizontal and vertical). In addition, an
REF POINT
offset level may be defined which is added to each difference
FREQUENCY during output.
REF POINT The softkey is only available when the REFERENCE FIXED or
TIME PHASE NOISE function is switched on.

REF POINT The REF POINT LEVEL softkey activates an entry box for setting the
LEVEL reference level relevant to the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE.
functions.

REF POINT The REF POINT FREQUENCY softkey activates the entry box for the input of
FREQUENCY a reference frequency for the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE NOISE.
functions.

REF POINT The REF POINT LVL OFFSET softkey activates the entry box for the entry of
LVL OFFSET an additional offset level during output when the REFERENCE FIXED or
PHASE NOISE. functions are enabled.
The offset level is set to 0 dB when the REFERENCE FIXED or PHASE
NOISE. functions are switched on.

REF POINT The REF POINT TIME softkey activates the entry box for the input of a
TIME reference time for the REFERENCE FIXED function in the time domain
(span = 0).
The entry of a reference time for the PHASE NOISE function is not possible.

1119.5063.12 4.112 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Delta Markers

Phase Noise Measurement

MARKER DELTA menu:

PHASE The PHASE NOISE softkey switches the PHASE NOISE function on/off.
NOISE
Enabling the PHASE NOISE function causes the frequency and level of the
reference marker to be transferred as reference values, that means, the
REFERENCE FIXED function is activated.

The difference between this reference point and the active delta markers is
determined. The correction factors for bandwidth and the logarithmic
converter are automatically taken into consideration. The sampling detector is
also enabled to allow the effective noise power to be displayed. The
measured values are displayed in the delta marker field in units of dBc/Hz.
If several delta markers are enabled, only the measurement value output of
the active marker is shown in the marker field. Using MARKER INFO and
MARKER LIST the measurement data of all delta markers can be displayed.
If no marker is present when the PHASE NOISE function is enabled,
MARKER 1 is automatically switched on (peak search), and the marker
values are saved as reference values. The reference value can be changed
later in the NORMAL menu, SEARCH menu or REFERENCE POINT sub-
menu (see REFERENCE FIXED softkey).
Turning on an additional marker causes the PHASE NOISE function to be
disabled.

1119.5063.12 4.113 E-13

Delta Markers - Analyzer FSIQ

Delta-Marker Step Size - STEP Key

STEP-DELTA STEP menu:

DATA VARIATION DELTA The STEP key in the DATA VARIATION key group opens a
STEP SIZE menu to match the step size of the individual delta markers
HOLD STEP STEPSIZE
AUTO to the specific application. In order to change the step size,
the entry mode for a delta marker must already be active.
STEPSIZE
MANUAL Control is returned to the DELTA MARKER menu via the
menu key .

DELTA TO
STEPSIZE

.
.
.

STEPSIZE The STEPSIZE AUTO softkey sets the delta marker step size to AUTO. In
AUTO this case, the step size of the delta marker is exactly 10% of the grid. The
roll-key corresponds to 1/500, i.e., for each rotational pulse, the delta
marker is shifted one pixel position.

STEPSIZE The STEPSIZE MANUAL softkey permits the entry of a fixed value for the
MANUAL delta marker step size.
Pressing the step-key shifts the marker position by the selected step size.
The roll-key resolution, however, always remains constant at 1 pixel.

DELTA TO The DELTATO STEPSIZE softkey sets the delta marker step size to a
STEPSIZE quantity equal to the difference between the delta and reference markers.
The softkey is only presented when at least one delta marker is switched
on.

1119.5063.12 4.114 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Search Functions

Search Functions – SEARCH Key

The FSIQ offers numerous functions useful for peak/min. peak searching. The search functions can be
used for marker as well as delta marker functions.
The setups applicable to the available search functions are performed in the MARKER-SEARCH menu.
The search functions are always related to the currently active marker. If the SEARCH key is pressed
while the marker entry mode is active, then all search functions are related to the current reference
marker. If the entry mode of a delta marker is active, then the functions will be applied to the
corresponding delta marker. For the case where no marker is active, MARKER 1 will be automatically
enabled (with peak search). The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey allows toggling between the active
marker and the active delta marker.
If the threshold line is turned on, the peak/min. search functions will only evaluate signals which have a
level above/below the selected threshold. In addition, the search range can also be limited (SEARCH
LIM ON/OFF softkey) by the frequency/time lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1/2, TIME LINE 1/2).
For all peak search functions, the first local oscillator is omitted at 0 Hz if it happens to be displayed.
In the time domain display, the summary markers can be activated and set in addition to the search
functions in menu MARKER-SEARCH.

MARKER SEARCH menu:

MARKER SUMMARY
MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH MARKER MARKER MARKER
SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH
MIN PEAK N DB DOWN

DELTA MKR SHAPE FACT

NEXT MIN NEXT PEAK 60 /3 DB
NEXT MIN NEXT PEAK SHAPE FACT
RIGHT RIGHT 60 /6 DB

NEXT MIN NEXT PEAK

LEFT LEFT
RMS
SUM MKR
ON OFF
MEAN
SUMMARY
MARKER PEAK HOLD
EXCLUDE LO ON OFF
ON OFF AVERAGE
PEAK ON OFF
SEARCH LIM
EXCURSION ON OFF SWEEP
COUNT
SELECT SELECT SELECT
MARKER MARKER MARKER ALL SUM
MKR OFF
ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE
MKR DELTA MKR DELTA MKR DELTA

1119.5063.12 4.115 E-13

Search Functions - Analyzer FSIQ

ACTIVE The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey toggles between the active marker and
MKR DELTA the active delta marker.
If DELTA is illuminated, the following search functions are performed with the
active delta marker.

Note: Switching between marker and delta marker entry modes may
also be performed using the NORMAL and DELTA keys.

SELECT The SELECT MARKER softkey activates the selection of the marker/delta
MARKER markers. The selection box lists the currently enabled markers/delta markers.

MARKER SELECT DELTA SELECT

MARKER 1 DELTA 1
MARKER 3 DELTA 2
MARKER 4 DELTA 3

PEAK The PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the maximum
displayed value on the corresponding trace.

NEXT PEAK The NEXT PEAK softkey sets the active marker/delta marker to the next
lower peak value on the corresponding curve.

NEXT PEAK The NEXT PEAK RIGHT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to
the right of the current marker position.

NEXT PEAK The NEXT PEAK LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next peak to the
RIGHT left of the current marker position.

MIN The MIN softkey sets the active marker to the lowest displayed peak on the
corresponding measurement curve.

1119.5063.12 4.116 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Search Functions

NEXT MIN The NEXT MIN softkey sets the active marker to the next higher of the low
peaks on the corresponding measurement curve.

NEXT MIN The NEXT MIN RIGHT softkey set the active marker to the next low peak to
RIGHT the right of the current marker position.

NEXT MIN The NEXT MIN LEFT softkey sets the active marker to the next low peak to
LEFT the left of the current marker position.

EXCLUDE LO The EXCLUDE LO ON/OFF softkey switches between a restriced (ON) and
ON OFF an unrestricted search range (OFF).
ON Because of non-ideal input mixer, the first LO of any analyzer can be
seen at 0 Hz. The search functions can possibly respond to this LO
level, in particular in the preset setting (FULL SPAN). To avoid this,
the search range is restricted according to the following formula:
Search range ≥ 6 × resolution bandwidth
OFF No restriction to the search range. The search functions find also
signals below the frequency limit quoted above.

PEAK The PEAK EXCURSION softkey activates the entry box which sets the
EXCURSION
minimum amount a signal level must decrease/increase before it is
recognised by the search functions (except PEAK and MIN) as a maximum or
minimum.

Input values from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed with a resolution of 0.1 dB.

The peak excursion is preset to 6 dB. This is completely sufficient for the
functions NEXT PEAK (or NEXT MIN) as always the next smaller (or higher)
signal is searched four.

Functions NEXT PEAK LEFT and NEXT PEAK RIGHT (or NEXT MIN LEFT
and NEXT MIN RIGHT) search for the next relative maximum (or minimum)
independent of the current signal amplitude.
As for wide bandwidths, the set 6-dB level change is already reached by the
noise indication of the analyzer, the noise values are also identified as peak. In
this case, PEAK EXCURSION has to be selected with a higher value than the
difference between the highest and lowest noise indication values.

The following example shows the effect of different PEAK EXCURSION

settings.

1119.5063.12 4.117 E-13

Search Functions - Analyzer FSIQ

Marker [T1]
199.0140 MHz
-22.4 dBm
0
1
1
-10
2
-20 4
3
-30

-40
42dB 46dB
30dB
-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

Fig. 4-8 Example for level measurements at different

peak excursion settings

Maximum relative level change of the measured signals:

Signal 2: 42dB
Signal 3 30dB
Signal 4: 46dB

Setting Peak Excursion 40dB causes signal 2 and 4 to be detected with

NEXT PEAK or NEXT PEAK RIGHT. Signal 3 is not detected since it is only
decreased by 30 dB before the level rises again.

Order of signals found:

PEAK: Signal 1
NEXT PEAK: Signal 2
NEXT PEAK: Signal 4
or
PEAK: Signal 1
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Signal 2
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Signal 4

Setting Peak Excursion 20dB causes signal 3 to be detected since its highest
level change of 30 dB is now higher than the set peak excursion.

1119.5063.12 4.118 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Search Functions

Order of signals found:

PEAK: Signal 1
NEXT PEAK: Signal 2
NEXT PEAK: Signal 4
NEXT PEAK: Signal 3
or
PEAK: Signal 1
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Signal 2
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Signal 3
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Signal 4

Setting Peak Excursion 6dB recognizes all the signals, NEXT PEAK RIGHT
does not work as required.

Order of signals found:

PEAK: Signal 1
NEXT PEAK: Signal 2
NEXT PEAK: Signal 4
NEXT PEAK: Signal 3
or
PEAK: Signal 1
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2
NEXT PEAK RIGHT: Marker in noise between signal 1 and signal 2

SEARCH LIM The SEARCH LIMIT ON/OFF softkey switches between a limited (ON) and
ON OFF unlimited (OFF) search range.
For peak and min. search functions, the search range can also be limited by
the frequency and time lines (FREQUENCY LINE 1, 2/TIME LINE 1, 2). If
SEARCH LIMIT = ON, the appropriate signal level will only be searched for
between the specified frequency/time lines.
The default setting is SEARCH LIMIT = OFF.
When only one line is enabled, frequency/time line 1 is defined as the lower
limit and the upper limit is defined by the stop frequency. If frequency/time
line 2 turned on, then it determines the upper limit.
For the case in which no line is active the search range is unlimited.

N dB DOWN The N dB DOWN softkey automatically activates the temporary markers T1

and T2 which are located n dB below the active reference marker. The
marker T1 is located to the left, the marker T2 is located to the right of the
reference marker. The value n can be entered in an entry window. The
default value is 6 dB.
The frequency difference between the two temporary markers is shown in the
level output field on the display screen.
If, e.g., due to the noise level, it is not possible to find the frequency
difference for the n dB value, a broken line is displayed in the level output
field.
Entry mode is switched to the reference marker for the case in which the
delta maker entry mode is to be active. The position of the reference marker
can be changed in the usual way (numeric input, step-keys, roll-key, peak
search, etc.).
Pressing the N dB DOWN softkey again switches the function off, however,
the entry function for the reference marker remains turned on.

1119.5063.12 4.119 E-13

Search Functions - Analyzer FSIQ

SHAPE FACT The SHAPE FACT 60/3dB.and SHAPE FACT 60/6dB softkeys activate the
60/3 DB automatic measurement of the form factor for the displayed signals.
For this purpose, four temporary markers are used. The markers T1 to T4
indicate, in increasing order, the 3 dB/6 dB positions below the reference
SHAPE FACT marker level.
60/6 DB
In the level output field, the relationship between the two frequency
differences ∆f60dB / ∆f3dB and ∆f60dB / ∆f6dB are displayed
The display of the measurement value takes place in the marker field. When
the level differences cannot be determined, the measurement value is
marked as invalid. The update of the shape-factor display takes place at the
end of sweep.

The entry mode is switched to the reference marker if the delta marker entry
mode is to be active. The position of the reference marker can be changed in
the usual way (numeric input, step-keys, roll-key, peak search, etc.).
The SHAPE FACTOR function is turned off by pressing SHAPE FACTOR
softkey once again, or by enabling another marker.

The SHAPE FACTOR function is available only in the frequency domain.

Summary Marker
The summary markers are available for measurements in the time domain (SPAN = 0).

Unlike the markers and delta markers, the summary markers are not used to mark the pixels of a trace.
They activate a measurement of the rms value (RMS) or of the average value (MEAN) of the whole
trace. The result is displayed in the marker info field.
The measured values are either updated after every sweep or averaged according to a defined number
of sweeps (AVERAGE ON/OFF and SWEEP COUNT). In case of maximum peak evaluation (PEAK
HOLD ON) the measured values are held until the occurrence of the next higher value.

Example:
Marker info field switched on with summary marker: MEAN, AVERAGE ON and PEAK HOLD ON
MEAN HOLD 2.33 Watt
MEAN AV 2.29 Watt

The evaluation range can be limited with the function SEARCH LIMITS ON and the time lines (TIME
LINE1,2), eg when measuring the average power of a sampled signal from the beginning to the end of a
burst.
With the summary marker switched on, the sampling detector is activated (TRACE-DETECTOR-AUTO).

MARKER SEARCH menu

SUM MKR The SUM MKR softkey activates the summary marker
ON OFF
The measurement, rms or average value and the settings for maximum peak
evaluation and averaging is selected in the submenu SUMMARY MARKER.
The softkey is only available in the time domain.

1119.5063.12 4.120 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Search Functions

MARKER SEARCH menu

SUMMARY The SUMMARY MARKER softkey calls up the submenu for

MARKER
selecting the summary marker measurements.
SUMMARY
MARKER The softkey is only available in the time domain.

RMS

MEAN

PEAK HOLD
ON OFF

AVERAGE
ON OFF

SWEEP
COUNT

ALL SUM
MKR OFF

RMS The RMS softkey selects the measurement of the rms value of the signal per
sweep.
In case of maximum peak evaluation the highest rms value since the activation of
PEAK HOLD ON is displayed.
In case of AVERAGE ON the rms values of a trace are averaged and displayed
over several sweeps.
The number of sweeps is set with the SWEEP COUNT softkey. If PEAK HOLD =
ON is active at the same time, the display is held until the occurrence of the next
higher average value.

MEAN
The MEAN softkey selects the measurement of the average value of the signal per
sweep.
Thus, the mean power can be measured, for example during a GSM burst.
In case of maximum peak evaluation, the highest average value since the
activation of PEAK HOLD ON is displayed.
In case of AVERAGE ON, the average values of a trace are averaged and
displayed over several sweeps.
The number of sweeps is set with the SWEEP COUNT softkey. If PEAK HOLD =
ON is active at the same time, the display is held until the occurrence of the next
higher average value.

1119.5063.12 4.121 E-13

Search Functions - Analyzer FSIQ

PEAK HOLD The PEAK HOLD ON/OFF softkey switches the maximum peak evaluation on and
ON OFF off.
For all active summary markers, the displays are updated after each sweep only if
higher values have occurred.
The measured values can be reset by switching the PEAK HOLD ON / OFF
softkey on and off again.

AVERAGE The AVERAGE ON/OFF softkey switches the averaging of the summary markers
ON OFF on and off.
The measured values can be reset by switching the AVERAGE HOLD ON / OFF
softkey on and off again.

SWEEP The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps in the
COUNT SINGLE SWEEP mode.
The permissible range of values is 0 to 32767.
In case of AVERAGE ON:
If an averaging has been selected, SW EEP COUNT also determines the
number of measurements required for averaging.
SWEEP COUNT = 0 10 measured values are required for running
averaging.
SWEEP COUNT = 1 No averaging is carried out.
SWEEP COUNT > 1 An averaging is carried out over the set number of
measured values.
In the CONTINUOUS SWEEP mode averaging is performed until the number
of sweeps set under SWEEP COUNT is attained and then running averaging
is performed.
The maximum peak evaluation is infinite independent of the entry under SWEEP
COUNT.
Note: This setting is equivalent to the settings of the number of sweeps of menus
TRACE and SWEEP-SWEEP.

ALL SUM The ALL SUM MKR OFF softkey switches all the summary markers off.
MKR OFF

1119.5063.12 4.122 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Marker È Menu

Instrument Parameter Changes via Markers – MKR Ð Key

MARKER MKR →menu:

MARKER MARKER-> The MKR → menu offers functions through which instrument
PEAK parameters can be changed with the aid of the currently
NORMAL SEARCH
active marker. Exactly as in the SEARCH menu, these
MKR-> functions can also be applied to the delta markers.
CENTER
DELTA MKR The choice between marker and delta marker is made
MKR-> according to the currently active frequency entry mode for the
REF LEVEL marker/delta marker. If no entry mode is active, the marker
with the lowest number will be activated as the reference
marker.

MKR->CF
STEPSIZE

MKT->
START

MKR->
STOP

MKR->
TRACE

SELECT
MARKER

ACTIVE
MKR DELTA

ACTIVE The ACTIVE MKR /DELTA softkey toggles between the active marker and
MKR DELTA the active delta marker.
If DELTA is illuminated, the following marker functions are carried out with the
active delta marker.
Note: Switching between marker and delta marker can also be done with
the NORMAL and DELTA keys.

PEAK To simplify control, the PEAK search function (see section "Search Functions
- SEARCH Key") is also available in the MRK→ menu. Thus, the most
important functions MARKER→PEAK, MKR→CENTER and MKR→REF
LEVEL can be selected in one menu.

MKR-> The MKR→CENTER softkey sets the center frequency for the current
CENTER marker/delta marker .
The softkey is not available in the time domain.

1119.5063.12 4.123 E-13

MarkerÈ Menu - Analyzer FSIQ

MKR-> The MKR→REF LEVEL softkey sets the reference level to that of the current
REF LEVEL marker.

MKR->CF The MKR→CF STEPSIZE softkey sets the step size for the center frequency
STEPSIZE entry mode to the current marker frequency, and also sets step-size
adaptation to MANUAL. The CF STEP SIZE remains at this value until the
center frequency entry mode in the STEP menu is switched from MANUAL to
AUTO again.
The MKR→CF STEPSIZE function is, above all, helpful in the measurement
of harmonics with large dynamic range (narrow bandwidth and narrow span).
The softkey is not available in the time domain.

MKR-> The MKR→START softkey sets the start frequency to the current marker
START frequency.
The softkey is not available in the time domain.

MKR-> The MKR→STOP softkey sets the stop frequency to the current marker
STOP frequency.
The softkey is not available in the time domain.

MKR-> The MKR→TRACE softkey opens a selection window through which the
TRACE
marker can be set to a new measurement curve. The traces available for
selection appear in the window.

SELECT TRACE
TRACE1
TRACE2
TRACE3
TRACE4

1119.5063.12 4.124 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines

Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field

Display Lines – D LINES Key
Display lines are aids which, similar to markers, make the evaluation of measurement curve data more
convenient. The function of display lines is similar to that of a movable scale which can be used to
measure absolute and differential values on measurement curves.
In addition, the display lines can also be used to limit the range of search for marker functions.

The FSIQ provides four different types of display lines:

• two horizontal threshold lines for setting levels or for defining level search ranges – Display Line 1/2,
• two vertical frequency/time lines for indicating frequencies/times or for determining frequency or time
search ranges – Frequency/Time Line 1/2,
• a threshold line which, for example, sets the search threshold for maximum levels (Peak Search) –
Threshold Line
• a reference line which serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between measurement curves
– Reference Line

For purposes of clarity, each line is annotated on the right side of the display diagram by the following
abbreviations:

D1 Display Line 1 T1 Time Line 1

D2 Display Line 2 T2 Time Line 2
F1 Frequency Line 1 TH Threshold Line
F2 Frequency Line 2 REF Reference Line

The lines for level, threshold and reference are displayed as continuous, horizontal lines over the full
width of the diagram. They are movable in the y-direction.
The lines for frequency and time are displayed as vertical, continuous lines over the total height of the
diagram. They are movable in the x-direction.
For measurement operations in two separate windows, (Split Screen-Modus), the display lines are
available independently in both windows. In the currently active window, the display lines can be
activated and/or shifted. Lines previously defined in the currently inactive window remain unchanged.
The LINES-D LINES menu, used for switching on and setting the display lines, is dedicated to the
chosen display in the active measurement window (span or time). For the display of a spectrum (span ≠
0), the FREQUENCY LINE 1 and FREQUENCY LINE 2 softkeys appear, For the time display (span =
0), the TIME LINE 1 and TIME LINE 2 softkeys are displayed.

1119.5063.12 4.125 E-13

Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer FSIQ

Note: The softkeys for setting and switching the display lines on and off operate similar to a three-
position switch:
Initial condition: The line is switched off (softkey has grey background)
1st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is
activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the roll-
key, the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry
keypad. If some other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is
disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green
background).

2nd press: The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background).

Initial condition: The line is switched on (softkey has green background)

1st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is
activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the roll-
key, the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry
keypad. If any other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is
disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green
background).

2nd press: The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background).

Menu LINES-D-LINES for Span ≠ 0 for Span = 0

DISPLAY DISPLAY
LINES LINES LINES
DISPLAY DISPLAY
D LINES LINE 1 LINE 1

DISPLAY DISPLAY
LINE 2 LINE 2
LIMITS
THRESHOLD THRESHOLD
LINE LINE

REFERENCE REFERENCE
LINE LINE

FREQUENCY TIME
LINE 1 LINE 1

FREQUENCY TIME
LINE 2 LINE 2

BASELINE BASELINE
CLIPPING CLIPPING

1119.5063.12 4.126 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines

DISPLAY The DISPLAY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the display lines on/off and activate
LINE 1 the entry of the line location.
The display lines mark the selected levels in the measurement window.

DISPLAY
LINE 2

THRESHOLD The THRESHOLD LINE softkey switches the threshold line on/off and
LINE activates the entry of the line location.
The threshold line is a display line which defines a threshold value. This
threshold value serves as a lower search limit for maximums/minimums in
the marker functions (MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc.). For signal
tracking (SIGNAL TRACK function), this threshold value defines the lower
search limit (see section "Marker Functions")..

REFERENCE The REFERENCE LINE softkey switches the reference line on/off and
LINE activates the entry of the line position.

The reference line serves as the basis for mathematical correlation between
measurement curve data (see section "Mathematical Operations on
Measurement Curves"

FREQUENCY The FREQUENCY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the frequency lines 1/2 on/off
LINE 1 and activate the entry of the line locations.
The frequency lines mark the selected frequencies in the measurement
window or define search ranges (see section "Marker Functions").
FREQUENCY
LINE 2

TIME The TIME LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the time lines 1/2 on/off and activate the
LINE 1 entry of line locations.
The time lines mark the selected times or define the search range (see
section "Marker Functions").
TIME
LINE 2

1119.5063.12 4.127 E-13

Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer FSIQ

BASELINE The BASELINE CLIPPING softkey switches on or off the BASELINE

CLIPPING CLIPPING function and allows a limit value to be entered.
The BASELINE CLIPPING function is for blanking measured values (for
example noise) which are below a preset threshold.
If the BASELINE CLIPPING function is active and a measured value is below
the preset threshold, the value is set to a lower boundary (-400 dBm).
Measured values above the clipping level are not changed.

Note: It is advisable not to combine the BASELINE CLIPPING function

with the AUTOPEAK detector.
If the set clipping value is within the displayed noise band
(AUTOPEAK detector), activation of the CLIPPING function and
the resulting clipping of the MIN PEAK values will lead to a drastic
enlargement of the displayed noise band.

1119.5063.12 4.128 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines

Limit Lines – LIMITS Key

Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries on the display screen
which are not to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper limits for interference radiation or
spurious waves which are permissible from a Unit Under Test (UUT). For transmission of information in
TDMA (e.g., GSM), the amplitude of the bursts in a time slot must adhere to a curve which must fall
within a specified tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then,
the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations of the upper or
lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
The FSIQ instrument supports up to 300 limit lines, each of which may have a maximum of 50 data
points. For each limit line, the following characteristics must be defined:
• The name of the limit line. The limit line data are stored under this name and can be examined in the
table LIMIT LINES.
• The domain in which the limit line is to be used. Here, a distinction is made between the time domain
(span = 0 Hz) and the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz).
• The reference of the interpolation points to the X-axis. The limit line may be specified either for
absolute frequencies or times or for frequencies which are related to the set center frequency and
times related to the time on the left edge of the diagram.
• The reference of the interpolation points to the Y-axis. The limit line can be selected either for
absolute levels or voltages or referred to the set maximum level (Ref Lvl or Max Lvl). If the reference
line is switched on, it is used as reference when relative setting has been selected.
• The type of limit line (upper or lower limit). With this information and the active limit checking function
(LIMIT CHECK), the FSIQ checks for compliance with each limit.
• The limit line units to be used. The units of the limit line must be compatible with the level axis in the
active measurement window.
• The measurement curve (trace) to which the limit line is assigned. For the FSIQ, this defines the
curve to which the limit is to be applied when several traces are simultaneously displayed.
• For each limit line, a margin can be defined which serves as a threshold for automatic evaluation.
• In addition, commentary can be written for each limit line, e.g., a description of the application.

In the LINES LIMIT menu, the compatible limit lines can be enabled in the LIMIT LINES table. The
SELECTED LIMIT LINE display field provides information concerning the characteristics of the marked
limit lines. New limit lines can be specified and edited in the NEW LIMIT LINE and EDIT LIMIT LINE
sub-menus, respectively.

1119.5063.12 4.129 E-13

Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer FSIQ

LINES LIMIT menu

USER
LINES
LIMIT
LINES
D LINES SELECETED LIMIT LINE SELECT
Name: GSM22UP Limit: LOWER LIMIT LINE
Domain: FREQUENCY X-Axis: LOG
NEW LIMIT
LIMITS Unit: dB X-Scaling: ABSOLUTE
LINE
Comment: Line 1 Y-Scaling: RELATIVE
EDIT LIMIT
LIMIT LINES LINE

COPY
NAME COMPATIBLE LIMIT CHECKTRACE MARGIN
LIMIT LINE
GSM22UP off 1 0 dB
LP1GHz on 1 0 dB
LP1GHz off 1 0 dB
MIL461A off 2 -10 dB
DELETE
LIMIT LINE

X OFFSET

Y OFFSET

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN

Press ENTER to activate / deactivate Limit Line

Limit Line Selection

The SELECTED LIMIT LINES table provides information about the
characteristics of the marked limit line :
Name name
Domain frequency or time
Limit upper/lower limit
X-Axis linear or logarithmic interpolation
X-Scaling absolute or relative frequencies/times
Y-Scaling absolute or relative Y-units
Unit vertical scale
Comment commentary
The characteristics of the limit line are set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE (=NEW
LIMIT LINE) sub-menu.

SELECT The SELECT LIMIT LINE softkey activates the LIMIT LINES table and the
LIMIT LINE selection bar jumps to the uppermost name in the table.
The following informations are offered in the columns of the table:
Name Enable the limit line.
Compatible Indicates if the limit line is compatible with the measurement
window of the given trace.
Limit Check Activate automatic violation check for upper/lower limits.
Trace Select the measurement curve to which the limit is assigned.
Margin Define margin.

1119.5063.12 4.130 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines

Name and Compatible - Enabling limit lines

A maximum of 8 limit lines can be enabled at any one time. A check mark at
the left edge of a cell indicates that this limit line is enabled. A limit line can
only be enabled when it has a check mark in the Compatible column, i.e.,
only when the horizontal display (time or frequency) and vertical scales are
identical to those of the display in the measurement window.
Lines with the unit dB are compatible to all dB(..) settings of the Y-axis.
If the trace assigned to a line is not switched on, the line is displayed in the
window the trace would be displayed in.

Example:
In split screen mode, trace 2 is assigned measuring window B. A line
assigned to trace 2 is always displayed in measurement window B.
If the scale of the y-axis or the domain (frequency or time axis) are changed,
all non-compatible limit lines are automatically switched off in order to avoid
misinterpretation. The limit lines must be enabled anew when the original
display is re-displayed.

Limit Check - Activate automatic limit violation check

When LIMIT CHECK ON is activated, a GO/NOGO test is performed. In the
center of the diagram, a display window appears which indicates the results
of the limit check test:
LIMIT CHECK: PASSED No violations of active limits.

LIMIT CHECK: FAILED One or more active limit lines were violated. The
message contains the names of the limit lines
which were violated or whose margins were not
complied with.

LIMIT CHECK: MARGIN The margin of at least one active limit lines was
not complied with, however, no limit line was
violated. The message contains the names of the
limit lines whose margins were not complied with.

The following example shows three active limit lines:

LIMIT CHECK: FAILED
LINE VHF_MASK: Failed
LINE UHF2MASK: Margin

A check for violations of limit lines takes place only if the limit line of the
assigned measurement curve (trace) is enabled.
If LIM CHECK is set to OFF for all active limit lines, then the limit line check is
not executed and the display window is activated.

Trace - Select the measurement curve to which the limit line is

assigned.
The selection of the measurement curve (trace) takes place in an entry
window. Allowed are the integer entries 1, 2, 3 or 4. The default setting is
trace 1. If the selected limit line is not compatible with the assigned
measurement curve, then the limit line is disabled. (display and limit check).

1119.5063.12 4.131 E-13

Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer FSIQ

Margin - Setting a margin.

The margin is defined as the signal-level distance to the limit line . When the
limit line is defined as an upper limit, the margin means that the level is below
the limit line. When the limit line is defined as a lower limit, the margin means
that the level is above the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e., no
margin).

COPY The COPY LIMIT LINE softkey copies the data file describing the marked
LIMIT LINE limit line and saves it under a new name. In this way, a new limit line can be
easily generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line. The
name can be arbitrarily chosen and input via an entry window (max. of 8
characters).

DELETE Pressing the DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line.
LIMIT LINE Before deletion, a message appears requesting confirmation.

X OFFSET The X OFFSET softkey is used to horizontally shift a limit line which has been
specified for relative frequencies or times (X-axis). The softkey opens an
entry window, where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or via
the roll-key.

Note: When changing the start or stop frequencies, the line on the
display is only retained, if SPAN FIXED is set.

Y OFFSET The Y OFFSET softkey is used to vertically shift a limit line, which has relative
values for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such as volt). The softkey opens
an entry window where the value for shifting may be entered numerically or
via the roll-key.

PAGE UP Pressing the PAGE UP softkey sets the limit line table to the next page.

PAGE DOWN Pressing the PAGE DOWN softkey sets the limit line table to the previous
page.

1119.5063.12 4.132 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines

Entry and Editing of Limit Lines

A limit line is characterized by

• its name
• the assignment of domain (frequency or time)
• the scaling in absolute or relative times or frequencies
• linear or logarithmic interpolation
• the vertical unit
• the vertical scaling
• the definition of the limit line as either upper or lower limit.
• the data points for frequency/time and level

At the time of entry, the FSIQ immediately checks that all limit lines are in accordance with certain
guidelines. These guidelines must be observed if specified operation is to be guaranteed.

• The frequencies/times for each data point must be entered in ascending order, however, for any
single frequency/time, twodata points may be input (vertical segment of a limit line).
The data points are allocated in order of ascending frequency/time. Gaps are not allowed. If gaps are
desired, two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled.
• The entered frequencies/times must not necessarily be selectable in FSIQ. A limit line may also
exceed the specified frequency or time domains. The minimum frequency for a data point is 0 Hz, the
maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For the time domain representation, negative times may also be
entered. The allowable range is -1000 s to +1000 s.
• The minimum/maximum value for a limit line is -200 dB to +200 dB for the logarithmic or 10-20 to
10+20 or-99.9% to + 999.9% for the linear amplitude scales.

1119.5063.12 4.133 E-13

Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer FSIQ

LINES LIMIT-EDIT LIMIT LINE menu

EDIT LIMIT NEW LIMIT The EDIT LIMIT LINE and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT
LINE LINE LIMIT LINE sub-menu used for editing limit lines. In the table heading,
the characteristics of the limit line can be entered. The data points for
frequency/time and level values are entered in the columns.

Name Enter name.

Domain Select domain.
Unit Select units.
X-Axis Selection of interpolation
X-Scaling Entry of absolute or relative values for the X-axis
Y-Scaling Entry of absolute or relative values for the Y-axis
Limit Select upper/lower limit.
Comment Enter comments.
Time/Frequency Enter time/frequency for the data points.
Limit/dBm Enter magnitudes for the data points.

USER
EDIT
EDIT LIMIT LINE TABLE LIMIT LINE
Name: Limit_22 NAME
Domain: FREQUENCY
Unit: dBuV/m
X-Axis: LOG VALUES
X-Scaling: ABSOLUTE
Y-Scaling: ABSOLUTE INSERT
Limit: UPPER VALUE
Comment: Limit 22
DELETE
FREQUENCY LIMIT/dBuV/m 26
VALUE
30.000 MHz 30.0000
SHIFT X
230.000 MHz 30.0000
LIMIT LINE
230.000 MHz 37.0000
1.000 GHz 37.0000 SHIFT Y
LIMIT LINE

SAVE
LIMIT LINE

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN
Press 49
25 ENTER to edit field. 50

1119.5063.12 4.134 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines

NAME The NAME softkey enables the entry of characteristics in the table heading.

Name - Enter name

A maximum of 8 characters are permitted for each name. All names must be
compatible with the MS DOS conventions for file names. The instrument
stores all limit lines with the .LIM extension.

Domain - Select time or frequency domain

A change in domain (frequency/time) is only permitted when the data point
table is empty. The default setting is frequency.

X-Axis - Indication of interpolation

Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the frequency
reference points of the table. Selection is via the ENTER key which is toggled
between LIN and LOG (toggle function).

Scaling - selection of absolute or relative scaling

The limit line can either be scaled in absolute (frequency or time) or relative
units. Any of the unit keys may be used to toggle between ABSOLUTE and
RELATIVE, the cursor must be positioned in the X- Scaling or the Y-Scaling
line
X-Scaling ABSOLUTE The frequencies or times are interpreted as
absolute physical units.
X-Scaling RELATIVE In the data point table, the frequencies are referred
to the currently set center frequency. In time
domain mode, the left boundary of the diagram
constitutes the reference.
Y-Scaling ABSOLUTE The limit values refer to absolute levels or
voltages.
Y-Scaling RELATIVE The limit values refer to the reference level (Ref
Level) or, in case a reference line is set, to the
reference line.
Limit values with the units dB or % are always
relative values.
The RELATIVE scaling is always suitable, if masks for bursts are to be
defined in the time domain, or if masks for modulated signals are required in
the frequency domain.
An X-offset with half the sweep time may be entered in order to shift the
mask in the time domain into the center of screen.

1119.5063.12 4.135 E-13

Display and Limit Lines - Analyzer FSIQ

Unit - Select the vertical scale units for the limit line
The selection of units takes place in a selection box. The default setting is
dBm.

UNITS
VERTICAL SCALE
dB
dBm
%
dBuV
dBmV
dBuA
dBpW
V
A
W
dBuV/MHz
dBmV/MHz
dBuA/MHz

Limit - Select upper/lower limit

A limit line can be defined as either an upper or lower limit.

Comment - Enter comments

Comments are arbitrary, however, they must be less than 40 characters long.

VALUES The VALUES softkey activates the entry of the data points in the table
columns Time/Frequency and Limit/dB. Which table columns appear
depends upon the Domain selection in the table heading.
The desired frequency/time data points are entered in ascending order (two
repeated frequencies/time values are permitted).

INSERT The INSERT VALUE softkey creates an empty line above the current cursor
VALUE position where a new data point may be entered. However, during the entry of
new values, it is necessary to observe an ascending order for frequency/time.

DELETE The DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point (complete line) at the
VALUE cursor position. All succeeding data points are shifted down accordingly.

1119.5063.12 4.136 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Display and Limit Lines

SHIFT X The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
LIMIT LINE limit line may be shifted parallel in the horizontal direction.
The shift takes place according to the horizontal scale:
– in the frequency domain in Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz
– in the time domain in ns, µs, ms or s
In this manner, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an
existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally and stored (SAVE LIMIT
LINE softkey) under a new name (NAME softkey).

SHIFT Y The SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
LIMIT LINE limit line may be shifted parallel in the vertical direction.
The shift takes place according to the vertical scale:
– for logarithmic units, relative, in dB
– for linear units, as a factor
In this manner, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an
existing limit line which has been shifted vertically and stored (SAVE LIMIT
LINE softkey) under a new name (NAME softkey).

SAVE The SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey stores the currently edited limit line . The
LIMIT LINE name can be entered in an input window (max. 8 characters)

PAGE UP Pressing the PAGE UP softkey displays the next page of data points.

PAGE DOWN Pressing the PAGE DOWN softkey displays the previous page of data points.

1119.5063.12 4.137 E-13

Traces - Analyzer FSIQ

Trace Selection and Setup –TRACE Key Group

The FSIQ is capable of displaying up to four separate traces at the same time. A trace consists of a
maximum of 500 pixels on the horizontal axis (frequency or time). If there are more measurement
values than pixels available, then several measurement values are collected together in one pixel.
The traces are selected using keys 1 to 4 of the TRACES key group. When two measurement windows
(SPLIT SCREEN) are displayed, traces 1 and 3 are assigned to the upper (SCREEN A) and traces 2
and 4 are assigned to the lower (SCREEN B) measurement window.
The traces can be individually enabled for a measurement and, after the measurement is completed,
held fixed. Traces which are not enabled remain dark.
For each trace, the type of display is selectable. The traces can be overwritten (CLEAR/WRITE mode)
at each measurement, averaged (AVERAGE mode) over several measurements, or a maximum/
minimum value from several measurements can be determined and displayed.
Individual detectors are selectable for the various traces. The auto-peak detector displays maximum and
minimum values connected by a vertical line. The max-peak detector and min-peak detector display the
maximum value/minimum value of the level within a pixel. The sampling detector displays the
instantaneous value of the level at a pixel. The rms detector displays the power (rms value) of the
measured values within a pixel, the average detector the average value.

Measurement Function Selection - TRACE 1 to 4 key

The trace functions are partitioned as follows:
• type of trace display (CLEAR/WRITE, VIEW and BLANK)
• evaluation of the trace as a whole (AVERAGE, MAX HOLD and MIN HOLD)
• evaluation of the individual pixels of a trace (AUTOPEAK, MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, SAMPLE, RMS
and AVERAGE)
TRACE 1 menu
TRACE 1 TRACE 1
TRACE
CLEAR/ ANALOG TR
WRITE ON OFF
1 2
VIEW

3 4
3 BLANK

TRACE
AVERAGE MATH

MAX HOLD

ASCII
MIN HOLD EXPORT

HOLD CONT ASCII

ON OFF CONFIG

SWEEP
COUNT

DETECTOR

COPY

1119.5063.12 4.138 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Traces

The TRACE keys 1...4 call a menu which presents the options for the selected trace.
In this menu, the method to be used for compressing the measurement data in the frequency or time
domain to the 500 representable points of the display is determined.
At the beginning of the measurement, each trace can be displayed either completely new or based on
previous measurement results.
Traces can be displayed, blanked and copied.
By applying mathematical functions, the traces can also be corrected.
The measurement detector for each of the display types may be chosen either directly or selected
automatically by the FSIQ.
All activated traces are marked with a LED at the corresponding key (here, TRACE 1). The default
setting is TRACE 1 with CLEAR / WRITE selected. The remaining traces 2...4 are switched off
(BLANK). For the split screen display, the selection of the trace automatically selects the corresponding
screen for entry.

The CLEAR/WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD, AVERAGE, VIEW, and BLANK are mutually exclusive
selection switches.

CLEAR/ The CLEAR/WRITE softkey activates the clear/write display mode.

WRITE The trace is displayed without additional trace evaluation. The trace memory
is overwritten by each sweep. If more than one data point falls within a pixel,
the trace is displayed in bar form with the maximum and minimum values in a
pixel connected. In the clear/write display mode, all the available detectors
are selectable. The autopeak detector is selected in the default mode
(detector to AUTO).
After each CLEAR/WRITE softkey action, the FSIQ clears the selected trace
memory and starts the measurement anew.

VIEW The VIEW softkey freezes the current contents of the trace memory and
displays them on the display screen.
If the trace data were formed through MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD or AVERAGE,
the sweep is restarted and the trace contents are cleared, after switching to
these trace modes.
If a trace is frozen by VIEW, the instrument settings can be modified without
modifying the displayed trace. The fact that the trace and the current
instrument setting do not agree anymore is indicated by an enhancement
label "*" at the right edge of the grid. The initial instrument setting can be
restored using the ADJUST TO TRACE softkey in the TRACE MATH sub-
menu.

If LEVEL RANGE or REF LEVEL is changed in the VIEW display mode, the
FSIQ adjusts the measurement data to the changed display range. Thus, an
amplitude zoom can be performed after the measurement so that details of
the trace can be seen better.

BLANK The BLANK softkey removes the trace from the display screen. However, the
trace data remain stored in memory and can be displayed again by VIEW.
The markers for the blanked trace are also erased. If the trace is activated
again (with VIEW, CLEAR / WRITE, MAX HOLD, MIN HOLD, AVERAGE) the
markers will be restored to their original positions.

1119.5063.12 4.139 E-13

Traces - Analyzer FSIQ

AVERAGE The AVERAGE softkey enables the trace averaging function. The average is
taken from several foregoing measurements. The average can be calculated
for each available detector. In case the detector is automatically selected by
the FSIQ , the sampling detector is chosen.

After enabling the averaging mode, the first trace is recorded in

CLEAR/WRITE mode with the selected detector. After the second sweep, the
average is then formed for each succeeding sweep. Here, the average is
formed over the samples/pixels, i.e., according to the LIN or LOG setting,
over amplitudes or levels.
The average always starts anew when one of the AVERAGE softkeys is
pressed. The trace memory is also cleared. This is also the case when the
trace is switched from the setting AVERAGE to VIEW or BLANK

Description of the averaging procedure:

Averaging is carried out using the pixels which are derived from the measurement value samples.
These pixels may in some cases be comprised of several combined measurement values. This means
that the average is formed over linear amplitude values when the level display is linear and over levels
when the level display is logarithmic. Because of this, the trace must be measured anew when changing
between the LIN and LOG display mode. The settings CONT/SINGLE SWEEP and the running average
apply to the average display analogously.

Two calculation procedures are available for averaging. For SWEEP COUNT= 0 , a running average is
calculated according to the following equation:
9 * TRACE + MEAS_ VALUE
TRACE =
10
Because of the distribution of the weighting between the new measurement value and the trace
average, the measurement history has essentially no influence on the displayed trace after around 10
sweeps have taken place. For this setting, the signal noise is effectively reduced without the need for
restarting the averaging process even if the signal is changed.

If, for SWEEP COUNT a value >1 is entered, the averaging takes place over the selected number of
sweeps. In this case, the displayed trace is determined during averaging according to the following
equation:
(n − 1) * TRACE + MEAS_ VALUE
TRACE =
n
where n is the number of the current sweep (n = 2 ... SWEEP COUNT). For the first sweep, an average
is not calculated. The measurement values are stored directly in trace memory. With growing n, the
displayed trace is increasingly smoothed since more individual trace data are available for averaging.
The average trace is stored in trace memory after the defined number of sweeps. Until this number of
sweeps is reached, a preliminary average is displayed.
After completion of averaging, ie if the averaging length defined with SWEEP COUNT is attained, a
running averaging is continued with CONTINUOUS SWEEP according to the following formula:
(N − 1) ⋅ Traceold + meas. value , where Trace = new trace
Trace = Traceold = old trace
N
N = SWEEP COUNT
The display "Sweep 200 of 200" then remains constant until a new start is made.

1119.5063.12 4.140 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Traces

In SINGLE SWEEP mode, SWEEP START initiates n single sweeps. The sweeps are stopped as soon
as the selected number of sweeps is reached. The number of the current sweep and the total number of
sweeps are shown in the display: "Sweep 3 of 200".

SWEEP The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps,
COUNT over which an average is to be calculated.
The permitted range for SWEEP COUNT is 0 through 32767. For 0, the FSIQ
performs a running average over 10 sweeps. For 1, no averaging takes
place.

The default setting is 10 sweeps. The programming naturally influences the

sweep duration. The number of sweeps which are used in the averaging
process or the averaging time are valid for all 4 traces.

Note : The setting of the SWEEP COUNT in the trace menu is equivalent
to the setting in the sweep menu.

MAX HOLD The MAX HOLD softkey activates the max hold mode.
In this display mode, the FSIQ saves for each sweep the largest of the
previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. The
detector is set automatically to MAX PEAK. In this way, the maximum value
of a signal can be determined over several sweeps.

This is especially useful in the measurement of modulated or pulsed signals.

The signal spectrum is filled at each sweep until all signal components have
been captured.

By pressing of the MAX HOLD softkey again, the trace memory is cleared
and the maximum value accumulation begins anew.

If MAX HOLD is enabled, a new start is made after clearing the trace memory
for each frequency change, (start frequency, stop frequency, center
frequency or frequency span), a reference level change or switching between
linear/logarithmic scales.

MIN HOLD The MIN HOLD softkey activates the min hold mode.
In this display mode, the FSIQ saves for each sweep the smallest of the
previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. The
detector is set automatically to MIN PEAK. In this way, the minimum value of
a signal can be determined over several sweeps. This function is, e.g., useful
in making an unmodulated carrier in a mix of signals visible. Noise,
interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed by the MIN HOLD
function while a CW signal maintains a constant level.

Pressing the MIN HOLD softkey clears the trace memory and the minimum
value function starts anew.

1119.5063.12 4.141 E-13

Traces - Analyzer FSIQ

HOLD CONT The HOLD CONT softkey defines whether the traces in the average mode
ON OFF and min hold/max hold mode are reset after some definite parameter
changes.
OFF The traces are reset after some definite parameter changes.
ON This mechanism is switched off.

In general, parameter changes require a restart of the measurement before

results are evaluated (e. g. with markers). For those changes that are known
to require a new measurement (e. g. modification of the span), the trace is
automatically reset so that erroneous evaluations of previous results are
avoided.
This mechanism can be switched off for those exceptional cases where the
described behavior is unwelcome.

COPY.. The COPY softkey copies the contents of the display screen for the current
trace to another trace memory. A table appears in which the desired copy
procedure can be selected.

COPY TRACE 1 TO
TRACE 2
TRACE 3
TRACE 4

For only one window, the selected trace can be copied to any of the other
trace memories since here, all four traces are displayed in one diagram with
the same frequency boundaries.
In the split screen display, this is only possible as long as the frequencies of
screen A and screen B are identical. If this is not the case, the selected trace
can only be copied to the corresponding trace memory, i.e., trace 1 to trace 3
and trace 2 to trace 4 or vice versa. In this case, only the available trace is
displayed.
After copying, the contents of the destination memory are lost. The
destination memory now changes automatically to view mode with the new
data.

1119.5063.12 4.142 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Traces

Detector Selection
The FSIQ detectors are realised by pure digital techniques . The detectors available are the max-peak
detector which delivers the maximum value from a number of sample values, the min-peak detector
which delivers the minimum value from a number of sample values and the sampling detector. The
sampling detector can transfer the sampled data without modification or can perform a data reduction by
suppressing non-displayable values. For the peak detectors, the current value is compared with the
maximum/minimum levels of the previously sampled data. When the number of samples defined by the
instrument settings is reached, the samples are collected into the available pixels. Thus, each of the 500
pixels of the display represents 1/500 of the sweep range and contains, in compressed form, all of the
individual measurements (frequency samples) in this sub-range. Even though the recording rate is high,
there are no recording gaps thanks to the internal pipeline structure. According to the trace display
mode, an optimised detector is automatically applied. Since the peak detectors and the sample detector
are connected in parallel, a single sweep is sufficient for recording and displaying four traces with four
detectors.

Peak value detectors Peak value detectors are implemented by digital comparators,
(MAX PEAK / MIN PEAK) which determine the largest of all positive (max peak) or the
smallest of all negative (min peak) peak values of the levels
measured at the different frequencies which are displayed in one
of the 500 pixels. This is repeated for each pixel so that, for wide
frequency spans and inspite of the limited display resolution, a
large number of measurements can be taken into consideration
for the display of the spectrum.

AUTOPEAK detector The AUTOPEAK detector combines the two peak detectors. The
max-peak detector and min-peak detector determine the
maximum and minimum level at a displayed test point at the
same time and display it as a common measurement value. The
maximum and minimum level at a frequency point are joined with
a vertical line.

SAMPLE detector The SAMPLE detector transfers all sampled data without further
evaluation and either displays them directly or, for reasons of
speed (short sweep times), first writes them into a memory and
subsequently processes them.
Data reduction, i.e., summing of measurement values of
neighbouring frequencies or time samples is not performed here.
If, during a sweep, more measurement values are generated
than can be displayed, measurement values will be lost. Discrete
signals can thus be lost
Therefore, the sampling detector can only be recommended for a
ratio of span-to-resolution bandwidth of up to approximately 250.
Iit is thereby guaranteed that no signal will be suppressed
(example: span 1 MHz --> min. bandwidth 5 kHz).

1119.5063.12 4.143 E-13

Traces - Analyzer FSIQ

RMS detector The rms detector forms the rms value of the measured values
within a pixel.
To this effect FSIQ uses the linear display voltage after the
envelope detection. The linear values are squared, summed and
the sum is divided through the number of samples (= root mean
square). In case of logarithmic display, the logarithm is then
formed from the square sum. In case of linear display the root
mean square is displayed directly. Each pixel thus corresponds
to the power of the measured values summed up in the pixel.
The rms detector supplies the power of the signal independent
of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or
pulse signal). The correction factors required by other detectors
for the power measurement of the different signal classes are
omitted.

Average detector The average detector forms the average value of measured
values within a pixel.
To this effect, FSIQ uses the linear display voltage after the
envelope detection. The linear sample values are summed up
and the sum is divided by the number of measurement samples
(= linear average value). In case of logarithmic display, the
logarithm is then formed from the average value. In case of
linear display the average value is displayed directly. Each pixel
thus corresponds to the average value of the measured values
summed up in the pixel.
The average detector supplies the average value of the signal
independent of the waveform (CW carrier, modulated carrier,
white noise or pulse signal).

Note: During a sweep, the FSIQ switches the first oscillator in steps which are smaller than
approximately 1/10 of the bandwidth. This guarantees that the level of a signal is correctly
measured. For narrow bandwidths and wide spans, a very large number of measurement values
are generated. The number of frequency steps is, however, always a multiple of 500 (= number
of displayable points). In the sampling mode, only every nth value is displayed. The quantity n
depends upon the number of measurement values, i.e on the span, resolution bandwidth and
the measurement rate.

1119.5063.12 4.144 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Traces

TRACE 1-DETECTOR submenu

TRACE 1 The DETECTOR softkey opens a submenu to select the
DETECTOR
detector.
AUTO
DETECTOR SELECT
The detector type may be independently selected for each
DETECTOR trace. Mode AUTO SELECT sets the best suitable detector
AUTO PEAK for the type of trace display (Clear Write, Max Hold oder Min
Hold).
DETECTOR
MAX PEAK
The softkeys are mutually exclusive selection switches.
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK

DETECTOR
SAMPLE

DETECTOR
RMS

DETECTOR
AVERAGE

CAPT MEM
ON OFF

AUTO The AUTO SELECT softkey (= default) selects the optimum detector
SELECT dependent upon the trace mode (clear write, max hold, min hold).
Trace-mode Detector
Clear/Write Autopeak
Average Sample
Max Hold Max Peak
Min Hold Min Peak

DETECTOR The DETECTOR AUTOPEAK softkey selects the autopeak detector.

AUTOPEAK

DETECTOR The DETECTOR MAX PEAK softkey selects the max peak detector. It is
MAX PEAK recommended if pulse-shaped signals are to be measured.

The DETECTOR MIN PEAK softkey selects the min peak detector. Weak
DETECTOR
MIN PEAK sinewave signals become clearly visible in noise by using this detector. For a
composite signal made up of sinewave and pulse signals the pulse signals
are suppressed.

1119.5063.12 4.145 E-13

Traces - Analyzer FSIQ

DETECTOR The DETECTOR SAMPLE softkey selects the sample detector.

SAMPLE
It is used if uncorrelated signals like noise are to be measured. The power
can be determined by means of fixed correction factors for evaluation and the
log amplifier.

DETECTOR The DETECTOR RMS softkey activates the rms detector.

RMS
The rms detector supplies the power of the signal independent of the
waveform. To this effect the root mean square of all sampled level values is
formed during the sweep of a pixel. The sweep time thus determines the
number of averaged values so that the trace can be better averaged with
increasing sweep time. The rms detector is thus an alternative for averaging
over several sweeps (see TRACE AVERAGE).
In the time domain (SPAN = 0), the rms detector is only available for sweep
times ≥ 5 ms. Moreover, the combination of the rms detector with the
pretrigger function and the gaped sweep function is not permissible.
The video bandwidth has to be set to at least 10 times the resolution
bandwidth (RBW) so that the rms value of the signal is not invalidated by
video filtering.

DETECTOR The DETECTOR AVERAGE softkey activates the average detector.

AVERAGE
In contrast to the rms detector, the average detector supplies the linear
average of all sampled level values during the sweep of a pixel.
The same restrictions as those of the rms detector apply (see above).

Quasi Analog Display

Normally, measurement points are displayed interconnected by a continuous line. The leads to a
continuous curve which is erased and rewritten for each new sweep. However, in the domain of analog
measurement technology, display screen persistence leads to statistical emphasis which is related to
the relative frequency of occurrence of a signal. Thus, on the display screen, frequently occurring events
appear much brighter than rarely occurring curve segments.
Using the ANALOG TRACE function, the characteristics of an analog display are simulated. In this case,
a measurement value is displayed as a single pixel on the display screen. This pixel is reset only by
explicitly clearing the trace with CLEAR / WRITE. The overwriting of several sweeps is now possible and
a frequency-of-occurrence distribution of the measurement values can be observed.

TRACE 1 side menu

The ANALOG TR ON/OFF softkey enables/disables the
ANALOG TR ANALOG TRACE function for each trace.
ON OFF
The measurement is always made with the selected detector.

1119.5063.12 4.146 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Traces

Mathematical Functions for Traces

TRACE 1-TRACE MATH submenu:

TRACE MATH The TRACE MATH softkey opens a sub-menu in which a

TRACE T1-T2+REF differential curve for the selected trace is calculated.
MATH -> T1

T1-T3+REF
-> T1

T1-T4+REF
-> T1

T1-REF
->T1

ADJUST TO
TRACE

TRACE MATH
OFF

TRACE MATH The T1-T2+REF, T1-T3+REF, T1-T3+REF and T1-REF softkeys subtract the
T1-T2+REF corresponding traces and add the set level to the difference. If the reference
-> T1 line is switched on (see key D LINES), the level value of the reference line
T1-T3+REF instead of the reference level is added to the difference. Thus, the differential
-> T1 curve can be positioned anywhere on the screen by shifting the reference
line. The difference of the two traces with respect to the reference line is
T1-T4+REF displayed.
-> T1
The T1-REF softkey subtracts the level of the reference line from the trace
T1-REF level.
->T1
To indicate that the trace has been obtained by a differential curve, a
corresponding enhancement label is displayed at the right margin of the
measurement value diagram (1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-R). In TRACE 1 main menu, the
TRACE MATH softkey is on a coloured background to show that the function
is being used.

Important: For a display with two measurement windows, not all

combinations are allowed if the sweep data for screen A and
screen B are not the same. Only the traces allowed in the screen
can be combined (in screen A, only trace 1 with trace 3; in
screen B, only trace 2 with trace 4).

1119.5063.12 4.147 E-13

Traces - Analyzer FSIQ

TRACE MATH The TRACE MATH OFF softkey switches the enabled differential curve off.
OFF The softkey is only available when a conversion function is enabled.

ADJUST TO The ADJUST TO TRACE softkey restores the original instrument settings
TRACE when the corresponding trace is set to VIEW and the current instrument
settings are different than those of the trace data.
If a trace is frozen with VIEW, changes in the instrument settings can be
made without influencing the trace. An asterisk( * ) at the edge of the display
screen indicates that the current instrument settings are different than those
in effect when the trace was recorded. In this case, the ADJUST TO TRACE
softkey is presented with which the original instrument setting can be
restored.

Trace Export
TRACE menu:

ASCII In analyzer mode, the ASCII EXPORT softkey stores the corresponding trace in a
EXPORT file with ASCII format.
Upon pressing the ASCII EXPORT softkey, a file name can be entered. The
default name is TRACE.DAT. Then the measured data of the trace are stored.
The function can be configured in the ASCII CONFIG submenu.

TRACE menu:
ASCII The ASCII CONFIG softkey calls a submenu for various settings for
CONFIG
ASCII EDIT PATH
the TRACE ASCII EXPORT function.
CONFIG
DECIM SEP
. ,

NEW
APPEND

HEADER
ON OFF

1119.5063.12 4.148 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Traces

EDIT PATH The EDIT PATH softkey defines the directory in which the file is to be
stored.

DECIM SEP The DECIM SEP softkey selects the separator for the ASCII file:
. , ’.’ (decimal point) or ’,’ (comma).
Different language versions of analysis programs may require different
notations of the decimal point. .

NEW The APPEND NEW softkey defines whether output data are to be
APPEND written to an existing file or a new file.
• With APPEND, the data are added to an existing file.
• With NEW, either a new file is generated or an existing file is
overwritten by storage of the data.

EDIT The HEADER ON/OFF softkey defines whether important instrument

ON OFF settings should be stored at the beginning of the file.

Structure of the ASCII file:

The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing
the trace data.

The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit

The data section starts with the keyword " Trace <n> " (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the
measured data in one or several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a
semicolon.
This format can be read in from spreadsheet calculation programs, eg MS-Excel. It is necessary to
define ’;’ as a separator.

1119.5063.12 4.149 E-13

Traces - Analyzer FSIQ

Content of file Description

File header Type;FSEA30; Instrument model
Version;1.91; Firmware version
Date;01.Jul 1999; Date of data set storage
Mode;Spectrum; Instrument mode
Start;10000;Hz Start/stop of the display range.
Stop;100000;Hz Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0,
Center Freq;55000;Hz Center frequency
Span;90000;Hz Frequency range (0 Hz with zero span)
Freq Offset;0;Hz Frequency offset
x-Axis;LIN; Scaling of x axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
y-Axis;LOG; Scaling of y axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)
Ref.Level;-30;dBm Reference level
Level Offset;0;dB Level offset
Max Level Maximium level
Level Range;100;dB Display range in y direction. Unit: dB with x axis LOG, %
with x axis LIN
RF Att;20;dB
Input attenuation
RBW;100000;Hz
Resolution bandwidth
VBW;30000;Hz
Video bandwidth
SWT;0.005;s
Sweep time
Trace Mode;AVERAGE;
Display mode of trace:
CLR/WRITE,AVERAGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD
Detector;SAMPLE;
Detector set:
AUTOPEAK,MAXPEAK,MINPEAK,AVERAGE,
RMS,SAMPLE
Sweep Count;20;
Number of sweeps set

Data section of the file Trace 1:;; Selected trace

x-Unit;Hz; Unit of x values:
Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0;
dBm/dB with statistics measurements
y-Unit;dBm; Unit of y values:
dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit with y axis
LOG or % with y axis LIN

Values;500; Number of test points

Measured values:
10000;-10.3;-15.7 <x value>, <y1>, <y2>
10180;-11.5;-16.9 <y2> being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and
10360;-12.0;-17.4 containing in this case the smallest of the two measured
...;...; values for a test point.

1119.5063.12 4.150 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Traces

Example:
Type;FSIQ13;
Version;1.91;
Date;20.Sep 1999;
Mode;Spectrum;
Start;0.000000;Hz
Stop;3500000000.000000;Hz
Center Freq;1750000000.000000;Hz
Span;3500000000.000000;Hz
Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz
x-Axis;LIN;
y-Axis;LOG;
Level Range;100.000000;dB
Ref. Level;-20.000000;dBm
Level Offset;0.000000;dBm
Max. Level;-20.000000;dBm
RF Att;10.000000;dB
RBW;3000000.000000;Hz
VBW;3000000.000000;Hz
SWT;0.005000;s
Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;
Detector;AUTOPEAK;
Sweep Count;0;
TRACE 1:
x-Unit;Hz;
y-Unit;dBm;
Values;500;
0.000000;-44.465958;-60.190887
7014028.056112;-49.233063;-81.451668
14028056.112224;-75.692101;-101.811501
21042084.168337;-75.147057;-101.229843
28056112.224449;-75.114517;-95.358429
35070140.280561;-71.769005;-100.755981
...

If all traces are to be stored in one file with the header information stored only once, the following
procedure is recommended:

[TRACE 1] [MENU ⇒][ASCII CONFIG]

[ASCII CONFIG] [NEW] Generate new file
[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER ON] with header
[TRACE 1] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT] Store trace 1 with header

[TRACE 2] [MENU ⇒][ASCII CONFIG]

[ASCII CONFIG] [APPEND] Append to end of file
[ASCII CONFIG] [HEADER OFF] without header
[TRACE 2] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT] Write trace 2 to file
[TRACE 3] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT] Write trace 3 to file
[TRACE 4] [MENU ⇒][ASCII EXPORT] Write trace 4 to file

1119.5063.12 4.151 E-13

Coupled Settings - Analyzer FSIQ

Sweep Control – SWEEP Key Group

Using the SWEEP key group, the parameters are entered which determine the sweep characteristics.
These are the coupled functions resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth and sweep time (COUPLING
key), the trigger used for starting the sweep (TRIGGER key) and the type of sweep (SWEEP key).

Coupled Settings – COUPLING Key

The COUPLING key calls a menu for entering the sweep parameters resolution bandwidth (RBW),
video bandwidth (VBW) and sweep time (SWT). The parameters can be set dependent upon the span
(stop - start frequency), coupled to each other or arbitrarily defined by the user. The settings for the split
screen display mode are valid only for the window which is active for entries.

The FSIQ offers the resolution bandwidths 1 Hz to 10 MHz in 1, 2, 3, 5steps:

The FSIQ resolution bandwidths up to 1 kHz have been implemented using digital filters with Gaussian
characteristics. They behave like analog filters. The 1-kHz filter has been implemented both as a
decoupled quartz filter and as a digital filter. One of the two filter types can be selected. The bandwidths
from 2 kHz to 30 kHz have been implemented using decoupled quartz filters, the bandwidths between
50 kHz and 5 MHz using decoupled LC filters. These filters consist of 5 circuits, their shape factor is <
12, typ. 9.5.
The 10-MHz filter is a critically coupled LC filter.
For bandwidths up to about 1 kHz, the FFT-algorithm, as compared to other filter methods with identical
settings, offers clear advantages with respect to the measurement time. This is due to the fact that for
2
analog filters the time required for a given display range is proportional to (Span/RBW ). The FFT-
algorithm reduces that time to a value proportional to (Span/RBW).
FFT-filters are provided for bandwiths between 1 Hz and 1kHz as an alternative to the analog filters.
The video bandwidths are available in 1/2/3/5 steps between 1 Hz and 10 MHz. They can be set
independent of the resolution bandwidth. Video bandwidths between 1 Hz and 10 kHz are available for
resolution bandwidths up to 1 kHz and video bandwidths between 1 Hz and 10 MHz are available for
resolution bandwidths greater than or equal to 2 kHz. The video filters are used to smooth the traces.
Small video bandwidths in relation to the resolution bandwidth average out noise peaks pulse-like
signals such that only the average value of the signals is displayed. A large video bandwidth in relation
to the resolution bandwidth is therefore recommended when measuring pulsed signals (VBW ≥ 10 x
RBW) so that the amplitude of pulses can be measured correctly.

1119.5063.12 4.152 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Coupled Settings

Setting and Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep
Time
SWEEP COUPLING menu

COUPLED COUPLED The COUPLING key calls a menu and a

SWEEP FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS
supplementary menu for setting the resolution
RES BW RBW 1 KHZ
TRIGGER MANUAL ANA DIG bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep time and their
couplings.
RES BW RBW<=1 KHZ
AUTO NORM FFT The various AUTO softkeys are used to couple
SWEEP the functions. The coupling ratios are selected in
the COUPLING RATIO sub-menu.

RBW VIDEO BW The various MANUAL softkeys request that the

VBW
MANUAL respective parameter be entered in the entry
VIDEO BW window. This parameter is not coupled to the
SWT
AUTO other parameters.
COUPLING
SWEEP TIME
MANUAL

SWEEP TIME
AUTO

COUPLING
DEFAULT

COUPLING MAIN PLL

RATIO BANDWIDTH

RES BW The RES BW AUTO softkey couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected
AUTO span. Changing the span causes automatic compensation of the resolution
bandwidth.
Automatic coupling of resolution bandwidth to span is always recommended
when, for the measurement problem on hand, a favorable setting of the
resolution bandwidth in relation to the selected span is desired.
The coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO sub-menu.
The coupling is indicated by illumination of the softkey and the active RBW
LED.
The RES BW AUTO softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span
> 0 Hz). The softkey is blanked in the time domain.

RES BW The RES BW MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry mode for the
MANUAL resolution bandwidth.
The lower limit of the bandwidth is 1 Hz.
For numerical inputs, the values are always rounded to the next valid
bandwidth. For roll-key or the UP/DOWN key inputs, the bandwidth is
adjusted in steps either upwards or downwards.
For manual input of the resolution bandwidth (coupling off), on the front panel
remains off.

1119.5063.12 4.153 E-13

Coupled Settings - Analyzer FSIQ

VIDEO BW The VIDEO BW AUTO softkey couples the video bandwidth of the FSIQ to
AUTO the resolution bandwidth. If the resolution bandwidth is changed, the video
bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
The coupling of the video bandwidth is always recommended when the
maximum sweep time for a selected resolution bandwidth is to be achieved.
Lower video bandwidths require longer sweep times due to the longer settling
time. Wider bandwidths reduce the signal/noise ratio.
The coupling ratio is set in the COUPLING RATIO menu.
The coupling is indicated by illumination of the softkey and the lighted VBW
LED on the front panel.
The coupling of the video bandwidth to the resolution filter is also permitted
for display in the time domain (span = 0).

VIDEO BW The VIDEO BW MANUAL softkey activates the manual input mode for the
MANUAL video bandwidth.
The video bandwidth is selectable in 1/2/3/5 steps between 1 Hz and 10 MHz.
For bandwidths up to 1 kHz, the maximum video bandwidth is 10 kHz, for
larger resolution bandwidths, there is no restriction to the video bandwidth.
For numerical inputs, rounding is made to the next possible bandwidth. For
roll-key or UP/DOWN entries, the bandwidth is switched in steps either
downwards or upwards.
For manual input, the video bandwidth (coupling disabled) VBW LED on the
front panel is turned off.

SWEEP TIME The SWEEP TIME AUTO softkey couples the sweep time to the span, video
AUTO bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW). For a change in span,
the resolution bandwidth or the video bandwidth is automatically matched to
the sweep time. The FSIQ always selects the fastest sweep time which is
possible without falsifying the level display.
The coupling is indicated by illumination of the softkey and turning on the
SWT LED.
The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz). The
softkey is blanked in the time domain.

1119.5063.12 4.154 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Coupled Settings

SWEEP TIME The SWEEP TIME MANUAL softkey activates the manual input mode for the
MANUAL sweep time. At the same time, the coupling of the sweep is canceled and the
SWT LED is turned off. Other couplings (VIDEO BW, RES BW) remain in
effect.
In the frequency domain (span > 0 Hz) and for resolution bandwidths ≥ 1 kHz,
the allowed sweep times range from 5 ms through 16000 s in steps of 5% of
the sweep time at maximum. The digital resolution filters from 10 Hz to 1 kHz
allow a minimum sweep time of 20 ms.
If an FFT-filter is used the sweep time is fixed by the display range and
resolution bandwidth selected and therefore can not be set.
For displays in the time domain (span = 0 Hz), the range of sweep times 1 µs
to 2500 s is selectable in steps of 5% of the sweep time at maximum.
For numerical inputs, rounding is made to the next possible sweep time. For
roll-key or UP/DOWN entries, the sweep time is switched in steps either
downwards or upwards.
If the selected sweep time is too small for the selected span and bandwidth,
measurement errors will occur. This happens because the available settling
time for the resolution filter or the video filter is too short. In this case, the
FSIQ outputs UNCAL on the display

COUPLING The COUPLING DEFAULT softkey sets all coupled functions to AUTO. In
DEFAULT addition, the ratio RBW / VBW is set to SINE [1] and the ratio SPAN/RBW is
set to 50 in the COUPLING RATIO submenu (default setting, COUPLING
RATIO softkey not illuminated).

The relevant softkeys are then illuminated.

RBW 1KHZ The RBW 1kHz ANA/DIG softkey enables either the analog quartz filter
ANA DIG (ANA) or the digital filter (DIG) for the instruments's resolution bandwidth of 1
kHz. In the default setting, the instrument uses the analog IF filter for the 1-
kHz bandwidth.

1119.5063.12 4.155 E-13

Coupled Settings - Analyzer FSIQ

RBW <=1KHZ The RBW<=1kHz NORM/FFT softkey switches between fixed filter and FFT-
NORM FFT filter.
NORM For resolution bandwidths up to 1 kHz fixed IF-filters are used.
FFT An FFT is performed. To this end, the filtered IF-signal is
digitalized by the 3-kHz resolution filters and then transformed
into the spectral domain via FFT. The transformation range is
equal to the selected display range but covers 4 kHz at
maximum. If the display range is larger than the transformation
range, serveral subsequent transformations are performed, the
results are appended to each other in the spectral domain. This
compensates for the frequency response of the 3-kHz
preselection filter so that the amplitude response within the
transformation range is offset. A flattop window seves as a
window in the time domain so that a high amplitude precision
with good selection is achieved.

Span:
- minimum display range: 50× resolution bandwidth selected
- maximum display range:
Resolution bwidths > 20 Hz: 2 MHz (500 FFT-transf./sweep
at maximum)
Resolution bwidths < 20Hz: Reduction to 125 kHz
at 1 Hz resolution bandwidth
Level display range: 100 dB at max. A larger display range
implies that the trace is tilted at –100 dB
from the reference level.
Sweep time: fixed by the bandwidth selected and the
display range.
(Reason: an FFT-filter represents a block
transformation). The sweep time can not
be changed (softkey inactive).
Detector All settings of the sample detector are
fixed, no other detector can be selected
(softkeys inactive)
Video bandwidth not defined for FFT-transf. so that it can
not be set (softkeys inactive).
Compared to fixed filters, FFT-filters lead to markedly reduced
sweep times. For a display range of 50 kHz and a resolution
bandwith of 100 Hz, e. g., the sweep time is reduced from 25 s to
520 ms. FFT-filters are particularly suitable for stationary signals
(sinusoidal signals or signals that are continuously modulated in
time). For burst signals (TDMA) or pulses, fixed filters should be
preferred. The FFT is a block transformation so that the result
depends on the time relation between the dataset to be
transformed and the burst or pulse signal. A 'gated sweep'
measurement for TDMA signals is therefore not provided if FFT-
filters are used.

1119.5063.12 4.156 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Coupled Settings

MAIN PLL The MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH softkey opens a selection window for setting
BANDWIDTH the PLL control bandwidth.
MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH
AUTO
HIGH
MEDIUM
LOW

The first local oscillator is synchronized with the PLL control bandwidth. The
control bandwidth determines the characteristic of the phase noise. A
medium or high control bandwidth improves the phase noise for frequency
differences smaller than 10 kHz to the carrier, whereas a low control
bandwidth improves the phase noise for frequency differences larger than
100 kHz to the carrier. If the control bandwidth is set unfavorably, the phase
noise is deteriorated.
The PLL bandwidth is set in the AUTO mode depending on the RBW and
SPAN according to the following tables:

MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH SPAN ≤ 100 kHz SPAN > 100 kHz
and RBW < 3kHz or RBW ≥ 3kHz
HIGH X
MEDIUM X
LOW

The setting is chosen such that the phase noise for small spans with small
resolution bandwidth near the carrier is optimized.
For measurements with small span but with a relatively large frequency
difference to the carrier (>100kHz), the automatic bandwidth setting
deteriorates the phase noise relative to the optimal setting. The MAIN PLL
BANDWIDTH softkey allows to by-pass this automatic setting. Optimal
settings are, as a function of the carrier difference @:
MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH @ ≤ 10 kHz 10 kHz < @ < 100 @ ≥ 100 kHz
kHz
HIGH X
MEDIUM X
LOW X

If a larger control bandwidth is needed due to the sweep velocity, the

processor automatically increases the control bandwidth as far as
necessary.

1119.5063.12 4.157 E-13

Coupled Settings - Analyzer FSIQ

Sweep Coupling Ratio

SWEEP COUPLING-COUPLING RATIO submenu:

COUPLING The COUPLING RATIO softkey opens a sub-menu in

RATIO
which the coupling ratio between resolution bandwidth,
COUPLING RBW / VBW
SINE [1] video bandwidth and the span can be defined.
RATIO
These settings are effective only for the selected
RBW / VBW
PULSE [.1] parameters in ...AUTO of the main menu.

RBW / VBW
The softkeys RBW/VBW PULSE, RBW/VBW SINE, RBW/
NOISE [10] VBW NOISE, RBW/VBW MANUAL are selection keys.
Only one softkey can be enabled (illuminated) at any one
RBW / VBW time.
MANUAL
The same is valid for the softkeys SPAN/RWB AUTO [50]
SPAN / RBW
AUTO [50]
and SPAN / RWB MANUAL.

SPAN / RBW
MANUAL

RBW / VBW The RBW / VBW SINE [1] softkey always sets the video bandwidth equal to
SINE [1] the resolution bandwidth.
This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth to video
bandwidth.
This coupling ratio is recommended when sine-wave signals are to be
measured.
This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu.

1119.5063.12 4.158 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Coupled Settings

RBW / VBW The RBW / VBW PULSE softkey sets the following coupling ratio:
PULSE [.1]
video bandwidth = 10 x resolution bandwidth
or
video bandwidth = 10 MHz (= maximum video bandwidth).
This coupling ratio is always to be recommended when the amplitude of
pulsed signal shape is to be measured. The IF filter characteristics alone
determine the pulse shape. No additional weighting takes place via the video
filter.
This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu.

RBW / VBW The RBW / VBW NOISE softkey sets the following coupling ratio:
NOISE [10] video bandwidth = resolution bandwidth/10
With this setting, noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video
section. For noise signals, the FSIQ displays the average value.
This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu.

RBW / VBW The RBW / VBW MANUAL softkey activates the entry of the coupling ratio for
MANUAL resolution bandwidth to video bandwidth.
The ratio of resolution bandwidth to video bandwidth can be set in the range
from 0,001 to 1000.
This setting is only effective for the VBW AUTO selection in the main menu.

SPAN / RBW The SPAN / RBW AUTO [50] softkey sets the following coupling:
AUTO [50] resolution bandwidth = span/50
This coupling corresponds to the default state.
This setting is only effective for the RBW AUTO selection in the main menu.

SPAN / RBW The SPAN / RBW MANUAL softkey activates the manual entry mode for the
MANUAL coupling of resolution bandwidth and span.
The ratio of span to resolution bandwidth can be in the range from 1 to
10000.
This setting is only effective for the RBW AUTO selection in the main menu.

1119.5063.12 4.159 E-13

Sweep Trigger - Analyzer FSIQ

Sweep Trigger – TRIGGER Key

SWEEP TRIGGER menu:

TRIGGER The TRIGGER key opens a menu for selection of the

SWEEP
FREE RUN various trigger sources and the trigger polarity. The active
TRIGGER trigger mode is indicated by illumination of the corresponding
softkey.
VIDEO
For triggering modes in which the trigger threshold can be
SW P entered, the corresponding entry window is activated and, if
LINE appropriate, a horizontal trigger line is displayed.

RBW The FREE RUN, VIDEO, LINE, EXTERN and RF-POWER

EXTERN
softkeys are selection switches. Only one key can be
VBW
enabled at any one time (illuminated). For sweep operations
SWT RF POWER controlled by a gate signal, the FREE RUN setting is the only
setting possible.
COUPLING
If triggering has taken place, the trigger LED is turned on at
the beginning of the sweep and then turned off at the end of
sweep.

To indicate that the FSIQ is set for triggering (= not free run),
the enhancement label TRG is shown on the display. If two
measurement windows are displayed, TRG appears next to
TRIGGER the window which is configured for triggering.
DELAY

SLOPE
POS NEG

FREE RUN The FREE RUN softkey activates the free-run sweep mode (default setting).
In free-run sweep mode there is no triggering at the start of sweep.

VIDEO The VIDEO softkey activates triggering by the displayed voltage.

For the video triggering mode, a level line showing the trigger threshold is
displayed. Using the level line, the threshold can be adjusted with the roll-key
or the UP/DOWN keys.

LINE The LINE softkey activates triggering derived from the mains (line) frequency.
The power supply generates a trigger pulse at the line frequency which is
used to trigger a new sweep.

1119.5063.12 4.160 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Sweep Trigger

EXTERN The EXTERN softkey activates triggering via an external voltage

(-5V...+5V) at the input connector EXT TRIGGER/GATE on the rear panel.
The trigger threshold can be set in an entry window within a range
of -5V...+5V.
External triggering in the sweep mode "gated sweep" (SWEEP SWEEP-
GATE ON) is not possible, because the EXT TRIG/GATE connector is used
to control the sweep. The softkey is not illuminated in these modes.

RF POWER The RF POWER softkey activates triggering of the measurement via signals
which are outside the measurement channel.
The FSIQ uses a level detector at the intermediate frequency. The detector
threshold is approximately -20 dBm at the input mixer. This means that the
actual trigger level at the RF input is approx. -20 dBm plus the set RF
attenuation.
The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency is approximately 60 MHz for
model FSIQ3, approx. 160 MHz for FSIQ7, FSIQ26 and FSIQ40. Triggering
takes place when the trigger threshold is exceeded within a 100 MHz
bandwidth about the selected frequency. Thus, the measurement of noise
emissions, e.g., for pulsed carriers, is possible. The carrier itself is
suppressed via the selected resolution filter.

TRIGGER The TRIGGER DELAY softkey activates the entry window for delay time or a
DELAY pretrigger.
The triggering is delayed or advanced relative to the trigger signal by the
entered delay time. The delay time can be set in the range from -100 s to 100
s (default = 0 s).
Note: A negative delay time (pretrigger) can be set in the time domain
(SPAN < 0 Hz) only. The maximum permissible range and the
maximum resolution of the pretrigger is limited by the set sweep
time:
max. range = - 499/500 x sweep time
max. resolution = sweep time/500.
Pretriggering is not possible when the rms or the average detector
is activated.

SLOPE The SLOPE POS/NEG softkey selects the trigger slope.

POS NEG
The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal. The
selected setting is illuminated.
The selection is valid for all trigger modes with the exception of FREE RUN.
The default mode is SLOPE POS.

1119.5063.12 4.161 E-13

Sweep Control - Analyzer FSIQ

Sweep Setup – SWEEP Key

SWEEP SWEEP menu:

SWEEP The SWEEP key calls a menu in which the type of sweep
SWEEP
CONTINUOUS (sweep mode) is determined. In split screen mode, the entries
SWEEP
TRIGGER are valid only for the active measurement window.
SINGLE
SWEEP In the menu, continuous or single sweep mode, gap-sweep
settings or the external gate function can be selected.
SWEEP SWEEP TIME
AUTO
The CONTINUOUS SWEEP and SINGLE SWEEP softkeys
SWEEP TIME are selection switches. Only one softkey can be active
R MANUAL (illuminated) at any one time.
VBW
SWEEP
SWT COUNT

GAP SWEEP
COUPLING ON OFF

GAP SWEEP
SETTINGS

GATE
ON OFF

GATE
SETTINGS

SGL SWEEP
DISP OFF

CONTINUOUS The CONTINUOUS SWEEP softkey sets the continuous sweep mode. This
SWEEP means, that the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger
conditions.
In case of split screen display with different settings in each measurement
window, screen A is swept first and then screen B. After pressing the softkey,
the sweep is initialized and restarted.
CONTINUOUS SWEEP is the default setting of FSIQ.

SINGLE The SINGLE SWEEP softkey starts a series of n sweeps according to the
SWEEP triggering definition. The number of sweeps, n, is determined by the SWEEP
COUNT softkey.
In split screen display mode, the spans of each window are swept
sequentially. If a displayed curve is averaged, the span is swept n times (n =
sweep count). For n = 0, a single sweep takes place.
To indicate that the FSIQ is set for single sweep, the enhancment label SGL
is shown on the display.

1119.5063.12 4.162 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Sweep Control

SWEEPTIME The SWEEPTIME AUTO and SWEEPTIME MANUAL softkeys activate the
AUTO automatic or manual selection of the sweep time. These functions are
identical to the entries in the COUPLING menu (see section "Setting and
SWEEPTIME
MANUAL Coupling the Coupling Resolution, Video Bandwidth and Sweep Time").

SGL SWEEP The SGL SWEEP DISP OFF softkey switches off the display during a single
DISP OFF sweep. The trace is displayed when the sweep has terminated.

SWEEP The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps
COUNT performed by the FSIQ after the start of a single sweep. If trace average, max
hold or min hold is switched on, this also fixed the number of averaging or
minimum/maximum search procedures.

Example:
[TRACE1: MAX HOLD]
[SWEEP: SWEEP COUNT: {10} ENTER]
[SINGLE SWEEP]

The FSIQ performs the max hold function over 10 sweeps.

The permissible range for the sweep count is 0 through 32767. For sweep
count = 0 or 1, a sweep is performed. For trace averaging (AVERAGE),
sweep count = 0 and continuous sweep, the FSIQ performs a running
average over 10 sweeps in average mode. For sweep count = 1, no
averaging takes place.
The default setting totals 10 sweeps.

Note: The setting for the number of sweeps in the TRACE menu is
equivalent to the setting in the SWEEP menu. In SINGLE SWEEP
mode, the measurement is stopped after reaching the chosen
number of sweeps.

1119.5063.12 4.163 E-13

Sweep Control - Analyzer FSIQ

Gated Sweep
By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive, the
spectrum for pulsed carriers can be displayed without overlaid frequency components caused by the
on/off switching procedure. Similarly, the spectrum can also be examined for an inactive carrier. The
sweep can be controlled by an external gate or by the internal power trigger.

Fig. 4-9 Pulsed signal GATE

Fig 4-10 TDMA-signal with GATE ON

The ’gated sweep’ mode is activated by the GATE ON/OFF softkey. The setting of the mode takes place
in the GATE SETTINGS sub-menu.

1119.5063.12 4.164 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Sweep Control

SWEEP SWEEP menu:

GATE The GATE ON / OFF softkey switches the sweep mode with an internal or
ON OFF external gate on/off.
When GATE ON is selected, a signal applied to the rear panel connector EXT
TRIGGER/GATE or the internal RF power detector controls the sweep of the
analyzer. The sweep can be stopped and then continued. A switch from an
edge triggered to a level triggered mode can also be made.

Gate Mode LEVEL Gate Mode EDGE

RF

ext. Gate

Meas. active

Delay Delay Length

Fig. 4-11 Interaction of the parameters GATE MODE, GATE DELAY and
GATE LENGTH

The softkey is only available in the frequency domain (span > 0).
GATE ON is only possible when the trigger mode is set to FREE RUN
(SWEEP TRIGGER menu) .
To indicate that the FSIQ is set for sweep mode with external gate, the
enhancement label GAT is shown on the display. GAT appears next to the
window which is configured for sweep mode with external gate.

1119.5063.12 4.165 E-13

Sweep Control - Analyzer FSIQ

SWEEP SWEEP-GATE SETTINGS sub-menu:

GATE In the GATE SETTINGS sub-menu, all settings are made

SETTINGS
GATE which are necessary for ’gated sweep’ operation.
GATE
SETTINGS LEVEL
On switching to the time domain, the GATE DELAY and
GATE MODE GATE LENGTH times are displayed by horizontal time lines
LEVEL EDGE which allow simple adjustment of the gate time.
GATE POL
POS NEG The softkeys GATE EXTERN and GATE RF POWER provide
alternative settings, only one of them can be active at one
GATE
DELAY
time.

GATE
LENGTH

GATE
EXTERN

GATE
RF POWER

GATE
ADJUST

GATE The GATE LEVEL softkey activates the entry window for defining the
LEVEL threshold value of the external gate signal.
The threshold can be set between -5V and +5V.

GATE MODE The GATE MODE LEVEL/EDGE softkey selects the trigger mode. The sweep
LEVEL EDGE mode GATE can be operated either as level or as edge triggered.
For level triggering, the GATE LENGTH softkey is deactivated and can not be
used.

GATE POL The GATE POL softkey determines the polarity of the GATE control line.
POS NEG
If level triggering with GATE POL POS is set, the sweep is stopped when the
gate signal is a logic ´ 0 ' (input signal < gate level) at the EXT
TRIGGER/GATE input and then, when the gate signal goes to a logic ' 1 ', the
sweep is continued after a delay time of GATE DELAY.
For edge triggering and a change from ' 0 ' to ' 1 ', i.e., the positive edge of
the EXT TRIGGER/GATE input signal, the sweep is continued after a delay of
GATE DELAY for a duration which was set by the GATE LENGTH softkey.

1119.5063.12 4.166 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Sweep Control

GATE The GATE DELAY softkey activates the entry window for setting the delay
DELAY time between the gate signal and the continuation of the sweep.
Thus, e.g., delays between the gate signal and the stabilization of an RF
carrier can be taken into consideration.
For the gate delay time, values can be selected between 1 µs and 100 s. The
resolution is dependent upon the absolute value of the delay time:
Gate delay Resolution
0 - 500 µs 1 µs
0.5 - 5 ms 5 µs
5 - 50 ms 50 µs
50 - 500 ms 500 µs
0.5 - 5 s 5 ms
5 - 50 s 50 ms
50 - 100 s 500 ms

In the time domain, a time line is displayed separated from the trigger point by
the gate delay time. This simplifies the adjustment of the necessary delay
time.
The values for GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH are displayed by two time
lines. The duration of the active sweep for span > 0 (continuation of sweep:
GATE DELAY line, stopping of sweep: GATE LENGTH line) is described by
these two lines. A change in parameters causes a shift of the corresponding
line position. After switching to span > 0, the selected times for the gated
sweep are effective.

GATE For edge triggering, the GATE LENGTH softkey activates the entry window
LENGTH for defining the FSIQ sweep duration.
GATE LENGTH can be set to values between 1µs and 100 s. The resolution
is dependent upon the absolute value of the gate length:
Gate length Resolution
0 - 500 µs 1 µs
0.5 - 5 ms 5 µs
5 - 50 ms 50 µs
50 - 500 ms 500 µs
0.5 - 5 s 5 ms
5 - 50 s 50 ms
50 - 100 s 500 ms
In the time domain (ZERO SPAN), a time line is displayed separated from the
GATE DELAY time by the GATE LENGTH time.
The softkey is only available for the GATE MODE EDGE setting (edge
triggering). It is disabled for the GATE MODE LEVEL setting (level triggering).

GATE The GATE EXTERN softkey selects a signal applied to the EXT
EXTERN
TRIGGER/GATE connector on the rear panel of the instrument as a gate
source.

GATE The GATE RF POWER softkey selects the internal RF power detector as a
RF POWER gate source.

1119.5063.12 4.167 E-13

Sweep Control - Analyzer FSIQ

Setting the Gate Times

SWEEP SWEEP- GATE SETTINGS - GATE ADJUST submenu:

GATE The GATE ADJUST softkey opens a submenu comprising all

ADJUST
softkeys that are used to set the parameters relevant for the
GATE GATE
ADJUST ’gated sweep’ function.
LEVEL
On pressing this softkey, the display is switched to the time
GATE MODE
LEVEL EDGE
domain (zero span setting) so that all necessary times can be
checked by means of cursor lines.
GATE POL
POS NEG The values for Res BW, Video BW and sweep time are taken
from the corresponding settings in the frequency domain.
GATE
DELAY To make sure that the times can be set correctly
corresponding to the conditions in the frequency domain, the
GATE settings for the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth
LENGTH should not be changed.

SWEEPTIME The sweep time must be selected such that, e. g., a full burst
MANUAL is displayed. It usually differs from the sweep time in the
frequency range.
RES BW
MANUAL Finally, GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH can be used to
set the times in such a way that the desired section in the
VIDEO BW spectral range is covered.
MANUAL
On quitting the submenu, the original settings in the
VIDEO BW frequency range are restored so that the measurement can
AUTO
be directly performed with the required parameters.

Measurement example:
The modulation spectrum of a GSM or PCS1900 signal to be measured using the ’gated sweep’
function. The signal is generated by the test sender SME03. Its RF-output is directly connected to the
RF input of the FSIQ.

Settings on the SME03:

FREQ: 802 MHz
Level: 0 dBm: Return
Digital Mod: Select: GMSK: Select
Source: Select: PRBS: Select: Return
Level Attenuation: Select: 60 dB: Return

The SME03 provides a GMSK-modulated TDMA-signal (GSM)

1119.5063.12 4.168 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Sweep Control

Operation steps on the FSIQ:

[PRESET]
[CENTER: {802} MHz]
[SPAN {3.6} MHz]
[REF LVL: {0} dBm: RF ATTEN MANUAL: {10} dB]
[COUPLING: RES BW MANUAL: {30} kHz]
[TRACE 1: DETECTOR: RMS]
[SWEEP: SWEEPTIME MANUAL: {50} ms;
GATE ON
GATE SETTINGS: GATE MODE EDGE: GATE POL POS: GATE RF POWER

GATE ADJUST: SWEEPTIME MANUAL {1} ms: GATE DELAY {300} µs:
GATE LENGTH: {250} µs]

Note: [KEY] Menu called by the KEY. All indications inside the bracket refer to this menu.
{Number} Numeric value to be entered for the corresponding parameter
SOFTKEY Softkey used to select a parameter or enter a value.

The following figure shows the screen display for gate parameter setting: The vertical lines for gate
delay (GL) and gate length (GL) can be adapted to the burst signal by entering numbers of by means of
the rollkey.

Fig. 4-12 Setting the GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH times in the time domain using the GD
and GL lines

On quitting the menu GATE ADJUST, the FSIQ returns to spectral representation.

1119.5063.12 4.169 E-13

Sweep Control - Analyzer FSIQ

Sweep Blanking – Gap Sweep

For measurements in the time domain, the GAP SWEEP function offers a high degree of flexibility with
regard to the display of measurement data. With the PRE TRIGGER softkey, it is possible to display
measurements taken before the trigger time. With the GAP TIME softkey, the measurements within a
predefined time range can be blanked. Thus, it is possible to display the rising and falling edge of a
signal with high resolution on a single diagram.

Displayed picture Displayed picture

(not displayed)

Trigger

Pre-Trigger Trigger to Gap Gap

Time Time Time

Fig 4-13 Trace blanking in sweep mode.– Gap Sweep

RBW 1 MHz RF Att 20 dB

Ref Lev VBW 300 kHz
-10.0 dBm SWT 800 µs Unit (dBm)

Span 0 Hz 80 µs / Div Center 914 MHz

Fig. 4-14 Display of a burst without gaps

1119.5063.12 4.170 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Sweep Control

RBW 100 kHz RF Att 20 dB

Ref Lev VBW 100 kHz
-10.0 dBm SWT 500 us Unit (dBm)

Span 0 Hz 50 us / Div Center 914 MHz

Fig. 4-15 Display of a burst with a gap

The GAP SWEEP measurement is activated by the GAP SWEEP ON/OFF softkey. The mode settings
are made in the GAP SWEEP SETTINGS sub-menu.

SWEEP SWEEP menu:

GAP SWEEP The GAP SWEEP ON/OFF softkey switches the GAP SWEEP measurement
ON OFF on/off.
The softkey is available only in the time domain.

1119.5063.12 4.171 E-13

Sweep Control - Analyzer FSIQ

SWEEP SWEEP-GAP SWEEP SETTINGS sub-menu:

GAP SWEEP The GAP SWEEP SETTINGS softkey opens a sub-menu in

SETTINGS
which the parameters for the gap can be selected.
GAP SWEEP TRIGGER
SETTINGS LEVEL
The trigger time corresponds to t = 0. Events occurring
PRE before the trigger time are displayed in negative time.
TRIGGER

TRG TO GAP
TIME

GAP
LENGTH

TRIGGER The TRIGGER LEVEL softkey activates the entry window for trigger level.
LEVEL
This function corresponds to the setting in the trigger menu.

PRE The PRE TRIGGER softkey activates the entry window for the pre-trigger
TRIGGER time. The pre-trigger time defines the separation between the left edge of the
grid and the trigger time (t = 0).
At the same time the gap sweep is switched on (exception : entry t = 0)
The minimum pre-trigger time is −100 s, the maximum pre-trigger time
depends on the sweep time and the trigger to gap time (max = 100 s). The
maximum resolution is 50 ns.
The PRE TRIGGER value can be entered in the frequency domain (span > 0)
as well as in the time domain and GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It is, however,
only effective when the GAP SWEEP measurement is enabled.

1119.5063.12 4.172 E-13

FSIQ Analyzer - Sweep Control

TRG TO GAP The TRG TO GAP TIME softkey opens an entry window for defining the
TIME distance between the trigger time and the beginning of the gap.
The TRIGGER TO GAP TIME range is from 0 to 100 s with a resolution of 50
ns. The length of the gap is defined by GAP LENGTH. If the GAP LENGTH is
0 s, the entered value of TRG TO GAP TIME is only stored.
The TRG TO GAP TIME value can be entered in the frequency domain (span
> 0) as well as in the time domain and for the GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It has
an effect on the measurement only after the GAP SWEEP ON is switched on.

GAP The GAP LENGTH softkey activates the entry window for defining the gap
LENGTH within which the measurement values are to be blanked.
The beginning of the gap is defined by TRG TO GAP TIME.

GAP LENGTH can be set to values between 150 ns and 100 s in 1/2/3/5
steps. The resolution is dependent upon the absolute value of the gap length:
Gap length Resolution
150 ns - 50 µs 50 ns
50 - 500 µs 500 ns
0.5 - 5 ms 5 µs
5 - 50 ms 50 µs
50 - 500 ms 500 µs
0.5 - 5 s 5 ms
5 - 50 s 50 ms
50 - 100 s 500 ms

The GAP LENGTH value can be entered in the frequency domain (span > 0)
as well as in the time domain and for the GAP SWEEP OFF mode. It has an
effect on the measurement only after the GAP SWEEP ON is switched on.

1119.5063.12 4.173 E-13

Vector Analyzer - Mode Selection FSIQ

Vector Analyzer Mode

The Vector Signal Analyzer in the FSIQ allows the analysis of analog and digital modulations. For this
purpose, the FSIQ samples the IF signal which is band-limited by the resolution bandwidth (RBW) and
mixes it into the complex baseband. The real and imaginary section of the signal is then digitally filtered
and further processed in digital signal processors. The complex baseband contains the whole signal
information which can be evaluated according to the different criteria.

Decimate

Phi
90o
A
Memory DSP
D

IF filter 20 to Dig LO 4x
25.6 MHz 56002

Decimate

Fig. 4-16 Block diagram of FSIQ vector signal analyzer

Three types of analysis are distinguished in the vector signal analyzer:
• In the analog demodulation mode, the amplitude (AM), frequency (FM) or phase (PM) demodulated
signal is represented as a function of time. Alternatively, display of a table containing the numerical
demodulation parameters can be selected (RESULT DISPLAY).
• For digitally modulated signals, the most commonly used demodulators are available to evaluate the
modulation parameters.
• In the DIGITAL DEMODULATION mode, the magnitude of the non-demodulated signal can also be
displayed (MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER).

The vector analyzer mode is activated in the CONFIGURATION MODE menu

(See section: "Selecting the Operating Mode" - MODE key)

1119.5063.12 4.174 E-13

FSIQ Mode Selection - Vector Analyzer Mode

Selecting the Operating Mode

CONFIGURATION MODE The MODE key calls up the menu for selecting the
operating mode.
MODE ANALYZER

SE P

VECTOR
ANALYZER

The type of analysis is selected in the VECTOR ANALYZER sub menu.

VECTOR The VECTOR ANALYZER softkey calls up a submenu.

ANALYZER
The specific settings for the vector analyzer are entered
VECTOR DIGITAL
ANALYZER STANDARDS into this submenu.

DIGITAL The menus for the test parameter settings lying below
DEMOD these keys (FREQUENCY, LEVEL, MARKER, TRACE,
ANALOG COUPLING, TRIGGER) are adapted to the specific
DEMOD capabilities of the vector signal analyzer.
MODULATION
PARAMETER
The DIGITAL STANDARDS, DIGITAL DEMOD and
ANALOG DEMOD softkeys are selectors with which the
MEAS required type of analysis is set.
RESULT
The MODULATION PARAMETER softkey sets the
TRIGGER required modulation parameters for the demodulation of
digitally modulated signals.
RANGE The MEAS RESULT softkey calls up a submenu in which
the required evaluation of the selected type of analysis is
SWEEP
set. For digital demodulation, for example, this is the
TIME evaluation of the signal itself or the reference signal, I/Q or
vector errors etc.
DEMOD
BANDWDITH The TRIGGER softkey calls up a menu equal to the
SWEEP TRIGGER menu.
IF
BANDWDITH The RANGE softkey calls up the same menu called by the
RANGE key in the LEVEL key group.
The IF BANDWIDTH softkey calls up a submenu in which
the analog IF Bandwidth is set.

1119.5063.12 4.175 E-13

Vector Analyzer - Mode Selection FSIQ

Note: If two displays (screen A and screen B) are opened after switch-on of the vector signal
analysis, the vector analyzer mode is only set for the display activated for entry (marked at
the top right corner of diagram). For the other display, the previous settings remain valid.
Storage and display of measured values is sequential: first in the upper and then in the
lower display.
The configuration of the vector analysis is performed in four steps:

1. Setting the type of analysis: Analog demodulation of the signal (ANALOG DEMOD), general
demodulation of digitally modulated signals (DIGITAL DEMOD) or setting as required by a specific
transmission mode (DIGITAL STANDARDS, in this case, step no. 2 can be skipped).
2. Selecting the modulation parameters (MODULATION PARAMETER).
3. Selecting the required measurement results (MEAS RESULT).
4. Selecting the output format for measurement results (RESULT DISPLAY).

1119.5063.12 4.176 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

Analog Demodulation Methods

With amplitude, frequency and phase demodulation, the FSIQ provides all demodulation methods which
can be used for analog RF carrier modulation or which may impair a carrier. The bandwidth used for
demodulation depends on the demodulation bandwidth selected. Make sure that the entire modulation
spectrum is included in the demodulation bandwidth. Otherwise, signal distortions that impair the
modulation will be caused by analog prefiltering with the IF filters of the FSIQ and digital filtering for
suppression of aliasing products due to sampling or data reduction. Correct measurement of the
modulation parameters will no longer be possible.
For correct demodulation make sure that only the signal to be analyzed is located within the
demoduation bandwidth (DEMOD BANDWIDTH) of the FSIQ. Otherwise, the demodulation would be
impaired by adjacent signals. Spectral components of adjacent signals should be at a distance of at
least 1.285 times the (demodulation bandwidth)/2 from the center frequency (= carrier frequency).
Depending on the demodulation bandwidth set (DEMOD BANDWIDTH), two modes of demodulation are
provided:
With DEMOD BANDWIDTH ≤ 200 kHz real-time (REAL TIME ON) or offline (REAL TIME OFF)
demodulation can be selected, with DEMOD BANDWIDTH > 200 kHz only offline demodulation is
possible.
Real-time and offline demodulation differ as follows:
• Real-time demodulation (REAL TIME ON)
- The bandwidth of the demodulated signal can be reduced in the AF region using switchable
highpass, lowpass or weighting filters (CCITT or C-message filter) to enable spurious modulation
measurements for analog radio systems in line with the standard; moreover, deemphases can
also be switched on for FM (and AM). A deemphasis, if switched on, has an effect on the audio
signal (provided via loudspeaker or headphones connector) and on the result display or on the
audio signal only. The switchable filters, however, always have an effect on the display and
AF/loudspeaker output.
- The demodulated signal can be monitored via the built-in loudspeaker or via the headphones
output.
- In addition, the demodulated signal (parts of it) or a summary of numerical modulation parameters
can be displayed on the sceen. With the aid of the split screen display, the demodulated signal
and the summery of numerical modulation parameters can be displayed at the same time.
• Offline demodulation (REAL TIME OFF)
- The demodulation is not carried out continuously, but in blocks, ie a data block is written into the
memory and then demodulated and displayed:
- The measurement result displayed on the screen is the time function of the demodulated AF
signal and/or a summary of numerical modulation parameters.
- The internal loudspeaker, the headphones output is switched off.
- No highpass filters and no weighting filters can be activated.
Deemphases cannot be switched on.
- To restrict the noise bandwidth, AF lowpass filters can be selected, standardized to the
demodulation bandwidth (cutoff frequency = 5, 10 or 25 % of demodulation bandwidth).
The two demodulation modes provided are designed for the following main applications:
• Real-time demodulation (REAL TIME ON) for demodulation bandwidths up to max. 200 kHz for
modulation measurements to the standard on analog radio systems and also for monitoring.
• Offline demodulation (REAL TIME OFF), especially for measurement of transients (e.g. frequency
settling of oscillators and synthesizers).
The following diagram shows the menus which permit to set the parameters and the result display with
analog demodulation.

1119.5063.12 4.177 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Menu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - ANALOG DEMOD (with REAL TIME ON)
VECTOR VECTOR HIGH PASS
ANALYZER ANALYZER
AF FILTER
DIGITAL
STANDARDS NONE
30 Hz
DIGITAL 300 Hz
DEMOD DEMOD
SETTINGS
ANALOG HIGH PASS
DEMOD AF FILTER LOW PASS
AF FILTER
MODULATION LOW PASS
TRIGGER PARAMETER NONE
AF FILTER
3 kHz
FREE RUN 15 kHz
MEAS MEAS RESULT WEIGHTING
RESULT AF FILTER
AM SIGNAL
VIDEO
TRIGGER WEIGHTING
AF FILTER
FM SIGNAL
EXTERN
RANGE AF COUPL’G CCITT
RANGE
SCALE AC DC C-Message
AF SIGNAL PM SIGNAL
SWEEP SQUELCH
TIME ON OFF
TRIGGER Y PER DIV MODULATION
OFFFSET DEMOD SUMMARY SQUELCH
BANDWIDTH AM/FM
REF VALUE SUMMARY LEVEL DEEMPHASIS
SLOPE SUMMARY
IF Y AXIS SETTINGS SETTINGS
POS NEG SIDE BAND
BANDWIDTH AVERAGE/ NORM INV
REF VALUE SUMMARY
X AXIS HOLD ON
MEAS TIME AM/FM
SWEEP DEEMPH 50 us
REF VALUE
POSITION COUNT
DEEMPHASIS
ON OFF 75 us
REL UNIT
REAL TIME % dB
IF BW
ON OFF
AUTO 750 us
SENSITIV INDICATION
SENSITIV ABS REL
IF BW AF OUTPUT
AF OUTPUT
MANUAL
SET
VOLUME REFERENCE
VOLUME

MEAS->REF
PRE DISPL
SCALE SCALE ON OFF
UNIT UNIT
Y UNIT
LOG[dB]
SINAD 1kHz
Y UNIT ON OFF
LINEAR

Y UNIT
DEG

Y UNIT
RAD

Y UNIT
dBm

Y UNIT
VOLT

Y UNIT
WATT

X UNIT
TIME

X UNIT
SYMBOL

Fig. 4-17 Menu structure for setting the demodulation with analog-modulated signals

1119.5063.12 4.178 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

ANALOG The ANALOG DEMOD softkey activates the analog demodulation mode.
DEMOD
The demodulation (AM, FM and PM demodulation) is performed in parallel.
The type of demodulation or display (AM, FM or PM or numerical display) is
set under MEAS RESULT.

MODULATION See section "Selecting the Modulation Parameters"

PARAMETER

MEAS See section "Selecting the Audio Signal"

RESULT

TRIGGER See section "Triggering with Analog Demodulation - Softkey TRIGGER or

Hardkey TRIGGER"

RANGE See section "Setting the Display Range and the Scaling - Softkey RANGE or
Hardkey RANGE"

SWEEPTIME See section "Sweep Menu with Analog Demodulation - Softkey SWEEP TIME
or Hardkey SWEEP"

DEMOD The DEMOD BANDWIDTH softkey calls up a field for entering the
BANDWIDTH demodulation bandwidth.
The spectrum to be demodulated should be located completely within this
bandwidth, if possible (check in spectrum analyzer mode) in order to avoid
demodulation distortions. Spurious signals outside the spectrum to be
demodulated do not cause any demodulation errors if the frequency spacing
with respect to the tuning frequency is ( CENTER FREQUENCY) Delta f ≥
1.28 x (DEMOD BANDWIDTH)/2.
The DEMOD BANDWIDTH can be set in steps of 1, 2, 3 and 5 in the range
from 5 kHz to 5 MHz or, if different entries are made, it will be rounded off to
the nearest possible step.
With FM demodulation the maximum deviation that can be measured is
restricted to (0.4 x DEMOD BANDWIDTH).

1119.5063.12 4.179 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

IF
IF BW The IF BANDWIDTH softkey opens up a submenu where the
BANDWIDTH AUTO bandwidth of the analog IF filters is set (corresponds to the
resolution bandwidth in spectrum analyzer mode).
IF BW
MANUAL

IF BW The IF BW AUTO softkey is used to set the IF bandwidth to

AUTO the maximum possible value 10 MHz (irrespective of the
demodulation bandwidth).

IF BW The IF BW MANUAL softkey permits to restrict the analog IF

MANUAL bandwidth specifically.
To avoid modulation distortions and errors it is recommended
to set the IF bandwidth as large as possible (IF BANDWIDTH
≥ 5 x DEMOD BANDWIDTH).
If spurious signals are to be suppressed outside the useful
modulation spectrum, IF BW MANUAL can be used to
reduce the IF bandwidth down to a value equal to the
demodulation bandwidth.
Possible input values: ≥ DEMOD BANDWIDTH, 5 kHz to 10
MHz.

1119.5063.12 4.180 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

Selecting the Modulation Parameters

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - ANALOG DEMOD

MODULATION The MODULATION PARAMETER softkey calls up a submenu which permits to
PARAMETER select the modulation parameters for analog demodulation.

Which menu is displayed depends on whether real-time demodulation is

activated (REAL TIME ON) or not (REAL TIME OFF).

REAL TIME ON: REAL TIME OFF:

HIGH PASS
AF FILTER

NONE
30 Hz
MODULATION MODULATIOJN 300 Hz MODULATION MODULATIOJN
PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER
HIGH PASS HIGH PASS
AF FILTER LOW PASS AF FILTER LOW PASS AF FILTER
AF FILTER
LOW PASS LOW PASS
NONE AF FILTER NONE
AF FILTER
3 kHz 5 % [DEMOD BW]
WEIGHTING 15 kHz WEIGHTING 10 % [DEMOD BW]
AF FILTER AF FILTER 25 % [DEMOD BW]

WEIGHTING
AF FILTER
AF COUPL’G CCITT AF COUPL’G
AC DC C-Message AC DC

SQUELCH SQUELCH
ON OFF ON OFF
SQUELCH
LEVEL AM/FM SQUELCH
LEVEL
DEEMPHASIS
SIDE BAND
NORM INV SIDE BAND
NORM INV
AM/FM
DEEMPH AM/FM
50 us DEEMPH
DEEMPHASIS
ON OFF DEEMPHASIS
75 us
ON OFF

750 us

PRE DISPL
ON OFF

Note: The dashed softkeys cannot be activated in the operating mode selected

1119.5063.12 4.181 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

The possible selection of the filter depends on whether real-time

demodulation is activated or not (REAL TIME ON/OFF).

REAL TIME ON:

HIGH PASS The softkeys HIGHPASS AF FILTER and LOW PASS AF FILTER call up
AF FILTER input fields which permit to select highpass or lowpass filters for restriction
of the AF bandwidth.
HIGH PASS LOW PASS
AF FILTER AF FILTER

NONE NONE
LOW PASS 30 Hz 3 kHz
AF FILTER 300 Hz 15 kHz

If REAL TIME ON is activated, the opposite highpass and lowpass filters as

well as standard weighting filters can be selected.
If AF filters are switched on, they act on the display and AF output or
loudspeaker output.
The 3-dB cutoff frequencies are indicated for the highpass and lowpass
filters.
1st-order highpass filters (6 dB/octave slope) and 2nd-order lowpass filters
(12 dB/octave slope) are used.

WEIGHTING The WEIGHTING AF FILTER softkey calls up the inpit firld for selection of a
AF FILTER standard weighting filter.
The CCITT filter (CCITT P.53) and the C-message filter are used as
weighting filters according to US standard.
WEIGHTING
AF FILTER

CCITT
C-Message

When one of the two weighting filters is activated, the demodulation

bandwidth is automatically switched to 30 kHz. If the demodulation
bandwidth is subsequently changed with active weighting filter, the latter is
switched off.

REAL TIME OFF:

If REAL TIME OFF is selected, only lowpass filters can be activated for
restriction of the noise bandwidth.
LOW PASS AF FILTER

NONE
5 % [DEMOD BW]
10 % [DEMOD BW]
25 % [DEMOD BW]

The filter bandwidth (-3 dB) can be selected in % of the demodulation

bandwidth.
5, 10 or 25 % of the demodulation bandwidth are possible.
The filters are designed as 2nd-order Butterworth filters (12 dB/octave
slope).

1119.5063.12 4.182 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

AF COUPL’G The AF COUPL’G AC/DC softkey switches the AF analysis stages after the
AC DC demodulators to DC or AC voltage coupling.

FM:
With FM, AC coupling (AF COUPL’G AC) is achieved by determining the
center frequency of the signal to be measured and correcting the
demodulated signal accordingly.
With AF COUPL’G DC the center frequency of the FSIQ is assumed as the
carrier frequency, and no frequency correction is performed. The AF signal
is DC-coupled.

PM:
With PM, AC coupling (AF COUPL’G AC) is achieved by estimating both the
frequency offset and the phase offset and setting them to zero.
Only with REAL TIME OFF:
With AF COUPL’G DC, if the center frequency of the signal to be measured
deviates, the phase varies with a period corresponding to the difference
between applied and set center frequency (0 to 360°).
If the frequency is consistent (e.g. in the case of synchronization to a
common reference frequency) the phase is constant on an offset in the
range from 0 to 360°. The PM demodulator is DC-coupled.

AM:
As a mere envelope demodulator, the AM demodulator is insensitive to
frequency errors as long as carrier and sidebands are within the set
frequency display range.
In the case of AC coupling (AF COUPL’G AC), the demodulated AF signal
is standardized to the DC voltage (corresponds to the average carrier value)
and the DC component is removed.
The amplitude of the AF signal is directly proportional to the AM modulation
depth.
In the case of DC coupling (AF COUPL’G DC), the amplitude of the
demodulated signal is proportional both to the AM depth and to the level,
there is no standardization to the average carrier value. The measured
value is displayed in absolute level units.

1119.5063.12 4.183 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

SQUELCH REAL TIME ON:

ON OFF
The SQUELCH ON softkey mutes the loudspeaker or headphones output
provided that the level falls below a threshold that can be entered under
SQUELCH LEVEL. The trace of the demodulated signal is also set to zero
at this point in time. The muting circuit responds with a delay that is
designed such that a signal modulated with ≥ 30 Hz AM does not cause the
circuit to respond in a modulation low status.
Loudspeaker or headphones output are only active if real-time demodulation
is selected.

REAL TIME OFF:

With MEAS RESULT: AM-, FM SIGNAL or :PM SIGNAL the frequency or
phase deviation is set to zero when the value falls below the squelch. The
muting circuit responds without delay, which is why it is suitable for transient
measurements in particular.

SQUELCH SQUELCH LEVEL permits to enter an absolute level in the unit dBm, below
LEVEL which the SQUELCH function is activated (only with SQUELCH ON).

SIDEBAND The softkey SIDEBAND INV (INVERTED) demodulates and inverts the
NORM INV signal received.
Thus, with FM or PM demodulation, a receive signal with increasing
frequency at the FSIQ input leads to a falling AF signal.
Default status is SIDEBAND NORM (normal): A receive signal with
increasing frequency at the FSIQ input leads to an increasing AF signal.

1119.5063.12 4.184 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

AM/FM REAL TIME ON only

AM/FM
DEEMPHASIS
DEEMPH
The AM/FM DEEMPH softkey opens the submenu in which a
deemphasis can be selected for FM (or AM) demodulation
(An AM deemphasis is prescribed in a few regulations for
50 us measurement of synchronous amplitude modulation on FM
transmitters.).
75 us Deemphases with the time constants 50 µs, 75 µs (used for
radio broadcasting) and 750 µs (used for radio
750 us communication) are provided.
If switched on, the deemphasis acts on the audio output.

PRE DISPL
ON OFF

50 us REAL TIME ON only

The 50us, 75 us and 750 us softkeys select the time
75 us constant of the deemphasis.
The default setting is 50 µs.
750 us

REAL TIME ON only

PRE DISPL
ON OFF The PRE DISPL ON/OFF softkey switches on or off the
effect of the deemphasis to the result display.
Via the function PRE DISP ON (PRE DISPLAY ON) the
effect of the deemphasis can also be extended to the result
display to enable spurious modulation measurements
complying with the standard.
To be able to measure the correct deviation of the signal
applied in spite of the corrected audio signal, the active
deemphasis can be switched off via PRE DISP OFF for the
result display.

DEEMPHASIS REAL TIME ON only

ON OFF
The DEEMPHASIS ON/OFF softkey switches the demphasis selected
under AM/FM DEEMPHASIS on or off.
In the default status, the deemphasis is switched off.

1119.5063.12 4.185 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Selecting the Audio Signal

Submenu: CONFIGURATION: MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - ANALOG DEMOD

MEAS MEAS RESULT The MEAS RESULT softkey opens up a submenu for
RESULT
AM SIGNAL selection of the AM, FM, or PM demodulated audio signal
(display and audio output).

FM SIGNAL

PM SIGNAL

MODULATION
SUMMARY

SUMMARY
SETTINGS

SUMMARY
MEAS TIME

REAL
REAL TIME
TIME
ON
ON OFF
OFF

SENSITIV
AF OUTPUT

VOLUME

AM SIGNAL The AM SIGNAL softkey is used to display the AM-demodulated time signal
provided that MODULATION SUMMARY is not active. If MODULATION
SUMMARY is active, the modulation parameters will be numerically
displayed with main signal AM (see MODULATON SUMMARY).

1119.5063.12 4.186 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

The AM-demodulated signal is applied to the audio output (if REAL TIME
ON).

FM SIGNAL The FM SIGNAL softkey displays the FM-demodulated time signal provided
that MODULATION SUMMARY is not active. If MODULATION SUMMARY
is active, the modulation parameter will be numerically displayed with main
signal FM (see MODULATION SUMMARY).
The FM-demodulated signal is present at the audio output (in the case of
real-time demodulation).

PM SIGNAL The PM SIGNALL softkey displays the PM-demodulated time signal

provided that MODULATION SUMMARY is not active. If MODULATION
SUMMARY is active, the modulation parameter will be numerically displayed
with main signal PM (see MODULATION SUMMARY).
In the case of REAL TIME ON the PM-demodulated signal is present at the
audio output.

1119.5063.12 4.187 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

MODULATION The MODULATION SUMMARY softkey (on/off switch) switches from the
SUMMARY display of the audio signal versus time to the summary of the numeric
modulation parameters.
Of the main signal in question the positive and negative peak modulation
value, peak-to-peak value as well as the rms value are displayed with
absolute display (see SUMMARY SETTING) (except for AM DC: the +-Pk/2
detector does not display the peak-to-peak value, but the average from
positive and negative peak value).

Parallel to the main signal, the parameters of the remaining demodulators

are also displayed, ie the absolute, arithmetic average from positive and
negative peak value.

The following parameters of the demodulation main signal can be displayed

in addition:
• SINAD value (1-kHz modulation frequency fixed)
• Audio frequency

In addition, the frequency error as well as the carrier power (to be more
exact: power of the unmodulated carrier) and the configuration of the active
AF filter and deemphasis are displayed.

Example: AM signal/REAL TIME ON:

CF 978.3 MHz REAL TIME ON
Ref Lvl DEMOD BW: 100 kHz MOD SUMMARY AM
10 dBm ANALOG DEMOD

Bit No. Symbol Table

MODULATION SUMMARY AM A

AM: 54.20 % +Pk 54.68 -Pk

54.44 % +- PK/2 33.3 % RMS

SINAD 1 kHz: 35.1 dB

AUDIO FREQ: 1.001 kHz
FREQ ERROR: 101.1 Hz
CARR PWR: 7.88 dBm
FILTER: HP 30 Hz LP 3 kHz DEEMPH OFF

FM: 1.031 kHz +- PK/2

PM 1.011 rad +- PK/2

Example: AM signal/REAL TIME OFF:

CF 978.3 MHz REAL TIME OFF
Ref Lvl DEMOD BW: 100 kHz MOD SUMMARY AM
10 dBm ANALOG DEMOD
Bit No. Symbol Table
MODULATION SUMMARY AM A

AM: 54.20 % +Pk 54.68 -Pk

54.44 % +-PK/2 33.3 % RMS

SINAD 1 kHz: --
AUDIO FREQ: 1.001 kHz
FREQ ERROR: 101.1 Hz
CARR PWR: 7.88 dBm
FILTER: HP -- LP 10 % [DEMOD BW] DEEMPH OFF

FM: 1.031 kHz +

-PK/2
PM 1.011 rad +-PK/2

1119.5063.12 4.188 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

Example: FM signal, relative measurement:

In the case of relative measurement, the absolute arithmetic average from
positive and negative peak value as well as the rms value of the main signal
are also displayed. The separate display of positive and negative peak value
is omitted. Instead, the reference value is additionally displayed as peak and
rms value.
CF 978.3 MHz REAL TIME ON
Ref Lvl DEMOD BW: 100 kHz MOD SUMMARY FM
10 dBm ANALOG DEMOD

Bit No. Symbol SUMMARY

MODULATION Table FM A

FM RELATIV: -45.21 dB +
- PK/2 -58 dB RMS
REF Deviation: 10.00 kHz
- Pk 7.07 kHz RMS

SINAD 1 kHz: OFF

AUDIO FREQ: 1.001 kHz
FREQ ERROR: 101.1 Hz
CARR PWR: 7.88 dBm
FILTER: CCITT DEEMPH 50us PRE DISP ON

AM: 1.031 % +- PK/2

PM 1.011 rad+
- PK/2

Example: AVERAGE/ HOLD ON:

CF 978.3 MHz REAL TIME ON
Ref Lvl DEMOD BW: 100 kHz MOD SUMMARY FM
10 dBm ANALOG DEMOD

Bit No. Symbol SUMMARY

MODULATION Table FM A

FM RELATIV: -45.21 dB +
- PK/2 HLD -58 dB RMS AV
REF Deviation: 10.00 kHz Pk HLD 7.07 kHz RMS AV

SINAD 1 kHz: OFF

AUDIO FREQ: 1.001 kHz AV
FREQ ERROR: 101.1 Hz AV
CARR PWR: 7.88 dBm
FILTER: CCITT DEEMPH 50us PRE DISP ON

AM: 1.031 % +- PK/2

PM 1.011 rad+
- PK/2

1119.5063.12 4.189 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

SUMMARY SUMMARY The SUMMARY SETTINGS softkey opens up the

SETTINGS SETTINGS submenu for configuration of the summary of all numeric
AVERAGE/ measured values.
HOLD ON

SWEEP
COUNT
REL UNIT
% dB

INDICATION
ABS REL
SET
REFERENCE

MEAS->REF

SINAD 1kHz
ON OFF

AVERAGE/ The AVERAGE/HOLD ON softkey permits to average all

HOLD ON display values obtained in the number of sweeps defined
under Sweep Count except for the Pk values with Single
Sweep (the display No of Measurements appears in the
modulation summary, AV is indicated after the units).
The Pk values are displayed in the Pk Hold mode
(display Hold after the Pk units).
In the case of a restart, the Pk values and AV values are
reset by means of Single Sweep or by switching TRACE
AVERAGE/HOLD ON off and on.

SWEEP The SWEEP COUNT softkey sets the number of

COUNT sweeps used to determine the average or PK Hold
values (see also the corresponding softkey in analyzer
mode)).

REL UNIT The REL UNIT dB/% softkey softkey selects the unit (%
dB % and dB) with relative display (INDICATION REL) .

1119.5063.12 4.190 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

INDICATION The INDICATION ABS REL softkey switches between

ABS REL absolute (ABS, default setting) and relative display
(REL). The reference value for the relative display can
be entered by means of SET REFERENCE or MEAS→
REF.
Only the main signal can be displayed in relative mode,
the other signals are indicated in absolute display in any
case.
For relative indication, the default unit is dB and can be
changed from dB to % via the softkey REL UNIT%.

SET The SET REFERENCE softkey opens up a field for input

REFERENCE of a reference modulation (for main signal).
The peak value of the modulation is to be entered. The
rms reference value will then be peak value/√2.

The MEAS→REF softkey is used to represent the

MEAS-> REF
current absolute measured values of the main
modulation signal (+-PK/2 and RMS) as reference
values for the relative display.

REAL TIME ON only.

SINAD 1kHz
ON OFF The SINAD 1 kHz ON softkey activates the SINAD
measurement for the main modulation signal.
Irrespective of the signal applied, the main modulation
signal is compared with the main modulation signal
which is filtered by a 1-kHz notch filter. The display unit
is dB.
When a signal modulated with 1 kHz is applied, the
SINAD value is thus displayed correctly.
Default setting is SINAD 1 kHz OFF.

With REAL TIME OFF (no real-time demodulation) no

SINAD measurement is possible, the softkey cannot be
operated.

1119.5063.12 4.191 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

SUMMARY REAL TIME ON only.

MEAS TIME
The SUMMARY MEAS TIME softkey opens up a field
for entering the measuring time (as well as the
measured value update rate) for the numerical
measured values of the modulation summary.
Default setting is 100 ms
Thus, with a stationary modulation frequency of 30 (typ.
20) Hz, peak values and rms value can be determined
correctly.
The measured values are updated at least every 100
ms, ie max. 10x/s.
With a measuring time of 1 s and a stationary
modulation frequency of up to 5 Hz peak values and rms
values can be determined correctly.
The measured values are updated every second, ie
max. 1x/s.
In both cases, the peak values are measured
continuously, the time constant of the rms detector is
adapted accordingly.

SUMMARY MEAS TIME

100 ms
1 s

REAL TIME The REAL TIME ON/OFF softkey switches real time
ON OFF demodulation on or off.
For demodulation bandwidths ≤ 200 kHz, real-time
demodulation can be switched on or off.
(Off is default status).
Demodulation bandwidths > 200 kHz do not allow real-
time modulation.

1119.5063.12 4.192 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

SENSITIV REAL TIME ON only.

AF OUTPUT
The SENSITIV AF OUTPUT softkey sets the scaling of
the AF output for real-time modulation. Depending on
MEAS RESULT (AM, FM or PM signal), an input field
appears, where the modulation amplitude is to be
entered so that the dynamic range of the AF output is
fully utilized.
(Peak voltage 1V):

m[%] FOR FULL SCALE SIGNAL

20

FM DEV FOR FULL SCALE SIGNAL

100

PM DEV FOR FULL SCALE SIGNAL

SENSITIV AF OUTPUT also has an effect on the

volume of the loudspeaker and on the headphones
output.

VOLUME REAL TIME ON only

The VOLUME softkey sets the volume of the
demodulated signal (loudspeaker and headphones
output) according to the slope of the AF output.
With REAL TIME OFF (no real-time demodulation) the
outputs are switched off.
Note: If the modulation depth / deviation is very
small, the scaling of the AF output (softkey
SENSITIV AF OUTPUT) is to be matched
to achieve a usable volume.
On the other hand, the modulation depth /
deviation must not be greater than the full-
scale setting under SENSITIV AF
OUTPUT, or a distorted signal will be
obtained at the loudspeaker/headphones
output even with the volume reduced.

1119.5063.12 4.193 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Triggering with Analog Demodulation - Softkey TRIGGER or Hardkey TRIGGER

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - ANALOG DEMOD

TRIGGER The TRIGGER softkey as well as the TRIGGER hardkey

TRIGGER permit to call up the menu for setting the trigger.
FREE RUN

VIDEO
or
EXTERN
SWEEP
TRIGGER AF SIGNAL

TRIGGER
SW EEP OFFSET

SLOPE
RBW
POS NEG

VBW

SW T

COUPLING

FREE RUN The FREE RUN softkey activates a measurement without trigger. After a
measurement has been terminated, data acquisition for a new
measurement takes place immediately.

VIDEO REAL TIME OFF only.

The VIDEO softkey starts the measurement by means of the video voltage
of the analog path of the spectrum analyzer. For this purpose, the analog
video voltage of the spectrum analyzer is analyzed parallel to the vector
signal analyzer.
Video triggering is of particular use for frequency settling measurements on
synthesizers.
Video triggering requires the trigger threshold to be entered. It is identical
with the trigger threshold of the spectrum analyzer. The trigger threshold is
entered numerically into the data input field in % of the last grid that was
active in spectrum analysis mode.
The appropriate value for the trigger threshold can be determined in the
spectrum analysis mode.

EXTERN REAL TIME OFF only.

The EXTERN softkey activates triggering via an external voltage in the
range from - 5 V to + 5 V at the BNC connector EXT TRIGGER / GATE
(rear panel). Enter the desired value in the data input field.

1119.5063.12 4.194 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

AF The AF SIGNAL softkey opens up a data input field where the level of the
SIGNAL AF signal is entered as the trigger level for display of the time signal.
The AF trigger level is entered in %, Hz, deg or rad according to the current
demodulation AM, FM or PM (in the case of AM DC in the current absolute
level unit).
Triggering on the AF signal is similarly possible with REAL TIME ON/OFF.

TRIGGER REAL TIME OFF only

OFFSET
The TRIGGER OFFSET softkey opens up an input window for entry of the
desired offset with video trigger or external trigger (only with ).
The softkey cannot be operated with REAL TIME ON and REAL TIME OFF
in conjunction with AF trigger.
The trigger offset is used to determine the start of data acquisition relative to
the trigger event. Both positive values for a trigger delay and negative
values for a pretrigger are permissible.
The input is made in absolute time irrespective of the scale selected for the
X-axis.
Depending on the demodulation bandwidth, values from 1µs to at least 10
ms are permissible for positive values of the trigger offset (trigger delay).
The value range for negative trigger offset values (pretrigger) depends on
the sweep time and is maximally half the sweep time.

SLOPE The SLOPE POS/NEG softkey determines the trigger edge for triggering y
POS NEG means of the video signal, AF signal or external trigger.
The measurement run is started on a positive or negative edge of the
trigger signal. With free-running trigger ( FREE RUN), the setting is not of
any significance.

1119.5063.12 4.195 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Setting the Display Range and the Scaling - Softkey RANGE or Hardkey RANGE
The menu for setting the range differs from that in the signal analysis mode.
Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - ANALOG DEMOD
RANGE The RANGE softkey as well as the RANGE hardkey are
SCALE
used to call up a menu, which contains all the
RANGE parameters important for the vertical axis (y-axis) and
the horizontal axis of the screen display of the AF signal,
Y PER DIV
such as reference values, scaling, etc.
or REF VALUE In addition, with real-time demodulation, the slope of the
Y AXIS
AF output as well as the volume of the loudspeaker or
REF VALUE headphones connector can be set here.
LEVEL x AXIS

REF VALUE
REF POSITION

RANGE
SENSITIV
AF OUTPUT

VOLUME

SCALE
UNIT

Y PER DIV The Y PER DIV softkey indicates the vertical scaling in the current unit.
Hz or % are set for AM or FM, respectively. PM permits to choose between
the units deg and rad (default status: rad).
For the relative value display of the modulation summary, it is possible to
choose between % and dB (default setting dB).

REF VALUE The REF VALUE Y AXIS softkey prompts the user to enter the reference
Y AXIS value for the Y-axis of the diagram.
The reference value is entered in the respective display unit (see UNIT).

REF VALUE The REF VALUE POSITION softkey opens up an input window, in which
POSITION reference value positions deviating from the default setting are set.
REF VALUE POSITION determines the position of the reference value. It is
normally 50 % when the AF signal is displayed.

1119.5063.12 4.196 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

SENSITIV The SENSITIV AF OUTPUT (sensitivity AF output) softkey is used to set

AF OUTPUT the scaling of the AF output with real-time demodulation. Depending on
MEAS RESULT (AM, FM, or PM signal), an input field appears, where the
modulation amplitude is to be entered at which the dynamic range of the AF
output is fully utilized.
(Peak voltage 1V):

m[%] FOR FULL SCALE SIGNAL

20

FM DEV FOR FULL SCALE SIGNAL

100

PM DEV FOR FULL SCALE SIGNAL

SENSITIV AF OUTPUT also affects the volume of the loudspeaker and the
headphones output.

VOLUME REAL TIME ON only

The VOLUME softkey sets the volume of the demodulated signal
(loudspeaker and headphones output) according to the slope of the AF
output.

With REAL TIME OFF (no real-time demodulation) the outputs are switched
off.

Note: If the modulation depth / deviation is very small, the scaling of

the AF outputs (Softkey SENSITIV AF OUTPUT) is to be
matched to achieve a usable volume.
On the other hand, the modulation depth / deviation must not
be greater than the full-scale setting under SENSITIV AF
OUTPUT, or a distorted signal will be obtained at the
loudspeaker/headphones output even with reduced volume.

1119.5063.12 4.197 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - ANALOG DEMOD - RANGE

SCALE The SCALE UNIT softkey calls up a submenu for setting

UNIT
SCALE Y UNIT
the unit of the Y-axis .
UNIT LOG[dB] The units offered depend on the signal displayed.If a
Y UNIT marker is switched on, the marker results are output in
LINEAR the current scale units.
With ANALOG DEMODULATION, the following Y-units
UNIT DEG
are possible according to the type of modulation
AM: AM[%],
UNIT RAD FM: Hz,
PM: rad (default setting) or deg.
Y UNIT (With AM and FM, the units cannot be selected).
dBm

Y UNIT
With time display of the AM signal and AF COUPL’G DC
VOLT selected, the AM-demodulated signal is not
standardized, but scaled in absolute levels.
Y UNIT
WATT Possible units are dBm, V and W. The default unit is dBm.

X UNIT
TIME

X UNIT
SYMBOL

1119.5063.12 4.198 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

Sweep Menu with Analog Demodulation - Softkey SWEEP TIME or Hardkey

SWEEP

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - ANALOG DEMOD

SWEEP The SWEEP key calls up a menu, which permits to
determine the type of measurement - single
SWEEP CONTINOUS
TIME SWEEP measurement or continuous measurement - and the
length of the measurement results to be displayed in
SINGLE terms of time.
SWEEP
oder

SWEEP SWEEP
COUNT
TRIGGER
SWEEP
TIME
SW EEP

RBW
VBW
SW T
COUPLING

CONTINOUS The CONTINUOUS SWEEP softkey starts a continuous measurement in

SWEEP accordance with the trigger condition and the selected test settings.
Triggering is followed by data acquisition first and then by evaluation and
display on the screen.
If, with split screen display, vector analysis mode is used for measurement
in both windows, the data in the measurement RAM are used for both
evaluations.

SINGLE The SINGLE SWEEP softkeystarts n measurements in accordance with the

SWEEP trigger settings. The number of measurement runs n is determined by
means of SWEEP COUNT. The measurement stops after n measurements.
It can be restarted by pressing the SINGLE SWEEP or CONTINUOUS
SWEEP softkey again.

1119.5063.12 4.199 E-13

Analog demodulation methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

SWEEP The SWEEP COUNT softkey opens up an input field in which the number of
COUNT measurements is determined for the SINGLE SWEEP.
The number of measurements can be selected between 0 and 32767.
If averaging of the measured values is set (AVG/HOLD ON, MODULATION
MARKER: RMS to be found under the MARKER SEARCH key), SWEEP
COUNT also determines the number of measurements used for averaging.
If SWEEP COUNT = 0, 10 measured values are always used for floating
averaging.
If SWEEP COUNT = 1, no averaging takes place.
If SWEEP COUNT >1, the average is taken of the set number of measured
values.

SWEEP SWEEP TIME is used to define the time during which the demodulated
TIME signal is to be displayed.
The maximum time is determined by the demodulation bandwidth set and
the buffer length for the demodulated signal, which is 5000 points with
analog demodulation.
Thus, the following settable maximum time is obtained:

5000
SWEEP TIME max = [s]
0.8 * (DEMOD _ BW )

A minimum of 10 points can be displayed, which means for the minimum

settable time:

10
SWEEP TIME min =
0.8 * (DEMOD _ BW )
Example:
With Demod BW 1kHz, the maximum and minimum time scale is as
follows:
TIME/DIV max = 6.25 s
TIME/DIV min = 12.5 ms

RESULT The RESULT LENGTH softkey cannot be operated with ANALOG

LENGTH DEMODULATION.

1119.5063.12 4.200 E-13

 FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Analog demodulation methods

Example: Measurement of amplitude modulation

Measurement of a carrier modulated with 1 kHz, 50 % at 100 MHz, level 0 dBm

1. [PRESET] Default setting

2. [CENTER: 100 MHz] Frequency setting
3. [REF: REF LEVEL: +6 dBm] Level setting (the max. level of AM-modulated signals is 6 dB
above the nominal level with 100 % AM).
4. [MODE: VECTOR ANALYSIS] Selection of vector analysis mode The FSIQ is in the analysis
mode DIGITAL DEMODULATION (default setting).
5. [ANALOG DEMODULATION] Switch to analog demodulation. The AM-modulated signal
appears on the display (display in the time domain, the default
setting for [ANALOG DEMODULATION] is AM-SIGNAL). The
demodulation bandwidth (analysis bandwidth) is 100 kHz in the
default setting, i.e. audio signals up to max. 0.4* demodulation
bandwidth can be demodulated.
6. [DEMOD BW: 30 kHz] The demodulation bandwidth is changed eg to 30 kHz
7. [TRIGGER:AF SIGNAL 0%] Trigger setting to achieve a stable display. The display of the AF
signal at the left edge of the screen starts at 0 %.
8. [SWEEP: SWEEPTIME 100 ms] Setting of the sweep time. The sweep time depends on the
demodulation bandwidth and the sampling points provided
(=5000 with analog demodulation). With a demodulation
bandwidth of 30 kHz, the max. sweep time is 208 ms in the
default setting.
9. [SEARCH: SUM MKR ON] Activating the summary marker for numeric trace evaluation.

1119.5063.12 4.201 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Digital Demodulation Methods

Diagram for signal processing

In modern mobile radio networks digital transmission methods are used to avoid the disadvantages of a
transmission channel in mobile communication and to be able to serve more subscribers in the available
frequency spectrum. The FSIQ offers all commonly used demodulators for digitally modulated signals.
All modulation parameters for standard transmission methods can be loaded as required by the user.
The FSIQ determines all relevant modulation parameters such as frequency, phase, amplitude and
vector errors, etc. Measurements are carried out on continuous as well as pulsed signals such as TDMA
signals. Bit patterns can be defined to be able to trigger to known bit sequences like preambles or
midambles. The demodulator requires neither a coherent carrier nor a symbol clock for demodulation. It
comprises matched filters and synchronizes automatically to the carrier and to the symbol clock.
Furthermore, the demodulator can generate the ideal I/Q signal from the demodulated bit stream and
thus determine the errors of the analyzed signal.
For a correct demodulation of digital signals, a number of modulation parameters in addition to the
modulation mode has to be specified for the signal to be analyzed. The most important are the symbol
rate and the input filter. And in addition, the frequency of the FSIQ (approx. 2% of the symbol rate) has
to be tuned exactly to the frequency of the signal to be analyzed.
The bandwidth for demodulation is a function of the symbol rate and the selected oversampling method
(POINTS PER SYMBOL). At least 4-fold oversampling is performed. If the number set under POINTS
PER SYMBOL is reduced, fewer points are used in the display. The demodulation bandwidth for 1, 2
and 4 points per symbol is 3.125 times the symbol rate, with 8 points per symbol 6.5 times and for 16
points per symbol 13 times. It should be ensured that no modulation spectrum of adjacent signals is
within the displayed range during demodulation, as this may introduce errors in the measurement of
modulation parameters. If required, check for correct settings in the analyzer mode. The block diagram
below shows the digital demodulator and its measurement capabilities:

Digital
Filter
I
SYNC
SEARCH

Digital
LO
Capture Pulse I/Q Measured Siignal
A RAM Digital
Search I/Q Reference Signal
I/Q Demodulation
D Bits for Symbol Table
IF
6,4 MHz/ 90o
1,4 MHz

Digital
fa Filter
Q

I/Q Amplitude Error

I/Q Phase Error
I/Q Error
Error ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE
Calcutation
I/Q Measure Signal

I/Q-Reference Signal

Bit Strom Graphik- Display

Processing

Symbol Table

Fig. 4-18 Block diagram for signal processing during digital demodulation

1119.5063.12 4.202 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Symbol Mapping
The following types of symbol mapping are used for representing the results in the vector and
constellation diagrams (PSK, MSK, QAM) and for the time/frequency representations with FSK
modulation. The symbols are always in the binary code (MSB at left).

Phase Shift Keying (PSK)

With these modulation types, the symbol represents the absolute phase of the received signal at the
decision time. The following representations are given:
• a constellation diagram containing all symbols
• a table containing the symbol designations and the associated reference phases

With this type of phase modulation, transitions from any symbol to any other in the constellation diagram
are permitted.

BPSK QPSK (WCDMA)

Q Symbol Phase Q Symbol Phase

0 0 00 Π/4
1 Π 01 3Π/4
01 00 11 5Π/4
10 7Π/4

1 0
I I

11 10

QPSK (QCDMA FWD; WCDMA; APCO25) 8PSK

OQPSK (QCDMA REV)

Q Symbol Phase
Q Symbol Phase 010 000 0Π/4
00 Π/4 001 1Π/4
01 3Π/4 011 001 010 2Π/4
01 00 11 5Π/4 011 3Π/4
10 7Π/4 100 4Π/4
101 5Π/4
000 110 6Π/4
100
I 111 7Π/4
I

101 111
11 10
110

Fig. 4-19 Symbol mapping - phase shift keying

1119.5063.12 4.203 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

3PI/8-8PSK (EDGE)

For these modulation methods the digital information is NOT coded in the phase transitions but in the
absolute position of the constellation diagram. The constellation diagram consists of 16 points. For each
symbol transition, an offset of 3pi/8 is inserted counterclockwise.
The symbol allocation in the constellation diagram is thus only valid for the first symbol of the data
record.
Five symbol transitions with an offset of 3pi/8 each is given as an example. The modulated symbol "111"
remains constant.
This phase offset is taken into account during decoding and the display of symbols.

Q Symbol Phase
010 000 3pi/8
001 4pi/8
010 2pi/8
000 3pi/8 011 011 1pi/8
100 6pi/8
3pi/8 101 5pi/8
110 7pi/8
3pi/8 111 0pi/8
001 111
I

3pi/8 3pi/8
110
101

100

Fig. 4-20 Symbol mapping - Phase Shift Keying - EDGE

1119.5063.12 4.204 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Differential PSK
When using differential phase modulation, the symbol is the result of the phase difference between the
current and the previous decision point. The absolute position of the pointer at the decision time is
therefore not relevant. In the following diagrams, the phase transitions are shown, as examples, in the
first quadrant, while the pointers point to the constellation point relevant for the current decision time.
The signal is demodulated such that the decision times coincide with the constellation points.
The following representations are given:
• a constellation diagram containing all permissible symbol transitions
• a table containing the symbol designations and the associated phase differences

The absolute phase of the signal is not relevant for the symbol decision.

PI/4 DQPSK
The positions of the permissible constellation points is as with 8PSK. With this technique, only the phase
transitions given in the tables are permitted.

NADC, PDC, PHS, TETRA, APCO25, PWT TFTS

Phase Phase
Q Symbol difference Q Symbol difference
00 Π/4 11 Π/4
01 3Π/4 01 3Π/4
00 10 -Π/4 11 10 -Π/4
11 -3Π/4 00 -3Π/4

01 10 01 10

I I

11 00

D8PSK
The positions of the permissible constellation points is as with 8PSK. With this technique, transitions to
all 8 constellation points possible are permitted.

Phase
Q Symbol difference
000 0*Π/4
001 000 001 1*Π/4
011 2*Π/4
011
010 3*Π/4
110 4*Π/4
100 111 5*Π/4
010
101 6*Π/4
I 100 7*Π/4

110 111 101

Fig. 4-21 Symbol mapping - differential phase modulation

1119.5063.12 4.205 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)

When working with FSK demodulation, a frequency/time diagram will be displayed instead of the
constellation and vector diagrams. The symbol decision is based on the signal deviation at the decision
times.

2FSK (DECT, CT2; FLEX16_2; FLEX32_2)

With 2FSK, the symbol decision is taken by a f

simple frequency discriminator with the following
decision threshold: 1

fT = f mid
"1"

REF_DEVIATION
"1" for fE ≥ fT 
Symbol =  
"0" for fE < fT 
T

fI = instantaneous frequency
t
fT = decision threshold
"0"
fMID = middle frequency of analyzer

F0

4FSK (ERMES; MODACOM; APCO25; FLEX32_4; FLEX64_4)

With 4FSK the symbol decision is taken by a f

frequency discriminator using three decision
thresholds derived from the operating parameter 11 "11"
REF_DEVIATION:
1 FT3
fT1 = f MID - ⋅ REF_ DEVIATION
3
REF_DEVIATION

fT2 = f MID F10 "10"

1
fT3 = f MID + ⋅ REF_ DEVIATION
3 FT2
t
F01
"11" for f E ≥ fT3  "01"
"10" for f ≤ f < f 
 T2 E T3 
Symbol =   FT1
 "01" for f T1 ≤ f E < f T2 
"00" for fI < fT1 
F00 "00"

fI = instantaneous frequency
fT1 , fT2 , fT3 = decision thresholds
fMID = middle frequency of analyzer

Fig. 4-22 Symbol mapping - FSK demodulation

1119.5063.12 4.206 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Minimum Shift Keying (MSK), CDPD

Phase
Q Symbol difference
0 -Π/2
1 Π/2
1

Fig. 4-23 Symbol mapping - minimum shift keying (MSK)

DMSK (and the derived GSMK) uses additional difference coding of two subsequent symbols. Static
symbol mapping therefore does not exist.

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)

With the QAM technique, the symbols are counted linearly from right to left and from top to bottom
(linear mapping).

Note: For reliable demodulation make sure the available symbols are utilized. If only some of the
symbols or only the symbols in one quadrant are utilized, demodulation errors may occur.

Q
0011 0010 0001 0000

0111 0110 0101 0100

1011 1010 1001 1000 I

1111 1110 1101 1100

Fig. 4-24 Symbol mapping - 16QAM

1119.5063.12 4.207 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Selecting the Digital Demodulators

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER

DIGITAL
DEMOD The DIGITAL DEMOD softkey opens a list of all available demodulators .
DIGITAL
DEMODULATION

BPSK
QPSK
DQPSK
PI/4DQPSK
OQSK
8PSK
D8PSK
3π/8-8PSK
MSK
DMSK
2FSK
4FSK
16QAM
4FSK APCO25

Demodulators are provided for the two-, four- and eight-level PSK modulation
modes BPSK, QPSK and 8PSK. For QPSK and 8PSK demodulation, the
demodulators for differential signals DQPSK and D8PSK can be selected
additionally.
Demodulators are also availabe for the special versions of QPSK modulation,
such as differential QPSK with π/4 phase offset (π/4-DQPSK) and offset
QPSK (OQPSK).
QPSK is used, for instance, by the IS95- CDMA for modulating signals from
the base station to the mobile, OQPSK for signals from the mobile to the
base station. The American TDMA system NADC (IS54) uses π/4-DQPSK for
digital signal transmissions.
For higher-level modulation modes the demodulator for 16QAM is available.
MSK (minimum shift keying) demodulators pertain to the group of continuous-
phase demodulators. MSK with Gaussian filters (GMSK = Gaussian minimum
shift keying) is used for the European mobile radio systems GSM and
DCS1800 or PCS1900 in the USA. For correct bit detection for GSM, DCS
1800 and PCS 1900 and 1800 the MSK demodulator with additional
differential decoding (DMSK) should be activated.
For FSK (frequency shift keying modulation, two-level (2FSK) and four-level
(4FSK) demodulators can be selected.
2FSK modulation methods are used for instance for the digital cordless
telephone to DECT standard, 4FSK for the paging system to ERMES
standard.

1119.5063.12 4.208 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Standard Settings

To simplify the selection of parameters when standard transmission methods are used, standard setups
are available in the FSIQ. All modulation parameters and the width of the display range are set
automatically..
The following table shows available standards and respective settings.
For the GSM, DCS1800 and PCS 1900 standards the sync pattern GSM_BTS0 with the associated
synchronization offset of 61 symbols is preset in addition. When selecting the NADC standard, the
instrument is set to the burst of the base station with a slot length of 162 symbols. When selecting the
NADC FORWARD CH standard, the instrument is set to the non-burst signal of the base station with a
slot length of 162 symbols. For the burst of the mobile station, the standard length NADC REVERSE CH
must be set.
For the DECT standard the sync pattern of the fixed part DECT_FP is preset, the sync offset is set to 0.
When selecting the TETRA standard, the sync pattern Tetra_1 is preset, the sync offet is preset to 122.

Sync pattern and sync offset become active be switching FIND SYNC (menu SWEEP TRIGGER) on.

Note: The pager standards ERMES and FLEX (2FSK and 4FSK modulation) feature modulation
filters with increased bandwidth (B*T> 1). This means that with normal oversampling (4
points per symbol) there is an intolerable bandwidth restriction which causes a distinctly
higher demodulation error probability. Therefore the number of points per symbol is preset
to 8 when the ERMES standard is selected and to 16 when the FLEX standard is selected.

Attention: In case of departures from the preset value (which may happen automatically when
increasing the frame length or result length) there is a higher system error probability.

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER

DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL The DIGITAL STANDARDS softkey
STANDARDS STANDARDS STANDARDS STANDARDS
IS95-CDMA calls up a submenu of available
PDC UP CT2
FWD CH APCO25 standard setups.
IS95-CDMA If one of the following modulation
PDC DOWN ERMES
REV CH
parameters is modified, any digital
NADC W-CDMA standard that may be selected is
MODACOM
FWD CH 4.096 FWD switched off automatically:
NADC W-CDMA FLEX16_2 • Symbol rate
REV CH 4.096 REV
W-CDMA
• Measurement filter
FLEX32_2
3GPP FWD • Reference filter
W-CDMA
DECT
3GPP REV
FLEX32_4 • α/BT
CDMA 2000
PHS FLEX64_4
SR3/DS FWD

APCO25
PWT
C4FM
APCO25
TETRA EDGE CQPSK

TFTS GSM CDPD

1119.5063.12 4.209 E-13

 Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Table 4-3 Standard settings

Modulation/ Symbol Measurement Reference Alpha Synchro- Sync SYNC Points/

Standard rate filter filter BT nization Pattern OFFSET symbol
IS95-CDMA 1.2288 MHz IS95_FM IS95_FR -- -- -- -- 4
FWD CH QPSK
IS95-CDMA 1.2288 MHz IS95_FR IS95_RR -- -- -- -- 4
REV CH OQPSK
W-CDMA 4.096 MHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.22 -- -- -- 4
4.096 FWD QPSK COS
W-CDMA 4.096 MHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.22 -- -- -- 4
4.096 REV QPSK COS
W-CDMA 3.84 MHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.22 -- -- -- 4
3GPP FWD QPSK COS
W-CDMA 3.84 MHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.22 -- -- -- 4
3GPP REV QPSK COS
CDMA 2000 3.6864 MHz IS95_FM IS95_FR -- -- -- -- 4
SR3/DS FWD QPSK
EDGE 270.833 Hz EDGE_MES EDGE_REF -- BURST EDGE_BT0 61 4
8π/8-8PSK SEARCH
GSM, (DCS1800, 270.833kHz NONE GAUSSIAN 0.3 BURST GSM_BTS0 61 4
PCS 1900) MSK SEARCH
NADC FWD CH*) 24.3 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.35 SYNC NADC_S1 0 4
π/4 DQPSK COS SEARCH
NADC REV CH 24.3 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.35 BURST NADC_S1 8 4
π/4 DQPSK COS SEARCH
PDC DOWN 21 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.5 SYNC PDC_S1 57 4
π/4 DQPSK COS SEARCH
PDC UP 21 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.5 BURST PDC_S1 57 4
π/4 DQPSK COS SEARCH
PHS π/4 DQPSK 192 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.5 BURST PHS_DO1 32 4
COS SEARCH
CDPD MSK 19,2 kHz NONE GAUSSIAN 0.5 -- -- -- 4
DECT 2-FSK 1152 kHz NONE GAUSSIAN 0.5 VIDEO DECT_FP 0 4
TRIGGER
+ BURST
SEARCH
TETRA 18 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.35 BURST TETRA_1 122 4
π/4-DQPSK COS SEARCH
CT2 72 kHz NONE GAUSSIAN 0.5 BURST CT2_CFP 0 4
2-FSK SEARCH
ERMES 4-FSK 3.125 kHz NONE BESSEL 1_25 -- -- -- 8
MODACOM 4.8 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.2 -- -- -- 4
4-FSK COS
FLEX 16_2 1.6 kHz NONE BESSEL 2_44 -- -- -- -- 16
(FLEX 1600) 2-FSK
FLEX 32_2 3.2 kHz NONE BESSEL 1_22 -- -- -- -- 16
(FLEX 3200) 2-FSK
FLEX 32_4 1.6 kHz NONE BESSEL 2_44 -- -- -- -- 16
(FLEX 3200 4-FSK
FLEX 64_4 3.2 kHz NONE BESSEL 1_22 -- -- -- 16
(FLEX 6400) 4-FSK
PWT 562.5 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.5 BURST WCPE_FP1 0 4
WCPE π/4 DQPSK COS SEARCH
TFTS 22.1 kHz ROOT RAISED RAISED COS 0.4 BURST TFTS_G1 0
π/4 DQPSK**) COS SEARCH
APCO25 C4FM 4.8 kHz NONE RAISED COS 0.2 -- -- 8
APCO25 CQPSK 4.8 kHz APCO25FM RAISED COS 0.2 -- -- 4

*) The standard setting is matched to the slot of the NADC base station. As the base station doesn’t burst, the FIND BURST
function is disabled.
**) When selecting the TFTS standard, the special bit decoding is made according to the TFTS standard.

The standard settings are called up by means of the DIGITAL STANDARD softkey.

1119.5063.12 4.210 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Selecting Modulation Parameters for Digital Demodulation

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER
MODULATION MODULATION The MODULATION PARAMETERS softkey calls up a submenu for
PARAMETERS PARAMETERS
setting of the modulation parameters.
SYMBOL
RATE

SIDE BAND
NORM INV

MEAS
FILTER

REFERENCE
FILTER

ALPHA/BT

FSK REF
DEVIATION

NORMALIZE
ON OFF

SYMBOL The SYMBOL RATE softkey opens a window for entering the symbol rate of the
RATE digitally modulated signal to be measured.
The symbol rate is a function of the bit rate determined via the modulation level and
corresponds to the baud rate. With QPSK, for instance, the symbol rate
corresponds to half the bit rate (= 2 bits per symbol). Symbols are only valid while
the signal is evaluated by the receiver. The time of demodulation is the point of
decision. The demodulator of the FSIQ uses the set symbol rate to find the points of
decision.
To be able to select the correct symbols, the symbol rate has to be entered exactly.
The more complex (high-level) the modulation method, the more critical the exact
definition of the symbol rate. An inaccurately defined symbol rate causes
demodulation errors. The settings below should also be observed for selecting the
symbol rate:
• Maximum possible symbol rate is 7 MHz.
• The number of points per symbol is limited to 8 for symbol rates >200 kHz and to
4 for symbol rates >400 kHz.
• The demodulation bandwidth is limited to 8 MHz. If the symbol rate is set, the
parameter ALPHA/BT may be adjusted accordingly.

1119.5063.12 4.211 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

SIDEBAND The SIDE BAND NORM / INV (INVERTED) demodulates and inverts the
NORM INV signal received.
Thus, with FSK demodulation, the frequency states are inverted, and, with
non-FSK modulation, the I and Q signal are inverted.
Default status is SIDEBAND NORM (normal).

MEAS The MEAS FILTER softkey selects the input filter for the signal to be
FILTER measured. The required filter is selected in a table:
MEAS FILTER

None
Raised Cos
Root Raised Cos
Gaussian

apco25fm
edge_mes
edge_ref
bess1_22
bess1_25
bess2_44
is95_fm
is95_fr
is95_rm
is95_rr

Further information is given in the description of the REFERENCE FILTER

softkey.

REFERENCE The REFERENCE FILTER softkey selects the filter for the ideal reference
FILTER signal for detecting modulation errors at the baseband level. The required
filter is selected in a table:
REFERENCE FILTER

Raised Cos
Root Raised Cos
Gaussian

apco25fm
edge_mes
edge_ref
bess1_22
bess1_25
bess2_44
IS95_fm
IS95_fr
IS95_rm
IS95_rr

Predefined filters are the squarewave filter (only for setting MEAS
FILTER:NONE), the raised cosine filter, the root raised cosine filter and the
Gaussian filter. Cosine filters are generally used for PSK modulation,
Gaussian filters by MSK and FSK modulators.
The filter parameters are set via ALPHA/BT.

1119.5063.12 4.212 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

The digital demodulator of FSIQ generates two signals at the I/Q level, the
signal to be measured (MEAS SIGNAL) and the reference signal
(REFERENCE SIGNAL).

Frequency and Amplitude/ Meas Test

symbol phase signal
filter
synchronization correction (I/Q)

Reference Reference
Symbol Reference signal
filter signal
detector generator
(I/Q)
Bits for
symbol
table

The signal to be measured is present at the RF input after demodulation. The

reference signal is the signal that would be obtained in the case of an ideal
RF signal. A separate filter is provided for the signal and the reference signal.
For digital transmissions, filtering can be carried out at the transmitter or
receiver end or be split up between both. The filter at the receiver is the
measurement filter. The reference filter is used for the total system.
Depending on the configuration of filters, the following combinations can be
used:

Filters of transmission system Filters to be selected

Transmitter Receiver MEAS FILTER REFERENCE FILTER

Root-raised cos Root-raised cos Root-raised cos Raised cos

Raised Cos none none Raised cos

Gaussian none none Gaussian

If no modulation filter is provided in the transmitter, it may also be useful to

employ a RAISED COS or GAUSSIAN filter as measurement filter.
However, the non-existing band limiting at the FSIQ input may cause
unwanted aliasing products in the vector analyzer mode, which might impair
the measurement. A measurement without reference filter is not possible!

1119.5063.12 4.213 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

ALPHA/BT The ALPHA/BT softkey opens a window where the roll-off factor (ALPHA) for
the cosine filters or the bandwidth/symbol period product BT for the Gaussian
filters is entered.
If an input filter is used for demodulation or a filter for generating the
reference signal, the filter characteristic has to be determined by means of
ALPHA/BT. With Nyquist filters ALPHA has to be specified, with Gaussian
filters the product of the symbol period T and bandwidth B ( BT).
All filters are computed up to a length of 16 symbols. Permissible input values
are 0.2 to 1 in steps of 0.05. The value for ALPHA/BT applies to the
measurement and to the reference filter. Values for ALPHA or BT are
determined by the digital transmission system. These values should be used
for measurements with FSIQ as higher demodulation errors could otherwise
occur.
ALPHA describes the transmission characteristic of a Nyquist filter (cosine
filter). It is also designated as roll-off factor or bandwidth factor. The greater
ALPHA, the greater is the bandwidth occupied by the digitally modulated
signal relatives to the theoretical minimum. In digital transmission systems
typical bandwidth factors of 0.25 to 0.5 are used, ie the occupied bandwidth is
25% to 50% larger than the theoretical minimum. The bandwidth/time product
BT describes the characteristic or the bandwidth factor of Gaussian filters.

FSK REF The FSK REF DEVIATION softkey opens a window for entering the reference
DEVIATION deviation for FSK demodulation.
FSK deviation is defined as the (unilateral) deviation from the center
frequency occurring in the case of modulation with constant 0 or 1
sequences, ie the stationary value.
For 4FSK, the modulation deviation is the deviation from the center frequency
for the bit sequences causing maximum frequency deviation.
The reference deviation is used for computing the deviation error in
NORMALIZE ON mode

1119.5063.12 4.214 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

NORMALIZE The NORMALIZE ON/OFF softkey has the following effect:

ON OFF The measurement result in the vector and constellation diagram is always
normalized to a circle, the radius of which corresponds to the mean distance
between the center of the circle and the mid-points (of all groups of sampling
values).
This circle is defined as a unit circle with the radius 1.
Softkey NORMALIZE ON shifts the center of the unit circle by the I/Q offset to
the center for the group mid-points.

NORMALIZE ON is the default state:

Q

r=1

Center for Mid-point of a group

group mid-points of sampling values

Diagram in the case of NORMALIZE OFF:

r=1 I/Q Offset

Center for Mid-point of a group

group mid-points of sampling values

1119.5063.12 4.215 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Selecting Measurement Results for Digital Demodulation

After entering all modulation parameters the required measurement is selected using the MEAS
RESULT softkey. The contents of the trace memory (magnitude), the demodulated measurement
signal, the reference signal, i.e. the ideal signal derived from the measurement signal, or the error signal
can be displayed as the measurement result. The I/Q error and the vector error are the two possible
error signals. A table is available listing all errors together with the demodulated bits.

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER

MEAS The MEAS RESULT softkey opens a submenu in which the

RESULT
different displays for the measured signal can be selected.
MEAS MAGNITUDE
RESULT CAP BUFFER
The MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER, MEAS SIGNAL,
MEAS REFERENCE SIGNAL, ERROR SIGNAL and SYMB
SIGNAL TABLE/ERRORS softkeys are selection switches, i.e. only one
of the measurement results offered can be selected per screen.
REFERENCE
SIGNAL If two screens are available, (split-screen mode) a different
measurement result can be displayed in each screen.
ERROR
SIGNAL When the measurement signal, the reference signal and the
SYMB TABLE error signal are displayed, submenus are called up by the
/ERRORS corresponding softkeys and the associated parameter can be
set.

Moreover, softkeys are available for setting the memory size,

MEMORY the number of bits to be demodulated and displayed.
SIZE

FRAME
LENGTH

RESULT
LENGTH

POINTS PER
SYMBOL

Magnitude of Capture Buffer

The capture buffer is the memory comprising the samples that are entered during the storage of
measured values. These samples are used for demodulation but are retained over the complete
measurement. A reason for this is the loss in the dynamic range during the synchronization and
demodulation of the signal. For synchronization, an interpolation between the samples is necessary, for
example, for determining the symbol decision point accurately. Interpolation is always synonymous with
a loss in the amplitude dynamic range. In case of synchronization, the signal has to be normalized. The
normalization is also linked with a loss in the dynamic range.
When measuring the power ramping of a TDMA burst, a maximum dynamic range is required. This
dynamic range is obtained when using the capture buffer for samples.

1119.5063.12 4.216 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - MEAS RESULT

MAGNITUDE The MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER softkey indicates the magnitude of the
CAP BUFFER signal in the capture buffer in the time domain.
The MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER mode is therefore recommended in all
cases where power ramping of TDMA bursts should be measured with a wide
dynamic range. Timing will be accurate to less than or equal to half a clock
period of the sampling unit
Example:
A signal is sampled with 8 values per symbol. The maximum timing error of
the TDMA burst synchronized to a bit sequence is 1/16, i.e. 6.25% of the
symbol period.

Measurement of Reference Signal

The FSIQ can display both the waveform of the measurement signal, which is derived from the samples
in the baseband, and that of the reference signal. To this effect, the measurement signal is filtered and
synchronized to the carrier and the symbol clock. The I/Q offset and the amplitude reduction of the
signal is compensated prior to the display. The reference signal is generated from the demodulated bits
by modulation down to the baseband. It is identical to the measurement signal freed of modulation
errors and noise.
The output formats for the measurement signal and the reference signal are identical. The output
formats are different for FSK demodulation and thel other demodulation modes.
Output formats for non-FSK demodulation:
Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - MEAS RESULT
MEAS MEAS The MEAS SIGNAL and REFERENCE
SIGNAL SIGNAL
SIGNAL softkeys call up identical submenus.
MEAS The output formats of the two signals can be
MAGNITUDE
SIGNAL
selected there.
REFERENCE PHASE WRAP
PHASE
SIGNAL ON OFF

FREQUENCY

REAL/IMAG
PART

EYE DIAG EYE

[I] LENGTH

EYE DIAG
[Q]

EYE DIAG
TRELLIS

POLAR [IQ]
VECTOR
POLAR [IQ]
CONSTELL
SYMBOL
DISPLAY

1119.5063.12 4.217 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

MAGNITUDE The MAGNITUDE softkey displays the magnitude of the demodulated

measurement or reference signal, which is normalized to 1, as a function of
time and symbol.

PHASE The PHASE softkey displays the phase of the measurement or reference
signal.

PHASE WRAP The PHASE WRAP ON/OFF softkey activates/deactivates a phase shift.
ON OFF
The phase of a signal can have very high values due to the modulation.
Therefore, scaling should be very coarse to display the phase over many
bits. FSIQ therefore offers the phase to be shifted by means of the PHASE
WRAP ON/OFF softkey.
ON The FSIQ displays the phase in the range of ±180°. If the phase
exceeds +180°, for example, 360° is subtracted from the phase
value so that >-180° is indicated. This avoids very high phase
values to be displayed which would impair the reading accuracy.
OFF The phase is not shifted. It is displayed within the range of the Y
axis. Phase values above or below this range are cut off at the
diagram edges.

FREQUENCY The FREQUENCY softkey displays the time or symbol-dependent frequency

response of the signal, i.e., the frequency-demodulated signal. The softkey is
only available for MSK demodulation.
The frequency display is suitable for measuring the frequency deviation by
using the markers.

REAL/IMAG The REAL/IMAG PART softkey calls up the display of the real and imaginary
PART parts of the measurement or reference signal in separate diagrams.
To this effect, the diagram is split up. The real part is displayed in the upper
half whereas the imaginary part is displayed in the bottom half. The X axis
(which is scaled in time units or symbols) is identical for the two diagrams.

1119.5063.12 4.218 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Fig. 4-25 Simultaneous display of inphase and quadrature component in a

single diagram (here: screen A in split-screen display)

EYE DIAG The EYE DIAG [I], EYE DIAG [Q] and EYE DIAG TRELLIS softkeys select
[I] the various eye diagrams:
• eye diagram for the inphase signal,
• eye diagram for the quadrature signal and
EYE DIAG
[Q] • trellis diagram.
The eye diagram is the representation of inphase and quadrature signal
(EYE DIAG [I] or EYE DIAG [Q]) as a function of time. It is triggered by the
symbol clock at the points of decision. The display range of the eye
EYE DIAG diagram (number of states on the time axis) is determined by softkey EYE
TRELLIS LENGTH.
The individual traces of the eye diagram are superimposed on each other
until the number of symbols specified with RESULT LENGTH is attained.
The successive traces are the continuation of the trace written last, i.e. the
total trace is displayed in a folded form. To obtain a complete eye diagram,
all the states of a signal have to be traced at least once. The number of
eyes vertically corresponds to the number of modulation states less 1. The
eye aperture is a measure for differentiating between two decision levels. A
small eye apertures indicate a high, large eye apertures a small bit error
rate.

1119.5063.12 4.219 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

The trellis diagram is used for representing the states of continuous-phase

modulation methods (e.g. MSK). It indicates the phase versus time and
permits also phases above ±180° to be displayed. The trellis diagram is
similar to the eye diagram in that measured traces are superimposed onto
each other in the display until the number of symbols defined by RESULT
LENGTH is attained.
For the FSIQ, the trellis diagram is particularly useful for testing MSK and
GMSK modulation. The symbols are spaced by 90°. A phase shift of +90°
corresponds to logic 1, a shift of -90° to logic 0. A rising phase edge
therefore indicates a logic 1, a falling edge a logic 0. Same as with the eye
diagram, the width of the trellis diagram is defined by EYE LENGTH. To
obtain a clear display, a minimum of 5 symbols should be selected as
display width.
The number of POINTS PER SYMBOL should be as high as possible to
obtain a continuous trace in the eye diagram. 8 to 16 points are
recommended.
Meas Signal
Ref Lvl CF 890.195 MHz Eye [Q]
10 dBm SR 15.3 kHz Demod DQPSK
2

LN
T1

-2
0 SYMBOLS 200

Fig. 4-26 Eye diagram over 200 symbols of a DQPSK-modulated signal.

Display range is five symbols.

EYE The EYE LENGTH softkey determines the display width of the eye diagram
LENGTH in symbols. The number of symbols is entered in the field.
At least one symbol length or two states are required for a complete eye. To
be able to detect the errors particularly at the zero crossings, two to five
symbols are recommended. The number of symbols is limited with RESULT
LENGTH. In the case of EYE LENGTH = RESULT LENGTH, however, the
signal versus time is displayed, the eyes are no longer visible.

1119.5063.12 4.220 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

POLAR [IQ] The POLAR [IQ] VECTOR and POLAR [IQ] CONSTELL softkey display the
VECTOR trace in the form of a polar diagram. In the vector diagram, all the points are
marked. In the constellation diagram only those at the points of decision.
In the I/Q diagram, the FSIQ displays the inphase component of the signal on
POLAR [IQ] the X axis, the quadrature component on the Y axis. Each trace represents a
CONSTELL vector. The magnitude of the vector is the distance to the zero point, the
phase is the angle between the positive X axis and the vector measured
counterclockwise.
Q
90o

de
tu
ni
g
Ma
Phase
I
180o 0o

Magnitude = I2 + Q2
270 o
Fig. 4-27 Vector in the I/Q diagram

In the vector diagram the number of points between the points of decision is
determined with POINTS PER SYMBOL. For instance, if 5 points per symbol
have been selected, every 5th point is a symbol at the point of decision. The
other four points are intermediate values. The points of decision can be
marked by selecting DOTS under SYMBOL DISPLAY.
The constellation diagram displays only the measurement values at the
points of decision.

Fig. 4-28 Constellation diagram (example QPSK)

1119.5063.12 4.221 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

SYMBOL The SYMBOL DISPLAY softkey marks the symbol decision points in the
DISPLAY displayed trace. The desired form of highlighting can be selected from the
table. Points of decision can be marked by vertical lines or by means of dots.
SYMBOL DISPLAY
off
Dots
Lines

With off selected, the points of decision are not marked. When Dots are
selected, points are drawn on the trace and for Lines, (except for vector and
constellation diagrams) vertical lines are drawn between the X axis and the
trace.
For vector and constellation diagrams dots are inserted with Dots and Lines.
For the constellation diagram dots are also displayed even in the off mode.
This function is used for displaying the time characteristic of measurement
results, e.g. as an I/Q characteristic or error signal.

Output formats with FSK demodulation:

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - MEAS RESULTS
MEAS
SIGNAL
MEAS
MAGNITUDE
SIGNAL

REFERENCE
SIGNAL

FREQUENCY

EYE DIAG
[FREQ]

EYE
LENGTH

SYMBOL
DISPLAY

The MAGNITUDE softkey displays the magnitude of the demodulated

MAGNITUDE measurement or reference signal as a function of time and symbol.

1119.5063.12 4.222 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

FREQUENCY The FREQUENCY softkey displays the time- or symbol-dependent

frequency response of the signal, i.e., the frequency-demodulated signal.
The frequency display is for instance suitable for measuring the frequency
deviation by using the markers.

EYE DIAG The EYE DIAG [FREQ] softkey displays the frequency-demodulated signal
[FREQ] as a function of time. This signal is triggered by the symbol clock at the
points of decision. The display range of the eye diagram (number of states
on the time axis) is determined by EYE LENGTH.
The individual traces of the eye diagram are superimposed on each other
until the number of symbols specified with RESULT LENGTH is attained.
The successive traces are the continuation of the trace written last, i.e. the
total trace is displayed in a folded form. To obtain a complete eye diagram,
all the states of a signal have to be traced at least once. The number of
eyes corresponds to the number of modulation states less 1. The eye
aperture is a measure for differentiating between two decision levels. A
small eye apertures indicate a high, large eye apertures a small bit error
rate.

EYE The EYE LENGTH softkey determines the display width of the eye diagram in
LENGTH symbols. The number of symbols is entered in the field.
At least one symbol length or two states are required for a complete eye. Two
to five symbols are recommended however to detect the errors particularly at
the zero crossings. The number of symbols is limited by RESULT LENGTH.
In the case of EYE LENGTH = RESULT LENGTH, however, the signal
versus time is displayed, the eyes are no longer visible.

SYMBOL The SYMBOL DISPLAY softkey marks the symbol decision points in the
DISPLAY displayed trace. The desired form of highlighting can be selected from the
table. Points of decision can be marked by vertical lines or by dots..
SYMBOL DISPLAY
off
Dots
Lines

With off selected, the points of decision are not highlighted. When Dots are
selected, points are drawn on the trace and with Lines selected (except for
vector and constellation diagrams), vertical lines are drawn between the X
axis and the trace.

1119.5063.12 4.223 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Measurement of Modulation Errors

The FSIQ evaluates the modulation errors by comparing the measurement signal with the internally
generated ideal reference signal. The output formats differ depending on whether FSK demodulation is
selected or not. The different output formats of the error are selected by means of the ERROR SIGNAL
softkey.

Non-FSK demodulation:
The modulation error of the measurement signal can be displayed separately, i.e. according to
magnitude and phase, as I and Q error, error vector magnitude or, in polar diagrams, as vector or
constellation diagram.
The magnitude and phase error are determined according to the following equations:
2 2
Error signal magnitude = I2 + Q 2 - Iref + Qref and
Q Q
Error signal phase = arctan − arctan ref , where
I Iref
the real and imaginary part of the error signal are given as follows
Error signal real part = I - Iref and

Error signal imag part = Q - Qref

The magnitude of the error vector (error vector magnitude) is

EVM = (I − Iref ) 2 + ( Q − Qref ) 2

I, Q = measured I/Q component

Iref, Qref = I/Q components ideally calculated from the bit sequence.

The following vector diagram indicates the different types of errors resulting from the measurement
signal and the reference signal:

Quadrature
component
Ideal Error vector
symbol point
Qref Measured
Q symbol point

Reference
vector Amplitude
error

Phase
error

Iref I Inphase component

Phase of
error vector Error vector shifted to its origin
(polar diagram of error vector)

Fig. 4-29 Graphic display of modulation errors by means of a point of decision

1119.5063.12 4.224 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - MEAS RESULT

ERROR The ERROR SIGNAL softkey opens the submenu for selecting
SIGNAL
ERROR
the type of error to be displayed.
SIGNAL MAGNITUDE
The following types of error representation are available
• amplitude error (MAGNITUDE)
PHASE
• phase error (PHASE)
• frequency error (FREQUENCY)
FREQUENCY
• error if the real part (REAL/IMAG PART) and
REAL/IMAG • error of the imaginary part (REAL/IMAG PART)
PART
• magnitude error (ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE)

For error representation the FSIQ compares all the points of the
measurement and reference signal and displays them in the
error diagram (except for POLAR [IQ] CONSTELL). Thus, the
number of measurement results depends on the number of
ERROR VECT
MAGNITUDE
points per symbol. If only the errors are to be evaluated at the
points of decision, the number of points per symbol has to be
POLAR [IQ] set to one.
VECTOR
To maintain the correct error for discontinuous transmission,
POLAR [IQ] e.g. for TDMA methods, make sure that only valid symbols are
CONSTELL displayed. The result length and the trigger condition have to be
SYMBOL set appropriately.
DISPLAY

The MAGNITUDE softkey starts the point by point comparison of the

MAGNITUDE magnitude of the measurement signal with the magnitude of the ideal signal.
The difference of the two magnitudes is displayed..

The PHASE softkey starts the point by point comparison of the phase of the
PHASE measurement signal with the phase of the ideal signal. The difference of the
two phases is displayed as phase error.

The FREQUENCY softkey displays the frequency error. The frequency

FREQUENCY response of the measurement signal is compared with that of the ideal
reference signal and the difference between the two responses is displayed
as a function of time and symbol. The softkey is only available for MSK
demodulation .

The REAL/IMAG PART softkey displays the error of the real and imaginary
REAL/IMAG part in separate diagrams. To this effect, the measurement diagram is split
PART up. The real part is displayed in the top half and the imaginary part in the
bottom half. The X axis (time or symbols) is identical for the two diagrams.

1119.5063.12 4.225 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

ERROR VECT
MAGNITUDE The ERROR VECT MAGNITUDE softkey displays the magnitude of the error
vector versus time or symbols.

POLAR [IQ]
VECTOR The POLAR [IQ] VECTOR and POLAR [IQ] CONSTELL softkeys display the
error vector in the polar diagram. The error vector diagram and the error
constellation diagram.
With these forms of representation, the points of decision are all shifted back
POLAR [IQ] to the origin and are laid on top of each other. The errors at the points of
CONSTELL decision can thus be seen at a glance.

FSK demodulation:
Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - MEAS RESULT

ERROR The ERROR SIGNAL softkey opens the submenu for selecting
SIGNAL
ERROR
the type of error to be displayed.
SIGNAL MAGNITUDE
The following quantities can be displayed:
• Magnitude error (MAGNITUDE)
• Frequency error (FREQUENCY)
FREQUENCY

The MAGNITUDE softkey starts the point by point comparison of the

MAGNITUDE measurement signal with the magnitude of the ideal signal.
The difference of the two magnitudes is displayed.

The FREQUENCY softkey displays the frequency error.

FREQUENCY The frequency response of the measurement signal is compared with that of
the ideal reference signal and the difference between the two responses is
displayed as a function of time and symbol.

1119.5063.12 4.226 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Symbol Table and Table of Modulation Errors

The symbol table and the table with modulation errors are indicated in the same display. In this case, the
two tables are assigned to a trace. Similar to the trace display, the corresponding trace can be frozen
(VIEW) or faded out (BLANK).
The range for the error calculation can be limited by means of the time lines (TIME LINES 1/2; MARKER
SEARCH menu, SEARCH LIM ON/OFF menu).
If only one window is displayed, the symbol table is assigned to trace 1 and the error table to trace 2.

Submenu: CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - MEAS RESULT

SYMB TABLE The SYMB TABLE / ERRORS softkey displays a table of demodulated bits
/ERRORS and a table of modulation errors of the measured signal.

The symbol table shows the demodulated bits of the signal. The number of
bits is defined under RESULT LENGTH in the same menu. Bits can be
related to the traces (in split screen mode) by means of the marker
coupling. The marker on the trace and the associated symbol are marked
at the same time.
The indicated modulation errors differ depending on whether FSK signals
are demodulated or one of the other digital demodulators is active.

The following parameters are indicated as sum errors of the modulation

(except with FSK demodulation):
• Frequency error
• Magnitude error
• Phase error
• Error vector magnitude
• I/Q offset
• I/Q imbalance and
• Amplitude droop
• Rho factor.

The FSIQ evaluates these errors within the result length or in a range
limited by the vertical lines within the result length.

With FSK demodulation, the following parameters are indicated as sum

errors of the modulation:
• Frequency error
• Magnitude error
• FSK deviation
• FSK deviation error

The entered reference deviation is indicated in addition (FSK REF

DEVIATION).

1119.5063.12 4.227 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Non-FSK demodulations:

Fig. 4-30 Symbol table and table of sum errors (not FSK demodulation)

Description of errors as follows (not FSK signals):

Magnitude error: The magnitude error is the amplitude difference of the I/Q components of
measurement signal and reference signal at the points of decision. For MSK
modulations, all the points are considered in the calculation. It is a measure for the
quality of the amplitude component of the modulated signal.

Phase error: The phase error is the phase difference of the I/Q components of measurement
signal and reference signal at the points of decision. For MSK modulations, all the
points are considered in the calculation.

Vector error: The error vector magnitude is the magnitude of the error vector which links the
measured I and Q value in the complex plane to the ideal I and Q value at the points
of decision. The error is calculated according to the following equation:

Error vector magnitude (EVM) = I2err + Q 2err , where

Ierr = error of the inphase signal and

Qerr = error of the quadrature signal

Frequency error : The frequency error is the deviation of the FSIQ center frequency from the
measured carrier frequency. It is derived from the frequency shift to be effected for
synchronization to the carrier. The reference error of the FSIQ is also part of the
frequency error.

Amplitude droop: The amplitude droop indicates the amplitude variation of the signal between the two
symbols at the points of decision in dB. This parameter is very important for TDMA
signals and is a measure for the quality of pulse modulation.

1119.5063.12 4.228 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

I/Q offset: The I/Q offset is a measure for the LO feedthrough with analog I/Q modulators. It
can be seen through a shift of the zero point in the constellation diagram. Without LO
feedthrough (LO 100 % suppressed), the I/Q offset is zero. It is measured at the
points of decision.
Q
I/Q offset

Fig. 4-31 Constellation diagram with I/Q offset

Amplitude and vector errors are given in %, phase errors in degrees (deg) or radian
(rad). Prior to calculation, the measurement result is normalized in the vector or
constellation diagram to a circle around the center of the group mid-points, the radius
corresponding to the mean distance of all group mid-points to the center. This circle
is defined as a unit circle with the radius 1 (see NORMALIZE function in the
MODULATION PARAMETER menu)
Then, the errors at the points of decision are determined and the rms of the
individual error values is calculated. Since the constellation diagram is normalized,
the result is the rms value of the error in %.

I/Q imbalance: The I/Q imbalance is a measure for the symmetry of the I/Q modulator to be
measured. The I/Q gain error is the result of unequal gain factors in the I and Q path
of the transmitter. The I/Q imbalance is calculated from the square root of the
quotient of the vector magnitude for the wanted and interfering signals averaged
over all points of decision:

n 2
Interferencevector
I / Q imbalance = 100 * ∑ 2 [%]
i =1 Signal vector
Ideal
constellation point
Interference vector
Q

Offset-corrected
center
Signal vector
I

Fig. 4-32 Constellation diagram with I/Q imbalance

1119.5063.12 4.229 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Rho factor: Similar to the error vector magnitude, the Rho factor is a measure for the quality of
digital modulation. It is determined by measurement of the normalized correlated
power between the measured signal and reference signal (IS95-CDMA to US
standard IS-98) and is designated as waveform quality factor.
The Rho factor can assume a maximum value of 1.0 (measured signal and
reference signal are a 100% identical).
FSK demodulation:

Fig. 4-33 Symbol table and table of sum errors (FSK demodulation)
The various errors and measured values have the following meaning (FSK signals):

FSK deviation: The FSK deviation is determined by the square difference between measure-
ment and reference signal being minimized. The reference signal is based is
formed on the basis of the known demodulated bits and modulation
parameters. The frequency offset is determined separately and indicated
under Freq Error. The frequency error is not considered in the indicated FSK
deviation.
FSK deviation error: The FSK deviation error is the deviation difference between the measured
signal and the reference signal, measured as an rms and peak value over all
symbols. Frequency errors (frequency offset) are part of the indicated FSK
deviation error.
Normalize ON The entered FSK reference deviation is used for scaling of
the reference signal.
Normalize OFF The reference signal is automatically derived from the
measurement signal on the basis of the known
demodulated symbols and modulation parameters so as to
ensure maximum agreement between measurement and
reference signal.
Magnitude error: With FSK, the magnitude error is the deviation of the individual amplitudes of
the AM envelope from the mean (rms) carrier amplitude, measured as an rms
value over all symbols displayed and as a peak value normalized to the rms
amplitude in %.
Frequency error: The frequency error is the deviation of the FSIQ center frequency from the
measured carrier frequency. It is derived from the frequency shift to be
effected for synchronization to the carrier. The reference error of the FSIQ is
also part of the frequency error.

1119.5063.12 4.230 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

Selecting Memory Size, Demodulation Length and Display Range

The size of the capture buffer containing the stored samples, the frame length to be demodulated and
displayed and the number of points per symbol can be set to allow an adaptation to the measurement or
to optimize the measurement speed.
At the beginning of a measurement, the FSIQ stores the samples into the capture buffer which can be
selected between 1 and 16-k symbols. It then tries to find the suitable frame length for further
processing according to the trigger condition (FIND BURST). The frame length to be displayed or used
for error calculation is defined with RESULT LENGTH. It can be positioned within the frame length by
synchronization sequence triggering (FIND SYNC).

MEMORY SIZE

FRAME
LENGTH
RESULT
LENGTH

Trigger:
Free Run Find Burst Find Sync
Video
Extern

Finally, the number of points per symbol can be set. This number defines the maximum number of
symbols that can be processed in the FRAME LENGTH.

Submenu CONFIGURATION MODE - VECTOR ANALYZER - MEAS RESULT

MEMORY The MEMORY SIZE softkey calls up a table in which the number of samples
SIZE saved in the capture buffer per measurement is determined. Within the
memory size a burst, e.g. in the case of a TDMA signal, can be searched
for (FIND BURST function).
MEMORY SIZE
16384 POINTS
8192 POINTS
4096 POINTS
2048 POINTS
1024 POINTS

Only the symbols entered under FRAME LENGTH are used for
demodulation.
For symbol rates > 1 MHz the data are stored in the memory without prior
filtering and reduction. The maximum memory size is therefore reduced to
4096 points.

1119.5063.12 4.231 E-13

Digital Modulation Methods - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

FRAME The FRAME LENGTH softkey calls up a table in which the number of
LENGTH symbols to be demodulated or evaluated is defined.

FRAME LENGTH
1600 SYMBOLS
1500 SYMBOLS
1400 SYMBOLS
1300 SYMBOLS
1200 SYMBOLS
1100 SYMBOLS
1000 SYMBOLS
900 SYMBOLS
800 SYMBOLS
700 SYMBOLS
600 SYMBOLS
500 SYMBOLS
400 SYMBOLS
300 SYMBOLS
200 SYMBOLS
100 SYMBOLS

With up to 4 points per symbol a maximum of 1600 symbols can be

demodulated per measurement and their modulation parameters measured.
With 8 points per symbol up to 800 symbols, and with 16 points per symbol
up to 400 symbols can be handled.
With symbol rates >1 MHz to ≤1.20 MHz a maximum of 500 symbols can be
handled. This is due to the fact that the data are stored in the memory without
prior reduction. The subsequent reduction limits the FRAME LENGTH in the
specified frequency range.
The frame length markedly influences the time required for evaluating a
measurement signal. It is therefore recommended to choose the frame length
as short as possible. 400 symbols, for example, are sufficient for determining
the phase error of a GSM burst as only 147 symbols are to be evaluated. The
FSIQ automatically searches for the correct time domain by trigger functions
FIND BURST and FIND SYNC .
The choice of the frame length influences the maximum number of points per
symbol. With up to 400 symbols a maximum of 16 points, with >400 up to
800 symbols a maximum of 8 points and with >800 symbols a maximum of 4
points per symbol is possible.
With symbol rates >1MHz to ≤1.20 MHz, the maximum number of
symbols is 500!

1119.5063.12 4.232 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Digital Modulation Methods

RESULT The RESULT LENGTH softkey opens a window for defining the number of
LENGTH symbols for display on the screen.
The maximum result length is identical to the frame length.
With the FIND SYNC function activated (synchronization to bit sequences in
the signal), the maximum result length can be reduced (or the frame length
increased).

POINTS PER The POINTS PER SYMBOL softkey opens a window for entering the number
SYMBOL of points per symbol.
1, 2, 4, 8 and 16 points per symbol can be selected. With one point per
symbol, each point in the display corresponds to a symbol sampled at the
time of decision. With n points per symbol, each n-th value is a point of
decision. With 1 and 2 points per symbol, the FSIQ demodulates with 4 points
per symbol for reasons of accuracy. Only one or two samples are output,
however.
For up to 4 points per symbol, a frame length of max. 1600 symbols is
possible, with 8 points per symbol a frame length of max. 800 symbols and
with 16 points per symbol of max. 400 symbols.
In the case of MSK demodulation, the number of points per symbol
influences the result of the error measurement as all the points are
considered in the calculation. With all other demodulators, only the values
measured at the points of decision are taken into account. For GSM
(DCS1800 and PCS1900) less than 4 points per symbol should not be used.
The number of points per symbol largely influences the measurement speed
attained during the evaluation of the signal. If high measurement rates are to
be attained for automatic tests, for example, a low number of points per
symbol is recommended.

1119.5063.12 4.233 E-13

Frequency Settings - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Frequency Settings- FREQUENCY Key Group

Setting the Frequency - CENTER Key
In vector signal analysis, FSIQ is always set to a fixed frequency. The RF signal is analyzed by
converting the signal into the complex baseband.

The frequency of FSIQ is set in the same way as in the spectrum analysis mode, i.e. with the CENTER
key in the FREQUENCY key group.
FREQUENCY CENTER menu
FREQUENCY CENTER The CENTER key calls up the entry window for the
CENTER center frequency .
CENTER SPAN FREQUENCY
For the demodulation of digitally modulated signals, the
FSIQ frequency has to be accurately set to the frequency
START STOP (carrier) of the signal to be measured so that
synchronization to the carrier is possible. The required
setting accuracy depends on the symbol rate and must
not exceed 2% of the symbol rate.

FREQUENCY
OFFSET

FREQUENCY The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the input of a frequency

OFFSET offset which can be added to the frequency-axis labeling. The displayed
frequency is shifted by the frequency offset. The range of values for the
offset is -100 GHz to +100 GHz.

Setting the Frequency Span - START, STOP, and SPAN Key

The SPAN, START and STOP keys are not assigned in vector signal analysis for the demodulation of
digitally modulated signals since FSIQ is always set to a fixed frequency and the measurement results
are displayed in the time domain. The analysis bandwidth by which the demodulation is performed is
predefined by the symbol rate and the number of sampling points.

1119.5063.12 4.234 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input

Setting the Reference Level
With spectrum analysis (ANALYZER mode) of the FSIQ, the level applied to the RF input is always
indicated on the display so that one can see the relationship between the setting of the reference level
and the measurement results on the display.

With vector signal analysis, this only applies to operating mode DIGITAL DEMODULATION, MAG CAP
BUFFER In operating mode DIGITAL DEMODULATION with activated demodulation , e.g. when the
demodulated signal is displayed this relationship is not obvious. That is why a strict distinction has to be
made between setting the reference value which is an important reference point for the measured-
value display and the reference level relating to the RF input.

To obtain a maximum dynamic range it is important for the signal level at the A/D converter to be close
to the maximum level of the converter. The maximum level of the converter corresponds to the
reference level (REF LEVEL) in the spectrum analysis mode. This means that a signal whose amplitude
attains the reference level in the spectrum analysis mode is ideal for the vector analyzer mode. An
important factor is the sum level within the IF bandwidth (=ANALOG BANDWIDTH in vector signal
analysis mode) of the analyzer.

The reference level can be manually set by checking the signal level in the spectrum analysis mode
against the set frequency (at the same IF bandwidth!) and by operating the vector analyzer with the
same setting.
The FSET can perform this in vector signal analysis but also by a single automatic setting of the
reference level.

Certain settings of the spectrum analysis mode such as center frequency, reference level and
attenuation are taken over by the vector signal analysis. Parameters that are not affected are span (in
vector signal analysis, the frequency span has a different meaning: it corresponds to the analysis
bandwidth and is thus independent in the two operating modes), resolution bandwidth, ref. level offset as
well as trace and trigger settings

The reference value (REF VALUE) of the vector signal analysis is the reference point for scaling the
measured value. Apart from DIGITAL DEMODULATION-RESULT DISPLAY-MAGNITUDE CAP
BUFFER it is decoupled from the setting of the reference level, i.e. a direct relationship cannot be
determined.

With the REF key, the reference level can be set like in the spectrum analysis mode.

The RANGE key calls up a menu comprising all the settings required for scaling the measured value
such as auto scaling (AUTO SCALE), scaling (Y per Div), reference values in the X and Y direction
(X/Y_REF VALUE) and the relative position of the reference value on the diagram ( REF VALUE
POSITION).

1119.5063.12 4.235 E-13

Level Display/RF Input - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

LEVEL REF Menu

REF LEVEL The REF key calls up the menu for setting the reference
LEVEL
REF LEVEL level and at the same time activates the level entry field.

REF RF LEVEL Operation and softkey functions identical to analyzer

OFFSET mode:

RA E ATTEN STEP 1dB/10dB

RF ATTEN MANUAL
ATTEN AUTO NORMAL
ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE
ATTEN STEP ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST
1dB 10dB
MIXER LEVEL
RF ATTEN
MANUAL

ATTEN AUTO
Softkey ATTEN STEP 1dB/10dB is only available when
NORMAL the FSIQ is equiped with option FSE-B13, 1dB
attenuator
ATTEN AUTO
LOW NOISE

ATTEN AUTO
LOW DIST

MIXER
LEVEL

REF LEVEL The REF LEVEL softkey activates entry of the manual gain of the FSIQ. For
a maximum dynamic range, it has to be ensured that the A/D converter is
driven to its full range but not overdriven.
In the vector analyzer mode, this is indicated by the messages IF OVLD
(overload) and UNLD (underrange) which inform on the dynamic range
when measured data are read in.
When IF OVLD is displayed, the instrument or the A/D converter is
overdriven during data read-in and entered data are invalid.
With UNLD displayed, the A/D converter is not sufficiently driven during
data read-in (level <-6 dB of full range). Indicated values may have a
reduced dynamic range, i.e. have a greater error.
For a correct level setting in the case of IF OVLD, reduce the REF LEVEL
(continuous sweep mode) in sufficiently small steps (e.g. 2 dB) until the
message disappears.
Proceed analogously for increasing the REF LEVEL when UNLD is
displayed until the message disappears.
The maximum dynamic range is attained approx. 1 dB below the OVLD
level.

The reference level can also be set to the test signal in the spectrum
analysis mode at the same IF bandwidth as in the vector signal analysis
mode (with COUPLED: ANALOG BW AUTO also 10 kHz) and vector signal
analysis can then be selected again.

1119.5063.12 4.236 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

REF LEVEL The REF LEVEL OFFSET softkey activates the entry of a level offset.
OFFSET It is added to the measured level, irrespective of the unit used. The scaling
of the Y axis is changed accordingly.
This function is used to take into account the effect of an external attenuator
on the displayed values.
The setting range is ± 200 dB in 0.1 dB steps.

Setting the Display Range and Scaling - RANGE Key

The menu for setting the display range is different from that of the spectrum analysis mode.
LEVEL RANGE menu

LEVEL LEVEL The RANGE key calls up a menu comprising all the
RANGE
important display parameters such as reference value,
REF
scaling etc.
Y PER DIV
RANGE
REF VALUE
Y AXIS

REF VALUE
X AXIS

REF VALUE
POSITION

SCALE
UNIT

Y PER DIV The Y PER DIV softkey calls for the entry of the vertical scaling in the
current unit.
For vector or constellation diagrams, the corresponding X scaling is linked
with Y scaling:
X PER DIV =5/4 *(Y PER DIV)
Reason: The diagram has 400 x 500 points. In case of a free X scaling
circles would be reproduced as ellipses.

REF VALUE The REF VALUE Y AXIS and REF VALUE X AXIS softkeys call for the entry
Y AXIS of the reference value for the Y or X axis of the measurement diagram. The
REF VALUE X AXIS softkey is only displayed if a polar diagram has been
selected for the trace.
REF VALUE The reference value is entered in the corresponding unit of the diagram
X AXIS (See UNIT).

1119.5063.12 4.237 E-13

Level Display/RF Input - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Example 1: Constellation diagram: y reference value: +1.20; x reference value: - 0,35

(reference position: 50%)

Fig. 4-33 Representation of the reference values in the constellation diagram

Example 2: Display of I and Q signals: Y reference value: -0.2 REF position: 50%

Fig. 4-34 Display of I and Q signals

1119.5063.12 4.238 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Level Display/RF Input

REF VALUE The REF VALUE POSITION softkey opens a window for setting the reference
POSITION positions diverging from the basic setting.
REF VALUE POSITION defines the position of the reference value. It normally
lies at 100%, i.e. the maximum displayable Y value is also the reference value.
It is best to use this setting for displaying the magnitude which is then the basic
setting.
When, for example, the timing of I/Q signals or the phase spectrum is displayed
it might be desirable to set the reference value to the center. The basic setting
is thus 50% (also for polar diagrams).

Submenu: LEVEL RANGE

SCALE The SCALE UNIT softkey calls up a submenu in which

UNIT
SCALE Y UNIT
the unit of the Y axis and the X axis are set.
UNIT LOG[dB] The units offered depend on the setting of RESULT
Y UNIT DISPLAY and MEAS RESULT.
LINEAR
The logarithmic unit dB (Y UNIT [dB] ) or dimensionless
linear units (Y UNIT LINEAR) are permissible for the Y
UNIT DEG
axis.
ERROR and MAGNITUDE are displayed in the following
UNIT RAD
units:
Y UNIT Y UNIT LOG [dB]: dB
dBm
Y UNIT LINEAR : %.
Y UNIT Errors of REAL/IMAG PART are always displayed in %.
VOLT
Phase errors are displayed in DEG or RAD, frequency
Y UNIT errors in Hz.
WATT
Units which are not allowed in the current operating
mode are disabled.
In polar diagrams, the units for the X-axis and Y-axis are
X UNIT
TIME equal. The softkeys X UNIT... are suppressed.
The time representation, the units time (X UNIT TIME) or
X UNIT
SYMBOL symbols (X UNIT SYMBOLS) can be used for the
X-axis. The softkey for the X-axis unit are only shown in
time representation.
If a marker is active, the marker values are read out in
the current scale units.
Only for MEAS RESULT: MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER:
Possible display units: YUNIT LOG [dB], YUNIT LINEAR,
dBm , Volt and Watt.

1119.5063.12 4.239 E-13

Level Display/RF Input - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Table 4-4 Allocation table of selectable units or, in case of error display, of the displayed units in
operating mode DIGITAL DEMODULATION depending on RESULT DISPLAY and MEAS
RESULT

RESULT MAGNITUDE MAGNI- PHASE FREQUENCY REAL/ EYE POLAR POLAR

DISPLAY CAP TUDE [with FSK and IMAG DIAG [IQ] [IQ]
------------------- BUFFER MSK only] PART VECTOR CONSTELL
MEAS RESULT

MEAS Y_UNIT Y_UNIT DEG/RAD Hz Y_UNIT Y_UNIT Y_UNIT Y_UNIT

SIGNAL LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR LINEAR
Y-UNIT
LOG[dB] Y-UNIT
dBm LOG[dB]
VOLT
WATT

REFERENCE -- like like like like like like like

SIGNAL MEAS MEAS MEAS MEAS MEAS MEAS MEAS
SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL
ERROR -- [%] PHASE Hz -- - - -
DEG/RAD
SIGNAL [dB]
VECTOR -- [%] DEG/ -- [%] - [%] [%]
ERROR
[dB] RAD

Configuration of RF Input in Vector Signal Analysis

This section is identical to that of the spectrum analysis mode.

INPUT Note: The operating mode recommended for the vector

RF ATTEN analyzer input is ATTEN AUTO NORMAL.
INPUT MANUAL
If ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE is set (or for
ATTEN AUTO MIXER LEVEL ≥ –30 dB), the higher signal
NORMAL modulation occuring within the IF-bandwidth
ATTEN AUTO
causes a nonlinear behavior in the IF branch.
LOW NOISE This leads to increased measurement errors, in
particular for modulation types with a non-
ATTEN AUTO constant level (e.g. PSK).
LOW DIST

MIXER
LEVEL
ATTEN STEP
1 dB 10dB

INPUT
SELECT

1119.5063.12 4.240 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Main Marker

MARKER Key Group

In the vector analyzer mode markers may be used for highlighting points in a trace and for reading out
measured values.
For detailed information see section ’Marker Function’ in chapter ’Analyzer Mode’.
In the vector analyzer mode marker softkey functions depend on the selected measurement.

Main Marker - NORMAL Key

The main markers and their functions are selected with the NORMAL key.
MARKER NORMAL menu
MARKER MARKER The NORMAL key calls up a menu comprising all
NORMAL
standard marker functions.
NORMAL SEARCH MARKER 1
Activated marker functions are indicated by a dark
background of the softkeys. If no marker is activated
MARKER 2
when the NORMAL key is pressed, MARKER 1 is
D TA MKR activated as a reference and set to the maximum value
in the curve. (automatic switch-on of peak search
function provided at least one trace is active; not with
POLAR MKR
R/I MA/PH
polar diagram). In all other cases the reference marker is
activated but no automatic peak search is performed.
POLAR MKR
DEG RAD In the marker field the marker position (time), the
measured value or values (in the case of a complex
COUPLED
MARKERS display) and the trace relevant for the marker (here [T1])
are displayed.
Example:
Marker display in the digital demodulation and I/Q display
mode:
MARKER Marker 1 [T1/3] 22.3 µs
INFO Real 0.998
ALL MARKER Imag -0.124
OFF
When the symbol table is displayed (softkey SYMB
TABLE/ERRORS in submenu MEAS RESULT) the
marker moves from symbol to symbol in the table. The
position of the marker is indicated by a dark background
and its numerical value in inverse video.
In the marker field, the marker position and the decimal
value of the symbol are displayed.

MARKER The MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 softkeys switch the respective marker on or
NORMAL off or define it as an entry marker (reference marker).
MARKER 1

MARKER 2

1119.5063.12 4.241 E-13

Main Marker - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

POLAR MKR The POLAR MARKER R/I / MA/PH softkey selects magnitude and phase
R/I MA/PH (MA/PH) or real and imaginary part (R/I) for the numeric result display in the
polar diagram.
When measured values are indicated versus time this softkey is disabled.

POLAR MKR The POLAR MARKER DEG/RAD softkey selects the unit degree (DEG) or
DEG RAD radiant (RAD) for indication of the phase of the marker in the respective
diagram.

COUPLED The COUPLED MARKER softkey couples markers (and delta markers) of
MARKERS different traces in the combined display mode REAL/IMAG PAR. In this case
the X position of corresponding markers is identical.
This allows complex marker values to be displayed which correspond to the
polar display.

Marker 1 6.75 SYM [T1/3]

RE 0.895
IM 1.002
If several windows are displayed, the markers of all windows are coupled
when the COUPLED MARKERS function is active.

1119.5063.12 4.242 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Main Marker

ALL MARKER The ALL MARKER OFF softkey switches all markers including reference and
OFF delta markers off and closes the marker entry window. In addition the
MARKER INFO softkey is switched off.

MARKER The MARKER INFO softkey allows several markers to be displayed in the
INFO grid, in addition to the display of marker information in the marker field of the
diagram headline.
In the top right-hand corner of the grid the two markers or delta markers are
displayed with symbols ∇/∆, marker number (1, 2), position and measured
value (may be complex). The number of symbols for specifying the marker
position is limited in certain cases.
If there are not enough lines for displaying all active markers and delta
markers, the markers are listed first and then the delta markers.
In the SPLIT SCREEN display this list is divided into two lists, one for
SCREEN A and one for SCREEN B.

1119.5063.12 4.243 E-13

Delta Marker - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Delta Marker - DELTA Key

MARKER DELTA menu

DELTA The DELTA key in the MARKER key group selects the
MARKER MARKER
delta markers.
NORMAL SEARCH DELTA 1
Delta markers are always referenced to the active
reference marker . When no marker is active, switching
DELTA 2
on a delta marker automatically activates marker 1. Delta
DELTA MKR
markers are displayed as an unfilled symbol . When
the delta marker is active for entry, a filled symbol is
displayed.

DELTA MKR
ABS REL

ALL DELTA
OFF

DELTA The DELTA 1 and DELTA 2 softkeys switch on delta markers 1 and 2.
MARKER
Operation of delta markers is identical to that of markers. When a delta
DELTA 1
marker is switched on, all entries apply to the delta marker. For changing
the position of the main marker, the main marker has to be reactivated.
DELTA 2 Displayed differences normally apply to the active reference marker.
In the delta marker field, the number of the delta marker, the time
difference to the reference marker and the difference of measured values
between the active delta marker and reference marker are displayed.

DELTA MKR The DELTA ABS / REL softkey switches between absolute (ABS) and
ABS REL relative (REL) input of time of the delta marker.
Default setting is REL (input relative to the reference marker)

ALL DELTA The ALL DELTA OFF softkey switches off all active delta markers and any
OFF associated functions.

1119.5063.12 4.244 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Search Menu

Search Functions (Marker Search menu) - SEARCH Key

The menus called up with SEARCH offer functions for a peak/min search and universal marker
functions for overall evaluation of traces. The search functions can be used for markers and delta
markers.
Important: With polar diagrams, peak/min. peak values refer to the vector length (with origin as
reference), in all other cases to the Y deflection. In this diagram, summary markers cannot
be switched on or are not displayed.
Functions in the MARKER SEARCH menu refer to the marker or delta marker active during entry.
Switchover between the active marker and delta marker is possible with the ACTIVE MKR DELTA
softkey.
If no marker is switched on when the SEARCH key is pressed, marker 1 is activated as reference
marker (by means of peak search).
The search range can be limited by time lines (TIME LINE 1/2) switched on with SEARCH LIM ON/OFF.
The limitation of the search range is valid for all the marker search functions including the SUMMARY
MARKERS and for error calculation during SYMB TABLE/ERRORS.
The time lines are only visible for diagrams versus time, i.e. not for polar diagrams and for diagrams of
SYMB TABLE/ERRORS. The limitation of the search range is valid for SEARCH LIMITS ON for all
diagrams irrespective of whether the time lines are visible or not.
MARKER SEARCH menu
MARKER MARKER SUMMARY
SEARCH MARKER
NORMAL SEARCH
PEAK MAX |PEAK|

MIN + PEAK
DELTA MKR

MAX |PEAK| - PEAK

SUM MKR
+
- PEAK/2
ON OFF
SUMMARY
MARKER RMS

MEAN

SEARCH LIM PEAK HOLD

ON OFF ON OFF

AVERAGE
ON OFF
SWEEP
SELECT COUNT

ACTIVE ALL SUM

MKR DELTA MKR OFF

The search range can be limited by the time lines (TIME LINE 1/2) (softkey SEARCH LIM ON/OFF).
The limitation of the search range extends to all marker search functions including the SUMMARY
MARKER as well as to error calculation during SYMB TABLE/ERRORS.
The time lines are only visible for diagrams versus time, ie not for polar diagrams and for diagrams
representing SYMB TABLE/ERRORS . The limitation of the search range during SEARCH LIM ON
extends to all types of representation, irrespective of whether the time lines are visible or not.
The functions in the MARKER SEARCH menu refer to the marker or delta marker that is currently active
for entries. Softkey ACTIVE MKR DELTA may be used to switch between the active marker and the
active delta marker. If no marker is switched on before SEARCH is pressed, marker 1 will be activated
as reference marker (with peak search).

1119.5063.12 4.245 E-13

Search Menu - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

ACTIVE The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey switches over between active marker
MKR DELTA
and active delta marker.
With DELTA highlighted, subsequent search functions are carried out with
the active delta marker.
Note: Switchover between marker and delta marker entry is also
possible with the NORMAL and DELTA keys.

SELECT The SELECT MARKER softkey opens the table for selection of the marker
MARKER or delta marker.

MAX |PEAK| The MAX |PEAK| softkey sets the active marker or delta marker to the
highest magnitude displayed (PEAK or MIN) in the associated curve.
For instance, the function searches for the maximum phase error of a
signal, which may be positive or negative.

PEAK The PEAK softkey sets the active marker or delta marker to the highest
value displayed in the associated measured curve.

MIN The MIN softkey sets the reference marker to the lowest value in the
associated curve.

SEARCH LIM The SEARCH LIMIT ON/OFF switches between limited (ON) and unlimited
ON OFF (OFF) search range.
The search range can be limited by time lines (TIME LINE1/2) for peak-
and min-search functions as well as for the summary markers.
If SEARCH LIMIT is ON, a search for the corresponding signals is only
performed between the two lines.
If only one line is switched on, TIME LINE 1 is valid as lower limit (the
upper limit is the stop frequency), TIME LINE 2 defines the upper limit
value.
If no line is active, lines 1 and 2 are switched on automatically and
positioned to 20 % and 80 % of the grid.
If the function is switched off, the lines continue to be switched on.
Time lines are not visible for polar diagrams and for Symb Table/Errors.
The limitation of the search range, however, remains effective.
Default value is SEARCH LIMIT OFF.

1119.5063.12 4.246 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Search Menu

The Summary Marker

MARKER SEARCH menu
SUM MKR The SUM MKR softkey switches the display of the summary marker values
ON OFF in the marker info field on and off. The measured values are updated after
every sweep end (in case of AVG/HOLD OFF).
If one trace is in AVERAGE, MAX HOLD or MIN HOLD mode, the
summary markers for this trace cannot be switched on.
On the other hand, the summary markers are switched off if the trace
functions AVERAGE, MAX HOLD or MIN HOLD are activated (only valid
for the same trace).
The maximum and average values can be maintained or displayed for all
summary markers by means of function HOLD ON/OFF or AVERAGE
ON/OFF if Sweep Count >0.

Example:
Marker info field for :
Summary Marker: + PEAK and MEAN switched on, PEAK HOLD ON and
AVERAGE ON:

1 63. sym
MAGN CAP 2.40 Watt
+PEAK HOLD 2.55 Watt
+PEAK AV 2.39 Watt
MEAN HOLD 2.33 Watt
MEAN AV 2.29 Watt

The measurement range can be restricted by means of the function

SEARCH LIMITS ON and the time lines (TIME LINE 1,2).

SUMMARY The SUMMARY MARKER softkey calls up the submenu for

MARKER
selecting the summary marker values to be displayed in the
SUMMARY
MARKER
MAX |PEAK| marker info field.
The measured values are updated for every sweep.
+ PEAK (In case of setting SYMB TABLE/ERRORS the marker info field
is not displayed).
- PEAK

± PEAK/2

RMS

MEAN

PEAK HOLD
ON OFF

AVERAGE
ON OFF

SWEEP
COUNT

ALL SUM
MKR OFF

1119.5063.12 4.247 E-13

Search Menu - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

MAX |PEAK| The MAX |PEAK| softkey selects the measurement of the magnitude of the
higher of the two peaks +PEAK and -PEAK per sweep.
The search range can be limited by means of function SEARCH LIMITS
ON.
With the PEAK HOLD function activated, the highest peak value that has
occurred since the activation of PEAK HOLD is displayed.
With the AVERAGE function activated, the highest peak values are
averaged and displayed.

+PEAK The +PEAK softkey selects the measurement of the positive peak value
per sweep.
The search range can be limited with the function SEARCH LIMITS ON.
With the PK Hold function activated, the highest positive peak value that
has occurred since the activation of PEAK HOLD is displayed.
With the AVERAGE function activated, the positive peak values are
averaged and displayed.

-PEAK The -PEAK softkey selects the measurement of the negative peak value
per sweep.
The search range can be limited with the function SEARCH LIMITS ON.
With the peak hold function switched on, the highest negative peak value
that has occurred since the activation of PEAK HOLD is displayed.
With the AVERAGE function switched on, the highest negative peaks are
averaged and displayed.

±PEAK/2 The ±PEAK softkey selects the measurement of the average value of the
positive and negative peak value per sweep.
The search range can be limited with the SEARCH LIMITS ON function.
With the peak hold function switched on, the highest average value that
has occurred since the activation of PEAK HOLD is displayed.
With the AVERAGE function switched on, the average values of the
positive and negative peak value (versus time) are averaged and
displayed.

RMS The RMS softkey selects the measurement of the rms value of the signal
per sweep.
The search range can be limited with the SEARCH LIMITS ON function.
With the peak hold function switched on, the highest rms value that has
occurred since the activation of the PEAK HOLD function is displayed.
With the AVERAGE function switched on, the rms values are averaged
versus time and displayed.

1119.5063.12 4.248 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Search Menu

MEAN The MEAN softkey selects the measurement of the average value of the
signal per sweep. Thus, the average carrier power can be measured during
a GSM burst (during display of MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER).
The search range can be limited with the SEARCH LIMITS ON function.
With the peak hold function switched on, the highest average value that
has occurred since the activation of PEAK HOLD is displayed.
With the AVERAGE function switched on, the average values (of a trace)
are averaged versus time and displayed.

PEAK HOLD The PEAK HOLD ON / OFF softkey switches the peak hold function of the
ON OFF summary markers on or off.
All active summary markers are only updated after every sweep end if
higher values have occurred.
The measured values can be reset by switching the PEAK HOLD ON /
OFF softkey off and on again.

AVERAGE The AVERAGE ON / OFF softkey switches the averaging of the summary
ON OFF markers on or off.
The measured values can be reset by switching the AVERAGE HOLD ON
/ OFF softkey off and on again.

SWEEP The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of
COUNT measurements (sweeps) in the SINGLE SWEEP mode.
The number of measurements can be selected between 0 and 32767.
If an averaging of measured values or the peak hold mode is set, SWEEP
COUNT also determines the number of measurements required for
averaging or maximum averaging.
SWEEP COUNT = 0 10 measured values are always required for a
running averaging.
SWEEP COUNT = 1 no averaging is performed.
SWEEP COUNT > 1 averaging is performed over the set number of
measured values.
In case of CONTINOUS SWEEP the FSET (AVERAGE ON) performs an
averaging until the number of sweeps set under SWEEP COUNT is
attained and then performs a running averaging.
Maximum averaging is infinite irrespective of SWEEP COUNT.

Note : This setting is equivalent to the settings in the menus TRACE and
SWEEP-SWEEP.

ALL SUM The ALL SUM MKR OFF softkey switches off the summary markers.
MKR OFF

1119.5063.12 4.249 E-13

MKR -> Menu - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Varying Instrument Settings by means of Markers - MKRÐKey

MARKER MKRÐ menu

MARKER MARKER The MKR -> key calls up a menu which offers functions
for varying instrument parameters by means of the
NORMAL SEARCH PEAK
currently active marker. Same as in the SEARCH menu,
the functions are also valid for the delta markers.

DELTA MKR The selection of marker or delta marker depends on the

currently active frequency entry for marker or delta
marker. If no entry is active, the marker with the lowest
number is activated as reference marker.

MKR-
TRACE

SELECT
MARKER

ACTIVE
MKR DELTA

PEAK To simplify operation, the PEAK search function is also available in the
Marker→ menu.

MKR The MKR → TRACE softkey opens a window in which the marker can be
TRACE
positioned on a new trace. Only selectable traces are displayed in the
window.

SELECT The SELECT MARKER softkey opens the table for selection of the marker
MARKER or delta marker.

ACTIVE The ACTIVE MKR / DELTA softkey is used for switchover between active
MKR DELTA
marker and delta marker.
With DELTA activated (highlighted), the following marker functions are
carried out with the active delta marker.
Note: Switchover between marker and delta marker entry is also
possible by means of the NORMAL and DELTA keys.

1119.5063.12 4.250 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Display Lines

Setup of Display and Limit Lines – LINES Key Field

Display Lines – D LINES Key
Display lines are aids which, similar to markers, make the evaluation of measurement curve data more
convenient. The function of display lines is similar to that of a movable scale which can be used to
measure absolute and differential values on measurement curves.
In addition, the display lines can also be used to limit the range of search for marker functions.

In vector analyzer mode, the FSIQ provides four different types of display lines:
• two horizontal threshold lines for marking measurement values or for defining measurement value
search ranges – Display Line 1/2,
• two vertical time lines for marking times or for defining time search ranges – Time Line 1/2,
• a threshold line which, for example, sets the search threshold for maximum values (Peak Search) –
Threshold Line
• a reference line – Reference Line

For purposes of clarity, each line is annotated on the right side of the display diagram by the following
abbreviations:

D1 Display Line 1 D2 Display Line 2

T1 Time Line 1 T2 Time Line 2
TH Threshold Line REF Reference Line

The lines for level, threshold and reference are displayed as continuous, horizontal lines over the full
width of the diagram. They are movable in the y-direction.
The lines for time are displayed as vertical, continuous lines over the total height of the diagram. They
are movable in the x-direction.

For measurement operations in two separate windows, (Split Screen-Modus), the display lines are
available independently in both windows. In the currently active window, the display lines can be
activated and/or shifted. Lines previously defined in the currently inactive window remain unchanged.

Note: The softkeys for setting and switching the display lines on and off operate similar to a three-
position switch:
Initial condition: The line is switched off (softkey has grey background)
1st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is
activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the roll-
key, the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry
keypad. If some other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is
disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green
background).
nd
2 press: The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background).

Initial condition: The line is switched on (softkey has green background)

1st press: The line is switched on (softkey has red background) and data entry is
activated. The position of the display line can be adjusted by using the roll-
key, the step keys or through direct numerical inputs via the data-entry
keypad. If any other arbitrary function is requested, the data-entry keypad is
disabled. In this case, the display line remains switched on (softkey has green
background).
nd
2 press: The display line is switched off (softkey has grey background).

1119.5063.12 4.251 E-13

Display Lines - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Menu LINES-D-LINES

D LINES
LINES DISPLAY
LINE 1
D LINES
DISPLAY
LINE 2

LIMI THRESHOLD
LINE

REFERENCE
LINE

TIME/SYMB
LINE 1

TIME/SYMB
LINE 2

DISPLAY The DISPLAY LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the display lines on/off and activate
LINE 1 the entry of the line location.
The display lines mark the selected levels in the measurement window.
DISPLAY
LINE 2

THRESHOLD The THRESHOLD LINE softkey switches the threshold line on/off and
LINE activates the entry of the line location.
The threshold line is a display line which defines a threshold value. This
threshold value serves as a lower search limit for maximums/minimums in
the marker functions (MAX PEAK, MIN PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc.).

REFERENCE The REFERENCE LINE softkey switches the reference line on/off and
LINE activates the entry of the line position.

TIME/SYMB The TIME/SYMB LINE 1/2 softkeys switch the time lines 1/2 on/off and
LINE 1 activate the entry of line locations.
The time lines mark the selected times or define the search range (see
section "Marker Functions").
TIME/SYMB
LINE 2

1119.5063.12 4.252 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Limit Lines

Limit Lines – LIMITS Key

Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or error boundaries on the display screen which are not
to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper limits for modulation errors which are permissible
from a Unit Under Test (UUT). For transmission of information in TDMA (e.g. GSM), the amplitude of
the bursts in a time slot must adhere to a curve which must fall within a specified tolerance band. The
lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then, the amplitude curve can be controlled
either visually or automatically for any violations of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).

The FSIQ supports up to 300 limit lines, each of which may have a maximum of 50 data points. For
each limit line, the following characteristics must be defined:

• The name of the limit line. The limit line can be specified for time units or symbols. Time units can be
entered as absolute time or time in relation to set reference time. Symbols can be entered as
absolute symbols or symbols in relation to set reference symbol

• The reference of the interpolation points to the X-axis. The limit line may be specified either for
absolute times or for times which are related to the time on the left edge of the diagram.

• The reference of the interpolation points to the Y-axis. The limit line can be selected either for
absolute levels or voltages or referred to the set maximum level (Ref Lvl). If the reference line is
switched on, it is used as reference when relative setting has been selected.

• The type of limit line (upper or lower limit). With this information and the active limit checking function
(LIMIT CHECK softkey), the FSIQ checks for compliance with each limit.

• The limit line units to be used. The units of the limit line must be compatible with the vertical axis in
the active measurement window.

• The measurement curve (trace) to which the limit line is assigned. For the FSIQ, this defines the
curve to which the limit is to be applied when several traces are simultaneously displayed.

• For each limit line, a margin can be defined which serves as a threshold for automatic evaluation.

• In addition, commentary can be written for each limit line, e.g., a description of the application.

In the LINES LIMITS menu, the compatible limit lines can be enabled in the LIMIT LINES table. The
SELECTED LIMIT LINE display field provides information concerning the characteristics of the marked
limit lines. New limit lines can be specified and edited in the NEW LIMIT LINE and EDIT LIMIT LINE
sub-menus, respectively.

1119.5063.12 4.253 E-13

Limit Lines - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

LINES LIMIT menu

USER
LINES
LIMIT
LINES
D LINES SELECETED LIMIT LINE SELECT
Name: GSM22UP Limit: LOWER LIMIT LINE
Domain: TIME X-Axis: LOG
NEW LIMIT
LIMITS Unit: dB X-Scaling: ABSOLUTE
LINE
Comment: Line 1 Y-Scaling: RELATIVE
EDIT LIMIT
LIMIT LINES LINE

COPY
NAME COMPATIBLE LIMIT CHECK TRACE MARGIN
LIMIT LINE
GSM22UP off 1 0 dB
GSM22LO on 1 0 dB

DELETE
LIMIT LINE

X OFFSET

Y OFFSET

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN

Press ENTER to activate / deactivate Limit Line

Limit Line Selection

The SELECTED LIMIT LINES table provides information about the
characteristics of the marked limit line :
Name name
Domain time domain (unit: seconds or symbols)
Unit vertical unit
Comment commentary
Limit upper/lower limit
X-Axis linear or logarithmic interpolation
X-Scaling absolute or relative times
Y-Scaling absolute or relative Y-units
The characteristics of the limit line are set in the EDIT LIMIT LINE (= NEW
LIMIT LINE) sub-menu.

SELECT The SELECT LIMIT LINE softkey activates the LIMIT LINES table and the
LIMIT LINE selection bar jumps to the uppermost name in the table.
The columns contain the following information:
Name Enable the limit line.
Compatible Indicate whether the limit line is compatible with the
measurement window of the given trace.
Limit Check Activate automatic violation check for upper/lower limits.
Trace Select the measurement curve to which the limit is assigned.
Margin Define margin.

1119.5063.12 4.254 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Limit Lines

Name and Compatible - Enabling limit lines

A maximum of 8 limit lines can be enabled at any one time. A check mark at
the left edge of a cell indicates that this limit line is enabled. A limit line can
only be enabled when it has a check mark in the Compatible column, i.e.
only when the vertical scales are identical to those of the display in the
measurement window.
Lines with the unit dB are compatible to all dB(..) settings of the Y-axis.
If the trace assigned to a line is not switched on, the line is displayed in the
window the trace would be displayed in.
Example:
In split screen mode, trace 2 is assigned measuring window B. A line
assigned to trace 2 is always displayed in measurement window B.
If the scale of the Y-axis is changed, all non-compatible limit lines are
automatically switched off in order to avoid misinterpretation. The limit lines
must be enabled anew when the original display is re-displayed.

Limit Check - Activate automatic limit violation check

When LIMIT CHECK ON is activated, a GO/NOGO test is performed. In the
center of the diagram, a display window appears which indicates the results
of the limit check test:
LIMIT CHECK: PASSED No violations of active limits.

LIMIT CHECK: FAILED One or more active limit lines were violated. The
message contains the names of the limit lines
which were violated or whose margins were not
complied with.

LIMIT CHECK: MARGIN The margin of at least one active limit lines was
not complied with, however, no limit line was
violated. The message contains the names of the
limit lines whose margins were not complied with.

The following example shows 2 active limit lines:

LIMIT CHECK: FAILED
LINE VHF_MASK: Failed
LINE UHF2MASK: Margin

A check for violations of limit lines takes place only if the limit line of the
assigned measurement curve (trace) is enabled.
If LIM CHECK is set to OFF for all active limit lines, then the limit line check is
not executed and the display window is activated.

Trace - Select the trace to which the limit line is assigned.

The selection of the measurement curve (trace) takes place in an entry
window. Allowed are the integer entries 1, 2, 3 or 4. The default setting is
trace 1. If the selected limit line is not compatible with the assigned
measurement curve, then the limit line is disabled (display and limit check).

1119.5063.12 4.255 E-13

Limit Lines - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Margin - Setting a margin.

The margin is defined as the signal-level distance to the limit line. When the
limit line is defined as an upper limit, the margin means that the level is below
the limit line. When the limit line is defined as a lower limit, the margin means
that the level is above the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no
margin).

COPY The COPY LIMIT LINE softkey copies the data file describing the marked
LIMIT LINE limit line and saves it under a new name. In this way, a new limit line can be
easily generated by parallel translation or editing of an existing limit line. The
name can be arbitrarily chosen and input via an entry window (max. of 8
characters).

X OFFSET The X OFFSET softkey activates the entry of the value for horizontally shifting
a limit line which has been specified for relative times (X-axis).

Y OFFSET The Y OFFSET softkey activates the entry of the value for vertically shifting a
limit line, which has relative values for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such
as volt).

DELETE The DELETE LIMIT LINE softkey erases the selected limit line. Before
LIMIT LINE deletion, a message appears requesting confirmation.

PAGE UP The PAGE UP softkey sets the limit line table to the next page.

PAGE DOWN The PAGE DOWN softkey sets the limit line table to the previous page.

1119.5063.12 4.256 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Limit Lines

Entry and Editing of Limit Lines

A limit line is characterized by

• its name
• the unit of the time data points
• the vertical unit
• linear or logarithmic interpolation
• the scaling in absolute or relative times
• the vertical scaling
• the definition of the limit line as either upper or lower limit.
• the data points for time and level or modulation measurement values.

At the time of entry, the FSIQ immediately checks that all limit lines are in accordance with certain
guidelines. These guidelines must be observed if specified operation is to be guaranteed.

• The times for each data point must be entered in ascending order, however, for any single time, two
data points may be input (vertical segment of a limit line).
The data points are allocated in order of ascending time. Gaps are not allowed. If gaps are desired,
two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled.
• The entered times must not necessarily be selectable in FSIQ. A limit line may also exceed the
specified time domain and negative times may also be entered. The allowable range is -1000 s to
+1000 s.
• The minimum/maximum value for a limit line is -200 dB to +200 dB for the logarithmic or 10-20 to
10+20 or-99.9% to + 999.9% for the linear amplitude scales.

1119.5063.12 4.257 E-13

Limit Lines - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

LINES LIMIT-EDIT LIMIT LINE menu

EDIT LIMIT NEW LIMIT The EDIT LIMIT LINE and NEW LIMIT LINE softkeys both call the EDIT
LINE LINE LIMIT LINE sub-menu used for editing limit lines. In the table heading,
the characteristics of the limit line can be entered. The data points for
time and level values are entered in the columns.

Name Enter name.

x-Unit Selection of unit.
y-Unit Selection of vertical unit.
X-Axis Selection of interpolation
X-Scaling Entry of absolute or relative values for the X-axis
Y-Scaling Entry of absolute or relative values for the Y-axis
Limit Select upper/lower limit.
Comment Enter comments.
Time Enter time for the data points.
Limit/dB(..) Enter magnitudes for the data points.

USER
EDIT
EDIT LIMIT LINE TABLE LIMIT LINE
Name: GSM_MNM NAME
x-Unit: s
y-Unit dB
x-Axis LOG VALUES
x-Scaling RELATIVE
y-Scaling RELATIVE INSERT
Limit: LOWER LINE
Comment: GSM PWR VS TIME. VSA MODE NO.
DELETE
Time LIMIT/dB 26 LINE
-271.380 us -100 0000
-271.380 us -1 000 SHIFT X
271.380 us -1 000 LIMIT LINE
271.380 us -100 0000
SHIFT
EDIT Y
LIMIT LINE

SAVE
LIMIT LINE

PAGE UP

PAGE DOWN
49
Press
25 ENTER to edit field. 50

1119.5063.12 4.258 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Limit Lines

NAME The NAME softkey enables the entry of characteristics in the table heading.

Name - Enter name

A maximum of 8 characters are permitted for each name. All names must be
compatible with the MS DOS conventions for file names. The instrument
stores all limit lines with the .LIM extension.

x-Unit - Select the unit (TIME)

Only time domain is available in vector analyzer mode. Possible units are s or
Symb.

y-Unit - Select the vertical unit for the limit line (LIMIT)
The selection of the unit is made in the selection box. The default setting is
dBm.

X-Axis - Indication of interpolation

Linear or logarithmic interpolation can be carried out between the reference
points of the table. Selection is via the ENTER key which is toggled between
LIN and LOG (toggle function).

Scaling - Select absolute or relative scaling

The limit line can either be scaled in absolute or relative units. Any of the unit
keys may be used to toggle between ABSOLUTE and RELATIVE, the cursor
must be positioned in the X-Scaling or the Y-Scaling line.
X-Scaling ABSOLUTE The times are interpreted as absolute physical
units.
X-Scaling RELATIVE In the data point table, the times are referred to the
left boundary of the diagram.
Y-Scaling ABSOLUTE The limit values refer to absolute levels or
voltages.
Y-Scaling RELATIVE The limit values refer to the reference level (Ref
Level) or, in case a reference line is set, to the
reference line.
Limit values with the units dB or % are always
relative values.
The RELATIVE scaling is always suitable, if masks for bursts are to be
defined.
An X-offset with half the sweep time may be entered in order to shift the
mask into the center of screen.

Limit - Select upper/lower limit

A limit line can be defined as either an upper or lower limit.

Comment - Enter comments

Comments are arbitrary, however, they must be less than 40 characters long.

1119.5063.12 4.259 E-13

Limit Lines - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

VALUES The VALUES softkey activates the entry of the data points in the table
columns Time and Limit/dB..
The desired time data points are entered in ascending order (two repeated
time values are permitted).

INSERT The INSERT VALUE softkey creates an empty line above the current cursor
VALUE position where a new data point may be entered. However, during the entry of
new values, it is necessary to observe an ascending order for time.

DELETE The DELETE VALUE softkey erases the data point (complete line) at the
VALUE cursor position. All succeeding data points are shifted down accordingly.

SHIFT X The SHIFT X LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
LIMIT LINE limit line may be shifted parallel in the horizontal direction.
The shift takes place according to the horizontal scale in ns, µs, ms or s
In this manner, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an
existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally and stored (SAVE LIMIT
LINE softkey) under a new name (NAME softkey).

SHIFT Y The SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE softkey calls an entry window where the complete
LIMIT LINE limit line may be shifted parallel in the vertical direction.
The shift takes place according to the vertical scale:
– for logarithmic units, relative, in dB
– for linear units, as a factor
In this manner, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an
existing limit line which has been shifted vertically and stored (SAVE LIMIT
LINE softkey) under a new name (NAME softkey).

SAVE The SAVE LIMIT LINE softkey stores the currently edited limit line. The name
LIMIT LINE can be entered in an input window (max. 8 characters)

PAGE UP The PAGE UP softkey displays the next page of data points.

PAGE DOWN The PAGE DOWN softkey displays the previous page of data points.

1119.5063.12 4.260 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Traces

Selection and Setting of Traces - TRACE Key Group

The function of keys TRACE 1 to 4 in vector signal analysis is largely identical with the function in
ANALYZER mode as long as traces are displayed. If numeric values or tables (e.g. SYMBOL TABLE)
are displayed, they are also linked with a trace (some of the trace functions are not available then).

Example: In diagram SYMB TABLE / ERRORS the symbol table refers to trace 1 and the error table to
trace 2 (not for SPLIT SCREEN!) .

TRACE TRACE 1 The TRACE keys 1 to 4 call up a menu in which the

CLEAR/ selected trace can be set.
1 2 WRITE

VIEW

3 4
BLANK

CONTINUOUS
WRITE

AVERAGE

MAX HOLD

MIN HOLD

SWEEP
COUNT

CLEAR/ The CLEAR/WRITE softkey displays a new trace for each measurement
WRITE or outputs a measured value. Values from previous measurements are
deleted.

VIEW The VIEW softkey freezes the current contents of the trace memory and
displays them. If the device setting is changed, the displayed trace does
not change. The measurement data are then invalid with reference to the
current setting. This is shown by the enhancement label "*" at the right grid
end.

BLANK The BLANK softkey blanks the trace or the measured values on the
display. They are internally stored so that they can be displayed again with
the aid of VIEW. The markers linked to a trace are also deleted with
BLANK, but restored after reactivating the trace with VIEW or CLEAR/
WRITE.

1119.5063.12 4.261 E-13

Traces - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

CONTINUOUS The CONTINUOUS WRITE softkey outputs measured values for each
WRITE sweep or displays a trace without clearing the previous measurements.
This function can be useful for the display of the constellation or eye
diagram, where test runs are required for in-depth information.

AVERAGE The AVERAGE softkey switches the trace averaging on. The average value
is derived from several sweeps.
After switch-on of averaging, the first trace is written in the CLEAR/WRITE
mode. Successive averaging is performed from the second sweep.
Averaging is restarted if the AVERAGE softkey is pressed. The trace
memory is then deleted. This is also the case if the trace memory is set to
VIEW or BLANK in the AVERAGE position.
If the AVERAGE function is active, the highest values are indicated for peak
values (incl. AMPLITUDE DROOP) for the display of the error table. A
square averaging is performed for RMS values. For all other displays a linear
averaging is performed.
Switch-on of function AVERAGE on a trace where the summary markers are
active results in a switch-off of summary markers.
On the other hand, summary markers cannot be activated on a trace if one of
the AVERAGE (or MAX HOLD or MIN HOLD) functions is switched to this
trace.

For description of average procedure see ’Traces - TRACE Key Group’ in

chapter ’Analyzer mode.

SWEEP The SWEEP COUNT softkey activates the entry of the number of sweeps
COUNT required to perform the averaging.
The permissible range of values for the Sweep Count is 0 to 32767. In case
of 0, the FSIQ carries out a running averaging over 10 sweeps in the Average
mode. No averaging is performed in case of 1.

The default setting is 10 sweeps (Sweep Count = 0). Programming of course

influences the sweep duration. The number of sweeps required for averaging
or the average time are identical for all 4 traces.

Note: This sweep number setting in the trace menu is equivalent to that of
the sweep menu. If both averaging and hold functions of the
summary markers or trace averaging (or MAX HOLD or MIN HOLD)
are active on different traces, the SWEEP COUNT counter
simultaneously refers to summary markers and trace averaging.

1119.5063.12 4.262 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Traces

MAX HOLD The MAX HOLD softkey activates peak-value averaging.

For every sweep run, the FSIQ identifies the highest value and compares it
with the current value. The highest of the two values is then stored in the
updated trace memory. Thus, the maximum value of a signal can be
evaluated over several test runs.

The trace memory is deleted by pressing the MAX HOLD softkey again.
Peak-value averaging is started again.

MIN HOLD The MIN HOLD softkey activates minimum-value averaging. For every sweep
run, the FSiq identifies the smallest of the two values and compares it with
the current value. The smallest of the two values is then stored in the updated
trace memory. Thus, the minimum value of a signal can be evaluated over
several test runs.
The trace memory is deleted by pressing the MIN HOLD softkey again.
Minimum averaging is stared again.

1119.5063.12 4.263 E-13

Sweep Setup - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

SWEEP Key Group

Setting the Analog Bandwidth - COUPLING Key
In the vector analysis mode, bandwidth limiting is not at the IF but in the baseband by means of digital
filtering. The analog IF filters only serve for attenuating far off signals. The IF filters are set more broadly
as required by the signal to be measured in order to increase the measurement accuracy. Thus, the
measurement signal is less distorted by the amplitude and phase response of the IF filtering.
SWEEP COUPLING menu
COUPLED The COUPLING key calls up the menu for setting the analog
SWEEP FUNCTION
bandwidth.
IF BW
TRIGGER AUTO

IF BW The MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH softkey in the side menu is without

SWEEP
AUTO function in vector analyzer mode.

RBW

VBW
SWT

COUPLING

IF BW The IF BW AUTO, the FSIQ automatically sets the resolution bandwidth to the
AUTO maximum 10-MHz bandwidth for digitally modulated signals.

IF BW The IF BW MANUAL softkey opens a window for entering the bandwidth for the
MANUAL analog prefiltering.
With IF BW MANUAL, the FSIQ can be manually set. When the demodulators
are used for digitally modulated signals, the minimum analog bandwidth
corresponds to the set symbol rate. Since modulation errors increase when
narrow analog bandwidths are selected because of the amplitude and phase
distortions, UNCAL is displayed for analog bandwidths below 10 times the
symbol rate.
Bandwidths below 1 kHz cannot be set as the smallest bandwidth implemented
by analog filtering is 1 kHz. When a smaller bandwidth than permitted is set, the
FSIQ signals:
RBW out of range

1119.5063.12 4.264 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Sweep Setup

Sweep Setup - SWEEP Key

Menu SWEEP SWEEP
SWEEP The SWEEP key calls up a menu in which the type of
SWEEP
CONTINUOUS measurement - single or continuous measurement - and the
TRIGGER SWEEP measurement result length to be displayed in time or symbols
are defined.
SINGLE
SWEEP
SW EEP

RBW
SWEEP
VBW COUNT
SWT
COUPLING

RESULT
LENGTH

CONTINUOUS The CONTINUOUS SWEEP softkey starts a continuous measurement after

SWEEP defining the trigger condition and selected measurement settings. Following
triggering, the measured values will be collected and then evaluated and
displayed.
If, for split screen display, measurements in both windows are in the vector
analysis mode, data in the measurement RAM are used for the two
evaluations.

SINGLE The SINGLE SWEEP softkey starts n measurements with the given trigger
SWEEP settings. The number of sweeps n is determined with SWEEP COUNT. The
measurement is stopped after n measurements. It can be restarted by
pressing SINGLE SWEEP again or by CONTINUOUS SWEEP.

SWEEP The SWEEP COUNT softkey opens a window for entering the number of
COUNT measurements for the single sweep
The number of measurements can be selected between 0 and 32767.
With averaging of measured values set, SWEEP COUNT also determines
the number of measurements required for averaging.
SWEEP COUNT = 0 10 measurements are used for a running averaging.
SWEEP COUNT = 1 no averaging is performed.
SWEEP COUNT >1 averaging is performed for the set number of
measurements.

RESULT The RESULT LENGTH softkey defines the number of symbols or the time
LENGTH slot to be displayed. The maximum number of symbols that can be
displayed is equal to the frame length.

1119.5063.12 4.265 E-13

Sweep Setup - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Triggering Data Storage - TRIGGER Key

The trigger in the vector analyzer mode determines the time from which data are stored in the result
memory. For the demodulation of digitally modulated signals, the time reference can also be obtained by
synchronization to a given bit sequence or, for TDMA signals, by searching for a burst in the result
memory.

Menu: SWEEP TRIGGER

TRIGGER The TRIGGER key opens a menu in which the different trigger
SWEEP
sources can be set and trigger slopes selected.
TRIGGER
FREE RUN

VIDEO
S P

EXTERN
RBW
TRIGGER
VBW
OFFSET
SWT
SLOPE
COUPLING POS NEG

MEAS ONLY
IF SYNC’D

FIND BURST
ON OFF

FIND SYNC
ON OFF
SYNC
OFFSET
SYNC
PATTERN

FREE RUN The FREE RUN softkey activates the measurement without trigger. After a
measurement, the memory is prepared to store data for a new measurement.
The free-run mode is recommended if a continuously modulated signal is
applied to the RF input or, for TDMA signals, the capture time is long enough
to enter a full burst into the result memory.
The capture time is influenced by the memory size (max. 16384 points), the
set symbol rate as well as the number of points per symbol.

VIDEO The VIDEO softkey starts the measurement by the video voltage of the analog
path of the spectrum analyzer. Parallel to the vector signal analyzer, the analog
video voltage of the spectrum analyzer is evaluated.
Video triggering calls for the entry of the trigger threshold. It is identical to the
trigger threshold of the spectrum analyzer. The entry of the trigger threshold
into the data window is numeric in % of the last grid which has been active in
the analyzer mode.
To determine a suitable value for the trigger threshold it is possible to switch to
the display MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER or to measure the threshold in the
analyzer mode.

1119.5063.12 4.266 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Sweep Setup

EXTERN
The EXTERN softkey activates triggering by means of an external voltage
between -5 V to +5 V at the rear BNC connector EXT TRIGGER / GATE. The
desired value is to be entered into the window.

TRIGGER The TRIGGER OFFSET softkey opens a window for entering the desired
OFFSET offset.
With TRIGGER OFFSET, the start time for the data storage relative to the
trigger event is determined. Both positive values (for a trigger delay) and
negative values (for a pretrigger) are permitted.
Entry is in absolute time independent of the scaling of the X axis.
For positive values of the trigger offset (trigger delay), values from 1 µs to at
least 10 ms are permitted, depending on the symbol rate and the number of
points per symbol. The range of values for negative trigger offsets (pretrigger)
depends on the selected memory size and is not more than half the memory
size.

MEAS ONLY Softkey MEAS ONLY IF SYNC’D sets the vector analyzer so that measure-
IF SYNC’D
ments are performed if synchronization to the selected sync pattern was
possible.
The measured values are displayed and taken into account in the error analysis
only if the set sync pattern is found. Bursts with a wrong sync pattern (sync not
found) are ignored.
If an invalid sync pattern is found or if there is none, the measurement is halted
and continued in the presence of a valid sync pattern.
This softkey is available only if FIND SYNC = ON.
The default setting is OFF. If the digital standard is changed, OFF is always
activated.

Example:
An EDGE-compatible base station can send EDGE and GSM bursts at different
times. The demodulator thus sees EDGE (8PSK) and GSM bursts (GMSK).
If GSM is activated in the vector analysis, the measurement and error analysis
are disturbed by an EDGE burst. This can be prevented by activating softkey
MEAS ONLY IF SYNC’D. The EDGE bursts are ignored in the error analysis.

SLOPE The SLOPE POS/NEG softkey determines the trigger slope in case of
POS NEG triggering by means of the video signal or external trigger.
The sweep starts after a positive or negative slope of the trigger signal. With a
free-running trigger the setting is irrelevant.

1119.5063.12 4.267 E-13

Sweep Setup - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

FIND BURST The FIND BURST ON/OFF softkey searches for a burst in the stored data
ON OFF (within the entered memory size), demodulates it within the entered frame
length and displays it with the set result length.

The FIND BURST mode is particularly useful for TDMA signals if a burst is to
be completely displayed (and would otherwise not be demodulated due to the
mark-to-space ratio at the maximum setable frame length of 800 symbols). The
time required for searching for a burst is determined with memory size.
A burst must have a minimum length of 30 symbols to be identified.
Digital communication systems operating according to the TDMA access
methods transmit or receive information in the form of bursts. The carrier power
is only switched on for a certain time. The transmitter switches the carrier on if
an information is to be transmitted and switches it off again.

Min. switch- Burst Min. switch-

off time length off time

Repeat time

The carrier power is switched off between two bursts. With FIND BURST, the
FSIQ earches for a complete burst, i.e. for a carrier that can be switched on
and off. If no complete burst is found within the search time, the message
BURST NOT FOUND is displayed.
If a trigger (video or extern) is used for the storage of the measured values, a
negative trigger offset (pretrigger) is recommended so that a sufficiently long
switch-off time of the carrier is available at the beginning of the search time.
The search time has at least to be as long as the burst length plus twice the
switch-off time to ensure that the burst is found.
For a free-running trigger, set the length of the captured data (MEMORY SIZE)
to a minimum (repeat time + 2 x switch-off time + burst length) so that the burst
can be found.
The FSIQ centers the number of symbols ( FRAME LENGTH) required for
demodulation as well as the displayed symbols (RESULT LENGTH) to the
center of the found burst (FIND SYNC OFF).
MEMORY SIZE

FRAME LENGTH
RESULT
LENGTH

Burst
middle

Min. switch- Burst Min. switch-

off time length off time
Trigger
(optional)

1119.5063.12 4.268 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Sweep Setup

FIND SYNC The FIND SYNC ON, softkey searches for a defined bit sequence (sync
ON OFF pattern) within the set frame length. The measurement result is displayed with
the set result length with reference to the first symbol of the synchronization
sequence.
If the synchronization sequence is not found, a result is still output according to
the set result length. The message: SYNC NOT FOUND is then output.
Centering the burst on the middle of the picture cannot be carried out if the
burst is found at the very beginning of the data set (of the memory size) and a
Result Length >Burst Length + 2×20 symbols is set. A precondition for burst
recognition is that before the rising edge measured values corresponding to at
least 20 symbols are present in the current trace memory. In this case, the
burst is represented from the first measured value in the trace memory.
If the consequent centering of the burst is indispensable for the user, the result
length has to be reduced according to the above precondition.
In case of FIND BURST ON and FIND SYNC ON, the FSIQ only centers the
frame length to the center of the burst while the result length is displayed from
the beginning of the bit sequence (in case of SYNC OFFSET 0) or around the
SYNC OFFSET.

MEMORY SIZE

FRAME LENGTH
RESULT
SYNC PATTERN LENGTH

Burst
middle
Burst-
Min. switch- Min. switch-
length
off time off time

1119.5063.12 4.269 E-13

Sweep Setup - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

SYNC The SYNC OFFSET softkey opens a window for entering the offset in symbols.
OFFSET
SYNC OFFSET defines the display time prior to the synchronization sequence
in SYNC SEARCH. It thus determines the position of the displayed trace or
symbols (result length) within the demodulated signal (frame length). The
modulated signal may have a preamble or a midamble. Depending on the
configuration it is thus desirable to display the measurement signal from a
synchronization sequence or prior to the synchronization sequence.
Frame Length
Data Sync Data

Result Length
Offset = 0 Sync Data
Result Length
Offset < 0 Sync Data

Result Length
Offset > 0 Data Sync Data

A positive or a negative offset can be set.

The minimum or maximum offset depends on the following parameters:
• frame length
• result length and
• position of the sync sequence in the burst

In order to find the sync sequence correctly regardless of its position within the
burst and to obtain enough measured values for the diagram, the FRAME
LENGTH for the FIND SYNC function should be set at least twice as large as
the RESULT LENGTH.
Any offset can basically be entered provided that the measurement result is
within the FRAME LENGTH. If the FRAME LENGTH is extended, a higher
offset can be entered. If the RESULT LENGTH is extended, the maximum
offset is reduced.
If an offset is set that is too large (i.e. that, togeher with the selected FRAME
LENGTH, prevents the RESULT LENGTH combined with the determined sync
sequence to be completely displayed), the error message SYNC OFFSET
INVALID ! appears on the screen.
In this case, either the FRAME LENGTH must be increased, or the sync offset
must be adapted to the position of the sync sequence in the burst.
The frame buffer contains the data available for the evaluation (FRAME
LENGTH).

The message "SYNC OFFSET INVALID" indicates that there are not enough
data available for displaying the RESULT LENGTH.

The following examples explain how FRAME LENGTH, SYNC OFFSET and
FRAME LENGTH are related.

1119.5063.12 4.270 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Sweep Setup

Example 1 (input signal without burst):

Device settings:
• Input signal (without burst)
• FIND BURST off
• FIND SYNC on
• FRAME LENGTH = 400
• RESULT LENGTH = 200
• SYNC OFFSET = 0

The start of the frame buffer is at symbol -300 (with respect to the sync pattern), the FSIQ displays the
results starting with symbol no. 0, but there are no more than 100 valid symbols in the file, 100 symbols
of the result length are invalid because they are located outside the frame buffer.

Start of the Frame Buffer End of the Frame Buffer

Symbol 0
400
Sync Pattern
-3 0 0 100
0
FRAM E LEN G TH

0 100 200
RESULT LEN G TH

Valid Symbols Invalid Symbols,

Located outside the Frame Buffer

Solution: diminish result length to 100 symbols or

extend frame length to 800 symbols.

1119.5063.12 4.271 E-13

Sweep Setup - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Example 2 (input signal with burst):

Device settings:
• Input signal (burst length 100 symbols)
• FIND BURST on
• FIND SYNC on
• FRAME LENGTH = 400
• RESULT LENGTH = 200
• SYNC OFFSET = 0

After successful search of the burst, only the symbols inside the burst are marked as valid.
The synchronization pattern is found in the burst (Symbol 0), the FSIQ displays starting with symbol
no.0, but there are only 20 valid symbols in the burst, 180 symbols of the result length are invalid
because they are located outside the burst.

Start of the Burst End of the Burst

400

Symbol 0
Sync Pattern
-8 0 20

FRAM E LEN G TH

0 20 200
RESULT LEN G TH

Valid Symbols Invalid Symbols, Located outside the Burst

Solution: diminish result length to 20 symbols.

1119.5063.12 4.272 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Sweep Setup

Example 3 (input signal with burst):

Device settings:
• Input signal (burst length 100 symbols)
• FIND BURST on
• FIND SYNC on
• FRAME LENGTH = 400
• RESULT LENGTH = 200
• SYNC OFFSET = 90

After successful search of the burst, only the symbols inside the burst are marked as valid.
The synchronization pattern is found in the burst (Symbol 0), the FSIQ displays starting with symbol no. -
90 up to +19, the beginning of the display range is located before the start of the burst !

400
Start of the Burst Symbol 0 End of the Burst
Sync Pattern
-80 20
FRAME LENGTH

SYNC OFFSET

-90 0 20 110

RESULT LENGTH
Invalid Symbols, Invalid Symbols,
Located outside Valid Symbols Located outside
the Burst the Burst

Solution: diminish result length to 100 symbols (= burst length)

set sync offset to 80 (beginning of the burst lies 80 symbols before the sync-pattern).

1119.5063.12 4.273 E-13

Sweep Setup - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

Submenu: SWEEP TRIGGER

SYNC The SYNC PATTERN softkey calls up a submenu, allowing to
PATTERN
select available patterns.
SYNC SELECT
PATTERN PATTERN These patterns are displayed in the table PATTERN NAME. If
a pattern is activated, the bit sequence of the selected pattern
NEW SYNC
PATTERN is displayed in the table PATTERN VALUE.

EDIT SYNC
The synchronization pattern defines a bit sequence which is
PATTERN searched for in the signal to be demodulated. When the FIND
SYNC function is activated, this bit sequence is used for
synchronizing measurement results. The FSIQ demodulates
the signal to be measured down to bit level and searches for
this predefined sequence. The first symbol in the bit sequence
is the reference time (for SYNC OFFSET = 0).
DELETE The bit sequence of digitally modulated signals often includes a
PATTERN preamble or midamble which is used on the one hand for
assessing the channel impulse response and setting the
channel equalizer in the receiver and on the other hand to
synchronize the receiver. This bit sequence may be used in the
FSIQ to find and display particular signal sections.
The maximum pattern length of the FSIQ is 200 bits . The
number of symbols depends on the significance of the modula-
PAGE UP
tion method. With QPSK, for instance, 200 bits correspond to
100 symbols, with 16QAM to 50 symbols. The FSIQ always
PAGE DOWN uses an integral multiple of the bits per symbol. Bits which are
not multiples or exceed the maximum length are omitted.

SELECT The SELECT PATTERN softkey marks the first field in the PATTERN NAME
PATTERN table.
The bit sequence of the selected pattern is displayed simultaneously with the
PATTERN VALUE table.

DELETE The DELETE PATTERN softkey clears the pattern marked by the cursor.
PATTERN To avoid the pattern being inadvertently deleted, a confirmation is required..

PAGE UP The PAGE UP/PAGE DOWN softkey causes the next/last page of the sync
pattern table to be displayed.

PAGE DOWN

1119.5063.12 4.274 E-13

FSIQ Vector Analyzer - Sweep Setup

Submenu: SWEEP TRIGGER - SYNC PATTERN

EDIT SYNC NEW SYNC The NEW PATTERN and EDIT PATTERN softkeys call up
PATTERN PATTERN the EDIT SYNC PATTERN submenu for generating sync
pattern.
In the head line of the table the name and comment of the
sync pattern to be edited or modified can be entered.
The sync pattern is entered or modified in the VALUES field,
.
using the DATA ENTRY keys "0", "1“ und " “ .

USER
EDIT SYNC
PATTERN
NAME
EDIT SYNC PATTERN

VALUE
NAME: GSM_BTS0
COMMENT: GSM BTS COLOR CODE 0
COMMENT

BIT No: VALUE:

0 00100101110000100010010111
32
64
96
128

SAVE
PATTERN

NAME The NAME softkey activates the input of the name of the sync pattern. A
maximum of eight characters can be entered.
When the sync pattern is stored, the extension .PAT is automatically appended.

COMMENT The COMMENT softkey activates the input of a comment for the sync pattern.

1119.5063.12 4.275 E-13

Sweep Setup - Vector Analyzer FSIQ

VALUE The VALUE softkey activates the input of the bit pattern of the sync pattern.
The sync pattern may include "don’t care bits" which are not considered when
searching for the valid bit pattern.. The don’t care bits are marked by an 'x' in
the VALUE field.
The sync pattern has to start and end with a valid bit, a don’t care bit can not be
the first or last bit of the sync pattern.

During burst search, the sync pattern has to start and to end 10 symboles
before the beginning and end of the burst, respectively.

start of the burst end of the burst

sync sequence

10 symbols maximum 10 symbols

at minimum length of at minimum
sync pattern

SAVE The SAVE PATTERN softkey stores a newly edited pattern under the current
PATTERN name.

1119.5063.12 4.276 E-13

FSIQ Tracking generator

Tracking Generator Option

In the normal mode, the tracking generator sends a signal exactly at the input frequency of the
instrument without a frequency offset.

For frequency-converting measurements it is possible to set a constant frequency offset of ±200 MHz
between the output signal of the tracking generator and the receive frequency of the instrument.
Moreover, an I/Q modulation or AM and BB-FM modulation of the output signal can be carried out by
using two analog input signals.

The output level is level-controlled and can be set in 0.1-dB steps in the range from -20 to 0 dBm, the
level control can also be operated with external detectors. When the tracking generator is equipped with
the optional attenuator, the setting range is extended from -90 dBm to 0 dBm.

The tracking generator can be used in all operating modes. The recording of test setup calibration
values (SOURCE CAL) and the normalization with this correction values ( NORMALIZE) is only possible
in operating mode ANALYZER MODE.

SYSTEM MODE menu:

MODE The MODE key activates the menu in which the

CONFIGURATION
ANALYZER
submenu for setting the tracking generator can be
MODE selected in addition to different operating modes.

SE P TRACKING
GENERATOR

VECTOR
ANALYZER

1119.5063.12 4.277 E-13

Tracking generator FSIQ

Tracking Generator Settings

SYSTEM MODE menu:
TRACKING The TRACKING GEN softkey opens a menu for setting the
GENERATOR
functions of the tracking generator.
TRACKING SOURCE
GENERATOR ON OFF

SOURCE
POWER

POWER
OFFSET

SOURCE
CAL

FREQUENCY
OFFSET

MODULATION

SOURCE The SOURCE ON/OFF softkey switches the tracking generator on or off.
ON / OFF Default setting is OFF

SOURCE The SOURCE POWER softkey activates the input of the tracking generator
POWER output level.
The output level can be set in 0.1-dB steps from 0 dBm to -20 dBm. The
setting range is extended to -90 dBm when the tracking generator is
equipped with the optional attenuator FSE-B12.
If the tracking generator is off, it is automatically switched on by the
SOURCE PWR softkey.
Default setting is -20 dBm.

POWER The POWER OFFSET softkey activates the input of a constant level offset
OFFSET of the tracking generator.
With this offset it is possible to consider attenuators or amplifiers at the
output connector of the tracking generator during the input or output of output
levels, for example.
The permissible setting range is -200 dB to +200 dB in 0.1-dB steps. Positive
offsets apply to a subsequent amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator.
Default setting is 0 dB.

1119.5063.12 4.278 E-13

FSIQ Tracking generator - Transmission measurement

Transmission Measurement
In this measurement, the transmission characteristic of a two-port network is measured. The built-in
tracking generator serves as a signal source. The tracking generator is connected to the input connector
of the DUT. The input of the instrument is fed from the output of the DUT.

GEN OUTPUT RF INPUT

DUT

Fig. 4-35 Test setup for reflection measurements

A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects from the test setup (eg. frequency
response of connecting cables).

Calibration of Transmission Measurement

SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR menu:
SOURCE The SOURCE CAL softkey opens a submenu comprising
CAL
the calibration functions for the transmission and reflection
SOURCE CAL
CAL measurement.
TRANS

CAL REFL The calibration of the reflection measurement is described

SHORT in section 2.13.3, its functioning in section 2.13.4 .
CAL REFL
OPEN To carrry out a calibration for transmission measurements
the whole test setup is through-connected (THRU).
REF VALUE
POSITION

REF VALUE

NORMALIZE

RECALL

1119.5063.12 4.279 E-13

Transmission measurement - Tracking generator FSIQ

CAL The CAL TRANS softkey triggers the calibration of the transmission
TRANS measurement.

It starts a sweep that records a reference curve. This trace is then used to
obtain the differences to the normalized values.

Fig. 4-36 Trace of a transmission calibration procedure

During the calibration sweep the following message is displayed:

SOURCE CAL
in progress

ABORT

After the calibration sweep the following message is displayed:

NOTE
Calibration complete

ABORT

This message is cleared after approx. 3 seconds.

By storing and reloading the reference data set using the SAVE and RECALL
softkeys in the key array MEMORY it is possible to store several calibration
data sets and to switch between them without having to carry out a new
calibration.

1119.5063.12 4.280 E-13

FSIQ Tracking generator - Transmission measurement

Normalization
SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR -SOURCE CAL menu:
The NORMALIZE softkey switches the normalization on or off. The softkey
NORMALIZE is only offered if the memory contains a correction trace.
If no reference line is switched on when activating the normalization, all
measured values are with reference to the top grid line. The effects of the
test setup is corrected in such a way that the measured values are
displayed at the top grid margin.

Fig. 4-37 Normalized display

In the SPLIT SCREEN setting, the normalization is switched on in the

current window. Different normalizations can be active in the two
measurement windows.
Normalization is aborted as soon as the operating mode ANALYZER is quit
but can be switched on again as long as the reference trace stored in the
memory has not been overwritten.

1119.5063.12 4.281 E-13

Transmission measurement - Tracking generator FSIQ

It is now possible to shift the relative reference point within the grid by using the REF VALUE POSITION
softkey. Thus, the trace can be shifted from the top grid margin to the middle of the grid:

The REF VALUE POSITION softkey (reference position) marks a reference

REF VALUE position in the active measurement window on which the normalization
POSITION (difference formation with a reference curve) is performed.

If no reference line is switched on, the softkey switches on a reference line

and activates the input of its position. The line can be moved within the grid
limits.
The reference line is switched off by pressing the softkey again.

The function of the reference line is explained in section 2.12.4 Functioning

of Calibration.

Fig. 4-38 Normalized measurement, shifted with REF POSITION 50 %

1119.5063.12 4.282 E-13

FSIQ Tracking generator - Transmission measurement

REF VALUE The REF VALUE softkey activates the input of a level value which is
assigned to the reference line.

With normalization switched on, all measured values are displayed relative
to the reference line, or if the latter is switched off relative to the top grid line
which corresponds to 0 dB with default setting.

The value of REF VALUE is with reference to the actually active

measurement window.

Fig. 4-39 Measurement with REF VALUE 20 dBand REF VALUE

POSITION 50%

1119.5063.12 4.283 E-13

Transmission measurement - Tracking generator FSIQ

If a 10dB-attenuator pad is measured, the reference line can be displayed

with a nominal attenuation after calibration by entering REF VALUE -10 dB.
Departures from this nominal value are then displayed with high resolution
(eg 1dB/Div) and with the absolute attenuation (eg 1 dB below nominal
value = 11 dB attenuation).

Fig. 4-40 Measurement of a 10dB attenuator pad with 1 dB / Div

The RECALL softkey restores the instrument setting with which the
RECALL calibration was carried out.
This can be useful if the device setting was changed after calibration (eg
center frequency setting, frequency deviation, reference level, etc. ).

The softkey is only offered if:

• the analyzer mode has been selected
• the memory contains a calibration data set.

1119.5063.12 4.284 E-13

FSIQ Tracking generator - Reflection measurement

Reflection Measurement
Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out by means of a reflection-coefficient bridge.

GEN OUTPUT RF INPUT

BRIDGE

DUT

Fig. 4-41 Test setup for reflection measurements

Calibration of Reflection Measurement

This calibration essentially corresponds to that of the transmission measurement.

SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING-SOURCE CAL submenu

CAL REFL The CAL REFL OPEN softkey starts the open-circuit calibration.
OPEN
During calibration the following message is displayed

SOURCE CAL
in progress

ABORT

The CAL REFL SHORT softkey starts the short-circuit calibration.

CAL REFL
SHORT If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration
curve is formed by averaging the two measurements and stored in the
memory. The order of measurements is optional.
The completion of the calibration is indicated by

NOTE
calibration complete

OK

The display is cleared after 3 seconds.

1119.5063.12 4.285 E-13

Functioning of Calibration - Tracking generator FSIQ

Functioning of Calibration
Independent of the selected measurement (transmission/reflection) the calibration performs a difference
calculation of the current measured values to a reference curve. The hardware settings used for
measuring the reference curve is also assigned to the reference data set.

With the normalization switched on, the device stetting can largely be changed without stopping the
normalization, ie the necessity to carry out a new normalization is reduced to a minimum.

To this effect, the reference data set (trace with 500 measured values) is also available as a table with
500 points (frequency/level).
Differences in level settings between the reference curve and the current device setting are calculated
automatically. For small spans, a linear interpolation of the intermediate values is carried out. If the span
is increased, the values at the left or right end of the reference data set are frozen until the set start or
stop frequency is reached, ie the reference data set is extended by constant values.
An enhancement label is used to mark the different levels of measurement accuracy. This enhancement
label is displayed at the right display margin when normalization is switched on and in case of an error
from the reference setting. Three accuracy levels are defined:

Table 4-5 Measurement accuracy levels

Accuracy Enhancement Reason/Limitation

label

High NOR No difference between reference setting and measurement

Medium APP Change of the following settings:

(approximation)
• coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT)
• reference level, RF attenuation
• start or stop frequency
• output level of tracking generator
• frequency offset of tracking generator
• detector (max peak, min peak, sample...)

Change of frequency:
• 500 frozen points at maximum within the set sweep limits (corresponds to a
doubling of the span)

- Abortion of • more than 500 frozen points within the set sweep limits (in case of span doubling)
calibration

Note: At a reference level (REF LEVEL) of -10 dBm and at a tracking generator output level of the
same value the instrument operates without a headroom. ie the instrument is in danger of being
overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line. In this case,
either the message "OVLD" for overload is displayed in the status line or the display range is
exceeded (upper limitation of trace = Overrange).
This overload can be avoided by two actions:
• Reducing the output level of the tracking generator (SOURCE POWER, SYSTEM-MODE-
TRACKING GENERATOR menu)
• Increasing the reference level (REF LEVEL, LEVEL-REF menu)

1119.5063.12 4.286 E-13

FSIQ Tracking generator - Frequency Converting Measurements

Frequency-Converting Measurements
For frequency-converting measurements (eg on converters) the tracking generator is able to set a
constant frequency offset between the output frequency of the tracking generator and the receive
frequency of the instrument. Up to an output frequency of 200 MHz the measurement can be carried out
in inverted and normal position.

GEN OUTPUT RF INPUT

DUT

Fig. 4-42 Test setup for frequency-converting measurements

SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR menu:

FREQUENCY The FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey activates the input of the frequency
OFFSET offset between the output signal of the tracking generator and the input
frequency of the instrument. The permissible setting range is ±200 MHz in
1-Hz steps.
The default setting is 0 Hz.

If a positive frequency offset is entered, the tracking generator generates

an output signal above the receive frequency of the instrument. In case of a
negative frequency offset it generates a signal below the receive frequency
of the instrument. The output frequency of the tracking generator is
calculated as follows:

Tracking generator frequency = receive frequency + frequency offset.

A frequency offset cannot be entered if an external I/Q or FM modulation is

switched on. In this case, the FREQUENCY OFFSET softkey is blocked.

1119.5063.12 4.287 E-13

External Modulation - Tracking generator FSIQ

External Modulation of Tracking Generator

SYSTEM MODE-TRACKING GENERATOR menu:

MODULATION The MODULATION softkey opens a submenu for

MODULATION EXT AM selecting the different modulation types.

The time characteristic of the output signal of the tracking

EXT ALC generator can be influenced by means of externally fed-in
signals (input voltage range -1 V to +1 V).
EXT FM
The functions for amplitude and frequency modulation and
for external level control are always available.
EXT I/Q
The function IQ modulation is only available in models of
tracking generators that are equipped with the IQ
modulator (FSE-B9 and FSE-B11).

Two BNC connectors at the rear panel are available as

signal inputs. Their function can be changed according to
the modulation selected:
TG-INPUT I / AM / ALC and
TG-INPUT Q / FM

The types of modulation can partly be combined with each other and with the frequency offset function.
The following table shows which types of modulation are possible at the same time and which can be
combined with the frequency offset function.

Table 4-6 Simultaneous modes of modulation (tracking generator)

Modulation Frequency EXT AM EXT ALC EXT FM EXT I/Q

offset

Frequency offset • • •

EXT AM • •

EXT ALC •

EXT FM • •

EXT I/Q

• modulations can be combined

1119.5063.12 4.288 E-13

FSIQ Tracking generator - External modulation

The EXT AM softkey activates an AM modulation of the tracking generator

EXT AM output signal.

The modulation signal is connected to the TG-INPUT AM connector. An

input voltage of 1 V corresponds to 100% amplitude modulation.

Switching on an external AM deactivates the following functions:

– active external level control
– active I/Q modulation.

The EXT ALC softkey activates the external level control.

EXT ALC
In case of external level control the output level of the tracking generator is
determined from the signal of an external detector. The external detector
has to supply a negative voltage in the range of -0.1 to -1 V which is applied
to the TG-INPUT ALC connector. The setting of the output level is the same
as that of the internal level control but the output level depends on the
external detector.

Switching on an external level control deactivates the following functions:

– active external AM
– active I/Q modulation.

The EXT FM softkey activates the FM modulation of the tracking generator

EXT FM
output signal.

The modulation frequency range is 100 kHz to 10 MHz, the deviation is

approx. 10 MHz at an input voltage of 1 V.
The modulation signal is connected to the TG-INPUT FM connector.

Switching on an external FM deactivates the following function:

– active I/Q modulation.

1119.5063.12 4.289 E-13

External Modulation - Tracking generator FSIQ

The EXT I/Q softkey is only offered with I/Q modulator option built-in. It
EXT I/Q
activates the external I/Q modulation of the tracking generator (FSE-B9 and
FSE B-11).

The signals for modulation are connected to the two input connectors TG-
INPUT IN and TG-INPUT Q at the rear of the unit. The input voltage range
is ±1 V into 50 Ω.

Switching on an external I/Q modulation deactivates the following functions:

– active external AM
– active external level control
– active external FM or
– a level offset.

Functional description of quadrature modulator:

I channel

0°
I mod
RF IN RF OUT

90°
Q channel

Q mod

Fig. 4-43 I/Q modulation

I/Q modulation is performed by means of the built-in quadrature modulator.

The RF signal is divided into the two orthogonal I and Q components
(inphase and quadrature phase). Amplitude and phase are controlled in
each path by the I and Q modulation signal. A RF output signal controllable
in amplitude and phase is obtained by adding the two components.

1119.5063.12 4.290 E-13

FSIQ Contents - Remote Control - Basics

Contents - Chapter 5 "Remote Control - "Basics"

5 Remote Control - Basics

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 5.1
Brief Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 5.2
Switchover to Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 5.3
Indications during Remote Control .......................................................................................... 5.3
Remote Control via IEC Bus.................................................................................................... 5.4
Setting the Device Address ........................................................................................... 5.4
Return to Manual Operation .......................................................................................... 5.4
Remote Control via RS-232-Interface ..................................................................................... 5.5
Setting the Transmission Parameters ........................................................................... 5.5
Return to Manual Operation .......................................................................................... 5.5
Limitations ..................................................................................................................... 5.5
Remote Control via RSIB Interface ......................................................................................... 5.6
Return to Manual Operation .......................................................................................... 5.6
Messages.......................................................................................................................................... 5.7
IEE/IEEE-Bus Interface Messages.......................................................................................... 5.7
RSIB Interface Messages........................................................................................................ 5.7
Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) ........................................................ 5.8
Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages ............................................................................. 5.9
SCPI Introduction..................................................................................................................... 5.9
Structure of a Command ......................................................................................................... 5.9
Structure of a Command Line................................................................................................ 5.12
Responses to Queries ........................................................................................................... 5.12
Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 5.13
Overview of Syntax Elements................................................................................................ 5.14
Instrument Model and Command Processing ............................................................................ 5.15
Input Unit ............................................................................................................................... 5.15
Command Recognition .......................................................................................................... 5.16
Data Set and Instrument Hardware ....................................................................................... 5.16
Status Reporting System ....................................................................................................... 5.16
Output Unit............................................................................................................................. 5.17
Command Sequence and Command Synchronization.......................................................... 5.17
Status Reporting System .............................................................................................................. 5.18
Structure of an SCPI Status Register .................................................................................... 5.18
Overview of the Status Registers .......................................................................................... 5.20
Description of the Status Registers ....................................................................................... 5.21
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) ................................ 5.21
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)....................................................... 5.22
Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE)..................... 5.22
STATus:OPERation Register ...................................................................................... 5.23
STATus:QUEStionable Register ................................................................................. 5.24
STATus QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register ................................................................. 5.25
STATus QUEStionable:FREQuency Register............................................................. 5.26
STATus QUEStionable:LIMit Register ........................................................................ 5.27
STATus QUEStionable:LMARgin Register ................................................................. 5.28

1119.5063.12 I-5.1 E-1

Contents - Remote Control - Basics FSIQ

STATus QUEStionable:POWer Register .................................................................... 5.29

STATus QUEStionable:SYNC Register ...................................................................... 5.30
STATus QUEStionable:TRANsducer Register ........................................................... 5.31
Application of the Status Reporting Systems......................................................................... 5.32
Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure ........................................... 5.32
Serial Poll .................................................................................................................... 5.32
Parallel Poll.................................................................................................................. 5.32
Query by Means of Commands................................................................................... 5.33
Error-Queue Query...................................................................................................... 5.33
Resetting Values of the Status Reporting System................................................................. 5.34

1119.5063.12 I-5.2 E-1

FSIQ Introduction

5 Remote Control - Basics

In this chapter you find:

• instructions how to put the FSIQ into operation via remote control,
• a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments. This includes the description
of the command structure and syntax according to the SCPI standard, the description of command
execution and of the status registers,
• diagrams and tables describing the status registers used in the FSIQ.
In chapter 6, all remote control functions are described in detail. The subsystems are listed by
alphabetical order according to SCPI. All commands and their parameters are listed by alphabetical
order in the command list at the end of chapter 6.
Program examples for the FSIQ can be found in chapter 7.
The remote control interfaces and their interface functions are described in chapter 8.

Introduction
The instrument is equipped with an IEC-bus interface according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.2 and
two RS-232 interfaces. The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permits to connect
a controller for remote control.
The internal controller function may also be used as a controller (see chapter 1, section "Controller
function).
In addition, the instrument is equipped with an RSIB interface that allows instrument control by Windows
applications WinWord and Excel or by Visual C++ and Visual Basic programs
The instrument supports the SCPI version 1994.0 (Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments). The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of
device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers (see section "SCPI Introduction").
This section assumes basic knowledge of IEC-bus programming and operation of the controller. A
description of the interface commands is to be obtained from the relevant manuals. The RSIB interface
functions are matched to the function interface for IEC/IEEE-bus programming from National
Instruments. The functions supported by the DLLs are listed in chapter 8.
The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax, error handling and configuration of
the status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections. Tables provide a fast overview of
the commands implemented in the instrument and the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables
are supplemented by a comprehensive description of every command and the status registers. Detailed
program examples of the main functions are to be found in chapter 7.
The program examples for IEC-bus programming are all written in Quick BASIC.

1119.5063.12 5.1 E-13

Brief Instructions FSIQ

Brief Instructions
The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the
instrument and setting of its basic functions. As a prerequisite, the IEC-bus address, which is factory-set
to 20, must not have been changed.

1. Connect instrument and controller using IEC-bus cable.

2. Write and start the following program on the controller:

CALL IBFIND("DEV1", analyzer%) ’Open port to the instrument

CALL IBPAD(analyzer%, 20) ’Inform controller about instrument address
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*RST;*CLS") ’Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, ’FREQ:CENT 100MHz’) ’Set center frequency to 100 MHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, ’FREQ:SPAN 10MHz’) ’Set span to 10 MHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, ’DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -10dBm’)
’Set reference level to -10 dBm

The instrument now performs a sweep in the frequency range of 95 MHz to 105 MHz.

3. To return to manual control, press the LOCAL key at the front panel

1119.5063.12 5.2 E-13

FSIQ Switchover to Remote Control

Switchover to Remote Control

On power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state ("LOCAL" state) and can be
operated via the front panel.
It is switched to remote control ("REMOTE" state)
IEC-bus as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.
RS-232 as soon as it receives a command from a controller.
RSIB as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.

During remote control, operation via the front panel is disabled. The instrument remains in the remote
state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via remote control interfaces. Switching
from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument
settings.

Indications during Remote Control

Remote control mode is indicated by the LED "REMOTE" on the instrument’s front panel. In this mode
the softkeys, the function fields and the diagram labelling on the display are not shown.
Note: Command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON activates all indications during remote control to
check the instrument settings.

1119.5063.12 5.3 E-13

Switchover to Remote Control FSIQ

Remote Control via IEC Bus

Setting the Device Address
In order to operate the instrument via the IEC-bus, it must be addressed using the set IEC-bus address.
The IEC-bus address of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually in the SETUP -
GENERAL SETUP menu or via IEC bus. Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible.

Manually: Call SETUP - GENERAL SETUP menu

Enter desired address in table GPIB ADDRESS
Terminate input using one of the unit keys (=ENTER).

Via IEC bus:

CALL IBFIND("DEV1", analyzer%) ’Open port to the instrument
CALL IBPAD(analyzer%, 20) ’Inform controller about old address
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18")’Set instrument to new address
CALL IBPAD(analyzer%, 18) ’Inform controller about new address

Return to Manual Operation

Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC bus.

Manually: Press the LOCAL key.

Notes: – Before switchover, command processing must be completed as

otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately.
– The LOCAL key can be disabled by the universal command LLO
(see chapter 8) in order to prevent unintentional switchover. In
this case, switchover to manual mode is only possible via the IEC
bus.
– The LOCAL key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN
line of the IEC bus (see chapter 8).

Via IEC bus: ...

CALL IBLOC(analyzer%) ’Set instrument to manual operation.
...

1119.5063.12 5.4 E-13

FSIQ Switchover to Remote Control

Remote Control via RS-232-Interface

Setting the Transmission Parameters
To enable an error-free and correct data transmission, the parameters of the unit and the controller
should have the same setting. Parameters can be manually changed in menu SETUP-GENERAL
SETUP in table COM PORT 1/2 or via remote control using the command
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial1|2:... .
The transmission parameters of the interfaces COM1 and COM2 are factory-set to the following values:
baudrate = 9600, data bits = 8, stop bits = 1, parity = NONE and owner = INSTRUMENT.

Manually: Setting interface COM1|2

À Call SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu
À Select desired baudrate, bits, stopbit, parity in table COM PORT 1/2.
À Terminate input using one of the unit keys (=ENTER).

Return to Manual Operation

Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel.

Manually: Press the LOCAL key.

Note: Before switchover, command processing must be completed as

otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately.

Limitations
The following limitations apply if the unit is remote-controlled via the RS-232-C interface:

− No interface messages
− Only the Common Commands *OPC? can be used for command synchronization, *WAI and *OPC
are not available.
− Block data cannot be transmitted.

1119.5063.12 5.5 E-13

Switchover to Remote Control FSIQ

Remote Control via RSIB Interface

To access the measuring instruments via the RSIB interface the DLLs should be installed in the
corresponding directories:
• RSIB.DLL in Windows NT system directory or control application directory.
•RSIB32.DLL in Windows NT system32 directory or control application directory.
On the measuring instrument the DLL is already installed in the corresponding directory.
The control is performed via one of the Windows applications WinWord or Excel or with Visual C++ or
Visual Basic programs. The local link to the internal controller is established with the name ’@local’.If a
remote controller is used, the instrument IP address is to be indicated here.

Via VisualBasic: internal controller: ud = RSDLLibfind (’@local’, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)

remote controller: ud = RSDLLibfind (’82.1.1.200’, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)

Return to Manual Operation

The return to manual operation can be performed via the front panel (LOCAL key) or the RSIB interface.

Manually: Press the LOCAL key.

Note: Before switchover, command processing must be completed as

otherwise switchover to remote control is effected immediately.

Via RSIB: ...

ud = RSDLLibloc (ud, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl);
...

1119.5063.12 5.6 E-13

FSIQ Messages

Messages
The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus or the RSIB interface (see chapter 8) can be
divided into two groups:
– interface messages and
– device messages.
For the RS-232 interface, no interface messages are defined.

IEE/IEEE-Bus Interface Messages

Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line being active.
They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a
controller which has the IEC-bus control. Interface commands can be subdivided into
– universal commands and
– addressed commands.
Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC bus without previous addressing,
addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners. The interface messages
relevant to the instrument are listed in chapter 8.

RSIB Interface Messages

The RSIB interface enables the instrument to be controlled by Windows applications. The interface
functions are matched to the function interface for IEC/IEEE-bus programming from National
Instruments.
The functions supported by interface are listed in chapter 8.

1119.5063.12 5.7 E-13

Messages FSIQ

Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses)

Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line not being
active. ASCII code is used. The device messages are more or less equal for the different interfaces.
A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent on the IEC bus:
– Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the device
functions and request informations.
The commands are subdivided according to two criteria::
1. According to the effect they have on the instrument:
Setting commands cause instrument settings such as reset of the
instrument or setting the center frequency.
Queries cause data to be provided for output on the IEC-bus,
e.g. for identification of the device or polling the
marker.
2. According to their definition in standard IEEE 488.2:
Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and
notation in standard IEEE 488.2. They refer to
functions such as management of the standar-dized
status registers, reset and selftest.
Device-specific
commands refer to functions depending on the features of the
instrument such as frequency setting. A majority of
these commands has also been standardized by the
SCPI committee (cf. Section 3.5.1).
– Device responses are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can
contain measurement results, instrument settings and information on the
instrument status (cf. Section 3.5.4).

Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in the following section. The commands are
listed and explained in detail in chapter 6.

1119.5063.12 5.8 E-13

FSIQ Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages

Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages

SCPI Introduction
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard command set for
programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI
consortium is to standardize the device-specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose, a model
was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices. Command
systems were generated which are assigned to these functions. Thus it is possible to address the same
functions with identical commands. The command systems are of a hierarchical structure.
Fig. 5-1 illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SOURce, which operates the
signal sources of the devices. The other examples concerning syntax and structure of the commands
are derived from this command system.
SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488.2, i.e. it uses the same syntactic basic elements as well as the
common commands defined in this standard. Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined with
greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488.2 (see Section "Responses to Queries").

Structure of a Command
The commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. Header and
parameter are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The
headers may consist of several key words. Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to
the header.

Note: The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the
instrument.

Common commands Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*"

and one or several parameters, if any.
Examples: *RST RESET, resets the device
*ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of the
event status enable register
*ESR? EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the
contents of the event status register.

1119.5063.12 5.9 E-13

Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages FSIQ

Device-specific commands

Hierarchy: Device-specific commands are of hierarchical structure (see

Fig. 5-1). The different levels are represented by combined headers.
Headers of the highest level (root level) have only one key word. This
key word denotes a complete command system.
Example: SENSe This key word denotes the command system
SENSe.
For commands of lower levels, the complete path has to be specified,
starting on the left with the highest level, the individual key words being
separated by a colon ":".
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN:LINK STARt
This command lies in the fourth level of the SENSe system. It
determines which parameter remains unchanged when the span is
changed. If LINK is set to STARt, the values of CENTer and STOP are
adjusted when the span is changed.

SENSe

BANDwidth FUNCtion FREQuency DETector

STARt STOP CENTer SPAN OFFSet

HOLD LINK

Fig. 5-1 Tree structure the SCPI command systems using the SENSe system by way of example

Some key words occur in several levels within one command system. Their
effect depends on the structure of the command, that is to say, at which
position in the header of a command they are inserted.
Example: SOURce:FM:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the third
command level. It defines the polarity between modulator and
modulation signal.
SOURce:FM:EXTernal:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth
command level. It defines the polarity between modulation
voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the
external signal source indicated.

1119.5063.12 5.10 E-13

FSIQ Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages

Optional key words: Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted
into the header or omitted. These key words are marked by square
brackets in the description. The full command length must be recognized
by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard.
Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words.
Example: [SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO
This command couples the resolution bandwidth of the
instrument to other parameters. The following command has
the same effect:
BANDwidth:AUTO
Note: An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified
in detail by a numeric suffix.

Long and short form: The key words feature a long form and a short form. Either the short form
or the long form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permissible.
Beispiel: STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1= STAT:QUES:ENAB 1
Note: The short form is marked by upper-case letters, the long form
corresponds to the complete word. Upper-case and lower-case
notation only serve the above purpose, the instrument itself
does not make any difference between upper-case and lower-
case letters.

Parameter: The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If
several parameters are specified in a command, they are separated by a
comma ",". A few queries permit the parameters MINimum, MAXimum and
DEFault to be entered. For a description of the types of parameter, refer to
Section 3.5.5.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAXimum Response: 3.5E9
This query requests the maximal value for the stop frequency.

Numeric suffix: If a device features several functions or features of the same kind, e.g.
inputs, the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the com-
mand. Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1.
Example:. SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial2:BAUD 9600
This command sets the baudrate of the second serial interface.

1119.5063.12 5.11 E-13

Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages FSIQ

Structure of a Command Line

A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by a <New Line>, a <New
Line> with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte. Quick BASIC automatically produces an EOI
together with the last data byte.

Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs
to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 100MHz;:INPut:ATTenuation 10")
This command line contains two commands. The first command is part of the SENSe
system and is used to specify the center frequency of the analyzer. The second command
is part of the INPut system and sets the attenuation of the input signal.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the
command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command after the semicolon starts with the
level that lies below the common levels (see also Fig. 5-1). The colon following the semicolon must be
omitted in this case.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;:SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1E9")
This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated
from each other by the semicolon. Both commands are part of the SENSe command
system, subsystem FREQuency, i.e. they have two common levels.
When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below
SENSe:FREQuency. The colon after the semicolon is omitted.

The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:

CALL IBWRT(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6;STOP 1E9")
However, a new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example: CALL IBWRT(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1E6")
CALL IBWRT(analyzer, "SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1E9")

Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding
a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are
partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2.
1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header.
Example: INPut:COUPling? Response: DC

2. Maximum values, minimum values and all further quantities, which are requested via a special text
parameter are returned as numerical values.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX Response: 3.5E9
3. Numerical values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the
units set using the Unit command.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? Response: 1E6 for 1 MHz
4. Truth values <Boolean values> are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example: SENSe:BANDwidth:AUTO? Response: 1 for ON
5. Text (character data) is returned in a short form (see also Section 3.5.5).
Example: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS? Response(for standard): STAN

1119.5063.12 5.12 E-13

FSIQ Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages

Parameters
Most commands require a parameter to be specified. The parameters must be separated from the
header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text,
character strings and block data. The type of parameter required for the respective command and the
permissible range of values are specified in the command description (see Section 3.6).

Numerical values Numerical values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and
exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or
down. The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie
inside the value range -32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E"
or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not permissible. In the case of physical
quantities, the unit can be entered. Permissible unit prefixes are G (giga), MA
(mega), MOHM and MHZ are also permissible), K (kilo), M (milli), U (micro)
and N (nano). It the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQuency:STOP 1.5E9

Special numerical The texts MINimum, MAXimum, DEFault, UP and DOWN are interpreted as
valuesspecial numerical values.

In the case of a query, the numerical value is provided.

Example: Setting command: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP MAXimum
Query: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? Response: 3.5E9

MIN/MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.

DEF DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This
value conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command

UP/DOWN UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step. The step
width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter
which can be set via UP, DOWN.

INF/NINF INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the
numerical values -9.9E37 or 9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent
as device reponses.

NAN Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as
device response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of
zero by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of
missing values.

Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is
represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0. The OFF state (logically
untrue) is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0. 0 or 1 is provided in a
query.
Example: Setting command: DISPlay:WINDow:STATe ON
Query: DISPlay:WINDow:STATe? Response: 1

1119.5063.12 5.13 E-13

Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages FSIQ

Text Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words, i.e. they can be
entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be
separated from the header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short
form of the text is provided.
Example: Setting command: INPut:COUPling GROund
Query: INPut:COUPling? Response GRO

Strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (’ or ").

Example: SYSTem:LANGuage "SCPI" or
SYSTem:LANGuage ’SCPI’

Block data Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of
large amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the
following structure:
Example: HEADer:HEADer #45168xxxxxxxx
ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how
many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example
the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow.
During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are
ignored until all bytes are transmitted..

Overview of Syntax Elements

The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements.

The colon separates the key words of a command.

:
In a command line the colon after the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command
level.

The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
;

The comma separates several parameters of a command.

,

The question mark forms a query.

?

The asterix marks a common command.

*

Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it.

"

The double dagger ( #) introduces block data

#

A "white space (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g.blank) separates header and parameter.

1119.5063.12 5.14 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Model and Command Processing

Instrument Model and Command Processing

The instrument model shown in Fig. 5-2 has been made viewed from the standpoint of the servicing of
IEC-bus commands. The individual components work independently of each other and simultaneously.
They communicate by means of so-called "messages".

Input unit with

IEC Bus
input puffer

Command
recognition

Data set
Status reporting-
system
Instrument
hardware

Output unit with

IEC Bus output buffer

Fig. 5-2 Instrument model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus

Input Unit
The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC bus and collects them in the
input buffer. The input buffer has a size of 256 characters. The input unit sends a message to the
command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter,
<PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL.
If the input buffer is full, the IEC-bus traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are processed.
Subsequently the IEC-bus traffic is continued. If, however, the buffer is not yet full when receiving the
delimiter, the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and
execution. The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the
command recognition.

1119.5063.12 5.15 E-13

Instrument Model and Command Processing FSIQ

Command Recognition
The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit. It proceeds in the order in
which it receives the data. Only a DCL is serviced with priority, a GET (Group Execute Trigger), e.g., is
only executed after the commands received before as well. Each recognized command is immediately
transferred to the data set but without being executed there at once.
Syntactical errors in the command are recognized here and supplied to the status reporting system. The
rest of a command line after a syntax error is analysed further if possible and serviced.
If the command recognition recognizes a delimiter or a DCL, it requests the data set to set the
commands in the instrument hardware as well now. Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process
commands again. This means for the command servicing that further commands can already be
serviced while the hardware is still being set ("overlapping execution").

Data Set and Instrument Hardware

Here the expression "instrument hardware" denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual
instrument function - signal generation, measurement etc. The controller is not included.

The data set is a detailed reproduction of the instrument hardware in the software.

IEC-bus setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set. The data set management enters the
new values (e.g. frequency) into the data set, however, only passes them on to the hardware when
requested by the command recognition. As this is always only effected at the end of a command line,
the order of the setting commands in the command line is not relevant.

The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware
immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware. If the detection is made that an
execution is not possible, an "execution error" is signalled to the status reporting system. All alterations
of the data set are cancelled, the instrument hardware is not reset. Due to the delayed checking and
hardware setting, however, it is permissible to set impermissible instrument states within one command
line for a short period of time without this leading to an error message. At the end of the command line,
however, a permissible instrument state must have been reached again.

IEC-bus queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit.

Status Reporting System

The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the
output unit on request. The exact structure and function are described in the following section.

1119.5063.12 5.16 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Model and Command Processing

Output Unit
The output unit collects the information requested by the controller, which it receives from the data set
management. It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer.
The output buffer has a size of 4096 characters. If the information requested is longer, it is made
available "in portions" without this being recognized by the controller.
If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from
the data set management, the output unit sends error message "Query UNTERMINATED" to the status
reporting system. No data are sent on the IEC bus, the controller waits until it has reached its time limit.
This behaviour is specified by SCPI.

Command Sequence and Command Synchronization

What has been said above makes clear that all commands can potentially be carried out overlapping.
Equally, setting commands within one command line are not absolutely serviced in the order in which
they have been received.

In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order, each command must
be sent in a separate command line, that is to say, with a separate IBWRT()-call.
In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
must be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has
been set and has settled. By a suitable programming, the contoller can be forced to wait for the
respective action to occur (cf. Table 5-1).

Table 5-1 Synchronisation using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI

Commnd Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller

*OPC Setting the opteration-complete bit in the ESR - Setting bit 0 in the ESE
- Setting bit 5 in the SRE
- Waiting for service request (SRQ)

*OPC? Writing a "1" into the output buffer Addressing the instrument as a talker

*WAI Continuing the IEC-bus handshake Sending the next command

An example as to command synchronization can be found in chapter 7 "Program Examples".

1119.5063.12 5.17 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

Status Reporting System

The status reporting system (cf. Fig. 5-3) stores all information on the present operating state of the
instrument, e.g. that the instrument presently carries out an AUTORANGE and on errors which have
occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The status registers
and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus.

The information is of a hierarchical structure. The register status byte (STB) defined in IEEE 488.2 and
its associated mask register service request enable (SRE) form the uppermost level. The STB receives
its information from the standard event status register (ESR) which is also defined in IEEE 488.2 with
the associated mask register standard event status enable (ESE) and registers STATus:OPERation and
STATus:QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument.

The IST flag ("Individual STatus") and the parallel poll enable register (PPE) allocated to it are also part
of the status reporting system. The IST flag, like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a
single bit. The PPE fulfills an analog function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request.

The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the
status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in
Fig. 5-3.

Structure of an SCPI Status Register

Each SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions
(cf. Fig. 5-2). The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each hardware status is assigned a
bit number which is valid for all five parts. For example, bit 3 of the STATus:OPERation register is
assigned to the hardware status "wait for trigger" in all five parts. Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is set to
zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive
integer.

15 14 13 12 CONDition part 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 EVENt part 3 2 1 0

to higher-order register
& & & & & & & & & & & & & & & &
+ Sum bit & = logical AND

+ = logical OR
15 14 13 12 ENABle part 3 2 1 0
of all bits

Fig. 5-2 The status-register model

1119.5063.12 5.18 E-13

FSIQ Status Reporting System

CONDition part The CONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of
the next lower register. Its contents reflects the current instrument status. This
register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents is
not affected by reading.

PTRansition part The Positive-TRansition part acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.

NTRansition part The Negative-TRansition part also acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
NTR-Bit = 1: the EVENt bit is set.
NTR-Bit = 0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.
With these two edge register parts the user can define which state transition of
the condition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.

EVENt part The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last
reading, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events
passed on by the edge filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument.
This part can only be read by the user. During reading, its contents is set to
zero. In linguistic usage this part is often equated with the entire register.

ENABle part The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to
the sum bit (cf. below). Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the
associated ENABle bit (symbol ’&’). The results of all logical operations of this
part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function (symbol ’+’).
ENABle-Bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle-Bit = 1: if the associated EVENT bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as
well.
This part can be written into and read by the user at will. Its contents is not
affected by reading.

Sum bit As indicated above, the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part
for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of
the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an
event, e.g. a PLL that has not locked, can lead to a service request throughout
all levels of the hierarchy.

Note: The service request enable register SRE defined in IEEE 488.2 can be taken as ENABle
part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be
taken as the ENABle part of the ESR.

1119.5063.12 5.19 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

Overview of the Status Registers

15 not used
14 Subrange limit attained
13
12
11
10
9 Subrange 10
8 Subrange 9
7 Subrange 8
6 Subrange 7
5 Subrange 6
4 Subrange 5
3 Subrange 4
2 Subrange 3
1 Subrange 2
0 Subrange 1
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer

& = logical AND 15 not used 15 not used 15 not used

= logical OR 14 PROGram running 14 14
of all bits 13 INSTrument summary bit 13 ALT2 LOWer FAIL (screen B) 13
12 12 ALT2 UPPer FAIL (screen B) 12
11 11 ALT1 LOWer FAIL (screen B) 11
10 10 ALT1 UPPer FAIL (screen B) 10
9 9 ADJ LOWer FAIL (screen B) 9
8 HCOPy in progress 8 ADJ UPPer FAIL (screen B) 8
7 CORRecting 7 7
6 WAIT for ARM 6 6
5 WAIT for TRIGGER 5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL (screen A) 5
4 MEASuring 4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL (screen A) 4
3 SWEeping 3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL (screen A) 3 CARRier overload
2 RANGing 2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL (screen A) 2 No carrier
SRQ 1 SETTling 1 ADJ LOWer FAIL (screen A) 1 BURSt not found
0 CALibrating 0 ADJ UPPer FAIL (screen A) 0 SYNC not found
STATus:OPERation STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC
-&- 7
6 RQS/MSS
15 not used 15 not used
-&- 5 ESB
14 14
-&- 4 MAV
13 13
-&- 3
12 12
-&- 2
11 11
1
10 10
0 15 not used
9 9
14 COMMand warning
SRE STB 8
13 TRANsducer break 8
7 LMARgin 8 FAIL 7 LIMit 8 FAIL
12 ACPLimit
6 LMARgin 7 FAIL 6 LIMit 7 FAIL
11 SYNC
10 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL 5 LIMit 6 FAIL
LMARgin
9 4 LMARgin 5 FAIL 4 LIMit 5 FAIL
LIMit
3 LMARgin 4 FAIL 3 LIMit 4 FAIL
8 CALibration (= UNCAL)
-&- 2 LMARgin 3 FAIL 2 LIMit 3 FAIL
7 MODulation
-&- 1 LMARgin 2 FAIL 1 LIMit 2 FAIL
6 PHASe
-&- 0 LMARgin 1 FAIL 0 LIMit 1 FAIL
5 FREQuency
-&- 4 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit
TEMPerature
-&- 3 POWer
-&- 2 TIME 15 not used 15 not used
1 CURRent 14
14
0 VOLTage 13
13
PPE 12 12
STATus:QUEStionable
11 11
10 LO LEVel (screen B) 10 IF_OVerload (screen B)
9 LO UNLocked (screen B) 9 UNDerload Option B7 (screen B)
IST flag 8 8 OVERload (screen B)
7 7
-&- 7 Power on 6
6
-&- 6 User Request 5 5
-&- 5 Command Error 4 4
-&- 4 Execution Error 3 3
-&- 3 Device Dependent Error 2 IF_OVerload (screen A)
2 LO LEVel (screen A)
-&- 2 Query Error 1 UNDerload Option B7 (screen A)
1 LO UNLocked (screen A)b
-&- 1 Request Control 0 OVERload (screen A)
0 OVEN COLD
-&- 0 Operation Complete
Error/event Output STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency STATus:QUEStionable:POWer
queue buffer ESE ESR
’ bla

Fig. 5-3 Overview of the status registers

1119.5063.12 5.20 E-13

FSIQ Status Reporting System

Description of the Status Registers

Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by
collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. It can thus be compared with the CONDition
part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy. A special feature is
that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte.
The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command "*STB?" or a serial poll.

The STB implies the SRE. It corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers as to its function.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE
and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a Service Request (SRQ) is generated on the
IEC bus, which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further
processed there.
The SRE can be set using command "*SRE" and read using "*SRE?".

Table 5-2 Meaning of the bits in the status byte

Bit No. Meaning

2 Error Queue not empty

The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue.
If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request. Thus an error can
be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error
message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with IEC-
bus control.

3 QUEStionable status sum bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable-Status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to
1.
A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by polling the
QUEStionable-Status register.

4 MAV bit (message available)

The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read.
This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller (cf. chapter 7,
program examples).

5 ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in
the event status enable register.
Setting of this bit implies an error or an event which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status
register.

6 MSS bit (master status smmary bit)

The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers
is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.

7 OPERation status register sum bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation-Status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The type of action can be determined by
polling the OPERation-status register.

1119.5063.12 5.21 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)

By analogy with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can be
queried by means of a parallel poll or using command "*IST?".

The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag. The
bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE, with bit 6 being used as well in
contrast to the SRE. The Ist flag results from the ORing of all results. The PPE can be set using
commands "*PRE" and read using command "*PRE?".

Event-Status Register (ESR) and Event-Status-Enable Register (ESE)

The ESR is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of an SCPI register.
The event status register can be read out using command "*ESR?".
The ESE is the associated ENABle part. It can be set using command "*ESE" and read using command
"*ESE?".

Table 5-3 Meaning of the bits in the event status register

Bit No. Meaning

0 Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.

1 Request Control
This bit is set if the instrument requests the controller function. This is the case when hardcopy is outputted to a
printer or a plotter via the IEC-bus.

2 Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having send a query, or if it
does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead. The cause is often a query
which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.

3 Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between -300 and -399 or a
positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue (cf. chapter 9,
Error Messages).

4 Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, however, cannot be performed for other reasons.
An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue (cf. chapter 9, Error Messages).

5 Command Error
This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received. An error message with a
number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the rror queue (cf.
chapter 9, -Error Messages).

6 User Request
This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key.

7 Power On (supply voltage on)

This bit is set on switching on the instrument.

1119.5063.12 5.22 E-13

FSIQ Status Reporting System

STATus:OPERation Register
In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being
executing or, in the EVENt part, information on which actions the instrument has executed since the last
reading. It can be read using commands "STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or "STATus
:OPERation[:EVENt]?".

Table 5-4 Meaning of the bits in the STATus.OPERation register

Bit No. Meaning

0 CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.

1 SETTling
This bit is set as long as the new status is settling after a setting command. It is only set if the settling time is
longer than the command processing time.

2 RANGing
This bit is set as long as the instrument is changing a range (e.g. Autorange).

3 SWEeping
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a sweep.

4 MEASuring
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a measurement.

5 WAIT for TRIGGER

This bit is set as long as the instrument is waiting for a trigger event.

6 WAIT for ARM

This bit is set as long as the instrument is waiting for an arming event.

7 CORRecting
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a correction.

8 HardCOPy in progress
This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.

9-12 Device dependent

13 INSTrument Summary Bit

This bit is set when one or more logical instruments is reporting a status message.

14 PROGram running
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a program.

15 This bit is always 0

The FSIQ supports bits 0 and 8.

1119.5063.12 5.23 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

STATus:QUEStionable Register
This register comprises information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is operated
without meeting the specifications. It can be queried by commands STATus:QUEStionable:
CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?.

Table 5-5 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable register

Bit No. Meaning

0 VOLTage
This bit is set if a questionable voltage occurs.

1 CURRent
This bit is set if a questionable current occurs.

2 TIME
This bit is set if a questionable time occurs.

3 POWer
This bit is set if a questionable power occurs (cf. also section "STATus:QUEStionable:POWerRegister")

4 TEMPerature
This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs.

5 FREQuency
The bit is set if a frequency is questionable (cf. section "STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register")

6 PHASe
The bit is set if a phase value is questionable.

7 MODulation
The bit is set if a modulation is performed questionably.

8 CALibration
^ label "UNCAL")
The bit is set if a measurement is performed uncalibrated (=

9 LIMit (unit-dependent)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register)

10 LMARgin (unit-dependent)
This bit is set if a margin is violated (see also section STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register)

11 SYNC (unit-dependent)
This bit is set if, during measurements with Option B7 (Signal Vector Analysis), the synchronization with
midamble or a successful search for bursts cannot be performed (see also STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC
Register)

12 ACPLimit (unit-dependent)
This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated (see also section
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register)

13 TRANsducer break
This bit is set when the limit of the transducer set subrange is attained.

14 COMMand Warning
This bit is set if the instrument ignores parameters when executing a command.

15 This bit is always 0.

The FSIQ supports bits 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 and 13.’.

1119.5063.12 5.24 E-13

FSIQ Status Reporting System

STATus QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register

This register comprises information about the observance of limits during adjacent power
measurements. It can be queried with commands ’STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit
:CONDition?’ and ’STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?’

Table 5-6 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register

Bit No. Meaning

0 ADJ UPPer FAIL(Screen A)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel.

1 ADJ LOWer FAIL (Screen A)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.

2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL (Screen A)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.

3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL (Screen A)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.

4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL (Screen A)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.

5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL (Screen A)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.

6 not used

7 not used

8 ADJ UPPer FAIL (Screen B)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel.

9 ADJ LOWer FAIL (Screen B)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.

10 ALT1 UPPer FAIL (Screen B)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.

11 ALT1 LOWer FAIL (Screen B)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.

12 ALT2 UPPer FAIL (Screen B)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.

13 ALT2 LOWer FAIL (Screen A)

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.

14 not used

15 This bit is always 0.

1119.5063.12 5.25 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

STATus QUEStionable:FREQuency Register

This register comprises information about the reference and local oscillator.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.

Table 5-7 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register

Bit No. Meaning

0 OVEN COLD
This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. ’OCXO’ will then be
displayed.

1 LO UNLocked (Screen A)
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. ’LO unl’ will then be displayed.

2 LO LEVel (Screen A)
This bit is set if the level of the local oscillator is smaller than the nominal value. ’LO LVL’ will then be displayed.

3 not used

4 not used

5 not used

6 not used

7 not used

8 not used

9 LO UNLocked (Screen B)
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks.’ LO unl’ will then be displayed.

10 LO LEVel (Screen B)
This bit is set if the level of the local oscillator is smaller than the nominal value. ’LO LVL’ will then be displayed.

11 not used

12 not used

13 not used

14 not used

15 This bit is always 0.

1119.5063.12 5.26 E-13

FSIQ Status Reporting System

STATus QUEStionable:LIMit Register

This register comprises information about the observance of limit lines. It can be queried with
commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? and STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit
[:EVENt]?.

Table 5-8 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register

Bit No. Meaning

0 LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.

1 LIMit 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated.

2 LIMit 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated.

3 LIMit 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated.

4 LIMit 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated.

5 LIMit 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated.

6 LIMit 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated.

7 LIMit 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated.

8 not used

9 not used

10 not used

11 not used

12 not used

13 not used

14 not used

15 This bit is always 0.

1119.5063.12 5.27 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

STATus QUEStionable:LMARgin Register

This register comprises information about the observance of limit margins. It can be queried with
commands STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? and "STATus:QUEStionable
:LMARgin[:EVENt]?.

Table 5-9 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register

Bit No. Meaning

0
LMARgin 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
1
LMARgin 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated.
2
LMARgin 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated.
3
LMARgin 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated.
4
LMARgin 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated.
5
LMARgin 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.
6
LMARgin 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated.
7
LMARgin 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated.

8 not used

9 not used

10 not used

11 not used

12 not used

13 not used

14 not used

15 This bit is always 0.

1119.5063.12 5.28 E-13

FSIQ Status Reporting System

STATus QUEStionable:POWer Register

This register comprises all information about possible overloads of the unit.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable :POWer:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:POWer [:EVENt]?.

Table 5-10 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register

Bit No. Meaning

0 OVERload (Screen A)
This bit is set if the RF input is overloaded. ’OVLD’ will then be displayed.

1 UNDerload (Screen A)
This bit is set if, during measurements in vector analyzer mode without capture buffer used, the lower level limit
in the IF path is violated.

2 IF_OVerload (Screen A)
This bit is set if the IF path is overloaded. ’IFOVLD’ will then be displayed.

3 not used

4 not used

5 not used

6 not used

7 not used

8 OVERload (Screen B)
This bit is set if the RF input is overloaded. ’OVLD’ will then be displayed.

9 UNDerload (Screen B)
This bit is set if, during measurements without capture buffer used, the lower level limit in the IF path is violated.

10 IF_OVerload (Screen B)
This bit is set if the IF path is overloaded. ’IFOVLD’ will then be displayed.

11 not used

12 not used

13 not used

14 not used

15 This bit is always 0.

1119.5063.12 5.29 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

STATus QUEStionable:SYNC Register

This register comprises information about sync and burst events.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?.

Table 5-11 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register

Bit No. Meaning

0 SYNC not found

This bit is set if the sync sequence of midamble was not found.

1 BURSt not found

This bit is set if a burst was not found.

2 No carrier
This bit is set if a signal was not found after starting the GSM/DCS/PCS mobile (option FSE-K10) or base station
(option FSE-K11) test.

3 Carrier overload
This bit is set if the sync sequence of midamble was not found after starting the GSM/DCS/PCS mobile
(option FSE-K10) or base station (option FSE-K11) test.

4 not used

5 not used

6 not used

7 not used

8 not used

9 not used

10 not used

11 not used

12 not used

13 not used

14 not used

15 This bit is always 0.

1119.5063.12 5.30 E-13

FSIQ Status Reporting System

STATus QUEStionable:TRANsducer Register

This register indicates that a transducer hold point is attained (bit 15) and what range is to be swept
next (bit 0 to 10). The sweep can be continued with command INITiate2:CONMeasure.
It can be queried with commands STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition? and "STATus
:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]?.

Table 5-12 Meaning of bits in STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register

Bit No. Meaning

Range 1
0 This bit is set when subrange 1 is attained.

Range 2
1 This bit is set when subrange 2 is attained.

2 Range 3
This bit is set when subrange 3 is attained.

3 Range 4
This bit is set when subrange 4 is attained.

4 Range 5
This bit is set when subrange 1 is attained.

5 Range 6
This bit is set when subrange 6 is attained.

6 Range 7
This bit is set when subrange 7 is attained.

7 Range 8
This bit is set when subrange 8 is attained.

8 Range 9
This bit is set when subrange 9 is attained.

9 Range 10
This bit is set when subrange 10 is attained.

10 not used

11 not used

12 not used

13 not used

14 Subrange limit
This bit is set when the transducer is at the point of changeover from one range to another.

15 This bit is always 0.

1119.5063.12 5.31 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

Application of the Status Reporting Systems

In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system, the information contained there must
be transmitted to the controller and further processed there. There are several methods which are
represented in the following. Detailed program examples are to be found in chapter 7, Program
Examples.

Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure

Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually
this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the control program can react with
corresponding actions. As evident from Fig. 5-3, an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 3,
4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information
of a further register, the error queue or the output buffer. The corresponding setting of the ENABle parts
of the status registers can achieve that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ. In
order to make use of the possibilities of the service request, all bits should be set to "1" in enable
registers SRE and ESE.

Examples (cf. Fig. 5-3 and chapter 7, Program Examples, as well):

Use of command "*OPC" to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep.

À Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation Complete)

À Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)?
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.

The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program
should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction. The program
should react appropriately to the service request. A detailed example for a service request routine is to
be found in chapter 7, Program Examples.

Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command "*STB", the status byte of an instrument is queried. However, the
query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster. The serial-poll method has already
been defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll
the status byte. The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.

The quick-BASIC command for executing a serial poll is "IBRSP()". Serial poll is mainly used to obtain a
fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC bus.
Parallel Poll
In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a
single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated
to each instrument to logically "0" or "1". By analogy to the SRE register which determines under which
conditions an SRQ is generated, there is a parallel poll enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the
STB bit by bit as well considering bit 6. The results are ORed, the result is then sent (possibly inverted)
as a response in the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried without parallel poll by
means of command "*IST".

1119.5063.12 5.32 E-13

FSIQ Status Reporting System

The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using quick-BASIC command "IBPPC()". This
command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted.
The parallel poll itself is executed using "IBRPP()".

The parallel-poll method is mainly used in order to quickly find out after an SRQ which instrument has
sent the service request if there are many instruments connected to the IEC bus. To this effect, SRE
and PPE must be set to the same value. A detailed example as to the parallel poll is to be found in
chapter 7, Program Examples.

Query by Means of Commands

Each part of every status register can be read by means of queries. The individual commands are
indicated in the detailed description of the registers. What is returned is always a number which
represents the bit pattern of the register queried. Evaluating this number is effected by the controller
program.

Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the
SRQ.

Error-Queue Query
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the error queue
are detailed plain-text error messages which can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control
or queried via the IEC bus using command "SYSTem:ERRor?". Each call of "SYSTem:ERRor?"
provides an entry from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument
responds with 0, "No error".

The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the
cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller
program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the
instrument are recorded there as well.

1119.5063.12 5.33 E-13

Status Reporting System FSIQ

Resetting Values of the Status Reporting System

Table 5-13 comprises the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be
reset. None of the commands, except for *RST and SYSTem:PRESet influences the functional
instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the instrument settings.

Table 5-13 Resettting instrument functions

Event Switching on supply

voltage DCL,SDC

Power-On-Status- (Device Clear, *RST or STATus:PRESet *CLS

Clear Selected Device SYSTem:PRESet
Clear)

Effect 0 1

Clear STB,ESR  yes    yes

Clear SRE,ESE  yes    

Clear PPE  yes    

Clear EVENTt parts of the  yes    yes

registers

Clear Enable parts of all  yes   yes 

OPERation and
QUEStionable registers,
Fill Enable parts of all
other registers with "1".

Fill PTRansition parts with  yes   yes 

"1" ,
Clear NTRansition parts

Clear error queue yes yes    yes

Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1)

Clear command yes yes yes   

processing and input
buffer

1) Every command being the first in a command line, i.e., immediately following a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>
clears the output buffer.

1119.5063.12 5.34 E-13

FSIQ Contents - Description of Commands

Contents - Chapter 6 "Remote Control - Description

of Commands"

6 Description of Commands
Notation ............................................................................................................................................ 6.1
Common Commands....................................................................................................................... 6.4
ABORt Subsystem ........................................................................................................................... 6.7
CALCulate Subsystem..................................................................................................................... 6.7
CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem ..................................................................................... 6.8
CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem ............................................................................................... 6.14
CALCulate:FEED Subsystem ................................................................................................ 6.18
CALCulate:FORMat Subsystem ............................................................................................ 6.19
CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem.................................................................................................. 6.20
CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem ............................................................................................ 6.35
CALCulate:MATH Subsystem ............................................................................................... 6.60
CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.61
CALibration Subsystem ................................................................................................................ 6.62
CONFigure Subsystem.................................................................................................................. 6.64
CONFigure:BTS Subsystem.................................................................................................. 6.64
CONFigure:BURSt Subsystem.............................................................................................. 6.71
CONFigure:MS Subsystem ................................................................................................... 6.74
CONFigure:SPECtrum Subsystem........................................................................................ 6.80
CONFigure:SPURious Subsystem ........................................................................................ 6.82
DIAGnostic Subsystem ................................................................................................................. 6.84
DISPlay Subsystem........................................................................................................................ 6.86
FETCh Subsystem ......................................................................................................................... 6.96
FETCh:BURSt Subsystem .................................................................................................... 6.96
FETCh:SPECtrum Subsystem ............................................................................................ 6.101
FETCh:SPURious Subsystem ............................................................................................. 6.104
FETCh:PTEMplate Subsystem............................................................................................ 6.106
FORMat Subsystem ..................................................................................................................... 6.107
HCOPy Subsystem ...................................................................................................................... 6.109
INITiate Subsystem...................................................................................................................... 6.114
INPut Subsystem ......................................................................................................................... 6.115
INSTrument Subsystem .............................................................................................................. 6.118
MMEMory Subsystem.................................................................................................................. 6.120
OUTPut Subsystem ..................................................................................................................... 6.131
READ Subsystem......................................................................................................................... 6.133
READ:BURSt Subsystem .................................................................................................... 6.133
READ:SPECtrum Subsystem .............................................................................................. 6.141
READ:SPURious Subsystem .............................................................................................. 6.143

1119.5063.12 I-6.1 E-1

Contents - Description of Commands FSIQ

SENSe Subsystem ....................................................................................................................... 6.145

SENSe:ADEMod Subsystem............................................................................................... 6.145
SENSe:AVERage Subsystem ............................................................................................. 6.147
SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem ........................................................................................... 6.149
SENSe:CORRection-Subsystem......................................................................................... 6.152
SENSe:DETector Subsystem .............................................................................................. 6.162
SENSe:DDEMod Subsystem............................................................................................... 6.163
SENSe:FILTer Subsystem .................................................................................................. 6.171
SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem.......................................................................................... 6.174
SENSe:MIXer - Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.178
SENSe:MSUMmary Subsystem .......................................................................................... 6.182
SENSe:POWer Subsystem ................................................................................................. 6.184
SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem .......................................................................................... 6.187
SENSe:SWEep Subsystem................................................................................................. 6.188
SOURce Subsystem .................................................................................................................... 6.192
STATus Subsystem ..................................................................................................................... 6.194
SYSTem Subsystem .................................................................................................................... 6.205
TRACe Subsystem ....................................................................................................................... 6.211
TRIGger Subsystem..................................................................................................................... 6.213
UNIT Subsystem .......................................................................................................................... 6.216

Alphabetical List of Commands ................................................................................................. 6.217

Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment ................................................ 6.233

Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis Mode ............................................................................ 6.233
FREQUENCY Key Group.......................................................................................... 6.233
LEVEL Key Group ..................................................................................................... 6.235
INPUT Key................................................................................................................. 6.236
MARKER Key Group ................................................................................................. 6.237
LINES Key Group ...................................................................................................... 6.241
TRACE Key Group .................................................................................................... 6.242
SWEEP Key Group ................................................................................................... 6.244
Basic Instrument - General Device Settings........................................................................ 6.247
DATA VARIATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.247
SYSTEM Key Group.................................................................................................. 6.247
CONFIGURATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.250
STATUS Key Group .................................................................................................. 6.252
HARDCOPY Key Group ............................................................................................ 6.253
MEMORY Key Group ................................................................................................ 6.254
USER Key ................................................................................................................. 6.256
Vektor-Signal Analysis Mode............................................................................................... 6.257
CONFIGURATION Key Group - Digital Demodulation.............................................. 6.257
CONFIGURATION Key Group - Analog Demodulation ............................................ 6.261
FREQUENCY Key Group.......................................................................................... 6.263
LEVEL Key Group ..................................................................................................... 6.263
INPUT Key................................................................................................................. 6.264
MARKER Key Group ................................................................................................. 6.265
LINES Key Group ...................................................................................................... 6.267
TRACE Key Group .................................................................................................... 6.268

1119.5063.12 I-6.2 E-1

FSIQ Contents - Description of Commands

SWEEP Key Group ................................................................................................... 6.269

TRIGGER Key - Digital Demodulation ...................................................................... 6.269
TRIGGER Key - Analog Demodulation .................................................................... 6.270
Tracking Generator (Option FSE-B8 to B11).......................................................................... 271
CONFIGURATION Key Group ..................................................................................... 271
GSM BTS Analysis (Option FSE-K11)................................................................................. 6.272
CONFIGURATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.272
GSM MS Analysis (Option FSE-K10) .................................................................................. 6.280
CONFIGURATION Key Group .................................................................................. 6.280
External Mixer (Option FSE-B21) ........................................................................................ 6.288
INPUT Key Group...................................................................................................... 6.288

1119.5063.12 I-6.3 E-1

Contents - Description of Commands FSIQ

1119.5063.12 I-6.4 E-1

FSIQ Notation

6 Description of Commands

Notation
In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then
described in detail, separated according to the command system. The notation corresponds to the one
of the SCPI standards to a large extent. The SCPI conformity information can be taken from the
individual description of the commands.

Table of Commands
Command: In the command column, the table provides an overview of the commands
and their hierarchical arrangement (see indentations).

Parameter: The parameter column indicates the requested parameters together with
their specified range.

Unit: The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters.

Remark: In the remark column an indication is made on:

– whether the command does not have a query form,
– whether the command has only one query form
– whether this command is implemented only with a certain option of the
instrument

Indentations The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the
table by means of indentations to the right. The lower the level is, the
farther the indentation to the right is. Please observe that the complete
notation of the command always includes the higher levels as well.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer is represented in the table as
follows:
SENSe first level
:FREQuency second level
:CENTer third level

Individual description In the individual description, the complete notation of the command is
given. An example for each command, the *RST value and the SCPI
information is written out at the end of the individual description.
The modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the
following abbreviations:
A Spectrum analysis
A-F Spectrum analysis - frequency domain only
A-Z Spectrum analysis - time domain only (zero span)
VA Vector signal analysis
VA-D Vector signal analysis - digital demodulation only
VA-A Vector signal analysis - analog demodulation only
BTS GSM BTS analysis (option FSE-K11)
MS GSM MS analysis (option FSE-K10)

Note: The spectrum analysis (analyzer) and vector signal analysis

(vector analyzer) modes are implemented in the basic unit. For
the other modes, the corresponding options are required.

1119.5063.12 6.1 E-13

Notation FSIQ

Upper/lower case notation Upper/lower case letters serve to mark the long or short form of the key
words of a command in the description (see Chapter 5). The instrument
itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters.

Special characters | A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several
commands. These key words are indicated in the same line, they are
separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these key words has to be
indicated in the header of the command. The effect of the command is
independent of which of the key words is indicated.

Example:SENSe:FREQuency:CW|:FIXed
The two following commands of identical meaning can be
formed. They set the frequency of the constantly frequent signal
to 1 kHz:

SENSe:FREQuency:CW 1E3 = SENSe:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3

A vertical stroke in indicating the parameters marks alternative possibilities

in the sense of "or". The effect of the command is different, depending on
which parameter is entered.

Example:Selection of the parameters for the command

INPut:COUPling AC | DC
If parameter AC is selected, only the AC content is fed through, in
the case of DC, the DC as well as the AC content.

[ ] Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header
(cf. Chapter 5, Section "Optional Keywords"). The full command length
must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the
SCPI standards.
Parameters in square brackets can optionally be incorporated in the
command or omitted as well.

{ } Parameters in braces can optionally be incorporated in the command either

not at all, once or several times.

Description of parameters Due to the standardization, the parameter section of SCPI commands
consists always of the same syntactical elements. SCPI has specified a
series of definitions therefore, which are used in the tables of commands.
In the tables, these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets
(<...>) and will be briefly explained in the following (see also Chapter 5,
Section "Parameters").

<Boolean> This indication refers to parameters which can adopt two states, "on" and
"off". The "off" state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the
numeric value 0, the "on" state is indicated by ON or any numeric value
other than zero. Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value
0 or 1.

1119.5063.12 6.2 E-13

FSIQ Notation

<numeric_value>
<num> These indications mark parameters which may be entered as numeric
values or be set using specific keywords (character data).
The keywords given below are permitted:
MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible
value.
MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value.
DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default
value.
UP This keyword increments the parameter value.
DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter.
The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be
queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command. They
must be entered following the quotation mark.
Example:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? MAXimum
returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as
result.

<arbitrary block program data>

This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of
a binary data block.

1119.5063.12 6.3 E-13

Common Commands FSIQ

Common Commands
The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. Same commands have
the same effect on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*" followed
by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in
detail in Chapter 5.

Command Designation Parameter Remark

*CAL? Calibration Query query only

*CLS Clear Status no query

*ESE Event Status Enable 0 to 255

*ESR? Standard Event Status Query 0 to 255 query only

*IDN? Identification Query <string> query only

*IST? Individual Status Query 0 to 255 query only

*OPC Operation Complete

*OPT? Option Identification Query query only

*PCB Pass Control Back 0 to 30 no query

*PRE Parallel Poll Register Enable 0 to 255

*PSC Power On Status Clear 0|1

*RST Reset no query

*SRE Service Request Enable 0 to 255

*STB? Status Byte Query query only

*TRG Trigger no query

*TST? Self Test Query query only

*WAI Wait to continue no query

*CAL?
CALIBRATION QUERY triggers a calibration of the instrument and subsequently query the
calibration status. Any responses > 0 indicate errors.

*CLS
CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt-part
of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero. The command does not alter the mask and
transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.

*ESE 0 to 255
EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated. Query *ESE?
returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.

1119.5063.12 6.4 E-13

FSIQ Common Commands

*ESR?
STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal
form (0 to 255) and subsequently sets the register to zero.

*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification.
The instrument identification consists of the following elements which are separated by commas:
Manufacturer
Device (analyzer model)
Serial number of the instrument
Firmware version number
Example: "Rohde&Schwarz, FSIQ3, 825082/007, 2.05"

*IST?
INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form (0 | 1). The IST
flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll (cf. Chapter 5).

*OPC
OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have
been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request (cf. Chapter 5).

*OPC?
OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY writes message "1" into the output buffer as soon as all
preceding commands have been executed (cf. Chapter 5).

*OPT?
OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list
of the options installed. The options are separated from each other by means of commas.

Position Option

1 reserved
2 FSE-B4 Low Phase Noise & OCXO
3 FSE-B5 FFT-Filter
4 reserved
5 FSE-B7 Vector Signal Analysis
6 FSE-B8 Tracking Generator 3.5 GHz
7 FSE-B9 Tracking Generator 3.5 GHz with I/Q modulator
8 FSE-B10 Tracking Generator 7 GHz
9 FSE-B11 Tracking Generator 7 GHz with I/Q modulator
10 FSE-B12 Output Attenuator for Tracking Generator
11 to 18 reserved
19 FSE-B21 External Mixer Output

Example: 0, FSE-B4, 0, 0, FSE-B7, 0, 0, 0, FSE-B11, FSE-B12, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0

Note: The standard FSIQ is equipped with options FSE-B4, FSE-B6 and FSE-B7.

*PCB 0 to 30
PASS CONTROL BACK indicates the controller address which the IEC-bus control is to be returned
to after termination of the triggered action.

1119.5063.12 6.5 E-13

Common Commands FSIQ

*PRE 0 to 255
PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets parallel poll enable register to the value indicated.
Query *PRE? returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.

*PSC 0 | 1
POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is
maintained or reset in switching on.

*PSC = 0 causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained. Thus a service request
can be triggered in switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of status
registers ESE and SRE.

*PSC = 0 resets the registers.

Query *PSC? reads out the contents of the power-on-status-clear flag. The response can be 0 or 1.

*RST
RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status. The command essentially corresponds to
pressing the [PRESET] key. The default setting is indicated in the description of the commands.

*SRE 0 to 255
SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the value indicated. Bit 6
(MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines under which conditions a service request is
triggered. Query *SRE? reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form. Bit
6 is always 0.

*STB?
READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form.

*TRG
TRIGGER triggers a measurement. This command corresponds to INITiate:IMMediate (cf.
Section "TRIGger subsystem", as well).

*TST?
SELF TEST QUERY triggers all selftests of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal
form.

*WAI
WAIT-to-CONTINUE only permits the servicing of the subsequent commands after all preceding
commands have been executed and all signals have settled (cf. Chapter 5 and "*OPC" as well).

1119.5063.12 6.6 E-13

FSIQ ABORt / CALCulate Subsystem

ABORt Subsystem
The ABORt subsystem contains the commands for aborting triggered actions. An action can be
triggered again immediately after being aborted. All commands trigger events which is why they are not
assigned any *RST value.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

ABORt -- -- no query

ABORt
This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system.
Example: "ABOR;INIT:IMM"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate Subsystem
The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data, transforming and
carrying out corrections. These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquistion, i.e., following
the SENSe subsystem.
In the split-screen representation, a distinction is made between CALCulate1 and CALCulate2:
^ screen A;
CALCulate1 =
^ screen B
CALCulate2 =

1119.5063.12 6.7 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate:DELTamarker Subsystem
The CALCulate:DELTamarker subsystem checks the delta-marker functions in the instrument.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:DELTamarker<1 to 4>
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:MODE ABSolute|RELative
:AOFF no query
:TRACe <numeric_value> --
:X <numeric_value> HZ | S | SYM
:RELative? -- -- query only
:Y? -- -- query only
:MAXimum
[:PEAK] -- -- no query
:APEak -- -- no query (vector signal analysis)
:NEXT -- -- no query
:RIGHt -- -- no query
:LEFT -- -- no query
:MINimum
[:PEAK] -- -- no query
:NEXT -- -- no query
:RIGHt -- -- no query
:LEFT -- -- no query
:FUNCtion
:FIXed
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RPOint
:Y <numeric_value> DBM
:OFFSet <numeric_value> DB
:X <numeric_value> HZ |S | SYM
:PNOise
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? -- -- query only
:STEP
[:INCRement] <numeric_value> HZ |S | SYM
:AUTO <Boolean> --

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the selected delta marker. If no indication is made, delta marker 1
is selected automatically.
Example: "CALC:DELT3 ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.8 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MODE ABSolute | RELative

This command switches over between relative and absolute input of frequency of the delta marker.
Example: "CALC:DELT:MODE ABS"
Features: *RST value: REL
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
In the RELative mode, the frequency of the delta marker is programmed relative to the reference
marker. In the ABSolute mode, the frequency is defined by the absolute values.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:AOFF
This command switches off all active delta markers.
Example: "CALC:DELT:AOFF"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:TRACe 1 to 4
This command assigns the selected delta marker to the indicated measuring curve.
Example: "CALC:DELT3:TRAC 2"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:X 0 ... MAX (frequency | sweep time | symbols)

This command positions the selected delta marker to the indicated frequency (span > 0) or time
(span = 0). The query always returns the absolute value of frequency or time.
Example: "CALC:DELT:X 10.7MHz"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The SYM unit is only valid in Vector Signal Analysis mode.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:X:RELative?
This command queries the frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0) of the selected delta marker
relative to the reference marker.
Example: "CALC:DELT:X:REL?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.9 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:Y?
This command queries the value of the selected marker.
Example: "CALC:DELT:Y?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
In complex presentations (vector signal analysis - polar diagrams), the real and the imaginary
component as well as magnitude and phase are output separated by a comma.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current maximum value in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:DELT:MAX"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:APEak
This command positions the delta marker to the maximum absolute value of the trace.
Example: "CALC:DELT:MAX:APE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: VA
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:DELT:MAX:NEXT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the
current value (i.e., in ascending X direction) in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:DELT:MAX:RIGH"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.10 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the
current value (i.e., in descending X direction) in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current minimum value in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:DELT:MIN"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:DELT:MIN:NEXT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current
value (ie in ascending X direction).
Example: "CALC:DELT:MIN:RIGH"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current
value (ie in descending X direction).
Example: "CALC:DELT:MIN:LEFT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.11 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off.
Example: "CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific.
Modes: A, VA-D, BTS, MS
The reference value is independent of the current trace.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y <numeric_value>

This command defines a new fixed reference value for the relative measurement.
Example: "CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y -10dBm"
Features: *RST value: - (FUNction:FIXed[:STATe] is set to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The reference value is independent of the current trace.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet <numeric_value>

This command defines an additional level offset for the relative measurement.
Example: "CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 10dB"
Features: *RST value: 0 dB
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The level offset is included in the output of the level value.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <numeric_value>

This command defines the new fixed reference frequency, time or symbols for the relative
measurement.
Example: "CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 10.7MHz"
Features: *RST value: - (FUNction:FIXed[:STATe] is set to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The reference value is independent of the current trace. With span = 0, the reference time, otherwise
the reference frequency is defined.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches the measurement of the phase noise on or off.
Example: "CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
When the phase noise is measured, the correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are
automatically considered. The measurement uses the reference values defined by
FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X or :Y.

1119.5063.12 6.12 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?
This command queries the result of the phase noise measurement.
Example: "CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:STEP[:INCRement] <numeric_value>

This command defines the delta marker step width.
Example: "CALC:DELT:STEP 10kHz" (frequency domain)
"CALC:DELT:STEP 5ms" (time domain)
Features: *RST value: - (STEP is set to AUTO)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF

This command switches the automatic adaptation of the marker step width on or off.
Example: "CALC:DELT:STEP:AUTO OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
With AUTO ON, the step width is 10% of the span.

1119.5063.12 6.13 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate:DLINe Subsystem
The CALCulate:DLINe subsystem checks the display lines in the instrument, i.e., the level, frequency
and time lines (depending on the X-axis) as well as threshold and reference lines.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:DLINe<1|2> <numeric_value> DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT
:STATe <Boolean>
:THReshold <numeric_value> DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT
:STATe <Boolean>
:CTHReshold <numeric_value> DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT
:STATe <Boolean>
:RLINe <numeric_value> DBM | DB | DEG | RAD | S |
HZ | PCT
:STATe <Boolean>
:FLINe<1|2> <numeric_value> HZ
:STATe <Boolean>
:TLINe<1|2> <numeric_value> S | SYM
:STATe <Boolean>

CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> MINimum to MAXimum (depending on current unit)

This command defines the position of the display line.
Example: "CALC:DLIN -20dBm"
Features: *RST value: - (STATe to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The display lines mark the given level in the display.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in operating mode Vector Signal Analysis.

CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the display line on or off.
Example: "CALC:DLIN2:STAT OFF"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.14 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold MINimum to MAXimum (depending on current unit)

This command defines the position of the thresholds.
Example: "CALC:THR -82dBm"
Features: *RST value: - (STATe to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
For marker scan functions MAX PEAK, NEXT PEAK etc., the threshold serves as the lowest limit for
maximum or minimum search.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in operating mode Vector Signal Analysis.

CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the threshold on or off.
Example: "CALC:THR:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold MINimum to MAXimum (depending on the current unit)

This command defines the position of a threshold line (base line), below which all measured values
are cleared.
Example: "CALC:CTHR -82dBm"
Features: *RST value: - (STATe to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A, VA, BTS, MS
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in operating mode Vector Signal Analysis.

CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold:STATe ON | OFF
This command is for switching on or off the threshold line (base line), below which all measured
values are cleared.
Example: "CALC:CTHR:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.15 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe MINimum to MAXimum (depending on the current unit)

This command defines the position of the reference line.
Example: "CALC:RLIN -10dBm"
Features: *RST value: - (STATe to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The reference line serves as a reference for the arithmetic operation of traces.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are only valid in operating mode Vector Signal Analysis.

CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the reference line on or off.
Example: "CALC:RLIN:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> 0 GHz to fmax

This command defines the position of the frequency lines.
Example: "CALC:FLIN2 120MHz"
Features: *RST value: - (STATe to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-F, VA, BTS, MS
The frequency lines mark the given frequencies in the display. Frequency lines are only valid for a
SPAN >0.

CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the frequency line on or off.
Example: "CALC:FLIN2:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-F, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.16 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> 0 to 1000s
This command defines the position of the time lines.
Example: "CALC:TLIN 10ms"
Features: *RST value: - (STATe to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA, BTS, MS
The time lines mark the given times in the display. Time lines are only valid for a SPAN = 0.

CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the time line on or off.
Example: "CALC:TLIN2:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.17 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate:FEED Subsystem
The CALCulate:FEED subsystem selects the measured data in operating mode vector signal analysis.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:FEED <string> Vector Signal Analysis
no query

CALCulate<1|2>:FEED <string>
This command selects the measured data that are to be displayed.
Parameter: <string>::= ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’ |
‘XTIM:AM’ |
‘XTIM:FM’ |
‘XTIM:PM’ |
‘XTIM:AMSummary’ |
‘XTIM:FMSummary’ |
‘XTIM:PMSummary’ |
Example: "CALC:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’"
Features: *RST value: ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA
The string parameters have the following meaning:
‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ Test signal (filtered, synchronized to symbol clock)
‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ Reference signal (internally generated from demodulated test signal)
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ Error signal (magnitude and phase error)
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’ Vector error signal
‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’ Symbol table (demodulated bits and table with modulation errors)
'XTIM:AM' Demodulated AM signal (analog demodulation)
'XTIM:FM' Demodulated FM signal (analog demodulation)
'XTIM:PM' Demodulated PM signal (analog demodulation)
'XTIM:AMSummary' AM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation)
'XTIM:FMSummary' FM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation)
'XTIM:PMSummary' PM-Summary Marker (analog demodulation)

1119.5063.12 6.18 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate:FORMat Subsystem
The CALCulate:FORMat subsystem determines further processing and conversion of measured data in
operating mode vector signal analysis.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:FORMat MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | Vector Signal Analysis
RIMag | FREQuency | IEYE | QEYE |
TEYE | FEYE | COMP | CONS

:FSK
:DEViation
:REFerence <numeric_value> HZ Vector Signal Analysis

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | RIMag | FREQuency | IEYE | QEYE |

TEYE | FEYE | COMP | CONS
This command defines the display of the traces.
Example: "CALC:FORM CONS"
Features: *RST value: MAGNitude
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-D
The parameters have the following meaning:
MAGNitude Display of the magnitude in the time domain
PHASe | UPHase Display of the phase in the time domain with or without (”unwrapped”)
limitation to ±180°
RIMag Display of the time characteristic of inphase and quadrature
component
FREQuency Display of the frequency response in the time domain
IEYE | QEYE Eye diagram of the inphase or quadrature component
TEYE Display of the trellis diagram
FEYE Eye diagram of FSK modulation
COMP Display of the polar vector diagram (complex)
CONS Display of the polar vector diagaram (constellation)

CALCulate<1|2>:FSK:DEViation:REFerence <numeric_value>
This command defines the reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK modulation.
Example: "CALC:FSK:DEV:REF 20kHz"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.19 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate:LIMit Subsystem
The CALCulate:LIMit subsystem comprises the limit lines and the corresponding limit checks. Limit lines
can be defined as upper and lower limit lines. The individual values of the limit lines correspond to the
values of the X-axis (CONTrol) which have to have the same number.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:LIMit<1 to 8>
:TRACe <numeric_value>
:STATe <Boolean> --
:UNIT DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV |
VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | DB | DBUV_MHZ
| DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M |
DBUA_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ |
DEG | RAD | S | HZ | PCT | UNITLESS
CATalog? query only
:CONTrol
[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>.. HZ | S | SYM
:DOMain FREQuency | TIME
:OFFSet <numeric_value> HZ | S | SYM
:MODE RELative | ABSolute
:UNIT
[:TIME] S | SYM
:SHIFt <numeric_value> HZ | S | SYM Vector Signal Analysis
:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
:UPPer
[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>.. DBM | DB | DEG |
RAD | S | HZ | PCT
:STATe <Boolean> --
:OFFSet <numeric_value> DB | DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
:MARGin <numeric_value> DB| DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
:MODE RELative | ABSolute --
:SHIFt <numeric_value> DB | DEG | RAD|
S | HZ | PCT
:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
:LOWer
[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>.. DBM | DB | DEG |
RAD | S | HZ | PCT
:STATe <Boolean> --
:OFFSet <numeric_value> DB| DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
:MARGin <numeric_value> DB| DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
:MODE RELative | ABSolute --
:SHIFt <numeric_value> DB | DEG | RAD |
S | HZ | PCT
:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
:FAIL? query only
:CLEar --
[:IMMediate] -- -- no query
:COMMent <string>
:COPY 1 to 8 | < name>
:NAME <string>
:DELete

1119.5063.12 6.20 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:LIMit<1 to 8>
:BURSt -- Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:PTEMplate? query only
:POWer? -- query only
:SPECtrum -- Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:MODulation? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | query only
COMBined | DCSRx1800
:FAILs? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | query only
COMBined | DCSRx1800
:EXCeptions? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | query only
COMBined | DCSRx1800
:SWITching? query only
:FAILs? query only
:SPURious? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | query only; Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
IDLeband
:FAILs? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | query only; Option FSE-K11or FSE-K10
IDLeband
:MARGin <numeric_value> DB
:ACPower
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:ACHannel <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> DB; DB
:STATe <Boolean>
:RESult? -- query only
:ALTernate<1|2> <numeric_value>, <numeric_value> DB; DB
:STATe <Boolean>
:RESult? -- query only

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:TRACe <numeric_value>

This command assigns a trace to a limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM2:TRAC 2"
Features: *RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:STATe ON | OFF

This command switches the limit check for the selected limit line on or off.
Example: "CALC:LIM:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?.

1119.5063.12 6.21 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UNIT DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT |DBUA | AMPere |

DB | DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M |
DBUA_M | DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ |DEG | RAD | S | HZ |
PCT | UNITLESS|
This command defines the unit of the selected limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:UNIT DBUV"
Features: *RST value: DBM
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
DBUV_MHZ and DBUA_MHZ denote the units DBUV/MHZ or DBUA/MHZ.
Upon selection of the unit DB the limit line is automatically switched to the relative mode. For units
different from DB the limit line is automatically switched to the absolute mode.
The units DEG, RAD, S, HZ are available in the vector analysis mode only.

CALCulate:LIMit:CATalog?
This command reads out the names of all limit lines stored on the harddisk.
Example: "CALC:LIM:CAT?"
Feature: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Mode: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..

This command defines the X-axis values (frequencies or times) of the upper or lower limit lines.
Example: "CALC:LIM:CONT 1MHz,30MHz,300MHz,1GHz"
Features: *RST value: - (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding UPPer- and/or LOWer limit lines
have to be identical. Available units are HZ | S | SYM, SYM only for vector signal analyzer mode.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency | TIME

This command defines the X-axis in the frequency or time domain.
Example: "CALC:LIM:CONT:DOM TIME"
Features: *RST value: FREQuency
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.22 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:OFFSet <numeric_value>

This command defines an offset for the X-axis value of the selected relative limit line in the frequency
or time domain.
Example: "CALC:LIM:CONT:OFFS 100us"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:MODE RELative | ABSolute

This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the X-axis of the selected limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:CONT:MODE REL"
Features: *RST value: ABSolute
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Upon selection of RELative, the unit is switched to DB.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:UNIT[:TIME] S | SYM

This command defines the unit of the x-axis scaling of limit lines.
Example: "CALC:LIM:CONT:UNIT SYM"
Features: *RST value: S
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SHIFt <numeric_value>

This command shifts a limit line which has been specified for relative frequencies or times (X-axis).
Example: "CALC:LIM:CONT:SHIF 50kHz"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for determining the
limit line from the frequency points.
Example: "CALC:LIM:CONT:SPAC LIN"
Features: *RST value: LIN
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.23 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..

This command defines the values for the upper limit lines.
Example: "CALC:LIM:UPP -10,0,0,-10"
Features: *RST value: - (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding UPPer limit line have to be
identical. If the measured values exceed the UPPer limit line, the limit check signals errors.
The unit must be identical with the unit selected by CALC:LIM:UNIT.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available in the vector signal analysis mode only.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF

This command defines the selected limit line as upper limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:UPPer:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL?.
In analyzer and vector analyzer mode, the result of the limit check can be queried with
CALCulate:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL?.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:OFFSet <numeric_value>

This command defines an offset for the Y-axis of the selected relative upper limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:UPP:OFFS 3dB"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MARGin <numeric_value>

This command defines the margin of the selected upper limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:UPP:MARG 10dB"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MODE RELative | ABSolute

This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the Y-axis of the selected upper limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:UPP:MODE REL"
Features: *RST value: ABSolute
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.24 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SHIFt <numeric_value>

This command shifts a limit line, which has relative values for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such
as volt).
Example: "CALC:LIM:UPP:SHIF 20dB"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for the upper limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:UPP:SPAC LIN"
Features: *RST value: LIN
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>..

This command defines the values for the selected lower limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:LOW -30,-40,-40,-30"
Features: *RST value: - (LIMit:STATe is set to OFF)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The number of values for the CONTrol axis and the corresponding LOWer limit line have to be
identical.If the measured values violate the LOWer limit line, the limit check signals errors.
The unit must be identical with the unit selected by CALC:LIM:UNIT.
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available in the vector signal analysis mode only.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF

This command defines the selected limit line as lower limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:LOWer:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The result of the limit check can be queried with CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL?.

1119.5063.12 6.25 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:OFFSet <numeric_value>

This command defines an offset for the Y-axis of the selected relative lower limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:LOW:OFFS 3dB"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MARGin <numeric_value>

This command defines the margin of the selected lower limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:LOW:MARG 10dB"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MODE RELative | ABSolute

This command selects the relative or absolute scaling for the Y-axis of the selected lower limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:LOW:MODE REL"
Features: *RST value: ABSolute
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SHIFt <numeric_value>

This command shifts a limit line, which has relative values for the Y-axis (levels or linear units such
as volt).
Example: "CALC:LIM:LOW:SHIF 20dB"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

This command makes a selection between linear and logarithmic interpolation for the lower limit line.
Example: "CALC:LIM:LOW:SPAC LIN"
Features: *RST value: LIN
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.26 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL?
This command queries the result of the limit check.
Example: "CALC:LIM:FAIL?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The result of the limit check responds with 0 in case of PASS and with 1 in case of FAIL.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CLEar[:IMMediate]
This command deletes the result of the current limit check.
Example: "CALC:LIM:CLE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COMMent <string>

This command defines a comment for the limit line selected.
Example: "CALC:LIM:COMM ’Upper limit for spectrum’"
Features: *RST value: blank comment
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COPY 1 to 8 | <name>

This command copies one limit line onto another one.
Parameter: 1 to 8 ::= number of the new limit line or, alternatively:
<name> ::= name of the new limit line given as a string
Example: "CALC:LIM1:COPY 2"
"CALC:LIM1:COPY ’GSM2’"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The name of the limit line may contain a maximum of 8 characters. This command is an "event"
which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.27 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:NAME <name of limit line>

This command assigns a name to a limit line numbered 1 to 8. If it doesn’t exist previously, a limit
line with this name is created.
Example: "CALC:LIM1:NAME ’GSM1’"
Features: *RST value: ’REM1’ to ’REM8’ for lines 1 to 8
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The name of the limit line may contain a maximum of 8 characters.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:DELete
This command deletes the limit line selected.
Examples: "CALC:LIM1:DEL"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:BURSt:PTEMplate?
This command queries the result of the limit check for a power vs. time measurement.
Parameter: The result is displayed in character data form. Possible values are:
PASSED limit not exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
RUNNING measurement not completed
Examples: "CALC:LIM:BURS:PTEM?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value.
If no measurement has been carried out yet, a query error is triggered off. The numeric suffixes
<1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

1119.5063.12 6.28 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:BURSt:POWer?
This command queries the total result of the carrier power measurement.
Parameter: The result is displayed in character data form. Possible values are:
PASSED limit not exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
ABORTED measurement aborted
RUNNING measurement not completed
Examples: "CALC:LIM:BURS:POW?"
Result: PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value.
If the command is triggered off before the carrier power measurement was started for the first time, a
query error results. The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:MODulation? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | COMBined |

DCSRx1800
This command queries the total result of the spectrum due to modulation measurement.
Parameter: The result is displayed in character data form. Possible values are:
PASSED limit not exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
ABORTED measurement aborted
RUNNING measurement not completed
Examples: "CALC:LIM:SPEC:MOD? RXB"
Result: PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
ARFCn ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz TXBand TX-band
RXBand RX-band COMBined ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz / TX-band
DCSRx1800 RX-Band DCS 1800 (option FSE-K10 only)
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value.
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

1119.5063.12 6.29 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:MODulation:FAILs? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand |

COMBined | DCSRx1800
This command queries the number of limit violations of the spectrum due to modulation
measurement.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:SPEC:MOD:FAIL? RXB"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
ARFCn ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz
TXBand TX-band
RXBand RX-band
COMBined ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz / TX-band
DCSRx1800 RX-Band DCS 1800 (option FSE-K10 only)
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:MODulation:EXCeptions? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand |

COMBined | DCSRx1800
This command queries the number of limit violations of the spectrum due to modulation
measurement which are marked as exceptions.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:SPEC:MOD:EXC? RXB"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
ARFCn ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz
TXBand TX-band
RXBand RX-band
COMBined ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz / TX-band
DCSRx1800 RX-Band DCS 1800 (option FSE-K10 only
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. The numeric suffixes <1|2> or
<1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

1119.5063.12 6.30 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:SWITching?
This command queries the total result of the spectrum due to switching transients measurements.
Parameter: The result is displayed in character data form. Possible values are:
PASSED limit not exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
ABORTED measurement aborted
RUNNING measurement not completed
Examples: "CALC:LIM:SPEC:SWIT?"
Result: PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. The numeric suffixes <1|2> or
<1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:SWITching:FAILs?
This command queries the number of limit violations of the spectrum due to switching transient
measurement.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:SPEC:SWIT:FAIL?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. The numeric suffixes <1|2> or
<1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPURious? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | IDLeband

This command queries the total result of the spurious emissions measurement.
Parameter: The result is displayed in character data form. Possible values are:
PASSED limit not exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
ABORTED measurement aborted
RUNNING measurement not completed
Examples: "CALC:LIM:SPUR? OTXB"
Result:PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
TXBand TX-band
OTXBand Not TX-band
RXBand RX-band (option FSE-K11 only)
IDLeband IDLeband (option FSE-K10 only)
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. The numeric suffixes <1|2> or
<1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

1119.5063.12 6.31 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPURious:FAILs? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | IDLeband

This command queries the number of limit violations of the spurious emissions measurement.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:SPUR:FAIL? OTXB"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
TXBand TX-band
OTXBand Not TX-band
RXBand RX-band (option FSE-K11 only)
IDLeband IDLeband (option FSE-K10 only)
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. The numeric suffixes <1|2> or
<1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:MARGin 0 to 100DB

This command sets /changes the value of the margin (safe difference to the actual limit) for the limit
check.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:MARG 6DB"
Features: *RST value: 3DB
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power measurements. The
commands CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT or CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT:STAT must be used in addition to
specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper/lower adjacent channel or for the
alternate adjacent channels.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:ACP ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

1119.5063.12 6.32 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel 0 to 100 dB, 0 to 100 dB

This command defines the limit for the upper/lower adjacent channel for adjacent channel power
measurements.
Parameter: The first (second) numeric value is the limit for the upper (lower) adjacent
channel.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB"
Features: *RST value: 0 dB
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:STATe ON | OFF

This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power
measurement is performed. Before, the limit check must be activated using CALC:LIM:ACP ON.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper /lower adjacent channel when
adjacent channel power measurement is performed.
Parameter: The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED, and where the first returned value denotes the
lower, the second denotes the upper adjacent channel.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. If the power measurement of the
adjacent channel is switched off, the command triggers a query error.
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

1119.5063.12 6.33 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2> 0 to 100DB, 0 to 100 dB.

This command defines the limit for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for adjacent channel
power measurements.
Parameter: The first (second) numeric value is the limit for the lower (upper) alternate
adjacent channel. The numeric suffix after ALTernate<1|2> denotes the first
or the second alternate channel.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB 30DB"
Features: *RST value: 0DB
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF

This command activates the limit check for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for adjacent
channel power measurements. Before, the limit check must be activated using CALC:LIM:ACP ON.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:RESult?
This command queries the result of the limit check for the first/second alternate adjacent channel for
adjacent channel power measurements.
Parameter: The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where
<result> = PASSED | FAILED and where the first (second) returned value
denotes the lower (upper) alternate adjacent channel.
Examples: "CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:RES?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
This command is a query and therefore not assigned a *RST value. If the power measurement of the
adjacent channel is switched off, the command triggers a query error.
The numeric suffixes <1|2> or <1 to 8> are not significant for this command.

1119.5063.12 6.34 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate:MARKer Subsystem
The CALCulate:MARKer subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:MARKer<1 to 4>
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:AOFF no query
:TRACe <numeric_value> --
:X <numeric_value> HZ | S | SYM
:SLIMits
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:COUNt <Boolean> --
:RESolution <numeric_value> HZ
:FREQuency? -- -- query only
:COUPled
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:SCOupled
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:LOEXclude <Boolean>
:Y? -- -- query only
:MAXimum
[:PEAK] -- -- no query
:APEak -- -- no query,
Vector Signal Analysis
:NEXT -- -- no query
:RIGHt -- -- no query
:LEFT -- -- no query
:MINimum
[:PEAK] -- -- no query
:NEXT -- -- no query
:RIGHt -- -- no query
:LEFT -- -- no query
:STEP
[:INCRement] <numeric_value> HZ | S | SYM
:AUTO <Boolean> --
:PEXCursion <numeric_value> DB
:READout MPHase | RIMaginary Vector Signal Analysis
:FUNCtion
:NDBDown <numeric_value> DB
:STATe <Boolean>
:RESult? -- -- query only
:FREQuency? -- -- query only
:ZOOM <numeric_value> HZ no query
:NOISe
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? -- -- query only
:DEModulation
:SELect AM|FM
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:HOLDoff <numeric_value> S
:SFACtor <expr>
:STATe <Boolean>
:RESult? -- -- query only
:FREQuency? -- -- query only

1119.5063.12 6.35 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:MARKer
:FUNCtion
:STRack <Boolean>
[:STATe]
:ADEMod Vector Signal Analysis
:AM
[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS query only
:FM
[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS | RDEV query only
:PM
[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS query only
:AFRequency
[:RESult]? query only
:FERRor
[:RESult]? query only
:SINad
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? query only
:CARRier
[:RESult]? query only
:DDEMod Vector Signal Analysis
:RESult? MERM | MEPK | MEPS | PERM | PEPK | query only
PEPS |EVRM | EVPK | EVPS | IQOF |
IQIM | ADR | FERR | DEV | FSRM |
FSPK | FSPS | RHO |FEPK | DTTS
:POWer
:SELect ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0
:RESult? ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth | query only
OBWidth | CN | CN0
:PRESet NADC | TETRA | PHS| PDC | CDPD |
F8CDma | R8CDma | F19Cdma |
R19Cdma | FWCDma | RWCDma |
FW3Gppcdma | RW3Gppcdma |
M2CDma | D2CDma | NONE
:CFILter <Boolean>
[:STATe] OFF
:SUMMary
:STATe <Boolean>
:MAXimum Vector Signal Analysis
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? query only
:AVERage
:RESult? query only
:PHOLd
RESult? query only
:PPEak Vector Signal Analysis
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? query only
:AVERage
:RESult? query only
:PHOLd
RESult? query only

1119.5063.12 6.36 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:MARKer
:FUNCtion
:SUMMary
:MPEak Vector Signal Analysis
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? query only
:AVERage
:RESult? query only
:PHOLd
RESult? query only
:MIDDle Vector Signal Analysis
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? query only
:AVERage
:RESult? query only
:PHOLd
RESult? query only
:RMS
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? query only
:AVERage
:RESult? query only
:PHOLd
RESult? query only
:MEAN
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RESult? query only
:AVERage
:RESult? query only
:PHOLd
RESult? query only
:AOFF no query
:PHOLd <Boolean>
:AVERage <Boolean>
:CENTer no query
:CSTep no query
:STARt no query
:STOP no query
:MSTep no query
:REFerence no query

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the currently selected marker. If no indication is made, marker 1 is
selected automatically.
Example: "CALC:MARK3 ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.37 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:AOFF
This command switches off all active markers.
Example: "CALC:MARK:AOFF"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:TRACe 1 to 4
This command assigns the selected marker (1 to 4) to the indicated test curve.
Example: "CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2"
Features: *RST value -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X 0 ... MAX (frequency | sweep time | symbols)

This command positions the selected marker to the indicated frequency (span > 0) or time (span = 0).
Example: "CALC:MARK:X 10.7MHz"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The unit SYM is available only in the vector signal analysis mode.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches between a limited (ON) and unlimited (OFF) search range.
Example: "CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON"
features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the frequency counter at the marker position.
Example: "CALC:MARK:COUN ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

1119.5063.12 6.38 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt:RESolution 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz

This command specifies the resolution of the frequency counter.
Example: "CALC:MARK:COUN:RES 1kHz"
Features: *RST value: 1kHz
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt:FREQuency?
This command queries the result of the frequency counter.
Example: "CALC:MARK:COUN:FREQ?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUPled[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches the coupling of markers on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:COUP ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: VA
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:LOEXclude ON | OFF

This command switches the local oscillator suppression on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:LOEX ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
The numeric suffixes 1|2 and 1 to 4 are not significant.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:Y?
This command queries the selected marker value.
Example: "CALC:MARK:Y?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.39 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker to the current maximum value in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:MARK:MAX"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:APEak
This command positions the marker to the maximum absolute value of the trace.
Example: "CALC:MARK:MAX:APE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next lower maximum value in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:MARK:MAX:NEXT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current
value (i.e., in ascending X direction) in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:MARK:MAX:RIGH"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the marker to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current
value (i.e., in descending X direction) in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:MARK:MAX:LEFT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.40 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker to the current minimum value in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:MARK:MIN"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value in the trace memory.
Example: "CALC:MARK:MIN:NEXT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current
value (ie in ascending X direction).
Example: "CALC:MARK:MIN:RIGH"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the marker to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value
(ie in descending X direction).
Example: "CALC:MARK:MIN:LEFT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
is command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.41 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:STEP[:INCRement] <numeric_value>

This command defines the marker step width.
Example: "CALC:MARK:STEP 10kHz" (frequency domain)
CALC:MARK:STEP 5ms" (time domain)
Features: *RST value: - (STEP is set to AUTO)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command sets STEP:AUTO to OFF. The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF

This command switches the automatic adaptation of the marker step width on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:STEP:AUTO OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
With AUTO ON, the step width is 10% of the span. The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not
significant.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:PEXCursion <numeric_value>

This command defines the peak excursion.
Example: "CALC:MARK:PEXC 10dB"
Features: *RST value: 6dB
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:READout MPHase | RIMaginary

This command determines the type of the marker display.
Example: "CALC:MARK:READ RIM"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D
The numeric suffix in MARKer<1 to 4> is not significant.

1119.5063.12 6.42 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <numeric_value>

This command defines the "N dB Down" value.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD 3dB"
Features: *RST value: 6dB
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned by n dB below the active reference marker. The
frequency spacing of these markers can be queried with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:
NDBDown:RESult?.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON | OFF

This command switches the "N dB Down" function on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
This command queries the frequency spacing (bandwidth) of the "N dB Down" markers.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?
This command queries the frequencies of the "N dB Down" marker.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
The two frequency values are separated by comma and indicated in ascending order. This command
is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

1119.5063.12 6.43 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ZOOM <numeric_value>

This command defines the range to be enlarged around the active marker.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM 1kHz"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
The subsequent frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the frequency of the signal is
counted. This frequency becomes the new center frequency, the zoomed span is then set. This
command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches the noise measurement on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The noise power density is measured at the position of the markers. The result can be queried with
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?
This command queries the result of the noise measurement.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect AM | FM
This command selects the demodulation type.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:SEL FM"
Features: *RST value: AM
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

1119.5063.12 6.44 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches the demodulation on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
With demodulation switched on, the frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the
signal is demodulated during the given stop time.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff 10ms to 1000s

This command defines the duration of the stop time for the demodulation.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 3s"
Features: *RST value: - (DEModulation is set to OFF)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
With demodulation switched on, the frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the
signal is demodulated during the given stop time.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/3dB) | (60dB/6dB)

This command defines the shape factor measurement 60dB/6dB or 60dB/3dB.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC (60dB/3dB)"
Features: *RST value: (60dB/6dB)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
The temporary markers T1 to T4 are positioned in pairs by 60dB and by 3dB or 6dB below the active
reference marker. The frequency spacing ratio of these markers - the shape factor - can be queried
with CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult?.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON | OFF

This command switches the shape factor measurement on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.45 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult?
This command queries the result of the shape factor measurement.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQuency?
This command queries the frequencies of the shape factor measurement.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SFAC:FREQ?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS
Four frequency values (at -60 dB, -6 or. -3 dB, -6 or -3 dB, -60dB) are indicated in ascending order.
They are separated by a comma. This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches the signal-track function on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:STR ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
With SIGNAL TRACK function activated, the maximum signal is determined after each frequency
sweep and the center frequency of this signal is set. With drifting signals the center frequency follows
the signal.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AM[:RESult]? PPEak| MPEak| MIDDle| RMS

This command queries the results of the AM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:AM? PPE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A
PPEak Result of the measurement with detector +PK
MPEak Result of the measurement with detector -PK
MIDDle Result of averaging ±PK/2
RMS Result of the measurement with detector RMS
In the modulation modes FM or PM query of the MIDDle-result is possible only.

1119.5063.12 6.46 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle |

RMS | RDEV
This command queries the results of the FM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:FM? PPE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A
PPEak Result of the measurement with detector +PK
MPEak Result of the measurement with detector -PK
MIDDle Result of averaging ±PK/2
RMS Result of the measurement with detector RMS
In the modulation modes FM or PM query of the MIDDle-result is possible only.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:PM[:RESult]? PPEak| MPEak| MIDDle|

RMS
This command queries the results of the PM modulation measurement of the analog demodulation.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:PM? PPE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A
PPEak Result of the measurement with detector +PK
MPEak Result of the measurement with detector -PK
MIDDle Result of averaging ±PK/2
RMS Result of the measurement with detector RMS
In the modulation modes FM or PM query of the MIDDle-result is possible only.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AFRequency[:RESult]?
This command queries the audio frequency of the analog demodulation.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:AFR? "
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FERRor[:RESult]?
This command queries the frequency error of the analog demodulation.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:FERR? "
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

1119.5063.12 6.47 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:CARRier[:RESult]?
This command queries the results of the carrier frequency measurement.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:CARR?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches the SINAD measurement on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:SIN ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A
This command is valid only in the analog demodulation mode with Real Time ON.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad:RESult?
This command queries the results of the SINAD measurement.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:ADEM:SIN:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.48 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? MERM | MEPK | MEPS | PERM |

PEPK | PEPS | EVRM | EVPK | EVPS | IQOF | IQIM | ADR | FERR | RHO
This command queries the error measurement results of digital demodulation.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:DDEM:RES? EVRM"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D
MERM magnitude error in %rms FERR frequency error in Hz
MEPK maximum of magnitude error in %pk FEPK maximum of frequency error
MEPS symbol number by which the maximum in Hz
of the magnitude error occurred ADR amplitude drop in dB/symbol
PERM phase error in deg RHO Rho-Factor
PEPK maximum of phase error in deg DEV FSK deviation in Hz
PEPS symbol number by which the maximum
of the phase error occurred
EVRM vector error in %rms FSPK maximum of FSK deviation error
EVPK maximum of vector error in %pk in Hz
EVPS symbol number by which the maximum FSRM FSK deviation error in Hz
of the vector error occurred FSPS symbol number by which the
IQOF I/Q-offset error in % maximum of error occurred
IQIM I/Q Imbalance in % DTTS trigger delay of synchronization

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |

OBWidth | CN | CN0
This command selects the power measurement and switches it on.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
ACPower adjacent channel power measurement
CPOWer channel power measurement
OBANdwidth | OBWidth occupied bandwidth power measurement
CN signal / noise power measurement
CN0 signal-/ noise power measurement based on 1Hz bandwidth
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and query.

1119.5063.12 6.49 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |

OBWidth | CN | CN0
This command queries the results of the power measurement (see also CALCulate:MARKer:
FUNCtion:POWer:SELect.)
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
ACPower adjacent channel power measurement; Results are output separated by commas
in the following order: Power of main channel
Power of lower adjacent channel 1
Power of upper adjacent channel 1
Power of lower adjacent channel 2
Power of upper adjacent channel 2
...
The number of results depends on the number of adjacent channels selected.
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the power is output in dBm, with linear
scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %) in W. If SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:MODE REL
is selected, adjacent channel power is output in dB.
CPOWer channel power measurement
With logarithmic scaling (RANGE LOG), the channel power is output in dBm, with
linear scaling (RANGE LIN dB or LIN %) in W.
OBANdwidth | OBWidth occupied bandwidth power measurement
The return value is the occupied bandwidth in Hz
CN signal / noise power measurement
The return value is always in dB..
CN0 signal-/ noise power measurement based on 1Hz bandwidth
The return value is always in dB/Hz
This command is only a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF

This command switches the power measurement off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-F, VA-D
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

1119.5063.12 6.50 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | CDPD |

FWCDma | RWCDma | FW3Gppcdma
| RW3Gppcdma| M2CDma | D2CDma |
F8CDma | R8CDma | F19Cdma |
R19Cdma | NONE
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES NADC"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
F8CDma CDMA 800 forward
R8CDma CDMA 800 reverse
F19Cdma CDMA 1900 forward
R19Cdma CDMA1900 reverse
M2CDma CDMA 2000 Multi Carrier
D2CDma CDMA 2000 Direct Sequence
FWCDma W-CDMA, forward
RWCDma W-CDMA, reverse
FW3Gppcdma W-CDMA 3GPP forward
RW3Gppcdma W-CDMA 3GPP reverse
The selection of a standard influences the parameters weighting filter, channel bandwidth and
spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep time.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:CFILter ON | OFF

This command switches the weighting filter for the selected standard on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:CFIL ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:STATe ON | OFF

This command switches the messages selected by the summary marker (eg RMS and MEAN) on
and off. One or several measurements can be selected with the commands listed in the following
and then switched jointly on and off with SUMMary:STATe.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-Z, VA

1119.5063.12 6.51 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the measurement of the maximum of the absolute value.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:RESult?
This command queries the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute value.
Results of average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands
...:MAXimum:AVERage:RESult? and ...:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult?.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:AVERage:RESult?
This command is used to query the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute
value if the average is calculated using the command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:AVER:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult?
This command is used to query the results of the measurement of the maximum of the absolute
value when the peak hold function is switched on with command CALCulate<1|2>:
MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MAX:PHOL:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.52 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the measurement of the positive peak value if the calculation and.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value. Results of
average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
and ...:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value if the
average is calculated using the command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:AVERage.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:AVER:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
This command is used to query the result of the measurement of the positive peak value if the peak
hold function is switched on with command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE:PHOL:RES?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.53 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the measurement of the negative peak value.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value. Results of average
calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:MPEak:AVERage:RESult? and
...:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult?.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value if the average is
calculated using the command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:AVERage.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:AVER:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the negative peak value if the peak hold
function is switched on with command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MPE:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.54 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and
negative peak value.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and
negative peak value. Results of average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands
...:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult? and ...:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult?.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:RES? "
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and
negative peak value if the average is calculated using the command CALCulate<1|2>:
MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:AVER:RES? "
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the arithmetical mean between positive and
negative peak value if the peak hold function is switched on using the command
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MIDD:PHOL:RES? "
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned

1119.5063.12 6.55 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the measurement of the effective (rms) value of the total trace.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUM:RMS ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace. Results of
average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:RMS:AVERage:RESult? and
...:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?..
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the
average is calculated using the command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:AVERage.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:AVER:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the peak
hold function is switched on using the command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:RMS:PHOL:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.56 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the measurement of the mean value of the total trace.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
When the measurement is switched on, the summary marker is automatically activated (command
SUMMary:STATe set to ON). When it is switched off, the summary marker remains switched on
provided further measurements are selected. Otherwise the marker is switched off automatically.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace. Results of
average calculation and peak hold are queried with commands ...:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? and
...:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?..
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the
average is calculated using the command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:
SUMMary:AVERage.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?
This command queries the result of the measurement of the mean value of the total trace if the peak
hold function is switched on using the command CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:
FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:PHOL:RES?"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
This command is only a query and thus has no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.57 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON | OFF

This command switches on or off the peak-hold function.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
The peak-hold function is reset by switching off and on, again.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON | OFF

This command switches the calculation of the average value on or off.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
The calculation of the average is reset by switching off and on, again.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF
This command switches off all measuring functions.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AOFF"
Features: *RST value: _
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A-Z, VA
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:CENTer
This command sets the center frequency to that of the current marker.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:CENT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:CSTep
This command sets the step width of the center frequency to the x-value of the current marker.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:CST"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query.

1119.5063.12 6.58 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STARt
This command sets the start frequency to the frequency of the current marker.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:STAR"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STOP
This command sets the stop frequency to the frequency of the current marker.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:STOP"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MSTep
This command sets the marker step width to the x-value of the current marker.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:MST"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:REFerence
This command sets the reference level to that of the current marker.
Example: "CALC:MARK:FUNC:REF"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
This command is an "event" and therefore has no *RST value assigned and no query.

1119.5063.12 6.59 E-13

CALCulate Subsystem FSIQ

CALCulate:MATH Subsystem
The CALCulate:MATH - subsystem allows to process data from the SENSe-subsystem in numeric
expressions.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:MATH<1 to 4>
[:EXPRession]
[:DEFine] <expr> --
:STATe <Boolean> --

CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1 to 4>[:EXPression][:DEFine] <expr>

This command defines the mathematical expression for relating traces and reference line. Command
CALCulate:MATH:STATe switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off .
Parameter: <expr>::= ‘OP1 - OP2 [ + RLINE]’
OP1 ::= TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4
OP2 ::= TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | RLINE
Examples: "CALC:MATH1 (TRACE1 - TRACE3 + RLINE)"
"CALC:MATH4 (TRACE4 - RLINE)"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
The operand [+ RLINE] may be used only if OP2 is different from RLINE. The numeric suffix in
CALCULATE<1|2> is not significant. The numeric suffix in MATH<1 to 4> denotes the trace where
the result of the mathematical operation is stored. The number must be identical to the number of the
operand OP1.

CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1 to 4>:STATe ON | OFF

This command switches the mathematical relation of traces on or off.
Example: "CALC:MATH1:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffix in CALCULATE<1|2> is not significant. The numeric suffix in MATH<1 to 4>
denotes the trace which the command refers to.

1119.5063.12 6.60 E-13

FSIQ CALCulate Subsystem

CALCulate:UNIT Subsystem
The CALCulate:Unit subsystem defines the units for vector signal analyzer mode and power
measurements.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALCulate<1|2>
:X Vector Signal Analysis
:UNIT
:TIME S | SYM
:UNIT
:ANGLe DEG | RAD Vector Signal Analysis
:POWer DBM | V | W | DB |
PCT | UNITLESS |
DBPW | WATT |
DBUV | DBMV | VOLT |
DBUA | AMPere
DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ |
DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M |
DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ

CALCulate<1|2>:X:UNIT:TIME S | SYM
This command selects seconds or symbols as an x-axis unit.
Example: "CALC:X:UNIT:TIME S"
Features: *RST value: S
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

CALCulate<1|2>: UNIT:ANGLe DEG | RAD

This command selects the unit for angular measurement.
Example: "CALC:UNIT:ANGL DEG"
Features: *RST- value: RAD
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

CALCulate<1|2>: UNIT:POWer DBM | V | W | DB | PCT | UNITLESS | DBPW | WATT | DBUV |

DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere| DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ |
DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M |DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ
This command selects the unit for power.
Example: "CALC:UNIT:POW DBM"
Features: *RST value: _
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The units DEG, RAD, S, and HZ are available only in the vector analyzer mode.
DBUV_MHZ and DBUA_MHZ denote the units DBUV/MHZ or DBUA/MHZ.

1119.5063.12 6.61 E-13

CALibration Subsystem FSIQ

CALibration Subsystem
The commands of the CALibration subsystem perform instrument calibrations.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CALibration
[:ALL]? -- -- query only
:BANDwidth
[:RESolution]? -- -- query only
:BWIDth
[:RESolution]? -- -- query only
:IQ? -- -- query only /
Vector Signal Analysis
:LDETector? -- -- query only
:LOSuppression? -- -- query only
:PPEak? -- -- query only
:SHORt? -- -- FSIQ26/FSIQ40 only
:STATe <Boolean> -- query only

CALibration[:ALL]?
This command performs a complete calibration of the instrument. A "0" is returned if the calibration
was successful.
Example: "CAL?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALibration:BANDwidth | BWIDth[:RESolution]?
This command performs a calibration of the filter bandwidths. A "0" is returned if the calibration was
successful.
Example: "CAL:BAND?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALibration:IQ?
This command performs a calibration of the vector signal analyzer. A "0" is returned if the calibration
was successful.
Example: "CAL:IQ?"
features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.62 E-13

FSIQ CALibration Subsystem

CALibration:LDETector?
This command performs a calibration of the log module’s characteristic and of the detectors. A "0" is
returned if the calibration was successful.
Example: "CAL:LDET?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALibration:LOSuppression?
This command performs a calibration of the local oscillator suppression. . A "0" is returned if the
calibration was successful.
Example: "CAL:LOS?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Modes: E, A, VA

CALibration:PPEak?
This command performs a calibration of the tracking YIG filter (preselector peaking). A "0" is
returned if the calibration was successful.
Example: "CAL:PPE?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A
This command is only valid by the models FSIQ26 and FSIQ40.

CALibration:SHORt?
This command performs a short calibration. A "0" is returned if the calibration was successful.
Example: "CAL:SHOR?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

CALibration:STATe ON | OFF
This command determines whether (ON) or not (OFF) the current calibration data are taken into
consideration.
Example: "CAL:STAT OFF"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.63 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure Subsystem
The CONFigure subsystem contains commands for configuring complex measurement tasks, like those
provided by the options GSM BTS Analyzer (FSE-K11) or GSM MS Analyzer (FSE-K10). The
CONFigure subsystem is closely linked to the functions of the FETCH and READ subsystems, where
the measurement cycles are started and/or the results of the measurements are queried.

CONFigure:BTS Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for configuring the GSM BTS Analyzer mode (Option FSE-K11)
for analyzing the behavior of base stations corresponding to the standards P-GSM, E-GSM, R-GSM,
DCS1800 or PCS1900.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CONFigure
[:BTS] Option FSE-K11
:MEASurement
:ARFCn <numeric_value> --
:AUTO ONCE no query
:LIMit
:PPEak <numeric_value> DEG
:PRMS <numeric_value> DEG
:FREQuency <numeric_value> ppm
:STANdard <Boolean>
:POWer
:CLASs <numeric_value> | M1 | M2 | M3 --
:COUPled <Boolean>
:STATic <numeric_value> --
:DYNamic <numeric_value> --
:EXPected <numeric_value> DBM
:LIMit <numeric_value> DBM
:SINGle
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:CLEar -- no query
:CHANnel
:SLOT <numeric_value> --
:AUTO ONCE no query
:TSC <numeric_value> --
:AUTO <Boolean> no query
:SFH <Boolean>
:NETWork
[:TYPE] PGSM | PGSM900| EGSM |
EGSM900 | DCS | GSM1800 |
PCS | GSM1900 | RGSM |
RGSM900
:PHASe 1|2[,PLUS]
:COSiting <Boolean>
:TXSupp <Boolean>
:PRESet -- no query
:SWEeptime STANdard | AUTO

1119.5063.12 6.64 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure[:BTS]:MEASurement?
This command queries which measurement is currently set.
PFERror Phase-/Frequency Error
POWer Carrier Power
PTEMplate Power v. Time
MODulation Modulation Spectrum
SWITching Transient Spectrum
SPURious Spurious
Example: "CONF:MEAS?" Answer: "PFER"
Features: *RST-value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS, MS

CONFigure[:BTS]:ARFCn <numeric_value>
This command selects the number of the transmission channel of the base station.
Parameter: <numeric_value>::= 1 to 124 (P-GSM phase I/II)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (R-GSM)
512 to 885 (DCS1800 phase I/II/II+)
512 to 810 (PCS1900)
Example: "CONF:ARFC 67"
Features: *RST value: 1 (P-GSM phase I/II)
0 (E-GSM; R-GSM)
512 (DCS1800 phase I/II/II+)
512 (PCS1900)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:ARFCn:AUTO ONCE
This command is used to search for the channel number of the transmission channel of the base
station automatically. This requires only one channel to be active.
Example: "CONF:ARFC:AUTO ONCE"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
This command is an event and thus has no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:PPEak <numeric_value>
This command determines the phase error limits in degrees for the phase/frequency measurement
(peak value).
Example: "CONF:LIM:PPE 66"
Feature: *RST value: depending on standard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

1119.5063.12 6.65 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:PRMS <numeric_value>
This command determines the phase error limits in degrees for the phase/frequency measurement
(mean value).
Example: "CONF:LIM:PRMS 22"
Feature: *RST value: depending on standard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:FREQuency <numeric_value>
This command determines the frequency error limits in ppm for the phase/frequency measurement.
Example: "CONF:LIM:FREQ 36"
Feature: *RST value: depending on standard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF
This command switches between user-defined (OFF) and standard-defined (ON) limit values.
Example: "CONF:LIM:STAN ON"
Feature: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:CLASs <numeric_value> | M1 | M2 | M3
This command defines the power class of the base station.
Parameter: <numeric_value> ::= 1 to 8 (P-GSM phase I/II, E-GSM, R-GSM)
::= 1 to 4 (PCS1900, DCS1800 phase I/II/II+)
M1, M2, M3 ::= Power Classes for Micro BTS
Example: "CONF:POW:CLAS 4"
Features: *RST value: 4 (P-GSM phase I/II, E-GSM, R-GSM)
1 (DCS1800, PCS1900)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

1119.5063.12 6.66 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:COUPled ON | OFF
This command switches between user-defined (OFF) and standard-defined (ON) level values.
Example: "CONF:POW:COUP ON"
Feature: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:STATic 0 to 6
This command defines the static power control level of the base station.
Example: "CONF:POW:STAT 3"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:DYNamic 0 to 15
This command defines the dynamic power control level of the base station.
Example: "CONF:POW:DYN 5"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:EXPected <numeric_value>
This command enters directly the rated output level of the base station specified by the
manufacturer.
Example: "CONF:POW:EXP 43DBM"
Features: *RST value: 46 dBm (P-GSM phase I/II, E-GSM, R-GSM)
43 dBm (DCS1800, PCS1900)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:LIMit <numeric_value>
This command defines the level for the selection of level-dependent limit lines.
Example: "CONF:POW:LIM 65DBM"
Feature: *RST value: depending on standard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
This command is only available for the setting CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:COUPled OFF.

1119.5063.12 6.67 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:SINGle[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches single measurement of carrier power on and off.
Example: "CONF:POW:SING ON"
Feature: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:SINGle:CLEar
This command clears the table containing the single-step carrier power measurements.
Example: "CONF:POW:SING:CLE"
Feature: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
This command is an event and has therefore neither *RST value nor query.

CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SLOT 0 to 7
This command selects the slot number within a transmission frame of the base station.
Example: "CONF:CHAN:SLOT 3"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
On changing the slot number, the number of the midamble (TSC) is automatically adapted to the slot.

CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SLOT:AUTO ONCE
This command automatically searches for the slot number within a transmission frame of the base
station. This requires only one slot to be active.
Example: "CONF:CHAN:SLOT:AUTO ONCE"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
This command is an event and thus has no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SFH ON | OFF
This command defines whether the base station uses slow frequency hopping or not.
Example: "CONF:CHAN:SFH ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
This command is available only when spurious or transient spectrum measurement is selected. The
settings for spurious measurement are independent from those selected for transient spectrum.

1119.5063.12 6.68 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:TSC:AUTO ON | OFF
This command couples the midamble (training sequence TSC_0 to 7) to the slot, i.e. if the slot
number is changed the training sequence in the ON state is automatically adapted. In the OFF state,
the training sequence set is conserved even if the slot number is changed.
Example: "CONF:CHAN:TSC:AUTO ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:TSC 0 to 7
This command selects the midamble (training sequence TSC_0 to 7) of the active slot.
Example: "CONF:CHAN:TSC 3"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork[:TYPE] PGSM | PGSM900 | EGSM |EGSM900 | DCS |GSM1800 |

PCS|GSM1900 | RGSM | RGSM900
This command selects the standard type according to which the base station will work.
Example: "CONF:NETW DCS"
Features: *RST value: GSM
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork:PHASe 1|2 [,PLUS]

This command selects the phase of the standard according to which the base station will work.
Example: "CONF:NETW:PHAS 2"
Features: *RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure[:BTS]:COSiting ON | OFF
This command selects whether the base station has the "cositing" feature.
Example: "CONF:COS ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
This command is available only if spurious emission measurement is selected.

1119.5063.12 6.69 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure[:BTS]:TXSupp ON | OFF
This command defines that an additional carrier suppression of min. 20dB is taken into account for
the measurement. If there is already suppression, a more sensitive setting of the instrument is
selected.
Example: "CONF:TXS ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
For measurements in the RX-band the value is automatically set to ON.

CONFigure[:BTS]:PRESet
This command resets the parameters for the standard selected to their default values (DEFAULT
SETTINGS).
Example: "CONF:PRES"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
This command is an event and has thus no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure[:BTS]:SWEeptime STANdard | AUTO

This command selects the sweep-time computing mode for the spurious measurement:
Example: "CONF:SWE:STAN AUTO"
Feature: *RST value: STANdard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
STANdard The computation of the sweep time is based on a worst-case estimation
AUTO The sweep time is reduced by a factor of 8 (assuming all slots are on).

1119.5063.12 6.70 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure:BURSt Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for configuring the measurements in the GSM BTS Analyzer
mode (option FSE-K11) or GSM MS Analyzer mode (option FSE-K10) which are performed on individual
bursts. (carrier power, phase/frequency error, power vs. time).

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CONFigure
:BURSt Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:PFERror
[:IMMediate] -- -- no query
:COUNt <numeric_value> --
:POWer
[:IMMediate] -- --
:COUNt <numeric_value> --
:CONDition NORMal | EXTReme
:PTEMplate
[:IMMediate] -- -- no query
:COUNt <numeric_value> --
:SELect FULL | TOP | RISing | FALLing
:REFerence
:AUTO <Boolean> no query

CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror[:IMMediate]
This command selects measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or mobile.
Example: "CONF:BURS:PFER"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is an event and thus has no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror:COUNt 1 to 1000
This command sets the number of bursts used for the determination of average and maximum value.
Example: "CONF:BURS:PFER:COUN 100"
Features: *RST value: 500 (GSM/DCS1800 Phase I)
200 otherwise
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.71 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure:BURSt:POWer[:IMMediate]
This command selects measurement of the average carrier power of the base station or mobile.
Example: "CONF:BURS:POW"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is an event and thus has no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure:BURSt:POWer:COUNt 1 to 1000
This command sets the number of bursts used for the determination of measured values.
Example: "CONF:BURS:POW:COUN 100"
Features: *RST value: 500 (GSM/DCS1800 phase I)
200 otherwise
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS

CONFigure:BURSt:POWer:CONDition NORMal | EXTReme

This command defines the conditions for power measurement.
Example: "CONF:BURS:POW:COND EXTR"
Features: *RST value: NORMal
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS

CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate[:IMMediate]
This command selects measurement of power of the base station or mobile vs. time.
Example: "CONF:BURS:PTEM"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is an event and thus has no query and no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.72 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMPlate:COUNt 1 to 1000
This command defines the number of bursts used for determining the measured value.
Example: "CONF:BURS:PTEM:COUN 100"
Features: *RST value: 500 (GSM/DCS1800 phase I)
200 otherwise
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS

CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect FULL | TOP | RISing | FALLing

This command defined the burst section to be measured.
Example: "CONF:BURS:PTEM:SEL TOP"
Features: *RST value: FULL
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS

CONFigure:BURSt:REFerence:AUTO ON | OFF
This command switches between automatic and user-activated preview of power versus time. When
switched to AUTO, the preview is always performed, when switched to OFF it is omitted. Note: see
READ:BURSt:REF:IMM
Example: "CONF:BURS:REF:AUTO ON"
Feature: *RST value: AUTO
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.73 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure:MS Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for configuring the GSM MS Analyzer mode (Option FSE-K10)
for analyzing the behavior of mobiles corresponding to the standards P-GSM, E-GSM, R-GSM,
DCS1800 or PCS1900.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CONFigure
[:MS] Option FSE-K10
:MEASurement
:ARFCn <numeric_value> --
:AUTO ONCE no query
:LIMit
:PPEak <numeric_value> DEG
:PRMS <numeric_value> DEG
:FREQuency <numeric_value> ppm
:STANdard <Boolean>
:POWer <Boolean>
:CLASs
:COUPled <numeric_value> --
:LEVel <numeric_value> --
:LIMit <numeric_value> DBM
:EXPected <numeric_value> DBM
:SINGle
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:CLEar -- no query
:SMALl <Boolean>
:CHANnel
:SFH <Boolean>
:TSC <numeric_value>
:NETWork --
[:TYPE] PGSM | PGSM900| EGSM |
EGSM900 | DCS | GSM1800 |
PCS | GSM1900 | RGSM |
RGSM900
:PHASe 1 | 2[, PLUS]
:TXSupp <Boolean>
:PRESet -- no query
:SWEeptime STANdard | AUTO

CONFigure[:MS]:MEASurement?
This command queries which measurement is currently set.
PFERror Phase-/Frequency Error
POWer Carrier Power
PTEMplate Power v. Time
MODulation Modulation Spectrum
SWITching Transient Spectrum
SPURious Spurious
Example: "CONF:MEAS?"
answer: "PFER"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device specific
Mode: MS

1119.5063.12 6.74 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure[:MS]:ARFCn <numeric_value>
This command selects the number of the transmission channel of the mobile.
Parameter: <numeric_value>::= 1 to 124 (P-GSM phase I/II)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (R-GSM)
512 to 885 (DCS1800 phase I/II/II+)
512 to 810 (PCS1900)
Example: "CONF:ARFC 67"
Features: *RST value: 1 (P-GSM phase I/II)
0 (E-GSM; R-GSM)
512 (DCS1800 phase I/II/II+)
512 (PCS1900)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:ARFCn:AUTO ONCE
This command selects automatically the transmission channel of the mobile.
Example: "CONF:ARFC:AUTO ONCE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:PPEak <numeric_value>
This command determines the phase error limits in degrees for the phase/frequency measurement
(peak value).
Example: "CONF:LIM:PPE 66"
Feature: *RST value: depending on standard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:PRMS <numeric_value>
This command determines the phase error limits in degrees for the phase/frequency measurement
(mean value).
Example: "CONF:LIM:PRMS 22"
Feature: *RST value: depending on standard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

1119.5063.12 6.75 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:FREQuency <numeric_value>
This command determines the frequency error limits in ppm for the phase/frequency measurement.
Example: "CONF:LIM:FREQ 36"
Feature: *RST value: depending on standard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF
This command switches between user-defined (OFF) and standard-defined (ON) limit values.
Example: "CONF:LIM:STAN ON"
Feature: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:CLASs <numeric_value>
This command defines the power class of the mobile.
Parameter: <numeric_value> ::= 1 to 5 (P-GSM phase I)
2 to 5 (P-GSM phase II)
2 to 5 (E-GSM; R-GSM)
1 to 2 (DCS1800 phase I)
1 to 3 (DCS1800 phase II/II+)
1 to 3 (PCS1900)
Example: "CONF:POW:CLAS 4"
Features: *RST value: 2 (P-GSM phase I/II, E-GSM, R-GSM)
1 (DCS1800, PCS1900)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:COUPled ON | OFF
This command switches between user-defined (OFF) and standard-defined (ON) level values.
Example: "CONF:POW:COUP ON"
Feature: *RST value: ON
ON standard
OFF user-defined
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

1119.5063.12 6.76 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:LEVel 0 to 31
This command defines the power control level of the mobile.
Example: "CONF:POW:LEV 5"
Features: *RST value: 2 (P-GSM Phase I/II, E-GSM, R-GSM)
0 (DCS1800, PCS1900)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:LIMit <numeric_value>
This command defines the level for the selection of level-dependent limit lines.
Example: "CONF:POW:LIM 65DBM"
Feature: *RST value: depending on standard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS
This command is only available for the setting CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:COUPled OFF.

CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:EXPected <numeric_value>
This command enters directly the rated output level of the mobile.
Example: "CONF:POW:EXP 43DBM"
Features: *RST value: 46 dBm (P-GSM phase I/II, E-GSM; R-GSM)
43 dBm (DCS1800, PCS1900)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SINGle[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches single measurement of carrier power on and off.
Example: "CONF:POW:SING ON"
Feature: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SINGle:CLEar
This command clears the table containing the single-step carrier power measurements.
Example: "CONF:POW:SING:CLE"
Feature: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS
This command is an event and has therefore neither *RST value nor query.

1119.5063.12 6.77 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SMALl ON | OFF
This command switches the limits for spurious measurement in the RGSM range. It is only available
for phase 2+.
Example: "CONF:POW:SMAL ON"
Feature: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:CHANnel:SFH ON | OFF
This command switches slow-frequency hopping on or off.
Example: "CONF:CHAN:SFH ON"
Feature: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:CHANnel:TSC 0 to 7
This command selects the midamble used by the mobile.
Parameter: 0 to 7 (training sequence for the Normal Burst)
Example: "CONF:CHAN:TSC 3"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork[:TYPE] PGSM | PGSM900 | EGSM |EGSM900 | DCS |GSM1800 |

PCS|GSM1900 | RGSM | RGSM900
This command selects the standard type according to which the mobile will work.
Example: "CONF:NETW DCS"
Features: *RST value: GSM
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork:PHASe 1 | 2 [,PLUS]
This command selects the phase of the standard according to which the mobile will work.
Example: "CONF:NETW:PHAS 2"
Features: *RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

1119.5063.12 6.78 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure[:MS]:TXSupp ON | OFF
This command defines that an additional carrier suppression of min. 20dB is taken into account for
the measurement. If there is already suppression, a more sensitive setting of the instrument is
selected.
Example: "CONF:TXS ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS
For measurements in the RX-band the value is automatically set to ON.

CONFigure[:MS]:PRESet
This command resets the parameters for the standard selected to their default values (DEFAULT
SETTINGS).
Example: "CONF:PRES"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS
This command is an event and has thus no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure[:MS]:SWEeptime STANdard | AUTO

This command selects the sweep-time computing mode for the spurious measurement:
Example: "CONF:SWE AUTO"
Feature: *RST value: STANdard
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS
STANdard The computation of the sweep time is based on a worst-case estimation
AUTO The sweep time is reduced by a factor of 8 (assuming all slots are on).

1119.5063.12 6.79 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure:SPECtrum Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for configuring the measurements in the GSM BTS Analyzer
mode (FSE-K11) or in the GSM MS Analyzer mode (FSE-K10) used to determine the power of the
spectral contributions due to modulation and switching (modulation spectrum, transient spectrum).

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CONFigure
:SPECtrum
:MODulation
[:IMMediate] -- -- no query, Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:COUNt <numeric_value> -- Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:RANGe ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
COMBined | DCSRx1800
:TGATe <Boolean> Option FSE-K11
:SWITching Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
[:IMMediate] -- -- no query
:COUNt <numeric_value> --

CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation[:IMMediate]
This command selects measurement of the spectrum due to modulation.
Example: "CONF:SPEC:MOD"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is an event and has thus no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:COUNt 1 to 1000
This command sets the number of bursts used for determining the average and maximum values.
Example: "CONF:SPEC:MOD:COUN 100"
Features: *RST value: 500 (GSM/DCS1800 phase I)
200 otherwise
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.80 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | COMBined | DCSRx1800

This command selects the frequency range for the measurement.
Example: "CONF:SPEC:MOD:RANG TXB"
Features: *RST value: ARFCn
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
ARFCn ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz
TXBand TX-Band
RXBand RX-Band
COMBined ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz / TX-Band
DCSRx1800 RX band DCS 1800 (option FSE-K10 only)

CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:TGATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the operating mode gating for the TX band. For TGATe OFF, 8
active slots are presumed.
Example: "CONF:SPEC:MOD:TGAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS

CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching[:IMMediate]
This command selects measurement of the spectrum due to switching transients.
Example: "CONF:SPEC:SWIT"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is an event and has thus no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching:COUNt 1 to 1000
This command defines the number of bursts used for determining the average and maximum values.
Example: "CONF:SPEC:SWIT:COUN 100"
Features: *RST value: 500 (GSM/DCS1800 phase I)
200 otherwise
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.81 E-13

CONFigure-Subsystem FSIQ

CONFigure:SPURious Subsystem
This subsystem provides commands for configuring the measurements in the GSM BTS (FSE-K11) or
GSM MS (FSE-K10) Analyzer mode used for measuring the power of spurious emissions.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

CONFigure
:SPURious
[:IMMediate] -- -- no query, Option FSE-K11, FSE-K10
:COUNt <numeric_value> -- Option FSE-K11, FSE-K10
:RXBand <numeric_value> -- Option FSE-K11
:RANGe TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | -- Option FSE-K11, FSE-K10
IDLeband | COMBined
:STEP<1..26> <Boolean> -- Option FSE-K11, FSE-K10
:COUNt? query only
:ANTenna CONDucted | RADiated Option FSE-K10

CONFigure:SPURious[:IMMediate]
This command selects measurement of spurious emissions.
Example: "CONF:SPUR"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
This command is an event and has thus no query and no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure:SPURious:COUNt 1 to 1000
This command sets the number of bursts used for determining the average and maximum values.
Example: "CONF:SPUR:COUN 100"
Features: *RST value: 500 (GSM/DCS1800 phase I)
200 otherwise
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
The number of bursts in measurements of the RX band is set by command CONFigure:SPURious
:RANGe:RXBand (FSE K11 only).

CONFigure:SPURious:COUNt:RXBand 1 to 1000
This command ses the number of bursts used for determining the average and maximum values in
measurements of the RX band.
Example: "CONF:SPUR:COUN:RXB 100"
Features: *RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS

1119.5063.12 6.82 E-13

FSIQ CONFigure-Subsystem

CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | IDLeband | COMBined

This command selects the frequency range used for the measurement.
Example: "CONF:SPUR:RANG OTX"
Features: *RST value: TXB
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
TXBand TX-Band
OTXBand Not TX-Band
RXBand RX-Band (option FSE-K11 only)
IDLeband Idle band (option FSE-K10 only)
COMBined TX-Band ± 2 MHz (option FSE-K11 only)

CONFigure:SPURious:STEP<1...26> ON | OFF
This command selects a subband of the selected band for a spurious measurement.
Each band is divided up into 1 to max. 26 subbands, which are selected by the numerical suffix
following STEP. A subband is selected for measurement by setting ON.
Example: "CONF:SPUR:STEP24 ON"
Feature: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS, MS

CONFigure:SPURious:STEP:COUNt?
This command queries the number of subbands of the currently selected band for a spurious
measurement.
Example: "CONF:SPUR:STEP:COUNT?"
Feature: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS, MS
This command is a query and has therefore no *RST value assigned.

CONFigure:SPURious:ANTenna CONDucted | RADiated

This command selects the features of the measurement of spurious emmissions.
Example: "CONF:SPUR:ANT RAD"
Feature: *RST value: COND
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS

1119.5063.12 6.83 E-13

DIAGnostic Subsystem FSIQ

DIAGnostic Subsystem
The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands which support instrument diagnostics for
maintenance, service and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all of these commands are
device-specific.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

DIAGnostic
:SERVice
:INPut
[:SELect] CALibration | RF --
:FUNCtion <numeric_value>,>numeric_value> -- no query
:NSOurce <Boolean> --
:INFO
:CCOunt
:ATTenuation<1 to 3>? query only

DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] CALibration | RF
This command toggles between the RF input on the front panel and the internal 120-MHz reference
signal.
Example: "DIAG:SERV:INP CAL"
Features: *RST value: RF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA

DIAGnostic:SERVice:FUNCtion <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>...
This command activates a service function.
Example: "DIAG:SERV:FUNC 2,0,2,12,1"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
The service function is selected via five parameters: functional group number, board number,
function number, parameter 1 and parameter 2.
See service manual 1065.6016.24.

DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce ON | OFF
This command switches the 28-V supply at the rear connector of the noise source on and off.
Example: "DIAG:SERV:NSO ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA

1119.5063.12 6.84 E-13

FSIQ DIAGnostic-Subsystem

DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation<1 | 2 | 3>?
This command queries the cycle counters of the attenuators. The suffix selects the attenuator:
1: Basic Instrument 2: Tracking Generator 3: FSE-B13
The result is output as a list of values separated by a ’,’. The list starts with the date.
Example: "DIAG:INFO:CCO:ATT?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, MS, BTS
This command is a query and has therefore no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.85 E-13

DISPlay Subsystem FSIQ

DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPLay subs ystem controls th e selection and presentation of textual and graphic in for mation as
well as of trace data on the displa y.
The displa ys in the split-screen mode are assigned to WINDow 1 (screen A) or 2 (screen B) .

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

DISPlay
:FORMat SINGle | SPLit
:PROgram
[: MODE] <Boolean>
:A NNotation
:FREQuen cy <Boolean>
:LOGO <Boolean>
:CMAP<1 to 13>
:DEFault
:HSL 0 to 100,0 to 100,0 to 100
:PDEFined BLA Ck | BL UE | BROWn | GREen |
CYAN | RED | MAGen ta | YELLo w |
WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe |
LGREen | LCYan | LRED | LMAGen ta
[: WINDow<1|2>]
:TEXT
[: DATA] <string>
:STATe <Boolean>
:TIME <Boolean>
:MINFo <Boolean>
:TRACe<1 to 4>
:X
[:S CALe] Vector Signal Analy sis
:RVALue <nu meri c_value>
:ZOOM <Boolean>
[:FREQuen cy]
:STARt <nu meri c_value> HZ
:STOP <nu meri c_value> HZ
:CENTer <nu meri c_value> HZ
:SPACing LINear | LOGarith mic --
:Y
[:S CALe] <nu meri c_value> DB
:MODE ABSolute | RELati ve
:RLEVel <nu meri c_value> DBM
:OFFSet <nu meri c_value> DB
:RVALue <nu meri c_value> DBM|DB|HZ|
DEG|RAD
:A UTO <Boolean>
:RPOSition <nu meri c_value> PCT Vector Signal Analy sis
:PDIVision <nu meri c_value> DBM|DB|HZ| Vector Signal Analy sis
DEG|RAD
:SPACing LINear|LOGarith mic|PERCent --

1119.5063.12 6.86 E-13

FSIQ DISPlay Subsystem

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

DISPlay
[:WINDow<1|2>]
:TRACe<1...4>
:MODE WRITe|VIEW|AVERage| --
MAXHold|MINHold|FRESults
:CWRite <Boolean> -- Vector Signal Analysis
:ANALog <Boolean> --
:HCONtinuous <Boolean> --
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:SYMBol DOTS | BARS | OFF Vector Signal Analysis
:EYE
COUNt <numeric_value> SYM Vector Signal Analysis
:PSAVe
[:STATe] <Boolean>
HOLDoff <numeric_value>

DISPlay:FORMat SINGle | SPLit

This command switches the test result display between FULL SCREEN and SPLIT SCREEN.
Example: "DISP:FORM SPL"
Features: *RST value: SINGle
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA

DISPlay:PROGram[:MODE] ON | OFF
This command switches the display between the measuring instrument and the computer function.
Example: "DISP:PROG ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF
This command switches the x-axis annotation on or off.
Example: "DISP:ANN:FREQ OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF
This command switches the factory logo on the screen on or off.
Example: "DISP:LOGO OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.87 E-13

DISPlay Subsystem FSIQ

DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:DEFault
This command resets the screen colors of the instrument to their default settings.
Example: "DISP:CMAP:DEF"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event and has thus no query and no *RST value assigned. The numeric suffix in
CMAP<1 to 13> is not significant.

DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>

This command defines the color table of the instrument.
Parameter: hue = TINT
sat = SATURATION
lum = BRIGHTNESS
The value range is 0.0 to 100.0 for all parameters.
Example: "DISP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
To each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified
by varying the corresponding color setting. The following assignment applies:
CMAP1 Trace 1 CMAP8 Softkey State Data Entry
CMAP2 Trace 2 CMAP9 Softkey State OFF
CMAP3 Trace 3 CMAP10 Softkey Shade
CMAP4 Trace 4 CMAP11 Text
CMAP5 Marker CMAP12 Title
CMAP6 Grid CMAP13 Background
CMAP7 Softkey State On
The values set are not changed by *RST.

DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:PDEFined BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta |

YELLow |WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen |
LCYan |LRED | LMAGenta
This command defines the color table of the instrument using predefined color values. To each
numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified by
varying the corresponding color setting. The same assignment as for DISPlay:CMAP<1 to
13>:HSL applies.
Example: "DISP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The values set are not changed by *RST.

1119.5063.12 6.88 E-13

FSIQ DISPlay Subsystem

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:MINFo ON | OFF
This command switches the marker info list on the screen on or off.
Example: "DISP:MINF ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA] <string>
This command defines a comment (max. 50 characters) which can be displayed on the screen.
Example: "DISP:TEXT "signal/noise power measurement"
Features: *RST value: "" (empty)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The numeric suffix in WINDow<1|2> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the screen display of the comment.
Example: "DISP:TEXT:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The numeric suffix in WINDow<1|2> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the screen display of date and time.
Example: "DISP:TIME ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The numeric suffix in WINDow<1|2> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:RVALue <numeric_value>

This command defines the reference value for the X-axis of the measuring diagram.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:X:RVAL 20SYM"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.89 E-13

DISPlay Subsystem FSIQ

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON | OFF

This command displays the zoomed current frequency range in the opposite window of the split
screen representation.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STARt <numeric_value>

This command defines the start frequency of the zoomed display range. The value must lie between
start and stop frequency of the original range.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:STAR 100MHZ"
Features: *RST value: -- (depending on the current frequency setting)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STOP <numeric_value>

This command defines the stop frequency of the zoomed display range. The value must lie between
start and stop frequency of the original range.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:STOP 200MHZ"
Features: *RST value: -- (depending on the current frequency setting)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:CENTer
<numeric_value>
This command shifts the zoomed frequency range to the specified center frequency.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:X:ZOOM:CENT 1GHZ"
Features: *RST value: -- (depending on the current frequency setting)
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

1119.5063.12 6.90 E-13

FSIQ DISPlay Subsystem

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

This command toggles between linear and logarithmic display.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:X:SPAC LIN"
Features: *RST value: LOGarithmic
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe] 10dB to 200dB

This command defines the display range of the Y-axis (level axis) with logarithmic scaling
(DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG).
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB"
Features: *RST value: 100dB
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
For linear scaling, (DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN | PERC) the display range is fixed and cannot be
set. The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute | RELative

This command defines the scale of the y-axis (absolute or relative).
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL"
Features: *RST value: ABS
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
As long as SYSTem:DISPlay is set to OFF, this command does not directly influence the screen.
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel -200dBm to 200dBm

This command defines the reference level.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -60dBm"
Features: *RST value: -20dBm
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

1119.5063.12 6.91 E-13

DISPlay Subsystem FSIQ

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet -200dB to 200dB

This command defines the offset of the reference level.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS -10dB"
Features: *RST value: 0dB
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <numeric_value>

This command defines the reference value for the y-axis of the measurement diagram.
This defines the upper limit of the display range, the corresponding parameters of the manual control
vary according to the measurement mode.
In the spectrum analysis mode the setting corresponds to the parameter MAX LEVEL.
In the vector signal analysis mode the setting corresponds to the parameter REFERENCE VALUE Y
AXIS.
IF option tracking generator is fitted and the normalization in the analyzer mode is activated, the
value corresponds to the parameter REFERENCE VALUE.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL -20dBm" (spectrum analysis)
"DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL +1.20" (vector signal analysis)
"DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL 0" (tracking generator)
Features: *RST value: - coupled to reference level
0 (vector signal analysis)
0 dB (tracking generator with active normalization)
SCPI: device specific
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO ON | OFF

This command defines whether the reference value for the y-axis of the measured diagram is
coupled to the reference level (default) or can be set independently.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL:AUTO ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is available in the analyzer mode only. The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not
significant.

1119.5063.12 6.92 E-13

FSIQ DISPlay Subsystem

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0 to 100PCT

This command defines the position of the reference value.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50PCT"
Features: *RST value: 100PCT (tracking generator)
50PCT (vector analyzer)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant. This command is only valid in conjunction
with option Tracking Generator or in vector analyzer mode.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <numeric_value>

This command defines the scaling of the Y-axis in the current unit.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y:PDIV +1.20"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA
The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4> is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic | PERCent

This command toggles between linear and logarithmic display.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN"
Features: *RST value: LOGarithmic
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The linear display can be LIN/% (PERCent) or LIN/dB (LINear). The numeric suffix in TRACe<1 to 4>
is not significant.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold

This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces.
Example: "DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH"
Features: *RST value: WRITe for TRACe1, STATe OFF for TRACe2 to 4
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:CWRite ON | OFF

This command selects continuous display of the measured values (continuous write).
Example: "DISP:TRAC3:MODE:CWR ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA

1119.5063.12 6.93 E-13

DISPlay Subsystem FSIQ

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:ANALog ON | OFF

This command selects continuous display of the measured values in the analyzer mode (analog
trace).
Example: "DISP:TRAC3:MODE:ANAL ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:HCONtinuous ON | OFF

This command defines whether the traces in the min hold/max hold mode are reset after some
definite parameter changes.
Example: "DISP:TRAC3:MODE:HCON ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
OFF The traces are reset after some definite parameter changes.
ON This mechanism is switched off.
In general, parameter changes require a restart of the measurement before results are evaluated
(e.g. with markers). For those changes that are known to require a new measurement (e.g.
modification of the span), the trace is automatically reset so that erroneous evaluations of previous
results are avoided. This mechanism can be switched off for those exceptional cases where the
described behavior is unwelcome.

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF

This command switches the display of the corresponding trace on or off.
Example: "DISP:TRAC3 ON"
Features: *RST value: ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 to 4
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:SYMBol DOTS | BARS | OFF

This command determines the display of the points of decision on the trace.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:SYMB BARS"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.94 E-13

FSIQ DISPlay Subsystem

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:EYE:COUNt 1 to Result Length

This command determines the display range of the eye diagram in symbols.
Example: "DISP:TRAC:EYE:COUNt 5"
Features: *RST value: 2
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the screen saver mode on or off.
Example "DISP:PSAV ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

DISPlay: PSAVe:HOLDoff <numeric_value>

This command determines the time after which the screen saver is switched on. Values are input in
minutes, the valid range is 1 to 100 minutes.
Example: "DISP:PSAV:HOLD 10"
Features: *RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.95 E-13

FETCh-Subsystem FSIQ

FETCh Subsystem
The FETCh subsystem contains commands for reading out results of complex measurement tasks like
those provided by options GSM BTS Analyzer, FSE-K11, or GSM MS Analyzer, FSE-K10. The FETCh-
subsystem is closely linked to the functions of the CONFigure and READ-subsystems, where the
measurement sequences are configured, the measurements are started and their results are queried.

FETCh:BURSt Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for reading out results of measurements in the GSM BTS
(option FSE-K11) or GSM MS (option FSE-K10) Analyzer mode, which are performed on individual
bursts (Carrier Power, Phase/Frequency Error) without starting the measurement by themselves.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

FETCh Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:BURSt
:PERRor
:RMS
:STATus? query only
:AVERage? -- query only
:MAXimum? -- query only
:PEAK
:STATus? query only
:AVERage? -- query only
:MAXimum? -- query only
:FERRor
:STATus? query only
:AVERage? -- query only
:MAXimum? -- query only
:POWer --
[:IMMediate]? -- query only
:ALL? -- query only

FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:STATus?
This command reads out the status of the RMS-measurement of the phase error taken over the
selected number of bursts.
0: failed, 1: passed
Example: "FETC:BURS:PERR:RMS:STAT?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query and has therefore no *RST value assigned.
It is available only when measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see
CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.96 E-13

FSIQ FETCh-Subsystem

FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:AVERage?
This command reads out the average of the RMS-measurement of the phase error taken over the
selected number of bursts.
Example: "FETC:BURS:PERR:RMS:AVER?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query and has therefore no *RST value assigned.
It is available only when measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see
CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:MAXimum?
This command reads out the maximum of the RMS-measurement of the phase error for the selected
number of bursts.
Example: "FETC:BURS:PERR:RMS:MAX?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only when
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:STATus?
This command reads out the status of the peak measurement of the phase error taken over the
selected number of bursts.
0: failed, 1: passed
Example: "FETC:BURS:PERR:PEAK:STAT?"
Features: *RST value --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.97 E-13

FETCh-Subsystem FSIQ

FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:AVERage?
This command reads out the average of the peak measurement of the phase error taken over the
selected number of bursts.
Example: "FETC:BURS:PERR:PEAK:AVER?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:MAXimum?
This command reads out the maximum of the peak measurement of the phase error for the selected
number of bursts.
Example: "FETC:BURS:PERR:PEAK:MAX?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only when
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:STATus?
This command reads out the status of the measurement of the frequency error taken over the
selected number of bursts.
0: failed, 1: passed
Example: "FETC:BURS:FERR:STAT?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.98 E-13

FSIQ FETCh-Subsystem

FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:AVERage?
This command reads out the average of the measurement of the frequency error taken over the
selected number of bursts.
Example: "FETC:BURS:FERR:AVER?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:MAXimum?
This command reads out the maximum frequency error measured over the selected number of
bursts.
Example: "FETC:BURS:FERR:MAX?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

FETCh:BURSt:POWer[:IMMediate]?
This command reads out the result of the last step performed during the measurement of the output
power of the base station or mobile.
Parameter: The result is output as an ASCII string in the following format:
<Static Power Ctrl>,<Dyn Power Ctrl>,<Rat-Level>,<Act-Level>, <Delta>,<Status>
with
<Static Power Ctrl>: current static power control level
<Dyn Power Ctrl>: current dynamic power control level
<Rat-Level>: Rated value for the current power control level acc. to
standard dBm
<Act-Level>: measured power in dBm
<Delta>: Difference between the measured power and the power at the previous
static/dynamic power control level.
<Status>: Result of limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limits exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
Example: "FETC:BURS:POW?"
Result: 0,0,43,44.1,0,PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.99 E-13

FETCh-Subsystem FSIQ

FETCh:BURSt:POWer:ALL?
This command reads out the results of all individual steps during the measurement of the output
power of the base station or mobile.
Parameter: The result is output as an ASCII string in the following format:
<Static Power Ctrl>,<Dyn Power Ctrl>,<Rat-Level>,<Act-Level>, <Delta>,<Status>
with
<Static Power Ctrl>: current static power control level
<Dyn Power Ctrl>: current dynamic power control level
<Rat-Level>: Rated value for the current power control level acc. to
standard dBm
<Act-Level>: measured power in dBm
<Delta>: Difference between the measured power and the power at the previous
static/dynamic power control level.
<Status>: Result of limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limits exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
Example: "FETC:BURS:POW:ALL?"
Result:
0,0,43,44.1,0,PASSED,1,0,41,42.5,1.6,PASSED,1,1,35,32.5,5.6,FAILED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.100 E-13

FSIQ FETCh-Subsystem

FETCh:SPECtrum Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for reading out results of measurements in the GSM BTS
(FSE-K11) or GSM MS (FSE-K10) Analyzer mode, used to measure the power of the spectral
contributions due to modulation and switching (modulation spectrum, transient spectrum) without first
restarting a new measurement.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

FETCh Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:SPECtrum
:MODulation
[:ALL]? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | query only
COMBined | DCSRx1800
:REFerence? query only
:SWITching
[:ALL]? -- query only
:REFerence? query only

FETCh:SPECtrum:MODulation[:ALL]? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | COMBined | DCSRx1800

This command reads out the result of the measurement of the modulation spectrum of the base
station or mobile.
Parameter: The result is output as a list of partial result strings separated by ’,’ in the following
(ASCII) format:
<Index>,<Freq1>,<Freq2>,<Level>,<Limit>, <Abs/Rel>,<Status> [,
<Index>,<Freq1>,<Freq2>,<Level>,<Limit>, <Abs/Rel>,<Status>]...
where the parts between ’[...]’ denote a partial result string that can be repeated n times.
<Index>: 0, if the partial result string characterizes a measurement range
current number <>0,
if the partial result string characterizes a single
limit excess.
<Freq1>: Start frequency of the measurement range or
frequency where the limit line is exceeded
<Freq2>: Start frequency of the measurement range or
frequency exceeding the measurement range. The value of
<Freq2> is equal to the value of <Freq1>, if either the
measurement is performed in the time domain or if the
partial result string contains a limit excess.
<Level>: Measured maximum level of the partial range or
measured level at the test point.
<Limit>: Limit in the partial range or at the test point
<Abs/Rel>: ABS <Level> and <Limit> are in absolute units (dBm)
REL <Level> and <Limit> are in absolute units (dBm)
<Status>: Result of the limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limit exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
MARGIN margin exceeded
EXC limit excess marked as an exception
The frequencies <Freq1> and <Freq2> are always absolute i. e. not referred to the carrier frequency.

1119.5063.12 6.101 E-13

FETCh-Subsystem FSIQ

Example: "FETC:SPEC:MOD? TXB"

Result: 0,890E6,915E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
1,893.2E6,893.2E6,-83.2,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
2,895.7E6,895.7E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
ARFCn ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz
TXBand TX-Band
RXBand RX-Band
COMBined ARFCN ± 1.8 MHz / TX-Band (option FSE-K11 only)
DCSRx1800 RX band DCS 1800 (option FSE-K10 only)
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the modulation spectrum is selected (see CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation).

FETCh:SPECtrum:MODulation:REFerence?
This command reads out the result of the premeasurement.
Parameter: The result is output as a list of partial result strings separated by ’,’ in the following
(ASCII) format:
<Level1>,<Level2>,<RBW>
<Level1>: measured level
<Level2>: level corrected by means of the bandwidth
<RBW>: bandwidth
Example: "FETC:SPEC:MOD:REF?"
Result: 36.2,43.2,30000
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the modulation spectrum is selected (see CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation).

1119.5063.12 6.102 E-13

FSIQ FETCh-Subsystem

FETCh:SPECtrum:SWITching[:ALL]?
This command reads out the result of the measurement of the transient spectrum of the base station
or mobile.
Parameter: The result is output as a list of partial result strings separated by ’,’ as for the
command FETCh:SPECtrum:MODulation[:ALL]?.
Example: "FETC:SPEC:SWIT?"
Result: 0,833.4E6,833.4E6,37.4,-36.0,ABS,MARGIN,
1,834.0E6,834.0E6,-35.2,-36.0,ABS,FAILED,
2,834.6E6,834.6E6,-74.3,-75.0,REL,FAILED
0,835.0E6,835.0E6,-65,0,-60.0,REL,PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the transient spectrum is selected (see CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching).

FETCh:SPECtrum:SWITching:REFerence?
This command queries the result of the premeasurement
Parameter: The result is output as a list of partial result strings separated by ’,’ in the following
(ASCII) format:
<Level1>,<Level2>,<RBW>
<Level1>: measured level
<Level2>: level corrected by means of the bandwidth
<RBW>: bandwidth
Example: "FETC:SPEC:SWIT:REF?"
Result: 43.2,43.2,300000
Features: *RST value --
SCPI: device specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the transient spectrum is selected (see CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching).

1119.5063.12 6.103 E-13

FETCh-Subsystem FSIQ

FETCh:SPURious Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for reading out results of measurements in the GSM BTS
(FSE-K11) or GSM MS (FSE-K10) Analyzer mode which are used to determine spurious emissions,
without first restarting a new measurement.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

FETCh Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:SPURious
[:ALL]? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | query only
IDLeband
:STEP? -- query only

FETCh:SPURious[:ALL]? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | IDLeband

This command reads out the results of the measurement of spurious emissions of the base station
or mobile which is performed in the LIST mode.
Parameter: The result is output as a list of partial result strings separated by ’,’ in the following
(ASCII) format:
<Index>,<Freq1>,<Freq2>,<Level>,<Limit>, <Abs/Rel>,<Status> [,
<Index>,<Freq1>,<Freq2>,<Level>,<Limit>, <Abs/Rel>,<Status>]...
where the parts between ’[...]’ denote a partial result string that can be repeated n times.
<Index>: 0, if the partial result string characterizes a measurement range
current number <>0,
if the partial result string characterizes a single
limit excess.
<Freq1>: Start frequency of the measurement range or
frequency where the limit line is exceeded
<Freq2>: Start frequency of the measurement range or
frequency exceeding the measurement range. The value of
<Freq2> is equal to the value of <Freq1>, if either the
measurement is performed in the time domain or if the
partial result string contains a limit excess.
<Level>: Measured maximum level of the partial range or
measured level at the test point.
<Limit>: Limit in the partial range or at the test point
<Abs/Rel>: ABS <Level> and <Limit> are in absolute units (dBm)
REL <Level> and <Limit> are in absolute units (dBm)
<Status>: Result of the limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limit exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
MARGIN margin exceeded

1119.5063.12 6.104 E-13

FSIQ FETCh-Subsystem

Example: "FETC:SPUR? TXB"

Result: 0,890E6,915E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
1,893.2E6,893.2E6,-83.2,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
2,895.7E6,895.7E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
TXBand TX-band
OTXBand Not TX-band
RXBand RX-band (option FSE-K11 only)
IDLeband Idle band (option FSE-K10 only)
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the spurious emissions is selected (see CONFigure:SPURious).

FETCh:SPURious:STEP?
This command reads out the result of the last single step of the measurement of spurious emissions
performed in the STEP mode.
Parameter: The result is output as a list of partial result strings separated by ’,’ as for the
command FETCh:SPURious[:ALL]?.
Example: "FETC:SPUR:STEP?"
Result: 0,890E6,915E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
1,893.2E6,893.2E6,-83.2,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
2,895.7E6,895.7E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the spurious emissions is selected (see CONFigure:SPURious).

1119.5063.12 6.105 E-13

FETCh-Subsystem FSIQ

FETCh:PTEMplate Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for reading out results of measurements in the GSM BTS
(FSE-K11) or GSM MS (FSE-K10) Analyzer mode which are used to determine the carrier power of ,
power versus time measurement without first restarting a new measurement.

COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT

FETCh Option FSE-K11, FSE-K10
:PTEMplate
:REFerence? query only

FETCh:PTEMplate:REFerence?
This command reads out the results of the premeasurement
Parameter: The result is output as a list of partial result strings separated by ’,’ in the following
(ASCII) format:
<Level1>,<Level2>,<RBW>
<Level1>: measured level
<Level2>: level corrected by means of the bandwidth
<RBW>: bandwidth
Example: "FETC:PTEM:REF?"
Result: 43.2,43.2,1000000
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: devicespecific
Modes: BTS, MS
If no measurement has been performed yet, a query error results.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of Power versus Time is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate).

1119.5063.12 6.106 E-13

FSIQ FORMat-Subsystem

FORMat Subsystem
The FORMat subsystem specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to the instrument.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

FORMat
[:DATA] ASCii|REAL|UINT[,<numeric_value>] -
:DEXPort
:DSEParator POINt|COMMa
:HEADer
[:STATe] <Boolean>
APPend
[:STATe] <Boolean>

FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | REAL | UINT [, 32]

This command specifies the data format of the data transmitted from and to the instrument.
Example: "FORM REAL,32"
"FORM ASC"
Features: *RST value: ASCii
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The data format is either ASCii or one of the formats REAL or UINT (Unsigned Integer). ASCii data
are transmitted in plain text, separated by commas. REAL data are transmitted as 32-bit IEEE 754
floating-point numbers in the "definite length block". The format UINT is only used in operating mode
Vector Signal Analysis, for the symbol table.
Format setting for the binary transmission of trace data (see also TRACE:DATA?):
Analyzer mode: REAL, 32
Vector analyzer: UINT, 8 with digital demodulation, symbol table
REAL, 32otherwise
Note: Incorrect format setting will result in numerical conversion, which may lead to incorrect
results.
If the format ”FORM REAL, 32” is selected for the above example, the data stream from the analyzer
to the controller is as follows:

#432085334.....
||| ||
|||..|From here follow the data bytes of the data block, here 5334
||Number of bytes of data block stated in ASCII plain text, here 3208
|ASCII byte stating the length of the subsequent length counter, here 4
Head marker of binary data stream

For this example, the number of transmitted data bytes is as follows:

Number = number of test points * bytes/value* 2
3208 = 401 * 4* 2
The FORMat command is valid for the transmission of trace data. The data format of trace data
received by the instrument is automatically recognized, regardless of the format which is
programmed.

1119.5063.12 6.107 E-13

FORMat Subsystem FSIQ

FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMA
This command determines the decimal separator (decimal point or comma)for the output of the
measurement data in ASCII format. Thus, evaluation programms (i.e. MS-Exel) of different language
versions are supported.
Example: "FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
Features: *RST value: POINt
SCPI: device specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON|OFF
This commad determines if the output file starts with a header (start frequency, sweep time, detector,
.. = ON) or not. OFF = only measurement data is output.
Example: "FORM:DEXP:HEAD OFF
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON|OFF
This commad determines if the output file is overwritten or the data is added to the end of the file.
Example: "FORM:DEXP:APP OFF
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.108 E-13

FSIQ HCOPy Subsystem

HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem controls the output of display information for documentation purposes on output
devices or files.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

HCOPy
:ABORt -- no query
:DESTination<1|2> ‘SYST:COMM:PRIN’| no query
’SYST:COMM:CLIP' | ’MMEM’
:DEVice
:COLor <Boolean>
:LANGuage<1|2> WMF | GDI | EWMF | BMP
[:IMMediate<1|2>] -- no query
:ITEM
:ALL no query
:FFEed<1|2>
:STATe <Boolean>
:LABEL
:TEXT <string>
:PFEed<1|2>
:STATe <Boolean>
:WINDow<1|2>
:TABle
:STATe <Boolean>
:TEXT <string>
:TRACe
:STATe <Boolean>
:CAINcrement <Boolean>
:PAGE
:DIMensions
:QUADrant<1 to 4> no query
:FULL no query
:ORIentation<1|2> LANDscape | PORTrait

HCOPy:ABORt
This command aborts a running hardcopy output.
Example: "HCOP:ABOR"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and no query.

1119.5063.12 6.109 E-13

HCOPy Subsystem FSIQ

HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> <string>
This command selects the device for outputting the hardcopy. The availability of the parameters
depends on the selected data format (see command HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage).
Parameter: <string>::= ’MMEM’ |
’SYST:COMM:PRIN’ |
’SYST:COMM:CLIP’
Example: "HCOP:DEST2 ’MMEM’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and no query.
’MMEM’ creates a file for the hardcopy output. Command MMEM:NAME
<file_name> defines the file name. All formats can be selected for
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
’SYST:COMM:PRIN’ directs the hardcopy to the printer. The printer is selected with
command SYSTEM:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect.
GDI should be selected for HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
’SYST:COMM:CLIP’ directs the hardcopy to the clipboard. EWMF should be selected for
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.

HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON|OFF
This command selects between color and monochrome hardcopy of the screen.
Example: "HCOP:DEV:COL ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> WMF| EWMF | GDI | BMP

This command determines the data format of the printout.
Example: "HCOP:DEV:LANG WMF"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

WMF and (WINDOWS Metafile and Enhanced Metafile Format)

EWMF Data formats for output files which can at a later time be integrated in
corresponding programs for documentation purposes.
BMP (Bitmap) Data format for output files.
GDI (Graphics Device Interface) Default format for the output to a printer configured
under Windows. For the output file the printer driver configured under Windows is
used and thus a printer-specific format is generated.

1119.5063.12 6.110 E-13

FSIQ HCOPy Subsystem

HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]
This command starts a hardcopy output.
Example: "HCOP"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

HCOP[1] starts the hardcopy output to device 1 (default), HCOP2 starts the output to device 2.
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:ALL
This command selects the complete screen to be output.
Example: "HCOP:DEV:ITEM:ALL"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The hardcopy output is always provided with comments, title, time and date. As an alternative to the
whole screen, only traces (commands ’HCOPy:DEVice:WINDow:TRACe: STATe ON’) or tables
(command ’HCOPy:DEVice:WINDow:TABLe:STATe ON’) can be output.

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:FFEed<1|2>:STATe ON|OFF
The command adds a form feed command to the hardcopy output of the screen.
Example: "HCOP:DEV:ITEM:FFE2:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:LABel:TEXT <string>
This command defines the title of the screen with a maximum of 60 characters.
Example: "HCOP:DEV:ITEM:LAB:TEXT ’My Title’"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.111 E-13

HCOPy Subsystem FSIQ

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:PFEed<1|2>:STATe ON|OFF
This command adds a paper feed command to the hardcopy output of the screen (ON).
Example: "HCOP:DEV:ITEM:PFE2:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe ON | OFF
This command selects the output of the currently displayed tables (ON).
Example: "HCOP:DEV:ITEM:WIND:TABL:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The command HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe OFF same as command
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:ALL enables the output of the whole screen.

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT <string>
This command defines the comment text for printout to trace 1 or 2 with a maximum of 100
characters.
Example: "HCOP:DEV:ITEM:WIND2:TEXT ‘comment’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF
This command selects the output of the currently displayed trace (ON).
Example: "HCOP:DEV:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The command HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe OFF same as command
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:ALL enables the output of the whole screen.

1119.5063.12 6.112 E-13

FSIQ HCOPy Subsystem

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:CAINcrement ON | OFF
The command automatically changes the colour of the currently displayed trace after printout (ON).
Example: "HCOP:DEV:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:CAIN ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The automatic change of colour of the trace allows outputting to a plotter of several traces of the
same diagram. For a better distinction, the colour of the trace is changed (”Color Auto Increment”).

HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant<1 to 4>
The command defines the quadrant which is allocated to the screen output.
Example: "HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD1"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The quadrants are defined as QUAD1 at the top right, QUAD2 at the top left, QUAD3 at the bottom
left and QUAD4 at the bottom right. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.

HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL
This command defines that the full screen is to be printed out.
Example: "HCOP:PAGE:DIM:FULL"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned and *RST value and has no query.

HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> LANDscape | PORTrait

The command selects the format of the output (portrait and landscape) (hardcopy unit 1 or 2).
Example: "HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.113 E-13

INITiate Subsystem FSIQ

INITiate Subsystem
The INITiate subsystem checks the initialization of the trigger subsystem.
In the split-screen representation, a distinction is made between INITiate1 (screen A) and INITiate2
(screen B)

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

INITiate<1|2>
:CONTinuous <boolean> --
:CONMeas -- -- no query
[:IMMediate] -- -- no query
:DISPlay <boolean> --

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON | OFF
This command determines if the trigger system is continuously initiated ("Free Run").
Example: "INIT:CONT OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Setting "INITiate:CONTinuous ON" corresponds to function SWEEP CONTinuous, ie the sweep
of the analyzer is cyclically repeated. The setting "INITiate:CONTinuous OFF" corresponds to
function SWEEP SINGLE.

INITiate<1|2>:CONMeas
This command continues the sweep from the current sweep position.
Example: "INIT:CONM"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query.
Sweeps are stopped, for example, in the case of transducer sets between the different transducer
factors.

INITiate<1|2>[:IMMediate]
The command initiates a new sweep or starts a single sweep.
Example: "INIT"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay ON | OFF
This command switches the display on or off during a single sweep.
Example: "INIT:DISP OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.114 E-13

FSIQ INPut Subsystem

INPut Subsystem
The INPut subsystem checks the input features of the instrument. In the split-screen representation, a
distinction is made between INPut1 (screen A) and INPut2 (screen B).

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

INPut<1|2>
:ATTenuation <numeric_value> DB
:AUTO <Boolean> --
:MODE NORMal | LNOise|LDIStortion --
:STEPsize 1 | 10 dB Option 1-dB attenuator
:UPORt<1|2>
[:VALue]? -- -- query only
:STATe <Boolean> --
:IMPedance 50 | 75 OHM
:CORRection RAM | RAZ
:MIXer <numeric_value> DBM

INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation 0 to 70 dB
This command programs the input attenuator.
Example: "INP:ATT 40dB"
Features: *RST value: - (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
The attenuation of the input calibration line can be programmed in steps of 10 dB. If the attenuation
is programmed directly, the coupling to the reference level is switched off.

INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF
This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level.
This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level (analyzer).
Example: "INP:ATT:AUTO ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA

INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal | LNOise | LDIStortion

This command optimizes the coupling of the input attenuation to the reference level to high sensitivity
or to high intermodulation immunity.
Example: "INP:ATT:AUTO:MODE LDIS"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
For LNOise, the input attenuator value is set 10 dB lower than for INPut:ATTenuation:
AUTO:MODE NORMal, for LDIStortion it is set 10 dB higher.

1119.5063.12 6.115 E-13

INPut Subsystem FSIQ

INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:STEPsize 1dB | 10dB

This command defines the attenuator stepsize.
Example: "INP:ATT:STEP 1dB"
Features: *RST value: 10dB
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is only available in conjunction with option FSE-B13, 1-dB attenuator.

INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue]?
This command queries the control lines of the user ports.
Example: "INP:UPOR2?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is a query command which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command toggles the control lines of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut.
Example: "INP:UPOR2:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
With ON, the user port is switched to INPut, with OFF to OUTPut.

INPut<1|2>:IMPedance 50 | 75
This command sets the nominal input impedance of the instrument.
Example: "INP:IMP 75"
Features: *RST value: 50
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Switching the input impedance to 75 Ω includes the matching elements RAM or RAZ selected by the
command INPut:IMPedance:CORRection.

1119.5063.12 6.116 E-13

FSIQ INPut Subsystem

INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORRection RAM | RAZ

This command selects the matching element for 75 Ω input impedance.
Example: "INP:IMP:CORR RAM"
Features: *RST value: - (INPut:IMPedance = 50 Ω)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

INPut<1|2>:MIXer -10 to -100 dBm

This command defines the nominal mixer level of the instrument.
Example: "INP:MIX -30"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA

1119.5063.12 6.117 E-13

INSTrument Subsystem FSIQ

INSTrument Subsystem
The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text parameters or fixed
numbers. In the split-screen representation, a distinction is made between INSTrument1 (screen A) and
INSTrument2 (screen B).

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

INSTrument<1|2>
[:SELect] SANalyzer | DDEMod | ADEMod | Vector Signal Analysis
BSGM | MGSM FSE-K11 or FSE-K10,
:NSELect <numeric_value>
:COUPle NONE | MODE | X | Y | CONTrol |
XY | XCONtrol | YCONtrol | ALL

INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] SANalyzer | DDEMod | ADEMod | BGSM | MSGM

This command switches between the operating modes by means of text parameters.
Parameter: SANalyzer: spectrum analysis
DDEMod: vector signal analysis, digital demodulation
ADEMod: vector signal analysis, analog demodulation
BGSM: GSM BTS analysis
MGSM: GSM MS analysis
Example: "INST DDEM"
Features: *RST value: SANalyzer
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Switchover to BGSM is only possible in conjunction with option FSE-K11, GSM BTS Analyzer
Switchover to MGSM is only possible in conjunction with option FSE-K10, GSM MS Analyzer

INSTrument<1|2>:NSELect 1 to 5
This command switches between the two modes by means of numbers.
Example: "INST:NSEL 2"
Features: *RST value: 1
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
1: spectrum analysis
2: vector signal analysis, digital demodulation
3: vector signal analysis, analog demodulation
4: GSM BTS analysis
5: GSM MS analysis
Switchover to 4 is only possible in conjunction with option FSE-K11, GSM BTS Analyzer
Switchover to 5 is only possible in conjunction with option FSE-K10, GSM MS Analyzer

1119.5063.12 6.118 E-13

FSIQ INSTrument Subsystem

INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle NONE | MODE | X | Y | CONTrol | XY | XCONtrol | YCONtrol | ALL

This command defines the coupling between the two measurement windows screen A and B.
Example: "INST:COUP NONE"
Features: *RST value: ALL
SCPI: device specific
Modes: A, VA
NONE no coupling.
MODE the operating mode of the two screens is coupled.
X or Y the scaling of the x- or y axis of the two screens is coupled.
CONTrol the trigger and gate parameter ,and the sweep parameters SINGle/ CONTinous
and COUNt of the two screens are coupled.
XY the scaling of the x- and y-axis of the two screens are coupled.
XCONTrol bzw. the trigger and gate parameter, and the sweep parameters SINGle CONTinous/
YCONTrol COUNt of the two screens are coupled.
ALL the scaling of the x- or y axis the trigger and gate parameter and the sweep
parameters SINGle/ CONTinous/ COUNt of the two screens are coupled.

1119.5063.12 6.119 E-13

MMEMory Subsystem FSIQ

MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory (mass memory) subsystem provides commands which allow for access to the storage
media of the instrument and for storing and loading various instrument settings.
The NAME command stores the HCOPy outputs in a file.

The various drives can be addressed via the mass storage unit specifier <msus> using the conventional
DOS syntax. The internal hard disk is addressed by "C:", the floppy-disk drive installed by "A:".
The file names <file_name> are indicated as string parameters with the commands being enclosed in
quotation marks. They correspond to the DOS conventions.

DOS file names consist of max. 8 ASCII characters and an extension of up to three characters
separated from the file name by a colon "." Both, the colon and the extension are optional. The colon is
not part of the file name. DOS file names do not differ between uppercase and lowercase notation. All
letters and digits are permitted as well as the special characters "_", "^", "$", "~", "!", "#", "%", "&", "-", "{",
"}", "(", ")", "@" and "‘ ". Reserved file names are CLOCK$, CON, AUX, COM1 to COM4, LPT1 to LPT3,
NUL and PRN.

The two characters "*" and "?" have the function of so-called "wildcards", i.e., they are variables for
selection of several files. The question mark "?" replaces exactly one character which may be any, the
asterisk means any of the remaining characters in the file name. "*.*" thus means all files in a directory.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

MMEMory
:CATalog <string>
:CDIRectory <directory_name> --
:COPY <file_name>,<file_name> -- no query
:DATA <file name>[,<block>] --
:DELete <file_name> -- no query
:INITialize <msus> -- no query
:LOAD
:STATe 1,<file_name> -- no query
:AUTO 1,<file_name> -- no query
:MDIRectory <directory_name> -- no query
:MOVE <file_name>,<file_name> -- no query
:MSIS <msus> --
:NAME <file_name> --
:RDIRectory <directory_name> -- no query
:STORe
:STATe 1,<file_name> -- no query
:TRACe <numeric_value>, <file_name> no query
:CLEar
:STATe 1,<file_name> -- no query
:ALL no query

1119.5063.12 6.120 E-13

FSIQ MMEMory Subsystem

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

MMEMory
:SELect
[:ITEM]
:GSETup <Boolean>
:HWSettings <Boolean>
:TRACE<1 to 4> <Boolean>
:LINes
[:ACTive] <Boolean>
:ALL <Boolean>
:CSETup <Boolean>
:HCOPy <Boolean>
:MACRos <Boolean>
:SCData <Boolean> Option Tracking Generator
:TRANsducer
[:ACTive] <Boolean>
:ALL <Boolean>
:CVL
[:ACTive] <Boolean>
:ALL <Boolean>
:ALL -- no query
:NONE -- no query
:DEFault -- no query
:COMMent <string>

MMEMory:CATalog? <string>
This command is for read-out of the current directory. A mask, eg "*.bat", can be defined so that only
files with "bat" as extension are selected.
Parameter: <string>::= DOS file name
Example: "MMEM:CAT ’rem?.lin’"
Characteristics: *RST value: -
SCPI: conformal

Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

MMEMory:CDIRectory <directory_name>
This command changes the current directory.
Parameter: <directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example: "MMEM:CDIR ’C:\USER\DATA’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
In addition to the path name, the indication of the directory may contain the drive name. The path
name complies with the DOS conventions.

1119.5063.12 6.121 E-13

MMEMory Subsystem FSIQ

MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
This command copies the files indicated.
Parameter: <file_source>,<file_destination> ::= <file_name>
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example: "MMEM:COPY ’C:\USER\DATA\SETUP.CFG’,’A:’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The indication of the file name may include the path and the drive. The file names and path
information must be in accordance with the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is
why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

MMEMory:DATA <file_name>[,<block data>]

This command writes block data to the specified file.
Syntax: MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<block data>
MMEMory:DATA? <file_name>
Example: "MMEM:DATA? ’TEST01.HCP’"
"MMEM:DATA ’TEST01.HCP’, #217This is the file"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Each <block> starts with the character ‘#’, followed by the value stating the length of the length
information. This is followed by one or several characters for the length information; then come the
data themselves. The end character must be set to EOI to ensure correct data transmission.

MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
This command deletes the files indicated.
Parameter: <file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example: "MMEM:DEL ’TEST01.HCP’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The indication of the file name contains the path and, optionally, the drive. Indication of the path
corresponds to the DOS conventions. The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event
which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.122 E-13

FSIQ MMEMory Subsystem

MMEMory:INITialize ’A:’
This command formats the disk in drive A.
Example: "MMEM:INIT ’A:’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Formatting deletes all data stored on the floppy disk. This command is an event which is why it is not
assigned an *RST value and has no query.

MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command loads instrument settings from files.
Parameter: <file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension
Example: "MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,’A:TEST’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The contents of the file is loaded and set as new instrument state. The file name includes indication
of the path and may also include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions.
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,<file_name>
This command defines which device setting is automatically loaded after the instrument is switched
on.
Parameter: <file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension;
FACTORY denotes the data set previously in the
instrument
Example: "MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,’C:\USER\DATA\TEST’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The contents of the file are read after switching on the instrument and used to define the new device
state. The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.123 E-13

MMEMory Subsystem FSIQ

MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name>
This command creates a new directory.
Parameter: <directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example: "MMEM:MDIR ’C:\USER\DATA’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.

MMEMory:MOVE <file_source>,<file_destination>
This command renames existing files.
Parameter: <file_source>,<file_destination> ::= <file_name>
<file_name> ::= DOS file name
Example: "MMEM:MOVE ’TEST01.CFG’,’SETUP.CFG’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.

MMEMory:MSIS ’A:’ | ’C:’

This command changes to the drive indicated.
Example: "MMEM:MSIS ’A:’"
Features: *RST value: "C:’
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The drive may be the internal hard disk C: or the floppy-disk drive A:. The drive is indicated according
to the DOS conventions.

1119.5063.12 6.124 E-13

FSIQ MMEMory Subsystem

MMEMory:NAME <file_name>
This command specifies a file which is printed or plotted to.
Parameter: <file_name> ::= DOS filename
Example: "MMEM:NAME ’PLOT1.HPG’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The file name and path
information correspond to the DOS conventions. The output to the printer is routed into a file using
the command "HCOP:DEST ’MMEM’".

MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name>
This command deletes the directory indicated.
Parameter: <directory_name>::= DOS path name
Example: "MMEM:RDIR ’C:\TEST’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The directory name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The path name
corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an
*RST value and has no query.

MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command stores the current instrument setting in a file.
Parameter: <file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension
Example: "MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,’TEST’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The current instrument state is stored as a file. The file name includes indication of the path and may
also include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an
event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.125 E-13

MMEMory Subsystem FSIQ

MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 1 to 4,<file_name>
This command stores the selected trace (1 to 4) in ASCII format in a file.
Parameter: 1 to 4 := selected trace 1 to 4
<file_name> := DOS file name
Example: "MMEM:STOR:TRAC 3,’A:\TEST.ASC’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive. The file name and path
information correspond to the DOS conventions.This command is an event which is why it is not
assigned an *RST value and has no query.

MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,<file_name>
This command deletes the instrument setting denoted by <file_name>.
Parameter: <file_name> ::= DOS file name without extension
Example: "MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,’TEST’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The device data set specified is deleted. The file name includes indication of the path and may also
include the drive. The path name corresponds to the DOS conventions. This command is an event
which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
This command deletes all instrument settings in the current directory.
Example: "MMEM:CLE:ALL"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an "event" which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

1119.5063.12 6.126 E-13

FSIQ MMEMory Subsystem

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup ON | OFF
This command includes the data of the general setup in the list of data subsets of a device setting to
be stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:GSET ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON | OFF
This command includes the hardware settings in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:HWS ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Level and frequency lines are stored with this command as well.

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1 to 4> ON | OFF

This command includes the data of the selected trace in the list of data subsets of a device setting to
be stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:TRACE3 ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF for all Traces
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON | OFF
This command includes the active limit lines in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:LIN ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Upon MMEM:LOAD the limit lines which are not currently active but contained in the data set are
restored as well.

1119.5063.12 6.127 E-13

MMEMory Subsystem FSIQ

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON | OFF
This command includes all limit lines in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command includes selection of the active limit lines.

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON | OFF
This command includes the current color setting in the list of partial datasets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:CSET ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy ON | OFF
This command includes the hardcopy settings in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:HCOPy ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON | OFF
This command includes the keyboard macros in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:MACRos ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData ON | OFF
This command includes the tracking generator calibration data in the list of data subsets of a device
setting to be stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:SCData ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA
This command only available in conjunction with the option Tracking Generator.

1119.5063.12 6.128 E-13

FSIQ MMEMory Subsystem

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer[:ACTive] ON | OFF
This command includes the active transducer factors and set in the list of data subsets of a device
setting to be stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:TRAN ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Upon MMEM:LOAD the transducer factors and sets which are not currently active but contained in the
data set are restored as well.

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ON | OFF
This command includes all transducer factors and sets in the list of data subsets of a device setting
to be stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:TRAN:ALL ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned.

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL[:ACTive] ON | OFF
This command includes the active conversion loss table into the list of data subrecords to be stored /
loaded for a device setup.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:CVL ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is available only in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL:ALL ON | OFF
This command includes all conversion loss table into the list of data subrecords to be stored / loaded
for a device setup.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:CVL ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is available only in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

1119.5063.12 6.129 E-13

MMEMory Subsystem FSIQ

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
This command includes all data subsets in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:ALL"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned.

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
This command deletes all data subsets in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be
stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:NONE"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned.

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
This command sets the default list of the data subsets of a device setting to be stored/loaded.
Example: "MMEM:SEL:DEFault"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value assigned.

MMEMory:COMMent <string>
This command defines a comment for a device setting to be stored.
Example: "MMEM:COMM ’Setup for GSM measurement’"
Features: *RST value: blank comment
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.130 E-13

FSIQ OUTPut Subsystem

OUTPut Subsystem
The OUTPut subsystem checks the output features of the instrument.
In conjunction with option tracking generator, in the split screen mode, a distinction is made between
OUTPut1 (screen A) and OUTPut2 (screen B).

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

OUTPut<1|2>
[:STATe] <boolean> -- Option Tracking Generator
:UPORt<1|2>
[:VALue] <binary> --
:STATe <boolean> --
:AF
:SENSitivity <numeric_value PCT | Vector Signal Analysis
HZ | KHZ |
DEG | RAD

OUTPut<1|2>[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the tracking generator on or off.
Example: "OUTP ON"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
This command is only valid in conjunction with one of the options tracking generator.

OUTPut<1|2>UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] #B00000000 to #B11111111

This command sets the control lines of the user ports.
Example: "OUTP:UPOR2 #B10100101"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
User port 1 or 2 is written with the given binary pattern. If the user port is programmed to INPut
instead of OUTPut, the output value is temporarily stored.

OUTPut<1|2>UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the control line of the user ports between INPut and OUTPut.
Example: "OUTP:UPOR:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
With ON, the user port is switched to OUTPut, with OFF to INPut.

1119.5063.12 6.131 E-13

OUTPut Subsystem FSIQ

OUTPut<1|2>AF:SENSitivity <numeric_value>
This command changes the sensitivity of the AF-output.
Parameter: <numeric_value> ::= 0.1 PCT to 100 PCT for AM
0.1 KHZ to 100 KHZ for FM
0.0 1RAD to 10 RAD for PM
Example: "OUTP:AF:SENS 20PCT"
Features: *RST value: 100 % for AM
100 kHz for FM
10 rad for PM
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

1119.5063.12 6.132 E-13

FSIQ READ-Subsystem

READ Subsystem
The READ-subsystem contains commands for starting complex measurement tasks such as those
provided by options GSM BTS Analyzer (FSE-K11) or GSM MS Analyzer (FSE-K10), and for querying
the results subsequently. The READ-subsystem is closely linked to the functions of the CONFigure- and
FETCh-subsystems, where the measurement sequences are configured or the results are queried
without restarting a new measurement.

READ:BURSt Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for starting measurements in the GSM BTS Analyzer mode
(option FSE-K11), which are performed on individual bursts (carrier power, phase/frequency error), and
for reading out the results subsequently.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

READ
:BURSt Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:PERRor
:RMS query only
:STATus? query only
:AVERage? -- query only
:MAXimum? --
:PEAK query only
:STATus? query only
:AVERage? -- query only
:MAXimum? --
:FERRor query only
:STATus? query only
:AVERage? -- query only
:MAXimum? -- query only
:POWer? -- query only; FSE-K11 only
:STATic? -- query only; FSE-K11 only
:DYNamic? -- query only; FSE-K10 only
:LEVel? -- query only
:REFerence
[:IMMediate]? -- query only<

READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:STATus?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the status of the RMS-measurement of the phase error taken over the selected
number of bursts.
0: failed, 1: passed
Example: "READ:BURS:PERR:RMS:STAT?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode. An
ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.133 E-13

READ-Subsystem FSIQ

READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:AVERage?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the average of the RMS-measurement of the phase error taken over the
selected number of bursts.
Example: "READ:BURS:PERR:RMS:AVER?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode. An
ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:MAXimum?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the maximum of the RMS-measurement of the phase error for the selected
number of bursts.
Example: "READ:BURS:PERR:RMS:MAX?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode. An
ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:STATus?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the status of the peak measurement of the phase error taken over the selected
number of bursts.
0: failed, 1: passed
Example: "READ:BURS:PERR:PEAK:STAT?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode. An
ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.134 E-13

FSIQ READ-Subsystem

READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:AVERage?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the maximum of the peak measurement of the phase error taken over the
selected number of bursts.
Example: "READ:BURS:PERR:PEAK:AVER?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode. An
ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:MAXimum?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the maximum of the peak measurement of the phase error for the selected
number of bursts.
Example: "READ:BURS:PERR:PEAK:MAX?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode. An
ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

READ:BURSt:FERRor:STATus?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the status of the frequency error taken over the selected number of bursts.
0: failed, 1: passed
Example: "READ:BURS:FERR:STAT?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode. An
ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.135 E-13

READ-Subsystem FSIQ

READ:BURSt:FERRor:AVERage?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the average of the frequency error taken over the selected number of bursts.
Example: "READ:BURS:FERR:AVER?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode.
An ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

READ:BURSt:FERRor:MAXimum?
This command starts the measurement of the phase and frequency error of the base station or
mobile and reads out the maximum of the frequency error for the selected number of bursts.
Example: "READ:BURS:FERR:MAX?"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started the instrument automatically assumes the SINGLE mode.
An ongoing measurement can be aborted via the command ABORt. Further results of the
phase/frequency error measurement can be then queried without restart of the measurement via the
FETCh:BURSt-subsystem.
This command is a query only and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the phase/frequency error is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror).

1119.5063.12 6.136 E-13

FSIQ READ-Subsystem

READ:BURSt:POWer?
This command starts the measurement of the maximum output power of the base station or mobile
and reads out the result.
Measurement of the maximum output power marks the beginning of a measurement cycle where
subsequently the limits of the static and dynamic power control levels are checked step by step
(READ:BURSt:STATic? or READ:BURSt:DYNamic?).
Parameter: The result is read out as an ASCII string in the following format:
<Static Power Ctrl>,<Dyn Power Ctrl>,<Rat-Level>,<Act-Level>, <Delta>,<Status>
<Static Power Ctrl>: 0
<Dyn Power Ctrl>: 0
<Rat-Level>: rated value for the current power control level acc.
to standard in dBm
<Act-Level>: measured power in dBm
<Delta>: 0
<Status>: result of limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limits exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
Example: "READ:BURS:POW?"
Result: 0,0,43,44.1,0,PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
When the measurement is started any ongoing measurement cycle is aborted.
An ongoing measurement can be aborted with the command ABORT. This command is a query only
and has therefore no *RST value assigned. It is available only when measurement of the maximum
carrier power is selected (see CONFigure:BURSt:POWer).

1119.5063.12 6.137 E-13

READ-Subsystem FSIQ

READ:BURSt:POWer:STATic?
This command increases the static power control level for the measurement by one step, measures
the output power of the base station and reads out the result.
If the command READ:BURSt:POWer:STATic? is repeated after the maximum static power
control level is reached, the measurement sequence is terminated and the result of the maximum
static power control level is read out again. In this case the value ’FINISHED’ indicating the status is
read out. Before the status value ’FINISHED’ is read out, the value ’RUNNING’ is output if the total
result of the limit check is queried via CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:BURSt:POWer?.
Parameter: The result is read out as an ASCII string in the following format:
<Static Power Ctrl>,<Dyn Power Ctrl>,<Rat-Level>,<Act-Level>, <Delta>,<Status>
<Static Power Ctrl>: current static power control level
<Dyn Power Ctrl>: current dynamic power control level
<Rat-Level>: rated value for the current power control level acc.
to standard in dBm
<Act-Level>: measured power in dBm
<Delta>: difference between the measured power and the power
at the previous static power control level.
<Status>: result of the limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limit exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
FINISHED measurement sequence terminated
Example: "READ:BURS:POW:STAT?"
Result: 1,0,41,42.5,1.6,PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
The command ABORt terminates an ongoing measurement and resets the static and dynamic power
control level to 0.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the maximum carrier power is selected. (see CONFigure:BURSt:POWer).

1119.5063.12 6.138 E-13

FSIQ READ-Subsystem

READ:BURSt:POWer:DYNamic?
This command increases the dynamic power control level for the measurement by one step,
measures the output power of the base station and reads out the result.
Once the maximum dynamic power control level is reached the command is accepted only after the
static power control level is increased by one step.
Note that the command is no longer accepted after the measurement sequence is terminated which
implies that the static power control level was read out again with READ:BURSt:POWer:STATic?
after the maximum value was reached and marked with the ’FINISHED’ status.
Parameter: The result is read out as an ASCII string in the following format:
<Static Power Ctrl>,<Dyn Power Ctrl>,<Rat-Level>,<Act-Level>, <Delta>,<Status>
<Static Power Ctrl>: current static power control level
<Dyn Power Ctrl>: current dynamic power control level
<Rat-Level>: rated value for the current power control level acc.
to standard in dBm
<Act-Level>: measured power in dBm
<Delta>: difference between the measured power and the power
at the previous dynamic power control level.
<Status>: result of the limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limit exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
Example: "READ:BURS:POW:DYN?"
Result: 1,3,35,32.5,5.6,FAILED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: BTS
The command ABORt terminates an ongoing measurement and resets the static and dynamic power
control level to 0.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the maximum carrier power is selected. (see CONFigure:BURSt:POWer).

1119.5063.12 6.139 E-13

READ-Subsystem FSIQ

READ:BURSt:POWer:LEVel?
This command increases the power control level for the measurement by one step, measures the
output power of the mobile and reads out the result.
Note that the command is no longer accepted after the measurement sequence is terminated which
implies that the power control level was read out again with READ:BURSt:POWer:LEVel? after the
maximum value was reached and marked with the ’FINISHED’ status.
Parameter: The result is read out as an ASCII string in the following format:
<0>, <Power Ctrl Level>,<Rat-Level>,<Act-Level>, <Delta>,<Status>
<0>: always 0
<Power Ctrl Level>: current power control level
<Rat-Level>: rated value for the current power control level acc.
to standard in dBm
<Act-Level>: measured power in dBm
<Delta>: difference between the measured power and the power
at the previous power control level.
<Status>: result of the limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limit exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
Example: "READ:BURS:POW:LEV?"
Result: 0,3,35,32.5,5.6,FAILED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS
The command ABORt terminates an ongoing measurement and resets the power control level to 0.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the maximum carrier power is selected. (see CONFigure:BURSt:POWer).

READ:BURSt:REFerence[:IMMediate]?
This command starts the premeasurement and as a result provides the measured level in dBm.
Example: "READ:BURS:REF?"
Feature: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: MS, BTS
This is a query command only and therefore has no *RST value.

1119.5063.12 6.140 E-13

FSIQ READ-Subsystem

READ:SPECtrum Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for starting measurements in the GSM BTS (option FSE-K11)
and GSM MS (option FSE-K10) Analyzer mode, which are used to measure the power of the spectral
components due to modulation and switching (modulation spectrum, transient spectrum), and for
reading out the results subsequently.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

READ
:SPECtrum Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
:MODulation
[:ALL]? -- query only
:SWITching
[:ALL]? -- query only

READ:SPECtrum:MODulation[:ALL]?
This command starts the measurement of the modulation spectrum of the base station or mobile and
reads out the result. The measurement is performed in the currently set frequency range.
Parameter: The result is read out as a list of partial ASCII result strings separated by ’,’ in the
following format:
<Index>,<Freq1>,<Freq2>,<Level>,<Limit>, <Abs/Rel>,<Status> [,
<Index>,<Freq1>,<Freq2>,<Level>,<Limit>, <Abs/Rel>,<Status>]...
where the part set in ’[...]’ characterizes a partial result string which can be repeated n times.
<Index>: 0, if the partial result string characterizes a
measurement range.
current number <>0,
if the partial result string characterizes a
single limit excess.
<Freq1>: Start frequency of the measurement range or frequency where
the limit is exceeded.
<Freq2>: Stop frequency of the measurement range or frequency where
the measured range is exceeded. The value of <Freq2> is
equal to the value of <Freq1>, if either the measurement is
performed in the time domain or the partial result string contains
a limit excess.
<Level>: Measured maximum level of the partial range or measured level
at the test point.
<Limit>: Limit in the partial range or at the test point.
<Abs/Rel>: ABS <Level> and <Limit> are in absolute units (dBm)
REL <Level> and <Limit> are in relative units (dBm)
<Status>: Result of the limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limit exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
MARGIN margin exceeded
EXC limited excess characterized as an exception
The frequencies <Freq1> and <Freq2> are always absolute and not referred to the carrier frequency.

1119.5063.12 6.141 E-13

READ-Subsystem FSIQ

Example: "READ:SPEC:MOD?"
Result: 0,890E6,915E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
1,893.2E6,893.2E6,-83.2,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
2,895.7E6,895.7E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
The command ABORt aborts an ongoing measurement.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the modulation spectrum is selected. (see CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation).

READ:SPECtrum:SWITching[:ALL]?
This command starts the measurement of the transient spectrum of the base station or mobile and
reads out the result.
Parameter: The result is read out as a list of partial ASCII result strings separated by ’,’ in the
format used for READ:SPECtrum:MODulation[:ALL]?.

Example: "READ:SPEC:SWIT?"
Result: 0,833.4E6,833.4E6,37.4,-36.0,ABS,MARGIN,
1,834.0E6,834.0E6,-35.2,-36.0,ABS,FAILED,
2,834.6E6,834.6E6,-74.3,-75.0,REL,FAILED
0,835.0E6,835.0E6,-65,0,-60.0,REL,PASSED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
The command ABORt aborts an ongoing measurement.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the transient spectrum is selected. (see CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITCHing).

1119.5063.12 6.142 E-13

FSIQ READ-Subsystem

READ:SPURious Subsystem
This subsystem provides the commands for starting measurements in the GSM BTS (option FSE-K11)
and GSM MS (option FSE-K10) Analyzer mode, which are used to measure the power of spurious
emissions, and for reading out the results subsequently.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

READ
:SPURious Option FSE-K11 or FSE-K10
[:ALL]? query only
:STEP? query only

READ:SPURious[:ALL]?
This command starts the measurement of the spurious emissions of the base station or mobile and
reads out the result. The measurement is performed in the currently set frequency range.
Parameter: The result is read out as a list of partial ASCII result strings separated by ’,’ in the
following format:

<Index>,<Freq1>,<Freq2>,<Level>,<Limit>, <Abs/Rel>,<Status> [,
<Index>,<Freq1>,<Freq2>,<Level>,<Limit>, <Abs/Rel>,<Status>]...
where the part set in ’[...]’ characterizes a partial result string which can be repeated n times.
<Index>: 0, if the partial result string characterizes a
measurement range.
current number <>0,
if the partial result string characterizes a
single limit excess.
<Freq1>: Start frequency of the measurement range or frequency where
the limit is exceeded.
<Freq2>: Stop frequency of the measurement range or frequency where
the measured range is exceeded. The value of <Freq2> is
equal to the value of <Freq1>, if either the measurement is
performed in the time domain or the partial result string contains
a limit excess.
<Level>: Measured maximum level of the partial range or measured level
at the test point.
<Limit>: Limit in the partial range or at the test point.
<Abs/Rel>: ABS <Level> and <Limit> are in absolute units (dBm)
REL <Level> and <Limit> are in absolute units (dBm)
<Status>: Result of the limit check in character data form:
PASSED no limit exceeded
FAILED limit exceeded
MARGIN margin exceeded
Example: "READ:SPUR?"
Result: 0,890E6,915E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
1,893.2E6,893.2E6,-83.2,-108.0,ABS,FAILED,
2,895.7E6,895.7E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED

1119.5063.12 6.143 E-13

READ-Subsystem FSIQ

Features: *RST value: --

SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
The command ABORt aborts an ongoing measurement.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the spurious emissions is selected. (see CONFigure:SPURious).

READ:SPURious:STEP?
This command starts the next single step for measuring the spurious emissions in the STEP mode
and reads out the results. The measurement is performed in the currently set frequency range.
If the command READ:SPURious:STEP? is sent again after the last single step is reached, the
measurement sequence is terminated, the result of the last single step is output again and
characterized by the value ’FINISHED’ indicating its status. Until the status value ’FINISHED’ is
returned, the value ’RUNNING’ is output when the total result of the limit check is queried with the
command CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPURious?.
Afterwards, sending the command again causes a restart of the measurement.
Parameter: The measured result is read out as a list of partial result strings separated by ’,’
and in the same format as for the command READ:SPURious[:ALL]?.
The additional status value ’FINISHED’ marks the end of a measurement sequence.
Example: "READ:SPUR:STEP?"
Result: First query: 0,890E6,915E6,-87.4,-108.0,ABS,FAILED
...
Second-last query:1,893.2E6,893.2E6,-83.2,-108.0,ABS,FAILED
Last query: 1,893.2E6,893.2E6,-83.2,-108.0,ABS,FINISHED
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
The command ABORt aborts an ongoing measurement. If the command READ:SPURious:STEP? is
sent again, the instrument restarts with the first single step.
This command is only a query and therefore has no *RST value assigned. It is available only if
measurement of the spurious emissions is selected. (see CONFigure:SPURious).

1119.5063.12 6.144 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

SENSe Subsystem
The SENSe subsystem is itself divided up into several subsystems. The commands of these
subsystems directly control device-specific settings, they do not refer to the signal characteristics of the
measurement signal.
The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer and vector analyzer. In
accordance with the SCPI standard, it is for this reason optional, which means that it is not necessary to
include the SENSe node in command sequences.

In the split-screen representation, a distinction is made between SENSe1 and SENSe2:

^ screen A;
SENSe1 =
^ screen B
SENSe2 =

SENSe:ADEMod Subsystem
This subsystem controls the parameters for analog demodulation.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:ADEMod Vector Signal Analysis
:AF
:COUPling AC | DC
:SQUelch
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:LEVel <numeric_value> DBM
:SBANd NORMal | INVerse
:RTIMe <Boolean>

[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:AF:COUPling AC | DC
This command selects coupling of the AF-branch.
Example: "ADEM:AF:COUP DC"
Features: *RST value: AC
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the squelch for the audio branch on or off.
Example: "ADEM:SQU ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

1119.5063.12 6.145 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SQUelch:LEVel 30 to -150 dBm

This command defines the switching threshold for the squelch referred to the measured signal.
Example: "ADEM:SQU -10DBM"
Features: *RST value: -40dBm
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse

This command selects the side band for the demodulation.
Example: "ADEM:SBAN INV"
Features: *RST value: NORMal
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:RTIMe ON | OFF
This command selects whether the demodulation performed in real time or in blocks.
Example: "ADEM:RTIM ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

1119.5063.12 6.146 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

SENSe:AVERage Subsystem
The SENSe:AVERage subsystem calculates the average of the data acquired. A new test result is
obtained from various successive measurements. The amount of test points and the axis reference of
the new result correspond to those of the original measurements.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:AVERage
:COUNt <numeric_value> --
:AUTO <Boolean> --
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:TYPE MAXimum | SCALar --

[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt 0 to 32767
The command specifies the number of measurements which are combined.
Example: "AVER:COUN 16"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A. VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt:AUTO ON | OFF
AUTO ON selects a suitable number of :COUNt for the respective type of measurement.
Example: "AVER:COUN:AUTO ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A. VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the average function.
Example: "AVER OFF"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.147 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:TYPE MAXimum | MINimum | SCALar

The command selects the type of average function.
Example: "AVER:TYPE SCAL"
Features: *RST value: SCALar
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

The following average functions have been defined:

MAXimum (MAX HOLD): AVG(n) = MAX(X1 to .Xn)
MINimum (MIN HOLD): AVG(n) = Min(X1 to .Xn)

1 n
SCALar (AVERAGE): AVG (n)= × ∑ xi
n i =1

1119.5063.12 6.148 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

SENSe:BANDwidth Subsystem

This subsystem controls the setting of the instrument’s filter bandwidths. Both groups of commands
(BANDwidth and BWIDth) perform the same functions.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

:BANDwidth
[:RESolution] <numeric_value> HZ
:AUTO <Boolean> --
:MODE ANALog|DIGital --
:FFT <Boolean> -- Option FFT filter
:RATio <numeric_value> --
:VIDeo <numeric_value> HZ
:AUTO <Boolean> --
:RATio <numeric_value> | SINe | PULSe | --
NOISe
:DEMod <numeric_value> HZ Vector Signal Analysis
:PLL AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW
:BWIDth
[:RESolution] <numeric_value> HZ
:AUTO <Boolean> --
:MODE ANALog|DIGital --
:FFT <Boolean> -- Option FFT filter
:RATio <numeric_value> --
:VIDeo <numeric_value> HZ
:AUTO <Boolean> --
:RATio <numeric_value> | SINe | PULSe | --
NOISe
:DEMod <numeric_value> HZ Vector Signal Analysis
:PLL AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] 1 Hz to 10 MHz
This command defines the analyzer’s resolution bandwidth.
Example: "BAND 1MHz"
Features: *RST value: - (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The values for the resolution bandwidth are rounded in 1 | 2 | 3 | 5 steps.
In the GSM BTS/MS ANALYZER mode with option FSE-K11/K10, the command is available for
POWER vs. TIME measurement. In this case, the parameters DEFault (bandwidth setting according
to GSM standard), 300KHZ and 1MHZ are permitted.

1119.5063.12 6.149 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF
This command either automatically couples the resolution bandwidth of the instrument to the span or
cancels the coupling.
Example: "BAND:AUTO OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
The automatic coupling matches the resolution bandwidth to the currently set span according to the
relationship between span and resolution bandwidth.

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE ANALog | DIGital

This command toggles between analog and digital resolution filters for the 1-kHz bandwidth.
Example: "BAND:MODE DIG"
Features: *RST value: ANALog
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Depending on the bandwidth, the resolution filters are automatically toggled between digital filters
(<1kHz) and analog filters (>1kHz). The 1-kHz bandwidth is present in the instrument as a digital
filter and as an analog filter and can be toggled using this command. If the analog filter is selected for
the bandwidth 1kHz, the FFT-filtering for bandwidths ≤ 1kHz is switched off.

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE:FFT ON | OFF
This command toggles the digital filters used for bandwidths ≤ 1 kHz between ordinary mode and
FFT-filter mode.
Example: "BAND:MODE:FFT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The filter bandwidth of 1 kHz is switched to digital filtering for both ON and OFF. This command is
only available in conjunction with option FFT Filter.

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.0001 to 1
This command defines the ratio resolution bandwidth (Hz) / span (Hz).
Example: "BAND:RAT 0.1"
Features: *RST value: -- (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, R
The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio Span/RBW used in manual control.

1119.5063.12 6.150 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo 1Hz to 10MHz

This command defines the instrument’s video bandwidth.
Example: "BAND:VID 10kHz"
Features: *RST value: - (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The values for the video bandwidth are rounded in 1 | 2 | 3 | 5 steps.

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON | OFF
This command either automatically couples the instrument’s video bandwidth to the resolution
bandwidth or cancels the coupling.
Example: "BAND:VID:AUTO OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATIO 0.001to 1000 | SINe | PULSe | NOISe

This command defines the ratio video bandwidth (Hz) / resolution bandwidth (Hz).
Parameter: The parameters SINe, PULSe and NOISe may be used as synonyms for the
following values:
SINe: 1
PULSe: 10
NOISe: 0.1
Example: "BAND:VID:RAT 10"
Features: *RST value: - (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
The ratio to be entered is reciprocal to the ratio RBW/VBW used in manual control.

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:DEMod 5kHz to 200kHz (Real Time on) | 5kHz to 5MHz (Real

Time off)
This command defines the demodulation bandwidth of the instrument for analog demodulation.
Example: "BAND:DEM 100KHZ"
Features: *RST value: 10KHZ
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A
The values for the demodulation bandwidth are rounded in steps of 1 | 2 | 3 | 5.

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:PLL AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW

This command defines the bandwidth of the main PLL of the instrument synthesizer.
Example: "BAND:PLL HIGH"
Features: *RST value: AUTO
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

1119.5063.12 6.151 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

SENSe:CORRection-Subsystem
The SENSe:CORRection-subsystem controls the correction of measured results by means of
frequency-dependent correction factors (e. g. for antenna or cable attenuation).
It also controls calibration and normalization during operation with the option Tracking Generator .

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:CORRection option Tracking Generator
:METHod TRANsmission | REFLexion
:COLLect
[:ACQuire] THRough | OPEN no query
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:RECall no query
:TRANsducer
:CATalog? query only
:ACTive? query only
:SELect <name>
:UNIT <string>
:SCALing LINear | LOGarithmic
:COMMent <string>
:DATA <freq> , <level> .. HZ , --
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:DELete -- -- no query
:TSET
:CATalog? query only
:ACTive? query only
:SELect <name>
:UNIT <string>
:BREak <Boolean>
:COMMent <string>
:RANGe<1 to 10> <freq> , <freq>, <name> .. HZ, HZ, --
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:DELete -- -- no query
:LOSS option FSE-K11 or
:INPut FSE-K10
[:MAGNitude] <numeric_value> DB
:RXGain option FSE-K11 or
:INPut FSE-K10
[:MAGNitude] <numeric_value> DB
:CVL option external mixer output
:CATalog? query only
:SELect <file_name>
:MIXer <string>
:SNUMber <string>
:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD
:PORTs 2|3
:BIAS <numeric_value> A
:COMMent <string>
:DATA <freq> , <level> .. HZ , DB
:CLEar -- -- no query

1119.5063.12 6.152 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates/deactivates normalization of the measurement results.
Example: "CORR ON "
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
This command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission | REFLexion

This command selects the kind of measurement with active tracking generator
(transmission/reflexion).
Example: "CORR:METH TRAN "
Features: *RST value: TRANsmission
SCPI: device specific
Mode: A
This command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough | OPEN

This command selects the kind of measurement for the reference values of the normalization
(response calibration).
Example: "CORR:COLL THR"
Features: *RST value:
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
THRough "TRANsmission" mode: calibration with direct connection between tracking
generator and device input.
"REFLexion" mode: calibration with short circuit at the input
OPEN only valid in "REFLexion" mode:calibration with open input
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value an a query. It is only valid in
conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RECall
This command restores the instrument setting that was valid for the measurement of the reference
data.
Example: "CORR:REC"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and a query. It is only valid
in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

1119.5063.12 6.153 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog?
This command reads out the names of all transducer factors stored on the harddisk.
Example: "CORR:TRAN:CAT?"
Feature: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive?
This command reveals the active transducer factor. If no transducer factor is switched on, a void
string will be output.
Example: "CORR:TRAN:ACT?"
Feature: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <name>
This command selects the transducer factor designated by <name>. If <name> does not exist yet, a
new transducer factor is created.
Parameter: <name>::= Name of the transducer factor in string data form with a
maximum of 8 characters.
Example: "CORR:TRAN:SEL ’FACTOR1’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands for modifying/activating transducer
factors.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT <string>
This command defines the unit of the transducer factor selected.
Parameter: <string>::= ’DB’ | ’DBM’ | ’DBMV’ | ’DBUV’ | ’DBUV/M’ | ’DBUA’
’DBUA/M’ | ’DBPW’ | ’DBPT’
Example: "CORR:TRAN:UNIT ’DBUV’"
Features: *RST value: ’DB’
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.

1119.5063.12 6.154 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing LINear | LOGarithmic

This command defines whether the frequency scaling of the transducer factor is linear or logarithmic.
Example: "CORR:TRAN:SCAL LOG"
Features: *RST value: LINear
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent <string>
This command defines the comment for the selected transducer factor.
Example: "CORR:TRAN:COMM ’FACTOR FOR ANTENNA’"
Features: *RST value ’’ (empty comment)
SCPI: device specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA <freq>,<level>..
This command defines the test points for the selected transducer factor. The values are entered as a
series of frequency/level pairs. The frequencies must be in ascending order.
Example: "CORR:TRAN:TRANsducer:DATA 1MHZ,-30,2MHZ,-40"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent. The level values are
sent as dimensionless numbers; the unit is specified by means of the command
SENS:CORR:TRAN:UNIT.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the selected transducer factor on or off.
Example: "CORR:TRAN ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.

1119.5063.12 6.155 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete
This command deletes the selected transducer factor.
Example: "CORR:TRAN:DEL"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value.
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TRAN:SEL must be sent.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog?
This command polls the names of all transducer factors stored on the harddisk.
Parameter: none
Example: "CORR:TSET:CAT?"
Mode: A
Feature: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:ACTive?
This command reveals the active transducer set. If no transducer set is switched on, a void string will
be output.
Example: "CORR:TSET:ACT?"
Feature: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <name>
This command selected the transducer set designated by <name>. If <name> does not exist yet, a
new set is created.
Parameter: <name>::= name of the transducer set in string data form with a maximum
of 8 characters.
Example: "CORR:TSET:SEL ’SET1’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands for changing/activating the
transducer sets.

1119.5063.12 6.156 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT ’DB’ | ’DBM’ | ’DBUV’ | ’DBUV/M’ | ’DBUA’ | ’DBUA/M’’ |

DBPW’ | ’DBPT
This command defines the unit of the selected transducer sets. When assigning transducer factors
to the set, only factors which are compatible to the selected unit, i. e. factors with the same unit or the
unit dB, are allowed.
Example: "CORR:TSET:UNIT ’DBUV’"
Features: *RST value: ’DB’
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:BREak ON | OFF
This command defines if the sweep is to be stopped on changeover from range to another.
Example: "CORR:TSET:BRE ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Prior to the above command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent <string>
This command defines the comment for the selected transducer set.
Example: "CORR:TSET:COMM ’SET FOR ANTENNA’"
Features: *RST value ’’ (empty comment)
SCPI: device specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<1 to 10> <freq>,<freq>,<name>..

This command defines a partial range of the selected transducer set. The partial range is determined
by its start and stop frequencies plus a list of names of the assigned transducer factors. The ranges
1 to 10 must be sent in ascending order.
Parameter: <freq>,<freq>::= start frequency, stop frequency of the range
<name>...::= list of names for the assigned transducer factors.
The individual names must be characterized by single
quotation marks (’) and separated by commas.
Example: "CORR:TRAN:TSET:RANG 1MHZ,2MHZ,’FACTOR1,’FACTOR2’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.

1119.5063.12 6.157 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches the selected transducer set on or off.
Example: "CORR:TSET ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:DELete
This command deletes the selected transducer set.
Example: "CORR:TSET:DEL"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is an event and thus has no *RST value assigned.
Prior to this command, the command SENS:CORR:TSET:SEL must be sent.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:LOSS:INPut[:MAGNitude] <numeric_value>
This command announces to the instrument a possibly needed external attenuation of the input
signal, so that it is taken into account later when the level is set.
Parameter: <numeric_value>::= value of external attenuation in dB.
Example: "CORR:LOSS:INP 30DB "
Features: *RST value: 20dB
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
The external attenuation must be selected such that the input power of the analyzer does not exceed
27 dBm.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RXGain:INPut[:MAGNitude] <numeric_value>
This command announces to the instrument a possibly needed preamplification in the RX-band (RX
BAND GAIN), so that it is taken into account later when the measured values are read out.
Parameter: <numeric_value>::= value of the amplification in dB.
Example: "CORR:RXG:INP 30DB "
Features: *RST value: 0 dB
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.158 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog?
This command polls the names of all conversion-loss tables stored on the harddisk.
Example: "CORR:CVL:CAT?"
Feature: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is only valid in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:SELect <file_name>
This command selects the Conversion Loss Table designated with <file_name>. If <file_name> is
not available, a new Conversion Loss Table will be created.
Parameter: <file_name>::= Name of Conversion Loss Table as string data with
a maximum of 8 characters
Example: "CORR:CVL:SEL ’LOSS_TAB’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command must be sent prior to the subsequent commands used to change/activate the
Conversion Loss files. It is only valid in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer <string>
This command defines the type designation of the mixer in the Conversion Loss Table.
Parameter: <string>::= Type designation of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters
Example: "CORR:CVL:MIX ’FSE_Z60’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber <string>
This command defines the serial number of the mixer in the Conversion Loss Table.
Parameter: <string>::= Serial number of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters
Example: "CORR:CVL:SNUM ’123.4567’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

1119.5063.12 6.159 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
This command defines the waveguide band in the Conversion Loss Table.
Example: "CORR:CVL:BAND E"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD

This command defines the type of harmonic in the Conversion Loss Table.
Example: "CORR:CVL:TYPE EODD"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs 2 | 3
This command defines the type of mixer in the Conversion Loss Table.
Example: "CORR:CVL:PORT 3"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS <numeric_value>
This command defines the bias current in the Conversion Loss Table.
Example: "CORR:CVL:BIAS 7mA"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

1119.5063.12 6.160 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent <string>
This command defines the comment in the Conversion Loss Table.
Parameter: <string>::= Comment of mixer with a maximum of 60 characters
Example: "CORR:CVL:COMMENT ’MIXER FOR BAND U’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:DATA <freq>,<level>..
This command defines the reference values of the selected Conversion Loss Tabels. The values are
entered as a result of frequency/level pairs. The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order.
Example: "CORR:CVL:DATA 1MHZ,-30DB,2MHZ,-40DB"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar
This command deletes the selected Conversion Loss Table.
Example: "CORR:CVL:CLE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.
Command SENS:CORR:CVL:SEL must be sent prior to this command. This command is only valid
in conjunction with option External Mixer Output, FSE-B21.

1119.5063.12 6.161 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

SENSe:DETector Subsystem
The SENSe:DETector subsystem controls the recording of measurement values via the type of detector
selected for each trace.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:DETector<1to4>
[:FUNCtion] APEak | NEGative| POSitive |
SAMPle| RMS | AVERage --
:AUTO <Boolean>

[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>[:FUNCtion] APEak | NEGative | POSitive | SAMPle | RMS |

AVERage
This command switches the detector for recording of the measured value.
Example: "DET POS"
Features: *RST value: APEak
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The value "APEak" (AutoPeak) displays both the positive peak value and the negative peak value
when noise is present. The positive peak value is displayed when one signal is present. The trace is
selected by means of the numeric suffix after DETector.

[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO ON | OFF

This command either couples the detector to the current trace setting or turns coupling off.
Example: "DET:AUTO OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The trace is defined by the numeric suffix at DETector.

1119.5063.12 6.162 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

SENSe:DDEMod Subsystem
This subsystem controls the parameters for digital demodulation.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:DDEMod Vector Signal Analysis
:FORMat QPSK | PSK | MSK | QAM | FSK
:SBANd NORMal | INVerse
:QPSK
:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4
:PSK
:NSTate 2|8
:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8
:MSK
:FORMat TYPE1 | TYPE2 |
NORMal | DIFFerential
:QAM
:NSTate 16
:FSK
:NSTate 2|4
:SRATe <numeric_value> HZ
:TIMe <numeric_value> SYM
:PRATe 1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16
:FILTer
:MEASurement OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | B22 | B25
| B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM |RM95 |
QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF
:REFerence RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | B22 | B25 | B44
| QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 | QRR |
RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF
:ALPHa <numeric_value>
:NORMalize <Boolean>
:PRESet GSM | TETRa | DCS1800 | PCS1900 | PHS |
PDCup | PDCDown | APCO25CQPSK |
APCO25C4FM | CDPD | DECT | CT2 | ERMes |
MODacom | PWT | TFTS | F16 | F322 | F324 | F64 |
FQCDma | F95Cdma | RQCDma | R95Cdma |
FNADc | RNADc | EDGe | BPSK18 | GMSK18 |
QPSK18 | GMSK36 | FWCDma | FCDMa4096 |
RWCDma | RCDMa4096 | FW3Gppcdma |
RW3Gppcdma | CDMA2000
:SEARch
:PULSe
:STATe <Boolean>
:SYNC
:CATalog? query only
:SELect <string>
:OFFSet <numeric_value> SYM
:PATTern <string>
:STATe <Boolean>
:NAME <string>
:COMMent <string>
:DATA <string>
:DELete
:MONLy <Boolean>
:TIME <numeric value> SYM
:TCAPture Vector Signal Analysis
:LENGth <numeric_value>

1119.5063.12 6.163 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FORMat QPSK | PSK | MSK | QAM | FSK

This command selects the digital demodulation type.
Example: "DDEM:FORM QPSK"
Features: *RST value: MSK
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse

This command selects the sideband for the demodulation.
Example: "DDEM:SBAN INV"
Features: *RST value: NORMal
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4

This command determines the specific demodulation type for QPSK.
Example: "DDEM:QPSK:FORM DPI4"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PSK:NSTate 2|8
This command determines the specific demodulation type for PSK.
Example: "DDEM:PSK:NST 2"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D
Value 2 (i.e. PSK2) corresponds to BPSK demodulation, value 8 the 8PSK demodulation.

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8

This command determines the specific demodulation type for PSK.
Example: "DDEM:PSK:FORM DIFF"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.164 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:MSK:FORMat TYPE1 | TYPE2 | NORMal | DIFFerential

This command determines the specific demodulation type for MSK.
Example: "DDEM:MSK:FORM TYPE2"
Features: *RST value: TYPE2 | DIFFerential
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D
TYPE1 | NORMal corresponds to MSK demodulation, TYPE2 | DIFFerential corresponds to
DMSK demodulation.

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:QAM:NSTate 16
This command determines the specific demodulation type for QAM.
Example: "DDEM:QAM:NST 16"
Features: *RST value: 16
SCPI: device-specific.
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FSK:NSTate 2|4
This command determines the specific demodulation type for FSK.
Example: "DDEM:FSK:NST 2"
Features: *RST- value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D
The parameter 2 corresponds to the demodulation type 2FSK, the parameter 4 to the demodulation
type 4FSK.

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SRATe 160 Hz ...7 MHz

This command defines the symbol rate.
Example: "DDEM:SRAT 18kHz"
Features: *RST value: 270.833333kHz
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:TIME 1 to Frame Length

The command determines the number of displayed symbols (result length).
Example: "DDEM:TIME 80"
Features: *RST value: 147
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.165 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRATe 1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16
This command determines the number of points per symbol.
Example: "DDEM:PRAT 8"
Features: *RST value: 4
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:MEASurement OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian| B22 | B25 |

B44 | QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 |
QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF
This command selects the input filter for the test signal.
B22 Bessel 22
B25 Bessel 25
B44 Bessel 44
QFM or FM95 IS95-CDMA fm
QFR or FR95 IS95-CDMA fr
QRM or RM95 IS95-CDMA rm
QRR or RR95 IS95-CDMA rr
A25Fm APCO 25 fm
EMES EDGE mes
EREF EDGE ref
Example: "DDEM:FILT:MEAS RCOS"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian| B22 | B25 | B44 |

QFM | FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 | QRR | RR95
| A25Fm | EMES | EREF
This command selects the input filter for the reference signal.
Example: "DDEM:FILT:REF RCOS"
Features: *RST value: GAUSsian
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa 0.2 to 1
This command determines the filter characteristic (ALPHA/BT). Step width is 0.05.
Example: "DDEM:FILT:ALPH 0.5"
Features: *RST value: 0.3
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.166 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:NORMalize ON | OFF
This command switches normalizing of the unit circle on or off using IQ offset.
Example: "DDEM:NORM OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:PULSe:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the signal burst search on or off.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:PULS:STAT OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:CATalog?
This command polls the names of all sync-file data sets stored on the harddisk.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:CAT?"
Feature: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect <string>
This command selects a predefined sync file. A file that has been set previously by the command
DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern becomes invalid.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:SEL "PATT_1"
Feature: *RST value: ""
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:OFFSet <numeric_value>
This command defines the offset of the display with reference to the synchronization sequence.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:OFFS 10SYM"
Features: *RST value: 0 SYM
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.167 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern <string>
This command defines the synchronization sequence.A file that has been set previously by the
command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:SELect becomes invalid.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:PATT "1101001"
Features: *RST value: ""
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches the search for a synchronization sequence on or off.
Example: "DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:STAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME <string>
This command selects a sync file to be edited or entered anew.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME "PATT_NEW"
Feature: *RST value: ""
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent <string>
This command defines a comment on a sync file. This sync file must be previously selected by the
command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:COMM "PATTERN FOR PPSK"
Feature: *RST value: ""
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA <string>
This command defines a synchronization pattern for the sync file. This sync file must be previously
selected by the command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DATA "1101001"
Feature: *RST value: ""
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.168 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete <string>
This command deletes a synchronization pattern on the hard disk. This sync file must be previously
selected by the command DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DEL
Features: *RST-value: ""
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MONLy ON | OFF
For setting ON, this command sets the analyzer so that the measured values are displayed and
taken into account in the error analysis only if the set sync pattern is found . Bursts with a wrong sync
pattern (sync not found) are ignored.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:MONL ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device specific
Mode: VA-D

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:TIME 100 to 1600

This command determines the number of symbols required for demodulation (frame length). The
values > 800 are only permissible if the number of points per symbol is <16, the values > 1600 only if
the number of points per symbol is <8. Step width is 100.
Example: "DDEM:SEAR:TIME 800"
Features: *RST value: 400
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.169 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet GSM | EDGe | TETRa | PHS | PDCup | PDCDown |

APCO25CQPSK | APCO25C4FM | CDPD | DECT | CT2 | ERMes
| MODacom | PWT | TFTS | F16 | F322 | F324 | F64 | FQCDma |
F95Cdma | RQCDma | R95Cdma | FNADc | RNADc | FWCDma |
FCDMa4096 | RWCDma | RCDMa4096 | FW3Gppcdma |
RW3Gppcdma | CDMA2000
This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standard
transmission method.
Example: "DDEM:PRES TETR"
Features: *RST value: FWCDma
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D
APCO25CQPSK APCO25 Continous Phase QPSK
APCO25C4FM APCO25Continous Phase 4FM
F16 FLEX 1600 - 2FSK
F322 FLEX 3200 - 2FSK,
F324 FLEX 3200 - 4FSK
F64 FLEX 6400 - 4FSK
FNADc Forward NADC
RNADc Reverse NADC
FQCDma or F95Cdma Forward CDMA acc. to IS95 Standard
RQCDma or R95Cdma Reverse CDMA acc. to IS95 Standard
FWCDma or FCDMa4096 Forward W-CDMA
RWCDma or RCDMa4096 Reverse W-CDMA
FW3Gppcdma Forward W-CDMA 3GPP
RW3Gppcdma Reverse W-CDMA 3GPP
CDMA2000 CDMA 2000

[SENSe<1|2>:]TCAPture:LENGth 1024 | 2048 | 4096 | 8192 | 16384

This command determines the number of sampling points that are written into the memory for each
measurement (memory size).
Example: "TCAP:LENG 1024"
Features: *RST value: 16384
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-D

1119.5063.12 6.170 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

SENSe:FILTer Subsystem
The SENSe:FILTer subsystem selects the filters in the video signal path.This subsystem is active only in
the Vector Signal Analysis mode

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:FILTer Vector Signal Analyzer
:HPASs
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:FREQuency <numeric_value> HZ
:LPASs Vector Signal Analyzer
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:FREQuency <numeric_value> HZ | PCT
:CCITt
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:CMESsage
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:DEMPhasis
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:TCONstant <numeric_value> S
:LINK DISPlay | AUDio

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates the high-pass filter in the AF-branch for analog demodulation.
Example: "FILT:HPAS ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:HPASs:FREQuency 30 Hz | 300 Hz
In the Vector Signal Analysis mode with analog demodulation, this command defines the frequency
limit of the high-pass filter in the AF-branch. For REAL TIME ON absolute frequencies are entered,
for REAL TIME OFF, the frequencies are entered relative to the demodulation bandwidth.
Example: "FILT:HPAS:FREQ 300HZ"
Features: *RST value: - (STATe = OFF)
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-A

1119.5063.12 6.171 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:LPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates the low-pass filter in the AF-branch with analog demodulation.
Example: "FILT:LPAS ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-A
On switching to ON, a bandwidth of 3 kHz for REAL TIME ON and a bandwidth of 5 PCT for REAL
TIME OFF is set automatically.

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:LPASs:FREQuency <numeric_value>
This command defines the frequency limit of the low-pass filter in the NF-branch for analog
demodulation.
Parameter: <numeric_value> ::= 3 kHz | 15 kHz for REAL TIME ON
5 PCT | 10 PCT | 25 PCT for REAL TIME OFF
Example: "FILT:LPAS:FREQ 3KHZ" for REAL TIME ON
"FILT:LPAS:FREQ 25PCT" for REAL TIME OFF
Features: *RST value: - (STATe = OFF)
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:CCITt[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates the weighting filter according to CCITT-recommendation in the AF-branch
for analog demodulation.
Example: "FILT:CCIT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates the C-message weighting filter according to CCITT-recommendation in the
AF-branch for analog demodulation.
Example: "FILT:CMES ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-A
This command is valid only with REAL TIME OFF.

1119.5063.12 6.172 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates the selected de-emphasis for analog demodulation.
Example: "FILT:DEMP ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:TCONstant 50US | 75US | 750US

This command sets the time constant of the de-emphasis for analog demodulation.
Example: "FILT:DEMP:TCON 75US"
Features: *RST value: 50us
SCPI: conforming
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:LINK DISPlay | AUDio

For analog demodulation, this command selects whether the de-emphasis set is to be active in the
audio branch only or in addition for the display of measured values.
Example: "FILT:DEMP:LINK DISP"
Features: *RST value: AUDio
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A
AUDio De-emphasis effective in the audio branch only
DISPlay De-emphasis effective in the audio branch and in the display of measured values

1119.5063.12 6.173 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

SENSe:FREQuency Subsystem
The SENSe:FREQuency subsystem defines the frequency axis of the active display. The frequency axis
can either be defined via the start/stop frequency or via the center frequency and span.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:FREQuency
:CENTer <numeric_value> HZ
:LINK STARt | STOP | SPAN --
:STEP <numeric_value> HZ
:LINK SPAN | RBW | OFF --
:FACTor <numeric_value> PCT
:SPAN <numeric value> HZ
:FULL -- --
:LINK CENTer | STARt | STOP --
:STARt <numeric_value> HZ
:LINK CENTer | STOP | SPAN --
:STOP <numeric_value> HZ
:LINK CENTer | STARt |SPAN --
:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep --
:OFFSet <numeric_value> HZ

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer 0 GHz to fmax

This command defines the center frequency of the analyzer.
Example: "FREQ:CENT 100MHz"
Features: *RST value: fmax / 2
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, MS, BTS
The automatic coupling of the parameters is set to SPAN FIXED.

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STARt | STOP | SPAN

This command defines the coupling of the center frequency to the start, stop frequency or the
frequency span.
Example: "FREQ:CENT:LINK STAR"
Features: *RST value: SPAN
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

1119.5063.12 6.174 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 0 to fmax
This command defines the step width of the center frequency.
Example: "FREQ:CENT:STEP 120MHz"
Features: *RST value: - (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN | RBW | OFF

This command couples the step width of the center frequency to span (span >0) or to the resolution
bandwidth (span = 0) or cancels the couplings.
Example: "FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN"
Features: *RST value: SPAN
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 1 to 100 PCT

This command couples the step width of the center frequency with a factor to the span (span >0) or
to the resolution bandwidth (span = 0).
Example: "FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT"
Features: *RST value: - (AUTO 0.1 × SPAN is switched on)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, BTS, MS

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN 0 GHz to fmax

This command defines the frequency span of the analyzer.
Example: "FREQ:SPAN 10MHz"
Features: *RST value: fmax
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A

The automatic coupling of the parameters is set to CENTER FIXED.

1119.5063.12 6.175 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
This command sets the maximum frequency span of the analyzer.
Example: "FREQ:SPAN:FULL"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK CENTer | START | STOP

This command defines the coupling for frequency-span changes.
Example: "FREQ:SPAN:LINK STOP"
Features: *RST value: CENTer
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt 0 GHz to fmax

This command defines the start frequency of the analyzer.
Example: "FREQ:STAR 20MHz"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The automatic coupling of the parameters is set to STOP FIXED.

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK CENTer | STOP | SPAN

This command defines the coupling for start-frequency changes.
Example: "FREQ:STAR:LINK SPAN"
Features: *RST value: STOP
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP 0 GHz to fmax

This command defines the stop frequency of the scan in receiver mode or the stop frequency of the
analyzer.
Example: "FREQ:STOP 2000MHz"
Features: *RST value: fmax
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The automatic coupling of the parameters is set to STARt FIXED.

1119.5063.12 6.176 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK CENTer | STARt | SPAN

This command defines the coupling for stop-frequency changes.
Example: "FREQ:STOP:LINK SPAN"
Features: *RST value: STARt
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep

This command switches between frequency (SWEep) and time (CW | FIXed) domain in the analyzer
mode.
Example: "FREQ:MODE SWE"
Features: *RST value: CW
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
For CW and FIXed, the frequency setting is via command FREQuency:CENTer. In the SWEep
mode, the setting is via commands FREQuency:STARt, STOP, CENTer and SPAN.

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:OFFSet <numeric_value>
This command defines the frequency offset of the instrument.
Example: "FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ"
Features: *RST value: 0 Hz
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA

1119.5063.12 6.177 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

SENSe:MIXer - Subsystem
The SENSe:MIXer subsystem controls the settings of the external mixer. It is only active in Analyzer
mode (INSTrument SANalyzer). The suffix in SENSe<1|2> is not significant in this subsystem.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>:]
:MIXer
[:STATe] <Boolean> --
:BLOCk <Boolean>
:PORTs 2|3
:SIGNal OFF | ON | AUTO
:THReshold <numeric_value>
:HARMonic <numeric_value> -- Only query in band lock on
:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD Not in band lock off
:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J Not in band lock off
:LOSS
[:LOW] <numeric_value> DB
:HIGH <numeric_value> DB Not in band lock off
:TABLe <file_name>
:BIAS <numeric_value> A
:LIMit
[:MAX] <numeric_value> A Not in band lock on
:MIN <numeric_value> A Not in band lock on

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command activates or shuts off the external mixer.
Example: "MIX ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is available only in conjunction with option FSE-B21, External Mixer Output.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BLOCk ON | OFF
This command activates the BAND LOCK ON or BAND LOCK OFF mode.
Example: "MIX:BLOC ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

1119.5063.12 6.178 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:PORTs 2 | 3
This command activates the 2- or 3-port mixer. In the BAND LOCK ON mode, the command refers
to the active band selected with SENSe:MIXer:HARMonic:BAND .
Example: "MIX:PORT 3"
Features: *RST value: 2
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:SIGNal ON | OFF | AUTO

This command activates the Signal ID or Auto ID mode.
Example: "MIX:SIGN ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
This command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:THReshold 0.1 to 100 dB

This command sets the level threshold for auto ID.
Example: "MIX:THR 20"
Features: *RST value: 10
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic <numeric_value>
With BAND LOCK OFF, this command sets the nth harmonic. The command may be a query with
BAND LOCK ON.
Parameter: <numeric_value> := 2..X; X: depending on the LO
Example: "MIX:HARM 5"
Features: *RST value: 2
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

1119.5063.12 6.179 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD

With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the type of harmonic.
Example: "MIX:HARM:TYPE EODD"
Features: *RST value: EVEN
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the active band.
Example: "MIX:HARM:BAND E"
Features: *RST value: U
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] <numeric_value>
This command sets the conversion loss of the mixer.
Example: "MIX:LOSS -12DB"
Features: *RST value: 0 dB
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH <numeric_value>
With BAND LOCK ON, this command sets the conversion loss of the mixer for higher harmonics in
bands with two harmonics (band A: even harmonics, band Q: odd harmonics).
Example: "MIX:LOSS:HIGH -14DB"
Features: *RST value: 0 dB
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

1119.5063.12 6.180 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLe <file_name>
This command sets a conversion loss table.
Parameter: <file_name> := DOS file name
Example: "MIX:LOSS:table ’mix_1’"
Features: *RST value: no table set
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS <numeric_value>
This command sets the bias current.
Example: "MIX:BIAS 7mA"
Features: *RST value: 0A
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS:LIMit[:MAX] <numeric_value>
This command sets the maximum limit of the bias current.
Example: "MIX:BIAS:LIM 7mA"
Features: *RST value: +10mA
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS:LIMit:MIN <numeric_value>
This command sets the minimum limit of the bias current.
Example: "MIX:BIAS:LIM:MIN -8mA"
Features: *RST value: -10 mA
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
The command is available only if the external mixer (option FSE-B21) is switched on.

1119.5063.12 6.181 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

SENSe:MSUMmary Subsystem
This subsystem controls the modulation summary setting for analog demodulation.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:MSUMmary Vector Signal Analysis
:AHOLd
[:STATe] <Boolean>
:MODE ABSolute | RELative
:RUNit PCT | DB
:REFerence <numeric_value> PCT | HZ | DEG | RAD
:AUTO ONCE no query
:MTIMe <numeric_value> S

[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:AHOLd[:STATe] ON | OFF
This command switches on the average/peak hold mode.
Example: "MSUM:AHOL ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:MODE ABSolute | RELative

This command selects the absolute or relative indication of the summary marker values.
Example: "MSUM:MODE REL"
Features: *RST value: ABSolute
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:RUNit PCT | DB
This command selects the relative unit of the summary marker in the relative result display.
Example: "MSUM:RUN DB"
Features: *RST value: DB
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:REFerence <numeric_value>
This command selects the reference modulation.
Parameter: <numeric_value> := 0.001 PCT to 1000 PCT for AM
0.1 HZ to 10 MHZ for FM
0.0001 RAD to 1000 RAD for PM
Example: "MSUM:REF 50PCT"
Features: *RST value: 100 PCT for AM
100 KHZ for FM
10 RAD for PM
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

1119.5063.12 6.182 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the current absolute measured values of the main modulation signal as
reference values for the relative indication.
Example: "MSUM:REF:AUTO ONCE"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A
This command is an event and has therefore no query and no *RST value assigned.

[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:MTIMe 0.1 s | 1 s
This command selects the measurement time for the summary markers.
Example: "MSUM:MTIM 100US"
Features: *RST value: 0.1S
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: VA-A

1119.5063.12 6.183 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

SENSe:POWer Subsystem
This subsystem controls the setting of the instrument’s power measurements.

COMMAND PARAMETER UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:POWer
:ACHannel
:SPACing
[:UPPer] <numeric_value> HZ
:ACHannel <numeric_value> HZ
:ALTernate<1|2> <numeric_value> HZ
:ACPairs 1|2|3
:BANDwidth
[:CHANnel] <numeric_value> HZ
:ACHannel <numeric_value> HZ
:ALTernate<1|2> <numeric_value> HZ
:BWIDth
[:CHANnel] <numeric_value> HZ
:ACHannel <numeric_value> HZ
:ALTernate<1|2> <numeric_value> HZ
:MODE ABSolute | RELative
:REFerence
:AUTO ONCE no query
:PRESet ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth |
OBWidth | CN | CN0
:BANDwidth <numeric_value> PCT
:BWIDth <numeric_value> PCT

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] 0 Hz to 1000 MHz

This command defines the channel spacing of adjacent channel to carrier.
Example: "POW:ACH:SPAC 28kHz"
Features: *RST value: 24 kHz
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A-F

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 0 Hz to 1000 MHz

This command defines the channel spacing of adjacent channel to carrier. This command has the
same effect as POW:ACH:SPAC.
Example: "POW:ACH:SPAC:ACH 338kHz"
Features: *RST value: 24 kHz
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F

1119.5063.12 6.184 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<1|2> 0 Hz ... 1000 MHz

This command defines the spacing of the first (ALTernate1) or the second alternate adjacent
channel (ALTernate2) relative to the carrier signal.
Example: "POW:ACH:SPAC:ALT1 99kHz"
Features: *RST value: 24 kHz
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 1 | 2 | 3
This command sets the number of adjacent channels (upper and lower channel in pairs).
Example: "POW:ACH:ACP 3"
Features: *RST value: 1
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] 0 Hz to 1000 MHz

This command sets the channel bandwidth of the radio communication system.
Example: "POW:ACH:BWID 30kHz"
Features: *RST value: 24 kHz
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
If the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the bandwiths of all alternate adjacent
channels are automatically set to the same value.

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel 0 Hz to 1000 MHz

This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio transmission
system.
Example: "POW:ACH:BWID:ACH 30kHz"
Features: *RST value: 24 kHz
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
If the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the bandwiths of all alternate adjacent
channels are automatically set to the same value.

1119.5063.12 6.185 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<1|2> 0 Hz to 1000 MHz

This command defines the channel bandwidth of the first/second alternate adjacent channel of the
radio transmission system.
Example: "POW:ACH:BWID:ALT2 30kHz"
Features: *RST value: 24 kHz
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
If the channel bandwidth of the alternate adjacent channel no. 1is changed the bandwith of the
alternate adjacent channel no. 2 is automatically set to the same value.

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute | RELative

This command toggles between absolute and relative measurement.
Example: "POW:ACH:MODE REL"
Features: *RST value: ABSolute
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured channel power by
command POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE.

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power.
Example: "POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth|OBWidth | CN | CN0

This command selects the type of power measurement.
Example: "POW:ACH:REF:PRES ACP"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F

[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth 0 to 100PCT
This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power.
Example: "POW:BWID 95PCT"
Features: *RST value: 99PCT
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-F
This value defines the occupied bandwidth (measurement POW:ACH:PRES OBW).

1119.5063.12 6.186 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

SENSe:ROSCillator Subsystem
This subsystem controls the reference oscillator. The suffix in SENSe<1|2> is not significant in this
subsystem.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:ROSCillator
:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal --
:EXTernal
:FREQuency <numeric_value> HZ
[:INTernal]
:TUNe <numeric_value>
:SAVe no query

[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal

This command controls selection of the reference oscillator.
Example: "ROSC:SOUR EXT"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected to the rear
panel of the instrument. *RST has no influence on this setting.

[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 1MHz to 16MHz

This command defines the frequency of the external reference oscillator.
Example: "ROSC:EXT:FREQ 5MHz"
Features: *RST value: 10MHz
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The value of the external reference frequency (1MHz to 16MHz) is rounded in steps of 1MHz.

[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe 0 to 4095
This command defines the value for the tuning of the internal reference oscillator.
Example: "ROSC:TUN 128"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The reference oscillator should be tuned only if an error has been detected in the frequency accuracy
check. After PRESET or switching on the instrument, the saved value of the reference frequency is
restored.

[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe:SAVe
This command saves the new value for the tuning of the internal reference oscillator. The factory-set
value in the EEPROM is overwritten.
Example: "ROSC:TUN:SAV"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.187 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

SENSe:SWEep Subsystem
This subsystem controls the sweep parameters.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>]
:SWEep
:TIME <numeric_value> S
:AUTO <Boolean> --
:COUNt <numeric_value> --
:EGATe <Boolean> --
:LEVel <numeric_value> V
:TYPE LEVel | EDGE --
:POLarity POSitive|NEGative --
:HOLDoff <numeric_value> S
:LENGth <numeric_value> S
:SOURce EXTernal | RFPower --
:GAP <Boolean> --
:PRETrigger <numeric_value> S
:TRGTogap <numeric_value> S
:LENGth <numeric_value> S
:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME <numeric_value>
This command defines the duration of the sweep.
The allowed value range depends on the selected domain and, for frequency domain, on the set
resolution bandwith (see Chapter 4, Softkey SWEEP TIME MANUAL).
Example: "SWE:TIME 10s"
Features: *RST value - (AUTO is set to ON)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA-A
If SWEep:TIME is directly programmed, automatic coupling is switched off.

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON | OFF
This command switches the automatic coupling of the sweep time for the frequency span or
bandwidth settings.
Example: "SWE:TIME:AUTO ON"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A
If SWEep:TIME is directly programmed, automatic coupling is switched off.

1119.5063.12 6.188 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt 0 to 32767
This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep.
Example: "SWE:COUNT 64"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA-D
This parameter defines the number of sweeps or the number of averaging procedures. In the
average mode, the value 0 defines a running averaging of measurement data over 10 sweeps.

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe ON | OFF
This command controls the sweep with the external gate signal.
Example: "SWE:EGAT ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel -5V to +5V

This command determines the threshold for the external gate signal.
Example: "SWE:EGAT:LEV 3V"
Features: *RST value: 2V
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
If SWEep:TIME is directly programmed, automatic coupling is switched off.

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE LEVel | EDGE

This command sets the type of triggering (level or edge) by the external gate signal.
Example: "SWE:EGAT:TYPE EDGE"
Features: *RST value: EDGE
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
Parameter EGATe:LENGth is not used for level triggering.

1119.5063.12 6.189 E-13

SENSe Subsystem FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity POSitive | NEGative

This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal.
Example: "SWE:EGAT:POL POS"
Features: *RST value: POSitive
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 0 to 100s
This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the continuation of the
sweep.
Example: "SWE:EGAT:HOLD 100us"
Features: *RST value: 0s
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The values for the delay time can be set in steps 1, 2, 3 and 5.

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 0 to 100s
In case of edge triggering, this command determines the time interval in which the instrument
sweeps.
Example: "SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms"
Features: *RST value: 0s
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A

The values for the delay time can be set in steps 1, 2, 3 and 5.

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal | RFPower

This command toggles between external gate signal and RF power signal.
Example: "SWE:EGAT:SOUR RFP"
Features: *RST value: EXTernal
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP ON | OFF
This command controls the operating mode GAP SWEEP.
Example: "SWE:GAP ON"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A-Z
Operating mode GAP SWEEP for measurements in the time domain controls the display of
measured values. Measured values can be blanked for a defined time range (GAP).

1119.5063.12 6.190 E-13

FSIQ SENSe Subsystem

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:PRETrigger 0 to 100s
This command defines the evaluation time for measured values before the pretrigger time
(resolution: 50 ns).
Example: "SWE:GAP:PRET 100us"
Features: *RST value: 0s
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:TRGTogap 0 to 100s
This command defines the time between the pretrigger time and the beginning of the gap (trigger-to-
gap time) (resolution: 50 ns).
Example: "SWE:GAP:TRGT 50us"
Features: *RST value: 0s
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:LENGth 0 to 100s
This command defines the gap length.
Example: "SWE:GAP:LENG 400us"
Features: *RST value: 0s
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A
The gap length can be programmed from 0 to 100s in steps of 1, 2, 3 and 5.

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

This command toggle between linear and logarithmic sweep.
Example: "SWE:SPAC LOG"
Features: *RST value: LIN
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A,
The frequency axis is set to linear or logarithmic scaling accordingly.

1119.5063.12 6.191 E-13

SOURce Subsystem FSIQ

SOURce Subsystem
The SOURce subsystem controls the output signals of the analyzer when the option Tracking Generator
is installed (FSE-B8 to FSE-B11). In the split screen mode, a distinction is made between SOURce1
(screen A) and SOURce2 (screen B).

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

SOURce<1|2> Option Mitlaufgenerator
:AM
:STATe <Boolean>
:DM
:STATe <Boolean>
:FM
:STATe <Boolean>
:FREQuency
:OFFSet <numeric_value> HZ
:POWer
:ALC
:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal
[:LEVel]
[:IMMediate]
[:AMPLitude] <numeric_value> DBM
:OFFSet <numeric_value> DB

SOURce<1|2>:AM:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the external amplitude modulation of the tracking generator.
Example: "SOUR:AM:STAT ON "
Features: *RST-value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
External ALC and external I/Q-modulation is switched off, if active. This command is only valid in
conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

SOURce<1|2>:DM:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the external delta modulation of the tracking generator.
Example: "SOUR:DM:STAT ON "
Features: *RST- value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
External AM, external ALC, external FM and external frequency offset are switched off, if active. This
command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

SOURce<1|2>:FM:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the external frequency modulation of the tracking generator.
Example: "SOUR:FM:STAT ON "
Features: *RST-value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
External AM, external I/Q-modulation and frequency offset are switched off, if active. This command
is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

1119.5063.12 6.192 E-13

FSIQ SOURce Subsystem

SOURce<1|2>:FREQuency:OFFSet -200MHz to 200MHz

This command defines a frequency offset of the tracking generators to the current instrument
frequency.
Example: "SOUR:FREQ:OFFS "
Features: *RST-value: 0 Hz
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
External delta modulation is switched off, if active. This command is only valid in conjunction with
option Tracking Generator.

SOURce<1|2>:POWer:ALC:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal

This command switches on or off the external level control (ALC).
Example: "SOUR:POW:ALC:SOUR INT "
Features: *RST- value: INT
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
External AM and external delta modulation are switched off, if active. This command is only valid in
conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

SOURce<1|2>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] -20dBm to 0dBm / Option FSE-B12: -

90dBm to 0dBm
This command defines the level of the tracking generator.
Example: "SOUR:POW -20dBm"
Features: *RST- value:
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
This command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

SOURce<1|2>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet -200dB to +200dB

This command defines a level offset for the tracking generator.
Example: "SOUR:POW:OFFS -10dB"
Features: *RST- value: 0dB
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
This command is only valid in conjunction with option Tracking Generator.

1119.5063.12 6.193 E-13

STATus Subsystem FSIQ

STATus Subsystem
The STATus subsystem contains the commands for the status reporting system (see Chapter 5, Section
"Status Reporting System"). *RST does not influence the status registers.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

STATus
:OPERation
[:EVENt]? -- --
:CONDition? -- --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:NTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:PRESet -- --
:QUEStionable
[:EVENt]? -- --
:CONDition? -- --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:NTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:POWer
[:EVENt]? -- --
:CONDition? -- --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:NTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:LIMit
[:EVENt]? -- --
:CONDition? -- --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:NTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:LMARgin
[:EVENt]? -- --
:CONDition? -- --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:NTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:SYNC
[:EVENt]? -- --
:CONDition? -- --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:NTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:ACPLimit
[:EVENt]? -- --
:CONDition? -- --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:NTRansition 0 to 65535 --

1119.5063.12 6.194 E-13

FSIQ STATus Subsystem

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

STATus
:QUEStionable -- --
:FREQuency -- --
[:EVENt]? 0 to 65535 --
:CONDition? 0 to 65535 --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition -- --
:NTRansition -- --
:TRANsducer
[:EVENt]? -- --
:CONDition? -- --
:ENABle 0 to 65535 --
:PTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:NTRansition 0 to 65535 --
:QUEue? -- --
[:NEXT]? -- --

STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:OPERation register.
Example: "STAT:OPER?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The contents of the EVENt section is deleted with readout.

STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
This command queries the CONDition section of the STATus:OPERation register.
Example: "STAT:OPER:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section. The value returned reflects the
current hardware status.

STATus:OPERation:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
Example: "STAT:OPER:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

1119.5063.12 6.195 E-13

STATus Subsystem FSIQ

STATus:OPERation:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation register from 0 to 1 for
the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:OPER:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:OPERation:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation register from 1 to 0 for
the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:OPER:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:PRESet
This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value. All
PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e., all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition
parts are set to 0, i.e., a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle part of
the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers are set to 0, i.e., all events in these
registers are not passed on.
Example: "STAT:PRES"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
Example: "STAT:QUES?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.

STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
This command queries the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.

1119.5063.12 6.196 E-13

FSIQ STATus Subsystem

STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus-QUEStionable register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation register from 0 to 1 for
the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation register from 1 to 0 for
the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
This command queries the content of the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.

1119.5063.12 6.197 E-13

STATus Subsystem FSIQ

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register from
0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST-value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register from
1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.

STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.

1119.5063.12 6.198 E-13

FSIQ STATus Subsystem

STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register from 0
to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register from 1
to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.

STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.

1119.5063.12 6.199 E-13

STATus Subsystem FSIQ

STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: LMARgin register
from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: LMARgin register
from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.

STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.

1119.5063.12 6.200 E-13

FSIQ STATus Subsystem

STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register from
0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: SYNC register from
1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ACPL?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ACPL:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.

1119.5063.12 6.201 E-13

STATus Subsystem FSIQ

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ACPL:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: ACPLimit register
from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ACPL:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable: ACPLimit register
from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:ACPL:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus:QUEStionableFREQuency
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:FREQ?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.

STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:FREQ:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.

1119.5063.12 6.202 E-13

FSIQ STATus Subsystem

STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:FREQ:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:FREQ:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register
from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:FREQ:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:TRAN?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section.

STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition?
This command queries the contents of the CONDition section of the
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:TRAN:COND?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition section.

1119.5063.12 6.203 E-13

STATus Subsystem FSIQ

STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:ENABle 0 to 65535
This command sets the bits of the ENABle section of the STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer
register.
Example: "STAT:QUES:TRAN:ENAB 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The ENABle register selectively enables the individual events of the associated EVENt section for the
sum bit in the status byte.

STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:PTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register
from 0 to 1 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:TRAN:PTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:NTRansition 0 to 65535
This command sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register
from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: "STAT:QUES:TRAN:NTR 65535"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue, thus deleting it.
Example: "STAT:QUE?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages
defined by SCPI (cf. Chapter 9). If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "no error", is
returned. This command is identical with the command SYSTem:ERRor.

1119.5063.12 6.204 E-13

FSIQ SYSTem Subsystem

SYSTem Subsystem
This subsystem comprises a series of commands for general functions.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

SYSTem
:COMMunicate
:GPIB
[:SELF]
:ADDRess 0 to 30 --
:RTERminator LFEoi | EOI
:RDEVice<1|2>
:ADDRess 0 to 30 --
:SERial<1|2>
:CONTrol
:DTR IBFull | OFF
:RTS IBFull | OFF
[:RECeive] --
:BAUD <numeric_value> --
:BITS 7|8
:PARity
[:TYPE] EVEN | ODD | NONE --
:SBITs 1|2
:PACE XON | NONE --
:PRINter1|2>
:ENUMerate
[:NEXT]? query only
:FIRSt? query only
:SELect <printer_name>
:DATE <num>, <num>, <num> --
:DISPlay
:UPDate ON | OFF
:ERRor? -- query only
:PASSword --
[:CENable] <string> no query
:PRESet -- no query
:COMPatible FSE | OFF
:SET <block> --
:SPEaker<1|2> --
:VOLume <numeric_value> --
:TIME 0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59 --
:VERSion? -- query only
:BINFo? -- query only

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0 to 30
This command changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the unit.
Example: "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18"
Features: *RST value: - (no influence on this parameter)
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.205 E-13

SYSTem Subsystem FSIQ

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator LFEOI | EOI

This command changes the delimiter.
Example: "SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI"
Features: *RST value: LFEOI
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The instrument contains a DMA-channel for communication via IEC-bus. This ensures maximum
speed for the transfer of commands and data. The parser for command decoding integrated in the
instrument is, however, only activated by the delimiter when the command is completely transferred.
In order to make this possible for the transfer of binary data, too (e. g. trace data which are
retransferred into the instrument), the delimiter recognition must be switched to the EOI signal prior
to the transfer. Output of binary data from the instrument does not require such a switching.

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice<1|2>:ADDRess 0 to 30
This command changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the unit which is selected as hardcopy device
1 or 2, provided that the IEC/IEEE-bus interface of this unit is set as an interface.
Example: "SYST:COMM:GPIB:RDEV2:ADDR 5"
Features: *RST value: 4
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:DTR IBFull | OFF

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:RTS IBFull | OFF
These commands switch the hardware handshake procedure for the given serial interface off (OFF)
or on (IBFull).
Examples: "SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:DTR OFF"
"SYST:COMM:SER2:CONT:RTS IBF"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The two commands have the same meaning. SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device COM1and
COM2, respectively.

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:BAUD 75 | 150 | 300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 9600

This command sets the transmission speed for the given serial interface.
Example: "SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 2400"
Features: *RST value: 9600
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively. Permissible
values are 75 Baud, 150 Baud, 300 Baud, 600 Baud, 1200 Baud, 2400 Baud, 4800 Baud, 9600
Baud.

1119.5063.12 6.206 E-13

FSIQ SYSTem Subsystem

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:BITS 7 | 8
This command defines the number of data bits per data word for the given serial interface.
Example: "SYST:COMM:SER2:BITS 7"
Features: *RST value: 8
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively.

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] EVEN | ODD | NONE

This command defines the parity check for the given serial interface.
Example: "SYST:COMM:SER:PAR EVEN"
Features: *RST value: NONE
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively. Permissible
values are: EVEN even parity
ODD odd parity
NONE no parity check.

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:SBITs 1|2
This command defines the number of stopbits per data word for the given serial interface.
Example: "SYST:COMM:SER:SBITs 2"
Features: *RST value: 1
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively.

SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PACE XON | NONE

This command switches on or off the software handshake for the given serial interface.
Example: "SYST:COMM:SER:PACE XON"
features: *RST value: NONE
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
SERial1 and SERial 2 correspond to device interface COM1 and COM2, respectively.

1119.5063.12 6.207 E-13

SYSTem Subsystem FSIQ

SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:ENUMerate:FIRSt?
This command queries the name of the first printer (in the list of printers) under Windows NT.
The names of other installed printers can be queried with command SYSTem:COMMunicate:
PRINter:ENUMerate:NEXT?.
If no printer is configured an empty string is output. The numeric suffix in PRINter<1|2> is not
significant.
Example: "SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:FIRS?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINte<1|2>r:ENUMerate:NEXT?
This command queries the name of the next printer installed under Windows NT.
This command can only be sent after command SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:
ENUMerate:FIRSt?.
An empty string is output after all printer names have been output. The numeric suffix in
PRINter<1|2> is not significant.
Example: "SYST:COMM:PRIN:ENUM:NEXT?"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:SELect <printer_name>
This command selects one of the printers installed under Windows NT.
The name of the first printer is queried with FIRSt?. After that the names of other installed printers
can be queried with NEXT?. The numeric suffix in PRINter<1|2> selects the device.
Parameter: <printer_name> ::= string which has been queried with commands
SYSTem:COMMunicate :PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? and NEXT?.
Example: "SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL ‘HP_DESKJET660’"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

SYSTem:DATE 1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31

This command is used to enter the date for the internal calendar.
Example: " SYST:DATE 1994,12,1"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The sequence of entry is year, month, day.

1119.5063.12 6.208 E-13

FSIQ SYSTem Subsystem

SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON | OFF
This command switches on or off the update of all display elements.
Example: " SYST:DISP:UPD ON
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

SYSTem:ERRor?
This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue, thus deleting it. .
Example: "SYST:ERR?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
Positive error numbers indicate device-specific errors, negative error numbers are error messages
defined by SCPI (cf. Chapter 9). If the error queue is empty, the error number 0, "no error", is
returned. This command is identical with the command STATus:QUEue:NEXT?. This command is a
query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] <string>
This command enables access to the service functions by means of the password.
Example: "SYST:PASS ’XXXX’"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event which is why it is not assigned an *RST value and has no query.

SYSTem:PRESet
This command triggers an instrument reset.
Example: "SYST:PRES"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The effect of this command corresponds to that of the PRESET key with manual control or to the
*RST command.

SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible FSE | OFF

This command determines whether the unit is FSE-compatible after a preset. Following a preset, an
FSIQ is not in the same mode as an FSE. With compatibility, FSIQ has the same default settings as
FSE after a preset.
Example: "SYST:PRES:COMP FSE"
Features: *RST value: OFF
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.209 E-13

SYSTem Subsystem FSIQ

SYSTem:SET <block>
The query SYSTem:SET? causes the data of the current instrument setting to be transmitted to the
controller in binary form (SAVE function). The data can be read back into the instrument (RECALL
function) by means of command SYSTem:SET <block>. If the data records are stored on the
instrument harddisk with SAVE/RECALL (MMEMory:STORe bzw. MMEMory:LOAD), it is possible to
store the data in an external computer by means of SYSTem:SET.
Example: "SYST:SET "
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The receive terminator has to be set to EOI to ensure reliable transfer of data (setting
SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI).

SYSTem:SPEaker<1|2>:VOLume 0 to 1
This command sets the volume of the built-in loudspeaker for demodulated signals. The numeric
suffix selects the measurement window.
Example: "SYST:SPE:VOL 0.5"
Features: *RST value: 0
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A
The value 0 is the lowest volume, the value 1 is the highest volume.

SYSTem:TIME 0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59

This command sets the internal clock.
Example: "SYST:TIME 12,30,30"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The sequence of entry is hour, minute, second.

SYSTem:VERSion?
This command queries the number of the SCPI version, which is relevant for the instrument.
Example: "SYST:VERS?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is a query which is why it is not assigned an *RST value.

SYSTem:BINFo?
This command queries all present modules with variant, main index and subordinate index. Entries
are separated by commas.
Return format: module1, model1, main index1, subordinate index1, module2, model 2, main index2,
subordinate index2, module3,...,moduleN, modelN, main indexN, subordinate indexN
Example: "SYST:BINF?"
Features: *RST value: –
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.210 E-13

FSIQ TRACe Subsystem

TRACe Subsystem
The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instrument’s internal trace memory.

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

TRACe
[:DATA] TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4, -
<block>|<numeric_value>...
:COPY TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4,
TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4

TRACe[:DATA] TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4, <block> | <numeric_value>

This command transfers trace data from the controller to the instrument, the query reads trace data
out of the instrument.
Example: "TRAC TRACE1,"+A$ (A$: data list in the current format)
"TRAC? TRACE1"
Features: *RST value: -
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

The trace data are transferred in the current format (corresponding to the command FORMat
ASCii|REAL). The device-internal trace memory is addressed using the trace names ’TRACE1’ to
’TRACE4’.
The parameter of the query is the trace name TRACE1 to TRACE4, it indicates which trace memory
will be read out.
The transfer of trace data from the controller to the instrument takes place by indicating the trace
name and then the data to be transferred. In ASCII format, these data are values separated by
commas. If the transfer takes place using the format real (REAL 32), the data are transferred in block
format (see FORMat subsystem).
Saving and recalling trace data together with the device settings to/from the device-internal hard disk
or to/from a floppy is controlled via the commands "MMEMory:STORe:STATe" and
"MMEMory:LOAD:STATe" respectively. Trace data are selected with
"MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL" or ""MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe". Trace data in
ASCII format (ASCII FILE EXPORT) are exported with the command "MMEM:STORe:TRACe".

The transfer format for the trace data depends on the instrument setting
Analyzer mode (span >0 and zero span):
500 results are output in the unit selected for display.
Note: With AUTO PEAK detector, only positive peak values can be read out.
Trace data can be read into instrument with logarithmic display only in dBm, with
linear display only in volts.
FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used as format for binary transmission.

1119.5063.12 6.211 E-13

TRACe Subsystem FSIQ

Vector analyzer mode, digital demodulation

The number of data transferred (except for the symbol table) is determined by the following
formula
number of results = result length * points per symbol
Max. 6400 results can be transferred (for example result length 1600, points per symbol 4).
In all cartesian diagrams (MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER, MAGNITUDE, PHASE,
FREQUENCY, REAL/IMAG, EYE[I], EYE[Q], ERROR VECT MAGNITUDE) test data are
transferred in the unit selected for display.
FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used for binary transmission.
Note: In the case of the eye pattern, results are simply superimposed in the display, ie
the EYE representation is the same as the REAL/IMAG representation.
In the polar diagrams (POLAR CONSTELL, POLAR VECTOR) the real and the imaginary
component are transferred as a pair for each result.
FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used for binary transmission.
With the SYMB TABLES / ERRORS setting, the displayed symbols can be read out as
traces. Trace assignment is as follows:
Full screen Trace 1
Split screen, screen A: Trace 1
Split screen, screen B: Trace 2
One byte (8 bits) is read out for each symbol.
FORMAT UINT,8 is to be used for binary transmission.

Vector analyzer mode, analog demodulation

The number of results transferred depends on the SWEEP TIME and DEMOD BW
settings. Max. 5000 and min. 10 points are available. The unit for the results depends on
the selected demodulation:
AM unit %
FM unit Hz
PM unit rad or deg
FORMAT REAL,32 is to be used for binary data transmission.

TRACe:COPY TRACe:COPY TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4 ,

TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4
This command copies data from one trace to another. The second operand designates the source,
the first operand the destination of the data to be copied.
Example: "TRAC:COPY TRACE1,TRACE2"
Features: *RST value:
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
This command is an event and therefore has no query and no *RST value assigned.

1119.5063.12 6.212 E-13

FSIQ TRIGger Subsystem

TRIGger Subsystem
The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize instrument actions with events. This makes it possible
to control and synchronize the start of a sweep. An external trigger signal can be fed to the connector at
the rear panel of the instrument. In split screen mode, a distinction is made between TRIGger1 (screen
A) and TRIGger2 (screen B).

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

TRIGger<1|2>
[:SEQuence]
:SOURce IMMediate | LINE | EXTernal |VIDeo | --
RFPower | AF
:LEVel
[:EXTernal] <numeric_value> V|MV|UV
:VIDeo <numeric_value> PCT
:AF <numeric_value> PCT
:HOLDoff <numeric_value> S
:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative --
:SYNChronize
:ADJust
:FRAMe <numeric_value> s Option FSE-K11
:AUTO ONCE Option FSE-K11
:SLOT <numeric_value> s Option FSE-K11
:AUTO ONCE Option FSE-K11
:SOURCe FRAMe | TSC Option FSE-K11or FSE-K10

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate | LINE | EXTernal | VIDeo | RFPower | AF

This command selects the trigger source for the start of a sweep.
Example: "TRIG:SOUR EXT"
Features: *RST value: IMMediate
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS
The value IMMediate corresponds to the "FREE RUN" setting. Selecting the parameter AF is
possible only in the vector signal analysis mode with analog demodulation.

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] –5.0 to +5.0V

This command sets the level of the external trigger source.
Example: "TRIG:LEV 2V"
Features: *RST value: –5.0V
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 0 to 100PCT
This command sets the level of the video trigger source.
Example: "TRIG:LEV:VID 50PCT"
Features: *RST value: 50 PCT
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

1119.5063.12 6.213 E-13

TRIGger Subsystem FSIQ

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:AF -120 to +120PCT

This command defines the level of the demodulated trigger source.
Example: "TRIG:LEV:AF 50PCT"
Features: *RST value: 0 PCT
SCPI: device specific
Mode: VA-A

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff -100 to 100s

This command defines the length of the trigger delay.
Example: "TRIG:HOLD 500us"
Features: *RST value: 0s
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA
A negative delay time (pretrigger) can be set in the time domain (SPAN < 0 Hz) only. The maximum
permissible range and the maximum effective resolution of the pretrigger are limited by the set
sweep time (max range= - 499/500 x sweep time; max. resolution = sweep time/500). Pretriggering
is not possible when the rms or the average detector is activated.

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative

This command selects the slope of the trigger signal.
Example: "TRIG:SLOP NEG"
Features: *RST value: POSitive
SCPI: conforming
Modes: A, VA, BTS, MS

The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources.

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:FRAMe -100µs to 100s

This command defines the correction value for the time offset between the frame trigger and the
midamble of the slot selected. The value set is corrected by means of the calculated offsets of the
other slots and used as a base value for the correction of all slots.
This correction value is necessary in order to conserve the exact time relation between the trigger
event and the midamble of the slot in question in cases where there is no midamble triggering.
Example: "TRIG:SYNC:ADJ:FRAM 30us"
Features: *RST value: -- (depending on the slot selected)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS
The numeric suffix in TRIGger<1|2> is not significant.

1119.5063.12 6.214 E-13

FSIQ TRIGger Subsystem

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:FRAMe:AUTO ONCE
This command determines once the correction value for the time offset between the frame trigger
and the midamble of the slot selected. The value set is corrected by means of the calculated offsets
of the other slots and used as a base value for the correction of all slots.
This correction value is necessary in order to conserve the exact time relation between the trigger
event and the midamble of the slot in question in cases where there is no midamble triggering.
Example: "TRIG:SYNC:ADJ:FRAMe:AUTO ONCE"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS
The numeric suffix in TRIGger<1|2> is not significant.

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT -100µs to 100s

This command defines the correction value for the time offset between the frame trigger and the
midamble of the slot selected, without influencing the correction values of the other slots.
This correction value is necessary in order to conserve the exact time relation between the trigger
event and the midamble of the slot in question in cases where there is no midamble triggering. The
value set is corrected by means of the calculated offsets of the other slots and used as a base value
for the correction of all slots.
Example: "TRIG:SYNC:ADJ:SLOT 30us"
Features: *RST value: -- (depending on slot selected)
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS
The numeric suffix in TRIGger<1|2> is not significant.

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT:AUTO ONCE
This command defines the correction value for the time offset between the frame trigger and the
midamble of the slot selected. The value set is corrected by means of the calculated offsets of the
other slots and used as a base value for the correction of all slots.
This correction value is necessary in order to conserve the exact time relation between the trigger
event and the midamble of the slot in question in cases where there is no midamble triggering.
Example: "TRIG:SYNC:ADJ:SLOT:AUTO ONCE"
Features: *RST value: --
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS
The numeric suffix in TRIGger<1|2> is not significant.

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:SOURce FRAME | TSC

This command defines the trigger reference point for measurements in the time domain (carrier
power, power vs. time). The frame trigger of the base station or mobile may be selected as well as
the relation to the midamble (TSC) of the slot to be measured.
Example: "TRIG:SYNC:SOURce TSC"
Features: *RST value: FRAME
SCPI: device-specific
Modes: BTS, MS
The numeric suffix in TRIGger<1|2> is not significant.

1119.5063.12 6.215 E-13

UNIT Subsystem FSIQ

UNIT Subsystem
The UNIT subsystem is used to switch the basic unit of setting parameters. In split screen mode, a
distinction is made between UNIT1 (screen A) and UNIT2 (screen B).

COMMAND PARAMETERS UNIT COMMENT

UNIT<1|2>
:POWer DBM | DBPW | WATT |
DBUV | DBMV | VOLT |
DBUA | AMPere
V | W | DB | PCT | UNITLESS |
DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ |
DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M |
DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ
:PROBe <Boolean>

UNIT<1|2>:POWer DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere | V | W | DB | PCT
| UNITLESS | DBUV_MHZ |DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DBUV_M | DBUA_M |
DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ
This command selects the default unit for input and output.
Example: "UNIT:POW DBUV"
Features: *RST value: DBM
SCPI: conforming
Mode: A

UNIT<1|2>:PROBe ON | OFF
This command determines whether the coding of a probe which is connected to the front panel is
taken into consideration (ON) or not (OFF).
Example: "UNIT:PROB OFF"
Features: *RST value: ON
SCPI: device-specific
Mode: A

1119.5063.12 6.216 E-13

FSIQ Alphabetical List of Commands

Alphabetical List of Commands

n the following, all remote-control commands are listed with their parameters and page numbers.
Generally, they are arranged alphabetically according to the keywords of the command.

Command Parameter Page

ABORt 6.7
CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold MIN to MAX 6.15
(depending on current unit)
CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold:STATe ON | OFF 6.15
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:AOFF 6.9
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <numeric_value> 6.12
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y 6.12
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet <numeric_value> 6.12
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.12
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? 6.13
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.12
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:APEak 6.10
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT 6.11
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT 6.10
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK] 6.10
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt 6.10
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT 6.11
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT 6.11
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK] 6.11
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt 6.11
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:MODE ABSolute | RELative 6.9
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.8
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF 6.13
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:STEP[:INCRement] <numeric value> 6.13
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:TRACe 1 to 4 6.9
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:X:RELative? 6.9
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1 to 4>:Y? 6.10
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:X 0 to MAX 6.9
(frequency | sweep time | symbols)
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> MIN to MAX 6.14
(depending on current unit)
CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 6.14
CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’ | 6.18
‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’ |
‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’ | 'XTIM:AM' |
'XTIM:FM' | 'XTIM:PM' |
'XTIM:AMSummary' |
'XTIM:FMSummary' |
'XTIM:PMSummary' ’
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> 0 GHz to fmax 6.16
CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 6.16
CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | 6.19
RIMag | FREQuency | IEYE |
QEYE | TEYE | FEYE | COMP |
CONS

1119.5063.12 6.217 E-13

Alphabetical List of Commands FSIQ

Command Parameter Page

CALCulate<1|2>:FSK:DEViation:REFerence <numeric_value> 6.19
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel 0 to 100 dB, 0 to 100 dB 6.33
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? 6.33
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ACHannel:STATe ON | OFF 6.33
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2> 0 to 100 DB, 0 to 100 DB 6.34
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 6.34
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.32
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:BURSt:POWer? 6.29
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:BURSt:PTEMplate? 6.28
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CLEar[:IMMediate] 6.27
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COMMent <string> 6.27
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>. 6.22
.
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency | TIME 6.22
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:MODE RELative | ABSolute 6.23
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:OFFset <numeric_value> 6.23
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SHIFt <numeric_value> 6.23
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:SPACing LINear < LOGarithmic 6.23
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:CONTrol:UNIT[:TIME] S | SYM 6.23
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:COPY 1 to 8 | <name> 6.27
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:DELete 6.28
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:FAIL? 6.27
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer[:DATA] <numeric_value> 6.25
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MARGin <numeric_value> 6.26
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:MODE RELative | ABSolute 6.26
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:OFFset <numeric_value> 6.26
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SHIFt <numeric_value> 6.26
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 6.26
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF 6.25
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:MARGin 0 to 100DB 6.32
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:NAME 1 to 8 | <string> 6.28
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:MODulation:EXCeptions? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | 6.30
COMBined | DCSRx1800
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:MODulation:FAILs? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | 6.30
COMBined | DCSRx1800
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:MODulation? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | 6.29
COMBined | DCSRx1800
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:SWITching:FAILs? 6.31
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPECtrum:SWITching? 6.31
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPURious:FAILs? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | 6.32
IDLeband
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:SPURious? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | 6.31
IDLeband
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:STATe ON | OFF 6.21
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:TRACe 1 to 4 6.21
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>. 6.24
.
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MARGin <numeric_value> 6.24
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:MODE RELative | ABSolute 6.24
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:OFFset <numeric_value> 6.24

1119.5063.12 6.218 E-13

FSIQ Alphabetical List of Commands

Command Parameter Page

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SHIFt <numeric_value> 6.25
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 6.25
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1 to 8>:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF 6.24
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1..8>:UNIT DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | 6.22
DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere |
DB | DBUV_MHZ | DBMV_MHZ |
DBUA_MHZ |DBUV_M | DBUA_M |
DBUV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ | DEG |
RAD | S | HZ | PCT | UNITLESS
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:AOFF 6.38
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt ON | OFF 6.38
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt:FREQuency? 6.39
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUNt:RESolution 0.1 | 1 | 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 Hz 6.39
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:COUPled[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.39
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AFRequency[:RESult]? 6.47
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS 6.46
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:CARRier[:RESult]? 6.48
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FERRor[:RESult]? 6.47
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS | 6.47
RDEV
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:PM[:RESult]? PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS 6.47
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad:RESult? 6.48
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.48
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:CENTer: ON | OFF 6.58
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:CSTep: ON | OFF 6.58
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? MERM | MEPK | MEPS | PERM 6.49
PEPK | PEPS | EVRM | EVPK |
EVPS IQOF | IQIM |ADR | FERR |
RHO
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff 10ms to 1000s 6.45
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect AM | FM 6.44
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.45
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:MSTep 6.59
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <numeric_value> 6.43
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? 6.43
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? 6.43
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON | OFF 6.43
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? 6.44
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.44
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:CFILter ON | OFF 6.51
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet NADC | TETRA | PDC | PHS | 6.51
CDPD | FWCDMA | RWCDMA |
FW3Gppcdma | RW3Gppcdma |
M2CDma | D2CDma | F8CDma |
R8CDma | F19Cdma | R19Cdma |
NONE
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth 6.50
| OBWidth | CN | CN0
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect? ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth 6.49
| OBWidth | CN | CN0
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF 6.50
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:REFerence: ON | OFF 6.59

1119.5063.12 6.219 E-13

Alphabetical List of Commands FSIQ

Command Parameter Page

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/3dB) | (60dB/6dB) 6.45
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQuency? 6.46
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult? 6.46
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON | OFF 6.45
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STARt 6.59
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STOP 6.59
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.46
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF 6.58
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON | OFF 6.58
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:AVERage:RES? 6.52
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult? 6.52
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:RESult? 6.52
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.52
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? 6.57
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult? 6.57
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? 6.57
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.57
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult? 6.55
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult? 6.55
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:RESult? 6.55
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.55
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:AVERage:RESult? 6.54
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult? 6.54
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:RESult? 6.54
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.54
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON | OFF 6.58
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult? 6.53
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult? 6.53
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? 6.53
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.53
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult? 6.56
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult? 6.56
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? 6.56
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.56
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:STATe ON | OFF 6.51
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:FUNCtion:ZOOM <numeric_value> 6.44
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:LOEXclude ON | OFF 6.39
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:APEak 6.40
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:LEFT 6.40
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:NEXT 6.40
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum[:PEAK] 6.40
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MAXimum:RIGHt 6.40
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:LEFT 6.41
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:NEXT 6.41
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum[:PEAK] 6.41
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:MINimum:RIGHt 6.41
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:PEXCursion <numeric_value> 6.42

1119.5063.12 6.220 E-13

FSIQ Alphabetical List of Commands

Command Parameter Page

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:READout MPHase | RIMaginary 6.42
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.37
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF 6.42
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:STEP[:INCRement] <numeric_value> 6.42
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:TRACe 1 to 4 6.38
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X 0 to MAX 6.38
(frequency | sweep time | symbols)
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.38
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1 to 4>:Y? 6.39
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1 to 4>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <expr> 6.60
CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1 to 4>:STATe ON | OFF 6.60
CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe MIN to MAX 6.16
(depending on current unit)
CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF 6.16
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold MIN to MAX 6.15
(depending on current unit)
CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold:STATe ON | OFF 6.15
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> 0 to 1000s 6.17
CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 6.17
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:ANGLe DEG | RAD 6.61
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBM | V | W | DB | PCT | 6.61
UNITLESS | DBPW | WATT |
DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA |
AMPere | DBUV_MHZ |
DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ |
DBUV_M | DBUA_M |
DBUV_MMHZ | DBUA_MMHZ
CALCulate<1|2>:X:UNIT:TIME S | SYM 6.61
CALibration[:ALL] 6.62
CALibration:BANDwidth| BWIDth[:RESolution]? 6.62
CALibration:IQ? 6.62
CALibration:LDETector? 6.63
CALibration:LOSuppression? 6.63
CALibration:PPEak? 6.63
CALibration:SHORt? 6.63
CALibration:STATe ON | OFF 6.63
CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror:COUNt 1 to 1000 6.71
CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror[:IMMediate] 6.71
CONFigure:BURSt:POWer:CONDition NORMal | EXTReme 6.72
CONFigure:BURSt:POWer:COUNt 1 to 1000 6.72
CONFigure:BURSt:POWer[:IMMediate] 6.72
CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:COUNt 1 to 1000 6.73
CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate[:IMMediate] 6.72
CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect FULL | TOP | RISing | FALLing 6.73
CONFigure:BURSt:REFerence:AUTO ON | OFF 6.73
CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:COUNt 1 to 1000 6.80
CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation[:IMMediate] 6.80
CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | 6.81
COMBined | DCSRx1800
CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:TGATe ON | OFF 6.81

1119.5063.12 6.221 E-13

Alphabetical List of Commands FSIQ

Command Parameter Page

CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching[:IMMediate] 6.81
CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching:COUNt 1 to 1000 6.81
CONFigure:SPURious:ANTenna CONDucted | RADiated 6.83
CONFigure:SPURious:COUNt 1 to 1000 6.82
CONFigure:SPURious:COUNt:RXBand 1 to 1000 6.82
CONFigure:SPURious[:IMMediate] 6.82
CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand | 6.83
IDLeband | COMBined
CONFigure:SPURious:STEP ON | OFF 6.83
CONFigure:SPURious:STEP:COUNt? 6.83
CONFigure[:BTS]:ARFCn 1 to 124 (P-GSM phase I/II) 6.65
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (R-GSM)
512 to 885 (DCS1800 phase I/II/II+)
512 to 810 (PCS1900)
CONFigure[:BTS]:ARFCn:AUTO ONCE 6.65
CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SFH ON | OFF 6.68
CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SLOT 0 to 7 6.68
CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SLOT:AUTO ONCE 6.68
CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:TSC 0 to 7 6.69
CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:TSC:AUTO ON | OFF 6.69
CONFigure[:BTS]:COSiting ON | OFF 6.69
CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:FREQuency <numeric_value> 6.66
CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:PPEak <numeric_value> 6.65
CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:PRMS <numeric_value> 6.66
CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF 6.66
CONFigure[:BTS]:MEASurement? 6.65
CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork:PHASe 1 | 2 [,PLUS] 6.69
CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork[:TYPE] PGSM |PGSM900 | EGSM 6.69
|EGSM900 | DCS |GSM1800 | PCS
| GSM1900 | RGSM | RGSM900
CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:CLASs 1 to 8 | 1 to 4 | M1 | M2 | M3 6.66
CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:COUPled ON | OFF 6.67
CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:DYNamic 0 to 15 6.67
CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:EXPected <numeric_value> 6.67
CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:LIMit <numeric_value> 6.67
CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:SINGle:CLEar 6.68
CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:SINGle[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.68
CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:STATic 0 to 6 6.67
CONFigure[:BTS]:PRESet 6.70
CONFigure[:BTS]:SWEeptime STANdard | AUTO 6.70
CONFigure[:BTS]:TXSupp ON | OFF 6.70
CONFigure[:MS]:ARFCn 1 to 124 (P-GSM phase I/II) 6.75
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (R-GSM)
512 to 885 (DCS1800 phase I/II/II+)
512 to 810 (PCS1900)
CONFigure[:MS]:ARFCn:AUTO ONCE 6.75
CONFigure[:MS]:CHANnel:SFH ON | OFF 6.78
CONFigure[:MS]:CHANnel:TSC 0 to 7 6.78
CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:FREQuency <numeric_value> 6.76

1119.5063.12 6.222 E-13

FSIQ Alphabetical List of Commands

Command Parameter Page

CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:PPEak <numeric_value> 6.75
CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:PRMS <numeric_value> 6.75
CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF 6.76
CONFigure[:MS]:MEASurement? 6.74
CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork:PHASe 1 | 2 [,PLUS] 6.78
CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork[:TYPE] PGSM |PGSM900 | EGSM 6.78
|EGSM900 | DCS |GSM1800 | PCS
| GSM1900 | RGSM | RGSM900
CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:CLASs 1 to 8 | 1 to 4 | M1 | M2 | M3 6.76
CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:COUPled ON | OFF 6.76
CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:EXPected <numeric_value> 6.77
CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:LEVel 0 to 31 6.77
CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:LIMit <numeric_value> 6.77
CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SINGle:CLEar 6.77
CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SINGle[:STATe ON | OFF 6.77
CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SMALl ON | OFF 6.78
CONFigure[:MS]:PRESet 6.79
CONFigure[:MS]:SWEeptime STANdard | AUTO 6.79
CONFigure[:MS]:TXSupp ON | OFF 6.79
DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation<1|2|3>? 6.85
DIAGnostic:SERVice:FUNCtion numeric_value>,<numeric_value>... 6.84
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] CALibration | RF 6.84
DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce ON | OFF 6.84
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF 6.87
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:DEFault 6.88
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:HSL 0.0 to 100.0 (tint), 6.88
0.0 to 100.0 (saturation),
0.0 to 100.0 (brightness)
DISPlay:CMAP<1 to 13>:PDEFined BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | 6.88
CYAN | RED | MAGenta | YELLow
|WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe
| LGREen | LCYan | LRED |
LMAGenta
DISPlay:FORmat SINGle | SPLit 6.87
DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF 6.87
DISPlay:PROGram[:MODE] ON | OFF 6.87
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff 6.95
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.95
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:MINFo ON | OFF 6.89
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA] <string> 6.89
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF 6.89
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME ON | OFF 6.89
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:EYE:COUNt 1 to Result Length 6.95
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | 6.93
MAXHold | MINHold
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:ANALog ON | OFF 6.94
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:CWRite ON | OFF 6.93
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:MODE:HCONtinuous ON | OFF 6.94
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.94
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:SYMBol DOTS | BARS | OFF 6.94

1119.5063.12 6.223 E-13

Alphabetical List of Commands FSIQ

Command Parameter Page

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:RVALue <numeric_value> 6.89
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON | OFF 6.90
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:CENTer <numeric_value> 6.90
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STARt <numeric_value> 6.90
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STOP <numeric_value> 6.90
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:X:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic 6.91
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe] 10dB to 200dB 6.91
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute | RELative 6.91
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <numeric_value> 6.93
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel -200dBm to 200dBm 6.91
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet -200dB to 200dB 6.92
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0 to 100 PCT 6.93
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <numeric_value> 6.92
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO ON | OFF 6.92
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1 to 4>:Y:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic | PERCent 6.93
FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:AVERage? 6.99
FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:MAXimum? 6.99
FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:STATus? 6.98
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:AVERage? 6.98
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:MAXimum? 6.98
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:STATus? 6.97
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:AVERage? 6.97
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:MAXimum? 6.97
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:STATus? 6.96
FETCh:BURSt:POWer:ALL? 6.100
FETCh:BURSt:POWer[:IMMediate]? 6.99
FETCh:PTEMplate:REFerence? TXBand 6.106
FETCh:SPECtrum:MODulation[:ALL]? ARFCn | TXBand | RXBand | 6.101
COMBined | DCSRx1800
FETCh:SPECtrum:MODulation:REFerence? TXBand 6.102
FETCh:SPECtrum:SWITching[:ALL]? 6.103
FETCh:SPECtrum:SWITching:REFerence? TXBand 6.103
FETCh:SPURious[:ALL]? TXBand OTXBand | RXBand | 6.104
IDLeband
FETCh:SPURious:STEP? 6.105
FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | REAL | UINT [,32] 6.107
FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.108
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMa 6.108
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.108
HCOPy:ABORt 6.109
HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> 'MMEM’ | ‘SYST:COMM:PRIN’ | 6.110
‘SYST:COMM:CLIP’
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF 6.110
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:ALL 6.111
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:FFEed<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 6.111
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:LABel:TEXT <string> 6.111
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:PFEed<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 6.112
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe ON | OFF 6.112

1119.5063.12 6.224 E-13

FSIQ Alphabetical List of Commands

Command Parameter Page

HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT <string> 6.112
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:CAINcrement ON | OFF 6.113
HCOPy:DEVice:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF 6.112
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage<1|2> WMF | EWMF | GDI | BMP 6.110
HCOPy[:IMMediate] 6.111
HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL 6.113
HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant<1 to 4> 6.113
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> LANDscape | PORTrait 6.113
INITiate<1|2>:CONMeas 6.114
INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON | OFF 6.114
INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay ON | OFF 6.114
INITiate<1|2>[:IMMediate] 6.114
INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation 0 to 70dB 6.115
INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF 6.115
INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal | LNOise | LDIStorsion 6.115
INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:STEPsize 1dB | 10dB 6.116
INPut<1|2>:IMPedance 50 | 75 6.116
INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORRection RAM | RAZ 6.117
INPut<1|2>:MIXer -10 to -100 dBm 6.117
INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 6.116
INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] 6.116
INSTrument<1|2>:NSELect 1to 5 6.118
INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] SANalyzer | DDEMod | ADEMod | 6.118
BGSM | MGSM
MMEMory:CATalog? <string> 6.121
MMEMory:CDIRectory directory name 6.121
MMEMory:CLear:ALL 6.126
MMEMory:CLear:STATe 1,path 6.126
MMEMory:COMMent <string> 6.130
MMEMory:COPY path, file name 6.122
MMEMory:DATA <file name>,<block data> 6.122
MMEMory:DELete path, file name 6.122
MMEMory:INITialize ’A:’ 6.123
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,path 6.123
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe path, file name 6.123
MMEMory:MDIRectory path 6.124
MMEMory:MOVE path, file name 6.124
MMEMory:MSIS ’A:’ | ’C:’ 6.124
MMEMory:NAME path, file name 6.125
MMEMory:RDIRectory directory name 6.125
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL 6.130
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON | OFF 6.128
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL[:ACTive] ON | OFF 6.129
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL:ALL ON | OFF 6.129
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault 6.130
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup ON | OFF 6.127
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy ON | OFF 6.128
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON | OFF 6.127

1119.5063.12 6.225 E-13

Alphabetical List of Commands FSIQ

Command Parameter Page

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON | OFF 6.127
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON | OFF 6.128
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON | OFF 6.128
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE 6.130
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData ON | OFF 6.128
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1 to 4> ON | OFF 6.127
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer[:ACTive] ON | OFF 6.129
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ON | OFF 6.129
MMEMory:STORe:STATe path, file name 6.125
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 1 to 4, path 6.126
OUTPut:AF:SENSitivity 0.1 PCT to 100 PCT for AM 6.132
0.1 KHZ to 100 KHZ for FM
0.0 1RAD to 10 RAD for PM
OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.131
OUTPut:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF 6.131
OUTPut:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] #B00000000 to #B11111111 6.131
READ:BURSt:FERRor:AVERage? 6.136
READ:BURSt:FERRor:MAXimum? 6.136
READ:BURSt:FERRor:STATus? 6.135
READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:AVERage? 6.135
READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:MAXimum? 6.135
READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:STATus? 6.134
READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:AVERage? 6.134
READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:MAXimum? 6.134
READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:STATus? 6.133
READ:BURSt:POWer:DYNamic? 6.139
READ:BURSt:POWer:POWer:LEVel? 6.140
READ:BURSt:POWer:STATic? 6.138
READ:BURSt:POWer? 6.137
READ:BURSt:REFerence[:IMMediate?] 6.140
READ:SPECtrum:MODulation[:ALL]? 6.141
READ:SPECtrum:SWITching[:ALL]? 6.142
READ:SPURious[:ALL]? 6.143
READ:SPURious:STEP? 6.144
[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:AF:COUPling AC | DC 6.145
[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:RTIMe ON | OFF 6.146
[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse 6.146
[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SQUelch:LEVel 30 to -150 dBm 6.146
[SENSe<1|2>:]ADEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.145
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:AUTO ON | OFF 6.147
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:COUNt 0 to 256 6.147
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.147
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:TYPE MAXimum | SCALar 6.148
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:DEMod 5 kHz to 200 kHz (Real Time on) 6.151
5 kHz to 5 MHz (Real Time off)
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:PLL AUTO | HIGH | MEDium | LOW 6.151
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] 1Hz to 10MHz 6.149
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF 6.150

1119.5063.12 6.226 E-13

FSIQ Alphabetical List of Commands

Command Parameter Page

[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE ANALog | DIGital 6.150
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE:FFT ON | OFF 6.150
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.0001 to 1 6.150
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo 1Hz to 10MHz 6.151
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON | OFF 6.151
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:EXTernal[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.151
[SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio 0.001 to 1000 | SINe | PULSe | 6.151
NOISe
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough | OPEN 6.153
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J] 6.160
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS <numeric_value> 6.160
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:CATalog? 6.159
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar 6.161
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent <string> 6.161
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:DATA <freq>,<level>.. 6.161
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer <string> 6.159
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs 2|3 6.160
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:SELect <file_name> 6.159
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber <string> 6.159
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD 6.160
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:LOSS:INPut[:MAGNitude] <value of ext. attenuation in dB> 6.158
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission | REFLexion 6.153
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RECall 6.153
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RXGain:INPut[:MAGNitude] <value of the amplification in dB> 6.158
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.153
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive? 6.154
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:CATalog? 6.154
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent <string> 6.155
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA <freq>,<level>.. 6.155
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete 6.156
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing LINear | LOGarithmic 6.155
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <name> 6.154
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.155
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT <string> 6.154
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:ACTive? 6.156
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:BREak ON | OFF 6.157
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:CATalog? 6.156
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent <string> 6.157
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:DELete 6.158
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<1 to 10> <freq>,<freq>,<name>.. 6.157
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <name> 6.156
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT <string> 6.157
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.158
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa 0.2 to 1 6.166
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:MEASurement OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine | 6.166
GAUSsian | B22 | B25 | B44 | QFM
| FM95 | QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95
| QRR | RR95 | A25Fm | EMES |
EREF

1119.5063.12 6.227 E-13

Alphabetical List of Commands FSIQ

Command Parameter Page

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian | 6.166
B22 | B25 | B44 | QFM | FM95 |
QFR | FR95 | QRM | RM95 | QRR |
RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FORMat QPSK | PSK | MSK | QAM | FSK 6.164
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FSK:NSTate 2|4 6.165
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:MSK:FORMat TYPE1 | TYPE2 | NORMal | 6.165
DIFFerential
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:NORMalize ON | OFF 6.167
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRATe 1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16 6.166
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet GSM | EDGe | NADC | TETRa | 6.170
PHS | PDCup | PDCDown |
APCO25CQPSK | APCO25C4FM |
CDPD | DECT | CT2 | ERMes |
MODacom | PWT | TFTS | F16 |
F322 | F324 | F64 F64 | FQCDma |
F95Cdma | RQCDma | R95Cdma |
FNADc | RNADc | FWCDma |
FCDMa4096 | RWCDma |
RCDMa4096 | FW3Gppcdma |
RW3Gppcdma | CDMA2000
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8 6.164
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PSK:NSTate 2|8 6.164
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:QAM:NSTate 16 6.165
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | 6.164
DPI4
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SBANd NORMal | INVerse 6.164
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:PULSe:STATe ON | OFF 6.167
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:CATalog? 6.167
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent <string> 6.168
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA <string> 6.168
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete <string> 6.169
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MONLy ON | OFF 6.169
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME <string> 6.168
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:OFFSet <numeric_value> 6.167
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern <string> 6.168
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect <string> 6.167
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe ON | OFF 6.168
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:TIME 100 to 1600 6.169
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SRATe 160 Hz to 7 MHz 6.165
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:TIME 1 to Frame Length 6.165
[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>[:FUNCtion] APEak |NEGative | POSitive | 6.162
SAMPle | RMS | AVERage
[SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1 to 4>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO ON | OFF 6.162
[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:CCITt[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.172
[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.172
[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:LINK DISPlay | AUDio 6.173
[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.173
[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:DEMPhasis:TCONstant <numeric_value> 6.173
[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:HPASs:FREQuency 30 Hz | 300 HZ 6.171
[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:HPASS[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.171
[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:LPASs:FREQuency 3 kHz | 15 kHz (real time on) 6.172
5PCT|10PCT|25PCT (real time off)

1119.5063.12 6.228 E-13

FSIQ Alphabetical List of Commands

Command Parameter Page

[SENSe<1|2>:]FILTer:LPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.172
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer 0 GHz to fmax 6.174
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STARt | STOP | SPAN 6.174
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 0 to fmax 6.175
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN | RBW | OFF 6.175
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 1 to 100 PCT 6.175
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:MODE CW|FIXed | SWEep 6.177
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:OFFSet <numeric_value> 6.177
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN 0 GHz to fmax 6.175
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL 6.176
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK CENTer | STOP | SPAN 6.176
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt 0 GHz to fmax 6.176
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK CENTer | STOP | SPAN 6.176
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP 0 GHz to fmax 6.176
[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK CENTer | STARt | SPAN 6.177
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS <numeric_value> 6.181
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS:LIMit[:MAX] <numeric_value> 6.181
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS:LIMit:MIN <numeric_value> 6.181
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BLOCk ON | OFF 6.178
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic 2..X; X: depending on the LO 6.179
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND A |Q | U | V | E | W | F | D | G | Y | J 6.180
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD | EVEN | EODD 6.180
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH <numeric_value> 6.180
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] <numeric_value> 6.180
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS:TABLE <file_name> 6.181
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:PORTs 2|3 6.179
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:SIGNal ON | OFF | AUTO 6.179
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.178
[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:THReshold 0.1 to 100 dB 6.179
[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:AHOLd[:STATe] ON | OFF 6.182
[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:MODE ABSolute | RELative 6.182
[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:MTIMe 0.1 s | 1 s 6.183
[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:REFerence <numeric_value> 6.182
[SENSe<1|2>:]MSUMmary:RUNit PCT | DB 6.182
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs 1 to 3 6.185
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel 0 to 1000MHz 6.185
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<1|2> 0 to 1000MHz 6.186
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] 0 to 1000 MHz 6.185
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute | RELative 6.186
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ACPower | CPOWer | OBANdwidth 6.186
| OBWidth | CN | CN0
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE 6.186
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 0 to 1000 MHz 6.184
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<1|2> 0 to 1000 MHz 6.185
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] 0 to 1000 MHz 6.184
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth 0 to 100 PCT 6.186
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 1 MHz to 16 MHz 6.187
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe 0 to 4095 6.187

1119.5063.12 6.229 E-13

Alphabetical List of Commands FSIQ

Command Parameter Page

[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator[:INTernal]:TUNe:SAVe 6.187
[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal 6.187
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt 0 to 32767 6.189
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe ON | OFF 6.189
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff 0 to 100s 6.190
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 0 to 100s 6.190
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel -5V to +5V 6.189
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity POSitive | NEGative 6.190
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal | RFPower 6.190
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE LEVel | EDGE 6.189
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP ON | OFF 6.190
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:LENGth 0 to 100s 6.191
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:PRETrigger 0 to 100s 6.191
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:TRGTogap 0 to 100s 6.191
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME <numeric_value> 6.188
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON | OFF 6.188
[SENSe<1|2>:]TCAPture:LENGth 1024 | 2048 | 4096 | 8192 | 16384 6.170
SOURce:AM:STATe ON | OFF 6.192
SOURce:DM:STATe ON | OFF 6.192
SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet -200 MHz to 200 MHz 6.193
SOURce:POWer:ALC:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal 6.193
SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] 20dBm to 0dBm / Option 6.193
FSE-B12: -90dBm to 0dBm
SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet -200 dB to +200 dB 6.193
STATus:OPERation:CONDition? 6.195
STATus:OPERation:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.195
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? 6.195
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.196
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.196
STATus:PRESet 6.196
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? 6.201
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.202
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]? 6.201
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.202
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.202
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? 6.196
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.197
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? 6.196
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.197
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.197
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? 6.202
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.203
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? 6.202
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.203
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.203
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:CONDition? 6.198
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.199

1119.5063.12 6.230 E-13

FSIQ Alphabetical List of Commands

Command Parameter Page

STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit[:EVENt]? 6.198
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.199
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.199
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? 6.199
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.200
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]? 6.199
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.200
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.200
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? 6.197
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.198
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? 6.197
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.198
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.198
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition? 6.200
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.201
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]? 6.200
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.201
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.201
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition? 6.203
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:ENABle 0 to 65535 6.204
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:NTRansition 0 to 65535 6.204
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:PTRansition 0 to 65535 6.204
STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer[:EVENt]? 6.203
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]? 6.204
SYSTem:BINFo? 6.210
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice<1|2>:ADDRess 0 to 30 6.206
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0 to 30 6.205
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator LFEOI | EOI 6.206
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:ENUMerate:FIRSt? 6.208
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:ENUMerate:NEXT? 6.208
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter<1|2>:SELect <printer_name> 6.208
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:DTR IBFull | OFF 6.206
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:RTS IBFull | OFF 6.206
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:BAUD <numeric_value> 6.206
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:BITS 7|8 6.207
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PACE XON | NONE 6.207
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] EVEN | ODD | NONE 6.207
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:SBITs 1|2 6.207
SYSTem:DATE 1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31 6.208
SYSTem:ERRor? 6.209
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] ’password’ 6.209
SYSTem:PRESet 6.209
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible FSE | OFF 6.209
SYSTem:SET <block> 6.210
SYSTem:SPEaker<1|2>:VOLume 0 to 1 6.210
SYSTem:TIME 0 to 23, 0 to 59, 0 to 59 6.210
SYSTem:UPDate ON | OFF 6.209
SYSTem:VERSion? 6.210

1119.5063.12 6.231 E-13

Alphabetical List of Commands FSIQ

Command Parameter Page

SYSTem:VERSion? 6.210
TRACe:COPY TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | 6.212
TRACE4 ,TRACE1 | TRACE2 |
TRACE3 | TRACE4
TRACe[:DATA] TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | 6.211
TRACE4, <block> |
<numeric_value>
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff -100 to 100 s 6.214
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:AF -120 to +120PCT 6.214
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] –5.0 V to +5.0 V 6.213
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo 0 to 100 PCT 6.213
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative 6.214
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate | LINE | EXTernal | 6.213
VIDeo | RFPower | AF
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:FRAMe -100µs to 100 s 6.214
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:FRAMe:AUTO ONCE 6.215
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT -100µs to 100 s 6.215
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT:AUTO ONCE 6.215
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:SOURce FRAMe | TSC 6.215
UNIT<1|2>:POWer DBM | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | 6.216
DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMP | DB |
PCT | UNITLESS | DBUV_MHZ |
DBMV_MHZ | DBUA_MHZ |
DBUV_M | DBIA_M | DBUV_MMHZ
| DBUA_MMHZ
UNIT<1|2>:PROBe ON | OFF 6.216

1119.5063.12 6.232 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Signal Analysis

Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment

Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis Mode

FREQUENCY Key Group

START

START [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt <num_value>

MANUAL

CENTER [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK CENTer

FIXED

SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK SPAN

FIXED

STOP [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt:LINK STOP

FIXED

START AT [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STARt:FLINe[:STATe] ON | OFF

FREQ LINE

FREQ AXIS [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG

LIN LOG

STOP

STOP [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP <num_value>

MANUAL

START [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK STARt

FIXED

CENTER [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK CENTer

FIXED

SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK SPAN

FIXED

SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP:LINK SPAN

FIXED

STOP AT [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:STOP:FLINe[:STATe] ON | OFF

FREQ LINE

FREQ AXIS [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG

LIN LOG

CENTER

CENTER [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer <num_value>

MANUAL

START [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STARt

FIXED

SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK SPAN

FIXED

1119.5063.12 6.233 E-13

Command Assignment: Signal Analysis FSIQ

STOP [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:LINK STOP

FIXED

FREQUENCY [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:OFFSet <num_value>

OFFSET

FREQ AXIS [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG

LIN LOG

STEP

AUTO [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN;

0.1 * SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 10PCT
or
AUTO [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW;
0.1 * RBW [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 10PCT

AUTO [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN;

0.5 * SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 50PCT
or
AUTO [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW;
0.5 * RBW [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor 50PCT

AUTO [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK SPAN;

X * SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor <num_value>
or
AUTO [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK RBW;
X * RBW [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor <num_value>

STEPSIZE [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <num_value>

MANUAL

STEPSIZE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

= CENTER

SPAN

SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN <num_value>

MANUAL

START [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK START

FIXED

CENTER [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK CENTer

FIXED

STOP [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:LINK STOP

FIXED

ZERO [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN 0HZ or

SPAN [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed

FULL [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
SPAN

LAST no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

SPAN

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM ON| OFF

ZOOM

MOVE ZOOM DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:CENTer

WINDOW <num_value>

1119.5063.12 6.234 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Signal Analysis

MOVE ZOOM DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STARt

START <num_value>

MOVE ZOOM DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM[:FREQuency]:STOP

STOP <num_value>

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:X[:SCALe]:ZOOM OFF
ZOOM OFF

FREQ AXIS [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:SPACing LIN | LOG

LIN LOG

LEVEL Key Group

REF

REF DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <num_value>

LEVEL

REF LEVEL DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <num_value>

OFFSET

GRID DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE ABSolute|RELative

ABS/REL

--
UNIT

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBM
dBm

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBMV
dBmV

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBUV
dBµV

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBUA
dBµA

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBPW
dBpW

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBUV_MHZ
dB*/MHz
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBUA_MHZ
CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBMV_MHZ

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer VOLT
VOLT

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer AMPere
AMPERE

CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer WATT
WATT

PROBE CODE UNIT<1|2>:PROBe ON | OFF

ON / OFF

ATTEN STEP INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:STEPsize 1|10 (nur mit Option FSE-B13)

MANUAL

RF ATTEN INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation <num_value>

MANUAL

1119.5063.12 6.235 E-13

Command Assignment: Signal Analysis FSIQ

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal;

NORMAL INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LNOise;

LOW NOISE INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LDIStortion;

LOW DIST INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

MIXER INPut<1|2>:MIXer <num_value>

LEVEL

MAX LEVEL DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO ON

AUTO

MAX LEVEL DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue:AUTO OFF;

MANUAL DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <num_value>

RANGE

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y:SPACing PERCent
LINEAR/%

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y:SPACing LINear
LINEAR/dB

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y:SPACing LOGarithmic;
LOG MANUAL
DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe] <num_value>

INPUT Key

INPUT

RF ATTEN INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation <num_value>

MANUAL

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal;

NORMAL INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LNOise;

LOW NOISE INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LDIStortion;

LOW DIST INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

MIXER INPut<1|2>:MIXer <num_value>

LEVEL

INPUT --
SELECT

RF INPUT INPut<1|2>:IMPedance 50
50 OHM

RF INPUT INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORRection RAM

75 OHM/RAM

RF INPUT INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORRection RAZ

75OHM/RAZ

1119.5063.12 6.236 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Signal Analysis

MARKER Key Group

NORMAL

MARKER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>[:STATe] ON | OFF;

1..4 CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X <num_value>;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:Y?

SIGNAL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:COUNt ON | OFF;

COUNT CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:COUNt:FREQuency?

MARKER
DEMOD

MKR DEMOD CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON/OFF

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect AM
AM

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect FM
FM

MKR STOP CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..4>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff <num_value>

TIME

SYSTem:SPEaker<1|2>:VOLume <num_value>
VOLUME

MARKER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ZOOM <num_value>

ZOOM

MARKER DISPlay:WINDow<1|2>:MINFo ON | OFF (indication)

INFO

ALL MARKER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:AOFF

OFF

POWER MEAS --
SETTINGS

SET NO OF [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <num_value>

ADJ CHAN’S

ACP CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet NADC| TETRA| PDC|

STANDARD PHS| CDPD| FWCDma | RWCDma| F8CDma| R8CDma| F19Cdma| R19Cdma |
FW3Gppcdma | RW3Gppcdma | M2CDma | D2CDma | NONE

CH FILTER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:CFILter ON | OFF

ON/OFF

CHANNEL [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel] <num_value>

BANDWIDTH [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ACHannel <num_value>
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth:ALTernate<1|2> <num_value>

CHANNEL [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:UPPer] <num_value>

SPACING [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel <num_value>
[SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<1|2> <num_value>

EDIT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel <num_value>,<num_value>

ACP LIMITS CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2> <num_val>,<num_val>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF

LIMIT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit:ACPower[:STATe] ON | OFF

CHECK CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:ACPower:ALTernate<1|2>:RESult?

% POWER [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer: BANDwidth|BWIDth <num_value>

BANDWIDTH

1119.5063.12 6.237 E-13

Command Assignment: Signal Analysis FSIQ

CHANNEL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect CPOWer;

POWER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CPOWer;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF

CP/ACP [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ABSolute|RELative

ABS/REL

SET CP [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE

REFERENCE

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect CN;
C/N
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CN;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect CN0;
C/No
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CN0;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF

ADJACENT CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower;

CHAN POWER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF

ADJUST CP [SENSe<1|2>:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet
SETTINGS ACPower|CPOWer|OBANdwidth|OBWidth|CN|CN0

OCCUPIED CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect OBANdwidth | OBWidth

PWR BANDW CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? OBANdwidth| OBWidth
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] OFF

COUNTER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:COUNt:RESolution <num_value>

RESOL

SIGNAL CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] ON | OFF

TRACK

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] ON | OFF;
NOISE
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult?

STEP

STEPSIZE CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO

STEPSIZE CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:STEP[:INCRement] <num_value>

MANUAL

MKR TO CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:MSTep
STEPSIZE

DELTA TO --
STEPSIZE

1119.5063.12 6.238 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Signal Analysis

DELTA

DELTA CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>[:STATe] ON | OFF

1...4 CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:X <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:X:RELative?
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:Y?

PHASE CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] ON | OFF

NOISE CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult?

REFERENCE --
POINT

REF POINT CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y <num_value>

LEVEL

REF POINT CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y:OFFSet

LVL OFFSET <num_value>

REF POINT CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <num_value>

FREQUENCY

REF POINT CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1..4>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <num_value>

TIME

REFERENCE CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] ON | OFF

FIXED

DELTA MKR CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MODE ABSolute | RELative

ABS REL

ALL DELTA CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:AOFF

OFF

STEP

STEPSIZE CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO

MANUAL CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:STEP[:INCRement] <num_value>

STEPSIZE

DELTA TO --
STEPSIZE

SEARCH

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]

NEXT CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:NEXT
PEAK CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum:NEXT

NEXT PEAK CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:RIGHt

RIGHT CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum:RIGHt

NEXT PEAK CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum:LEFT

LEFT CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum:LEFT

SUM MKR CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON/OFF

1119.5063.12 6.239 E-13

Command Assignment: Signal Analysis FSIQ

SUMMARY
MARKER

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON | OFF
RMS
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ON | OFF
MEAN
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?

PEAK HOLD CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON | OFF

ON/OFF

AVERAGE CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON | OFF

ON/OFF

SWEEP [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>

COUNT

ALL SUM MKR CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF

OFF

SEARCH LIM CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON/OFF

SELECT no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

MARKER

ACTIVE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

MKR/DELTA

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum[:PEAK]
MIN
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum[:PEAK]

NEXT CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum:NEXT
MIN CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum:NEXT

NEXT MIN CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum:LEFT

LEFT CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum:LEFT

NEXT MIN CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MINimum:RIGHt

RIGHT CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MINimum:RIGHt

EXCLUDE LO CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:LOEXclude ON | OFF

ON/OFF

PEAK CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:PEXCursion <num_value>

EXCURSION

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <num_value>
N dB DOWN
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?

SHAPE FACT CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/3dB)

60/3 dB CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQuency?

SHAPE FACT CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor (60dB/6dB)

60/6 dB CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SFACtor:FREQuency?

1119.5063.12 6.240 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Signal Analysis

MKR->

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:MAXimum[:PEAK]

MKR-> CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:CENTer
CENTER

MKR-> CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:REFerence
REF LEVEL

MKR-> CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:CSTep
CF STEPSIZE

MKR-> CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:STARt
START

MKR-> CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:STOP
STOP

MKR-> CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:TRACe <num_value>

TRACE CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...4>:TRACe <num_value>

LINES Key Group

D LINES

DISPLAY CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;

LINE 1/2 CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> <num_value>

THRESHOLD CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold ON | OFF;

LINE CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold <num_value>

REFERENCE CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF;

LINE CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe <num_value>

FREQUENCY CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;

LINE 1/2 CALCulate<1|2>:FLINe<1|2> <num_value>
or
TIME CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;
LINE 1/2 CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> <num_value>

BASELINE CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold:STATe ON | OFF

CLIPPING CALCulate<1|2>:CTHReshold <num_value>

LIMITS

SELECT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:NAME <string>;

LIMIT LINE CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:STATe ON | OFF

NEW s. EDIT LIMIT LINE

LIMIT LINE

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:NAME <string>
NAME

VALUES
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

1119.5063.12 6.241 E-13

Command Assignment: Signal Analysis FSIQ

INSERT no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

VALUE

DELETE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

VALUE

SHIFT X CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SHIFt <num_value>

LIMIT LINE

SHIFT Y CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:SHIFt <num_value>

LIMIT LINE CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:SHIFt <num_value>

SAVE automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation

LIMIT LINE

EDIT LIMIT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UNIT DBM| DBPW| WATT| DBUV| VOLT|DBUA|

LINE AMPere| DB| DBUV_MHZ| DBUA_MHZ| UNITLESS
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:COMMent ’string’
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:TRACe <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol[:DATA] <num_value>, <num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency|TIME
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:OFFset <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:MODE RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer[:DATA] <num_value>, <num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:OFFset <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MARGin <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MODE RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer[:DATA] <num_value>,<num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:OFFset <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MARGin <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MODE RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:FAIL?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CLEar[:IMMediate]

COPY CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:COPY 1...8 | <name>

LIMIT LINE

DELETE CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:DELete
LIMIT LINE

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:OFFset <num_value>
X OFFSET

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:OFFset <num_value>
Y OFFSET
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:OFFset <num_value>

TRACE Key Group

TRACE 1

CLEAR/ DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE WRITe

WRITE

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE VIEW
VIEW

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>[:STATe] OFF
BLANK

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE AVERage or
AVERAGE
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:MODE SCALe

1119.5063.12 6.242 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Signal Analysis

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE MAXHold or
MAX HOLD
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:MODE MAX

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE MINHold or
MIN HOLD
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:MODE MIN

HOLD CONT DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE:HCONtinuous ON | OFF

ON/OFF

SWEEP [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>

COUNT

--
DETECTOR

AUTO [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO ON | OFF

SELECT

DETECTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4>[:FUNCtion] APEak

AUTOPEAK

DETECTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4>[:FUNCtion] POSitive

MAX PEAK

DETECTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4>[:FUNCtion] NEGative

MIN PEAK

DETECTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4>[:FUNCtion] SAMPle

SAMPLE

DETECTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4>[:FUNCtion] RMS

RMS

DETECTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]DETector<1...4>[:FUNCtion] AVERage

AVERAGE

TRACe:COPY TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4 ,

COPY..
TRACE1| TRACE2| TRACE3| TRACE4

ANALOG TR DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE:ANALog ON | OFF

ON/OFF

TRACE --
MATH

T1-T2/T3/T4 CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>:STATe ON
+REF ->T1 CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <expr>

T1-REF CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>:STATe ON
->T1 CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] <expr>

ADJUST no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

TO TRACE

TRACE MATH CALCulate<1|2>:MATH<1...4>:STATe OFF

OFF

ASCII MMEMory:STORe:TRACe 1...4,<path>

EXPORT

ASCII --
CONFIG

EDIT PATH
the path is included in command MMEMory:STORe:TRACe

DECIM SEP FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator POINt|COMMA

. ,

1119.5063.12 6.243 E-13

Command Assignment: Signal Analysis FSIQ

NEW FORMat:DEXPort:APPend[:STATe] ON | OFF

APPEND

HEADER FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON OFF

SWEEP Key Group

COUPLING

RES BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <num_value>

MANUAL

RES BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO

VIDEO BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <num_value>

MANUAL

VIDEO BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO

SWEEP TIME [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME <num_value>

MANUAL

SWEEP TIME [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO

COUPLING [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON;

DEFAULT [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON;
[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON

COUPLING [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.02

RATIO [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio SINe

RBW / VBW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio SINe

SINE [1]

RBW / VBW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio PULSe

PULSE [.1]

RBW / VBW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio NOISe

NOISE [10]

RBW / VBW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <num_value>

MANUAL

SPAN / RBW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio 0.02

AUTO [50]

SPAN / RBW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:RATio <num_value>

MANUAL

RBW 1kHz [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE ANALog | DIGital

ANA/DIG

RBW <=1kHz [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE:FFT ON | OFF

FFT/NORM

MAIN PLL [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:PLL AUTO|HIGH|MEDium|LOW

BANDWIDTH

TRIGGER

1119.5063.12 6.244 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Signal Analysis

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate
FREE RUN

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce VIDeo
VIDEO
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <num_value>

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce LINE
LINE

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
EXTERN
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] -5.0...+5.0V

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce RFPower
RF POWER

TRIGGER TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <num_value>

DELAY

SLOPE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative

POS/NEG

SWEEP

CONTINUOUS INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

SWEEP

SINGLE INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

SWEEP

SWEEP TIME [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO

SWEEP TIME [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME <num_value>

MANUAL

SWEEP [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>

COUNT

GAP SWEEP [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP ON | OFF

ON/OFF

GAP SWEEP --
SETTINGS

TRIGGER TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <num_value>

LEVEL

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:PRETrigger <num_value>
PRE TRIGGER

TRG TO [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:TRGTogap <num_value>

GAP TIME

GAP [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:GAP:LENGth <num_value>

LENGTH

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe ON | OFF

ON / OFF

1119.5063.12 6.245 E-13

Command Assignment: Signal Analysis FSIQ

GATE --
SETTINGS

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel <num_value>

LEVEL

GATE MODE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE LEVel | EDGE

LEVEL/EDGE

GATE POL [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity POSitive | NEGative

POS/NEG

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <num_value>

DELAY

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <num_value>

LENGTH

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXTernal

EXTERN

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce RFPower

RF POWER

GATE
ADJUST

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel <num_value>

LEVEL

GATE MODE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE LEVel | EDGE

LEVEL/EDGE

GATE POL [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity POSitive | NEGative

POS/NEG

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff <num_value>

DELAY

GATE [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <num_value>

LENGTH

SWEEP TIME [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:TIME <num_value>

MANUAL

RES BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <num_value>

MANUAL

VIDEO [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <num_value>

MANUAL

VIDEO [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO

SGL SWEEP INITiate<1|2>:DISPlay ON | OFF

DISP OFF INITiate[:IMMediate]

1119.5063.12 6.246 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: General Device Settings

Basic Instrument - General Device Settings

DATA VARIATION Key Group

HOLD

UNLOCK
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

LOCK DATA
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

LOCK ALL
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

if needed, the step width is entered in the subsystem of the corresponding parameter.
STEP

STEPSIZE --
AUTO

STEPSIZE --
MANUAL

SYSTEM Key Group

DISPLAY

DISPlay:FORmat SINGle
FULL SCREEN

SPLIT DISPlay:FORmat SPLit

SCREEN

ACTIVE The screen is selected via the numeric suffix of the individual commands.
SCREEN A

SCREEN --
COUPLING

MODE INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle MODE

COUPLED

HORIZONTAL INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle X
SCALING

VERTICAL INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle Y
SCALING

COUPLING INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle CONTrol

CONTROL

SCREENS INSTrument<1|2>:COUPle NONE | ALL

UNCOUPLED

1119.5063.12 6.247 E-13

Command Assignment: General Device Settings FSIQ

CONFIG --
DISPLAY

SELECT --
OBJECT

DISPlay:CMAP:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
BRIGHTNESS

DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
TINT

DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
SATURATION

DEFAULT DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:DEFault
COLORS

PREDEFINED DISPlay:CMAP<1...13>:PDEFined BLACk| BLUE| BROWn| GREen| CYAN| RED |

COLORS MAGenta| YELLow| WHITe| DGRAy| LGRAy|
LBLUe| LGREen| LCYan| LRED| LMAGenta

LOGO DISPlay:LOGO ON | OFF

ON/OFF

FREQUENCY DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF

ON/OFF

DATA ENTRY --
FIELD

DATAENTRY no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

X

DATAENTRY no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

Y

DEFAULT no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

POSITION

DATAENTRY no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

OPAQUE

TIME DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TIME ON | OFF

ON OFF

DISPLAY DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT[:DATA] <string>

COMMENT DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TEXT:STATe ON | OFF

SCR.SAVER DISPlayPSAVer[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON OFF

SCR.SAVER DISPlayPSAVer:HOLDoff <num_value>

TIME

CAL

CAL CALibration:SHORt?
SHORT

CAL CALibration[:ALL]?
TOTAL

CAL CALibration:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]?
RES BW

1119.5063.12 6.248 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: General Device Settings

CAL CALibration:LDETector?
LOG

CAL CALibration:LOSuppression?
LO SUPP

CAL CALibration:IQ?
I/Q

CAL CORR CALibration:STATe ON | OFF

ON/OFF

CAL no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

RESULTS

PRESEL CALibration:PPEak?
PEAK

INFO

FIRMWARE *IDN?
VERSION

HARDWARE+ *OPT?
OPTIONS SYSTem:BINFo?

*TST?
SELFTEST

EXECUTE *TST?
TEST

SYSTEM SYSTem:ERRor?
MESSAGES

CLEAR SYSTem:ERRor?
MESSAGE

CLEAR ALL --
MESSAGES

UPDATE --
MESSAGES

*OPT?
OPTIONS

--
STATISTIC

ATT DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuation<1|2|3>
SWITCHES

1119.5063.12 6.249 E-13

Command Assignment: General Device Settings FSIQ

CONFIGURATION Key Group

The sub menus are described under the associated operating modes.
MODE

INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] SANalyzer
ANALYZER
INSTrument<1|2>:NSELect 1

TRACKING OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF

GENERATOR

VECTOR INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] ADEMod | DDEMod

ANALYZER INSTrument<1|2>:NSELect 2 | 3

GSM MS INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] MGSM

ANALYZER INSTrument<1|2>:NSELect 5

GSM BTS INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] BGSM

ANALYZER INSTrument<1|2>:NSELect 4

SETUP

--
TRANSDUCER

TRANSDUCER [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <name>

FACTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] ON | OFF

TRANSDUCER [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <name>

SET [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET[:STATe] ON | OFF

EDIT TRD [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing

FACTOR LINear|LOGarithmic[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent <string>

TRD FACTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <name>

NAME

TRD FACTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT <string>

UNIT

TRD FACTOR [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA <freq>,<level>..

VALUES

INSERT no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

LINE

DELETE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

LINE

SAVE TRD automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation

FACTOR

EDIT TRD [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:BREak ON | OFF

SET [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent <string>

TRANSD SET [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <name>

NAME

TRANSD SET [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:UNIT <string>

UNIT

1119.5063.12 6.250 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: General Device Settings

TRANSD SET [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:RANGe<1...10> <freq>,<freql>,<name>..

RANGES

INSERT no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

LINE

DELETE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

LINE

SAVE TRD automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation

SET

NEW see EDIT TRD FACTOR or EDIT TRD SET

FACT/SET

DELETE [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete
FACTOR/SET [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:TSET:DELete

OPTIONS
no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

REFERENCE [SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal

INT/EXT

EXT REF [SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <num_value>

FREQUENCY

--
SERVICE

DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] RF
INPUT RF

DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] CALibration
INPUT CAL

NOISE DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce ON | OFF

SOURCE

REFERENCE --
ADJUST

[SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:[INTernal:]TUNe <num_value>
REFERENCE

REFERENCE [SENSe<1|2>:]ROSCillator:[INTernal:]TUNe:SAVe
PROG

SERVICE DIAGnostic:SERVice:FUNCtion <num_value>,<num_value>...

FUNCTION

ENTER SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] <string>

PASSWORD

GENERAL --
SETUP

GPIB SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 0...30

ADDRESS

USER PORT INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue]?

A/B INPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
OUTPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
OUTPut<1|2>:UPORt<1|2>[:VALue] <Binary>

1119.5063.12 6.251 E-13

Command Assignment: General Device Settings FSIQ

COM PORT SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:DTR IBFull | OFF

1/2 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>:CONTrol:RTS IBFull | OFF
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:BAUD <numeric_value>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:BITS 7 | 8
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PARity[:TYPE] EVEN| ODD| NONE
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:SBITs 1|2
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial<1|2>[:RECeive]:PACE XON | NONE

SYSTem:TIME 0...23, 0...59, 0...59

TIME

SYSTem:DATE <num>,<num>,<num>
DATE

MONITOR no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

CONNECTED

KEY CLICK no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

ON/OFF

MODE FSE SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible OFF | FSE

ON/OFF

STATUS Key Group

device message "Go to LOCAL (GTL)"
LOCAL

1119.5063.12 6.252 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: General Device Settings

HARDCOPY Key Group

HCOPy[:IMMediate<1|2>]
START

SETTINGS

COPY HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
SCREEN

COPY HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:STATe ON | OFF

TRACE

COPY HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TABle:STATe ON | OFF

TABLE

SELECT --
QUADRANT

UPPER HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 1
LEFT

LOWER HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 2
LEFT

UPPER HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 3
RIGHT

LOWER HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant 4
RIGHT

FULL HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:FULL
PAGE

ENTER --
TEXT

COMMENT HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TEXT <string>

SCREEN A/B

HCOPy:ITEM:LABel:TEXT <string>
TITLE

HARDCOPY HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage WMF|EWMF | BMP | GDI

DEVICE

SETTINGS HCOPy:DESTination<1|2> <string>

DEVICE 1/2 MMEMory:NAME <file_name>
HCOPy:ITEM:FFEed<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> LANDscape | PORTrait

ENABLE the numeric suffix after HCOPy:IMMediate denotes the first or second device.
DEV1/DEV2

COLOR HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON | OFF

ON/OFF

TRC COLOR HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<1|2>:TRACe:CAINcrement ON | OFF

AUTO INC

1119.5063.12 6.253 E-13

Command Assignment: General Device Settings FSIQ

MEMORY Key Group

CONFIG

EDIT MMEMory:MSIS <device>

PATH MMEMory:CDIRectory <directory_name>

MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
DELETE
MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name>

FORMAT MMEMory:INITialize <msus>

DISK

MAKE MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name>

DIRECTORY

MMEMory:MOVE <file_source>,<file_destination>
RENAME

SORT no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

MODE

MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
COPY

SAVE

EDIT MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<file_name>

NAME

EDIT the path is included in the file name.

PATH

EDIT MMEMory:COMMent <string>

COMMENT

SELECT ITEMS --
TO SAVE

SELECT MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup ON | OFF

ITEMS MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...4> ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer[:ACTive] ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL[:ACTive] ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL:ALL ON | OFF

ENABLE MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
ALL ITEMS

DISABLE MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
ALL ITEMS

DEFAULT MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
CONFIG

DATA SET --
LIST

1119.5063.12 6.254 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: General Device Settings

DATA SET MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,<file_name>

CLEAR

DATA SET MMEMory:CLEar:ALL

CLEAR ALL

RECALL

EDIT MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name>

NAME

EDIT the path is included in the file name.

PATH

AUTO MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,<file_name>

RECALL

SELECT ITEMS --
TO RECALL

SELECT MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:GSETup ON | OFF

ITEMS MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...4> ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes[:ACTive] ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CSETup ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HCOPy ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CDATa ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:MACRos ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer[:ACTive] ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL[:ACTive] ON | OFF
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:CVL:ALL ON | OFF

ENABLE MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
ALL ITEMS

DISABLE MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
ALL ITEMS

DEFAULT MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
CONFIG

DATA SET --
LIST

DATA SET MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,<file_name>

CLEAR

DATA SET MMEMory:CLEar:ALL

CLEAR ALL

1119.5063.12 6.255 E-13

Command Assignment: General Device Settings FSIQ

USER Key

USER

MACRO no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

1...7

DEFINE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

MACRO

RECORD no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

ON/OFF

DEFINE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

PAUSE

DELETE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

MACRO

MACRO no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

TITLE

SELECT no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

MACRO

1119.5063.12 6.256 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis

Vektor-Signal Analysis Mode

CONFIGURATION Key Group - Digital Demodulation
--
MODE

VECTOR --
ANALYZER

DIGITAL
STANDARD

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet PDCup
PDC UP

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet PDCDown
PDC DOWN

NADC [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet FNADc

FWD CH

NADC [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet RNADc

REV CH

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet DECT
DECT

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet PHS
PHS

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet PWT
PWT

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet TETRa
TETRA

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet TFTS
TFTS

IS-95 CDMA [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet F95Cdma | FQCDma

FWD CH

IS-95 CDMA [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet R95Cdma | RQCDma

REV CH

W-CDMA [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet FCDMA4096 | FWCDma

4.096 FWD

W-CDMA [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet RCDMA4096 | RWCDma

4.096 REV

W-CDMA [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet FW3Gppcdma

3GPP FWD

W-CDMA [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet RW3Gppcdma

3GPP REV

CDMA 2000 [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet CDMA2000

SR3/DS FWD

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet EDGe
EDGE

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet GSM | DCS1800 | PCS1900

GSM

1119.5063.12 6.257 E-13

Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis FSIQ

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet CT2
CT2

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet ERMes
ERMES

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet MODacom
MODACOM

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet F16
FLEX16_2

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet F322
FLEX32_2

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet F324
FLEX32_4

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet F64
FLEX64_4

APCO25 [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet APCO25C4FM

C4FM

APCO25 [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet APCO25CQPSK

CQPSK

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRESet CDPD
CDPD

DIGITAL INSTrument[:SELect] DDEMod

DEMOD [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FORMat QPSK | PSK | MSK |QAM | FSK
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | OFFSet | DPI4
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PSK:NSTate 2 | 8
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PSK:FORMat NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:MSK:FORMat TYPE1 | TYPE2 | NORMal | DIFFerential
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:QAM:NSTate 16
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FSK:NSTate 2 | 4

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? MERM| MEPK| MEPS|

PERM| PEPK| PEPS| EVRM| EVPK| EVPS| IQOF| IQIM| ADR| FERR| DEV|
FSRM| FSPK| FSPS| RHO| FEPK

MODULATION --
PARAMETERS

SYMBOL [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SRATe <num_value>

RATE

SIDE BAND [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SBANd NORMal|INVerse

NORM INV

MEAS [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:MEASurement OFF | RCOSine | RRCosine |

FILTER GAUSsian | B22 | B25 | B44 |
QFM|FM95 | QFR|FR95 | QRM|RM95 |
QRR|RR95 | A25Fm | EMES | EREF

REFERENCE [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence RCOSine | RRCosine | GAUSsian |

FILTER B22 | B25 | B44 | QFM|FM95 |
QFR|FR95 | QRM|RM95 | QRR|RR95 |
A25Fm | EMES | EREF
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa <num_value>
ALPHA/BT

FSK REF CALCulate<1|2>:FSK:DEViation:REFerence <num_value>

DEVIATION

NORMALIZE [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:NORMalize ON | OFF

ON / OFF

1119.5063.12 6.258 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis

--
MEAS RESULT

MAGNITUDE CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘TCAP’

CAP BUFFER

MEAS CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:MEAS’

SIGNAL

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat MAGNitude
MAGNITUDE

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat PHASe
PHASE

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat FREQuency
FREQUENCY

REAL/IMAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat RIMag

PART

EYE DIAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat FEYE

[FREQ]

EYE DIAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat IEYE

[I]

EYE DIAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat QEYE

[Q]

EYE DIAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat TEYE

TRELLIS

POLAR [IQ] CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat COMP

VECTOR

POLAR [IQ] CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat CONS

CONSTELL

SYMBOL DISPLay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:SYMBol DOTS | BARS |OFF

DISPLAY

PHASE WRAP CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat PHASe | UPHase

ON/OFF

EYE DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:EYE:COUNt <num_value>

LENGTH

REFERENCE CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:REF’

SIGNAL

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat MAGNitude
MAGNITUDE

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat PHASe
PHASE

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat FREQuency
FREQUENCY

REAL/IMAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat RIMag

PART

EYE DIAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat FEYE

[FREQ]

EYE DIAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat IEYE

[I]

1119.5063.12 6.259 E-13

Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis FSIQ

EYE DIAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat QEYE

[Q]

EYE DIAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat TEYE

TRELLIS

POLAR [IQ] CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat COMP

VECTOR

POLAR [IQ] CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat CONS

CONSTELL

SYMBOL DISPLay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:SYMBol DOTS | BARS |OFF

DISPLAY

PHASE WRAP CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat PHASe | UPHase

ON/OFF

EYE DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:EYE:COUNt <num_value>

LENGTH

ERROR CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH’

SIGNAL
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult? MERM| MEPK| MEPS|
PERM| PEPK| PEPS| EVRM| EVPK| EVPS| IQOF| IQIM| ADR| FERR| DEV|
FSRM| FSPK| FSPS| RHO| FEPK

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat MAGNitude
MAGNITUDE

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat PHASe
PHASE

CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat FREQuency
FREQUENCY

REAL/IMAG CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat RIMag

PART

ERROR VECT CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat MAGNitude

MAGNITUDE CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’

POLAR [IQ] CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat COMP

VECTOR CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’

POLAR [IQ] CALCulate<1|2>:FORMat CONS

CONSTELL CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT’

SYMBOL DISPLay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:SYMBol DOTS | BARS | OFF

DISPLAY CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:RESult?
MERM| MEPK| MEPS|PERM| PEPK| PEPS| EVRM| EVPK| EVPS| IQOF| IQIM|
ADR| FERR| DEV|FSRM| FSPK| FSPS| RHO| FEPK

SYMB TABLE CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:DDEM:SYMB’

/ ERRORS

MEMORY [SENSe<1|2>:]TCAPture:LENGth 1024 | 2048 | 4096 | 8192 | 16384

SIZE

FRAME [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:TIME <num_value>

LENGTH

RESULT [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:TIME <num_value>

LENGTH

POINTS [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:PRATe 1| 2| 4| 8| 16
PER SYMBOL

TRIGGER
see section "SWEEP - TRIGGER"

1119.5063.12 6.260 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis

RANGE
see section "LEVEL - RANGE"

IF --
BANDWIDTH

IF BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:RESolution:AUTO ON | OFF
AUTO

IF BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:RESolution <num_value>
MANUAL

CONFIGURATION Key Group - Analog Demodulation

--
MODE

VECTOR --
ANALYZER

ANALOG INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] ADEMod

DEMOD

MODULATION --
PARAMETER

HIGH PASS SENSe<1|2>:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] ON | OFF

AF FILTER SENSe<1|2>:FILTer:HPASs:FREQuency <num_value>

LOW PASS SENSe<1|2>:FILTer[:LPASs][:STATe] ON | OFF

AF FILTER SENSe<1|2>:FILTer[:LPASs]:FREQuency <num_value>

WEIGHTING SENSe<1|2>:FILTer:CCITt[:STATe] ON | OFF

AF FILTER SENSe<1|2>:FILTer:CMESsage[:STATe] ON | OFF

AF COUPL’G SENSe<1|2>:ADEMod:AF:COUPling AC|DC

AC DC

SQUELCH SENSe<1|2>:ADEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON OFF

SQUELCH SENSe<1|2>:ADEMod:SQUelch:LEVel <num_value>

LEVEL

SIDE BAND SENSe<1|2>:ADEMod:SBANd NORMal|INVerse

NORM INV

AM/FM SENSe<1|2>:FILTer:DEMPhasis:TCONstant <num_value>

DEEMPH

PRE DISPL SENSe<1|2>:FILTer:DEMPhasis:LINK DISPlay|AUDio

ON OFF

MEAS --
RESULT

AM CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:AM’
SIGNAL

FM CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:FM’
SIGNAL

PM CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:PM’
SIGNAL

1119.5063.12 6.261 E-13

Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis FSIQ

MODULATION CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:AMSummary’

SUMMARY CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:FMSummary’
CALCulate<1|2>:FEED ‘XTIM:PMSummary’
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AM[:RESult?]
PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FM[:RESult?]
PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS | RDEV
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:PM[:RESult?]
PPEak | MPEak | MIDDle | RMS
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:AFRequency[:RESult?]
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:FERRor [:RESult?]
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:CARRier[:RESult?]

SUMMARY --
SETTINGS

AVERAGE SENSe<1|2>:MSUMmary:AHOLd[:STATe] ON | OFF

HOLD ON

SWEEP SENSe<1|2>:SWEep:COUNt <num_value>

COUNT

RELUNIT SENSe<1|2>:MSUMmary:RUNit PCT | DB

DB %

INDICATION SENSe<1|2>:MSUMmary:MODE ABSolute | RELative

ABS REL

SET SENSe<1|2>:MSUMmary:REFerence <num_value>

REFERENCE

MEAS-> SENSe<1|2>:MSUMmary:REFerence:AUTO ONCe

REF

SINAD 1kHz CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad[:STATe]

ON OFF CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:ADEMod:SINad:RESult?

SUMMARY SENSe<1|2>:MSUMmary:MTIMe <num_value>

MEAS TIME

REAL TIME SENSe<1|2>:ADEMod:RTIMe[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON OFF

SENSITIV OUTPut<1|2>:AF:SENSitivity <num_value>

AF OUTPUT

SYSTem:SPEaker<1|2>:VOLume <num_value>
VOLUME

DEMOD SENSe<1|2>:BANDwidth|BWIDth:DEMod <num_value>

BANDWIDTH

DEEMPHASIS SENSe<1|2>:FILTer:DEMPhasis[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON OFF

1119.5063.12 6.262 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis

FREQUENCY Key Group

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer <num_value>
CENTER

CENTER [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:CENTer <num_value>

FREQUENCY

FREQUENCY [SENSe<1|2>:]FREQuency:OFFSet <num_value>

OFFSET

LEVEL Key Group

--
REF

REF DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <num_value>

LEVEL

REF LEVEL DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <num_value>

OFFSET

RF ATTEN INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation <num_value>

MANUAL

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal;

NORMAL INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LNOise;

LOW NOISE INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LDIStortion;

LOW DIST INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

MIXER INPut<1|2>:MIXer <num_value>

LEVEL

--
RANGE

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <num_value>
Y PER DIV

REF VALUE DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <num_value>

Y AXIS

REF VALUE DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:X[:SCALe]:RVALue <num_value>

X AXIS

REF VALUE DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0...100PCT

POSITION

--
SCALE UNIT

Y UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DB
LOG[dB]

Y UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer UNITLESS

LINEAR

Y UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:ANGLe DEG

DEG

1119.5063.12 6.263 E-13

Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis FSIQ

Y UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:ANGLe RAD

RAD

Y UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer DBM

DBM

Y UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer VOLT

VOLT

Y UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:POWer WATT

WATT

X UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:X:UNIT:TIME S
TIME

X UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:X:UNIT:TIME SYMB

SYMBOL

SENSITIV OUTPut<1|2>:AF:SENSitivity <num_value>

AF OUTPUT

SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume <num_value>
VOLUME

INPUT Key

INPUT

RF ATTEN INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation <num_value>

MANUAL

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE NORMal;

NORMAL INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LNOise;

LOW NOISE INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

ATTEN AUTO INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO:MODE LDIStortion;

LOW DIST INPut<1|2>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

MIXER INPut<1|2>:MIXer <num_value>

LEVEL

INPUT --
SELECT

RF INPUT INPut<1|2>:IMPedance 50
50 OHM

RF INPUT INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORRection RAM

75 OHM/RAM

RF INPUT INPut<1|2>:IMPedance:CORRection RAZ

75OHM/RAZ

1119.5063.12 6.264 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis

MARKER Key Group

NORMAL

MARKER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>[:STATe] ON | OFF;

1..2 CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:X <num_value>;
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:Y?

POLAR MARKER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:READout MPHase | RIMaginary

R/I / MA/PH

POLAR MARKER CALCulate<1|2>:UNIT:ANGLe DEG | RAD

DEG/ RAD

COUPLED CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:COUPled[:STATe] ON | OFF

MARKER

MARKER DISPlay:WINDow<1|2>:MINFo ON | OFF (indication)

INFO

ALL MARKER CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:AOFF

OFF

DELTA

DELTA CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>:AOFF
1/2

DELTA MKR CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>:MODE ABSolute | RELative

ABS / REL

ALL DELTA CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>[:STATe] ON | OFF

OFF CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>:X <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>:Y?

MARKER
SEARCH

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>:MAXimum[:PEAK]

ACTIVE MKR --
/ DELTA

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:MINimum[:PEAK]
MIN
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>:MINimum[:PEAK]

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:MAXimum:APEak
MAX |PEAK|
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>:MAXimum:APEak

SUMMARY CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON OFF

SUMMARY --
MARKER

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1..,2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum[:STATe] ON | OFF
MAX |PEAK|
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MAXimum:PHOLd:RESult?

1119.5063.12 6.265 E-13

Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis FSIQ

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF
+PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:PHOLd:RESult?

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak[:STATe] ON | OFF
-PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MPEak:PHOLd:RESult?

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle[:STATe] ON | OFF
±PEAK/2 CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MIDDle:PHOLd:RESult?

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ON | OFF
RMS
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult?

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ON | OFF
MEAN
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult?
CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:PHOLd:RESult?

PEAK HOLD CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ON | OFF

ON / OFF

AVERAGE/HOLD CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ON | OFF

ON / OFF

SWEEP [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>

COUNT

ALL SUM MKR CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF

OFF

SEARCH LIMIT CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON/OFF

SELECT --
MARKER

MKR ->

CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...2>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
PEAK
CALCulate<1|2>:DELTamarker<1...2>:MAXimum[:PEAK]

MKR → CALCulate<1|2>:MARKer<1...4>:TRACe <num_value>

TRACE

SELECT --
MARKER

ACTIVE MKR no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

/ DELTA

1119.5063.12 6.266 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis

LINES Key Group

--
D LINES

DISPLAY CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;

LINE 1/2 CALCulate<1|2>:DLINe<1|2> <num_value>

REFERENCE CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe:STATe ON | OFF;

LINE CALCulate<1|2>:RLINe <num_value>

THRESHOLD CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold ON | OFF;

LINE CALCulate<1|2>:THReshold <num_value>

TIME/SYMB CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2>:STATe ON | OFF;

1/2 CALCulate<1|2>:TLINe<1|2> <num_value>

LIMITS

SELECT LIMIT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:NAME <string>;

LINE CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:STATe ON | OFF

NEW LIMIT s. EDIT LIMIT LINE

LINE

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:NAME <string>
NAME

VALUES no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

INSERT no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

VALUE

DELETE no corresponding IEC/IEEE-bus command

VALUE

SHIFT X CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SHIFt <num_value>

LIMIT LINE

SHIFT Y CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:SHIFt <num_value>

LIMIT LINE CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:SHIFt <num_value>

SAVE automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation

LIMIT LINE

1119.5063.12 6.267 E-13

Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis FSIQ

EDIT LIMIT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UNIT DB| DBM | RAD | DEG | PCT | HZ | S |

LINE VOLT | WATT | UNITless
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:TRACe <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:COMMent ’string’
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol[:DATA] <num_value>,<num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency|TIME
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:OFFset <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:MODE RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:UNIT[:TIME] S | SYM
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer[:DATA] <num_value>,<num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:OFFset <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MARGin <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:MODE RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer[:DATA] <num_value>,<num_value>..
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:OFFset <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MARGin <num_value>
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:MODE RELative | ABSolute
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:FAIL?
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CLEar[:IMMediate]

COPY LIMIT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:COPY 1...8 | <name>

LINE

DELETE LIMIT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:DELete

LINE

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:CONTrol:OFFset <num_value>
X OFFSET

CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:UPPer:OFFset <num_value>
Y OFFSET
CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:LOWer:OFFset <num_value>

TRACE Key Group

TRACE
--

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE WRITe
CLEAR/WRITE

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE VIEW
VIEW

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>[:STATe] OFF
BLANK

CONTINUOUS DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE:CWRite ON | OFF

WRITE

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE AVERage or
AVERAGE
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:MODE SCALe

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE MAXHold or
MAX HOLD
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:MODE MAX

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:MODE MINHold or
MIN HOLD
[SENSe<1|2>:]AVERage:MODE MIN

[SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>
SWEEP COUNT

1119.5063.12 6.268 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis

SWEEP Key Group

COUPLING
--

IF BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON | OFF
AUTO

IF BW [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <num_value>
MANUAL

MAIN PLL [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:PLL AUTO|HIGH|MEDium|LOW

BANDWIDTH

SWEEP

CONTINUOUS INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

SWEEP

SINGLE INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

SWEEP

SWEEP [SENSe<1|2>:]SWEep:COUNt <num_value>

COUNT

RESULT [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:TIME <num_value>

LENGTH

TRIGGER Key - Digital Demodulation

TRIGGER

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate
FREE RUN

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce VIDeo
VIDEO
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <num_value>

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
EXTERN
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:EXTernal <num_value>

TRIGGER TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <num_value>

OFFSET

SLOPE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative

POS NEG

MEAS ONLY [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MONLy ON | OFF

IF SYNC’D

FIND BURST [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:PULSe:STATe ON | OFF

ON OFF

FIND SYNC [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe ON | OFF

ON OFF

SYNC [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:OFFSet <num_value>

OFFSET

SYNC --
PATTERN

1119.5063.12 6.269 E-13

Command Assignment: Vector Signal Analysis FSIQ

SELECT [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect <pattern_name>

PATTERN

NEW SYNC [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern <string>

PATTERN

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME <pattern_name>
NAME

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent <string>
COMMENT

[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA <string>
VALUE
[SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern <string> (the pattern is set in the
instrument and automatically saved under the name remote.pat)

SAVE automatically executed during IEC/IEEE-bus operation (see above, command

PATTERN [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern <string>)

EDIT SYNC [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern <string>

PATTERN

DELETE [SENSe<1|2>:]DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete
PATTERN

TRIGGER Key - Analog Demodulation

TRIGGER

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate
FREE RUN

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce VIDeo
VIDEO
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo <num_value>

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
EXTERN
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] -5.0...+5.0V

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce AF
AF SIGNAL
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:AF -120...+120PCT

SLOPE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative

POS/NEG

TRIGGER TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff <num_value>

OFFSET

1119.5063.12 6.270 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: Tracking Generator

Tracking Generator (Option FSE-B8 to B11)

CONFIGURATION Key Group

MODE

TRACKING --
GEN

SOURCE OUTPut<1|2>[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON/OFF

SOURCE SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <num_value>

POWER

POWER SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <num_value>

OFFSET

SOURCE --
CAL

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:METHod TRANsmission
CAL TRANS
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough

CAL REFL [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:METHod REFLexion

SHORT [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough

CAL REFL [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:METHod REFLexion

OPEN [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] OPEN

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF
NORMALIZE

REF VALUE DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition 0...100PCT

POSITION

DISPlay[:WINDow<1|2>]:TRACe<1...4>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <num_value>
REF VALUE

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RECall
RECALL

FREQUENCY SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet <num_value>

OFFSET

MODULATION
--

SOURce:AM:STATe ON | OFF
EXT AM

SOURce:POWer:ALC:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal

EXT ALC

SOURce:FM:STATe ON | OFF
EXT FM

SOURce:DM:STATe ON | OFF
EXT I/Q

1119.5063.12 271 E-13

Command Assignment: GSM BTS Analysis FSIQ

GSM BTS Analysis (Option FSE-K11)

CONFIGURATION Key Group

MODE

GSM BTS INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] BGSM

ANALYZER

--
SETTINGS

EXTERNAL [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:LOSS:INPut[:MAGNitude] <num_value>

ATTEN

ARFCN / --
FREQUENCY

CONFigure[:BTS]:ARFCn <num_value>
ARFCN

ARFCN CONFigure[:BTS]:ARFCn:AUTO ONCE

AUTOSELECT

SENSe<1|2>:FREQuency:CENTer <num_value>
FREQUENCY

POWER --
SETTINGS

EXTERNAL SENSe<1|2>:CORRection:LOSS:INPut[:MAGNitude] <num_value>

ATTEN

NOMINAL CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:EXPected <num_value>

OUTPUT PWR

POWER CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:CLASs <num_value> | M1 | M2 | M3

CLASS

STATIC PWR CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:STATic <num_value>

CTRL LEVEL

DYNAM PWR CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:DYNamic <num_value>

CTRL LEVEL

LIMIT/PWR CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:COUPled ON | OFF

COUPLED

SIGNAL CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:EXPected <num_value>

POWER

LIMIT LINE CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:LIMit <num_value>

REF POWER

LIMIT CALCulate<1|2>:LIMit<1...8>:MARGin <num_value>

MARGIN

--
SLOT NO.

CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SLOT 0...7
SLOT NO.

SLOT NO. CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SLOT:AUTO ONCE

AUTOSELECT

1119.5063.12 6.272 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: GSM BTS Analysis

CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:TSC 0...7
MIDAMBLE
CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:TSC:AUTO ON | OFF

--
TRIGGER

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate
FREE RUN

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
EXTERN
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] -5.0...+5.0V

SLOPE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative

POS NEG

TRIGGER --
ADJUST

FRAME TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:FRAMe <num_value>

COARSE

FRAME TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:FRAMe <num_value>

FINE

AUTO FRAME TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:FRAMe:AUTO ONCE

ADJUST

SLOT TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT <num_value>

ADJUST

AUTO SLOT TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT:AUTO ONCE

ADJUST

TRIGGER TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] <num_value>

LEVEL

SLOPE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative

POS NEG

DEFAULT CONFigure[:BTS]:PRESet
SETTINGS

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork[:TYPE] PGSM | PGSM900

P-GSM 900

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork[:TYPE] DCS | GSM1800

GSM 1800
(DCS 1800)

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork[:TYPE] PCS | GSM1900

GSM 1900
(PCS 1900)

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork[:TYPE] RGSM | RGSM900

R-GSM 900

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork[:TYPE] RGSM
R-GSM 900

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork:PHASe 1
PHASE I

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork:PHASe 2
PHASE II

CONFigure[:BTS]:NETWork:PHASe 2,PLUS
PHASE II+

PHASE/FREQ CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror[:IMMediate]
ERROR

1119.5063.12 6.273 E-13

Command Assignment: GSM BTS Analysis FSIQ

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

SINGLE
READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:STATus?
READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:AVERage?
READ:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:MAXimum?
READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:STATus?
READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:AVERage?
READ:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:MAXimum?
READ:BURSt:FERRor:STATus?
READ:BURSt:FERRor:AVERage?
READ:BURSt:FERRor:MAXimum?

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

CONTINUOUS
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:STATus?
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:AVERage?
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:RMS:MAXimum?
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:STATus?
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:AVERage?
FETCh:BURSt:PERRor:PEAK:MAXimum?
FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:STATus?
FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:AVERage?
FETCh:BURSt:FERRor:MAXimum?
NO. OF --
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

X UNIT CALCulate:X:UNIT:TIME S|SYM

SYMB TIME

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

PHASE CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:PPEak <num_value>

PEAK

PHASE CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:PRMS <num_value>

RMS

CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:FREQuency <num_value>
FREQUENCY

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

CARRIER CONFigure:BURSt:POWer[:IMMediate]
POWER CALCulate:LIMit:BURSt:POWer?

MEAS MAX READ:BURSt:POWer?

OUTPUT PWR

INC STATIC READ:BURSt:POWer:STATic?

PWR CTRL

INC DYNAM READ:BURSt:POWer:DYNamic?

PWR CTRL

NO. OF --
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:BURSt:POWer:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

1119.5063.12 6.274 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: GSM BTS Analysis

SET TO --
STANDARD

SGL MEAS CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:SINGle[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON OFF

MEAS SGL READ:BURSt:POWer?

PWR LEVEL

STATIC PWR CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:STATic <num_value>

CTRL LEVEL

DYNAM PWR CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:DYNamic <num_value>

CTRL LEVEL

CLEAR SGL CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:SINGle:CLEar

RESULT TAB

SIGNAL CONFigure[:BTS]:POWer:EXPected <num_value>

POWER

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

CONDITIONS CONFigure:BURSt:POWer:CONDition NORMal | EXTReme

NORM EXTR

MEAS [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] DEF | 300 kHz | 1 MHz

BANDWIDTH

SYNC TO TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:SOURce FRAMe | TSC

MIDAMBLE

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

POWER VS CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate[:IMMediate]
TIME CALCulate:LIMit:BURSt:PTEMplate?

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

SINGLE

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

CONTINUOUS

BURST HIGH CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect TOP

RESOLUTION

NO. OF --
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect FULL
FULL BURST

RISING CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect RISing

EDGE

FALLING CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect FALLing

EDGE

START READ:BURSt:REFerence[:IMMediate]?
REF MEAS

1119.5063.12 6.275 E-13

Command Assignment: GSM BTS Analysis FSIQ

REF MEAS CONFigure:BURSt:REFerence:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO USER

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

X UNIT CALCulate:X:UNIT:TIME S|SYM

SYMB TIME

MEAS [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] DEF | 300 kHz | 1 MHz

BANDWIDTH

SYNC TO TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:SOURce FRAMe | TSC

MIDAMBLE

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

LIMIT LINE --
FILTER

NEW LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

EDIT LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

COPY see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LIMIT LINE

DELETE see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LIMIT LINE

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

--
PAGE UP

--
PAGE DOWN

MODULATION CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation[:IMMediate]
SPECTRUM CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:MODulation? ARFCn|TXBand|RXBand|COMBined
CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:MODulation:FAILs? ARFCn|TXBand|RXBand|COMBined
CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:MODulation:EXCeptions? ARFCn|TXBand|RXBand|
COMBined

SINGLE INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

FREQ SWEEP

CONTINUOUS INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

FREQ SWEEP

START READ:SPECtrum:MODulation[:ALL]?
LIST

NO. OF --
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

1119.5063.12 6.276 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: GSM BTS Analysis

ARFCN CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe ARFCn

±1.8 MHZ

CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe TXBand
TX BAND

±1.8 MHZ / CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe COMBined

TX BAND

CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe RXBand
RX BAND

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

RX BAND [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RXGain:INPut[:MAGNitude] <num_value>

GAIN

TX GATE CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:TGATe ON | OFF

ON OFF

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

LIMIT LINE --
FILTER

NEW LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

EDIT LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

COPY see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LIMIT LINE

DELETE see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LIMIT LINE

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

--
PAGE UP

--
PAGE DOWN

TRANSIENT CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching[:IMMediate]
SPECTRUM CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:SWITching?
CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:SWITching:FAILs?

SINGLE INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

FREQ SWEEP

CONTINUOUS INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

FREQ SWEEP

START READ:SPECtrum:SWITching[:ALL]?
LIST

NO. OF --
BURSTS

1119.5063.12 6.277 E-13

Command Assignment: GSM BTS Analysis FSIQ

SET CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

BTS SFH CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SFH ON | OFF

ON OFF

MEAS [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] DEF | 300 kHz | 1 MHz

BANDWIDTH

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

LIMIT LINE --
FILTER

NEW LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

EDIT LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

COPY see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LIMIT LINE

DELETE see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LIMIT LINE

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

--
PAGE UP

--
PAGE DOWN

CONFigure:SPURious[:IMMediate]
SPURIOUS
CALCulate:LIMit:SPURious? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand
CALCulate:LIMit:SPURious:FAILs? TXBand | OTXBand | RXBand

START LIST ABORT;READ:SPURious:STEP?

SGL STEP

CONT LIST READ:SPURious:STEP?

SGL STEP

START READ:SPURious [:ALL]?

LIST

SWEEP --
COUNT

SWP COUNT CONFigure:SPURious:COUNt <num_value>

TX / <> TX

SWP COUNT CONFigure:SPURious:COUNt:RXBand <num_value>

RX BAND

SET TO --
STANDARD

1119.5063.12 6.278 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: GSM BTS Analysis

CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe TXBand
TX BAND

CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe OTXBand
<> TX BAND

CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe RXBand
RX BAND

TX BAND CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe COMBined

±2.MHZ

SELECT CONFigure:SPURious:STEP:COUNT?
STEP CONFigure:SPURious:STEP<1..26> ON | OFF

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

BTS SFH CONFigure[:BTS]:CHANnel:SFH ON | OFF

ON OFF

TX SUPPR CONFigure[:BTS]:TXSupp ON | OFF

ON OFF

RX BAND [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RXGain:INPut[:MAGNitude] <num_value>

GAIN

CONFigure[:BTS]:COSiting ON | OFF
COSITING

SWEEPTIME CONFigure[:BTS]:SWEeptime STANdard|AUTO

STD AUTO

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

LIMIT LINE --
FILTER

NEW LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

EDIT LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

COPY see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LIMIT LINE

DELETE see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LIMIT LINE

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:BTS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

--
PAGE UP

--
PAGE DOWN

1119.5063.12 6.279 E-13

Command Assignment: GSM MS Analysis FSIQ

GSM MS Analysis (Option FSE-K10)

CONFIGURATION Key Group

MODE

GSM MS INSTrument<1|2>[:SELect] MGSM

ANALYZER

--
SETTINGS

EXTERNAL [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:LOSS:INPut[:MAGNitude] <num_value>

ATTEN

ARFCN / --
FREQUENCY

CONFigure[:MS]:ARFCn <num_value>
ARFCN

ARFCN CONFigure[:MS]:ARFCn:AUTO ONCE

AUTOSELECT

[SENSe<1|2>:]FREQency:CENTer <num_value>
FREQUENCY

POWER --
SETTINGS

EXTERNAL [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:LOSS:INPut[:MAGNitude] <num_value>

ATTEN

OUTPUT CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:EXPected <num_value>

MS POWER

POWER CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:CLASs <num_value>

CLASS

POWER CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:LEVel <num_value>

CTRL LEVEL

SMALL MS CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SMALl ON | OFF

ON OFF

SMALL MS CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SMALl ON | OFF

ON OFF

LIMIT/PWR CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:COUPled ON | OFF

COUPLED

SIGNAL CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:EXPected <num_value>

POWER

LIMIT LINE CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:LIMit <num_value>

REF POWER

LIMIT CALCulate:LIMit:MARGin <num_value>

MARGIN

CONFigure[:MS]:CHANnel:TSC 0...7
MIDAMBLE

1119.5063.12 6.280 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: GSM MS Analysis

--
TRIGGER

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate
FREE RUN

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce VIDeo
VIDEO

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
EXTERN
TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] -5.0...+5.0V

TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SOURce RFPower
RF POWER

SLOPE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative

POS NEG

TRIGGER --
ADJUST

COARSE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT <num_value>

ADJUST

FINE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT <num_value>

ADJUST

AUTO TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:ADJust:SLOT:AUTO ONCE

ADJUST

TRIGGER TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal] <num_value>

LEVEL

SLOPE TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative

POS NEG

DEFAULT CONFigure[:MS]:PRESet
SETTINGS

CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork[:TYPE] PGSM | PGSM900

P-GSM 900

CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork[:TYPE] EGSM | EGSM900

E-GSM 900

GSM 1800 CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork[:TYPE] DCS | GSM1800

(DCS 1800)

GSM 1900 CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork[:TYPE] PCS | GSM1900

(PCS 1900)

CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork[:TYPE] RGSM | RGSM900

R-GSM 900

CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork:PHASe 1
PHASE I

CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork:PHASe 2
PHASE II

CONFigure[:MS]:NETWork:PHASe 2,PLUS
PHASE II+

1119.5063.12 6.281 E-13

Command Assignment: GSM MS Analysis FSIQ

PHASE/FREQ CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror[:IMMediate]
ERROR

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

SINGLE

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

CONTINUOUS

NO. OF
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:BURSt:PFERror:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

X UNIT CALCulate<1|2>::X:UNIT:TIME S|SYM

SYMB TIME

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

PHASE CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:PPEak <num_value>

PEAK

PHASE CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:PRMS <num_value>

RMS

CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:FREQuency <num_value>
FREQUENCY

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:MS]:LIMit:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

CARRIER CONFigure:BURSt:POWer[:IMMediate]
POWER CALCulate:LIMit:BURSt:POWer?

MEAS MAX READ:BURSt:POWer?

OUTPUT PWR

INC PWR READ:BURSt:POWer:LEVel?

CTRL LEVEL

NO. OF --
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:BURSt:POWer:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

SGL MEAS CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SINGle[:STATe] ON | OFF

ON OFF

1119.5063.12 6.282 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: GSM MS Analysis

MEAS SGL READ:BURSt:POWer?

PWR LEVEL

POWER CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:LEVel <num_value>

CTRL LEVEL

CLEAR SGL CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:SINGle:CLEar

RESULT TAB

SIGNAL CONFigure[:MS]:POWer:EXPected <num_value>

POWER

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

CONDITIONS CONFigure:BURSt:POWer:CONDition NORMal | EXTReme

NORM EXTR

MEAS [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] DEF | 300 kHz | 1 MHz

BANDWIDTH

SYNC TO TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:SOURce FRAMe | TSC

MIDAMBLE

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

POWER VS CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate[:IMMediate]
TIME CALCulate:LIMit:BURSt:PTEMplate?

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

SINGLE

INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

CONTINUOUS

BURST HIGH CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect TOP

RESOLUTION

NO. OF --
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect FULL
FULL BURST

RISING CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect RISing

EDGE

FALLING CONFigure:BURSt:PTEMplate:SELect FALLing

EDGE

START READ:BURst:REFerence[:IMMediate]?
REF MEAS

REF MEAS CONFigure:BURst:REFerence:AUTO ON | OFF

AUTO USER

1119.5063.12 6.283 E-13

Command Assignment: GSM MS Analysis FSIQ

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

X UNIT CALCulate<1|2>:X:UNIT:TIME S|SYM

SYMB TIME

MEAS [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] DEF | 300 kHz | 1 MHz

BANDWIDTH

SYNC TO TRIGger<1|2>[:SEQuence]:SYNChronize:SOURce FRAMe | TSC

MIDAMBLE

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

LIMIT LINE --
FILTER

EDIT LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:MS]:LIMIt:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

--
PAGE UP

--
PAGE DOWN

MODULATION CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation[:IMMediate]
SPECTRUM CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:MODulation?
ARFCn|TXBand|RXBand|COMBined|DCSRx1800
CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:MODulation:FAILs?
ARFCn|TXBand|RXBand|COMBined|DCSRx1800
CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:MODulation:EXCeptions?
ARFCn|TXBand|RXBand|COMBined|DCSRx1800

SINGLE INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

FREQ SWEEP

CONTINUOUS INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

FREQ SWEEP

START READ:SPECtrum:MODulation[:ALL]?
LIST

NO. OF --
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

ARFCN CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe ARFCn

± 1.8 MHz

CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe TXBand
TX BAND

1119.5063.12 6.284 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: GSM MS Analysis

±1.8 MHZ CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe COMBined

TX BAND

RX BAND CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe RXBand

GSM 900

RX BAND CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe DCSRx1800

DCS 1800

CONFigure:SPECtrum:MODulation:RANGe RXBand
RX BAND

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

RX BAND [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:RXGain:INPut[:MAGNitude] <num_value>

GAIN

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

LIMIT LINE --
FILTER

EDIT LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:MS]:LIMIt:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

--
PAGE UP

--
PAGE DOWN

TRANSIENT CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching[:IMMediate]
SPECTRUM CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:SWITching? ARFCn|TXBand|RXBand|COMBined
CALCulate:LIMit:SPECtrum:SWITching:FAILs? ARFCn|TXBand|RXBand|COMBined

SINGLE INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous OFF; INITiate[:IMMediate]

FREQ SWEEP

CONTINUOUS INITiate<1|2>:CONTinuous ON; INITiate[:IMMediate]

FREQ SWEEP

START READ:SPECtrum:SWITching[:ALL]?
LIST

NO. OF --
BURSTS

SET CONFigure:SPECtrum:SWITching:COUNt <num_value>

MANUAL

SET TO --
STANDARD

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

1119.5063.12 6.285 E-13

Command Assignment: GSM MS Analysis FSIQ

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

MS SFH CONFigure[:MS]:CHANnel:SFH ON | OFF

ON OFF

MEAS [SENSe<1|2>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] DEF | 300 kHz | 1 MHz

BANDWIDTH

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

LIMIT LINE --
FILTER

EDIT LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:MS]:LIMIt:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

--
PAGE UP

--
PAGE DOWN

CONFigure:SPURious[:IMMediate]
SPURIOUS
CALCulate:LIMit:SPURious? TXBand | OTXBand | IDLeband
CALCulate:LIMit:SPURious:FAILs? TXBand | OTXBand | IDLeband

START LIST ABORT;READ:SPURious:STEP?

SGL STEP

CONT LIST READ:SPURious:STEP?

SGL STEP

START READ:SPURious [:ALL]?

LIST

SWEEP --
COUNT

SWP COUNT CONFigure:SPURious:COUNt <num_value>

TX / <>TX

CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe TXBand
TX BAND

CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe OTXBand
<> TX BAND

IDLE CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe IDLeband

MODE

TX BAND CONFigure:SPURious:RANGe COMBined

±2.0 MHZ

SELECT CONFigure:SPURious:STEP:COUNT?
STEP CONFigure:SPURious:STEP<1..26> ON | OFF

ARFCN / see sub menu SETTINGS

FREQUENCY

1119.5063.12 6.286 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: GSM MS Analysis

POWER see sub menu SETTINGS

SETTINGS

MS SFH CONFigure[:MS]:CHANnel:SFH ON | OFF

ON OFF

TX SUPPR CONFigure[:MS]:TXSupp ON | OFF

ON OFF

ANTENNA CONFigure:SPURious:ANTenna CONDucted|RADiated

COND RAD

SWEEPTIME CONFigure[:MS]:SWEeptime STANdard|AUTO

STD AUTO

TRIGGER
see sub menu SETTINGS

--
EDIT

LIMIT LINE --
FILTER

EDIT LIMIT see Basic Instrument - Signal Analysis

LINE

USER LIMIT CONFigure[:MS]:LIMIt:STANdard ON | OFF

ON OFF

--
PAGE UP

--
PAGE DOWN

1119.5063.12 6.287 E-13

Command Assignment: External Mixer FSIQ

External Mixer (Option FSE-B21)

INPUT Key Group

INPUT

MIXER [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer[:STATe] OFF

INTERNAL

MIXER [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer[:STATe] ON
EXTERNAL

BAND LOCK [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BLOCk ON | OFF

ON OFF

SELECT --
BAND

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
BAND

EVEN [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD|EVEN|EODD

HARMONICS

ODD [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic:TYPE ODD|EVEN|EODD

HARMONICS

PORTS [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:PORT 2|3

2 3

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS <value>
BIAS

ACCEPT --
BIAS

AVG CONV [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] <value>

LOSS LOW

AVG CONV [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS:HIGH <value>

LOSS HIGH

CONV LOSS --
TABLE

EDIT --
TABLE

TABLE [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:SELect <name>

NAME

[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:DATA <x1-val>,<y1-val>,<x2-val>,...
VALUES
input of the following values in CVL table:
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer <string>
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber <string>
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:BAND A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:TYPE ODD|EVEN|EODD
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs 2|3
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS <value>
[SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent <string>

INSERT --
LINE

1119.5063.12 6.288 E-13

FSIQ Command Assignment: External Mixer

DELETE --
LINE

COPY --
TABLE

SAVE table is saved with every change of values.

TABLE

PAGE --
UP

PAGE --
DOWN

NEW see softkey EDIT TABLE

TABLE

LOAD --
TABLE

DELETE [SENSe<1|2>:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar
TABLE

PAGE --
UP

PAGE --
DOWN

DEFAULT --
SETTINGS

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:HARMonic <value>
HARMONIC#

PORTS [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:PORT 2|3

2 3

AVG CONV [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:LOSS[:LOW] <num_value>

LOSS

--
BIAS

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:BIAS <num_value>
BIAS

--
BIAS OFF

--
SIGNAL ID

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:SIGNal OFF | ON
SIGNAL ID

[SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:SIGNal OFF | AUTO

AUTO ID

AUTO ID [SENSe<1|2>:]MIXer:THReshold <value>

THRESHOLD

1119.5063.12 6.289 E-13

FSIQ Contents - Programming Examples

Contents - Chapter 7 "Remote Control - Programming

Examples"

7 Programming Examples
Programming via IEC/IEEE Bus...................................................................................................... 7.1
Including IEC-Bus Library for QuickBasic................................................................................ 7.1
Initialization and Default Status ............................................................................................... 7.1
Initiate Controller ........................................................................................................... 7.1
Initiate Instrument.......................................................................................................... 7.1
Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands ..................................................................... 7.2
Switchover to Manual Control.................................................................................................. 7.2
Reading out Instrument Settings ............................................................................................. 7.2
Positioning a Marker and Displaying Values ........................................................................... 7.2
Command synchronization ...................................................................................................... 7.3
Service Request ...................................................................................................................... 7.4
Programming via the RSIB Interface ............................................................................................. 7.6
Visual Basic ............................................................................................................................. 7.6
C / C++ .................................................................................................................................... 7.8
WinWord (Word Basic) ......................................................................................................... 7.10
Excel ...................................................................................................................................... 7.12

1119.5063.12 I.7.1 E-1

Contents - Programming Examples FSIQ

1119.5063.12 I-7.2 E-1

FSIQ Programming Examples

7 Programming Examples

The examples explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more
complex programming tasks.

QuickBASIC has been used as programming language. However, the programs can be translated into
other languages.

Programming via IEC/IEEE Bus

Including IEC-Bus Library for QuickBasic

REM ----------- Include IEC-bus library for quickbasic ----------------
’$INCLUDE: ’c:\qbasic\qbdecl4.bas’

Initialization and Default Status

The IEC bus as well as the settings of the instrument are brought into a defined default status at the
beginning of every program. Subroutines "InitController" and "InitDevice" are used to this
effect.

Initiate Controller
REM ------------ Initiate controller -----------
REM InitController
iecaddress% = 20 ’IEC-bus address of the
’instrument
CALL IBFIND("DEV1", analyzer%) ’Open port to the instrument
CALL IBPAD(analyzer%, iecaddress%) ’Inform controller on instrument
’address
CALL IBTMO(analyzer%, 11) ’Response time to 1 sec
REM ************************************************************************

Initiate Instrument
The IEC-bus status registers and instrument settings of the instrument are brought into the default
status.

REM ------------ Initiate instrument --------------

REM InitDevice
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*CLS") ’Reset status register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*RST") ’Reset instrument
REM*************************************************************************

1119.5063.12 7.1 E-13

Programming Examples FSIQ

Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands

Center frequency, span, and reference level of the instrument are set in this example.

REM -------- Instrument setting commands -------------

CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "FREQUENCY:CENTER 120MHz") ’Center frequency 120 MHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "FREQUENCY:SPAN 10MHZ") ’Span 10 MHz
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "DISPLAY:TRACE:Y:RLEVEL -10dBm")
’Reference level -10dBm
REM ***********************************************************************

Switchover to Manual Control

REM -------- Switch instrument over to manual control -----------
CALL IBLOC(analyzer%) ’Set instrument to Local state
REM ***********************************************************************

Reading out Instrument Settings

The settings made in example 3 are read out here. The abbreviated commands are used.

REM --------- Reading out instrument settings ---------

CFfrequency$ = SPACE$(20) ’Provide text variables (20 characters)
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "FREQ:CENT?") ’Request center frequency
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, CFfrequency$) ’Read value

CFspan$ = SPACE$(20) ’Provide text variables (20 characters)

CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "FREQ:SPAN?") ’Request span
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, CFspan$) ’Read value

RLevel$ = SPACE$(20) ’Provide text variables (20 characters)

CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV?")
’Request reference level
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, RLevel$) ’Read value

REM -------- Display values on the screen -----------

PRINT "Center frequency: "; CFfrequency$,
PRINT "Span: "; CFspan$,
PRINT "Reference level: "; RLevel$,
REM*************************************************************************

Positioning a Marker and Displaying Values

REM -------- Examples of marker functions -----------
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "CALC:MARKER ON;MARKER:MAX")
’Activate marker1 and start peak search
MKmark$ = SPACE$(30) ’Provide text variables (30 characters)
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "CALC:MARK:X?;Y?") ’Request frequency and level
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, MKmark$) ’Read value

REM -------- Display values on the screen -----------

PRINT "Center frequency / level "; MKmark$,
REM **********************************************************************

1119.5063.12 7.2 E-13

FSIQ Programming Examples

Command synchronization
The possibilities for synchronization implemented in the following example are described in Chapter 5,
Section "Command Order and Command Synchronization".

REM -------- Examples of command synchronization ---------

REM The command INITiate[:IMMediate] starts a single sweep if the command
REM INIT:CONT OFF was previously sent. It should be ensured that the next
REM command is only then executed when the entire sweep is complete.
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "INIT:CONT OFF")

REM -------- First possibility: Use of *WAI ---------

CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *WAI")

REM -------- Second possibility: Use of *OPC? ---------

OpcOk$ = SPACE$(2) ’Space for *OPC? - Provide response
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *OPC?")
REM -------- here the controller can service other instruments ---------
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, OpcOk$) ’Wait for "1" from *OPC?

REM -------- Third possibility: Use of *OPC ---------

REM In order to be able touse the service request function in conjugation
REM with a National Instruments GPIB driver, the setting "Disable
REM Auto Serial Poll" must be changed to "yes" by means of IBCONF!

CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*SRE 32") ’Permit service request for ESR

CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*ESE 1") ’Set event-enable bit for
’operation-complete bit
ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady ’Initialization of the
’service request routine
PEN ON
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "ABOR;INIT:IMM; *OPC")

REM Continue main program here

STOP ’End of program

OpcReady:
REM As soon as the sweep has ended, this subroutine is activated
REM Program suitable reaction to the OPC service request.
ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady ’Enable service request routine again
RETURN
REM ***********************************************************************

1119.5063.12 7.3 E-13

Programming Examples FSIQ

Service Request
The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the respective
bits of the transition and enable registers are set.
In order to use the service request function in conjugation with National Instruments GPIB driver, the
setting "Disable Auto Serial Poll" must be changed to "yes" by means of IBCONF!

REM ---- Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case of errors ------
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*CLS") ’Reset Status Reporting System
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*SRE 168") ’Permit service request for
’STAT:OPER,STAT:QUES and ESR
’register
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"*ESE 60") ’Set event-enable bit for
’command, execution, device-
’dependent and query error
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767") ’Set OPERation enable bit for
’all events
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:OPER:PTR 32767") ’Set appropriate OPERation
’Ptransition bits
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:QUES:ENAB 32767") ’Set questionable enable bits
’for all events
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%,"STAT:QUES:PTR 32767") ’Set appropriate questionable
’Ptransition bits
ON PEN GOSUB Srq ’Initialization of the service
’request routine
PEN ON
REM Continue main program here
STOP

A service request is then processed in the service request routine.

Note: the variables userN% and userM% must be pre-assigned usefully!

Srq:
REM ------------ Service request routine -----------
DO
SRQFOUND% = 0
FOR I% = userN% TO userM% ’Poll all bus users
ON ERROR GOTO nouser ’No user existing
CALL IBRSP(I%, STB%) ’Serial poll, read status byte
IF STB% > 0 THEN ’This instrument has bits set
’in the STB
SRQFOUND% = 1
IF (STB% AND 16) > 0 THEN GOSUB Outputqueue
IF (STB% AND 4) > 0 THEN GOSUB Failure
IF (STB% AND 8) > 0 THEN GOSUB Questionablestatus
IF (STB% AND 128) > 0 THEN GOSUB Operationstatus
IF (STB% AND 32) > 0 THEN GOSUB Esrread
END IF
nouser:
NEXT I%
LOOP UNTIL SRQFOUND% = 0
ON ERROR GOTO error handling
ON PEN GOSUB Srq: RETURN ’Enable SRQ routine again
’End of SRQ routine

1119.5063.12 7.4 E-13

FSIQ Programming Examples

Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is effected in
subroutines.

REM -------- Subroutines for the individual STB bits ------

Outputqueue: ’Reading the output buffer
Message$ = SPACE$(100) ’Make space for response
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, Message$)
PRINT "Message in output buffer :"; Message$
RETURN

Failure: ’Read error queue

ERROR$ = SPACE$(100) ’Make space for error variable
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "SYSTEM:ERROR?")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, ERROR$)
PRINT " Error text :"; ERROR$
RETURN

Questionablestatus: ’Read questionable status register

Ques$ = SPACE$(20) ’Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, Ques$)
PRINT "Questionable Status:"; Ques$
RETURN

Operationstatus: ’Read operation status register

Oper$ = SPACE$(20) ’Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "STATus:OPERation:EVENt?")
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, Oper$)
PRINT "Operation Status:"; Oper$
RETURN

Esrread: ’Read event status register

Esr$ = SPACE$(20) ’Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(analyzer%, "*ESR?") ’Read ESR
CALL IBRD(analyzer%, Esr$)
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1) > 0 THEN PRINT "Operation complete"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 4) > 0 THEN GOTO Failure
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 8) > 0 THEN PRINT "Device dependent error"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 16) > 0 THEN GOTO Failure
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 32) > 0 THEN GOTO Failure
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 64) > 0 THEN PRINT "User request"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 128) > 0 THEN PRINT "Power on"
RETURN
REM **********************************************************************

REM ------------- Error routine ----------------

Error handling:
PRINT "ERROR ’Output error message
STOP ’Stop software

1119.5063.12 7.5 E-13

Programming Examples FSIQ

Programming via the RSIB Interface

The following hints apply to both the 16-bit and the 32-bit DLL versions (RSIB.DLL and RSIB32.DLL)
unless an explicit distinction is made.

The RSIB interface supports links to max. 16 measuring instruments at the same time.

Visual Basic
Programming Hints:
• Access to RSIB.DLL functions
To generate Visual Basic control applications, the file RSIB.BAS for 16 bit basic programs or
RSIB32.BAS for 32 bit basic programs (C:/R_S/INSTR/RSIB)is added to a project to enable call-up
of the RSIB.DLLor RSIB32.DLL functions.

• Declaration of DLL functions as procedures

All DLL functions return an integer value. All functions in the file RSIB.BAS are therefore declared as
follows:
Declare Function RSDLLxxx Lib "rsib.dll" ( ... ) As Integer
The function value with the status variable ibsta must be assigned a variable for every call. Since
this value is also returned via a reference parameter of the functions, it is possible to declare the
functions as procedures in the following way:
Declare Sub RSDLLxxx Lib "rsib.dll" ( ... )

• Generation of reply buffer

Since the DLL returns zero-terminated strings as replies, a string of sufficient length must be
generated before functions RSDLLibrd() and RSDLLilrd() are called because Visual Basic
assigns the strings a length value which is not updated by the DLL. The string length data can be
generated with one of the following:

- Dim Rd as String * 100

- Dim Rd as String
Rd = Space$(100)

1119.5063.12 7.6 E-13

FSIQ Programming Examples

• Reading trace data in real format

When the function declarations of the file RSIB.BAS are used, replies from the instrument can be
assigned to only one string. Trace data can be read faster and processing is simpler, however, if
data are read in real format into float arrays. Data can be assigned to an array with float values as
follows:

Function declaration of RSDLLibrd() in RSIB.BAS:

Declare Function RSDLLibrd Lib "rsib.dll" (ByVal ud%, ByVal Rd$,
ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer

To read data directly into an array with real numbers, the string variable must be replaced by a
suitable structure which can be defined as follows:
Type TRACEREAL
len As String * 6 ’ Header of real data "#42000"
Points(500) As Single ’ Float-Array
End Type

Note: the structure must be defined in a code module.

To be able to transfer the structure as a reference parameter to the DLL, a special function
declaration must be created.
eg Declare Function RSDLLibrdTraceReal Lib "rsib.dll" Alias "RSDLLibrd"
(ByVal ud%, rd as Any, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer

Using this function, trace data can be read into a reply buffer of the type TRACEREAL. This
mechanism is operational only for 16-bit Basic versions. With 32-bit Basic programs the header and
useful data must be read by means of two separate function calls.

Programming examples:

• In the following example, the start frequency of the local instrument is queried.
Dim ibsta As Integer ’ Status variable
Dim iberr As Integer ’ Error variable
Dim ibcntl As Long ’ Count variable
Dim ud As Integer ’ Handle for measuring instrument
Dim Cmd As String ’ Command string
’ Setting up link to measuring instrument
ud = RSDLLibfind("@local", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
If (ud < 0) Then
’ error handling
End If
’ Sending query command to instrument
Cmd = "SENS:FREQ:STAR?"
If (RSDLLibwrt(ud, Cmd, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) And IBSTA_ERR) Then
’ error handling
End If
’ Making space for response
Response = Space$(100)
’ Querying response of instrument
If (RSDLLibrd(ud, Response, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) And IBSTA_ERR) Then
’ error handling
End If

1119.5063.12 7.7 E-13

Programming Examples FSIQ

• In the following example, save and recall of the instrument settings is made.
Dim ibsta As Integer ’ Status variable
Dim iberr As Integer ’ Error variable
Dim ibcntl As Long ’ Count variable
Dim ud As Integer ’ Handle for measuring instrument
Dim Cmd As String ’ Command string

’ Setting up link to measuring instrument

ud = RSDLLibfind("@local", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
If (ud < 0) Then
’ error handling
End If

’ Querying instrument settings

Cmd = "SYST:SET?"
RSDLLibwrt(ud, Cmd, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) And IBSTA_ERR
’ Saving response of instrument in file
RSDLLibrdf(ud, "C:\db.sav", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)

’ Resetting the instrument

RSDLLibwrt(ud, "*RST", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)

’ and recalling the previous settings

’ Disabling END message for this purpose
RSDLLibeot(ud, 0, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) And IBSTA_ERR
’ Sending command first
RSDLLibwrt(ud, "SYST:SET ", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) And IBSTA_ERR
’ Enabling the END message
RSDLLibeot(ud, 1, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl) And IBSTA_ERR
’ and sending the data
RSDLLibwrtf(ud, "C:\db.sav", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)

C / C++
Programming Hint:
Access to RSIB.DLL functions
The functions of RSIB.DLL are declared in the header file RSIBC.H. The DLL functions can be
incorporated in a C/C++ program in three different ways:
1. By generating the import library RSIB.LIB by means of IMPLIB.EXE from RSIB.DLL and
adding the library to the project.
2. By specifying the functions of RSIB.DLL in the module definition file (*.def) under IMPORTS.
3. By loading the library with the LoadLibrary() function while the program is running and
determining the pointers of the DLL functions with GetProcAddress(). Prior to program end,
RSIB.DLL must be freed with function FreeLibrary().

For the first two ways of incorporating a DLL, the latter will be automatically loaded immediately
before the start of the application. At the end of the program, the DLL will be freed provided it is not
used by other applications.

1119.5063.12 7.8 E-13

FSIQ Programming Examples

Programming example:
In the following C program, a single sweep is started on the instrument with the IP address
89.1.1.200 and a marker is set to the maximum level. Before the maximum level can be determined,
the sweep must be terminated. Synchronization to the end of the sweep is made by triggering a
service request at the end of the sweep with command "*OPC" (operation complete). The control
program waits for the SRQ with the function RSDLLWaitSrq(). Then the maximum level is
determined ("CALC:MARK:MAX") and the level is read out ("Y?"). Prior to readout a check is made
with serial poll whether data are available (MAV bit set in status register

#define MAX_RESP_LEN 100

short ibsta, iberr;

unsigned long ibcntl;
short ud;
short srq;
char Maxlevel[MAX_RESP_LEN];
char spr;
// Determining the handle for the instrument
ud = RSDLLibfind( "89.1.1.200", &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl );

// If instrument exists
if ( ud >= 0 ) {

// Setting timeout for RSDLLWaitSrq() to 10 seconds

RSDLLibtmo( ud, 10, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl );

// Activate SRQ generation through event status register (ESR)

// and enable ESB bit of SRE register
RSDLLibwrt( ud, "*ESE 1;*SRE 32", &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl );

// Set single sweep, trigger sweep

// and generate SRQ at the end of the sweep with "*OPC"
RSDLLibwrt( ud, "INIT:CONT off;INIT;*OPC", &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl );

// Wait for SRQ (end of sweep)

RSDLLWaitSrq( ud, &srq, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl );

// If sweep is terminated
if (srq) {

// Set marker to first maximum and query level

RSDLLibwrt( ud, "CALC:MARK:MAX;Y?", &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl );
// Check if data are available (MAV bit in status register set)
RSDLLibrsp( ud, &spr, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl );
if (spr & 0x10) {
// then read out data
RSDLLilrd( ud, MaxPegel, MAX_RESP_LEN, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl );
}
}
// end connection to instrument
RSDLLibonl (ud, 0, &ibsta, &iberr, &ibcntl ) ;
}

else {
; // Error - instrument not found
}

1119.5063.12 7.9 E-13

Programming Examples FSIQ

WinWord (Word Basic)

Programming Hints:
• Access to RSIB.DLL functions
The functions of DLL RSIB.DLL can be utilized from a WinWord macro (WinWord 2.0/6.0) with
certain restrictions. The function declarations for WinWord are defined in the module rsibwb.bas
and must be copied into the macro when a WinWord macro is created.

• Examples of macros in the file RSIB.DOT

The following programming examples show examples of the macros SetStartFreq and
GetStartFreq, by which setting commands are sent to the instrument or instrument settings can
be queried. The two macros are contained in the document pattern rsib.dot.

• Restrictions for WinWord macros

Parameters of the integer type can be defined only as value parameters in the declaration of the DLL
functions with the statement Declare. However, the functions of DLL RSIB.DLL expect, for the
variables ibsta, iberr and ibcntl, references via which the DLL can return values to the caller.
To be able to specify variable references for these parameters, the functions are to be declared with
the string parameter type.
By declaring the variables ibsta, iberr and ibcntl as strings, attempts to access undefined
memory ranges are avoided. This method, however, makes the querying of parameters more
difficult. For example, the error code is returned in the event of an error in the variable iberr. In this
process, the two bytes of the integer value are copied into the string. WinWord however does not use
the length information to handle strings but expects a zero at the end of the string. Therefore, for an
integer value whose low-byte is equal to zero, the high-byte will not be queried since the low-byte with
the zero is regarded as the end of the string.

Low-Byte High-Byte
00h XXh

Interpretation as integer → XX00h

Interpretation as string → ""

Problem of variable declaration in WinWord

Querying error variables with values other than zero is nevertheless possible since error codes with
the first character being less than 100h can be queried (iberr=ASC(iberr$)).
Querying the status variable, on the other hand, is not possible in the manner described since the
low-byte of the status variable is always zero. The status byte is however returned also by the DLL
function value so that an error check can be made.
For the use of the DLL RSIB.DLL from WinWord, it would be expedient to generate a DLL whose
interface functions are adapted to the capabilities of WinWord.

1119.5063.12 7.10 E-13

FSIQ Programming Examples

Programming examples:

• Sending a setting command

The macro SetStartFreq is used as an example for setting the start frequencyof an instrument
with the IP address 89.1.1.200 . The macro first reads the desired value from an input box. The value
is then set with the DLL function RSDLLibwrt() via an SCPI command.

’ Declaration from file "rsibwb.bas":

Declare Function RSDLLibfind Lib "rsib.dll"(udName$, ibsta$, iberr$,
ibcntl$) As Integer
Declare Function RSDLLibwrt Lib "rsib.dll"(ud As Integer, Wrt$, ibsta$,
iberr$, ibcntl$) As Integer

Sub MAIN

Dim ud, status

Dim cmd$, value$
Dim ibsta$, iberr$, ibcntl$

’ Query the frequency to be set:

value$ = InputBox$("Enter the start frequency:", "R&S-IECBUS-
Interface")

’ Generate SCPI command

cmd$ = "SENS:FREQ:STAR" + value$

// Determine the handle for the instrument

ud = RSDLLibfind("89.1.1.200", ibsta$, iberr$, ibcntl$)
If(ud < 0) Then
MsgBox "Error in function RSDLLibfind" + Chr$(10) + "Errorcode:
" + Str$(Asc(iberr$)), ’error’, 48
Goto End
End If

’ Send command to instrument parser

status = RSDLLibwrt(ud, cmd$, ibsta$, iberr$, ibcntl$)
If(status <> 0) Then
MsgBox "Error in function RSDLLibwrt" + Chr$(10) + "Errorcode:
" + Str$(Asc(iberr$)), ’error’, 48
Goto End
End If

End:

End Sub

• Querying instrument setups

The macro GetStartFreq is used as an example for querying the start frequency of the local
instrument and reading it into the current document. First, the SCPI query command is sent to the
instrument with the function RSDLLibwrt(), then the value is fetched with the function
RSDLLibrd(). A string of sufficient length is not required for reading the output buffer since
WinWord, like language C, processes the string length by using the terminating zero rather and not a
prefixed length information as in Visual Basic.

1119.5063.12 7.11 E-13

Programming Examples FSIQ

’ Declaration from file "rsibwb.bas"

Declare Function RSDLLibfind Lib "rsib.dll"(udName$, ibsta$, iberr$,
ibcntl$) As Integer
Declare Function RSDLLibwrt Lib "rsib.dll"(ud As Integer, Wrt$, ibsta$,
iberr$, ibcntl$) As Integer
Declare Function RSDLLilrd Lib "rsib.dll"(ud As Integer, Rd$, cnt As
Long, ibsta$, iberr$, ibcntl$) As Integer

Sub MAIN

Dim ud, status

Dim buffer$, cmd$
Dim ibsta$, iberr$, ibcntl$

// Determine the handle for the instrument

ud = RSDLLibfind("@local", ibsta$, iberr$, ibcntl$)
If(ud < 0) Then
MsgBox "Error in function ibfind" + Chr$(10) + "Errorcode: " +
Str$(Asc(iberr$)), ’error’, 48
Goto End
End If

’ Generate SCPI command for querying the start frequency

cmd$ = "SENS:FREQ:STAR?"

’ Send command to instrument parser

status = RSDLLibwrt(ud, cmd$, ibsta$, iberr$, ibcntl$)
If(status <> 0) Then
MsgBox "Error in function ibwrt" + Chr$(10) + "Errorcode: " +
Str$(Asc(iberr$)), ’error’, 48
Goto End
End If

’ Read reply from parser

status = RSDLLilrd(ud, buffer$, 10, ibsta$, iberr$, ibcntl$)
If(status <> 0) Then
MsgBox "Error in function ibrd" + Chr$(10) + "Errorcode: " +
Str$(Asc(iberr$)), ’error’, 48
Goto End
End If

’ Insert reply into document

Insert buffer$ + "Hz"

End:
End Sub

Excel
The use of DLL functions in the macro language of Excel 4.0 has not been examined.
Excel 5.0 uses VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) as macro language, which can create Excel macros
same as Visual Basic programs.

1119.5063.12 7.12 E-13

FSIQ Contents - Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces

Contents - Chapter 8 "Maintenance and Instrument

Interfaces"

8 Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces

Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 8.1
Mechanical Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 8.1
Electrical Maintenance............................................................................................................. 8.1
Testing the Level Measuring Accuracy ......................................................................... 8.1
Testing the Frequency Accuracy................................................................................... 8.1
Instrument Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 8.2
IEC Bus Interface .................................................................................................................... 8.2
Interface Characteristics................................................................................................ 8.2
Bus Lines....................................................................................................................... 8.3
Interface Functions........................................................................................................ 8.4
IEC Bus Messages........................................................................................................ 8.4
Interface Messages ....................................................................................................... 8.4
Instrument Messages .................................................................................................... 8.5
RS-232-C Interface.................................................................................................................. 8.6
Interface Characteristics................................................................................................ 8.6
Signal Lines ................................................................................................................... 8.6
Transmission Parameters ............................................................................................. 8.7
Handshake .................................................................................................................... 8.8
RSIB Interface Functions....................................................................................................... 8.10
Variables ibsta, iberr, ibcntl ......................................................................................... 8.11
List of Interface Functions ........................................................................................... 8.12
Description of Interface Functions............................................................................... 8.13
User Interface (USER)........................................................................................................... 8.19
Printer Interface (LPT) ........................................................................................................... 8.20
Measurement Converters (PROBE CODE)........................................................................... 8.21
Probe Connector (PROBE POWER)..................................................................................... 8.21
AF-Output (AF OUTPUT) ...................................................................................................... 8.22
IF Output 21.4 MHz (21.4 MHz OUT) .................................................................................... 8.22
Video Output (VIDEO OUT) .................................................................................................. 8.22
Reference Output/Input (EXT REF IN/OUT) ......................................................................... 8.22
Sweep Output (SWEEP) ....................................................................................................... 8.22
External Trigger Input (EXT TRIGGER/GATE) ..................................................................... 8.22
Noise Source Control (NOISE SOURCE) ............................................................................. 8.22
External Keyboard (KEYBOARD) .......................................................................................... 8.23
Mouse Connector (MOUSE).................................................................................................. 8.23
Monitor Connector (MONITOR)............................................................................................. 8.23

1119.5063.12 I-8.1 E-1

Contents - Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

1119.5063.12 8.2 E-13

FSIQ Maintenance

8 Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces

The following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the FSIQ and on the instrument
interfaces.
The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde & Schwarz service centers can be found at the
beginning of this manual.

Maintenance

Mechanical Maintenance
The FSIQ does not require any mechanical maintenance. The front panel can be cleaned from time to
time using a damp, soft cloth.

Electrical Maintenance
Testing the Level Measuring Accuracy
Due to the total calibration facility by means of the built-in calibration generator, high long-term stability
of the level measuring characteristics is guaranteed. It is recommended to check the measuring
accuracy every two years according to the performance test. Reprogramming of the correction data by a
R&S servicing shop is necessary, if tolerances are exceeded.

Testing the Frequency Accuracy

The frequency accuracy of the reference oscillator is to be checked once a year according to section 5.
It is not necessary to perform this test if the instrument is operated using an external reference.

Test utility: Frequency counter of signal generator

Test setup: Measurement with frequency counter

Connect frequency counter to the REF OUT/IN socket at the rear of the
instrument.
Measurement with signal generator
Apply signal with 1GHz, -10dBm to RFin.

Measurement: Settings on FSIQ:

[CENTER 1000 MHz]
[SPAN 0 MHz]
[REF REF LEVEL -10 dBm]
[MARKER COUNT ON
COUNTER RESOL 0.1 Hz]

Activate internal frequency counter (marker function)

1119.5063.12 8.1 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

Instrument Interfaces

IEC Bus Interface

The standard instrument is equipped with an IEC/IEEE Bus connector. An IEEE 488 interface connector
is located on the rear panel of the FSIQ. An external controller for remote control of the instrument can
be connected via the IEEE 488 interface connector using a shielded cable.
A further optional IEC/IEEE-bus interface can be installed in the FSIQ and is assigned to the computer.
This interface can be controlled by standard software (R&S-Basic, QUICK-Basic, etc.). It enables the
remote control of the instrument via an external link to the two IEC/IEEE-bus interfaces and in addition
the control of other equipment via the IEC/IEEE-bus connector at the rear of the unit (eg control of a
complete test setup).
The following section describes the first IEC Bus interface over which the instrument can be remotely
controlled. The characteristics of the PC2A/PC-AT controller interface depend upon the user-installed
software running on the processor and is, therefore, not described here.

Interface Characteristics

• 8-bit parallel data transfer

• bidirectional data transfer
• three-line handshake
• high data transfer rate of max. 350 kbyte/s
• up to 15 instruments can be connected
• maximal length of the interconnecting cables 15 m (single connection, 2m)
• wired-OR connection if several instruments are connected in parallel.

ATN IFC NRFD EOI DIO3 DIO1

SHIELD SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 DIO2

12 1
24 13

LOGIC GND GND(10) GND(8) GND(6) DIO8 DIO6

GND(11) GND(9) GND(7) REN DIO7 DIO5

Fig. 8-1 Pin assignment of IEC-Bus interface

1119.5063.12 8.2 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

Bus Lines

1. Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8.

The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. DIO1 is the least significant,
DIO8 the most significant bit.

2. Control bus with 5 lines.

IFC (Interface Clear),
active low resets the interfaces of the devices connected to the default setting.

ATN (Attention),
active low signals the transmission of interface messages
inactive high signals the transmission of device messages.

SRQ (Service Request),

active low enables a device connected to send a service request to the controller.

REN (Remote Enable),

active low permits the switch over to remote control.

EOI (End or Identify),

has two functions in connection with ATN:
active low marks the end of data transmission when ATN=high
active low triggers a parallel poll when ATN=low.

3. Handshake bus with three lines.

DAV (Data Valid),
active low signals a valid data byte on the data bus.

NRFD (Not Ready For Data),

active low signals that one of the devices connected is not ready for data transfer .

NDAC (Not Data Accepted),

active low as long as the device connected is accepting the data present on the data bus.

1119.5063.12 8.3 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

Interface Functions

Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC bus can be equipped with different interface
functions. Table 8-1 lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument.

Table 8-1 Interface functions

Control character Interface function

SH1 Handshake source function (source handshake), full capability

AH1 Handshake sink function (acceptor handshake), full capability

L4 Listener function, full capability, deaddressed by MTA.

T6 Talker function, full capability, ability to respond to serial poll, deaddressed by MLA

SR1 Service request function (Service Request), full capability

PP1 Parallel poll function, full capability

RL1 Remote/Local switch over function, full capability

DC1 Reset function (Device Clear), full capability

DT1 Trigger function (Device Trigger), full capability

C12 Controller function, capability to send interface messages, to accept or relinquish the
controller function

IEC Bus Messages

The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus can be divided into two groups:
– interface messages
and
– instrument messages.

Interface Messages
Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC Bus when the "ATN" control line is
active (LOW). They are used for communication between controller and instruments and can only be
sent by the controller which currently has control of the IEC Bus.

1119.5063.12 8.4 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

Universal Commands
The universal commands are encoded 10 - 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus
without addressing.

Table 8-2 Universal Commands

Command QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument

DCL (Device Clear) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(20)) Aborts the processing of the commands just received
and sets the command processing software to a
defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
settings.

IFC (Interface Clear) IBSIC (controller%) Resets the interfaces to the default setting.

LLO (Local Lockout) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(17)) The LOC/IEC ADDR key is disabled.

SPE (Serial Poll Enable) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(24)) Ready for serial poll.

SPD (Serial Poll Disable) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(25)) End of serial poll.

PPU (Parallel Poll IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(21)) End of the parallel-poll state.
Unconfigure)

Addressed Commands

The addressed commands are encoded 00 - 0F hex. They are only effective for instruments addressed
as listeners.

Table 8-3 Addressed Commands

Command QuickBASIC command Effect on the instrument

SDC (Selected Device Clear) IBCLR (device%) Aborts the processing of the commands just received
and sets the command processing software to a
defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
setting.

GTL (Go to Local) IBLOC (device%) Transition to the "Local" state (manual control).

PPC (Parallel Poll Configure) IBPPC (device%, data%) Configure instrument for parallel poll. Additionally, the
QuickBASIC command executes PPE/PPD.

Instrument Messages
Instrument messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus when the "ATN" control line is not
active. ASCII code is used.
Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in Chapter 5. The commands are listed
and explained in detail in Chapter 6.

1119.5063.12 8.5 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

RS-232-C Interface
The standard FSIQ is equipped with two serial interfaces (RS-232-C). The interfaces can be set up
manually in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu in the COM PORT1/2 table.

Each of the active RS-232-C interfaces is assigned to one of the 9-pin connectors located on the rear
panel. Interface 1 is assigned to the connector COM1 and Interface 2 is assigned to the connector
COM2.

Interface Characteristics
• Serial data transmission in asynchronous mode
• Bidirectional data transfer via two separate lines
• Transmission rate selectable from 110 to 19200 baud
• Logic ’0’ signal from+3 V to +15 V
• Logic ’1’ signal from -15 V to -3 V
• An external instrument (controller) can be connected.
• Software handshake (XON, XOFF)
• Hardware handshake

RxD DTR
DCD TxD SG

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9

RTS RI
DSR CTS

Fig. 8-2 Pin assignment of the RS-232-C interface

Signal Lines

1. Data lines
The data transmission is bit-serial in ASCII code starting with the LSB. Two lines, RxD and TxD are
necessary as the minimum requirement for transmission; however, no hardware handshake is
possible. For handshaking, only the XON/XOFF software handshake protocol can be used .

RxD (Receive Data)

Input, LOW = logic ’1’, HIGH = logic ’0’.
Data line, local terminal receives data from remote station.

TxD (Transmit Data)

Output, LOW = logic ’1’, HIGH = logic ’0’.
Data line, local terminal transmits data to remote station.

1119.5063.12 8.6 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

2. Control lines
DCD (Data Carrier Detect),
Not used in FSIQ.
Input; active LOW.
Using this signal, the local terminal recognises that the modem of the remote station receives valid
signals with sufficient level. DCD is used to disable the receiver in the local terminal and prevent
reading of false data if the modem cannot interpret the signals of the remote station.

DTR (Data Terminal Ready),

Output, active LOW,
Indicates that the local terminal is ready to receive data.

DSR (Data Set Ready),

Input, active LOW,
Indicates that the remote station is ready to receive data.

RTS (Request To Send),

Output, active LOW.
Indicates that the local terminal wants to transmit data.

CTS (Clear To Send),

Input, active LOW.
Used to tell the local terminal that the remote station is ready to receive data.

RI (Ring Indicator),
Not used in FSIQ.
Input, active LOW.
Used by a modem to indicate that a remote station wants to establish a connection.

Transmission Parameters
To ensure error-free data transmission, the parameters of the instrument and the controller must have
the same settings. The parameters are defined in the SETUP-GENERAL SETUP menu.

Transmission rate the following transmission rates can be set in the analyzer:
(baud rate) 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200.

Data bits Data transmission is in 7- or 8-bit ASCII code. The first bit
transmitted is the LSB (least significant bit).

Start bit Each data byte starts with a start bit. The falling edge of the start
bit indicates the beginning of the data byte.

Parity bit In order to detect errors, a parity bit may be transmitted. No

parity, even parity or odd parity may be selected. In addition, the
parity bit can be set to logic ’0’ or to logic ’1’.

Stop bits The transmission of a data byte is terminated by 1, 1,5 or 2 stop bits.

Example:
Transmission of character ’A’ (41 hex) in 7-bit ASCII code,
with even parity and 2 stop bits:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
Bit 01 Bit 02...08 Bit 09 Bit 10...11
Start bit Data bits Parity bit Stop bits

1119.5063.12 8.7 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

Handshake

Software handshake
In the software handshake mode of operation, the data transfer is controlled using the two control
characters XON / XOFF.

The instrument uses the control character XON to indicate that it is ready to receive data. If the receive
buffer is full, it sends the XOFF character via the interface to the controller. The controller then interrupts
the data output until it receives another XON from the instrument. The controller indicates to the
instrument that it is ready to receive data in the same way.

Cable required for software handshake

The connection of the instrument with a controller for software handshake is made by crossing the data
lines. The following wiring diagram applies to a controller with a 9-pin or 25-pin configuration.

Instrument Controller

1 1
DSR 6 6 DSR
RxD 2 2 RxD
RTS 7 7 RTS
TxD 3 3 TxD
CTS 8 8 CTS
DTR 4 4 DTR
9 9
GND 5 5 GND

DSUB connector female / 9 poles DSUB connector female / 9 poles

Instrument Controller / PC

1
14
1 2 TxD
DSR 6 15
RxD 2 3 RxD
RTS 7 16
TxD 3 4 RTS
CTS 8 17
DTR 4 5 CTS
9 18
GND 5 6 DSR
19
7 GND
DSUB connector female / 9 poles 20 DTR
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13

DSUB connector female / 25 poles

Fig. 8-3 Wiring of the data lines for software handshake

1119.5063.12 8.8 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

Hardware handshake
For hardware handshake, the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data via the lines DTR and
RTS. A logic ’0’ on both lines means ’ready’ and a logic ’1’ means ’not ready’. The RTS line is always
active (logic ’0’) as long as the serial interface is switched on. The DTR line thus controls the readiness
of the instrument to receive data.
The readiness of the remote station to receive data is reported to the instrument via the CTS and DSR
line. A logic ’0’ on both lines activates the data output and a logic ’1’ on both lines stops the data output
of the instrument. The data output takes place via the TxD line.
Cable for hardware handshake
The connection of the instrument to a controller is made with a so-called zero modem cable. Here, the
data, control and acknowledge lines must be crossed. The following wiring diagram applies to a
controller with a 9-pin or 25-pin configuration.

Instrument Controller / PC

1 1
DSR 6 6 DSR
RxD 2 2 RxD
RTS 7 7 RTS
TxD 3 3 TxD
CTS 8 8 CTS
DTR 4 4 DTR
9 9
GND 5 5 GND

DSUB connector, 9 poles / female DSUB connector, 9 poles / female

Instrument Controller / PC

1
14
1 2 TxD
DSR 6 15
RxD 2 3 RxD
RTS 7 16
TxD 3 4 RTS
CTS 8 17
DTR 4 5 CTS
9 18
GND 5 6 DSR
19
DSUB connector, 9 poles / female 7 GND
20 DTR
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13

DSUB connector, 25 poles / female

Fig. 8-4 Wiring of the data, control and acknowledge lines for hardware handshake

1119.5063.12 8.9 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

RSIB Interface Functions

The RSIB interface allows the control of FSIQ by Windows applications WinWord and Excel or by Visual
C++ and VisualBasic programs. The functions for the programming of control applications are provided
by DLLs RSIB32.DLL (for 32-bit applications) and RSIB.DLL (for 16-bit applications).

Control applications may run locally on the measuring instrument as well as on a remote controller in a
network. With local control, the name ’@local’ is specified for link setup by means of function
RSDLLibfind(). If ’@local’ is not specified, the RSIB.DLL interprets the name as an IP address
and attempts to set up a link to the device via the Winsock interface.

Remote controller
(Windows NT or Windows 95) FSIQ
EMI TEST RECEIVER . 20 Hz . . . 7 GHz . ESI 1088.7490 07
SYSTEM FREQUENCY LEVEL DATA ENTRY
CENTER / SPAN/ REF / -d Bm
PRESET CAL FREQ ZOOM UNIT 7 8 9 V GHz
s

dBm
DIS PLAY INFO ST ART ST OP RANGE 4 5 6 mV MHz
ms

dB
1 2 3 µV kHz
CONFIGURATION MARKER LINES µs

MODE NORMAL SEARCH D LINES dB..

0 . - nV Hz
ns

SETUP DELTA MKR LIMIT S

CLR BA CK EXP

HARDCOPY TRACE SWEEP DATA VARIATION

TRIGGER
START 1 2

HOLD ST EP

SETT ING 3 4
SWEEP /
SCAN
MEMORY
SAVE

STATUS
SRQ
MENU
RBW

VBW
RECALL

CONFIG
Local
Remote REMOTE

LOCAL
SWT

COUPLING /
RUN INPUT

AF OUTPUT RF INPUT 2 20Hz... 1GHz PROBE POWER GEN OUTPUT 50 W PROBE / CODE RF INPUT 1
applications
control via
+30 dBm + 30 d Bm DC0 V
MAX MAX MAX

50 50
W W
REM OTE
M ADE IN GER MAN Y

on instrument
network

16-bit application RSIB DLL 16-bit app.

32-bit application
RSIB network interface

RSIB32.DLL RSIB32.DLL 32-bit app.

RSIB.DLL

To access the measuring instruments via the RSIB interface the DLLs should be installed in
thecorresponding directories:
• RSIB.DLL in Windows NT system directory or control application directory.
• RSIB32.DLL in Windows NT system32 directory or control application directory.
The DLLs are already installed in the corresponding directories on the measuring instruments.

For the different programming languages, files exist containing the declarations for the DLL functions
and the error code definitions.

Visual Basic (16 bit): ’RSIB.BAS’ (C:/R_S/Instr/RSIB)

Visual Basic (32 bit): ’RSIB32.BAS’ (C:/R_S/Instr/RSIB)
C: ’RSIBC.H’ (C:/R_S/Instr/RSIB)
Winword: ’RSIBWB.BAS’ (C:/R_S/Instr/RSIB)

Thus, the RSIB directory features a program ‘RSIBCNTR.EXE’ with SCPI commands which can be sent
to the instrument by the RSIB interface. This program can be used as a test for the function of the
interface. Transit-time module VBRUN3200.DLL in the path or the Windows directory are required.

This following sections describe all functions of DLL 'RSIB.DLL’ orby means of which control
applications can be written.

1119.5063.12 8.10 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

Variables ibsta, iberr, ibcntl

Same as with the National Instrument interface, successful execution of a command can be checked by
means of the variables ibsta, iberr and ibcntl. To this end, references to the three variables are
transferred to all RSIB functions. In addition, the status word ibsta is returned as a function value by all
functions.
Status word ibsta
All functions send back a status word that provides information on the status of the RSIB interface. The
following bits are defined:

Bit name Bit Hex code Description

ERR 15 8000 This bit is set if an error occurs during a function call. If this bit is set, iberr
contains an error code which specifies the error.

TIMO 14 4000 This bit is set if a timeout occurs during a function call. A timeout may occur in
the following situations:
• while waiting for an SRQ with the function RSDLLWaitSrq().
• if no acknowledgment is received for data sent to an instrument with
RSDLLibwrt() or RSDLLilwrt().
• if no response from server to a data request with function RSDLLibrd() or
RSDLLilrd().

CMPL 8 0100 This bit is set if the reply of the IEC/IEEE-bus parser is completely read. If a
reply of the parser is read with the function RSDLLilrd() and the buffer
length is not sufficient, the bit is cleared.

Error variable iberr

If the ERR bit (8000h) is set in the status word, iberr contains an error code that specifies the error.
The RSIB has error codes of its own independent of the National Instrument interface.

Error Error code Description

IBERR_DEVICE_REGISTER 1 RSIB.DLL cannot register any new device.

IBERR_CONNECT 2 Link to the device has failed.
IBERR_NO_DEVICE 3 An interface function was called with an invalid device handle.
IBERR_MEM 4 No free memory available.
IBERR_TIMEOUT 5 Timeout has occurred.
IBERR_BUSY 6 The RSIB interface is blocked by a function not yet completed.
Windows is not blocked, for example, by function RSDLLibrd() if data are still
to be transmitted in response to this function. In this case a new call is
possible. Further calls are however rejected by RSIB.DLL with error code
IBERR_BUSY.
IBERR_FILE 7 Error in reading from or writing to a file.

Count variable - ibcntl

The variable ibcntl is updated with the number of bytes transmitted on every read and write function call.

1119.5063.12 8.11 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

List of Interface Functions

The DLL functions are matched to the interface functions for IEC/IEEE-bus programming from National
Instruments. Functions supported by the DLLs are listed in the following table.

Function Description

RSDLLibfind() Provides a handle for accessing a device.

RSDLLibwrt() Sends a string terminated with a null to a device.

RSDLLilwrt() Sends a specific number of bytes to a device.

RSDLLibwrtf() Sends the contents of a file to a device.

RSDLLibrd() Reads data from a device into a string.

RSDLLilrd() Reads a specific number of bytes from a device.

RSDLLibrdf() Reads data from a device into a file.

RSDLLibtmo() Sets timeout period for RSIB functions.

RSDLLibsre() Switches a device to local or remote.

RSDLLibloc() Switches a device temporarily to local.

RSDLLibeot() Enables/disables END message in write operations.

RSDLLibrsp() Starts a serrial poll and reads the status byte

RSDLLibonl() Switches the instrument online/offline

RSDLLTestSrq() Checks if a device has generated an SRQ.

RSDLLWaitSrq() Waits until a device generates an SRQ.

1119.5063.12 8.12 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

Description of Interface Functions

RSDLLibfind()
The function provides a handle for accessing the instrument with the name udName.
VB format: Function RSDLLibfind (ByVal udName$, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&)
As Integer
C format: short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibfind( char far *udName, short far
*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: udName Instrument name
Example: ud = RSDLLibfind ("@local", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
The function must be called before all other interface functions.
The function supplies a handle as a return value. The handle must be specified in all functions for
accessing the instrument. If no instrument with the name udName is found, the handle will take on a
negative value.
The local link on the instrument is established with the name ’@local’. For setting up a link via a
network, on the other hand, the IP address of the instrument must be given (eg ’89.1.1.200’)

RSDLLibwrt
The function sends data to the instrument with the handle ud.
VB format: Function RSDLLibwrt (ByVal ud%, ByVal Wrt$, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibwrt( short ud, char far *Wrt, short
far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl )
Parameter: ud Device handle
Wrt String sent to the instrument.
Example: RSDLLibwrt(ud, "SENS:FREQ:STAR?", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
The function allows setting and query commands to be sent to the measuring instruments. The function
RSDLLibeot() is used for defining whether the data are interpreted as a complete command.

RSDLLilwrt
The function sends Cnt bytes to the instrument with the handle ud.
VB format: Function RSDLLilwrt (ByVal ud%, ByVal Wrt$, ByVal Cnt&,
ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: short FAR PASCAL RSDLLilwrt( short ud, char far *Wrt,
unsigned long Cnt, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr,
unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: ud Device handle
Wrt String sent to the IEC/IEEE-bus parser.
Cnt Number of bytes sent to the instrument.
Example: RSDLLilwrt (ud, ’......’, 100, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
This function sends data to an instrument same as function RSDLLibwrt() but with the difference that
binary data, too, can be sent. The length of the data is determined not by a zero-terminated string but by
the definition of Cnt bytes. If the data are to be terminated with EOS (0Ah), the EOS byte must be
appended to the string.

1119.5063.12 8.13 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

RSDLLibwrtf
The function sends the contents of a file to the instrument with the handle ud.
VB format: Function RSDLLibwrtf (ByVal ud%, ByVal file$, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibwrtf( short ud, char far *Wrt, short
far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl )
Parameter: ud Device handle
file File whose contents are sent to the instrument.
Example: RSDLLibrdf(ud, "C:\db.sav", ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
The function allows setting and query commands to be sent to the measuring instruments. The function
RSDLLibeot() is used for defining whether the data are interpreted as a complete command.

RSDLLibrd()
The function reads data from the instrument into the string Rd with the handle ud.
VB format: Function RSDLLibrd (ByVal ud%, ByVal Rd$, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibrd( short ud, char far *Rd, short far
*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl )
Parameter: ud Device handle
Rd String into which the read data are copied.
Example: RSDLLibrd (ud, Rd, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
This function fetches replies of the IEC/IEEE-bus parser in response to a query command.
For this, a string of sufficient length must be generated when programming in Visual Basic. This can be
accomplished in the definition of the string or with the command Space$().
Generation of a string of the length 100: - Dim Rd as String * 100
- Dim Rd as String
Rd = Space$(100)

RSDLLilrd
The function reads Cnt bytes from the instrument with the handle ud.
VB format: Function RSDLLilrd (ByVal ud%, ByVal Rd$, ByVal Cnt&, ibsta%,
iberr%, ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: short FAR PASCAL RSDLLilrd( short ud, char far *Rd, unsigned
long Cnt, short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long
far *ibcntl )
Parameter: ud Device handle
cnt Maximum number of bytes copied to target string Rd by the
DLL.
Example: RSDLLilrd (ud, RD, 100, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
The function reads data from an instrument same as function RSDLLibrd() but with the difference that
here the maximum number of bytes is allowed to be copied to target string Rd to be defined with Cnt.
Writing beyond a string can thus be prevented with this function. The number of bytes cut off is lost.

1119.5063.12 8.14 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

RSDLLibrdf()
Reads data from the instrument into the file file with the handle ud.
VB format: Function RSDLLibrdf (ByVal ud%, ByVal file$, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: short FAR PASCAL RSDLLibrdf( short ud, char far *file, short
far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl )
Parameter: ud Device handle
file File into which the read data are written.
Example: RSDLLibrdf (ud, c:\db.sav, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
This function serves to read replies of the IEC/IEEE-bus parser that are larger than 64 KB. The file
name may include the drive and path.

RSDLLibtmo
The function defines the timeout for an instrument. The default value for the timeout is 5 seconds.
VB format: Function RSDLLibtmo (ByVal ud%, ByVal tmo%, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibtmo( short ud, short tmo, short far
*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl )
Parameter: ud Device handle
tmo Time in seconds
Example: RSDLLibtmo (ud, 10, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
Timeout can occur in the following cases:
• Waiting for an SRQ with the function RSDLLWaitSrq().
• Waiting for an acknowledgment for data sent to an instrument with RSDLLibwrt() or
RSDLLilwrt().
• Waiting for a reply to a data request made with function RSDLLibrd() or RSDLLilrd().

RSDLLibsre
The function switches the instrument to LOCAL or REMOTE mode.
VB format: Function RSDLLibsre (ByVal ud%, ByVal v%, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibsre( short ud, short v, short far
*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: ud Device handle
v Instrument status
0 - local
1 - remote
Example: RSDLLibsre (ud, 0, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)

1119.5063.12 8.15 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

RSDLLibloc
The function switches the instrument temporarily to LOCAL mode.
VB format: Function RSDLLibloc (ByVal ud%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&) As
Integer
C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibloc( short ud, short far *ibsta, short
far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: ud Device handle
Example: RSDLLibloc (ud, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
After switchover the instrument can be manually operated from the front panel. On the next access to
the instrument by means of one of the functions of the RSIB.DLL, the instrument is switched again to the
REMOTE state.

RSDLLibeot
The function enables the END message after write operations or disables it.
VB format: Function RSDLLibeot (ByVal ud%, ByVal v%, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibeot( short ud, short v, short far
*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: ud Device handle.
v 0 - no END message
1 - send END message
Example: RSDLLibeot (ud, 1, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
If the END message is disabled, the data of a command can be sent by means of several successive
write function calls. The END message must be enabled prior to the last data block.

RSDLLibrsp
The function carries out a Serial Poll and outputs the instrument status.
VB format: Function RSDLLibrsp(ByVal ud%, spr%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&)
As Integer
C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibrsp( short ud, char far* spr, short far
*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: ud Device handle.
spr Reference to status byte
Example: RSDLLibrsp(ud, spr, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)

1119.5063.12 8.16 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

RSDLLibonl
The function switches the instrument to the 'online' or 'offline' state. When switching to ‘offline’ the
interface is enabled and the device handle made invalid. The next call of RSDLLibfind sets up the
communication again.
VB format: Function RSDLLibonl (ByVal ud%, ByVal v%, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLibonl( short ud, short v, short far
*ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: ud Device handle.
v Status of instrument
0 - local
1 - remote
Example: RSDLLibonl(ud, 0, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)

RSDLLTestSRQ
The function checks the status of the SRQ bit.
VB format: Function RSDLLTestSrq (ByVal ud%, Result%, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLTestSrq( short ud, short far *result,
short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: ud Device handle
result Reference to an integer value in which the library
returns the status of the SRQ bit.
0 - no SRQ
1 - SRQ active, instrument has output a service request
Example: RSDLLTestSrq (ud, result%, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl)
The function corresponds to the function RSDLLWaitSrq but with the difference that RSDLLTestSRQ
returns immediately the current status of the SRQ bit whereas RSDLLWaitSrq waits for an SRQ to
occur.

1119.5063.12 8.17 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

RSDLLWaitSrq
The function waits until the instrument triggers an SRQ with the handle ud.
VB format: Function RSDLLWaitSrq (ByVal ud%, Result%, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&) As Integer
C format: void FAR PASCAL RSDLLWaitSrq( short ud, short far *result,
short far *ibsta, short far *iberr, unsigned long far *ibcntl)
Parameter: ud Device handle
result Reference to an integer value in which the library
returns the status of the SRQ bit.
0 - no SRQ occurred within the timeout
1 - SRQ occurred within the timeout
Parameter: RSDLLWaitSrq( ud, result, ibsta, iberr, ibcntl );
The function waits until one of the two following events occurs:
• The instrument triggers an SRQ.
• No SRQ occurs during the timeout defined with RSDLLibtmo().

1119.5063.12 8.18 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

User Interface (USER)

The user interface, located on the rear panel of the FSIQ, is a 25 pin Cannon connector which provides
access to the two user ports (Port A and Port B). Each port is 8 bits wide (A0 - A7 and B0 -B7) and can
be configured either as output or as input. The voltage levels are TTL levels (Low < 0,4 V, High > 2 V).

In addition, an internal +5 V power supply voltage is provided. The maximum load current is 100 mA.

The pin assignments for the USER connector can be seen in the following diagram:

GND GND A7 A5 A3 A1
+5 V GND GND A6 A4 A2 A0

13 1

25 14

+5 V B6 B4 B2 B0
B7 B5 B1
B3

Fig. 8-5 Pin assignments for the USER connector.

The configuration of the user ports takes place in the SETUP menu (SETUP key) in the GENERAL
SETUP sub-menu.

1119.5063.12 8.19 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

Printer Interface (LPT)

The 25-pin LPT connector on the rear panel of the FSIQ is provided for the connection of a printer.. The
LPT interface is compatible with the CENTRONICS printer interface.

PE ACK D6 D4 D2 D0
SELECT BUSY D7 D5 D3 D1 STROBE

13 1

25 14

GND GND GND INIT AUTOFEED

GND
GND GND ERROR
GND GND
SELECT IN

Pin Signal Input (I) Description

Output (O)
1 STROBE O Pulse for transmitting a data byte, min. 1µs pulse width
(active LOW)
2 D0 O Data Line 0
3 D1 O Data Line 1
4 D2 O Data Line 2
5 D3 O Data Line 3
6 D4 O Data Line 4
7 D5 O Data Line 5
8 D6 O Data Line 6
9 D7 O Data Line 7
10 ACK I Indicates that the printer is ready to receive the next byte.
(active LOW)
11 BUSY I Signal is active when the printer cannot accept data.
(active HIGH)
12 PE I Signal is active when the paper tray is empty.
(active HIGH)
13 SELECT I Signal is active when the printer is selected.
(active HIGH)
14 AUTOFEED O When signal is active, the printer automatically performs a
linefeed after each line.
(active LOW)
15 ERROR I This signal is high when the printer has no paper, is not
selected or has an error status.
(active LOW)
16 INIT O Initialise the printer.
(active LOW)
17 SELECT IN O If signal is active, the codes DC1/DC3 are ignored by the
printer.
(active LOW).
18 - 25 GND Ground connection.

Fig. 8-6 Pin assignments for the LPT connector.

1119.5063.12 8.20 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

Measurement Converters (PROBE CODE)

The PROBE CODE connector is used for supplying power to measurement converters and the providing
the correct conversion factor coding to the FSIQ. Using it, the conversion factors for high-impedance
probes, current converters and antennas can be encoded in 10dB steps. In addition, the quantity to be
measured (field strength, current and voltage) is also passed to the FSIQ. Active converters can be
supplied with ±10 V via the PROBE CODE connector. The following R&S accessories are deliverable
with the applicable coding:
· Wide band dipole 20...80 MHz HUF-Z2
· HF current converter 100 kHz..30 MHz ESH2-Z1
· VHF current converter 20...300 MHz ESV-Z1
· Current converter 20 Hz...100 MHz EZ-17
· Preamplifier 20...1000 MHz ESV-Z2.

The pins of the PROBE CODE connector are assigned as follows:

G F Pin Signal
E
D A ground
H M
B +10 V, max. 50 mA
J L C
K A C µV/m (elec. field strength)
B
D µA
E 10 dB
F 20 dB
G 40 dB
H 80 dB
K - 10 V, max. 50 mA
M factor sign inversion

Fig 8-7 Pin assignment for the 12-pin Tuchel connector.

A 12-pin connector is used for coding (manufacturer: Tuchel, R&S part number 0018.5362.00, Tuchel
type number: T3635/2). The input pins for implementing the code are connected to ground.

Example: An antenna for measurement of the electromagnetic field strength has an antenna factor of
10 dB, i.e., a field strength of 10 dBµV/m produces a voltage at the RF input of 0 dBµV.
-> Pins C and E are connected to ground.

Probe Connector (PROBE POWER)

To allow the connection of probes, the FSIQ provides the PROBE POWER power connector. It delivers
the power supply voltages +15 V and -12,6 V and ground.
The connector is also suited for powering the high-impedance probes from Hewlett Packard.

Pin Signal
1
1 GND
3 2
2 -12,6 V; max 150 mA
3 +15 V; max 150 mA

1119.5063.12 8.21 E-13

Instrument Interfaces FSIQ

AF-Output (AF OUTPUT)

A miniature telephone jack can be used at the AF OUTPUT connector to connect an external
loudspeaker, a headphone set or, e.g., a LF voltmeter. The internal resistance is 10 ohms and the
output voltage can be controlled in the MARKER DEMOD menu. When a jack is plugged in, the internal
loudspeaker is automatically turned off.

IF Output 21.4 MHz (21.4 MHz OUT)

The 21,4 MHz IF signal of the FSIQ is available at the IF 21.4 MHz OUT BNC connector. The bandwidth
corresponds to the selected bandwidth for a resolution bandwidth between 2 kHz and 10 MHz. For a
resolution bandwidth below 2 kHz, the bandwidth of the output is 5 kHz.
The signal level at the IF output is 0 dBm for signals which correspond to the selected reference level.

Video Output (VIDEO OUT)

The video output delivers the logarithmic envelope curve of the IF signal independent of the level scaling
on the display screen (linear or logarithmic). The bandwidth of the video signal always corresponds to
one-half of the IF bandwidth and is not limited by the video filter in the measurement path.

Reference Output/Input (EXT REF IN/OUT)

When the FSIQ is operated with the internal reference, the internal 10 MHz reference signal is also
available at the REF IN/OUT connector and thus provides the capability of, e.g., synchronisation of
external instruments to the FSIQ. The level is 1 V RMS at 50 ohms source impedance.
For operation with an external reference, this connector becomes an input connector. The internal
reference oscillator is then synchronised to the reference applied to the connector. The reference
frequency can be between 1 and 16 MHz in 1 MHz steps. The necessary level is > 0 dBm.
The selection of internal or external references takes place in the SETUP menu.

Sweep Output (SWEEP)

The SWEEP BNC connector delivers a saw-tooth voltage between - 5V and + 5 V which, for the
frequency spectrum display, is proportional to the instantaneous frequency. The selected start frequency
corresponds to a voltage of -5 V and the stop frequency corresponds to a voltage of +5 V.

External Trigger Input (EXT TRIGGER/GATE)

The EXT TRIG/GATE connector is used for controlling the measurement via an external signal.
Trigger voltage range:: -5 V ... +5 V

Noise Source Control (NOISE SOURCE)

Using the NOISE SOURCE connector, an external noise source can be switched on/off, in order, e.g., to
measure the noise figure of Units Under Test (UUTs). Usual noise sources require a +28 V signal to be
turned on. At 0 V, they are turned off. These switching voltages are delivered by the connector.

1119.5063.12 8.22 E-13

FSIQ Instrument Interfaces

External Keyboard (KEYBOARD)

A 5-pin DIN connector is provided to allow connecting an external keyboard. Because of its low
interference radiation, the PSA-Z1 keyboard is recommended (Order No. 1009.5001.31). However, any
other multi-function keyboard may also be used.

Pin Signal
1 Keyboard Clock
2 Data
3 Free
4 Ground
5 +5-V-Power Supply

Fig. 8-8 Pin assignments of the KEYBOARD connector.

Mouse Connector (MOUSE)

Pin Signal
1 MOUSEDATA
2 NC
3 MOUSEGND
4 MOUSEVD5
5 MOUSECLK
6 NC

Fig 8-9 Pin assignments for the MOUSE connector.

Monitor Connector (MONITOR)

1 Pin Signal
5
10 6 1 R
15 11
2 G
3 B
4 MID2
5 NC
6 R-GND
7 G-GND
8 B-GND
9 NC
10 GND
11 MID0
12 MID1
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 NC

Fig. 8-10 Pin assignments of the MONITOR connector.

1119.5063.12 8.23 E-13

FSIQ Contents - Error Messages

Contents - Chapter 9 "Error Messages"

9 List of Error Messages

SCPI-Specific Error Messages........................................................................................................ 9.1
Command Error - Faulty command; sets bit 5 in the ESR register. ........................................ 9.1
Execution Error - Error on execution of a command; sets bit 4 in the ESR register................ 9.4
Device Specific Error; sets bit 3 in the ESR register ............................................................... 9.7
Query Error - Error in data request; sets bit 2 in the ESR register .......................................... 9.7

1119.5063.12 I-9.1 E-1

Contents - Error Messages FSIQ

1119.5063.12 I-9.2 E-1

FSIQ List of Error Messages

9 List of Error Messages

The following list contains the error messages for errors occurring in the instrument. The meaning of
negative error codes is defined in SCPI, positive error codes mark errors specific of the instrument.
Error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system in the remote
control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. The answer format of FSIQ to
the command is as follows:
<error code>, "<error text with queue query>; <remote control command concerned>"
The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional.
Example:
The command "TEST:COMMAND" generates the following answer to the query SYSTem:ERRor? :
-113,"Undefined header;TEST:COMMAND"

The table contains the error code in the left-hand column. In the right-hand column the error text being
entered into the error/event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face. Below the error text, there
is an explanation as to the respective error.

SCPI-Specific Error Messages

No Error

Error text in the case of queue poll

Error code
Error explanation

0 No error
This message is output if the error queue does not contain any entries.

Command Error - Faulty command; sets bit 5 in the ESR register.

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-100 Command Error

The command is faulty or invalid.

-101 Invalid Character

The command contains an invalid sign.
Example: A header contains an ampersand, "SENSe&".

-102 Syntax error

The command is invalid.
Example: The command contains block data the instrument does not accept.

-103 Invalid separator

The command contains an impermissible sign instead of a separator.
Example: A semicolon is missing after the command.

1119.5063.12 9.1 E-1

List of Error Messages FSIQ

Continuation: Command Error

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-104 Data type error

The command contains an invalid value indication.
Example: ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting.

-105 GET not allowed

A Group Execute Trigger (GET) is within a command line.

-108 Parameter not allowed

The command contains too many parameters.
Example: Command SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer permits only one frequency indication.

-109 Missing parameter

The command contains too few parameters.
Example: The command SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer requires a frequency indication.

-110 Command header error

The header of the command is faulty.

-111 Header separator error

The header contains an impermissible separator.
Example: the header is not followed by a "White Space", "*ESE255"

-112 Program mnemonic too long

The header contains more than 12 characters.

-113 Undefined header

The header is not defined for the instrument.
Example: *XYZ is undefined for every instrument.

-114 Header suffix out of range

The header contains an impermissible numeric suffix.
Example: SENSe3 does not exist in the instrument.

-120 Numeric data error

The command contains a faulty numeric parameter.

-121 Invalid character in number

A number contains an invalid character.
Example: An "A" in a decimal number or a "9" in an octal number.

-123 Exponent too large

The absolute value of the exponent is greater than 32000.

-124 Too many digits

The number includes too many digits.

-128 Numeric data not allowed

The command includes a number which is not allowed at this position.
Example: The command INPut:COUPling requires indication of a text parameter.

-130 Suffix error

The command contains a faulty suffix.

-131 Invalid suffix

The suffix is invalid for this instrument.
Example: nHz is not defined.

-134 Suffix too long

The suffix contains more than 12 characters.

1119.5063.12 9.2 E-1

FSIQ List of Error Messages

Continuation: Command Error

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-138 Suffix not allowed

A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command.
Example: The command *RCL does not permit a suffix to be indicated.

-140 Character data error

The command contains a faulty text parameter

-141 Invalid character data

The text parameter either contains an invalid character or it is invalid for this command.
Example: Write error with parameter indication;INPut:COUPling XC.

-144 Character data too long

The text parameter contains more than 12 characters.

-148 Character data not allowed

The text parameter is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command.
Example: The command *RCL requires a number to be indicated.

-150 String data error

The command contains a faulty string.

-151 Invalid string data

The command contains a faulty string.
Example: An END message has been received prior to the terminating apostrophe.

-158 String data not allowed

The command contains a valid string at a position which is not allowed.
Example: A text parameter is set in quotation marks, INPut:COUPling "DC"

-160 Block data error

The command contains faulty block data.

-161 Invalid block data

The command contains faulty block data.
Example: An END message was received prior to reception of the expected number of data.

-168 Block data not allowed

The command contains valid block data at an impermissible position.
Example: The command *RCL requires a number to be indicated.

-170 Expression error

The command contains an invalid mathematical expression.

-171 Invalid expression

The command contains an invalid mathematical expression.
Example: The expression contains mismatching parentheses.

-178 Expression data not allowed

The command contains a mathematical expression at an impermissible position.

-180 Macro error

A faulty macro has been defined, or an error has occurred during execution of a macro.

-181 Invalid outside macro definition

A macro parameter placeholder was encountered outside of a macro definition.

-183 Invalid inside macro definition

A macro definition is syntactically wrong.

-184 Macro parameter error

A command inside the macro definition has the wrong number or type of parameters.

1119.5063.12 9.3 E-1

List of Error Messages FSIQ

Execution Error - Error on execution of a command; sets bit 4 in the ESR

register

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-200 Execution error

Error on execution of the command.

-201 Invalid while in local

The command is not executable while the device is in local due to a hard local control.
Example: The device receives a command which would change the rotary knob state, but the device is in
local so the command can not be executed.

-202 Settings lost due to rtl

A setting associated with hard local control was lost when the device changed to LOCS from REMS or to
LWLS from RWLS.

-210 Trigger error

Error on triggering the device.

-211 Trigger ignored

The trigger (GET, *TRG or trigger signal) was ignored because of device timing considerations.
Example: The device was not ready to respond.

-212 Arm ignored

An arming signal was ignored by the device.

-213 Init ignored

Measurement initialisation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress.

-214 Trigger deadlock

The trigger source for the initiation of measurement is set to GET and subsequent measurement is
received. The measurement cannot be started until a GET is received, but the GET would cause an
interrupted-error)

-215 Arm deadlock

The trigger source for the initiation of measurement is set to GET and subsequent measurement is
received. The measurement cannot be started until a GET is received, but the GET would cause an
interrupted-error.

-220 Parameter error

The command contains a faulty or invalid parameter.

-221 Settings conflict

There is a conflict between setting of parameter value and instrument state.

-222 Data out of range

The parameter value lies out of the permissible range of the instrument.

-223 Too much data

The command contains too many data.
Example: The instrument does not have sufficient storage space.

-224 Illegal parameter value

The parameter value is invalid.
Example: The text parameter is invalid , TRIGger:SWEep:SOURce TASTe

1119.5063.12 9.4 E-1

FSIQ List of Error Messages

Continuation: Execution Error

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-230 Data corrupt or stale

The data are incomplete or invalid.
Example: The instrument has aborted a measurement.

-231 Data questionable

The measurement accuracy is suspect.

-240 Hardware error

The command cannot be executed due to problems with the instrument hardware.

-241 Hardware missing

Hardware is missing.
Example: An option is not fitted.

-250 Mass storage error

A mass storage error occured.

-251 Missing mass storage

The mass storage is missing.
Example: An option is not installed.

-252 Missing media

The media is missing.
Example: There is no floppy in the floppy disk drive.

-253 Corrupt media

The media is corrupt.
Example: The floppy is bad or has the wrong format.

-254 Media full

The media is full.
Example: There is no room on the floppy.

-255 Directory full

The media directory is full.

-256 File name not found

The file name cannot be found on the media.

-257 File name error

The file name is wrong.
Example: An attempt is made to copy to a duplicate file name.

-258 Media protected

The media is protected.
Example: The write-protect tab on the floppy is present.

-260 Expression error

The expression contains an error.

-261 Math error in expression

The expression contains a math error.
Example: Divide-by-zero.

1119.5063.12 9.5 E-1

List of Error Messages FSIQ

Continuation: Execution Error

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-270 Macro error

Error on the execution of a macro.

-271 Macro syntax error

The macro definition contains a syntax error.

-272 Macro execution error

The macro definition contains an error.

-273 illegal macro label

An illegal macro label is defined in the *DMC command.
Example: The label is too long. The label is identical with the common command header or contains an
invalid header syntax.

-274 Macro parameter error

The macro definition improperly uses a macro parameter placeholder.

-275 Macro definition too long

The macro definition is too long.

-276 Macro recursion error

The command sequence defined by the macro is trapped in a program loop.
Example: The event that would allow the loop to be exited does not occur.

-277 Macro redefinition not allowed

The macro label defined in the *DMC command is already defined elsewhere.

-278 Macro header not found

The macro label in the *GMC? query is not yet defined.

-280 Program error

Error on the execution of a down-loaded program.

-281 Cannot create program

The program cannot be created.

-282 illegal program name

The name of the programm is illegal.
Example: The name relates to a non-existing program.

-283 illegal variable name

The inputted variable does not exist in the program.

-284 Program currently running

The desired operation is not possible while the program is running.
Example: A running program cannot be deleted.

-285 Program syntax error

The down-loaded program contains a syntax error.

-286 Program runtime error

1119.5063.12 9.6 E-1

FSIQ List of Error Messages

Device Specific Error; sets bit 3 in the ESR register

Error code Error test in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-300 Device-specific error

FSIQ-specific error not defined in greater detail.

-310 System error

This error message suggests an error within the instrument. Please inform the R&S Service.

-311 Memory error

Error in the instrument memory.

-312 PUD memory lost

Loss of the protected user data stored using the *PUD command.

-313 Calibration memory lost

Loss of the non-volatile calibration data stored using the *CAL? command.

-314 Save/recall memory lost

Loss of the non-volatile data stored using the *SAV command.

-315 Configuration memory lost

Loss of the non-volatile configuration data stored by the instrument.

-330 Self-test failed

The selftest could not be executed.

-350 Queue overflow

This error code is entered in the queue instead of the actual error code if the queue is full. It indicates that
an error has occurred but not been accepted. The queue can accept 5 entries.

Query Error - Error in data request; sets bit 2 in the ESR register

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-400 Query error

General error occurring when data are requested by a query.

-410 Query INTERRUPTED

The query has been interrupted.
Example: After a query, the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely.

-420 Query UNTERMINATED

The query is incomplete.
Example: The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data.

-430 Query DEADLOCKED

The query cannot be processed.
Example: The input and output buffers are full, the instrument cannot continue operation.

-440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response

A query is in the same command line after a query which requests an indefinite response.

1119.5063.12 9.7 E-1

FSIQ Index

10 Index

Note:
- The softkeys are listed alphabetically under the keyword "Softkey".
- For each softkey, the page in chapter 6 containing the description of the corresponding remote
command is quoted in addition.
- The assignment between IEEE-bus commands and softkeys is described in Chapter 6, Section
"Table of Softkeys with IEC/IEEE-Bus Command Assignment".
- Chapter 6 contains an alphabetical list of all IEEE-bus commands

A C
Abort Calibrate..........................................................................4.9
hardcopy ................................................................ 4.42 Capture buffer .................................................. 4.216, 4.231
macro ..................................................................... 4.41 CCITT filter..................................................................4.182
ACP, absolut/relativ .................................................... 4.102 CD-ROM installation......................................................1.34
Addressed command...................................................... 8.5 CDPD............................................................... 4.207, 4.209
Administrator identification............................................ 1.23 Center frequency................................................ 4.70, 4.234
Adjacent channel power measurement ......................... 4.97 Channel
AF demodulation...................................................4.18, 4.19 bandwidth ...............................................................4.99
Alpha (roll-off factor) ................................................... 4.214 power measurement .............................................4.101
Alphanumeric parameter, editing .................................. 3.17 spacing ...................................................................4.99
AM signal.................................................................... 4.186 Characters, special .........................................................6.2
AM-demodulated time signal....................................... 4.186 Clear/Write ..................................................................4.139
Amplitude droop (sum error) ....................................... 4.228 Colon.............................................................................5.14
Amplitude modulation ................................................. 4.201 COM1/2 interface ..........................................................4.36
Analog demodulation .................................................. 4.179 Comma .........................................................................5.14
Analysis bandwidth..................................................... 4.234 Command
Ascii #........................................................................... 5.14 #..............................................................................5.14
Attenuator (tracking generator) ................................... 4.278 addressed .................................................................8.5
Audio signal ................................................................ 4.186 alphabetical list .....................................................6.217
AUI connector............................................................... 1.43 assignment ...........................................................6.233
Average ............................................................4.140, 4.190 colon .......................................................................5.14
carrier power ........................................................ 4.249 comma ....................................................................5.14
single sweep ........................................................ 4.141 header.....................................................................5.10
sweep count ......................................................... 4.140 line ..........................................................................5.12
value, display ....................................................... 4.121 list .........................................................................6.217
Averaging .........................................................4.200, 4.262 long form.................................................................5.11
continuous sweep................................................. 4.140 overlapping execution .............................................5.17
summary markers................................................. 4.249 query.......................................................................5.12
question mark ................................................ 5.12, 5.14
quotation mark ........................................................5.14
recognition ..............................................................5.16
B sequence ................................................................5.17
Bandwidth short form................................................................5.11
analog .................................................................. 4.264 structure....................................................................5.9
analog demodulation ............................................ 4.179 suffix .......................................................................5.11
analog IF filters..................................................... 4.180 synchronization .......................................................5.17
channel................................................................... 4.99 syntax elements ......................................................5.14
IF.......................................................................... 4.264 univeral .....................................................................8.5
occupied............................................................... 4.106 white space.............................................................5.14
resolution.............................................................. 4.153 Common commands .......................................................6.4
video .................................................................... 4.154 CONDition register part .................................................5.19
Bandwidth/symbol period product ............................... 4.214 Configuration.................................................................4.20
Beeper.......................................................................... 4.39 save ........................................................................4.50
Block data..................................................................... 5.14 Constellation diagram..................................................4.221
BNC connector ............................................................. 1.42 Controller function .........................................................1.23
Boolean parameter ....................................................... 5.13 Copy file ........................................................................4.53
BPSK.......................................................................... 4.208 Coupling......................................................................4.152
BT............................................................................... 4.214 DC or AC ..............................................................4.183
Burst search ............................................................... 4.268 default settings......................................................4.155
define....................................................................4.158
CT2 .............................................................................4.209
Cursor keys...................................................................3.14

1119.5063.12 10.1 E-1

Index FSIQ

D E
D Lines .............................................................4.126, 4.252 EDGE..........................................................................4.204
D8PSK........................................................................ 4.208 Electrostatic discharge ..................................................1.20
DQPSK....................................................................... 4.208 ENABle register part......................................................5.19
Data set Enhancement labels........................................................3.6
creation .................................................................. 4.58 Entry
partial ..................................................................... 4.57 abortion...................................................................3.16
recall ...................................................................... 4.58 alphanumeric parameters........................................3.17
save ....................................................................... 4.54 numeric parameter ..................................................3.16
Date.............................................................................. 4.38 table........................................................................3.18
dB*/MHz ....................................................................... 4.80 termination ..............................................................3.16
dBµA/MHz .................................................................... 4.80 Entry window.................................................................3.15
dBµA/mMHz ................................................................. 4.80 mouse control .........................................................3.22
dBµV/MHz .................................................................... 4.80 ERMES standard ........................................................4.209
dBµV/mMHz ................................................................. 4.80 Error
dBmV/MHz ................................................................... 4.80 constellation diagram ............................................4.226
DC coupling ................................................................ 4.183 frequency ..............................................................4.225
DCL .............................................................................. 5.16 frequency (FSK)....................................................4.226
DCS1800.................................................................... 4.209 magnitude .............................................................4.225
Decision point ............................................................. 4.223 magnitude (FSK)...................................................4.226
DECT standard........................................................... 4.208 magnitude of error vector ......................................4.226
Deemphasis................................................................ 4.185 phase....................................................................4.225
Delete file ..................................................................... 4.53 real and imaginary part..........................................4.225
Delta marker .....................................................4.110, 4.244 vector diagram ......................................................4.226
step size ............................................................... 4.114 Error messages...............................................................9.1
Demodulation ............................................................... 4.92 Error signal..................................................................4.225
analog .................................................................. 4.179 Error-queue query .........................................................5.33
bandwidth............................................................. 4.179 ESE (event status enable register)................................5.22
digital.................................................................... 4.208 ESR (event status register) ...........................................5.22
Detector Ethernet Adapter ...........................................................1.42
autopeak .............................................................. 4.145 EVENt register part .......................................................5.19
average ................................................................ 4.146 Event status enable register (ESE) ...............................5.22
max peak.............................................................. 4.145 Event status register (ESR)...........................................5.22
min peak............................................................... 4.145 Ext Trig/Gate, input .......................................................8.22
RMS ..................................................................... 4.146 External triggering .......................................................4.267
sample.................................................................. 4.146 Eye diagram ..................................................... 4.219, 4.223
Device reset (overall)...................................................... 4.2 Eye length ...................................................................4.220
Differential PSK .......................................................... 4.205
Digital demodulator..................................................... 4.208
Digital modulation methods......................................... 4.202
Digital standard........................................................... 4.209 F
Directory FFT-Filter ....................................................................4.156
create ..................................................................... 4.53 File
rename ................................................................... 4.53 copy ........................................................................4.53
Disable delete......................................................................4.53
front panel .............................................................. 3.19 rename....................................................................4.53
keyboard ................................................................ 3.19 sort..........................................................................4.53
Diskette, format ............................................................ 4.53 Filter
Display input......................................................................4.212
configuration............................................................. 4.3 reference...............................................................4.212
mean value........................................................... 4.121 Find burst ....................................................................4.268
range .................................................................... 4.237 Find sync.....................................................................4.269
rms value.............................................................. 4.121 Firmware
Display mode.................................................................. 4.3 update............................................................ 1.36, 4.40
full screen................................................................. 3.9 version ....................................................................4.13
split Screen .............................................................. 3.8 FLEX...........................................................................4.209
Display width (eye diagram)..............................4.220, 4.223 Floating averaging.......................................................4.200
DMSK ......................................................................... 4.208 FM signal ....................................................................4.187
Driver software ............................................................. 1.37 FM-demodulated time signal .......................................4.187
ethernet adapter ..................................................... 1.43 Frame length ...............................................................4.232
firmware ................................................................. 1.36 Free-running trigger.....................................................4.266
printer ..................................................................... 1.28 Frequency
second IEC/IEEE-bus interface .............................. 1.38 axis labelling .............................................................3.8
service pack ........................................................... 1.37 carrier....................................................................4.234
Double dagger .............................................................. 5.14 counter....................................................................4.94
DQPSK....................................................................... 4.208 demodulated signal .................................... 4.218, 4.223
Dynamic range ........................................................... 4.236 error ......................................................................4.225
error (FSK)................................................. 4.226, 4.230
error (sum error)....................................................4.228
line ........................................................................4.125

1119.5063.12 10.2 E-1

FSIQ Index

measurement window............................................. 4.67 K

offset ............................................................4.71, 4.234
setting .................................................................. 4.234 Key
setting accuracy ................................................... 4.234 CAL...........................................................................4.9
shift keying ........................................................... 4.206 CENTER ...................................................... 4.70, 4.234
zoom ...................................................................... 4.76 CONFIG..................................................................4.52
Front panel COUPLING ................................................ 4.152, 4.264
disable.................................................................... 3.19 cursor......................................................................3.14
keyboard emulation ........................................3.21, 3.23 D LINES..................................................... 4.125, 4.251
FSK ..................................................................4.206, 4.209 DELTA ....................................................... 4.110, 4.244
deviation.....................................................4.214, 4.230 DISPLAY...................................................................4.3
deviation error ...................................................... 4.230 HOLD......................................................................3.19
FTP operation............................................................... 1.53 INFO .......................................................................4.13
Full screen...................................................................... 3.9 INPUT .....................................................................4.83
Fuse ............................................................................. 1.21 LIMITS ....................................................... 4.129, 4.254
LOCAL ....................................................................4.41
MENU .....................................................................3.12
G MKR........................................................... 4.123, 4.250
GET (Group Execute Trigger)....................................... 5.16 MODE .......................................................... 4.18, 4.175
Group mid-points ........................................................ 4.215 NORMAL ..................................................... 4.88, 4.241
GSM ........................................................................... 4.209 numeric keypad.......................................................3.13
PRESET ........................................................ 4.2, 6.209
RANGE ........................................................ 4.82, 4.196
H RECALL..................................................................4.58
Handshake ..................................................................... 8.8 REF ............................................................. 4.77, 4.236
Hardcopy roll-key ....................................................................3.14
abort ....................................................................... 4.42 SAVE ......................................................................4.54
comments............................................................... 4.47 SEARCH...............................................................4.115
format ..................................................................... 4.49 SETTINGS..............................................................4.44
output device.......................................................... 4.48 SETUP....................................................................4.20
position................................................................... 4.46 SPAN......................................................................4.74
settings................................................................... 4.44 START (frequency) .................................................4.67
start ........................................................................ 4.42 START (hardcopy) ....................................... 4.42, 6.111
Hardware options, installed........................................... 4.13 STEP ......................................................................3.20
Hardware settings, indication.......................................... 3.5 STOP......................................................................4.69
Header.......................................................................... 5.10 SWEEP...................................................... 4.162, 4.265
Help line editor.............................................................. 3.17 TRACE....................................................... 4.138, 4.261
High pass AF filter ...................................................... 4.182 TRIGGER .................................................. 4.160, 4.266
USER......................................................................4.62
Keyboard
I connection ..............................................................1.25
connector ................................................................8.23
I/Q diagram................................................................. 4.221
disable ....................................................................3.19
I/Q imbalance (sum error) ........................................... 4.229
external ...................................................................3.21
I/Q modulation ............................................................ 4.290
I/Q offset (sum error) .................................................. 4.229
IEC bus L
address .................................................................. 4.34
interface ................................................................... 8.2 Level
interface functions .................................................... 8.4 control, external ....................................................4.289
IF bandwidth............................................................... 4.264 line ............................................................. 4.127, 4.252
IF filter ........................................................................ 4.180 maximum ................................................................4.78
Indication mixer.......................................................................4.84
hardware settings ..................................................... 3.5 offset (tracking generator) .....................................4.278
instrument settings ................................................... 3.6 range.......................................................................4.82
marker information.................................................... 3.5 reference.................................................................4.77
Inphase component .................................................... 4.221 unit..........................................................................4.79
Input LF demodulation............................................................4.92
buffer...................................................................... 5.15 Limit line
Ext Trig/Gate .......................................................... 8.22 copy ........................................................... 4.132, 4.256
external reference................................................... 8.22 delete......................................................... 4.132, 4.256
filter ...................................................................... 4.212 edit........................................................................4.133
Instrument functions ....................................................... 4.1 save ........................................................... 4.137, 4.260
Instrument settings, indication ........................................ 3.6 select ......................................................... 4.130, 4.254
Interfaces........................................................................ 8.2 shift .......................................................................4.137
functions value .......................................................... 4.136, 4.260
IEC-bus .............................................................. 8.4 Line
RSIB ................................................................ 8.10 display 1,2.................................................. 4.127, 4.252
Interrupt ........................................................................ 5.32 frequency 1, 2 .......................................................4.127
IST flag......................................................................... 5.22 limit ............................................................ 4.130, 4.253
reference.................................................... 4.127, 4.252
threshold .................................................... 4.127, 4.252
time 1, 2 ..................................................... 4.127, 4.252

1119.5063.12 10.3 E-1

Index FSIQ

Login (NT controller) ..................................................... 1.23 MODACOM .................................................................4.209

Logout (NT controller)................................................... 1.23 Mode.............................................................................4.18
Low pass AF filter ....................................................... 4.182 signal analysis ........................................................4.66
Lower case ..................................................................... 6.2 tracking generator .................................................4.277
LPT inteface ................................................................. 8.20 vector signal analysis............................................4.174
Modification level of modules ........................................4.13
Modulation
error ......................................................................4.224
M filter.........................................................................4.99
Macro I/Q.........................................................................4.290
abort ....................................................................... 4.41 parameters................................................. 4.181, 4.211
definition................................................................. 4.64 summary ...............................................................4.188
start ........................................................................ 4.62 Monitor
Magnitude connecting ..............................................................4.39
capture buffer ....................................................... 4.217 connection ..............................................................1.26
error............................................................4.225, 4.226 connector ................................................................8.23
error (FSK) ........................................................... 4.230 Mouse
error (sum error) ................................................... 4.228 connection ..............................................................1.24
measurement signal ............................................. 4.218 connector ................................................................8.23
peak ..................................................................... 4.248 control .....................................................................3.22
reference signal.................................................... 4.218 display elements .....................................................3.23
Maintenance ................................................................... 8.1 MSK ................................................................. 4.207, 4.208
Manual control
switch to ................................................................. 4.41 N
return to.................................................................... 5.4
Marker ........................................................................ 4.241 NADC (IS54) ...............................................................4.209
center ................................................................... 4.123 Network operating system
coupled................................................................. 4.242 FTP.........................................................................1.53
delta ...........................................................4.110, 4.244 MICROSOFT NET ..................................................1.47
demodulation.......................................................... 4.93 NOVELL NETWARE ...............................................1.47
indication .................................................................. 3.5 TCP/IP ....................................................................1.52
info ......................................................................... 4.92 Noise power density measurement ...............................4.95
Marker ->.............................................................. 4.250 Normalization ..............................................................4.215
n-dB-down............................................................ 4.119 NT controller..................................................................1.23
normal .................................................................... 4.88 NTRansition register part...............................................5.19
peak ...........................................................4.116, 4.123 Number of sweeps ......................................................4.249
phase indication ................................................... 4.242 Numeric keypad ............................................................3.13
polar diagram ....................................................... 4.242 Numeric parameter, editing ...........................................3.16
search ........................................................4.115, 4.245 Numerical values (command) ........................................5.13
search limit .................................................4.119, 4.246 Nyquist filter ................................................................4.214
signal track ............................................................. 4.91
step size ............................................................... 4.109 O
zoom ...................................................................... 4.92
Max hold...........................................................4.141, 4.263 Offset frequency............................................................4.71
Mean .......................................................................... 4.249 Option
Mean power (GSM burst)............................................ 4.121 FSE-B5 - FFT Filter.................................................1.41
Measurement FSE-B8/9/10/11/12 - Tracking Generator ..............4.277
converters, connector ............................................. 8.21 FSE-B13 - 1 dB Attenuator .....................................2.86
curve FSE-B16 - Ethernet Adapter ...................................1.42
minimum-value averaging............................... 4.263 FSE-B17 - Second IEC/IEEEE-bus interface ..........1.38
peak-value averaging ..................................... 4.263 FSE-B70 - DSP and IQ Memory Extension .............1.54
digital demodulation.............................................. 4.216 OQPSK .......................................................................4.208
filter ...................................................................... 4.212 Output
frequency-converting ............................................ 4.287 AF ...........................................................................8.22
save ....................................................................... 4.50 buffer ......................................................................5.17
signal, phase ........................................................ 4.218 formats (digital demodulation) ...............................4.217
transmission ......................................................... 4.279 IF ............................................................................8.22
window ..................................................................... 4.3 level control...........................................................4.278
Measuring time ........................................................... 4.192 noise source control ................................................8.22
Memory reference.................................................................8.22
battery-powered ..................................................... 1.22 sweep .....................................................................8.22
configuration........................................................... 4.52 video out .................................................................8.22
size....................................................................... 4.231
Menu switching............................................................. 3.11 P
MICROSOFT NET ........................................................ 1.47
Min hold............................................................4.141, 4.263 Parallel poll ...................................................................5.32
Minimum Parallel poll enable register (PPE).................................5.22
search .................................................................. 4.116 Parameter
shift keying ........................................................... 4.207 block data ...............................................................5.14
value averaging .................................................... 4.263 boolean ...................................................................5.13
Mixer level .................................................................... 4.84 numerical values .....................................................5.13

1119.5063.12 10.4 E-1

FSIQ Index

string ...................................................................... 5.14 level offset.................................................... 4.78, 4.237

text ......................................................................... 5.14 line ............................................................. 4.127, 4.252
Password modulation ............................................................4.191
Service ................................................................... 4.33 position .................................................................4.239
Windows NT........................................................... 1.23 signal (digital demodulation)....................... 4.213, 4.217
Path.............................................................................. 4.52 value .......................................................... 4.191, 4.235
Pattern........................................................................ 4.274 value position............................................ 4.196, 4.239
name .................................................................... 4.275 value X/Y axis ............................................ 4.196, 4.237
selection ............................................................... 4.274 Remote control
PCS1900 .................................................................... 4.209 basics .......................................................................5.1
PDC............................................................................ 4.209 IEC-bus.....................................................................5.4
Peak ........................................................................... 4.248 indication.......................................................... 4.41, 5.3
excursion.............................................................. 4.117 RS-232-C..................................................................5.5
hold ...................................................................... 4.249 RSIB ................................................................ 5.6, 8.10
search .................................................................. 4.116 switch over................................................................5.3
Peak-value averaging ................................................. 4.263 Rename
Phase directory ..................................................................4.53
error...................................................................... 4.225 file ...........................................................................4.53
error (sum error) ................................................... 4.228 Reset device ...................................................................4.2
measurement ....................................................... 4.218 Resolution bandwidth ....................................... 4.153, 4.264
shift ...................................................................... 4.218 Result length ......................................... 4.200, 4.233, 4.265
shift keying ........................................................... 4.203 RF attenuation
wrap ..................................................................... 4.218 auto.........................................................................4.84
PHS............................................................................ 4.209 auto low distortion ...................................................4.84
PM signal.................................................................... 4.187 auto low noise.........................................................4.84
Point of decision ......................................................... 4.233 RF input ........................................................................4.83
highlighting ........................................................... 4.222 configuration .........................................................4.240
Points per symbol ....................................................... 4.233 Rho factor (sum error) .................................................4.230
Polar diagram ............................................................. 4.221 RJ45 (star topology) ......................................................1.43
marker .................................................................. 4.242 Rms value ...................................................................4.248
Power mean ............................................................... 4.121 display ..................................................................4.121
Power measurement Roll-key .........................................................................3.14
adjacent channel .................................................. 4.105 Roll-off factor...............................................................4.214
automatic optimisation of settings......................... 4.107 RS-232-C
bandwidth, occupied............................................. 4.106 interface ....................................................................8.6
channel................................................................. 4.101 transmission parameters ...........................................8.7
channel configuration ............................................. 4.96
signal/noise .......................................................... 4.103 S
PPE (parallel poll enable register)................................. 5.22
Preset ............................................................................. 4.2 Save
Pre-trigger................................................................... 4.172 configuration ...........................................................4.50
Print abort..................................................................... 4.42 data set ...................................................................4.54
Printer connection.................................................1.28, 8.20 limit line...................................................... 4.137, 4.260
Probe Code connector.................................................. 8.21 measurement ..........................................................4.50
Probe Power connector ................................................ 8.21 Scaling
PSK ..................................................................4.203, 4.208 AF output ..............................................................4.193
differential............................................................. 4.205 unit........................................................................4.239
PTRansition register part .............................................. 5.19 vertical ....................................................... 4.196, 4.237
SCPI introduction ............................................................5.9
Q Screen.............................................................................3.2
split screen................................................................3.9
QAM ........................................................................... 4.207 subdivision ................................................................3.3
QPSK ......................................................................... 4.208 Search
Quadrature amplitude modulation ............................... 4.207 limit .......................................................................4.119
Quadrature component ............................................... 4.221 minimum ...............................................................4.116
Quasi analog display .................................................. 4.146 peak......................................................................4.116
Query....................................................................5.12, 5.33 Self test.........................................................................4.15
Question mark ......................................................5.12, 5.14 Sensitivity AF output ...................................................4.193
Quotation mark ............................................................. 5.14 Serial poll ......................................................................5.32
Service functions...........................................................4.32
R Service request (SRQ) ......................................... 5.21, 5.32
indication.................................................................4.41
Rack installation ........................................................... 1.21 Service request enable register (SRE) ..........................5.21
Range...............................................................4.196, 4.237 Setup ............................................................................4.20
Real-time demodulation ....................................4.177, 4.192 general....................................................................4.34
Recall data set.............................................................. 4.58 Side band....................................................................4.184
Reference SINAD measurement ..................................................4.191
deviation.....................................................4.214, 4.227 Slope...........................................................................4.195
external .................................................................. 4.31 Softkey
filter ...................................................................... 4.212 50us......................................................................4.185
level..............................................................4.77, 4.235 750us ....................................................................4.185

1119.5063.12 10.5 E-1

Index FSIQ

75us ..................................................................... 4.185 COPY .......................................................... 4.53, 6.122

ACP STANDARD ...........................................4.98, 6.51 COPY (TRACE) ......................................... 4.142; 6.212
ACTIVE MKR / DELTA ....................4.116, 4.246, 4.250 COPY LIMIT LINE............................. 4.132, 4.256, 6.27
ACTIVE SCREEN A/B.............................................. 4.4 COPY SCREEN........................................... 4.45, 6.111
ADJACENT CHAN POWER ................4.105, 6.49, 6.50 COPY TABLE .............................................. 4.45, 6.112
ADJUST CP SETTING ...............................4.107, 6.186 COPY TRACE.............................................. 4.45, 6.112
ADJUST TO TRACE ............................................ 4.148 COUNTER RESOL ........................................ 4.95, 6.39
AF COUPL’G AC/DC..................................4.183, 6.145 COUPLED MARKER ................................... 4.242, 6.39
AF SIGNAL ................................................4.195, 6.213 COUPLING CONTROL .................................. 4.5, 6.119
ALL DELTA OFF .................................4.111, 4.244, 6.9 COUPLING DEFAULT .................... 4.155, 6.150, 6.188
ALL MARKER OFF .............................4.91, 4.243, 6.38 COUPLING RATIO ...............................................4.158
ALL SUM MKR OFF ..........................4.122, 4.249, 6.58 CP/ACP ABS/REL .................................... 4.102, 6.186
ALPHA/BT..................................................4.214, 6.166 DATA ENTRY FIELD ................................................4.8
AM..................................................................4.93, 6.44 DATA SET CLEAR ...................................... 4.56, 6.126
AM SIGNAL..................................................4.186, 6.18 DATA SET CLEAR ALL ............................... 4.56, 6.126
AM/FM DEEMPH .......................................4.185, 6.173 DATA SET LIST......................................................4.55
AMPERE ........................................................4.81, 6.61 DATAENTRY OPAQUE ............................................4.8
ANALOG DEMOD ......................................4.179, 6.118 DATAENTRY X.........................................................4.8
ANALOG TR ON/OFF ..................................4.146, 6.94 DATAENTRY Y.........................................................4.8
ANALYZER .........................................4.18, 4.66, 6.118 DATE ........................................................... 4.38, 6.208
APPEND NEW ...........................................4.149, 6.108 dB*/MHz......................................................... 4.80, 6.61
area........................................................................ 3.10 dBm ............................................................... 4.80, 6.61
ASCII CONFIG ...........................................4.148, 6.107 dBmV ............................................................. 4.80, 6.61
ASCII EXPORT ..........................................4.148, 6.126 dBµA.............................................................. 4.80, 6.61
ATT SWITCHES.............................................4.17, 6.84 dBµV.............................................................. 4.80, 6.61
ATTEN AUTO LOW DIST ............................4.84, 6.115 DECIM SEP ............................................... 4.149, 6.107
ATTEN AUTO LOW NOISE .........................4.84, 6.115 DEEMPHASIS ON/OFF ............................. 4.185, 6.173
ATTEN AUTO NORMAL ..............................4.84, 6.115 DEFAULT COLORS......................................... 4.7, 6.88
ATTEN STEP 1dB/10dB......................4.85, 4.87, 6.116 DEFAULT CONFIG...................................... 4.57, 6.130
AUTO 0.1 * RBW..........................................4.72, 6.175 DEFAULT POSITION................................................4.8
AUTO 0.1 * SPAN ........................................4.72, 6.175 DEFINE MACRO ....................................................4.64
AUTO 0.5 * RBW..........................................4.73, 6.175 DEFINE PAUSE......................................................4.64
AUTO 0.5 * SPAN ........................................4.73, 6.175 DELETE............................................ 4.53, 6.122, 6.125
AUTO X * RBW ............................................4.73, 6.175 DELETE FACTOR/SET .................... 4.23, 6.156, 6.158
AUTO X * SPAN...........................................4.73, 6.175 DELETE LIMIT LINE......................... 4.132, 4.256, 6.28
AUTO RECALL ............................................4.59, 6.123 DELETE MACRO....................................................4.65
AUTO SELECT ..........................................4.145, 6.162 DELETE PATTERN ..............................................4.274
AVERAGE.............................. 4.140, 4.262, 6.93, 6.148 DELETE VALUE (limit line) ........................ 4.136, 4.260
AVERAGE ON/OFF .....................................4.122, 6.58 DELTA 1 to 4 ................................. 4.110, 6.8, 6.9, 6.10
AVERAGE/HOLD ON......................4.190, 4.249, 6.182 DELTA 1/2 ............................................................4.244
BASELINE CLIPPING ..................................4.128, 6.15 DELTA ABS REL ................................ 4.111,4.244, 6.9
BLANK ..............................................4.139, 4.261, 6.94 DELTA TO STEPSIZE ..........................................4.109
BRIGHTNESS ................................................. 4.6, 6.88 DEMOD BANDWIDTH .................... 4.179, 4.180; 6.151
C/N......................................................4.103, 6.49, 6.50 DETECTOR ..........................................................4.145
C/No....................................................4.103, 6.49, 6.50 DETECTOR AUTOPEAK........................... 4.145, 6.162
CAL CORR ON/OFF ......................................4.11, 6.63 DETECTOR AVERAGE ............................. 4.146, 6.162
CAL I/Q ..........................................................4.10, 6.62 DETECTOR MAX PEAK ............................ 4.145, 6.162
CAL LO SUPP................................................4.10, 6.63 DETECTOR MIN PEAK ............................. 4.145, 6.162
CAL LOG........................................................4.10, 6.63 DETECTOR RMS ...................................... 4.146, 6.162
CAL REFL OPEN .......................................4.285, 6.153 DETECTOR SAMPLE................................ 4.146, 6.162
CAL REFL SHORT.....................................4.285, 6.153 DIGITAL DEMOD.......4.208, 6.118, 6.164, 6.165, 6.170
CAL RES BW .................................................4.10, 6.62 DIGITAL STANDARD ................................ 4.209, 6.170
CAL RESULTS....................................................... 4.12 DISABLE ALL ITEMS ......................... 4.57, 4.61, 6.130
CAL SHORT...................................................4.10, 6.63 DISPLAY COMMENT ...................................... 4.7, 6.89
CAL TOTAL....................................................4.10, 6.62 DISPLAY LINE 1/2............................ 4.127, 4.252, 6.14
CENTER FIXED .............. 4.68, 4.69, 4.75, 6.176, 6.177 D-LINES................................................................4.252
CENTER MANUAL.......................................4.70, 6.174 EDIT ACP LIMITS............................... 4.100, 6.33, 6.34
CH FILTER ON/OFF ......................................4.99, 6.51 EDIT COMMENT ......................................... 4.55, 6.130
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH..............................4.99, 6.185 EDIT LIMIT LINE..................... 4.134, 4.258, 6.22, 6.23,
CHANNEL POWER.............................4.101, 6.49, 6.50 .................................................... 6.24, 6.25, 6.26, 6.27
CHANNEL SPACING ........................4.99, 6.184, 6.185 EDIT NAME ............................. 4.55, 4.59, 6.123, 6.125
CLEAR ALL MESSAGES ....................................... 4.16 EDIT PATH ...........4.52, 4.55, 4.59, 4.149, 6.121, 6.124
CLEAR MESSAGE.......................................4.16, 6.209 EDIT SYNC PATTERN .............................. 4.275, 6.168
CLEAR/WRITE..................................4.139, 4.261, 6.93 EDIT TRD FACTOR..................................... 4.24, 6.155
COLOR ON/ OFF .........................................4.45, 6.110 EDIT TRD SET ............................................ 4.27, 6.157
COM PORT 1/2 .................................4.36, 6.206, 6.207 ENABLE ALL ITEMS .......................... 4.57, 4.61, 6.130
COMMENT (SYNC PATTERN) ..................4.275, 6.168 ENABLE DEV1 / DEV2 ...........................................4.49
COMMENT SCREEN A/B ............................4.47, 6.112 ENABLE OPTION ...................................................4.31
CONFIG ............................................................... 4.148 ENTER PASSWORD................................... 4.33, 6.209
CONFIG DISPLAY ................................................... 4.6 ENTER TEXT .........................................................4.47
CONTINUOUS SWEEP ....... 4.162, 4.199, 4.265, 6.114 ERROR SIGNAL.......................................... 4.225, 6.18
CONTINUOUS WRITE.................................4.262, 6.93

1119.5063.12 10.6 E-1

FSIQ Index

ERROR VECT MAGNITUDE........................4.226, 6.18 LOCK DATA ...........................................................3.19

EXCLUDE LO ON/OFF ................................4.117, 6.39 LOG MANUAL ...................................... 4.82, 6.91, 6.93
EXECUTE TESTS........................................... 4.15, 6.6 LOG 10dB/20dB/50dB/100dB/120dB ......................4.82
EXT ALC ....................................................4.289, 6.193 LOGO ON/OFF ................................................ 4.7, 6.87
EXT AM......................................................4.289, 6.193 LOW PASS AF FILTER ............................. 4.182, 6.172
EXT FM ......................................................4.289, 6.193 LOWER LEFT .............................................. 4.46, 6.113
EXT I/Q ......................................................4.290, 6.193 LOWER RIGHT............................................ 4.46, 6.113
EXT REF FREQUENCY...............................4.31, 6.187 MACRO 1 to 7.........................................................4.63
EXTERN ............................... 4.161, 4.194, 4.267 6.213 MACRO TITLE........................................................4.65
EYE DIAG [FREQ] .......................................4.223, 6.19 MAGNITUDE ......................... 4.218, 4.222,4.225, 6.19
EYE DIAG [I] ................................................4.219, 6.19 MAGNITUDE CAP BUFFER ........................ 4.21, 76.18
EYE DIAG [Q] ..............................................4.219, 6.19 MAIN PLL BANDWIDTH ............................ 4.157, 6.151
EYE DIAG TRELLIS.....................................4.219, 6.19 MAKE DIRECTORY..................................... 4.53, 6.124
EYE LENGTH....................................4.220, 4.223, 6.95 MARKER 1 to 4................. 4.89, 4.241, 6.37, 6.38, 6.39
FIND BURST ON/OFF ...............................4.268, 6.167 MARKER DEMOD ..................................................4.93
FIND SYNC ON/OFF..................................4.269, 6.168 MARKER INFO ................ 4.92, 4.243, 6.13, 6.43, 6.44,
FIRMWARE UPDATE ............................................ 4.40 ................................. 6.46, 6.49, 6.50, 6.52, 6.53, 6.54,
FIRMWARE VERSION.................................... 4.13, 6.5 .................................................... 6.55, 6.56, 6.57, 6.89
FM..................................................................4.93, 6.44 MARKER ZOOM............................................ 4.92, 6.44
FM SIGNAL..................................................4.187, 6.18 MAX |PEAK|.....................4.246, 4.248, 6.10, 6.40, 6.52
FORMAT DISK.............................................4.53, 6.123 MAX HOLD ............................ 4.141, 4.263, 6.93, 6.148
FRAME LENGTH .......................................4.232, 6.169 MAX LEVEL AUTO ........................................ 4.78, 6.92
FREE RUN........................... 4.160, 4.194, 4.266, 6.213 MAX LEVEL MANUAL ................................... 4.78, 6.92
FREQ AXIS LIN/LOG .....................................4.68, 6.91 MEAN ............................................... 4.121, 4.249, 6.57
FREQUENCY ..............................................4.225, 6.19 MEAS FILTER ........................................... 4.212, 6.166
FREQUENCY (FSK demodulation)...............4.223, 6.19 MEAS ONLY IF SYNC’D............................ 4.267, 6.169
FREQUENCY (MSK demodulation)..............4.218, 6.19 MEAS RESULT.......................................... 4.186, 4.216
FREQUENCY LINE 1/2 ................................4.127, 6.16 MEAS SIGNAL ............................................ 4.217, 6.18
FREQUENCY OFFSET.......... 4.71, 4.234, 4.287, 6.177 MEAS→REF .............................................. 4.191, 6.183
FREQUENCY ON/OFF ................................... 4.7, 6.87 MEMORY SIZE.......................................... 4.231, 6.170
FSE MODE ON/OFF ....................................4.40, 6.209 MIN .......................................... 4.116, 4.246, 6.11, 6.41
FSK REF DEVIATION..................................4.214, 6.19 MIN HOLD ............................ 4.141, 4.263, 6.93,. 6.148
FULL PAGE .................................................4.46, 6.113 MIXER LEVEL ............................................. 4.84, 6.117
FULL SCREEN................................................ 4.4, 6.87 MKR -> CENTER ......................................... 4.123, 6.58
FULL SPAN..................................................4.74, 6.176 MKR -> CF STEPSIZE................................. 4.124, 6.58
GAP LENGTH ............................................4.173, 6.191 MKR -> REF LEVEL .................................... 4.124, 6.59
GAP SWEEP ON/OFF ...............................4.171, 6.190 MKR -> START............................................ 4.124, 6.59
GAP SWEEP SETTINGS ..................................... 4.172 MKR -> STOP.............................................. 4.124, 6.59
GATE ADJUST..................................................... 4.168 MKR ->TRACE .......................... 4.124, 4.250, 6.9, 6.38
GATE DELAY.............................................4.167, 6.190 MKR DEMOD ON/OFF .................................. 4.93, 6.45
GATE EXTERN ..........................................4.167, 6.190 MKR STOP TIME........................................... 4.93, 6.45
GATE LENGTH ..........................................4.167, 6.190 MKR TO STEPSIZE..................................... 4.109, 6.59
GATE LEVEL .............................................4.166, 6.189 MODE COUPLED.......................................... 4.5, 6.119
GATE MODE LEVEL/EDGE.......................4.166, 6.189 MODULATION ......................................................4.288
GATE ON / OFF .........................................4.165, 6.189 MODULATION PARAMETERS.................. 4.181, 4.211
GATE POL .................................................4.166, 6.190 MODULATION SUMMARY 4.188, 6.18, 6.46, 6.47, 6.48
GATE RF POWER .....................................4.167, 6.190 MONITOR CONNECTED........................................4.39
GATE SETTINGS................................................. 4.166 MOVE ZOOM START .................................... 4.76, 6.90
GENERAL SETUP ................................................. 4.34 MOVE ZOOM STOP...................................... 4.76, 6.90
GPIB ADDRESS ..........................................4.34, 6.205 MOVE ZOOM WINDOW ................................ 4.76, 6.90
GRID ABS/REL .....................................4.78, 4.82, 6.91 N dB DOWN ................................................ 4.119, 6.43
HARDCOPY DEVICE...................................4.48, 6.110 NAME (limit line) ............................... 4.135, 4.259, 6.28
HARDWARE+OPTIONS ................................. 4.14, 6.5 NAME (SYNC PATTERN).......................... 4.275; 6.168
HEADER ON/OFF ......................................4.149, 6.108 NEW FACT/SET ..................... 4.24, 4.27, 6.154, 6.156
HIGHPASS AF FILTER ..............................4.182, 6.171 NEW LIMIT LINE ....................................... 4.134, 4.258
HOLD CONT ON/OFF ..................................4.142, 6.94 NEW SYNC PATTERN .............................. 4.275, 6.168
HORIZONTAL SCALING................................4.5, 6.119 NEXT MIN........................................... 4.117, 6.11, 6.41
IF BANDWIDTH ................................................... 4.180 NEXT MIN LEFT ................................. 4.117, 6.11, 6.41
IF BW AUTO ...................................4.180, 4.264, 6.150 NEXT MIN RIGHT............................... 4.117, 6.11, 6.41
IF BW MANUAL ..............................4.180, 4.264, 6.149 NEXT PEAK........................................ 4.116, 6.10, 6.40
INDICATION ABS REL...............................4.191, 6.182 NEXT PEAK LEFT .............................. 4.116, 6.11, 6.40
INPUT CAL ....................................................4.32, 6.84 NEXT PEAK RIGHT............................ 4.116, 6.10, 6.40
INPUT RF.......................................................4.32, 6.84 NOISE ........................................................... 4.95, 6.44
INSERT VALUE (limit line) .........................4.136, 4.260 NOISE SOURCE ........................................... 4.32, 6.84
KEY CLICK ON/OFF .............................................. 4.39 NORMALIZE ................................... 4.215, 4.281, 6.167
LAST SPAN ........................................................... 4.75 OCCUPIED PWR BANDW ................. 4.106, 6.49, 6.50
LIMIT CHECK............................. 4.100, 6.32, 6.33, 6.34 OPTIONS................................................ 4.14, 4.31, 6.5
LINE (trigger)..............................................4.160, 6.213 PEAK ....................................... 4.116, 4.246, 6.10, 6.40
LINEAR/% ......................................................4.82, 6.93 +PEAK ......................................................... 4.248, 6.53
LINEAR/dB.....................................................4.82, 6.93 ±PEAK ......................................................... 4.248, 6.55
LOCK ALL .............................................................. 3.19 -PEAK.......................................................... 4.248, 6.54

1119.5063.12 10.7 E-1

Index FSIQ

PEAK EXCURSION .....................................4.117, 6.42 SELECT OBJECT.....................................................4.6

PEAK HOLD ON/OFF .......................4.122, 4.249, 6.58 SELECT PATTERN ..............................................4.274
PHASE .............................................4.218, 4.225, 6.19 SELECT QUADRANT .............................................4.46
PHASE NOISE .............................................4.113, 6.12 SELFTEST....................................................... 4.15, 6.6
PHASE WRAP ON/OFF ...............................4.218, 6.19 SENSITIV AF OUTPUT .................. 4.193, 4.197, 6.132
PM SIGNAL..................................................4.187, 6.18 SERVICE ....................................................... 4.32, 6.84
POINTS PER SYMBOL..............................4.233, 6.166 SET CP REFERENCE ............................... 4.102, 6.186
POLAR [IQ] CONSTELL....................4.221, 4.226, 6.19 SET NO. OF ADJ CHAN’S........................... 4.97, 6.185
POLAR [IQ] VECTOR........................4.221, 4.226, 6.19 SET REFERENCE..................................... 4.191, 6.182
POLAR MARKER DEG/ RAD.......................4.242, 6.61 SETTINGS DEVICE 1/2............................... 4.48, 6.110
POLAR MARKER R/I / MA/PH .....................4.242, 6.42 SGL SWEEP DISP OFF ............................ 4.163, 6.114
% POWER BANDWIDTH ...........................4.100, 6.186 SHAPE FACT 60/3dB .................................. 4.120, 6.45
POWER MEAS SETTINGS.................................... 4.97 SHAPE FACT 60/6dB ................................... 4.120,6.45
POWER OFFSET................................................. 4.278 SHIFT X LIMIT LINE ......................... 4.137, 4.260, 6.23
PRE DISPL ON/OFF ..................................4.185, 6.173 SHIFT Y LIMIT LINE ................ 4.137, 4.260, 6.25, 6.26
PRE TRIGGER (gap sweep) ......................4.172, 6.191 SIDE BAND NORM / INV..... 4.184, 4.212, 6.146, 6.164
PREDEFINED COLORS ................................. 4.7, 6.88 SIGNAL COUNT ................................... 4.94, 6.38, 6.39
PRESEL PEAK ..............................................4.11, 6.63 SIGNAL TRACK............................................. 4.91, 6.46
PROBE CODE ON/OFF ...............................4.81, 6.216 SINAD 1 kHz ON.......................................... 4.191, 6.48
RANGE ......................................................4.196, 4.237 SINGLE SWEEP.................. 4.162, 4.199, 4.265, 6.114
RBW / VBW MANUAL................................4.159, 6.151 SLOPE POS/NEG................ 4.161, 4.195, 4.267, 6.214
RBW / VBW NOISE....................................4.159, 6.151 SORT MODE ..........................................................4.53
RBW / VBW PULSE ...................................4.159, 6.151 SOURCE CAL.......................................................4.279
RBW / VBW SINE [1] .................................4.158, 6.151 SOURCE ON/OFF ..................................... 4.278, 6.131
RBW <= NORM/FFT ..................................4.156, 6.150 SOURCE POWER ..................................... 4.278, 6.193
RBW 1kHz ANA/DIG ..................................4.155, 6.150 SPAN / RBW AUTO [50] ............................ 4.159, 6.150
REAL TIME ON/OFF ..................................4.192, 6.146 SPAN / RBW MANUAL.............................. 4.159, 6.150
REAL/IMAG PART ............................4.218, 4.225, 6.19 SPAN FIXED ........4.67, 4.69, 4.71, 6.174, 6.176, 6.177
RECORD ON/OFF ................................................. 4.64 SPAN MANUAL ........................................... 4.74, 6.175
REF LEVEL.........................................4.78, 4.236, 6.91 SPLIT SCREEN ............................................... 4.4, 6.87
REF LEVEL OFFSET ..........................4.78, 4.237, 6.92 SQUELCH LEVEL ..................................... 4.184, 6.146
REF POINT FREQUENCY ...........................4.112, 6.12 SQUELCH ON ........................................... 4.184, 6.145
REF POINT LEVEL ......................................4.112, 6.12 START FIXED ......4.69, 4.71, 4.75, 6.174, 6.176, 6.177
REF POINT LVL OFFSET............................4.112, 6.12 START MANUAL ......................................... 4.67, 6.176
REF POINT TIME.........................................4.112, 6.12 STATISTICS .................................................. 4.17, 6.85
REF VALUE ......................................................... 4.283 STEPSIZE = CENTER............................................4.73
REF VALUE POSITION ......... 4.196, 4.239, 4.282, 6.93 STEPSIZE AUTO.................................. 3.20, 6.13, 6.42
REF VALUE X AXIS.....................................4.237, 6.89 STEPSIZE MANUAL.................. 4.73, 6.13, 6.42, 6.175
REF VALUE Y AXIS..........................4.196, 4.237, 6.92 STOP FIXED ...................4.67, 4.71, 4.75, 6.174, 6.176
REFERENCE ...............................................4.33, 6.187 STOP MANUAL ........................................... 4.69, 6.176
REFERENCE FILTER ................................4.212, 6.166 SUM MKR......................................... 4.120, 4.247, 6.51
REFERENCE FIXED....................................4.111, 6.12 SUMMARY MARKER ................................ 4.121, 4.247
REFERENCE INT/EXT.................................4.31, 6.187 SUMMARY MEAS TIME ............................ 4.192, 6.183
REFERENCE LINE ...........................4.127, 4.252, 6.16 SUMMARY SETTINGS.........................................4.190
REFERENCE POINT ...................................4.112, 6.12 SWEEP.................................................................4.199
REFERENCE PROG....................................4.33, 6.187 SWEEP COUNT .......4.122, 4.141, 4.163, 4.190, 4.200,
REFERENCE SIGNAL .................................4.217, 6.18 ............................................ 4.249, 4.262, 4.265, 6.188
REL UNIT..........................................4.190, 6.61, 6.182 SWEEP TIME ............................................ 4.200, 6.189
RENAME......................................................4.53, 6.124 SWEEP TIME AUTO ................................. 4.154, 6.188
RES BW AUTO ..........................................4.153, 6.150 SWEEP TIME MANUAL ............................ 4.155, 6.188
RES BW MANUAL .....................................4.153, 6.149 SYMB TABLE / ERRORS ............................ 4.227, 6.18
RESTORE.............................................................. 4.40 SYMBOL DISPLAY...................................... 4.222, 6.94
RESULT LENGTH................ 4.200, 4.233, 4.265, 6.165 SYMBOL RATE ......................................... 4.211, 6.165
RF ATTEN MANUAL ....................................4.83, 6.115 SYNC OFFSET.......................................... 4.270, 6.167
RF INPUT 50 OHM.......................................4.85, 6.116 SYNC PATTERN ..................................................4.274
RF INPUT 75 OHM/RAM..............................4.85, 6.117 SYSTEM MESSAGES ................................. 4.16, 6.209
RF INPUT 75 OHM/RAZ ..............................4.85, 6.117 T1-REF ........................................................ 4.147, 6.60
RF POWER (trigger)...................................4.161, 6.213 T1-T2+REF .................................................. 4.147, 6.60
RMS ..................................................4.121, 4.248, 6.56 T1-T3+REF .................................................. 4.147, 6.60
SATURATION ................................................. 4.7, 6.88 THRESHOLD LINE .................. 4.127, 4.252, 6.15, 6.16
SAVE LIMIT LINE.......................................4.137, 4.260 TIME ................................................................ 4.7, 6.89
SAVE PATTERN .................................................. 4.276 TIME LINE 1/2 ........................... 4.7, 4.127, 4.252, 6.17
SCALE UNIT ..............................................4.198, 4.239 TIME ON/OFF............................................. 4.38, 6.210
SCR. SAVER .................................................. 4.7, 6.95 TINT................................................................. 4.7, 6.88
SCR. SAVER TIME ......................................... 4.7, 6.95 TITLE........................................................... 4.47, 6.111
SCREEN COUPLING............................................... 4.5 TRACE MATH.......................................................4.147
SCREENS UNCOUPLED...............................4.5, 6.119 TRACE MATH OFF ..................................... 4.148, 6.60
SEARCH LIMIT ON/OFF...................4.119, 4.246, 6.38 TRACKING GENERATOR ..... 4.18, 4.278, 6.118, 6.131
SELECT ITEMS ............ 4.57, 4.61, 6.127, 6.128, 6.129 TRANSD SET NAME ................................... 4.28, 6.156
SELECT LIMIT LINE ................ 4.130, 4.254, 6.21, 6.28 TRANSD SET RANGES .............................. 4.29, 6.157
SELECT MACRO ................................................... 4.65 TRANSD SET UNIT ..................................... 4.28, 6.157
SELECT MARKER .....................................4.116, 4.246 TRANSDUCER FACTOR............................. 4.22, 6.155

1119.5063.12 10.8 E-1

FSIQ Index

TRANSDUCER SET..........................4.22, 6.156, 6.158 STB.........................................................................5.21

TRC COLOR AUTO INC ..............................4.45, 6.113 structure..................................................................5.18
TRD FACTOR NAME ...................................4.25, 6.155 sum bit ....................................................................5.19
TRD FACTOR UNIT .....................................4.25, 6.154 Status reporting system.................................................5.18
TRD FACTOR VALUES ...............................4.26, 6.155 resetting values.......................................................5.34
TRG TO GAP TIME....................................4.173, 6.191 Status information
TRIGGER............................................................. 4.194 DIFOVL.....................................................................3.4
TRIGGER DELAY ......................................4.161, 6.214 ExtRef.......................................................................3.4
TRIGGER LEVEL (gap sweep) ..................4.172, 6.213 IFOVLD.....................................................................3.4
TRIGGER OFFSET ....................................4.195, 4.267 LO LvD......................................................................3.4
UNIT.............................................................4.79, 6.216 LO Lvl .......................................................................3.4
UNLOCK ................................................................ 3.19 LO unl .......................................................................3.4
UPDATE................................................................. 4.40 OCXO .......................................................................3.4
UPDATE MESSAGES............................................ 4.16 OVLD........................................................................3.4
UPPER LEFT ...............................................4.46, 6.113 UNCAL......................................................................3.4
UPPER RIGHT.............................................4.46, 6.113 STB (status byte) ..........................................................5.21
USER PORT A/B...............................4.35, 6.116, 6.131 Step size
VALUE (SYNC PATTERN).........................4.276, 6.168 center frequency .....................................................4.72
VALUES (limit line)............................4.136, 4.260, 6.25 delta marker ..........................................................4.114
VECTOR ANALYZER........................4.19, 4.175, 6.118 marker...................................................................4.109
VERTICAL SCALING .....................................4.5, 6.119 setting .....................................................................3.20
VIDEO .................................. 4.160, 4.194, 4.266, 6.214 Stop frequency ..............................................................4.69
VIDEO BW AUTO ......................................4.154, 6.151 String ............................................................................5.14
VIDEO BW MANUAL .................................4.154, 6.151 Suffix.............................................................................5.11
VIEW.................................................4.139, 4.261, 6.93 Sum bit..........................................................................5.19
VOLT..............................................................4.81, 6.61 Sum level ....................................................................4.235
VOLUME ................................ 4.93, 4.193, 4.197, 6.210 Summary, numeric measured values ..........................4.190
WATT.............................................................4.81, 6.61 Summary Marker.........................................................4.247
WEIGHTING AF FILTER............................4.182, 6.172 Sweep
X OFFSET.........................................4.132, 4.256, 6.23 continuous ................................................. 4.199, 4.265
X UNIT SYMBOL.................................................... 6.61 count.................................... 4.141, 4.163, 4.249, 4.262
Y OFFSET................................ 4.132, 4.256, 6.24, 6.26 coupling ................................................................4.152
Y PER DIV ........................................4.196, 4.237, 6.93 gap........................................................................4.170
Y UNIT DBM ................................................4.239, 6.61 gap length .............................................................4.173
Y UNIT DEG.................................................4.239, 6.61 gated.....................................................................4.164
Y UNIT LINEAR............................................4.239, 6.61 mode.....................................................................4.162
Y UNIT LOG(dB) ..........................................4.239, 6.61 number....................................................... 4.190, 4.200
Y UNIT VOLT ...............................................4.239, 6.61 single .............................................. 4.162, 4.199, 4.265
Y UNIT WATT ..............................................4.239, 6.61 time............................................................ 4.154, 4.200
ZERO SPAN ................................................4.74, 6.175 Switching operations .....................................................4.17
ZOOM ............................................................4.76, 6.90 Symbol
ZOOM OFF ....................................................4.76, 6.90 decision points ......................................................4.222
Span............................................................................. 4.74 mapping ................................................................4.203
measurement window............................................. 4.67 rate .......................................................................4.211
Special characters .......................................................... 6.2 table......................................................................4.227
Split Screen ............................................................. 3.9, 4.4 Sync
Squelch ...................................................................... 4.184 offset.....................................................................4.270
SRE (service request enable register) .......................... 5.21 pattern...................................................................4.274
SRQ (service request) ..........................................5.21, 5.32 search...................................................................4.269
Start frequency ............................................................. 4.67 Synchronization sequence ..........................................4.269
Start-Up ........................................................................ 1.20 Syntax elements, command ..........................................5.14
Status byte (STB) ......................................................... 5.21 System messages.........................................................4.16
Status information........................................................... 3.4
Status register T
CONDition part ....................................................... 5.19
ENABle part ........................................................... 5.19 Table entry ....................................................................3.18
ESE........................................................................ 5.22 TCP/IP operation...........................................................1.52
ESR........................................................................ 5.22 Test, functional..............................................................1.22
EVENt part ............................................................. 5.19 TETRA ........................................................................4.209
NTRansition part .................................................... 5.19 Text parameter..............................................................5.14
overview ................................................................. 5.20 TFTS...........................................................................4.209
PPE........................................................................ 5.22 Thick Ethernet ...............................................................1.43
PTRansition part..................................................... 5.19 Thin Ethernet.................................................................1.42
SRE........................................................................ 5.21 Threshold line..............................................................4.252
STATus:OPERation ............................................... 5.23 Time, input ....................................................................4.38
STATus:QUEStionable........................................... 5.24 Time lines....................................................................4.252
FREQuency ..................................................... 5.26 Time signal
LIMit ................................................................. 5.27 AM-demodulated...................................................4.186
LMARgin .......................................................... 5.28 FM-demodulated ...................................................4.187
POWer ............................................................. 5.29 PM-demodulated...................................................4.187
SYNC............................................................... 5.30 Trace...........................................................................4.138
TRANsducer..................................................... 5.31

1119.5063.12 10.9 E-1

Index FSIQ

copy ..................................................................... 4.142

detector ................................................................ 4.143
export ................................................................... 4.148
mathematics ......................................................... 4.147
Transducer ................................................................... 4.20
entry ....................................................................... 4.23
set .......................................................................... 4.27
switch on ................................................................ 4.21
Transmission measurement........................................ 4.279
Transmission parameters, RS-232-C.............................. 8.7
Trellis diagram ............................................................ 4.219
Trigger ........................................................................ 4.266
AF signal .............................................................. 4.195
delay ..........................................................4.161, 4.267
edge, pos./neg............................................4.195, 4.267
external ......................................................4.194, 4.267
free running .....................................4.160, 4.194, 4.266
gap sweep............................................................ 4.172
line ....................................................................... 4.160
offset ..........................................................4.195, 4.267
pre-trigger............................................................. 4.172
RF power.............................................................. 4.161
slope ..........................................................4.161, 4.195
threshold .............................................................. 4.266
video ..........................................................4.160, 4.266
video voltage ........................................................ 4.194

U
Unit.....................................................................4.79, 4.239
circle..................................................................... 4.215
relative display...................................................... 4.190
Y-axis ................................................................... 4.198
Universal command ........................................................ 8.5
Upper case ..................................................................... 6.2
User interface ............................................................... 8.19
User port configuration ................................................. 4.35

V
Vector analyzer mode .........................................4.19, 4.174
Vector diagram ........................................................... 4.221
Vector error (sum error) .............................................. 4.228
Video bandwidth ......................................................... 4.154
Video trigger ............................................................... 4.266
View ........................................................................... 4.139
Volume ...............................................................4.93, 4.193

W
WCPE ........................................................................ 4.209
Weighting filter............................................................ 4.182
White space.................................................................. 5.14
Windows NT ................................................................. 1.23
administrator........................................................... 1.23
login ....................................................................... 1.23
password................................................................ 1.23

Z
Zero span ..................................................................... 4.74
Zoom ..................................................................4.76, 4.139
amplitude.............................................................. 4.139

1119.5063.12 10.10 E-1